The Project Gutenberg EBook of Encyclopaedia Britannica, 11th Edition,
Volume 4, Part 3, by Various

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org


Title: Encyclopaedia Britannica, 11th Edition, Volume 4, Part 3
       "Brescia" to "Bulgaria"

Author: Various

Release Date: April 13, 2007 [EBook #19699]

Language: English

Character set encoding: ASCII

*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ENCYCLOPAEDIA BRITANNICA ***




Produced by Don Kretz, Juliet Sutherland, Keith Edkins and
the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at
http://www.pgdp.net





Transcriber's note: A few typographical errors have been corrected: they
are listed at the end of the text. Volume and page numbers have been
incorporated into the text of each page as: v.04 p.0001.

[v.04 p.0498] BREQUIGNY, LOUIS GEORGE OUDARD FEUDRIX DE (_continued from
part 2_)

... volumes x.-xiv., the preface to vol. xi. containing important
researches into the French communes. To the _Table chronologique des
diplomes, chartes, lettres, et actes imprimes concernant l'histoire de
France_ he contributed three volumes in collaboration with Mouchet
(1769-1783). Charged with the supervision of a large collection of
documents bearing on French history, analogous to Rymer's _Foedera_, he
published the first volume (_Diplomatat. Chartae_, &c., 1791). The
Revolution interrupted him in his collection of _Memoires concernant
l'histoire, les sciences, les lettres, et les arts des Chinois_, begun in
1776 at the instance of the minister Bertin, when fifteen volumes had
appeared.

See the note on Brequigny at the end of vol. i. of the _Memoires de
l'Academie des Inscriptions_ (1808); the Introduction to vol. iv. of the
_Table chronologique des diplomes_ (1836); Champollion-Figeac's preface to
the _Lettres des rois et reines_; the _Comite des travaux historiques_, by
X. Charmes, vol. i. _passim_; N. Oursel, _Nouvelle biographie normande_
(1886); and the _Catalogue des manuscrits des collections Duchesne et
Brequigny_ (in the Bibliotheque Nationale), by Rene Poupardin (1905).

(C. B.*)

BRESCIA (anc. _Brixia_), a city and episcopal see of Lombardy, Italy, the
capital of the province of Brescia, finely situated at the foot of the
Alps, 52 m. E. of Milan and 40 m. W. of Verona by rail. Pop. (1901) town,
42,495; commune, 72,731. The plan of the city is rectangular, and the
streets intersect at right angles, a peculiarity handed down from Roman
times, though the area enclosed by the medieval walls is larger than that
of the Roman town, which occupied the eastern portion of the present one.
The Piazza del Museo marks the site of the forum, and the museum on its
north side is ensconced in a Corinthian temple with three _cellae_, by some
attributed to Hercules, but more probably the Capitolium of the city,
erected by Vespasian in A.D. 73 (if the inscription really belongs to the
building; cf. Th. Mommsen in _Corp. Inscrip. Lat._ v. No. 4312, Berlin,
1872), and excavated in 1823. It contains a famous bronze statue of
Victory, found in 1826. Scanty remains of a building on the south side of
the forum, called the _curia_, but which may be a basilica, and of the
theatre, on the east of the temple, still exist.

Brescia contains many interesting medieval buildings. The castle, at the
north-east angle of the town, commands a fine view. It is now a military
prison. The old cathedral is a round domed structure of the 10th (?)
century erected over an early Christian basilica, which has forty-two
ancient columns; and the Broletto, adjoining the new cathedral (a building
of 1604) on the north, is a massive building of the 12th and 13th centuries
(the original town hall, now the prefecture and law courts), with a lofty
tower. There are also remains of the convent of S. Salvatore, founded by
Desiderius, king of Lombardy, including three churches, two of which now
contain the fine medieval museum, which possesses good ivories. The church
of S. Francesco has a Gothic facade and cloisters. There are also some good
Renaissance palaces and other buildings, including the Municipio, begun in
1492 and completed by Jacopo Sansovino in 1554-1574. This is a magnificent
structure, with fine ornamentation. The church of S. Maria dei Miracoli
(1488-1523) is also noteworthy for its general effect and for the richness
of its details, especially of the reliefs on the facade. Many other
churches, and the picture gallery (Galleria Martinengo), contain fine works
of the painters of the Brescian school, Alessandro Bonvicino (generally
known as Moretto), Girolamo Romanino and Moretto's pupil, Giovanni Battista
Moroni. The Biblioteca Queriniana contains early MSS., a 14th-century MS.
of Dante, &c., and some rare incunabula. The city is well supplied with
water, and has no less than seventy-two public fountains. Brescia has
considerable factories of iron ware, particularly fire-arms and weapons
(one of the government small arms factories being situated here), also of
woollens, linens and silks, matches, candles, &c. The stone quarries of
Mazzano, 8 m. east of Brescia, supplied material for the monument to Victor
Emmanuel II. and other buildings in Rome. Brescia is situated on the main
railway line between Milan and Verona, and has branch railways to Iseo,
Parma, Cremona and (via Rovato) to Bergamo, and steam tramways to Mantua,
Soncino, Ponte Toscolano and Cardone Valtrompia.

The ancient Celtic Brixia, a town of the Cenomani, became Roman in 225
B.C., when the Cenomani submitted to Rome. Augustus founded a civil (not a
military) colony here in 27 B.C., and he and Tiberius constructed an
aqueduct to supply it. In 452 it was plundered by Attila, but was the seat
of a duchy in the Lombard period. From 1167 it was one of the most active
members of the Lombard League. In 1258 it fell into the hands of Eccelino
of Verona, and belonged to the Scaligers (della Scala) until 1421, when it
came under the Visconti of Milan, and in 1426 under Venice. Early in the
16th century it was one of the wealthiest cities of Lombardy, but has never
recovered from its sack by the French under Gaston de Foix in 1512. It
belonged to Venice until 1797, when it came under Austrian dominion; it
revolted in 1848, and again in 1849, being the only Lombard town to rally
to Charles Albert in the latter year, but was taken after ten days'
obstinate street fighting by the Austrians under Haynau.

See _Museo Bresciano Illustrato_ (Brescia, 1838).

(T. AS.)

BRESLAU (Polish _Wraclaw_), a city of Germany, capital of the Prussian
province of Silesia, and an episcopal see, situated in a wide and fertile
plain on both banks of the navigable Oder, 350 m. from its mouth, at the
influx of the Ohle, and 202 m. from Berlin on the railway to Vienna. Pop.
(1867) 171,926; (1880) 272,912; (1885) 299,640; (1890) 335,186; (1905)
470,751, about 60% being Protestants, 35% Roman Catholics and nearly 5%
Jews. The Oder, which here breaks into several arms, divides the city into
two unequal halves, crossed by numerous bridges. The larger portion, on the
left bank, includes the old or inner town, surrounded by beautiful
promenades, on the site of the ramparts, dismantled after 1813, from an
eminence within which, the Liebichs Hoehe, a fine view is obtained of the
surrounding country. Outside, as well as across the Oder, lies the new town
with extensive suburbs, containing, especially in the Schweidnitz quarter
in the south, and the Oder quarter in the north, many handsome streets and
spacious squares. The inner town, in contrast to the suburbs, still retains
with its narrow streets much of its ancient characters, and contains
several medieval buildings, both religious and secular, of great beauty and
interest. The cathedral, dedicated to St John the Baptist, was begun in
1148 and completed at the close of the 15th century, enlarged in the 17th
and 18th centuries, and restored between 1873 and 1875; it is rich in
notable treasures, especially the high altar of beaten silver, and in
beautiful paintings and sculptures. The Kreuzkirche (church of the Holy
Cross), dating from the 13th and 14th centuries, is an interesting brick
building, remarkable for its stained glass and its historical monuments,
among which is the tomb of Henry IV., duke of Silesia. The Sandkirche, so
called from its dedication to Our Lady on the Sand, dates from the 14th
century, and was until 1810 the church of the Augustinian canons. The
Dorotheenor Minoritenkirche, remarkable for its high-pitched roof, was
founded by the emperor Charles IV. in 1351. These are the most notable of
the Roman Catholic churches. Of the Evangelical churches the most important
is that of St Elizabeth, founded about 1250, rebuilt in the 14th and 15th
centuries, and restored in 1857. Its lofty tower contains the largest bell
in Silesia, and the church possesses a celebrated organ, fine stained
glass, a magnificent stone pyx (erected in 1455) over 52 ft. high, and
portraits of Luther and Melanchthon by Lucas Cranach. The church of St Mary
Magdalen, built in the 14th century on the model of the cathedral, has two
lofty Gothic towers connected by a bridge, and is interesting as having
been the church in which, in 1523, the reformation in Silesia was first
proclaimed. Other noteworthy ecclesiastical buildings are the graceful
Gothic church of St Michael built in 1871, the bishop's palace and the
Jewish synagogue, the finest in Germany after that in Berlin.

The business streets of the city converge upon the Ring, the market square,
in which is the town-hall, a fine Gothic building, begun in the middle of
the 14th and completed in the 16th century. Within is the Fuerstensaal, in
which the diets of Silesia were formerly held, while beneath is the famous
Schweidnitzer Keller, used continuously since 1355 as a beer and wine
house. [v.04 p.0499] The university, a spacious Gothic building facing the
Oder, is a striking edifice. It was built (1728-1736) as a college by the
Jesuits, on the site of the former imperial castle presented to them by the
emperor Leopold I., and contains a magnificent hall (Aula Leopoldina),
richly ornamented with frescoes and capable of holding 1200 persons.
Breslau possesses a large number of other important public buildings: the
Stadthaus (civic hall), the royal palace, the government offices (a
handsome pile erected in 1887), the provincial House of Assembly, the
municipal archives, the courts of law, the Silesian museum of arts and
crafts and antiquities, stored in the former assembly hall of the estates
(Staendehaus), which was rebuilt for the purpose, the museum of fine arts,
the exchange, the Stadt and Lobe theatres, the post office and central
railway station. There are also numerous hospitals and schools. Breslau is
exceedingly rich in fine monuments; the most noteworthy being the
equestrian statues of Frederick the Great and Frederick William III., both
by Kiss; the statue of Bluecher by Rauch; a marble statue of General
Tauentzien by Langhans and Schadow; a bronze statue of Karl Gottlieb Svarez
(1746-1798), the Prussian jurist, a monument to Schleiermacher, born here
in 1768, and statues of the emperor William I., Bismarck and Moltke. There
are also several handsome fountains. Foremost among the educational
establishments stands the university, founded in 1702 by the emperor
Leopold I. as a Jesuit college, and greatly extended by the incorporation
of the university of Frankfort-on-Oder in 1811. Its library contains
306,000 volumes and 4000 MSS., and has in the so-called _Bibliotheca
Habichtiana_ a valuable collection of oriental literature. Among its
auxiliary establishments are botanical gardens, an observatory, and
anatomical, physiological and kindred institutions. There are eight
classical and four modern schools, two higher girls' schools, a Roman
Catholic normal school, a Jewish theological seminary, a school of arts and
crafts, and numerous literary and charitable foundations. It is, however,
as a commercial and industrial city that Breslau is most widely known. Its
situation, close to the extensive coal and iron fields of Upper Silesia, in
proximity to the Austrian and Russian frontiers, at the centre of a network
of railways directly communicating both with these countries and with the
chief towns of northern and central Germany, and on a deep waterway
connecting with the Elbe and the Vistula, facilitates its very considerable
transit and export trade in the products of the province and of the
neighbouring countries. These embrace coal, sugar, cereals, spirits,
petroleum and timber. The local industries comprise machinery and tools,
railway and tramway carriages, furniture, cast-iron goods, gold and silver
work, carpets, furs, cloth and cottons, paper, musical instruments, glass
and china. Breslau is the headquarters of the VI. German army corps and
contains a large garrison of troops of all arms.

_History._--Breslau (Lat. _Vratislavia_) is first mentioned by the
chronicler Thietmar, bishop of Merseburg, in A.D. 1000, and was probably
founded some years before this date. Early in the 11th century it was made
the seat of a bishop, and after having formed part of Poland, became the
capital of an independent duchy in 1163. Destroyed by the Mongols in 1241,
it soon recovered its former prosperity and received a large influx of
German colonists. The bishop obtained the title of a prince of the Empire
in 1290.[1] When Henry VI., the last duke of Breslau, died in 1335, the
city came by purchase to John, king of Bohemia, whose successors retained
it until about 1460. The Bohemian kings bestowed various privileges on
Breslau, which soon began to extend its commerce in all directions, while
owing to increasing wealth the citizens took up a more independent
attitude. Disliking the Hussites, Breslau placed itself under the
protection of Pope Pius II. in 1463, and a few years afterwards came under
the rule of the Hungarian king, Matthias Corvinus. After his death in 1490
it again became subject to Bohemia, passing with the rest of Silesia to the
Habsburgs when in 1526 Ferdinand, afterwards emperor, was chosen king of
Bohemia. Having passed almost undisturbed through the periods of the
Reformation and the Thirty Years' War, Breslau was compelled to own the
authority of Frederick the Great in 1741. It was, however, recovered by the
Austrians in 1757, but was regained by Frederick after his victory at
Leuthen in the same year, and has since belonged to Prussia, although it
was held for a few days by the French in 1807 after the battle of Jena, and
again in 1813 after the battle of Bautzen. The sites of the fortifications,
dismantled by the French in 1807, were given to the civic authorities by
King Frederick William III., and converted into promenades. In March 1813
this monarch issued from Breslau his stirring appeals to the Prussians, _An
mein Volk_ and _An mein Kriegesheer_, and the city was the centre of the
Prussian preparations for the campaign which ended at Leipzig. After the
Prussian victory at Sadowa in 1866, William I. made a triumphant and
complimentary entry into the city, which since the days of Frederick the
Great has been only less loyal to the royal house than Berlin itself.

See Buerkner and Stein, _Geschichte der Stadt Breslau_ (Bresl. 1851-1853);
J-Stein, _Geschichte der Stadt Breslau im 19ten Jahrhundert_ (1884); O
Frenzel, _Breslauer Stadtbuch_ ("Codex dipl. Silisiae," vol. ii. 1882);
Luchs, _Breslau, ein Fuehrer durch die Stadt_ (12th ed., Bresl. 1904).

[1] In 1195 Jaroslaw, son of Boleslaus I. of Lower Silesia, who became
bishop of Breslau in 1198, inherited the duchy of Neisse, which at his
death (1201) he bequeathed to his successors in the see. The Austrian part
of Neisse still belongs to the bishop of Breslau, who also still bears the
title of prince bishop.

BRESSANT, JEAN BAPTISTE PROSPER (1815-1886), French actor, was born at
Chalon-sur-Saone on the 23rd of October 1815, and began his stage career at
the Varietes in Paris in 1833. In 1838 he went to the French theatre at St
Petersburg, where for eight years he played important parts with
ever-increasing reputation. His success was confirmed at the Gymnase when
he returned to Paris in 1846, and he made his _debut_ at the Comedie
Francaise as a full-fledged _societaire_ in 1854. From playing the ardent
young lover, he turned to leading roles both in modern plays and in the
classical repertoire. His Richelieu in _Mlle de Belle-Isle_, his Octave in
Alfred de Musset's _Les Caprices de Marianne_, and his appearance in de
Musset's _Il faut qu'une porte soit ouverte ou fermee_ and _Un caprice_
were followed by _Tartuffe_, _Le Misanthrope_ and _Don Juan_. Bressant
retired in 1875, and died on the 23rd of January 1886. During his
professorship at the Conservatoire, Mounet-Sully was one of his pupils.

BRESSE, a district of eastern France embracing portions of the departments
of Ain, Saone-et-Loire and Jura. The Bresse extends from the Dombes on the
south to the river Doubs on the north, and from the Saone eastwards to the
Jura, measuring some 60 m. in the former, and 20 m. in the latter
direction. It is a plain varying from 600 to 800 ft. above the sea, with
few eminences and a slight inclination westwards. Heaths and coppice
alternate with pastures and arable land; pools and marshes are numerous,
especially in the north. Its chief rivers are the Veyle, the Reyssouze and
the Seille, all tributaries of the Saone. The soil is a gravelly clay but
moderately fertile, and cattle-raising is largely carried on. The region
is, however, more especially celebrated for its table poultry. The
inhabitants preserve a distinctive but almost obsolete costume, with a
curious head-dress. The Bresse proper, called the _Bresse Bressane_,
comprises the northern portion of the department of Ain. The greater part
of the district belonged in the middle ages to the lords of Bage, from whom
it passed in 1272 to the house of Savoy. It was not till the first half of
the 15th century that the province, with Bourg as its capital, was founded
as such. In 1601 it was ceded to France by the treaty of Lyons, after which
it formed (together with the province of Bugey) first a separate government
and afterwards part of the government of Burgundy.

BRESSUIRE, a town of western France, capital of an arrondissement in the
department of Deux-Sevres, 48 m. N. of Niort by rail. Pop. (1906) 4561. The
town is situated on an eminence overlooking the Dolo, a tributary of the
Argenton. It is the centre of a cattle-rearing and agricultural region, and
has important markets; the manufacture of wooden type and woollen goods is
carried on. Bressuire has two buildings of interest: the church of
Notre-Dame, which, dating chiefly from the 12th and 15th centuries, has an
imposing tower of the Renaissance period; and the castle, built by the
lords of [v.04 p.0500] Beaumont, vassals of the viscount of Thouars. The
latter is now in ruins, and a portion of the site is occupied by a modern
chateau, but an inner and outer line of fortifications are still to be
seen. The whole forms the finest assemblage of feudal ruins in Poitou.
Bressuire is the seat of a sub-prefect and has a tribunal of first
instance. Among the disasters suffered at various times by the town, its
capture from the English and subsequent pillage by French troops under du
Guesclin in 1370 is the most memorable.

BREST, a fortified seaport of western France, capital of an arrondissement
in the department of Finistere, 155 m. W.N.W. of Rennes by rail. Population
(1906) town, 71,163; commune, 85,294. It is situated to the north of a
magnificent landlocked bay, and occupies the slopes of two hills divided by
the river Penfeld,--the part of the town on the left bank being regarded as
Brest proper, while the part on the right is known as Recouvrance. There
are also extensive suburbs to the east of the town. The hill-sides are in
some places so steep that the ascent from the lower to the upper town has
to be effected by flights of steps and the second or third storey of one
house is often on a level with the ground storey of the next. The chief
street of Brest bears the name of rue de Siam, in honour of the Siamese
embassy sent to Louis XIV., and terminates at the remarkable swing-bridge,
constructed in 1861, which crosses the mouth of the Penfeld. Running along
the shore to the south of the town is the Cours d'Ajot, one of the finest
promenades of its kind in France, named after the engineer who constructed
it. It is planted with trees and adorned with marble statues of Neptune and
Abundance by Antoine Coysevox. The castle with its donjon and seven towers
(12th to the 16th centuries), commanding the entrance to the river, is the
only interesting building in the town. Brest is the capital of one of the
five naval arrondissements of France. The naval port, which is in great
part excavated in the rock, extends along both banks of the Penfeld; it
comprises gun-foundries and workshops, magazines, shipbuilding yards and
repairing docks, and employs about 7000 workmen. There are also large naval
barracks, training ships and naval schools of various kinds, and an
important naval hospital. Brest is the seat of a sub-prefect and has
tribunals of first instance and of commerce, a chamber of commerce, a board
of trade-arbitrators, two naval tribunals, and a tribunal of maritime
commerce. There are also lycees for boys and girls and a school of commerce
and industry. The commercial port, which is separated from the town itself
by the Cours d'Ajot, comprises a tidal port with docks and an outer
harbour; it is protected by jetties to the east and west and by a
breakwater on the south. In 1905 the number of vessels entered was 202 with
a tonnage of 67,755, and cleared 160 with a tonnage of 61,012. The total
value of the imports in 1905 was L244,000. The chief were wine, coal,
timber, mineral tar, fertilizers and lobsters and crayfish. Exports, of
which the chief were wheat-flour, fruit and superphosphates, were valued at
L40,000. Besides its sardine and mackerel fishing industry, the town has
flour-mills, breweries, foundries, forges, engineering works, and
manufactures of blocks, candles, chemicals (from sea-weed), boots, shoes
and linen. Brest communicates by submarine cable with America and French
West Africa. The roadstead consists of a deep indentation with a maximum
length of 14 m. and an average width of 4 m., the mouth being barred by the
peninsula of Quelern, leaving a passage from 1 to 2 m. broad, known as the
Goulet. The outline of the bay is broken by numerous smaller bays or arms,
formed by the embouchures of streams, the most important being the Anse de
Quelern, the Anse de Poulmie, and the mouths of the Chateaulin and the
Landerneau. Brest is a fortress of the first class. The fortifications of
the town and the harbour fall into four groups: (1) the very numerous forts
and batteries guarding the approaches to and the channel of the Goulet; (2)
the batteries and forts directed upon the roads; (3) a group of works
preventing access to the peninsula of Quelern and commanding the ground to
the south of the peninsula from which many of the works of group (2) could
be taken in reverse; (4) the defences of Brest itself, consisting of an
old-fashioned _enceinte_ possessing little military value and a chain of
detached forts to the west of the town.

Nothing definite is known of Brest till about 1240, when it was ceded by a
count of Leon to John I., duke of Brittany. In 1342 John of Montfort gave
it up to the English, and it did not finally leave their hands till 1397.
Its medieval importance was great enough to give rise to the saying, "He is
not duke of Brittany who is not lord of Brest." By the marriage of Francis
I. with Claude, daughter of Anne of Brittany, Brest with the rest of the
duchy definitely passed to the French crown. The advantages of the
situation for a seaport town were first recognized by Richelieu, who in
1631 constructed a harbour with wooden wharves, which soon became a station
of the French navy. Colbert changed the wooden wharves for masonry and
otherwise improved the post, and Vauban's fortifications followed in
1680-1688. During the 18th century the fortifications and the naval
importance of the town continued to develop. In 1694 an English squadron
under John, 3rd Lord Berkeley, was miserably defeated in attempting a
landing; but in 1794, during the revolutionary war, the French fleet, under
Villaret de Joyeuse, was as thoroughly beaten in the same place by the
English admiral Howe.

BREST-LITOVSK (Polish _Brzesc-Litevski_; and in the Chron. _Berestie_ and
_Berestov_), a strongly fortified town of Russia, in the government of
Grodno, 137 m. by rail S. from the city of Grodno, in 52 deg. 5' N. lat. and
23 deg. 39' E. long., at the junction of the navigable river Mukhovets with the
Bug, and at the intersection of railways from Warsaw, Kiev, Moscow and East
Prussia. Pop. (1867) 22,493; (1901) 42,812, of whom more than one-half were
Jews. It contains a Jewish synagogue, which was regarded in the 16th
century as the first in Europe, and is the seat of an Armenian and of a
Greek Catholic bishop; the former has authority over the Armenians
throughout the whole country. The town carries on an extensive trade in
grain, flax, hemp, wood, tar and leather. First mentioned in the beginning
of the 11th century, Brest-Litovsk was in 1241 laid waste by the Mongols
and was not rebuilt till 1275; its suburbs were burned by the Teutonic
Knights in 1379; and in the end of the 15th century the whole town met a
similar fate at the hands of the khan of the Crimea. In the reign of the
Polish king Sigismund III. diets were held there; and in 1594 and 1596 it
was the meeting-place of two remarkable councils of the bishops of western
Russia. In 1657, and again in 1706, the town was captured by the Swedes; in
1794 it was the scene of Suvarov's victory over the Polish general
Sierakowski; in 1795 it was added to the Russian empire. The Brest-Litovsk
or King's canal (50 m. long), utilizing the Mukhovets-Bug rivers, forms a
link in the waterways that connect the Dnieper with the Vistula.

BRETEUIL, LOUIS CHARLES AUGUSTE LE TONNELIER, BARON DE (1730-1807), French
diplomatist, was born at the chateau of Azay-le-Feron (Indre) on the 7th of
March 1730. He was only twenty-eight when he was appointed by Louis XV.
ambassador to the elector of Cologne, and two years later he was sent to St
Petersburg. He arranged to be temporarily absent from his post at the time
of the palace revolution by which Catherine II. was placed on the throne.
In 1769 he was sent to Stockholm, and subsequently represented his
government at Vienna, Naples, and again at Vienna until 1783, when he was
recalled to become minister of the king's household. In this capacity he
introduced considerable reforms in prison administration. A close friend of
Marie Antoinette, he presently came into collision with Calonne, who
demanded his dismissal in 1787. His influence with the king and queen,
especially with the latter, remained unshaken, and on Necker's dismissal on
the 11th of July 1789, Breteuil succeeded him as chief minister. The fall
of the Bastille three days later put an end to the new ministry, and
Breteuil made his way to Switzerland with the first party of _emigres_. At
Soleure, in November 1790, he received from Louis XVI. exclusive powers to
negotiate with the European courts, and in his efforts to check the
ill-advised diplomacy of the _emigre_ princes, he soon brought himself into
opposition with his old rival Calonne, who held a chief place in their
councils. [v.04 p.0501] After the failure of the flight to Varennes, in the
arrangement of which he had a share, Breteuil received instructions from
Louis XVI., designed to restore amicable relations with the princes. His
distrust of the king's brothers and his defence of Louis XVI.'s prerogative
were to some extent justified, but his intransigeant attitude towards these
princes emphasized the dissensions of the royal family in the eyes of
foreign sovereigns, who looked on the comte de Provence as the natural
representative of his brother and found a pretext for non-interference on
Louis's behalf in the contradictory statements of the negotiators. Breteuil
himself was the object of violent attacks from the party of the princes,
who asserted that he persisted in exercising powers which had been revoked
by Louis XVI. After the execution of Marie Antoinette he retired into
private life near Hamburg, only returning to France in 1802. He died in
Paris on the 2nd of November 1807.

See the memoirs of Bertrand de Molleville (2 vols., Paris, 1816) and of the
marquis de Bouille (2 vols., Paris, 1884); and E. Daudet, _Coblentz,
1789-1793_ (1889), forming part of his _Hist. de l'emigration._

BRETIGNY, a French town (dept. Eure-et-Loir, arrondissement and canton of
Chartres, commune of Sours), which gave its name to a celebrated treaty
concluded there on the 8th of May 1360, between Edward III. of England and
John II., surnamed the Good, of France. The exactions of the English, who
wished to yield as few as possible of the advantages claimed by them in the
treaty of London, made negotiations difficult, and the discussion of terms
begun early in April lasted more than a month. By virtue of this treaty
Edward III. obtained, besides Guienne and Gascony, Poitou, Saintonge and
Aunis, Agenais, Perigord, Limousin, Quercy, Bigorre, the countship of
Gaure, Angoumois, Rouergue, Montreuil-sur-mer, Ponthieu, Calais, Sangatte,
Ham and the countship of Guines. John II. had, moreover, to pay three
millions of gold crowns for his ransom. On his side the king of England
gave up the duchies of Normandy and Touraine, the countships of Anjou and
Maine, and the suzerainty of Brittany and of Flanders. As a guarantee for
the payment of his ransom, John the Good gave as hostages two of his sons,
several princes and nobles, four inhabitants of Paris, and two citizens
from each of the nineteen principal towns of France. This treaty was
ratified and sworn to by the two kings and by their eldest sons on the 24th
of October 1360, at Calais. At the same time were signed the special
conditions relating to each important article of the treaty, and the
renunciatory clauses in which the kings abandoned their rights over the
territory they had yielded to one another.

See Rymer's _Foedera_, vol. iii; Dumont, _Corps diplomatique_, vol. ii.;
Froissart, ed. Luce, vol. vi.; _Les Grandes Chroniques de France_, ed. P.
Paris, vol. vi.; E. Cosneau, _Les Grands Traites de la guerre de cent ans_
(1889).

BRETON, JULES ADOLPHE AIME LOUIS (1827- ), French painter, was born on the
1st of May 1827, at Courrieres, Pas de Calais, France. His artistic gifts
being manifest at an early age, he was sent in 1843 to Ghent, to study
under the historical painter de Vigne, and in 1846 to Baron Wappers at
Antwerp. Finally he worked in Paris under Drolling. His first efforts were
in historical subjects: "Saint Piat preaching in Gaul"; then, under the
influence of the revolution of 1848, he represented "Misery and Despair."
But Breton soon discovered that he was not born to be a historical painter,
and he returned to the memories of nature and of the country which were
impressed on him in early youth. In 1853 he exhibited the "Return of the
Harvesters" at the Paris Salon, and the "Little Gleaner" at Brussels.
Thenceforward he was essentially a painter of rustic life, especially in
the province of Artois, which he quitted only three times for short
excursions: in 1864 to Provence, and in 1865 and 1873 to Brittany, whence
he derived some of his happiest studies of religious scenes. His numerous
subjects may be divided generally into four classes: labour, rest, rural
festivals and religious festivals. Among his more important works may be
named "Women Gleaning," and "The Day after St Sebastian's Day" (1855),
which gained him a third-class medal; "Blessing the Fields" (1857), a
second-class medal; "Erecting a Calvary" (1859), now in the Lille gallery;
"The Return of the Gleaners" (1859), now in the Luxembourg; "Evening" and
"Women Weeding" (1861), a first-class medal; "Grandfather's Birthday"
(1862); "The Close of Day" (1865); "Harvest" (1867); "Potato Gatherers"
(1868); "A Pardon, Brittany" (1869); "The Fountain" (1872), medal of
honour; "The Bonfires of St John" (1875); "Women mending Nets" (1876), in
the Douai museum; "A Gleaner" (1877), Luxembourg; "Evening, Finistere"
(1881); "The Song of the Lark" (1884); "The Last Sunbeam" (1885); "The
Shepherd's Star" (1888); "The Call Home" (1889); "The Last Gleanings"
(1895); "Gathering Poppies" (1897); "The Alarm Cry" (1899); "Twilight
Glory" (1900). Breton was elected to the Institut in 1886 on the death of
Baudry. In 1889 he was made commander of the Legion of Honour, and in 1899
foreign member of the Royal Academy of London. He also wrote several books,
among them _Les Champs et la mer_ (1876), _Nos peintres du siecle_ (1900),
"Jeanne," a poem, _Delphine Bernard_ (1902), and _La Peinture_ (1904).

See Jules Breton, _Vie d'un artiste, art et nature_ (autobiographical),
(Paris, 1890); Marius Vachon, _Jules Breton_ (1899).

BRETON, BRITTON OR BRITTAINE, NICHOLAS (1545?-1626), English poet, belonged
to an old family settled at Layer-Breton, Essex. His father, William
Breton, who had made a considerable fortune by trade, died in 1559, and the
widow (nee Elizabeth Bacon) married the poet George Gascoigne before her
sons had attained their majority. Nicholas Breton was probably born at the
"capitall mansion house" in Red Cross Street, in the parish of St Giles
without Cripplegate, mentioned in his father's will. There is no official
record of his residence at the university, but the diary of the Rev.
Richard Madox tells us that he was at Antwerp in 1583 and was "once of
Oriel College." He married Ann Sutton in 1593, and had a family. He is
supposed to have died shortly after the publication of his last work,
_Fantastickes_ (1626). Breton found a patron in Mary, countess of Pembroke,
and wrote much in her honour until 1601, when she seems to have withdrawn
her favour. It is probably safe to supplement the meagre record of his life
by accepting as autobiographical some of the letters signed N.B. in _A
Poste with a Packet of Mad Letters_ (1603, enlarged 1637); the 19th letter
of the second part contains a general complaint of many griefs, and
proceeds as follows: "hath another been wounded in the warres, fared hard,
lain in a cold bed many a bitter storme, and beene at many a hard banquet?
all these have I; another imprisoned? so have I; another long been sicke?
so have I; another plagued with an unquiet life? so have I; another
indebted to his hearts griefe, and fame would pay and cannot? so am I."
Breton was a facile writer, popular with his contemporaries, and forgotten
by the next generation. His work consists of religious and pastoral poems,
satires, and a number of miscellaneous prose tracts. His religious poems
are sometimes wearisome by their excess of fluency and sweetness, but they
are evidently the expression of a devout and earnest mind. His praise of
the Virgin and his references to Mary Magdalene have suggested that he was
a Catholic, but his prose writings abundantly prove that he was an ardent
Protestant. Breton had little gift for satire, and his best work is to be
found in his pastoral poetry. His _Passionate Shepheard_ (1604) is full of
sunshine and fresh air, and of unaffected gaiety. The third pastoral in
this book--"Who can live in heart so glad As the merrie country lad"--is
well known; with some other of Breton's daintiest poems, among them the
lullaby, "Come little babe, come silly soule,"[1]--it is incorporated in
A.H. Bullen's _Lyrics from Elizabethan Romances_ (1890). His keen
observation of country life appears also in his prose idyll, _Wits
Trenchmour_, "a conference betwixt a scholler and an angler," and in his
_Fantastickes_, a series of short prose pictures of the months, the
Christian festivals and the hours, which throw much light on the customs of
the times. Most of Breton's books are very rare and have great
bibliographical value. His works, with the exception of some belonging to
private owners, were collected by Dr A.B. Grosart in the [v.04 p.0502]
_Chertsey Worthies Library_ in 1879, with an elaborate introduction quoting
the documents for the poet's history.

Breton's poetical works, the titles of which are here somewhat abbreviated,
include _The Workes of a Young Wit_ (1577); _A Floorish upon Fancie_
(1577); _The Pilgrimage to Paradise_ (1592); _The Countess of Penbrook's
Passion_ (MS.), first printed by J.O. Halliwell Phillipps in 1853;
_Pasquil's Fooles cappe_, entered at Stationers' Hall in 1600; _Pasquil's
Mistresse_ (1600); _Pasquil's Passe and Passeth Not_ (1600); _Melancholike
Humours_ (1600); _Marie Magdalen's Love: a Solemne Passion of the Soules
Love_ (1595), the first part of which, a prose treatise, is probably by
another hand; the second part, a poem in six-lined stanza, is certainly by
Breton; _A Divine Poem_, including "The Ravisht Soul" and "The Blessed
Weeper" (1601); _An Excellent Poem, upon the Longing of a Blessed Heart_
(1601); _The Soules Heavenly Exercise_ (1601); _The Soules Harmony_ (1602);
_Olde Madcappe newe Gaily mawfrey_ (1602); _The Mother's Blessing_ (1602);
_A True Description of Unthankfulnesse_ (1602); _The Passionate Shepheard_
(1604); _The Soules Immortall Crowne_ (1605); _The Honour of Valour_
(1605); _An Invective against Treason; I would and I would not_ (1614);
_Bryton's Bowre of Delights_ (1591), edited by Dr Grosart in 1893, an
unauthorized publication which contained some poems disclaimed by Breton;
_The Arbor of Amorous Devises_ (entered at Stationers' Hall, 1594), only in
part Breton's; and contributions to _England's Helicon_ and other
miscellanies of verse. Of his twenty-two prose tracts may be mentioned
_Wit's Trenchmour_ (1597), _The Wil of Wit_ (1599), _A Poste with a Packet
of Mad Letters_ (1603). _Sir Philip Sidney's Ourania by N.B._ (1606); _Mary
Magdalen's Lamentations_ (1604), and _The Passion of a Discontented Mind_
(1601), are sometimes, but erroneously, ascribed to Breton.

[1]  This poem, however, comes from _The Arbor of Amorous Devises_, which
is only in part Breton's work.

BRETON DE LOS HERREROS, MANUEL (1796-1873), Spanish dramatist, was born at
Quel (Logrono) on the 19th of December 1796 and was educated at Madrid.
Enlisting on the 24th of May 1812, he served against the French in Valencia
and Catalonia, and retired with the rank of corporal on the 8th of March
1822. He obtained a minor post in the civil service under the liberal
government, and on his discharge determined to earn his living by writing
for the stage. His first piece, _A la vejez viruelas_, was produced on the
14th of October 1824, and proved the writer to be the legitimate successor
of the younger Moratin. His industry was astonishing: between October 1824
and November 1828, he composed thirty-nine plays, six of them original, the
rest being translations or recasts of classic masterpieces. In 1831 he
published a translation of Tibullus, and acquired by it an unmerited
reputation for scholarship which secured for him an appointment as
sub-librarian at the national library. But the theatre claimed him for its
own, and with the exception of _Elena_ and a few other pieces in the
fashionable romantic vein, his plays were a long series of successes. His
only serious check occurred in 1840; the former liberal had grown
conservative with age, and in _La Ponchada_ he ridiculed the National
Guard. He was dismissed from the national library, and for a short time was
so unpopular that he seriously thought of emigrating to America; but the
storm blew over, and within two years Breton de los Herreros had regained
his supremacy on the stage. He became secretary to the Spanish Academy,
quarrelled with his fellow-members, and died at Madrid on the 8th of
November 1873. He is the author of some three hundred and sixty original
plays, twenty-three of which are in prose. No Spanish dramatist of the
nineteenth century approaches him in comic power, in festive invention, and
in the humorous presentation of character, while his metrical dexterity is
unique. _Marcela o a cual de los tres?_ (1831), _Muerete; y veras!_ (1837)
and _La Escuela del matrimonio_ (1852) still hold the stage, and are likely
to hold it so long as Spanish is spoken.

See Marques de Molins, _Breton de los Herreros, recuerdos de su vida y de
sus obras_ (Madrid, 1883); _Obras de Breton de Herreros_ (5 vols., Madrid,
1883); E. Pineyro, _El Romanticismo en Espana_ (Paris, 1904).

(J. F.-K.)

BRETSCHNEIDER, KARL GOTTLIEB (1776-1848), German scholar and theologian,
was born at Gersdorf in Saxony. In 1794 he entered the university of
Leipzig, where he studied theology for four years. After some years of
hesitation he resolved to be ordained, and in 1802 he passed with great
distinction the examination for _candidatus theologiae_, and attracted the
regard of F.V. Reinhard, author of the _System der christlichen Moral_
(1788-1815), then court-preacher at Dresden, who became his warm friend and
patron during the remainder of his life. In 1804-1806 Bretschneider was
_Privat-docent_ at the university of Wittenberg, where he lectured on
philosophy and theology. During this time he wrote his work on the
development of dogma, _Systematische Entwickelung aller in der Dogmatik
vorkommenden Begriffe nach den symbolischen Schriften der
evangelisch-lutherischen und reformirten Kirche_ (1805, 4th ed. 1841),
which was followed by others, including an edition of Ecclesiasticus with a
Latin commentary. On the advance of the French army under Napoleon into
Prussia, he determined to leave Wittenberg and abandon his university
career. Through the good offices of Reinhard, he became pastor of
Schneeberg in Saxony (1807). In 1808 he was promoted to the office of
superintendent of the church of Annaberg, in which capacity he had to
decide, in accordance with the canon law of Saxony, many matters belonging
to the department of ecclesiastical law. But the climate did not agree with
him, and his official duties interfered with his theological studies. With
a view to a change he took the degree of doctor of theology in Wittenberg
in August 1812. In 1816 he was appointed general superintendent at Gotha,
where he remained until his death in 1848. This was the great period of his
literary activity.

In 1820 was published his treatise on the gospel of St John, entitled
_Probabilia de Evangelii el Epistolarum Joannis Apostoli indole et
origine_, which attracted much attention. In it he collected with great
fulness and discussed with marked moderation the arguments against
Johannine authorship. This called forth a number of replies. To the
astonishment of every one, Bretschneider announced in the preface to the
second edition of his _Dogmatik_ in 1822, that he had never doubted the
authenticity of the gospel, and had published his _Probabilia_ only to draw
attention to the subject, and to call forth a more complete defence of its
genuineness. Bretschneider remarks in his autobiography that the
publication of this work had the effect of preventing his appointment as
successor to Karl C. Tittmann in Dresden, the minister Detlev von Einsiedel
(1773-1861) denouncing him as the "slanderer of John" (_Johannisschaender_).
His greatest contribution to the science of exegesis was his _Lexicon
Manuale Graeco-Latinum in libros Novi Testamenti_ (1824, 3rd ed. 1840).
This work was valuable for the use which its author made of the Greek of
the Septuagint, of the Old and New Testament Apocrypha, of Josephus, and of
the apostolic fathers, in illustration of the language of the New
Testament. In 1826 he published _Apologie der neuern Theologie des
evangelischen Deutschlands_. Hugh James Rose had published in England
(1825) a volume of sermons on the rationalist movement (_The State of the
Protestant Religion in Germany_), in which he classed Bretschneider with
the rationalists; and Bretschneider contended that he himself was not a
rationalist in the ordinary sense of the term, but a "rational
supernaturalist." Some of his numerous dogmatic writings passed through
several editions. An English translation of his _Manual of the Religion and
History of the Christian Church_ appeared in 1857. His dogmatic position
seems to be intermediate between the extreme school of naturalists, such as
Heinrich Paulus, J.F. Roehr and Julius Wegscheider on the one hand, and D.F.
Strauss and F.C. Baur on the other. Recognizing a supernatural element in
the Bible, he nevertheless allowed to the full the critical exercise of
reason in the interpretation of its dogmas (cp. Otto Pfleiderer,
_Development of Theology_, pp. 89 ff.).

See his autobiography, _Aus meinem Leben: Selbstbiographie von K.G.
Bretschneider_ (Gotha, 1851), of which a translation, with notes, by
Professor George E. Day, appeared in the _Bibliotheca Sacra and American
Biblical Repository_, Nos. 36 and 38 (1852, 1853); Neudecker in _Die
allgemeine Kirchenzeitung_ (1848), No. 38; Wuestemann, _Bretschneideri
Memoria_ (1848); A.G. Farrar, _Critical History of Free Thought_ (Bampton
Lectures, 1862); Herzog-Hauck, _Realencyklopaedie_ (ed. 1897).

BRETTEN, a town of Germany, in the grand duchy of Baden, on the Saalbach, 9
m. S.E. of Bruchsal by rail. Pop. (1900) 4781. It has some manufactories of
machinery and japanned goods, and a considerable trade in timber and
livestock. Bretten was the birthplace of Melanchthon (1497), and in
addition to a [v.04 p.0503] statue of him by Drake, a memorial hall,
containing a collection of his writings and busts and pictures of his
famous contemporaries, has been erected.

BRETWALDA, a word used in the _Anglo-Saxon Chronicle_ under the date 827,
and also in a charter of AEthelstan, king of the English. It appears in
several variant forms (_brytenwalda_, _bretenanwealda_, &c.), and means
most probably "lord of the Britons" or "lord of Britain"; for although the
derivation of the word is uncertain, its earlier syllable seems to be
cognate with the words Briton and Britannia. In the _Chronicle_ the title
is given to Ecgbert, king of the English, "the eighth king that was
Bretwalda," and retrospectively to seven kings who ruled over one or other
of the English kingdoms. The seven names are copied from Bede's _Historia
Ecclesiastica_, and it is interesting to note that the last king named,
Oswiu of Northumbria, lived 150 years before Ecgbert. It has been assumed
that these seven kings exercised a certain superiority over a large part of
England, but if such superiority existed it is certain that it was
extremely vague and was unaccompanied by any unity of organization. Another
theory is that Bretwalda refers to a war-leadership, or _imperium_, over
the English south of the Humber, and has nothing to do with Britons or
Britannia. In support of this explanation it is urged that the title is
given in the _Chronicle_ to Ecgbert in the year in which he "conquered the
kingdom of the Mercians and all that was south of the Humber." Less likely
is the theory of Palgrave that the Bretwaldas were the successors of the
pseudo-emperors, Maximus and Carausius, and claimed to share the imperial
dignity of Rome; or that of Kemble, who derives Bretwalda from the British
word _breotan_, to distribute, and translates it "widely ruling." With
regard to Ecgbert the word is doubtless given as a title in imitation of
its earlier use, and the same remark applies to its use in AEthelstan's
charter.

See E.A. Freeman, _History of the Norman Conquest_, vol. i. (Oxford, 1877);
W. Stubbs, _Constitutional History_, vol. i. (Oxford, 1897); J.R. Green,
_The Making of England_, vol. ii. (London, 1897); F. Palgrave, _The Rise
and Progress of the English Commonwealth_ (London, 1832); J. M. Kemble,
_The Saxons in England_ (London, 1876); J. Rhys, _Celtic Britain_ (London,
1884).

BREUGHEL (or BRUEGHEL), PIETER, Flemish painter, was the son of a peasant
residing in the village of Breughel near Breda. After receiving instruction
in painting from Koek, whose daughter he married, he spent some time in
France and Italy, and then went to Antwerp, where he was elected into the
Academy in 1551. He finally settled at Brussels and died there. The
subjects of his pictures are chiefly humorous figures, like those of D.
Teniers; and if he wants the delicate touch and silvery clearness of that
master, he has abundant spirit and comic power. He is said to have died
about the year 1570 at the age of sixty; other accounts give 1590 as the
date of his death.

His son PIETER, the younger (1564-1637), known as "Hell" Breughel, was born
in Brussels and died at Antwerp, where his "Christ bearing the Cross" is in
the museum.

Another son JAN (c. 1569-1642), known as "Velvet" Breughel, was born at
Brussels. He first applied himself to painting flowers and fruits, and
afterwards acquired considerable reputation by his landscapes and
sea-pieces. After residing long at Cologne he travelled into Italy, where
his landscapes, adorned with small figures, were greatly admired. He left a
large number of pictures, chiefly landscapes, which are executed with great
skill. Rubens made use of Breughel's hand in the landscape part of several
of his small pictures--such as his "Vertumnus and Pomona," the "Satyr
viewing the Sleeping Nymph," and the "Terrestrial Paradise."

BREVET (a diminutive of the Fr. _bref_), a short writing, originally an
official writing or letter, with the particular meaning of a papal
indulgence. The use of the word is mainly confined to a commission, or
official document, giving to an officer in the army a permanent, as opposed
to a local and temporary, rank in the service higher than that he holds
substantively in his corps. In the British army "brevet rank" exists only
above the rank of captain, but in the United States army it is possible to
obtain a brevet as first lieutenant. In France the term _brevete_ is
particularly used with respect to the General Staff, to express the
equivalent of the English "passed Staff College" (p.s.c.).

BREVIARY (Lat. _breviarium_, abridgment, epitome), the book which contains
the offices for the canonical hours, _i.e._ the daily service of the Roman
Catholic Church. As compared with the Anglican Book of Common Prayer it is
both more and less comprehensive; more, in that it includes lessons and
hymns for every day in the year; less, because it excludes the Eucharistic
office (contained in the Missal), and the special offices connected with
baptism, marriage, burial, ordination, &c., which are found in the Ritual
or the Pontifical. In the early days of Christian worship, when Jewish
custom was followed, the Bible furnished all that was thought necessary,
containing as it did the books from which the lessons were read and the
psalms that were recited. The first step in the evolution of the Breviary
was the separation of the Psalter into a choir-book. At first the president
of the local church (bishop) or the leader of the choir chose a particular
psalm as he thought appropriate. From about the 4th century certain psalms
began to be grouped together, a process that was furthered by the monastic
practice of daily reciting the 150 psalms. This took so much time that the
monks began to spread it over a week, dividing each day into hours, and
allotting to each hour its portion of the Psalter. St Benedict in the 6th
century drew up such an arrangement, probably, though not certainly, on the
basis of an older Roman division which, though not so skilful, is the one
in general use. Gradually there were added to these psalter choir-books
additions in the form of antiphons, responses, collects or short prayers,
for the use of those not skilful at improvisation and metrical
compositions. Jean Beleth, a 12th-century liturgical author, gives the
following list of books necessary for the right conduct of the canonical
office:--the _Antiphonarium_, the Old and New Testaments, the
_Passionarius_ (_liber_) and the _Legendarius_ (dealing respectively with
martyrs and saints), the _Homiliarius_ (homilies on the Gospels), the
_Sermologus_ (collection of sermons) and the works of the Fathers, besides,
of course, the _Psalterium_ and the _Collectarium_. To overcome the
inconvenience of using such a library the Breviary came into existence and
use. Already in the 8th century Prudentius, bishop of Troyes, had in a
_Breviarium Psalterii_ made an abridgment of the Psalter for the laity,
giving a few psalms for each day, and Alcuin had rendered a similar service
by including a prayer for each day and some other prayers, but no lessons
or homilies. The Breviary rightly so called, however, only dates from the
11th century; the earliest MS. containing the whole canonical office is of
the year 1099 and is in the Mazarin library. Gregory VII. (pope 1073-1085),
too, simplified the liturgy as performed at the Roman court, and gave his
abridgment the name of Breviary, which thus came to denote a work which
from another point of view might be called a Plenary, involving as it did
the collection of several works into one. There are several extant
specimens of 12th-century Breviaries, all Benedictine, but under Innocent
III. (pope 1198-1216) their use was extended, especially by the newly
founded and active Franciscan order. These preaching friars, with the
authorization of Gregory IX., adopted (with some modifications, _e.g._ the
substitution of the "Gallican" for the "Roman" version of the Psalter) the
Breviary hitherto used exclusively by the Roman court, and with it
gradually swept out of Europe all the earlier partial books (Legendaries,
Responsories), &c., and to some extent the local Breviaries, like that of
Sarum. Finally, Nicholas III. (pope 1277-1280) adopted this version both
for the curia and for the basilicas of Rome, and thus made its position
secure. The Benedictines and Dominicans have Breviaries of their own. The
only other types that merit notice are:--(1) the Mozarabic Breviary, once
in use throughout all Spain, but now confined to a single foundation at
Toledo; it is remarkable for the number and length of its hymns, and for
the fact that the majority of its collects are addressed to God the Son;
(2) the Ambrosian, now confined to Milan, where it owes its retention to
the attachment of the clergy and people to their traditionary rites, which
they derive from St Ambrose (see LITURGY).

[v.04 p.0504] Till the council of Trent every bishop had full power to
regulate the Breviary of his own diocese; and this was acted upon almost
everywhere. Each monastic community, also, had one of its own. Pius V.
(pope 1566-1572), however, while sanctioning those which could show at
least 200 years of existence, made the Roman obligatory in all other
places. But the influence of the court of Rome has gradually gone much
beyond this, and has superseded almost all the local "uses." The Roman has
thus become nearly universal, with the allowance only of additional offices
for saints specially venerated in each particular diocese. The Roman
Breviary has undergone several revisions: The most remarkable of these is
that by Francis Quignonez, cardinal of Santa Croce in Gerusalemme (1536),
which, though not accepted by Rome,[1] formed the model for the still more
thorough reform made in 1549 by the Church of England, whose daily morning
and evening services are but a condensation and simplification of the
Breviary offices. Some parts of the prefaces at the beginning of the
English Prayer-Book are free translations of those of Quignonez. The Pian
Breviary was again altered by Sixtus V. in 1588, who introduced the revised
Vulgate text; by Clement VIII. in 1602 (through Baronius and Bellarmine),
especially as concerns the rubrics; and by Urban VIII. (1623-1644), a
purist who unfortunately tampered with the text of the hymns, injuring both
their literary charm and their historic worth.

In the 17th and 18th centuries a movement of revision took place in France,
and succeeded in modifying about half the Breviaries of that country.
Historically, this proceeded from the labours of Jean de Launoy
(1603-1678), "le denicheur des saints," and Louis Sebastien le Nain de
Tillemont, who had shown the falsity of numerous lives of the saints; while
theologically it was produced by the Port Royal school, which led men to
dwell more on communion with God as contrasted with the invocation of the
saints. This was mainly carried out by the adoption of a rule that all
antiphons and responses should be in the exact words of Scripture, which,
of course, cut out the whole class of appeals to created beings. The
services were at the same time simplified and shortened, and the use of the
whole Psalter every week (which had become a mere theory in the Roman
Breviary, owing to its frequent supersession by saints' day services) was
made a reality. These reformed French Breviaries--_e.g._ the Paris Breviary
of 1680 by Archbishop Francois de Harlay (1625-1695) and that of 1736 by
Archbishop Charles Gaspard Guillaume de Vintimille (1655-1746)--show a deep
knowledge of Holy Scripture, and much careful adaptation of different
texts; but during the pontificate of Pius IX. a strong Ultramontane
movement arose against them. This was inaugurated by Montalembert, but its
literary advocates were chiefly Dom Gueranger, a learned Benedictine monk,
abbot of Solesmes, and Louis Francois Veuillot (1813-1883) of the
_Univers_; and it succeeded in suppressing them everywhere, the last
diocese to surrender being Orleans in 1875. The Jansenist and Gallican
influence was also strongly felt in Italy and in Germany, where Breviaries
based on the French models were published at Cologne, Muenster, Mainz and
other towns. Meanwhile, under the direction of Benedict XIV. (pope
1740-1758), a special congregation collected many materials for an official
revision, but nothing was published. Subsequent changes have been very few
and minute. In 1902, under Leo XIII., a commission under the presidency of
Monsignor Louis Duchesne was appointed to consider the Breviary, the
Missal, the Pontifical and the Ritual.

The beauty and value of many of the Latin Breviaries were brought to the
notice of English churchmen by one of the numbers of the Oxford _Tracts for
the Times_, since which time they have been much more studied, both for
their own sake and for the light they throw upon the English Prayer-Book.

From a bibliographical point of view some of the early printed Breviaries
are among the rarest of literary curiosities, being merely local. The
copies were not spread far, and were soon worn out by the daily use made of
them. Doubtless many editions have perished without leaving a trace of
their existence, while others are known by unique copies. In Scotland the
only one which has survived the convulsions of the 16th century is that of
Aberdeen, a Scottish form of the Sarum Office,[2] revised by William
Elphinstone (bishop 1483-1514), and printed at Edinburgh by Walter Chapman
and Andrew Myllar in 1509-1510. Four copies have been preserved of it, of
which only one is complete; but it was reprinted in facsimile in 1854 for
the Bannatyne Club by the munificence of the duke of Buccleuch. It is
particularly valuable for the trustworthy notices of the early history of
Scotland which are embedded in the lives of the national saints. Though
enjoined by royal mandate in 1501 for general use within the realm of
Scotland, it was probably never widely adopted. The new Scottish _Proprium_
sanctioned for the Roman Catholic province of St Andrews in 1903 contains
many of the old Aberdeen collects and antiphons.

The Sarum or Salisbury Breviary itself was very widely used. The first
edition was printed at Venice in 1483 by Raynald de Novimagio in folio; the
latest at Paris, 1556, 1557. While modern Breviaries are nearly always
printed in four volumes, one for each season of the year, the editions of
the Sarum never exceeded two parts.

_Contents of the Roman Breviary_.--At the beginning stands the usual
introductory matter, such as the tables for determining the date of Easter,
the calendar, and the general rubrics. The Breviary itself is divided into
four seasonal parts--winter, spring, summer, autumn--and comprises under
each part (1) the Psalter; (2) _Proprium de Tempore_ (the special office of
the season); (3) _Proprium Sanctorum_ (special offices of saints); (4)
_Commune Sanctorum_ (general offices for saints); (5) Extra Services. These
parts are often published separately.

1. _The Psalter_.--This is the very backbone of the Breviary, the
groundwork of the Catholic prayer-book; out of it have grown the antiphons,
responsories and versicles. In the Breviary the psalms are arranged
according to a disposition dating from the 8th century, as follows. Psalms
i.-cviii., with some omissions, are recited at Matins, twelve each day from
Monday to Saturday, and eighteen on Sunday. The omissions are said at
Lauds, Prime and Compline. Psalms cix.-cxlvii. (except cxvii., cxviii. and
cxlii.) are said at Vespers, five each day. Psalms cxlviii.-cl. are always
used at Lauds, and give that hour its name. The text of this Psalter is
that commonly known as the Gallican. The name is misleading, for it is
simply the second revision (A.D. 392) made by Jerome of the old _Itala_
version originally used in Rome. Jerome's first revision of the _Itala_
(A.D. 383), known as the Roman, is still used at St Peter's in Rome, but
the "Gallican," thanks especially to St Gregory of Tours, who introduced it
into Gaul in the 6th century, has ousted it everywhere else. The
Antiphonary of Bangor proves that Ireland accepted the Gallican version in
the 7th century, and the English Church did so in the 10th.

2. The _Proprium de Tempore_ contains the office of the seasons of the
Christian year (Advent to Trinity), a conception that only gradually grew
up. There is here given the whole service for every Sunday and week-day,
the proper antiphons, responsories, hymns, and especially the course of
daily Scripture-reading, averaging about twenty verses a day, and (roughly)
arranged thus: for Advent, Isaiah; Epiphany to Septuagesima, Pauline
Epistles; Lent, patristic homilies (Genesis on Sundays); Passion-tide,
Jeremiah; Easter to Whitsun, Acts, Catholic epistles and Apocalypse;
Whitsun to August, Samuel and Kings; August to Advent, Wisdom books,
Maccabees, Prophets. The extracts are often scrappy and torn out of their
context.

3. The _Proprium Sanctorum_ contains the lessons, psalms and liturgical
formularies for saints' festivals, and depends on the days of the secular
month. Most of the material here is hagiological biography, occasionally
revised as by Leo XIII. in view of archaeological and other discoveries,
but still largely uncritical. Covering a great stretch of time and space,
they do for the worshipper in the field of church history what the
Scripture readings do in that of biblical history. As something like 90% of
the days in the year have, during the course of centuries, been allotted to
some saint or other, it is easy to see how this section of the Breviary has
encroached upon the _Proprium de Tempore_, and this is the chief problem
that confronts any who are concerned for a revision of the Breviary.

4. The _Commune Sanctorum_ comprises psalms, antiphons, lessons, &c., for
feasts of various groups or classes (twelve in all); _e.g._ apostles,
martyrs, confessors, virgins, and the Blessed Virgin Mary. These offices
are of very ancient date, and many of them were probably [v.04 p.0505] in
origin proper to individual saints. They contain passages of great literary
beauty. The lessons read at the third nocturn are patristic homilies on the
Gospels, and together form a rough summary of theological instruction.

5. _Extra Services_.--Here are found the Little Office of the Blessed
Virgin Mary, the Office of the Dead (obligatory on All Souls' Day), and
offices peculiar to each diocese.

It has already been indicated, by reference to Matins, Lauds, &c., that not
only each day, but each part of the day, has its own office, the day being
divided into liturgical "hours." A detailed account of these will be found
in the article HOURS, CANONICAL. Each of the hours of the office is
composed of the same elements, and something must be said now of the nature
of these constituent parts, of which mention has here and there been
already made. They are: psalms (including canticles), antiphons,
responsories, hymns, lessons, little chapters, versicles and collects.

The _psalms_ have already been dealt with, but it may be noted again how
the multiplication of saints' festivals, with practically the same special
psalms, tends in practice to constant repetition of about one-third of the
Psalter, and correspondingly rare recital of the remaining two-thirds,
whereas the _Proprium de Tempore_, could it be adhered to, would provide
equal opportunities for every psalm. As in the Greek usage and in the
Benedictine, certain canticles like the Song of Moses (Exodus xv.), the
Song of Hannah (1 Sam. ii.), the prayer of Habakkuk (iii.), the prayer of
Hezekiah (Isaiah xxxviii.) and other similar Old Testament passages, and,
from the New Testament, the Magnificat, the Benedictus and the Nunc
dimittis, are admitted as psalms.

The _antiphons_ are short liturgical forms, sometimes of biblical,
sometimes of patristic origin, used to introduce a psalm. The term
originally signified a chant by alternate choirs, but has quite lost this
meaning in the Breviary.

The _responsories_ are similar in form to the antiphons, but come at the
end of the psalm, being originally the reply of the choir or congregation
to the precentor who recited the psalm.

The _hymns_ are short poems going back in part to the days of Prudentius,
Synesius, Gregory of Nazianzus and Ambrose (4th and 5th centuries), but
mainly the work of medieval authors. Together they make a fine collection,
and it is a pity that Urban VIII. in his mistaken humanistic zeal tried to
improve them.

The _lessons_, as has been seen, are drawn variously from the Bible, the
Acts of the Saints and the Fathers of the Church. In the primitive church,
books afterwards excluded from the canon were often read, _e.g._ the
letters of Clement of Rome and the _Shepherd of Hermas_. In later days the
churches of Africa, having rich memorials of martyrdom, used them to
supplement the reading of Scripture. Monastic influence accounts for the
practice of adding to the reading of a biblical passage some patristic
commentary or exposition. Books of homilies were compiled from the writings
of SS. Augustine, Hilary, Athanasius, Isidore, Gregory the Great and
others, and formed part of the library of which the Breviary was the
ultimate compendium. In the lessons, as in the psalms, the order for
special days breaks in upon the normal order of ferial offices and
dislocates the scheme for consecutive reading. The lessons are read at
Matins (which is subdivided into three nocturns).

The _little chapters_ are very short lessons read at the other "hours."

The _versicles_ are short responsories used after the little chapters.

The _collects_ come at the close of the office and are short prayers
summing up the supplications of the congregation. They arise out of a
primitive practice on the part of the bishop (local president), examples of
which are found in the _Didach[=e]_ (Teaching of the Apostles) and in the
letters of Clement of Rome and Cyprian. With the crystallization of church
order improvisation in prayer largely gave place to set forms, and
collections of prayers were made which later developed into Sacramentaries
and Orationals. The collects of the Breviary are largely drawn from the
Gelasian and other Sacramentaries, and they are used to sum up the dominant
idea of the festival in connexion with which they happen to be used.

The difficulty of harmonizing the _Proprium de Tempore_ and the _Proprium
Sanctorum_, to which reference has been made, is only partly met in the
thirty-seven chapters of general rubrics. Additional help is given by a
kind of Catholic Churchman's Almanack, called the _Ordo Recitandi Divini
Officii_, published in different countries and dioceses, and giving, under
every day, minute directions for proper reading.

Every clerk in orders and every member of a religious order must publicly
join in or privately read aloud (_i.e._ using the lips as well as the
eyes--it takes about two hours in this way) the whole of the Breviary
services allotted for each day. In large churches the services are usually
grouped; _e.g._ Matins and Lauds (about 7.30 A.M.); Prime, Terce (High
Mass), Sext, and None (about 10 A.M.); Vespers and Compline (4 P.M.); and
from four to eight hours (depending on the amount of music and the number
of high masses) are thus spent in choir. Laymen do not use the Breviary as
a manual of devotion to any great extent.

The Roman Breviary has been translated into English (by the marquess of
Bute in 1879; new ed. with a trans, of the Martyrology, 1908), French and
German. The English version is noteworthy for its inclusion of the skilful
renderings of the ancient hymns by J.H. Newman, J.M. Neale and others.

AUTHORITIES.--F. Cabrol, _Introduction aux etudes liturgiques_; Probst,
_Kirchenlex_. ii., _s.v._ "Brevier"; Baeumer, _Geschichte des Breviers_
(Freiburg, 1895); P. Batiffol, _L'Histoire du breviaire romain_ (Paris,
1893; Eng. tr.); Baudot, _Le Breviaire romain_ (1907). A complete
bibliography is appended to the article by F. Cabrol in the _Catholic
Encyclopaedia_, vol. ii. (1908).

[1] It was approved by Clement VII. and Paul III., and permitted as a
substitute for the unrevised Breviary, until Pius V. in 1568 excluded it as
too short and too modern, and issued a reformed edition (_Breviarium
Pianum_, Pian Breviary) of the old Breviary.

[2] The Sarum Rite was much favoured in Scotland as a kind of protest
against the jurisdiction claimed by the church of York.

BREVIARY OF ALARIC (_Breviarium Alaricanum_), a collection of Roman law,
compiled by order of Alaric II., king of the Visigoths, with the advice of
his bishops and nobles, in the twenty-second year of his reign (A.D. 506).
It comprises sixteen books of the Theodosian code; the Novels of Theodosius
II., Valentinian III., Marcian, Majorianus and Severus; the Institutes of
Gaius; five books of the _Sententiae Receptae_ of Julius Paulus; thirteen
titles of the Gregorian code; two titles of the Hermogenian code; and a
fragment of the first book of the _Responsa Papiniani_. It is termed a code
(codex), in the certificate of Anianus, the king's referendary, but unlike
the code of Justinian, from which the writings of jurists were excluded, it
comprises both imperial constitutions (_leges_) and juridical treatises
(_jura_). From the circumstance that the Breviarium has prefixed to it a
royal rescript (_commonitorium_) directing that copies of it, certified
under the hand of Anianus, should be received exclusively as law throughout
the kingdom of the Visigoths, the compilation of the code has been
attributed to Anianus by many writers, and it is frequently designated the
Breviary of Anianus (Breviarium Aniani). The code, however, appears to have
been known amongst the Visigoths by the title of "Lex Romana," or "Lex
Theodosii," and it was not until the 16th century that the title of
"Breviarium" was introduced to distinguish it from a recast of the code,
which was introduced into northern Italy in the 9th century for the use of
the Romans in Lombardy. This recast of the Visigothic code has been
preserved in a MS. known as the Codex Utinensis, which was formerly kept in
the archives of the cathedral of Udine, but is now lost; and it was
published in the 18th century for the first time by P. Canciani in his
collection of ancient laws entitled _Barbarorum Leges Antiquae_. Another
MS. of this Lombard recast of the Visigothic code was discovered by Haenel
in the library of St Gall. The chief value of the Visigothic code consists
in the fact that it is the only collection of Roman Law in which the five
first books of the Theodosian code and five books of the _Sententiae
Receptae_ of Julius Paulus have been preserved, and until the discovery of
a MS. in the chapter library in Verona, which contained the greater part of
the Institutes of Gaius, it was the only work in which any portion of the
institutional writings of that great jurist had come down to us.

The most complete edition of the Breviarium will be found in the collection
of Roman law published under the title of _Jus Civile Ante-Justinianum_
(Berlin, 1815). See also G. Haenel's _Lex Romana Visigothorum_ (Berlin,
1847-1849).

BREWER, JOHN SHERREN (1810-1879), English historian, was born in Norwich in
1810, the son of a Baptist schoolmaster. He was educated at Queen's
College, Oxford, was ordained in the Church of England in 1837, and became
chaplain to a central London workhouse. In 1839 he was appointed lecturer
in classical literature at King's College, London, and in 1855 he became
professor of English language and literature and lecturer in modern
history, succeeding F.D. Maurice. Meanwhile from 1854 onwards he was also
engaged in journalistic work on the _Morning Herald_, _Morning Post_ and
_Standard_. In 1856 he was commissioned by the master of the rolls to
prepare a calendar of the state papers of Henry VIII., a work demanding a
vast amount of research. He was also made reader at the Rolls, and
subsequently preacher. In 1877 Disraeli secured for him the crown living of
Toppesfield, Essex. There he had time to continue his task of preparing his
_Letters and Papers of the Reign of King Henry VIII_., the Introductions to
which (published separately, under the title _The Reign of Henry VIII_., in
1884) form a scholarly and authoritative history of Henry VIII.'s reign.
New editions of several standard historical works were also produced under
Brewer's direction. He died at Toppesfield in February 1879.

[v.04 p.0506] BREWING, in the modern acceptation of the term, a series of
operations the object of which is to prepare an alcoholic beverage of a
certain kind--to wit, beer--mainly from cereals (chiefly malted barley),
hops and water. Although the art of preparing beer (_q.v._) or ale is a
very ancient one, there is very little information in the literature of the
subject as to the apparatus and methods employed in early times. It seems
fairly certain, however, that up to the 18th century these were of the most
primitive kind. With regard to _materials_, we know that prior to the
general introduction of the hop (see ALE) as a preservative and astringent,
a number of other bitter and aromatic plants had been employed with this
end in view. Thus J.L. Baker (_The Brewing Industry_) points out that the
Cimbri used the _Tamarix germanica_, the Scandinavians the fruit of the
sweet gale (_Myrica gale_), the Cauchi the fruit and the twigs of the
chaste tree (_Vitex agrius castus_), and the Icelanders the yarrow
(_Achillea millefolium_).

The preparation of beer on anything approaching to a manufacturing scale
appears, until about the 12th or 13th century, to have been carried on in
England chiefly in the monasteries; but as the brewers of London combined
to form an association in the reign of Henry IV., and were granted a
charter in 1445, it is evident that brewing as a special trade or industry
must have developed with some rapidity. After the Reformation the ranks of
the trade brewers were swelled by numbers of monks from the expropriated
monasteries. Until the 18th century the professional brewers, or brewers
for sale, as they are now called, brewed chiefly for the masses, the
wealthier classes preparing their own beer, but it then became gradually
apparent to the latter (owing no doubt to improved methods of brewing, and
for others reasons) that it was more economical and less troublesome to
have their beer brewed for them at a regular brewery. The usual charge was
30s. per barrel for bitter ale, and 8s. or so for small beer. This tendency
to centralize brewing operations became more and more marked with each
succeeding decade. Thus during 1895-1905 the number of private brewers
declined from 17,041 to 9930. Of the private brewers still existing, about
four-fifths were in the class exempted from beer duty, _i.e._ farmers
occupying houses not exceeding L10 annual value who brew for their
labourers, and other persons occupying houses not exceeding L15 annual
value. The private houses subject to both beer and licence duty produced
less than 20,000 barrels annually. There are no official figures as to the
number of "cottage brewers," that is, occupiers of dwellings not exceeding
L8 annual value; but taking everything into consideration it is probable
that more than 99% of the beer produced in the United Kingdom is brewed by
public brewers (brewers for sale). The disappearance of the smaller public
brewers or their absorption by the larger concerns has gone hand-in-hand
with the gradual extinction of the private brewer. In the year 1894-1895
8863 licences were issued to brewers for sale, and by 1904-1905 this number
had been reduced to 5164. There are numerous reasons for these changes in
the constitution of the brewing industry, chief among them being (a) the
increasing difficulty, owing partly to licensing legislation and its
administration, and partly to the competition of the great breweries, of
obtaining an adequate outlet for retail sale in the shape of licensed
houses; and (b) the fact that brewing has continuously become a more
scientific and specialized industry, requiring costly and complicated plant
and expert manipulation. It is only by employing the most up-to-date
machinery and expert knowledge that the modern brewer can hope to produce
good beer in the short time which competition and high taxation, &c., have
forced upon him. Under these conditions the small brewer tends to
extinction, and the public are ultimately the gainers. The relatively
non-alcoholic, lightly hopped and bright modern beers, which the small
brewer has not the means of producing, are a great advance on the muddy,
highly hopped and alcoholized beverages to which our ancestors were
accustomed.

The brewing trade has reached vast proportions in the United Kingdom. The
maximum production was 37,090,986 barrels in 1900, and while there has been
a steady decline since that year, the figures for 1905-1906--34,109,263
barrels--were in excess of those for any year preceding 1897. It is
interesting in this connexion to note that the writer of the article on
Brewing in the 9th edition of the _Encyclopaedia Britannica_ was of the
opinion that the brewing industry--which was then (1875) producing,
roughly, 25,000,000 barrels--had attained its maximum development. In the
year ending 30th September 1905 the beer duty received by the exchequer
amounted to L13,156,053. The number of brewers for sale was 5180. Of these
one firm, namely, Messrs Guinness, owning the largest brewery in the world,
brewed upwards of two million barrels, paying a sum of, roughly, one
million sterling to the revenue. Three other firms brewed close on a
million barrels or upwards. The quantity of malt used was 51,818,697
bushels; of unmalted corn, 125,671 bushels; of rice, flaked maize and
similar materials, 1,348,558 cwt.; of sugar, 2,746,615 cwt.; of hops,
62,360,817 lb; and of hop substitutes, 49,202 lb. The average specific
gravity of the beer produced in 1905-1906 was 1053.24. The quantity of beer
exported was 520,826; of beer imported, 57,194 barrels. It is curious to
note that the figures for exports and imports had remained almost
stationary for the last thirty years. By far the greater part of the beer
brewed is consumed in England. Thus of the total quantity retained for
consumption in 1905-1906, 28,590,563 barrels were consumed in England,
1,648,463 in Scotland, and 3,265,084 in Ireland. In 1871 it was calculated
by Professor Leone Levi that the capital invested in the liquor trade in
the United Kingdom was L117,000,000. In 1908 this figure might be safely
doubled. A writer in the _Brewers' Almanack_ for 1906 placed the capital
invested in limited liability breweries alone at L185,000,000. If we allow
for over-capitalization, it seems fairly safe to say that, prior to the
introduction of the Licensing Bill of 1908, the market value of the
breweries in the United Kingdom, together with their licensed property, was
in the neighbourhood of L120,000,000, to which might be added another
L20,000,000 for the value of licences not included in the above
calculation; the total capital actually sunk in the whole liquor trade
(including the wine and spirit industries and trades) being probably not
far short of L250,000,000, and the number of persons directly engaged in or
dependent on the liquor trade being under-estimated at 2,000,000. (For
comparative production and consumption see BEER.)

_Taxation and Regulations_.--The development of the brewing industry in
England is intimately interwoven with the history of its taxation, and the
regulations which have from time to time been formed for the safeguarding
of the revenue. The first duty on beer in the United Kingdom was imposed in
the reign of Charles II. (1660), namely 2s. 6d. per barrel on strong and
6d. per barrel on weak beer. This was gradually increased, amounting to 4s.
9d. on strong and 1s. 3d. on weak beer in the last decade of the 17th
century, and to 8s. to 10s. in the year 1800, at which rate it continued
until the repeal of the beer duty in 1830. A duty on malt was first imposed
in the reign of William III. (1697), and from that date until 1830 both
beer duty and malt tax were charged. The rate at first was under 7d. per
bushel, but this was increased up to 2s. 7d. prior to the first repeal of
the beer duty (1830), and to 4s. 6d. after the repeal. In 1829 the joint
beer and malt taxes amounted to no less than 13s. 8d. per barrel, or 41/2d.
per gallon, as against 21/2d. at the present day. From 1856 until the
abolition of the malt tax, the latter remained constant at a fraction under
2s. 81/2d. A _hop duty_ varying from 1d. to 21/2d. per pound was in existence
between 1711 and 1862. One of the main reasons for the abolition of the hop
duty was the fact that, owing to the uncertainty of the crop, the amount
paid to the revenue was subject to wide fluctuations. Thus in 1855 the
revenue from this source amounted to L728,183, in 1861 to only L149,700.

It was not until 1847 that the use of sugar in brewing was permitted, and
in 1850 the first sugar tax, amounting to 1s. 4d. per cwt., was imposed. It
varied from this figure up to 6s. 6d. in 1854, and in 1874, when the
general duty on sugar was repealed, it was raised to 11s. 6d., at which
rate it remained until 1880, when it was repealed simultaneously with the
malt duty. In 1901 a general sugar tax of 4s. 2d. and under (according to
the percentage of actual sugar contained) was imposed, but no drawback was
allowed to brewers using sugar, and therefore--and this obtains at the
present day--sugar used in brewing pays the general tax and also the beer
duty.

By the Free Mash-Tun Act of 1880, the duty was taken off the malt and
placed on the beer, or, more properly speaking, on the wort; maltsters' and
brewers' licences were repealed, and in lieu thereof an annual licence duty
of L1 payable by every brewer for sale was [v.04 p.0507] imposed. The chief
feature of this act was that, on and after the 1st of October 1880, a beer
duty was imposed in lieu of the old malt tax, at the rate of 6s. 3d. per
barrel of 36 gallons, at a specific gravity of 1.057, and the regulations
for charging the duty were so framed as to leave the brewer practically
unrestricted as to the description of malt or corn and sugar, or other
description of saccharine substitutes (other than deleterious articles or
drugs), which he might use in the manufacture or colouring of beer. This
freedom in the choice of materials has continued down to the present time,
except that the use of "saccharin" (a product derived from coal-tar) was
prohibited in 1888, the reason being that this substance gives an apparent
palate-fulness to beer equal to roughly 4 deg. in excess of its real gravity,
the revenue suffering thereby. In 1889 the duty on beer was increased by a
reduction in the standard of gravity from 1.057 to 1.055, and in 1894 a
further 6d. per barrel was added. The duty thus became 6s. 9d. per barrel,
at a gravity of 1.055, which was further increased to 7s. 9d. per barrel by
the war budget of 1900, at which figure it stood in 1909. (See also LIQUOR
LAWS.)

Prior to 1896, rice, flaked maize (see below), and other similar
preparations had been classed as malt or corn in reference to their
wort-producing powers, but after that date they were deemed sugar[1] in
that regard. By the new act (1880) 42 lb weight of corn, or 28 lb weight of
sugar, were to be deemed the equivalent of a bushel of malt, and a brewer
was expected by one of the modes of charge to have brewed at least a barrel
(36 gallons) of worts (less 4% allowed for wastage) at the standard gravity
for every two bushels of malt (or its equivalents) used by him in brewing;
but where, owing to lack of skill or inferior machinery, a brewer cannot
obtain the standard quantity of wort from the standard equivalent of
material, the charge is made not on the wort, but directly on the material.
By the new act, licences at the annual duty of L1 on brewers for sale, and
of 6s. (subsequently modified by 44 Vict. c. 12, and 48 and 49 Vict. c. 5,
&c., to 4s.) or 9s., as the case might be, on any other brewers, were
required. The regulations dealing with the mashing operations are very
stringent. Twenty-four hours at least before mashing the brewer must enter
in his brewing book (provided by the Inland Revenue) the day and hour for
commencing to mash malt, corn, &c., or to dissolve sugar; and the date of
making such entry; and also, two hours at least before the notice hour for
mashing, the quantity of malt, corn, &c., and sugar to be used, and the day
and hour when all the worts will be drawn off the grains in the mash-tun.
The worts of each brewing must be collected within twelve hours of the
commencement of the collection, and the brewer must within a given time
enter in his book the quantity and gravity of the worts before
fermentation, the number and name of the vessel, and the date of the entry.
The worts must remain in the same vessel undisturbed for twelve hours after
being collected, unless previously taken account of by the officer. There
are other regulations, _e.g._ those prohibiting the mixing of worts of
different brewings unless account has been taken of each separately, the
alteration of the size or shape of any gauged vessel without notice, and so
on.

_Taxation of Beer in Foreign Countries_.--The following table shows the
nature of the tax and the amount of the same calculated to English barrels.

        Country.           Nature of Tax.    Amount per English
                                               Barrel (round
                                                  numbers)
United States                 Beer tax            5s. 9d.
Germany --
---- N. German Customs        Malt tax             1s. 6d
Union
---- Bavaria                  Malt tax      3s. 5d. to 4s. 8d.,
                                                according to
                                             quantity produced
Belgium                       Malt tax            2s. 9d.
France                         On Wort            4s. 1d.
Holland                       On cubic      About 1s. 9d. to 3s.
                             contents of     3d., according to
                           Mash-Tun or on         quality
                                Malt
Austro-Hungarian Empire        On Wort            6s. 8d.
Russia                        Malt tax         5s. to 6s. 8d.

MATERIALS USED IN BREWING.--These are water, malt (_q.v._), hops (_q.v._),
various substitutes for the two latter, and preservatives.

_Water_.--A satisfactory supply of water--which, it may here be mentioned,
is always called _liquor_ in the brewery--is a matter of great importance
to the brewer. Certain waters, for instance, those contaminated to any
extent with organic matter, cannot be used at all in brewing, as they give
rise to unsatisfactory fermentation, cloudiness and abnormal flavour.
Others again, although suited to the production of one type of beer, are
quite unfit for the brewing of another. For black beers a soft water is a
desideratum, for ales of the Burton type a hard water is a necessity. For
the brewing of mild ales, again, a water containing a certain proportion of
chlorides is required. The presence or absence of certain mineral
substances as such in the finished beer is not, apparently, a matter of any
moment as regards flavour or appearance, but the importance of the role
played by these substances in the brewing process is due to the influence
which they exert on the solvent action of the water on the various
constituents of the malt, and possibly of the hops. The excellent quality
of the Burton ales was long ago surmised to be due mainly to the well water
obtainable in that town. On analysing Burton water it was found to contain
a considerable quantity of calcium sulphate--gypsum--and of other calcium
and magnesium salts, and it is now a well-known fact that good bitter ales
cannot be brewed except with waters containing these substances in
sufficient quantities. Similarly, good mild ale waters should contain a
certain quantity of sodium chloride, and waters for stout very little
mineral matter, excepting perhaps the carbonates of the alkaline earths,
which are precipitated on boiling.

The following analyses (from W.J. Sykes, _The Principles and Practice of
Brewing_) are fairly illustrative of typical brewing waters.

      _Burton Water_ (Pale Ale)
                    Grains per Gallon
Sodium Chloride                  3.90
Potassium Sulphate               1.59
Sodium Nitrate                   1.97
Calcium Sulphate                77.87
Calcium Carbonate                7.62
Magnesium Carbonate             21.31
Silica and Alumina               0.98
       _Dublin Water_ (Stout).
Sodium Chloride                  1.83
Calcium Sulphate                 4.45
Calcium Carbonate               14.21
Magnesium Carbonate              0.90
Iron Oxide and                   0.24
Alumina
Silica                           0.26
          _Mild Ale Water_.
Sodium Chloride                 35.14
Calcium Chloride                 3.88
Calcium Sulphate                 6.23
Calcium Carbonate                4.01
Iron Oxide and                   0.24
Alumina
Silica                           0.22

Our knowledge of the essential chemical constituents of brewing waters
enables brewers in many cases to treat an unsatisfactory supply
artificially in such a manner as to modify its character in a favourable
sense. Thus, if a soft water only is to hand, and it is desired to brew a
bitter ale, all that is necessary is to add a sufficiency of gypsum,
magnesium sulphate and calcium chloride. If it is desired to convert a soft
water lacking in chlorides into a satisfactory mild ale liquor, the
addition of 30-40 grains of sodium chloride will be necessary. On the other
hand, to convert a hard water into a soft supply is scarcely feasible for
brewing purposes. To the substances used for treating brewing liquors
already mentioned we may add kainite, a naturally deposited composite salt
containing potassium and magnesium sulphates and magnesium chloride.

_Malt Substitutes._--Prior to the repeal of the Malt Acts, the only
substitute for malt allowed in the United Kingdom was sugar. The quantity
of the latter employed was 295,865 cwt. in 1870, 1,136,434 cwt. in 1880,
and 2,746,615 cwt. in 1905; that is to say, that the quantity used had been
practically trebled during the last twenty-five years, although the
quantity of malt employed had not materially increased. At the same time
other substitutes, such as unmalted corn and preparations of rice and
maize, had come into favour, the quantity of these substances used being in
1905 125,671 bushels of unmalted corn and 1,348,558 cwt. of rice, maize,
&c.

The following statistics with regard to the use of malt substitutes in the
United Kingdom are not without interest.

[v.04 p.0508]

Year.    Quantities of    Quantities of   Percentage
         Malt and Corn    Sugar, Rice,        of
            used in      Maize, &c. used  Substitutes
           Brewing.        in Brewing.     to Total
                                          Material.
           Bushels.         Bushels.
 1878        59,388,905        3,825,148        6.05
 1883     [2]51,331,451     [3]4,503,680        8.06
 1890     [2]55,359,964     [3]7,904,708       12.48
 1895        53,731,177       10,754,510       16.66
 1905        51,942,368       15,706,413       23.22

The causes which have led to the largely increased use of substitutes in
the United Kingdom are of a somewhat complex nature. In the first place, it
was not until the malt tax was repealed that the brewer was able to avail
himself of the surplus diastatic energy present in malt, for the purpose of
transforming starch (other than that in malted grain) into sugar. The
diastatic enzyme or ferment (see below, under _Mashing_) of malted barley
is present in that material in great excess, and a part of this surplus
energy may be usefully employed in converting the starch of unmalted grain
into sugar. The brewer has found also that brewing operations are
simplified and accelerated by the use of a certain proportion of
substitutes, and that he is thereby enabled appreciably to increase his
turn-over, _i.e._ he can make more beer in a given time from the same
plant. Certain classes of substitutes, too, are somewhat cheaper than malt,
and in view of the keenness of modern competition it is not to be wondered
at that the brewer should resort to every legitimate means at his disposal
to keep down costs. It has been contended, and apparently with much reason,
that if the use of substitutes were prohibited this would not lead to an
increased use of domestic barley, inasmuch as the supply of home barley
suitable for malting purposes is of a limited nature. A return to the
policy of "malt and hops only" would therefore lead to an increased use of
foreign barley, and to a diminution in the demand for home barley, inasmuch
as sugar and prepared cereals, containing as they do less nitrogen, &c.
than even the well-cured, sun-dried foreign barleys, are better diluents
than the latter. At the same time, it is an undoubted fact that an
excessive use of substitutes leads to the production of beer of poor
quality. The better class of brewer rarely uses more than 15-20%, knowing
that beyond that point the loss of flavour and quality will in the long run
become a more serious item than any increased profits which he might
temporarily gain.

With regard to the nature of the substitutes or adjuncts for barley malt
more generally employed, raw grain (unmalted barley, wheat, rice, maize,
&c.) is not used extensively in Great Britain, but in America brewers
employ as much as 50%, and even more, of maize, rice or similar materials.
The maize and rice preparations mostly used in England are practically
starch pure and simple, substantially the whole of the oil, water, and
other subsidiary constituents of the grain being removed. The germ of maize
contains a considerable proportion of an oil of somewhat unpleasant
flavour, which has to be eliminated before the material is fit for use in
the mash-tun. After degerming, the maize is unhusked, wetted, submitted to
a temperature sufficient to rupture the starch cells, dried, and finally
rolled out in a flaky condition. Rice is similarly treated.

The _sugars_ used are chiefly cane sugar, glucose and invert sugar--the
latter commonly known as "saccharum." Cane sugar is mostly used for the
preparation of heavy mild ales and stouts, as it gives a peculiarly sweet
and full flavour to the beer, to which, no doubt, the popularity of this
class of beverage is largely due. _Invert sugar_ is prepared by the action
either of acid or of yeast on cane sugar. The chemical equation
representing the conversion (or inversion) of cane sugar is:--

  C12H22O11  +  H2O  =  C6H12O6   +  C6H12O6.
  cane sugar   water    glucose      fructose
                        ----invert sugar----

Invert sugar is so called because the mixture of glucose and fructose which
forms the "invert" is laevo-rotatory, whereas cane sugar is dextro-rotatory
to the plane of polarized light. The preparation of invert sugar by the
acid process consists in treating the cane sugar in solution with a little
mineral acid, removing the excess of the latter by means of chalk, and
concentrating to a thick syrup. The yeast process (Tompson's), which makes
use of the inverting power of one of the enzymes (invertase) contained in
ordinary yeast, is interesting. The cane sugar solution is pitched with
yeast at about 55 deg. C., and at this comparatively high temperature the
inversion proceeds rapidly, and fermentation is practically impossible.
When this operation is completed, the whole liquid (including the yeast) is
run into the boiling contents of the copper. This method is more suited to
the preparation of invert in the brewery itself than the acid process,
which is almost exclusively used in special sugar works. Glucose, which is
one of the constituents of invert sugar, is largely used by itself in
brewing. It is, however, never prepared from invert sugar for this purpose,
but directly from starch by means of acid. By the action of dilute boiling
acid on starch the latter is rapidly converted first into a mixture of
dextrine and maltose and then into glucose. The proportions of glucose,
dextrine and maltose present in a commercial glucose depend very much on
the duration of the boiling, the strength of the acid, and the extent of
the pressure at which the starch is converted. In England the materials
from which glucose is manufactured are generally sago, rice and purified
maize. In Germany potatoes form the most common raw material, and in
America purified Indian corn is ordinarily employed.

_Hop substitutes_, as a rule, are very little used. They mostly consist of
quassia, gentian and camomile, and these substitutes are quite harmless
_per se_, but impart an unpleasantly rough and bitter taste to the beer.

_Preservatives_.--These are generally, in fact almost universally, employed
nowadays for draught ales; to a smaller extent for stock ales. The light
beers in vogue to-day are less alcoholic, more lightly hopped, and more
quickly brewed than the beers of the last generation, and in this respect
are somewhat less stable and more likely to deteriorate than the latter
were. The preservative in part replaces the alcohol and the hop extract,
and shortens the brewing time. The preservatives mostly used are the
bisulphites of lime and potash, and these, when employed in small
quantities, are generally held to be harmless.

BREWING OPERATIONS.--The general scheme of operations in an English brewery
will be readily understood if reference be made to fig. 1, which represents
an 8-quarter brewery on the _gravitation system_, the principle of which is
that all materials to be employed are pumped or hoisted to the highest
point required, to start with, and that subsequently no further pumping or
hoisting is required, the materials (in the shape of water, malt, wort or
hops, &c.) being conveyed from one point to another by the force of
gravity.

The malt, which is hoisted to the top floor, after cleaning and grading is
conveyed to the _Malt Mill_, where it is crushed. Thence the ground malt,
or "grist" as it is now called, passes to the _Grist Hopper_, and from the
latter to the _Mashing Machine_, in which it is intimately mixed with hot
water from the _Hot Liquor Vessel_. From the mashing machine the mixed
grist and "liquor" pass to the _Mash-Tun_, where the starch of the malt is
rendered soluble. From the mash-tun the clear wort passes to the _Copper_,
where it is boiled with hops. From the copper the boiled wort passes to the
_Hop Back_, where the insoluble hop constituents are separated from the
wort. From the hop back the wort passes to the _Cooler_, from the latter to
the _Refrigerator_, thence (for the purpose of enabling the revenue
officers to assess the duty) to the _Collecting Vessel_,[4] and finally to
the _Fermenting Vessels_, in which the wort is transformed into "green"
beer. The latter is then cleansed, and finally racked and stored.

It will be seen from the above that brewing consists of seven distinct main
processes, which may be classed as follows: (1) Grinding; (2) Mashing; (3)
Boiling; (4) Cooling; (5) Fermenting; (6) Cleansing; (7) Racking and
Storing.

_Grinding_.--In most modern breweries the malt passes, on its way [v.04
p.0509] from the bins to the mill, through a cleaning and grading
apparatus, and then through an automatic measuring machine. The mills,
which exist in a variety of designs, are of the smooth roller type, and are
so arranged that the malt is _crushed_ rather than ground. If the malt is
ground too fine, difficulties arise in regard to efficient drainage in the
mash-tun and subsequent clarification. On the other hand, if the crushing
is too coarse the subsequent extraction of soluble matter in the mash-tun
is incomplete, and an inadequate yield results.

[Illustration: FIG. 1.--An 8-quarter Brewery (Messrs. L. Lumley & Co.,
Ltd.).]

[Illustration: FIG. 2.--Mash-tun with mashing machine.]

_Mashing_ is a process which consists mainly in extracting, by means of
water at an adequate temperature, the soluble matters pre-existent in the
malt, and in converting the insoluble starch and a great part of the
insoluble nitrogenous compounds into soluble and partly fermentable
products. Mashing is, without a doubt, the most important of the brewing
processes, for it is largely in the mash-tun that the character of the beer
to be brewed is determined. In modern practice the malt and the mashing
"liquor" (_i.e._ water) are introduced into the mash-tun simultaneously, by
means of the mashing machine (fig. 2, A). This is generally a cylindrical
metal vessel, commanding the mash-tun and provided with a central shaft and
screw. The grist (as the crushed malt is called) enters the mashing machine
from the grist case above, and the liquor is introduced at the back. The
screw is rotated rapidly, and so a thorough mixture of the grist and liquor
takes place as they travel along the mashing machine. The mash-tun (fig. 2)
is a large metal or wooden vessel, fitted with a false bottom composed of
plates perforated with numerous small holes or slits (C). This arrangement
is necessary in order to obtain a proper separation of the "wort" (as the
liquid portion of the finished mash is called) from the spent grains. The
mash-tun is also provided with a stirring apparatus (the _rakes_) so that
the grist and liquor may be intimately mixed (D), and an automatic
sprinkler, the _sparger_ (fig. 2, B, and fig. 3), which is employed in
order to wash out the wort remaining in the grains. The sparger consists of
a number of hollow arms radiating from a common centre and pierced by a
number of small perforations. The common central vessel from which the
sparge-arms radiate is mounted in such a manner that it rotates
automatically when a stream of water is admitted, so that a constant fine
spray covers the whole tun when the sparger is in operation. There are also
pipes for admitting "liquor" to the bottom of the tun, and for carrying the
wort from the latter to the "underback" or "copper."

The grist and liquor having been introduced into the tun (either by means
of the mashing machine or separately), the rakes are set going, so that the
mash may become thoroughly homogeneous, and after a short time the rakes
are stopped and the mash allowed to rest, usually for a period of about two
hours. After this, "taps are set"--_i.e._ communication is established
between the mash-tun and the vessel into which the wort runs--and the
sparger is started. In this manner the whole of the wort or extract is
separated from the grains. The quantity of water employed is, in all, from
two to three barrels to the quarter (336 lb) of malt.

In considering the process of mashing, one might almost say the process of
brewing, it is essential to remember that the type and quality of the beer
to be produced (see MALT) depends almost entirely (a) on the kind of malt
employed, and (b) on the mashing temperature. In other words, quality may
be controlled on the kiln or in the mash-tun, or both. Viewed in this
light, the following theoretical methods for preparing different types of
beer are possible:--(1) high kiln heats and high mashing temperatures; (2)
high kiln heats and low mashing temperatures; (3) low kiln heats and high
mashing temperatures; and (4) low kiln heats and low mashing temperatures.
In practice all these combinations, together with many intermediate ones,
are met with, and it is not too much to say that the whole science of
modern brewing is based upon them. It is plain, then, that the mashing
temperature will depend on the kind of beer that is to be produced, and on
the kind of malt employed. For stouts and black beers generally, a mashing
temperature of 148 deg. to 150 deg. F. is most usual; for pale or stock ales, 150 deg.
to 154 deg. F.; and for mild running beers, 154 deg. to 149 deg. F. The range of
temperatures employed in brewing English beers is a very limited one as
compared with foreign mashing methods, and does not range further,
practically speaking, than from 140 deg. to 160 deg. F. The effect of higher
temperatures is chiefly to cripple the enzyme or "ferment" diastase, which,
as already said, is the agent which converts the insoluble starch into
soluble dextrin, sugar and intermediate products. The higher the mashing
temperature, the more the diastase will be crippled in its action, and the
more dextrinous (non-fermentable) matter as compared with maltose
(fermentable sugar) will be formed. A pale or stock ale, which is a type of
beer that must be "dry" and that will keep, requires to contain a
relatively high proportion of dextrin and little maltose, and, in its
preparation, therefore, a high mashing temperature will be employed. On the
other hand, a mild running ale, which is a full, sweet beer, intended for
rapid consumption, will be obtained by means of low mashing temperatures,
which produce relatively little dextrin, but a good deal of maltose, _i.e._
sweet and readily fermentable matter.

[Illustration: FIG. 3.--Sparger.]

Diastase is not the only enzyme present in malt. There is also a ferment
which renders a part of the nitrogenous matter soluble. This again is
affected by temperature in much the same way as diastase. Low heats tend to
produce much non-coagulable [v.04 p.0510] nitrogenous matter, which is
undesirable in a stock beer, as it tends to produce fret and side
fermentations. With regard to the kind of malt and other materials employed
in producing various types of beer, pale ales are made either from pale
malt (generally a mixture of English and fine foreign, such as Smyrna,
California) only, or from pale malt and a little flaked maize, rice, invert
sugar or glucose. Running beers (mild ale) are made from a mixture of pale
and amber malts, sugar and flaked goods; stout, from a mixture of pale,
amber and roasted (black) malts only, or with the addition of a little
sugar or flaked maize.

When raw grain is employed, the process of mashing is slightly modified.
The maize, rice or other grain is usually gelatinized in a vessel (called a
_converter_ or _cooker_) entirely separated from the mash-tun, by means of
steam at a relatively high temperature, mostly with, but occasionally
without, the addition of some malt meal. After about half an hour the
gelatinized mass is mixed with the main mash, and this takes place shortly
before taps are set. This is possible inasmuch as the starch, being already
in a highly disintegrated condition, is very rapidly converted. By working
on the limited-decoction system (see below), it is possible to make use of
a fair percentage of raw grain in the mash-tun proper, thus doing away with
the "converter" entirely.

_The Filter Press Process._--The ordinary mash-tun process, as described
above, possesses the disadvantage that only coarse grists can be employed.
This entails loss of extract in several ways. To begin with, the sparging
process is at best a somewhat inefficient method for washing out the last
portions of the wort, and again, when the malt is at all hard or "steely,"
starch conversion is by no means complete. These disadvantages are overcome
by the filter press process, which was first introduced into Great Britain
by the Belgian engineer P. Meura. The malt, in this method of brewing, is
ground quite fine, and although an ordinary mash-tun may be used for
mashing, the separation of the clear wort from the solid matter takes place
in the filter press, which retains the very finest particles with ease. It
is also a simple matter to wash out the wort from the filter cake in the
presses, and experience has shown that markedly increased yields are thus
obtained. In the writer's opinion, there is little doubt that in the future
this, or a similar process, will find a very wide application.

_Boiling_.--From the mash-tun the wort passes to the _copper_. If it is not
possible to arrange the plant so that the coppers are situated beneath the
mash-tuns (as is the case in breweries arranged on the _gravitation
system_), an intermediate collecting vessel (the underback) is interposed,
and from this the wort is pumped into the copper. The latter is a large
copper vessel heated by direct fire or steam. Modern coppers are generally
closed in with a dome-shaped head, but many old-fashioned open coppers are
still to be met with, in fact pale-ale brewers prefer open coppers. In the
closed type the wort is frequently boiled under slight pressure. When the
wort has been raised to the boil, the hops or a part thereof are added, and
the boiling is continued generally from an hour to three hours, according
to the type of beer. The objects of boiling, briefly put, are: (1)
sterilization of the wort; (2) extraction from the hops of substances that
give flavour and aroma to the beer; (3) the coagulation and precipitation
of a part of the nitrogenous matter (the coagulable albuminoids), which, if
left in, would cause cloudiness and fret, &c., in the finished beer; (4)
the concentration of the wort. At least three distinct substances are
extracted from the hops in boiling. First, the _hop tannin_, which,
combining with a part of the proteids derived from the malt, precipitates
them; second, the _hop resin_, which acts as a preservative and bitter;
third, the _hop oil_, to which much of the fine aroma of beer is due. The
latter is volatile, and it is customary, therefore, not to add the whole of
the hops to the wort when it commences to boil, but to reserve about a
third until near the end of the copper stage. The quantity of hops employed
varies according to the type of beer, from about 3 lb to 15 lb per quarter
(336 lb) of malt. For mild ales and porters about 3 to 4 lb, for light pale
ales and light stouts 6 to 10 lb, and for strong ales and stouts 9 to 15 lb
of hops are employed.

_Cooling_.--When the wort has boiled the necessary time, it is turned into
the _hop back_ to settle. A hop back is a wooden or metal vessel, fitted
with a false bottom of perforated plates; the latter retain the spent hops,
the wort being drawn off into the coolers. After resting for a brief period
in the hop back, the bright wort is run into the _coolers_. The cooler is a
very shallow vessel of great area, and the result of the exposure of the
hot wort to a comparatively large volume of air is that a part of the hop
constituents and other substances contained in the wort are rendered
insoluble and are precipitated. It was formerly considered absolutely
essential that this hot aeration should take place, but in many breweries
nowadays coolers are not used, the wort being run direct from the hop back
to the refrigerator. There is much to be said for this procedure, as the
exposure of hot wort in the cooler is attended with much danger of
bacterial and wild yeast infection, but it is still a moot point whether
the cooler or its equivalent can be entirely dispensed with for all classes
of beers. A rational alteration would appear to be to place the cooler in
an air-tight chamber supplied with purified and sterilized air. This
principle has already been applied to the refrigerator, and apparently with
success. In America the cooler is frequently replaced by a cooling tank, an
enclosed vessel of some depth, capable of artificial aeration. It is not
practicable, in any case, to cool the wort sufficiently on the cooler to
bring it to the proper temperature for the fermentation stage, and for this
purpose, therefore, the _refrigerator_ is employed. There are several kinds
of refrigerators, the main distinction being that some are vertical, others
horizontal; but the principle in each case is much the same, and consists
in allowing a thin film or stream of wort to trickle over a series of pipes
through which cold water circulates. Fig. 5, Plate I., shows refrigerators,
employed in Messrs Allsopp's lager beer brewery, at work.

_Fermenting_.--By the process of fermentation the wort is converted into
beer. By the action of living yeast cells (see FERMENTATION) the sugar
contained in the wort is split up into alcohol and carbonic acid, and a
number of subsidiary reactions occur. There are two main systems of
fermentation, the _top fermentation_ system, which is that employed in the
United Kingdom, and the _bottom fermentation_ system, which is that used
for the production of beers of the continental ("lager") type. The wort,
generally at a temperature of about 60 deg. F. (this applies to all the systems
excepting B [see below], in which the temperature is higher), is "pitched"
with liquid yeast (or "barm," as it is often called) at the rate of,
according to the type and strength of the beer to be made, 1 to 4 lb to the
barrel. After a few hours a slight froth or scum makes its appearance on
the surface of the liquid. At the end of a further short period this
develops into a light curly mass (_cauliflower_ or _curly head_), which
gradually becomes lighter and more solid in appearance, and is then known
as _rocky head_. This in its turn shrinks to a compact mass--the _yeasty
head_--which emits great bubbles of gas with a hissing sound. At this point
the _cleansing_ of the beer--_i.e._ the separation of the yeast from the
liquid--has fairly commenced, and it is let down (except in the skimming
and Yorkshire systems [see below]) into the pontos or unions, as the case
may be. During fermentation the temperature rises considerably, and in
order to prevent an excessive temperature being obtained (70-75 deg. F. should
be the maximum) the fermenting vessels are fitted with "attemperators,"
_i.e._ a system of pipes through which cold water may be run.

_Cleansing_.--In England the methods of applying the top fermentation
system may be classified as follows: (A) _The Cleansing System_: (a)
Skimming System, (b) Dropping System (pontos or ordinary dropping system),
(c) Burton Union System. (B) _The Yorkshire Stone Square System_.

[Illustration: FIG. 4.--Fermenting Round.
A, Skimmer; B, Parachute; C, Attemperator.]

(A) In (a) the _Skimming System_ the fermentation from start to finish
takes place in wooden vessels (termed "squares" or "rounds"), fitted with
an attemperator and a parachute or other similar skimming device for
removing or "skimming" the yeast at the end of the fermentation (fig. 4).
The principle of (b) the _Dropping System_ is that the beer undergoes only
the main fermentation in the "round" or "square," and is then dropped down
into a second vessel or vessels, in which fermentation and cleansing are
completed. The _ponto_ system of dropping, which is now somewhat
old-fashioned, consists in discharging the beer into a series of vat-like
vessels, fitted with a peculiarly-shaped overflow lip. The yeast works its
way out of the vessel over the lip, and then flows into a gutter and is
collected. The pontos are kept filled with beer by means of a vessel placed
at a higher level. In the _ordinary_ dropping system the partly fermented
beer is let down from the "squares" and "rounds" into large vessels, termed
dropping or skimming "backs." These are fitted with attemperators, and
parachutes for the removal of yeast, in much the same way as in the
skimming system. As a rule the parachute covers the whole width of the
back. (c) The _Burton Union System_ is really an improved ponto system. A
series of casks, supplied with beer at the cleansing stage from a feed
vessel, are mounted so that they may rotate axially. Each cask is fitted
with an attemperator, a pipe and cock at the base for the removal of the
finished beer and "bottoms," and lastly with a swan neck fitting through a
bung-hole and commanding a common gutter. This system yields excellent
results for certain classes of beers, and many Burton brewers think it is
essential for obtaining [v.04 p.0511] the Burton character. Fig. 6 (Plate
II.) shows the process in operation in Messrs Allsopp's brewery.

(B) _The Stone Square System_, which is only used to a certain extent
(exclusively in the north of England), practically consists in pumping the
fermenting wort from one to the other of two superimposed square vessels,
connected with one another by means of a man-hole and a valve. These
squares are built of stone and kept very cool. At the end of the
fermentation the yeast (after closing the man-hole) is removed from the top
square.

_Racking, &c._--After the fermentation and cleansing operations are
completed, the beer is racked off (sometimes after passing a few hours in a
settling tank) into storage vessels or trade casks. The finest "stock" and
"pale" ales are stored from six weeks to three months prior to going out,
but "running" beers (mild ales, &c.) are frequently sent out of the brewery
within a week or ten days of mashing. It is usual to add some hops in cask
(this is called _dry hopping_) in the case of many of the better beers.
Running beers, which must be put into condition rapidly, or beers that have
become flat, are generally _primed_. Priming consists in adding a small
quantity of sugar solution to the beer in cask. This rapidly ferments and
so produces "condition."

_Fining_.--As a very light article is desired nowadays, and this has to be
provided in a short time, artificial means must be resorted to, in order to
replace the natural fining or brightening which storage brings about.
_Finings_ generally consist of a solution or semi-solution of isinglass in
sour beer, or in a solution of tartaric acid or of sulphurous acid. After
the finings are added to the beer and the barrels have been well rolled,
the finings slowly precipitate (or work out through the bung-hole) and
carry with them the matter which would otherwise render the beer turbid.

_Bottling_.--Formerly it was the general custom to brew a special beer for
bottling, and this practice is still continued by some brewers. It is
generally admitted that the special brew, matured by storage and an
adequate secondary fermentation, produces the best beer for bottling, but
the modern taste for a very light and bright bottled beer at a low cost has
necessitated the introduction of new methods. The most interesting among
these is the "chilling" and "carbonating" system. In this the beer, when it
is ripe for racking, is first "chilled," that is, cooled to a very low
temperature. As a result, there is an immediate deposition of much matter
which otherwise would require prolonged time to settle. The beer is then
filtered and so rendered quite bright, and finally, in order to produce
immediate "condition," is "carbonated," _i.e._ impregnated under pressure
with carbon dioxide (carbonic acid gas).

FOREIGN BREWING AND BEERS.--The system of brewing which differs most widely
from the English _infusion_ and _top fermentation_ method is the
_decoction_ and _bottom fermentation_ system, so widely employed, chiefly
on the continent of Europe, for the production of beers of the "lager"
type.

The method pursued in the decoction system is broadly as follows:--After
the grist has been mashed with cold water until a homogeneous mixture
ensues, sufficient hot water is introduced into the mash-tun to raise the
temperature to 85-100 deg. F., according to circumstances. Thereupon, about
one-third of the mash (including the "goods") is transferred to the _Maisch
Kessel_ (mash copper), in which it is gradually brought to a temperature of
(about) 165 deg. F., and this heat is maintained until the mash becomes
transparent. The _Dickmaische_, as this portion is called, is then raised
to the boil, and the ebullition sustained between a quarter and
three-quarters of an hour. Just sufficient of the _Dickmaische_ is returned
to the mash-tun proper to raise the temperature of the whole to 111-125 deg.
F., and after a few minutes a third is again withdrawn and treated as
before, to form the second "thick mash." When the latter has been returned
to the mash-tun the whole is thoroughly worked up, allowed to stand in
order that the solids may deposit, and then another third (called the
_Laeutermaische_ or "clear mash") is withdrawn, boiled until the coagulable
albuminoids are precipitated, and finally reconveyed to the mash-tun, where
the mashing is continued for some time, the final heat being rather over
160 deg. F. The wort, after boiling with hops and cooling, much as in the
English system, is subjected to the peculiar system of fermentation called
_bottom fermentation_. In this system the "pitching" and fermentation take
place at a very low temperature and, compared with the English system, in
very small vessels. The fermenting cellars are maintained at a temperature
of about 37-38 deg. F., and the temperature of the fermenting wort does not
rise above 50 deg. F. The yeast, which is of a different type from that
employed in the English system, remains at the bottom of the fermenting
tun, and hence is derived the name of "bottom fermentation" (see
FERMENTATION). The primary fermentation lasts about eleven to twelve days
(as compared with three days on the English system), and the beer is then
run into store (lager) casks where it remains at a temperature approaching
the freezing-point of water for six weeks to six months, according to the
time of the year and the class of the beer. As to the relative character
and stability of decoction and infusion beers, the latter are, as a rule,
more alcoholic; but the former contain more unfermented malt extract, and
are therefore, broadly speaking, more nutritive. Beers of the German type
are less heavily hopped and more peptonized than English beers, and more
highly charged with carbonic acid, which, owing to the low fermentation and
storing temperatures, is retained for a comparatively long time and keeps
the beer in condition. On the other hand, infusion beers are of a more
stable and stimulating character. It is impossible to keep "lager" beer on
draught in the ordinary sense of the term in England. It will not keep
unless placed on ice, and, as a matter of fact, the "condition" of lager is
dependent to a far greater extent on the methods of distribution and
storage than is the case with infusion beers. If a cask is opened it must
be rapidly consumed; indeed it becomes undrinkable within a very few hours.
The gas escapes rapidly when the pressure is released, the temperature
rises, and the beer becomes flat and mawkish. In Germany every publican is
bound to have an efficient supply of ice, the latter frequently being
delivered by the brewery together with the beer.

In America the common system of brewing is one of infusion mashing combined
with bottom fermentation. The method of mashing, however, though on
infusion lines, differs appreciably from the English process. A very low
initial heat--about 100 deg. F.--at which the mash remains for about an hour,
is employed. After this the temperature is rapidly raised to 153-156 deg. F. by
running in the boiling "cooker mash," _i.e._ raw grain wort from the
converter. After a period the temperature is gradually increased to about
165 deg. F. The very low initial heat, and the employment of relatively large
quantities of readily transformable malt adjuncts, enable the American
brewer to make use of a class of malt which would be considered quite unfit
for brewing in an English brewery. The system of fermentation is very
similar to the continental "lager" system, and the beer obtained bears some
resemblance to the German product. To the English palate it is somewhat
flavourless, but it is always retailed in exceedingly brilliant condition
and at a proper temperature. There can be little doubt that every nation
evolves a type of beer most suited to its climate and the temperament of
the people, and in this respect the modern American beer is no exception.
In regard to plant and mechanical arrangements generally, the modern
American breweries may serve as an object-lesson to the European brewer,
although there are certainly a number of breweries in the United Kingdom
which need not fear comparison with the best American plants.

It is a sign of the times and further evidence as to the growing taste for
a lighter type of beer, that lager brewing in its most modern form has now
fairly taken root in Great Britain, and in this connexion the process
introduced by Messrs Allsopp exhibits many features of interest. The
following is a brief description of the plant and the methods
employed:--The wort is prepared on infusion lines, and is then cooled by
means of refrigerated brine before passing to a temporary store tank, which
serves as a gauging vessel. From the latter the wort passes directly to the
fermenting tuns, huge closed cylindrical vessels made of sheet-steel and
coated with glass enamel. There the wort ferments under reduced pressure,
the carbonic acid generated being removed by means of a vacuum pump, and
the gas thus withdrawn is replaced by the introduction of cool sterilized
air. The fermenting cellars are kept at 40 deg. F. The yeast employed is a pure
culture (see FERMENTATION) bottom yeast, but the withdrawal of the products
of yeast metabolism and the constant supply of pure fresh air cause the
fermentation to proceed far more rapidly than is the case with lager beer
brewed on ordinary lines. It is, in fact, finished in about six days.
Thereupon the air-supply is cut off, the green beer again cooled to 40 deg. F.
and [v.04 p.0512] then conveyed by means of filtered air pressure to the
store tanks, where secondary fermentation, lasting three weeks, takes
place. The gases evolved are allowed to collect under pressure, so that the
beer is thoroughly charged with the carbonic acid necessary to give it
condition. Finally the beer is again cooled, filtered, racked and bottled,
the whole of these operations taking place under counter pressure, so that
no gas can escape; indeed, from the time the wort leaves the copper to the
moment when it is bottled in the shape of beer, it does not come into
contact with the outer air.

The preparation of the Japanese beer _sake_ (_q.v._) is of interest. The
first stage consists in the preparation of _Koji_, which is obtained by
treating steamed rice with a culture of _Aspergillus oryzae_. This
micro-organism converts the starch into sugar. The _Koji_ is converted into
_moto_ by adding it to a thin paste of fresh-boiled starch in a vat.
Fermentation is set up and lasts for 30 to 40 days. The third stage
consists in adding more rice and _Koji_ to the _moto_, together with some
water. A secondary fermentation, lasting from 8 to 10 days, ensues.
Subsequently the whole is filtered, heated and run into casks, and is then
known as _sake_. The interest of this process consists in the fact that a
single micro-organism--a mould--is able to exercise the combined functions
of saccharification and fermentation. It replaces the diastase of malted
grain and also the yeast of a European brewery. Another liquid of interest
is _Weissbier_. This, which is largely produced in Berlin (and in some
respects resembles the _wheat-beer_ produced in parts of England), is
generally prepared from a mash of three parts of wheat malt and one part of
barley malt. The fermentation is of a symbiotic nature, two organisms,
namely a yeast and a fission fungus (the _lactic acid bacillus_) taking
part in it. The preparation of this peculiar double ferment is assisted by
the addition of a certain quantity of white wine to the yeast prior to
fermentation.

BREWING CHEMISTRY.--The principles of brewing technology belong for the
most part to physiological chemistry, whilst those of the cognate industry,
malting, are governed exclusively by that branch of knowledge. Alike in
following the growth of barley in field, its harvesting, maturing and
conversion into malt, as well as the operations of mashing malt, fermenting
wort, and conditioning beer, physiological chemistry is needed. On the
other hand, the consideration of the saline matter in waters, the
composition of the extract of worts and beers, and the analysis of brewing
materials and products generally, belong to the domain of pure chemistry.
Since the extractive matters contained in wort and beer consist for the
most part of the transformation products of starch, it is only natural that
these should have received special attention at the hands of scientific men
associated with the brewing industry. It was formerly believed that by the
action of diastase on starch the latter is first converted into a gummy
substance termed dextrin, which is then subsequently transformed into a
sugar--glucose. F.A. Musculus, however, in 1860, showed that sugar and
dextrin are simultaneously produced, and between the years 1872 and 1876
Cornelius O'Sullivan definitely proved that the sugar produced was maltose.
When starch-paste, the jelly formed by treating starch with boiling water,
is mixed with iodine solution, a deep blue coloration results. The first
product of starch degradation by either acids or diastase, namely soluble
starch, also exhibits the same coloration when treated with iodine. As
degradation proceeds, and the products become more and more soluble and
diffusible, the blue reaction with iodine gives place first to a purple,
then to a reddish colour, and finally the coloration ceases altogether. In
the same way, the optical rotating power decreases, and the cupric reducing
power (towards Fehling's solution) increases, as the process of hydrolysis
proceeds. C. O'Sullivan was the first to point out definitely the influence
of the temperature of the mash on the character of the products. The work
of Horace T. Brown (with J. Heron) extended that of O'Sullivan, and (with
G.H. Morris) established the presence of an intermediate product between
the higher dextrins and maltose. This product was termed maltodextrin, and
Brown and Morris were led to believe that a large number of these
substances existed in malt wort. They proposed for these substances the
generic name "amyloins." Although according to their view they were
compounds of maltose and dextrin, they had the properties of mixtures of
these two substances. On the assumption of the existence of these
compounds, Brown and his colleagues formulated what is known as the
maltodextrin or amyloin hypothesis of starch degradation. C.J. Lintner, in
1891, claimed to have separated a sugar, isomeric with maltose, which is
termed isomaltose, from the products of starch hydrolysis. A.R. Ling and
J.L. Baker, as well as Brown and Morris, in 1895, proved that this
isomaltose was not a homogeneous substance, and evidence tending to the
same conclusion was subsequently brought forward by continental workers.
Ling and Baker, in 1897, isolated the following compounds from the products
of starch hydrolysis--maltodextrin-[alpha], C_{36}H_{62}O_{31}, and
maltodextrin-[beta], C_{24}H_{42}O_{21} (previously named by Prior,
achroodextrin III.). They also separated a substance, C_{12}H_{22}O_{11},
isomeric with maltose, which had, however, the characteristics of a
dextrin. This is probably identical with the so-called dextrinose isolated
by V. Syniewski in 1902, which yields a phenylosazone melting at 82-83 deg. C.
It has been proved by H. Ost that the so-called isomaltose of Lintner is a
mixture of maltose and another substance, maltodextrin, isomeric with Ling
and Baker's maltodextrin-[beta].

The theory of Brown and Morris of the degradation of starch, although based
on experimental evidence of some weight, is by no means universally
accepted. Nevertheless it is of considerable interest, as it offers a
rational and consistent explanation of the phenomena known to accompany the
transformation of starch by diastase, and even if not strictly correct it
has, at any rate, proved itself to be a practical working hypothesis, by
which the mashing and fermenting operations may be regulated and
controlled. According to Brown and Morris, the starch molecule consists of
five amylin groups, each of which corresponds to the molecular formula
(C_{12}H_{20}O_{10})_{20}. Four of these amylin radicles are grouped
centrally round the fifth, thus:--

  (C_{12}H_{20}O_{10})_{20}                       (C_{12}H_{20}O_{10})_{20}
                          \                       /
                          (C_{12}H_{20}O_{10})_{20}
                          /                       \
  (C_{12}H_{20}O_{10})_{20}                       (C_{12}H_{20}O_{10})_{20}

By the action of diastase, this complex molecule is split up, undergoing
hydrolysis into four groups of amyloins, the fifth or central group
remaining unchanged (and under brewing conditions unchangeable), forming
the substance known as stable dextrin. When diastase acts on starch-paste,
hydrolysis proceeds as far as the reaction represented by the following
equation:--

  5(C_{12}H_{20}O_{10})_{20} + 80 H_2O
        starch.                 water.
        = 80 C_{12}H_{22}O_{11} + (C_{12}H_{20}O_{10})_{20}
               maltose.                  stable dextrin.

The amyloins are substances containing varying numbers of amylin (original
starch or dextrin) groups in conjunction with a proportional number of
maltose groups. They are not separable into maltose and dextrin by any of
the ordinary means, but exhibit the properties of mixtures of these
substances. As the process of hydrolysis proceeds, the amyloins become
gradually poorer in amylin and relatively richer in maltose-groups. The
final products of transformation, according to Brown and J.H. Millar, are
maltose and glucose, which latter is derived from the hydrolysis of the
stable dextrin. This theory may be applied in practical brewing in the
following manner. If it is desired to obtain a beer of a stable
character--that is to say, one containing a considerable proportion of
high-type amyloins--it is necessary to restrict the action of the diastase
in the mash-tun accordingly. On the other hand, for mild running ales,
which are to "condition" rapidly, it is necessary to provide for the
presence of sufficient maltodextrin of a low type. Investigation has shown
that the type of maltodextrin can be regulated, not only in the mash-tun
but also on the malt-kiln. A higher type is obtained by low kiln and high
mashing temperatures than by high kiln and low mashing heats, and it is
possible therefore to regulate, on scientific lines, not only the quality
but also the type of amyloins which are suitable for a particular beer.

The chemistry of the nitrogenous constituents of malt is equally important
with that of starch and its transformations. Without nitrogenous compounds
of the proper type, vigorous fermentations are not possible. It may be
remembered that yeast assimilates nitrogenous compounds in some of their
simpler forms--amides and the like. One of the aims of the maltster is,
therefore, to break down the protein substances present in barley to such a
degree that the wort has a maximum nutritive value for the yeast. Further,
it is necessary for the production of stable beer to eliminate a large
proportion of nitrogenous matter, and this is only done by the yeast when
the proteins are degraded. There is also some evidence that the presence of
albumoses assists in producing the foaming properties of beer. It has now
been established definitely, by the work of A. Fernbach, W. Windisch,
F.Weiss and P. Schidrowitz, that finished malt contains at least two
proteolytic enzymes (a peptic and a pancreatic enzyme).

[Illustration: BREWING

PLATE I.

FIG. 5.--REFRIGERATORS IN "LAGER" BREWERY OF MESSRS. ALLSOPP.

The hot wort trickles over the outside of the series of pipes, and is
cooled by the cold water which circulates in them. From the shallow
collecting trays the cooled wort is conducted to the fermenting backs.]

[Illustration: BREWING

PLATE II.

FIG. 6.--BURTON-UNION SYSTEM OF CLEANSING. (MESSRS. ALLSOPP'S BREWERY.)

The green beer is filled into the casks, and the excess of yeast, &c., then
works out through the swan necks into the long common gutter shown.]

[v.04 p.0513]

The presence of different types of phosphates in malt, and the important
influence which, according to their nature, they exercise in the brewing
process by way of the enzymes affected by them, have been made the subject
of research mainly by Fernbach and A. Hubert, and by P.E. Petit and G.
Labourasse. The number of enzymes which are now known to take part in the
brewing process is very large. They may with utility be grouped as
follows:--

                         Name.                Role or Nature.
                  +- Cytase                  Dissolves cell walls of
                  |                             of starch granules.
  In the malt ----+- Diastase A              Liquefies starch
    or mash-tun.  +- Diastase B              Saccharifies starch.
                  +- Proteolytic Enzymes -+- (1) Peptic.
                  |                       +- (2) Pancreatic.
                  +- Catalase                Splits peroxides.

  In fermenting   +- Invertase               Inverts cane sugar.
    wort and -----+- Glucase                 Splits maltose into glucose.
    yeast.        +- Zymase                  Splits sugar into alcohol
                                                and carbonic acid.

BIBLIOGRAPHY.--W.J. Sykes, _Principles and Practice of Brewing_ (London,
1897); Moritz and Morris, _A Text-book of the Science of Brewing_ (London,
1891); H.E. Wright, _A Handy Book for Brewers_ (London, 1897); Frank
Thatcher, _Brewing and Malting_ (London, 1898); Julian L. Baker, _The
Brewing Industry_ (London, 1905); E.J. Lintner, _Grundriss der
Bierbrauerei_ (Berlin, 1904); J.E. Thausing, _Die Theorie und Praxis der
Malzbereitung und Bierfabrikation_ (Leipzig, 1898); E. Michel, _Lehrbuch
der Bierbrauerei_ (Augsburg, 1900); E. Prior, _Chemie u. Physiologie des
Malzes und des Bieres_ (Leipzig, 1896). Technical journals: _The Journal of
the Institute of Brewing_ (London); _The Brewing Trade Review_ (London);
_The Brewers' Journal_ (London); _The Brewers' Journal_ (New York);
_Wochenschrift fuer Brauerei_ (Berlin); _Zeitschrift fuer das gesammte
Brauwesen_ (Munich).

(P. S.)

[1] They were classified at 28 lb in 1896, but since 1897 the standard has
been at the rate of 32 lb to the bushel.

[2] Inclusive of rice and maize.

[3] Exclusive of rice and maize.

[4] As a rule there is no separate "collecting vessel," duty being assessed
in the fermenting vessels.

BREWSTER, SIR DAVID (1781-1868), Scottish natural philosopher, was born on
the 11th of December 1781 at Jedburgh, where his father, a teacher of high
reputation, was rector of the grammar school. At the early age of twelve he
was sent to the university of Edinburgh, being intended for the clerical
profession. Even before this, however, he had shown a strong inclination
for natural science, and this had been fostered by his intimacy with a
"self-taught philosopher, astronomer and mathematician," as Sir Walter
Scott called him, of great local fame--James Veitch of Inchbonny, who was
particularly skilful in making telescopes. Though he duly finished his
theological course and was licensed to preach, Brewster's preference for
other pursuits prevented him from engaging in the active duties of his
profession. In 1799 he was induced by his fellow-student, Henry Brougham,
to study the diffraction of light. The results of his investigations were
communicated from time to time in papers to the _Philosophical
Transactions_ of London and other scientific journals, and were admirably
and impartially summarized by James D. Forbes in his preliminary
dissertation to the eighth edition of the _Encyclopaedia Britannica_. The
fact that other philosophers, notably Etienne Louis Malus and Augustin
Fresnel, were pursuing the same investigations contemporaneously in France
does not invalidate Brewster's claim to independent discovery, even though
in one or two cases the priority must be assigned to others.

The most important subjects of his inquiries are enumerated by Forbes under
the following five heads:--(1) The laws of polarization by reflection and
refraction, and other quantitative laws of phenomena; (2) The discovery of
the polarizing structure induced by heat and pressure; (3) The discovery of
crystals with two axes of double refraction, and many of the laws of their
phenomena, including the connexion of optical structure and crystalline
forms; (4) The laws of metallic reflection; (5) Experiments on the
absorption of light. In this line of investigation the prime importance
belongs to the discovery (1) of the connexion between the refractive index
and the polarizing angle, (2) of biaxial crystals, and (3) of the
production of double refraction by irregular heating. These discoveries
were promptly recognized. So early as the year 1807 the degree of LL.D. was
conferred upon Brewster by Marischal College, Aberdeen; in 1815 he was made
a member of the Royal Society of London, and received the Copley medal; in
1818 he received the Rumford medal of the society; and in 1816 the French
Institute awarded him one-half of the prize of three thousand francs for
the two most important discoveries in physical science made in Europe
during the two preceding years. Among the non-scientific public his fame
was spread more effectually by his rediscovery about 1815 of the
kaleidoscope, for which there was a great demand in both England and
America. An instrument of higher interest, the stereoscope, which, though
of much later date (1849-1850), may be mentioned here, since along with the
kaleidoscope it did more than anything else to popularize his name, was
not, as has often been asserted, the invention of Brewster. Sir Charles
Wheatstone discovered its principle and applied it as early as 1838 to the
construction of a cumbrous but effective instrument, in which the binocular
pictures were made to combine by means of mirrors. To Brewster is due the
merit of suggesting the use of lenses for the purpose of uniting the
dissimilar pictures; and accordingly the lenticular stereoscope may fairly
be said to be his invention. A much more valuable practical result of
Brewster's optical researches was the improvement of the British lighthouse
system. It is true that the dioptric apparatus was perfected independently
by Fresnel, who had also the satisfaction of being the first to put it into
operation. But it is indisputable that Brewster was earlier in the field
than Fresnel; that he described the dioptric apparatus in 1812; that he
pressed its adoption on those in authority at least as early as 1820, two
years before Fresnel suggested it; and that it was finally introduced into
British lighthouses mainly by his persistent efforts.

Brewster's own discoveries, important though they were, were not his only,
perhaps not even his chief, service to science. He began literary work in
1799 as a regular contributor to the _Edinburgh Magazine_, of which he
acted as editor at the age of twenty. In 1807 he undertook the editorship
of the newly projected _Edinburgh Encyclopaedia_, of which the first part
appeared in 1808, and the last not until 1830. The work was strongest in
the scientific department, and many of its most valuable articles were from
the pen of the editor. At a later period he was one of the leading
contributors to the _Encyclopaedia Britannica_ (seventh and eighth
editions), the articles on Electricity, Hydrodynamics, Magnetism,
Microscope, Optics, Stereoscope, Voltaic Electricity, &c., being from his
pen. In 1819 Brewster undertook further editorial work by establishing, in
conjunction with Robert Jameson (1774-1854), the _Edinburgh Philosophical
Journal_, which took the place of the _Edinburgh Magazine_. The first ten
volumes (1819-1824) were published under the joint editorship of Brewster
and Jameson, the remaining four volumes (1825-1826) being edited by Jameson
alone. After parting company with Jameson, Brewster started the _Edinburgh
Journal of Science_ in 1824, sixteen volumes of which appeared under his
editorship during the years 1824-1832, with very many articles from his own
pen. To the transactions of various learned societies he contributed from
first to last between three and four hundred papers, and few of his
contemporaries wrote so much for the various reviews. In the _North British
Review_ alone seventy-five articles of his appeared. A list of his larger
separate works will be found below. Special mention, however, must be made
of the most important of them all--his biography of Sir Isaac Newton. In
1831 he published a short popular account of the philosopher's life in
Murray's _Family Library_; but it was not until 1855 that he was able to
issue the much fuller _Memoirs of the Life, Writings and Discoveries of Sir
Isaac Newton_, a work which embodied the results of more than twenty years'
patient investigation of original manuscripts and all other available
sources.

Brewster's relations as editor brought him into frequent communication with
the most eminent scientific men, and he was naturally among the first to
recognize the benefit that would accrue from regular intercourse among
workers in the field of science. In an article in the _Quarterly Review_ he
threw out a suggestion for "an association of our nobility, clergy, gentry
and philosophers," which was taken up by others and found speedy
realization in the British Association for the Advancement of [v.04 p.0514]
Science. Its first meeting was held at York in 1831; and Brewster, along
with Charles Babbage and Sir John F. W. Herschel, had the chief part in
shaping its constitution. In the same year in which the British Association
held its first meeting, Brewster received the honour of knighthood and the
decoration of the Guelphic order of Hanover. In 1838 he was appointed
principal of the united colleges of St Salvator and St Leonard, St Andrews.
In 1849 he acted as president of the British Association and was elected
one of the eight foreign associates of the Institute of France in
succession to J.J. Berzelius; and ten years later he accepted the office of
principal of the university of Edinburgh, the duties of which he discharged
until within a few months of his death, which took place at Allerly,
Melrose, on the 10th of February 1868.

In estimating Brewster's place among scientific discoverers the chief thing
to be borne in mind is that the bent of his genius was not
characteristically mathematical. His method was empirical, and the laws
which he established were generally the result of repeated experiment. To
the ultimate explanation of the phenomena with which he dealt he
contributed nothing, and it is noteworthy in this connexion that if he did
not maintain to the end of his life the corpuscular theory he never
explicitly adopted the undulatory theory of light. Few will be inclined to
dispute the verdict of Forbes:--"His scientific glory is different in kind
from that of Young and Fresnel; but the discoverer of the law of
polarization of biaxial crystals, of optical mineralogy, and of double
refraction by compression, will always occupy a foremost rank in the
intellectual history of the age." In addition to the various works of
Brewster already noticed, the following may be mentioned:--Notes and
Introduction to Carlyle's translation of Legendre's _Elements of Geometry_
(1824); _Treatise on Optics_ (1831); _Letters on Natural Magic,_ addressed
to Sir Walter Scott (1831); _The Martyrs of Science, or the Lives of
Galileo, Tycho Brahe, and Kepler_ (1841); _More Worlds than One_ (1854).

See _The Home Life of Sir David Brewster,_ by his daughter Mrs Gordon.

BREWSTER, WILLIAM (c. 1566-1644), American colonist, one of the leaders of
the "Pilgrims," was born at Scrooby, in Nottinghamshire, England, about
1566. After studying for a short time at Cambridge, he was from 1584 to
1587 in the service of William Davison (? 1541-1608), who in 1585 went to
the Low Countries to negotiate an alliance with the states-general and in
1586 became assistant to Walsingham, Queen Elizabeth's secretary of state.
Upon the disgrace of Davison, Brewster removed to Scrooby, where from 1590
until September 1607 he held the position of "Post," or postmaster
responsible for the relays of horses on the post road, having previously,
for a short time, assisted his father in that office. About 1602 his
neighbours began to assemble for worship at his home, the Scrooby manor
house, and in 1606 he joined them in organizing the Separatist church of
Scrooby. After an unsuccessful attempt in 1607 (for which he was imprisoned
for a short time), he, with other Separatists, removed to Holland in 1608
to obtain greater freedom of worship. At Leiden in 1609 he was chosen
ruling elder of the Congregation. In Holland he supported himself first by
teaching English and afterwards in 1616-1619, as the partner of one Thomas
Brewer, by secretly printing, for sale in England, books proscribed by the
English government, thus, says Bradford, having "imploymente inough." In
1619 their types were seized and Brewer was arrested by the authorities of
the university of Leiden, acting on the instance of the British ambassador,
Sir Dudley Carleton. Brewster, however, escaped, and in the same year, with
Robert Cushman (c. 1580-1625), obtained in London, on behalf of his
associates, a land patent from the Virginia Company. In 1620 he emigrated
to America on the "Mayflower," and was one of the founders of the Plymouth
Colony. Here besides continuing until his death to act as ruling elder, he
was also--regularly until the arrival of the first pastor, Ralph Smith (d.
1661), in 1629 and irregularly afterward--a "teacher," preaching "both
powerfully and profitably to ye great contentment of ye hearers and their
comfortable edification." By many he is regarded as pre-eminently the
leader of the "Pilgrims." He died, probably on the 10th of April 1644.

See Ashbel Steele's _Chief of the Pilgrims; or the Life and Time of William
Brewster_ (Philadelphia, 1857); and a sketch in William Bradford's _History
of the Plimouth Plantation_ (new ed., Boston, 1898).

BREZE the name of a noble Angevin family, the most famous member of which
was PIERRE DE BREZE (c. 1410-1465), one of the trusted soldiers and
statesmen of Charles VII. He had made his name as a soldier in the English
wars when in 1433 he joined with Yolande, queen of Sicily, the constable
Richmond and others, in chasing from power Charles VII.'s minister La
Tremoille. He was knighted by Charles of Anjou in 1434, and presently
entered the royal council. In 1437 he became seneschal of Anjou, and in
1440 of Poitou. During the Praguerie he rendered great service to the royal
cause against the dauphin Louis and the revolted nobles, a service which
was remembered against him after Louis's accession to the throne. He fought
against the English in Normandy in 1440-1441, and in Guienne in 1442. In
the next year he became chamberlain to Charles VII., and gained the chief
power in the state through the influence of Agnes Sorel, superseding his
early allies Richmond and Charles of Anjou. The six years (1444-1450) of
his ascendancy were the most prosperous period of the reign of Charles VII.
His most dangerous opponent was the dauphin Louis, who in 1448 brought
against him accusations which led to a formal trial resulting in a complete
exoneration of Breze and his restoration to favour. He fought in Normandy
in 1450-1451, and became seneschal of the province after the death of Agnes
Sorel and the consequent decline of his influence at court. He made an
ineffective descent on the English coast at Sandwich in 1457, and was
preparing an expedition in favour of Margaret of Anjou when the accession
of Louis XI. brought him disgrace and a short imprisonment. In 1462,
however, his son Jacques married Louis's half-sister, Charlotte de Valois,
daughter of Agnes Sorel. In 1462 he accompanied Margaret to Scotland with a
force of 2000 men, and after the battle of Hexham he brought her back to
Flanders. On his return he was reappointed seneschal of Normandy, and fell
in the battle of Montlhery on the 16th of July 1465. He was succeeded as
seneschal of Normandy by his eldest son Jacques de Breze (c. 1440-1490),
count of Maulevrier; and by his grandson, husband of the famous Diane de
Poitiers, Louis de Breze (d. 1531), whose tomb in Rouen cathedral,
attributed to Jean Goujon and Jean Cousin, is a splendid example of French
Renaissance work.

The lordship of Breze passed eventually to Claire Clemence de Maille,
princess of Conde, by whom it was sold to Thomas Dreux, who took the name
of Dreux Breze, when it was erected into a marquisate. HENRI EVRARD,
marquis de Dreux-Breze (1762-1829), succeeded his father as master of the
ceremonies to Louis XVI. in 1781. On the meeting of the states-general in
1789 it fell to him to regulate the questions of etiquette and precedence
between the three estates. That as the immediate representative of the
crown he should wound the susceptibilities of the deputies was perhaps
inevitable, but little attempt was made to adapt traditional etiquette to
changed circumstances. Breze did not formally intimate to President Bailly
the proclamation of the royal seance until the 20th of June, when the
carpenters were about to enter the hall to prepare for the event, thus
provoking the session in the tennis court. After the royal seance Breze was
sent to reiterate Louis's orders that the estates should meet separately,
when Mirabeau replied that the hall could not be cleared except by force.
After the fall of the Tuileries Breze emigrated for a short time, but
though he returned to France he was spared during the Terror. At the
Restoration he was made a peer of France, and resumed his functions as
guardian of an antiquated ceremonial. He died on the 27th of January 1829,
when he was succeeded in the peerage and at court by his son Scipion
(1793-1845).

The best contemporary account of Pierre de Breze is given in the
_Chroniques_ of the Burgundian chronicler, Georges Chastellain, who had
been his secretary. Chastellain addressed a _Deprecation_ to Louis XI. on
his behalf at the time of his disgrace.

[v.04 p.0515] BRIALMONT, HENRI ALEXIS (1821-1903), Belgian general and
military engineer, son of General Laurent Mathieu Brialmont (d. 1885), was
born at Venlo in Limburg on the 25th of May 1821. Educated at the Brussels
military school, he entered the army as sub-lieutenant of engineers in
1843, and became lieutenant in 1847. From 1847 to 1850 he was private
secretary to the war minister, General Baron Chazal. In 1855 he entered the
staff corps, became major in 1861, lieutenant-colonel 1864, colonel in 1868
and major-general 1874. In this rank he held at first the position of
director of fortifications in the Antwerp district (December 1874), and
nine months later he became inspector-general of fortifications and of the
corps of engineers. In 1877 he became lieutenant-general. His far-reaching
schemes for the fortification of the Belgian places met with no little
opposition, and Brialmont seems to have felt much disappointment in this;
at any rate he went in 1883 to Rumania to advise as to the fortification
works required for the defence of the country, and presided over the
elaboration of the scheme by which Bucharest was to be made a first-class
fortress. He was thereupon placed _en disponibilite_ in his own service, as
having undertaken the Bucharest works without the authorization of his
sovereign. This was due in part to the suggestion of Austria, which power
regarded the Bucharest works as a menace to herself. His services were,
however, too valuable to be lost, and on his return to Belgium in 1884 he
resumed his command of the Antwerp military district. He had, further,
while in eastern Europe, prepared at the request of the Hellenic
government, a scheme for the defence of Greece. He retired in 1886, but
continued to supervise the Rumanian defences. He died on the 21st of
September 1903.

In the first stage of his career as an engineer Brialmont's plans followed
with but slight modification the ideas of Vauban; and his original scheme
for fortifying Antwerp provided for both enceinte and forts being on a
bastioned trace. But in 1859, when the great entrenched camp at Antwerp was
finally taken in hand, he had already gone over to the school of polygonal
fortification and the ideas of Montalembert. About twenty years later
Brialmont's own types and plans began to stand out amidst the general
confusion of ideas on fortification which naturally resulted from the
introduction of long-range guns, and from the events of 1870-71. The
extreme detached forts of the Antwerp region and the fortifications on the
Meuse at Liege and Namur were constructed in accordance with Brialmont's
final principles, viz. the lavish use of armour to protect the artillery
inside the forts, the suppression of all artillery positions open to
overhead fire, and the multiplication of intermediate batteries (see
FORTIFICATION AND SIEGECRAFT). In his capacity of inspector-general
Brialmont drafted and carried out the whole scheme for the defences of
Belgium. He was an indefatigable writer, and produced, besides essays,
reviews and other papers in the journals, twenty-three important works and
forty-nine pamphlets. In 1850 he originated the _Journal de l'armee Belge_.
His most important publications were _La Fortification du temps present_
(Brussels, 1885); _Influence du tir plongeant et des obus-torpilles sur la
fortification_ (Brussels, 1888); _Les Regions fortifiees_ (Brussels, 1890);
_La Defense des etats et la fortification a la fin du XIX^e siecle_
(Brussels, 1895); _Progres de la defense des etats et de la fortification
permanente depuis Vauban_ (Brussels, 1898).

BRIAN (926-1014), king of Ireland, known as BRIAN BORU, BOROMA, or BOROIMHE
(from _boroma_, an Irish word for tribute), was a son of a certain Kennedy
or Cenneide (d. 951). He passed his youth in fighting against the Danes,
who were constantly ravaging Munster, the northern part of which district
was the home of Brian's tribe, and won much fame in these encounters. In
976 his brother, Mathgamhain or Mahon, who had become king of Thomond about
951 and afterwards king of Munster, was murdered; Brian avenged this deed,
became himself king of Munster in 978, and set out upon his career of
conquest. He forced the tribes of Munster and then those of Leinster to own
his sovereignty, defeated the Danes, who were established around Dublin, in
Wicklow, and marched into Dublin, and after several reverses compelled
Malachy (Maelsechlainn), the chief king of Ireland, who ruled in Meath, to
bow before him in 1002. Connaught was his next objective. Here and also in
Ulster he was successful, everywhere he received hostages and tribute, and
he was generally recognized as the _ardri_, or chief king of Ireland. After
a period of comparative quiet Brian was again at war with the Danes of
Dublin, and on the 23rd of April 1014 his forces gained a great victory
over them at Clontarf. After this battle, however, the old king was slain
in his tent, and was buried at Armagh. Brian has enjoyed a great and not
undeserved reputation. One of his charters is still preserved in Trinity
College, Dublin.

See E.A. D'Alton, _History of Ireland_, vol. i. (1903).

BRIANCON, a strongly fortified town in the department of Hautes-Alpes in
S.E. France. It is built at a height of 4334 ft. on a plateau which
dominates the junction of the Durance with the Guisane. The town itself is
formed of very steep and narrow, though picturesque streets. As it lies at
the foot of the descent from the Mont Genevre Pass, giving access to Turin,
a great number of fortifications have been constructed on the heights
around Briancon, especially towards the east. The Fort Janus is no less
than 4000 ft. above the town. The parish church, with its two towers, was
built 1703-1726, and occupies a very conspicuous position. The Pont
d'Asfeld, E. of the town, was built in 1734, and forms an arch of 131 ft.
span, thrown at a height of 184 ft. across the Durance. The modern town
extends in the plain at the S.W. foot of the plateau on which the old town
is built and forms the suburb of Ste Catherine, with the railway station,
and an important silk-weaving factory. Briancon is 511/2 m. by rail from Gap.
The commune had a civil population in 1906 of 4883 (urban population 3130),
while the permanent garrison was 2641--in all 7524 inhabitants.

Briancon was the _Brigantium_ of the Romans and formed part of the kingdom
of King Cottius. About 1040 it came into the hands of the counts of Albon
(later dauphins of the Viennois) and thenceforth shared the fate of the
Dauphine. The Brianconnais included not merely the upper valley of the
Durance (with those of its affluents, the Gyronde and the Guil), but also
the valley of the Dora Riparia (Cesanne, Oulx, Bardonneche and Exilles),
and that of the Chisone (Fenestrelles, Perouse, Pragelas)--these glens all
lying on the eastern slope of the chain of the Alps. But by the treaty of
Utrecht (1713) all these valleys were handed over to Savoy in exchange for
that of Barcelonnette, on the west slope of the Alps. In 1815 Briancon
successfully withstood a siege of three months at the hands of the Allies,
a feat which is commemorated by an inscription on one of its gates, _Le
passe repond de l'avenir_.

(W. A. B. C.)

BRIAND, ARISTIDE (1862- ), French statesman, was born at Nantes, of a
bourgeois family. He studied law, and while still young took to politics,
associating himself with the most advanced movements, writing articles for
the anarchist journal _Le Peuple_, and directing the _Lanterne_ for some
time. From this he passed to the _Petite Republique_, leaving it to found,
with Jean Jaures, _L'Humanite_. At the same time he was prominent in the
movement for the formation of labour unions, and at the congress of working
men at Nantes in 1894 he secured the adoption of the labour union idea
against the adherents of Jules Guesde. From that time, Briand became one of
the leaders of the French Socialist party. In 1902, after several
unsuccessful attempts, he was elected deputy. He declared himself a strong
partisan of the union of the Left in what is known as the _Bloc_, in order
to check the reactionary deputies of the Right. From the beginning of his
career in the chamber of deputies, Briand was occupied with the question of
the separation of church and state. He was appointed reporter of the
commission charged with the preparation of the law, and his masterly report
at once marked him out as one of the coming leaders. He succeeded in
carrying his project through with but slight modifications, and without
dividing the parties upon whose support he relied. He was the principal
author of the law of separation, but, not content with preparing it, he
wished to apply it as well, especially as the existing Rouvier [v.04
p.0516] ministry allowed disturbances to occur during the taking of
inventories of church property, a clause of the law for which Briand was
not responsible. Consequently he accepted the portfolio of public
instruction and worship in the Sarrien ministry (1906). So far as the
chamber was concerned his success was complete. But the acceptance of a
portfolio in a bourgeois ministry led to his exclusion from the Unified
Socialist party (March 1906). As opposed to Jaures, he contended that the
Socialists should co-operate actively with the Radicals in all matters of
reform, and not stand aloof to await the complete fulfilment of their
ideals.

BRIANZA, a district of Lombardy, Italy, forming the south part of the
province of Como, between the two southern arms of the lake of that name.
It is thickly populated and remarkable for its fertility; and being hilly
is a favourite summer resort of the Milanese.

BRIARE, a town of north-central France in the department of Loiret on the
right bank of the Loire, 451/2 m. S.E. of Orleans on the railway to Nevers.
Pop. (1906) 4613. Briare, the _Brivodorum_ of the Romans, is situated at
the extremity of the Canal of Briare, which unites the Loire and its
lateral canal with the Loing and so with the Seine. The canal of Briare was
constructed from 1605 to 1642 and is about 36 m. long. The industries
include the manufacture of fine pottery, and of so-called porcelain buttons
made of felspar and milk by a special process; its inventor, Bapterosses,
has a bust in the town. The canal traffic is in wood, iron, coal, building
materials, &c. A modern hospital and church, and the hotel de ville
installed in an old moated chateau, are the chief buildings. The lateral
canal of the Loire crosses the Loire near Briare by a fine canal-bridge 720
yds. in length.

BRIAREUS, or AEGAEON, in Greek mythology, one of the three hundred-armed,
fifty-headed Hecatoncheires, brother of Cottus and Gyges (or Gyes).
According to Homer (_Iliad_ i. 403) he was called Aegaeon by men, and
Briareus by the gods. He was the son of Poseidon (or Uranus) and Gaea. The
legends regarding him and his brothers are various and somewhat
contradictory. According to the most widely spread myth, Briareus and his
brothers were called by Zeus to his assistance when the Titans were making
war upon Olympus. The gigantic enemies were defeated and consigned to
Tartarus, at the gates of which the three brothers were placed (Hesiod,
_Theog._ 624, 639, 714). Other accounts make Briareus one of the assailants
of Olympus, who, after his defeat, was buried under Mount Aetna
(Callimachus, _Hymn to Delos_, 141). Homer mentions him as assisting Zeus
when the other Olympian deities were plotting against the king of gods and
men (_Iliad_ i. 398). Another tradition makes him a giant of the sea, ruler
of the fabulous Aegaea in Euboea, an enemy of Poseidon and the inventor of
warships (Schol. on Apoll. Rhod. i. 1165). It would be difficult to
determine exactly what natural phenomena are symbolized by the
Hecatoncheires. They may represent the gigantic forces of nature which
appear in earthquakes and other convulsions, or the multitudinous motion of
the sea waves (Mayer, _Die Giganten und Titanen_, 1887).

BRIBERY (from the O. Fr. _briberie_, begging or vagrancy, _bribe_, Mid.
Lat. _briba_, signifying a piece of bread given to beggars; the Eng.
"bribe" has passed through the meanings of alms, blackmail and extortion,
to gifts received or given in order to influence corruptly). The public
offence of bribery may be defined as the offering or giving of payment in
some shape or form that it may be a motive in the performance of functions
for which the proper motive ought to be a conscientious sense of duty. When
this is superseded by the sordid impulses created by the bribe, a person is
said to be corrupted, and thus corruption is a term sometimes held
equivalent to bribery. The offence may be divided into two great
classes--the one where a person invested with power is induced by payment
to use it unjustly; the other, where power is obtained by purchasing the
suffrages of those who can impart it. It is a natural propensity, removable
only by civilization or some powerful counteracting influence, to feel that
every element of power is to be employed as much as possible for the
owner's own behoof, and that its benefits should be conferred not on those
who best deserve them, but on those who will pay most for them. Hence
judicial corruption is an inveterate vice of imperfect civilization. There
is, perhaps no other crime on which the force of law, if unaided by public
opinion and morals, can have so little influence; for in other crimes, such
as violence or fraud, there is generally some person immediately injured by
the act, who can give his aid in the detection of the offender, but in the
perpetration of the offence of bribery all the immediate parties obtain
what they desire, and are satisfied.

The purification of the bench from judicial bribery has been gradual in
most of the European countries. In France it received an impulse in the
16th century from the high-minded chancellor, Michel de L'Hopital. In
England judicial corruption has been a crime of remarkable rarity. Indeed,
with the exception of a statute of 1384 (repealed by the Statute Law
Revision Act 1881) there has been no legislation relating to judicial
bribery. The earliest recorded case was that of Sir William Thorpe, who in
1351 was fined and removed from office for accepting bribes. Other
celebrated cases were those of Michael de la Pole, chancellor of England,
in 1387; Lord Chancellor Bacon in 1621; Lionel Cranfield, earl of
Middlesex, in 1624; and Sir Thomas Parker, 1st earl of Macclesfield, in
1725. In Scotland for some years after the Revolution the bench was not
without a suspicion of interested partiality; but since the beginning of
the 19th century, at least, there has been in all parts of the empire a
perfect reliance on its purity. The same may be said of the higher class of
ministerial officers. There is no doubt that in the period from the
Revolution to the end of Queen Anne's reign, when a speaker of the House of
Commons was expelled for bribery, and the great Marlborough could not clear
his character from pecuniary dishonesty, there was much corruption in the
highest official quarters. The level of the offence of official bribery has
gradually descended, until it has become an extremely rare thing for the
humbler officers connected with the revenue to be charged with it. It has
had a more lingering existence with those who, because their power is more
of a constitutional than an official character, have been deemed less
responsible to the public. During Walpole's administration there is no
doubt that members of parliament were paid in cash for votes; and the
memorable saying, that every man has his price, has been preserved as a
characteristic indication of his method of government. One of the forms in
which administrative corruption is most difficult of eradication is the
appointment to office. It is sometimes maintained that the purity which
characterizes the administration of justice is here unattainable, because
in giving a judgment there is but one form in which it can be justly given,
but when an office has to be filled many people may be equally fitted for
it, and personal motives must influence a choice. It very rarely happens,
however, that direct bribery is supposed to influence such appointments. It
does not appear that bribery was conspicuous in England until, in the early
part of the 18th century, constituencies had thrown off the feudal
dependence which lingered among them; and, indeed, it is often said, that
bribery is essentially the defect of a free people, since it is the sale of
that which is taken from others without payment.

In English law bribery of a privy councillor or a juryman (see EMBRACERY)
is punishable as a misdemeanour, as is the taking of a bribe by any
judicial or ministerial officer. The buying and selling of public offices
is also regarded at common law as a form of bribery. By the Customs
Consolidation Act 1876, any officer in the customs service is liable to
instant dismissal and a penalty of L500 for taking a bribe, and any person
offering or promising a bribe or reward to an officer to neglect his duty
or conceal or connive at any act by which the customs may be evaded shall
forfeit the sum of L200. Under the Inland Revenue Regulations Act 1890, the
bribery of commissioners, collectors, officers or other persons employed in
relation to the Inland Revenue involves a fine of L500. The Merchant
Shipping Act 1894, ss. 112 and 398, makes provision for certain offences in
the nature of bribery. Bribery is, by the Extradition Act 1906, [v.04
p.0517] an extraditable offence. Administrative corruption was dealt with
in the Public Bodies' Corrupt Practices Act 1889. The public bodies
concerned are county councils, town or borough councils, boards,
commissioners, select vestries and other bodies having local government,
public health or poor law powers, and having for those purposes to
administer rates raised under public general acts. The giving or receiving,
promising, offering, soliciting or agreeing to receive any gift, fee, loan
or advantage by any person as an inducement for any act or forbearance by a
member, officer or servant of a public body in regard to the affairs of
that body is made a misdemeanour in England and Ireland and a crime and
offence in Scotland. Prosecution under the act requires the consent of the
attorney or solicitor-general in England or Ireland and of the lord
advocate in Scotland. Conviction renders liable to imprisonment with or
without hard labour for a term not exceeding two years, and to a fine not
exceeding L500, in addition to or in lieu of imprisonment. The offender may
also be ordered to pay to the public body concerned any bribe received by
him; he may be adjudged incapable for seven years of holding public office,
_i.e._ the position of member, officer or servant of a public body; and if
already an officer or servant, besides forfeiting his place, he is liable
at the discretion of the court to forfeit his right to compensation or
pension. On a second conviction he may be adjudged forever incapable of
holding public office, and for seven years incapable of being registered or
of voting as a parliamentary elector, or as an elector of members of a
public body. An offence under the act may be prosecuted and punished under
any other act applicable thereto, or at common law; but no person is to be
punished twice for the same offence. Bribery at political elections was at
common law punishable by indictment or information, but numerous statutes
have been passed dealing with it as a "corrupt practice." In this sense,
the word is elastic in meaning and may embrace any method of corruptly
influencing another for the purpose of securing his vote (see CORRUPT
PRACTICES). Bribery at elections of fellows, scholars, officers and other
persons in colleges, cathedral and collegiate churches, hospitals and other
societies was prohibited in 1588-1589 by statute (31 Eliz. c. 6). If a
member receives any money, fee, reward or other profit for giving his vote
in favour of any candidate, he forfeits his own place; if for any such
consideration he resigns to make room for a candidate, he forfeits double
the amount of the bribe, and the candidate by or on whose behalf a bribe is
given or promised is incapable of being elected on that occasion. The act
is to be read at every election of fellows, &c., under a penalty of L40 in
case of default. By the same act any person for corrupt consideration
presenting, instituting or inducting to an ecclesiastical benefice or
dignity forfeits two years' value of the benefice or dignity; the corrupt
presentation is void, and the right to present lapses for that turn to the
crown, and the corrupt presentee is disabled from thereafter holding the
same benefice or dignity; a corrupt institution or induction is void, and
the patron may present. For a corrupt resignation or exchange of a benefice
the giver and taker of a bribe forfeit each double the amount of the bribe.
Any person corruptly procuring the ordaining of ministers or granting of
licenses to preach forfeits L40, and the person so ordained forfeits L10
and for seven years is incapacitated from holding any ecclesiastical
benefice or promotion.

In the United States the offence of bribery is very severely dealt with. In
many states, bribery or the attempt to bribe is made a felony, and is
punishable with varying terms of imprisonment, in some jurisdictions it may
be with a period not exceeding ten years. The offence of bribery at
elections is dealt with on much the same lines as in England, voiding the
election and disqualifying the offender from holding any office.

Bribery may also take the form of a secret commission (_q.v._), a profit
made by an agent, in the course of his employment, without the knowledge of
his principal.

BRIC A BRAC (a French word, formed by a kind of onomatopoeia, meaning a
heterogeneous collection of odds and ends; cf. _de bric et de broc_,
corresponding to our "by hook or by crook"; or by reduplication from
_brack_, refuse), objects of "virtu," a collection of old furniture, china,
plate and curiosities.

BRICK (derived according to some etymologists from the Teutonic _bricke_, a
disk or plate; but more authoritatively, through the French _brique_,
originally a "broken piece," applied especially to bread, and so to clay,
from the Teutonic _brikan_, to break), a kind of artificial stone generally
made of burnt clay, and largely used as a building material.

_History_.--The art of making bricks dates from very early times, and was
practised by all the civilized nations of antiquity. The earliest burnt
bricks known are those found on the sites of the ancient cities of
Babylonia, and it seems probable that the method of making strong and
durable bricks, by burning blocks of dried clay, was discovered in this
corner of Asia. We know at least that well-burnt bricks were made by the
Babylonians more than 6000 years ago, and that they were extensively used
in the time of Sargon of Akkad (c. 3800 B.C.). The site of the ancient city
of Babylon is still marked by huge mounds of bricks, the ruins of its great
walls, towers and palaces, although it has been the custom for centuries to
carry away from these heaps the bricks required for the building of the
modern towns in the surrounding country. The Babylonians and Assyrians
attained to a high degree of proficiency in brickmaking, notably in the
manufacture of bricks having a coating of coloured glaze or enamel, which
they largely used for wall decoration. The Chinese claim great antiquity
for their clay industries, but it is not improbable that the knowledge of
brickmaking travelled eastwards from Babylonia across the whole of Asia. It
is believed that the art of making glazed bricks, so highly developed
afterwards by the Chinese, found its way across Asia from the west, through
Persia and northern India, to China. The great wall of China was
constructed partly of brick, both burnt and unburnt; but this was built at
a comparatively late period (c. 210 B.C.), and there is nothing to show
that the Chinese had any knowledge of burnt bricks when the art flourished
in Babylonia.

Brickmaking formed the chief occupation of the Israelites during their
bondage in Egypt, but in this case the bricks were probably sun-dried only,
and not burnt. These bricks were made of a mixture of clay and chopped
straw or reeds, worked into a stiff paste with water. The clay was the
river mud from the banks of the Nile, and as this had not sufficient
cohesion in itself, the chopped straw (or reeds) was added as a binding
material. The addition of such substances increases the plasticity of wet
clay, especially if the mixture is allowed to stand for some days before
use; so that the action of the chopped straw was twofold; a fact possibly
known to the Egyptians. These sun-dried bricks, or "adobes," are still
made, as of old, on the banks of the Nile by the following method:--A
shallow pit or bed is prepared, into which are thrown the mud, chopped
straw and water in suitable proportions, and the whole mass is tramped on
until it is thoroughly mixed and of the proper consistence. This mixture is
removed in lumps and shaped into bricks, in moulds or by hand, the bricks
being simply sun-dried.

Pliny mentions that three kinds of bricks were made by the Greeks, but
there is no indication that they were used to any great extent, and
probably the walls of Athens on the side towards Mount Hymettus were the
most important brick-structures in ancient Greece. The Romans became
masters of the brickmaker's art, though they probably acquired much of
their knowledge in the East, during their occupation of Egypt and Greece.
In any case they revived and extended the manufacture of bricks about the
beginning of the Christian era; exercising great care in the selection and
preparation of their clay, and introducing the method of burning bricks in
kilns. They carried their knowledge and their methods throughout western
Europe, and there is abundant evidence that they made bricks extensively in
Germany and in Britain.

Although brickmaking was thus introduced into Britain nearly 2000 years
ago, the art seems to have been lost when the Romans withdrew from the
country, and it is doubtful whether any burnt bricks were made in England
from that time until the 13th century. Such bricks as were used during this
long [v.04 p.0518] period were generally taken from the remains of Roman
buildings, as at Colchester and St Albans Abbey. One of the earliest
existing brick buildings, erected after the revival of brickmaking in
England, is Little Wenham Hall, in Suffolk, built about A.D. 1210; but it
was not until the 15th century that bricks came into general use again, and
then only for important edifices. During the reign of Henry VIII.
brickmaking was brought to great perfection, probably by workmen brought
from Flanders, and the older portions of St James's Palace and Hampton
Court Palace remain to testify to the skill then attained. In the 16th
century bricks were increasingly used, but down to the Great Fire of
London, in 1666, the smaller buildings, shops and dwelling-houses, were
constructed of timber framework filled in with lath and plaster. In the
rebuilding of London after the fire, bricks were largely used, and from the
end of the 17th century to the present day they have been almost
exclusively used in all ordinary buildings throughout the country, except
in those districts where building stone is plentiful and good brick-clay is
not readily procurable. The bricks made in England before 1625 were of many
sizes, there being no recognized standard; but in that year the sizes were
regulated by statute, and the present standard size was adopted, viz. 9 x
41/2 x 3 in. In 1784 a tax was levied on bricks, which was not repealed until
1850. The tax averaged about 4s. 7d. per thousand on ordinary bricks, and
special bricks were still more heavily taxed.

The first brick buildings in America were erected on Manhattan Island in
the year 1633 by a governor of the Dutch West India Company. These bricks
were made in Holland, where the industry had long reached great excellence;
and for many years bricks were imported into America from Holland and from
England. In America burnt bricks were first made at New Haven about 1650,
and the manufacture slowly spread through the New England states; but for
many years the home-made article was inferior to that imported from Europe.

The Dutch and the Germans were the great brickmakers of Europe during the
middle ages, although the Italians, from the 14th to the 15th century,
revived and developed the art of decorative brick-work or terra-cotta, and
discovered the method of applying coloured enamels to these materials.
Under the Della Robbias, in the 15th century, some of the finest work of
this class that the world has seen was executed, but it can scarcely be
included under brickwork.

_Brick Clays_.--All clays are the result of the denudation and
decomposition of felspathic and siliceous rocks, and consist of the fine
insoluble particles which have been carried in suspension in water and
deposited in geologic basins according to their specific gravity and degree
of fineness (see CLAY). These deposits have been formed in all geologic
epochs from the "Recent" to the "Cambrian," and they vary in hardness from
the soft and plastic "alluvial" clays to the hard and rock-like shales and
slates of the older formations. The alluvial and drift clays (which were
alone used for brickmaking until modern times) are found near the surface,
are readily worked and require little preparation, whereas the older
sedimentary deposits are often difficult to work and necessitate the use of
heavy machinery. These older shales, or rocky clays, may be brought into
plastic condition by long weathering (_i.e._ by exposure to rain, frost and
sun) or by crushing and grinding in water, and they then resemble ordinary
alluvial clays in every respect.

The clays or earths from which burnt bricks are made may be divided into
two principal types, according to chemical composition: (1) Clays or shales
containing only a small percentage of carbonate of lime and consisting
chiefly of hydrated aluminium silicates (the "true clay substance") with
more or less sand, undecomposed grains of felspar, and oxide or carbonate
of iron; these clays usually burn to a buff, salmon or red colour; (2)
Clays containing a considerable percentage of carbonate of lime in addition
to the substances above mentioned. These latter clay deposits are known as
"marls,"[1] and may contain as much as 40% of chalk. They burn to a
sulphur-yellow colour which is quite distinctive.

Brick clays of class (1) are very widely distributed, and have a more
extensive geological range than the marls, which are found in connexion
with chalk or limestone formations only. These ordinary brick clays vary
considerably in composition, and many clays, as they are found in nature,
are unsuitable for brickmaking without the addition of some other kind of
clay or sand. The strongest brick clays, _i.e._ those possessing the
greatest plasticity and tensile strength, are usually those which contain
the highest percentage of the hydrated aluminium silicates, although the
exact relation of plasticity to chemical composition has not yet been
determined. This statement cannot be applied indiscriminately to all clays,
but may be taken as fairly applicable to clays of one general type (see
CLAY). All clays contain more or less free silica in the form of sand, and
usually a small percentage of undecomposed felspar. The most important
ingredient, after the clay-substance and the sand, is oxide of iron; for
the colour, and, to a less extent, the hardness and durability of the burnt
bricks depend on its presence. The amount of oxide of iron in these clays
varies from about 2 to 10%, and the colour of the bricks varies accordingly
from light buff to chocolate; although the colour developed by a given
percentage of oxide of iron is influenced by the other substances present
and also by the method of firing. A clay containing from 5 to 8% of oxide
of iron will, under ordinary conditions of firing, produce a red brick; but
if the clay contains 3 to 4% of alkalis, or the brick is fired too hard,
the colour will be darker and more purple. The actions of the alkalis and
of increased temperature are probably closely related, for in either case
the clay is brought nearer to its fusion point, and ferruginous clays
generally become darker in colour as they approach to fusion. Alumina acts
in the opposite direction, an excess of this compound tending to make the
colour lighter and brighter. It is impossible to give a typical composition
for such clays, as the percentages of the different constituents vary
through such wide ranges. The clay substance may vary from 15 to 80%, the
free silica or sand from 5 to 80%, the oxide of iron from 1 to 10%, the
carbonates of lime and magnesia together, from 1 to 5%, and the alkalis
from 1 to 4%. Organic matter is always present, and other impurities which
frequently occur are the sulphates of lime and magnesia, the chlorides and
nitrates of soda and potash, and iron-pyrites. The presence of organic
matter gives the wet clay a greater plasticity, probably because it forms a
kind of mucilage which adds a certain viscosity and adhesiveness to the
natural plasticity of the clay. In some of the coal-measure shales the
amount of organic matter is very considerable, and may render the clay
useless for brickmaking. The other impurities, all of which, except the
pyrites, are soluble in water, are undesirable, as they give rise to
"scum," which produces patchy colour and pitted faces on the bricks. The
commonest soluble impurity is calcium sulphate, which produces a whitish
scum on the face of the brick in drying, and as the scum becomes
permanently fixed in burning, such bricks are of little use except for
common work. This question of "scumming" is very important to the maker of
high-class facing and moulded bricks, and where a clay containing calcium
sulphate must be used, a certain percentage of barium carbonate is nowadays
added to the wet clay. By this means the calcium sulphate is converted into
calcium carbonate which is insoluble in water, so that it remains
distributed throughout the mass of the brick instead of being deposited on
the surface. The presence of magnesium salts is also very objectionable, as
these generally remain in the burnt brick as magnesium sulphate, which
gives rise to an efflorescence of fine white crystals after the bricks are
built into position. Clays which are strong or plastic are known as "fat"
clays, and they always contain a high percentage of true "clay substance,"
and, consequently, a low percentage of sand. Such clays take up a
considerable amount of water in "tempering"; they dry slowly, shrink
greatly, and so become liable to lose their shape and develop cracks in
drying and firing. "Fat" clays are greatly improved by the addition of
coarse sharp sand, [v.04 p.0519] which reduces the time of drying and the
shrinkage, and makes the brick more rigid during the firing. Coarse sand,
unlike clay-substance, is practically unaffected during the drying and
firing, and is a desirable if not a necessary ingredient of all brick
clays. The best brick-clays feel gritty between the fingers; they should,
of course, be free from pebbles, sufficiently plastic to be moulded into
shape and strong enough when dry to be safely handled. All clays are
greatly improved by being turned over and exposed to the weather, or by
standing for some months in a wet condition. This "weathering" and "ageing"
of clay is particularly important where bricks are made from tempered clay,
_i.e._ clay in the wet or plastic state; where bricks are made from shale,
in the semi-plastic condition, weathering is still of importance.

The lime clays or "marls" of class (2), which contain essentially a high
percentage of chalk or limestone, are not so widely distributed as the
ordinary brick-clays, and in England the natural deposits of these clays
have been largely exhausted. A very fine chalk-clay, or "malm" as it was
locally called, was formerly obtained from the alluvium in the vicinity of
London; but the available supply of this has been used up, and at the
present time an artificial "malm" is prepared by mixing an ordinary
brick-clay with ground chalk. For the best London facing-bricks the clay
and chalk are mixed in water. The chalk is ground on grinding-pans, and the
clay is mixed with water and worked about until the mixture has the
consistence of cream. The mixture of these "pulps" is run through a grating
or coarse sieve on to a drying-kiln or "bed," where it is allowed to stand
until stiff enough to walk on. A layer of fine ashes is then spread over
the clay, and the mass is turned over and mixed by spade, and tempered by
the addition of water. In other districts, where clays containing limestone
are used, the marl is mixed with water on a wash-pan and the resulting
creamy fluid passed through coarse sieves on to a drying-bed. If necessary,
coarse sand is added to the clay in the wash-pan, and such addition is
often advisable because the washed clays are generally very fine in grain.
Another method of treating these marls, when they are in the plastic
condition, is to squeeze them by machinery through iron gratings, which
arrest and remove the pebbles. In other cases the marl is passed through a
grinding-mill having a solid bottom and heavy iron rollers, by which means
the limestone pebbles are crushed sufficiently and mixed through the whole
mass. The removal of limestone pebbles from the clay is of great
importance, as during the firing they would be converted into quicklime,
which has a tendency to shatter the brick on exposure to the weather. As
before stated, these marls (which usually contain from 15 to 30% of calcium
carbonate) burn to a yellow colour which is quite distinctive, although in
some cases, where the percentage of limestone is very high, over 40%, the
colour is grey or a very pale buff. The action of lime in bleaching the
ferric oxide and producing a yellow instead of a red brick, has not been
thoroughly investigated, but it seems probable that some compound is
produced, between the lime and the oxide of iron, or between these two
oxides and the free silica, entirely different from that produced by oxide
of iron in the absence of lime. Such marls require a harder fire than the
ordinary brick-clays in order to bring about the reaction between the lime
and the other ingredients. Magnesia may replace lime to some extent in such
marls, but the firing temperature must be higher when magnesia is present.
Marls usually contract very little, if at all, in the burning, and
generally produce a strong, square brick of fine texture and good colour.
When under-fired, marl bricks are very liable to disintegrate under the
action of the weather, and great care must be exercised in burning them at
a sufficiently high temperature.

_Brickmaking_.--Bricks made of tempered clay may be made by hand or by
machine, and the machines may be worked by hand or by mechanical power.
Bricks made of semi-plastic clay (_i.e._ ground clay or shale sufficiently
damp to adhere under pressure) are generally machine-made throughout. The
method of making bricks by hand is the same, with slight variation, the
world over. The tempered clay is pressed by hand into a wooden or metal
mould or four-sided case (without top or bottom) which is of the desired
shape and size, allowance being made for the shrinkage of the brick in
drying and firing. The moulder stands at the bench or table, dips the mould
in water, or water and then sand, to prevent the clay from sticking, takes
a rudely shaped piece of clay from an assistant, and dashes this into the
mould which rests on the moulding bench. He then presses the clay into the
corners of the mould with his fingers, scrapes off any surplus clay and
levels the top by means of a strip of wood called a "strike," and then
turns the brick out of the mould on to a board, to be carried away by
another assistant to the drying-ground. The mould may be placed on a
special piece of wood, called the stock-board, provided with an elevated
tongue of wood in the centre, which produces the hollow or "frog" in the
bottom of the brick.

Machine-made bricks may be divided into two kinds, plastic and
semi-plastic, although the same type of machine is often used for both
kinds.

The machine-made plastic bricks are made of tempered clay, but generally
the tempering and working of the clay are effected by the use of machinery,
especially when the harder clays and shales are used. The machines used in
the preparation of such clays are grinding-mills and pug-mills. The
grinding-mills are either a series of rollers with graduated spaces
between, through which the clay or shale is passed, or are of the ordinary
"mortar pan" type, having a solid or perforated iron bottom on which the
clay or shale is crushed by heavy rollers. Shales are sometimes passed
through a grinding-mill before they are exposed to the action of the
weather, as the disintegration of the hard lumps of shale greatly
accelerates the "weathering." In the case of ordinary brick-clay, in the
plastic condition, grinding-mills are only used when pebbles more than a
quarter of an inch in diameter are present, as otherwise the clay may be
passed directly through the pug-mill, a process which may be repeated if
necessary. The pug-mill consists of a box or trough having a feed hole at
one end and a delivery hole or nose at the other end, and provided with a
central shaft which carries knives and cutters so arranged that when the
shaft revolves they cut and knead the clay, and at the same time force it
towards and through the delivery nose. The cross section of this nose of
the pug-mill is approximately the same as that of the required brick (9 in.
x 41/2 in. plus contraction, for ordinary bricks), so that the pug delivers a
solid or continuous mass of clay from which bricks may be made by merely
making a series of square cuts at the proper distances apart. In practice,
the clay is pushed from the pug along a smooth iron plate, which is
provided with a wire cutting frame having a number of tightly stretched
wires placed at certain distances apart, arranged so that they can be
brought down upon, and through, the clay, and so many bricks cut off at
intervals. The frame is sometimes in the form of a skeleton cylinder, the
wires being arranged radially (or the wires may be replaced by metal
disks); but in all cases bricks thus made are known as "wire-cuts." In
order to obtain a better-shaped and more compact brick, these wire-cuts may
be placed under a brick press and there squeezed into iron moulds under
great pressure. These two processes are now generally performed by one
machine, consisting of pug-mill and brick press combined. The pug delivers
the clay, downwards, into the mould; the proper amount of clay is cut off;
and the mould is made to travel into position under the ram of the press,
which squeezes the clay into a solid mass.

There are many forms of brick press, a few for hand power, but the most
adapted for belt-driving; although in recent years hydraulic presses have
come more and more into use, especially in Germany and America. The
essential parts of a brick press are: (1) a box or frame in which the clay
is moulded; (2) a plunger or die carried on the end of a ram, which gives
the necessary pressure; (3) an arrangement for pushing the pressed brick
out of the moulding box. Such presses are generally made of iron
throughout, although other metals are used, occasionally, for the moulds
and dies. The greatest variations found in brick presses are in the means
adopted for actuating the ram; and many ingenious mechanical devices have
been applied to this end, each claiming some particular advantage over its
predecessors. In many recent presses, especially where semi-plastic clay is
used, the brick is pressed simultaneously from top and bottom, a second
ram, working upwards from beneath, giving the additional pressure.

Although the best bricks are still pressed from tempered or plastic clay,
there has recently been a great development in the manufacture of
semi-plastic or dust-made bricks, especially in those districts where
shales are used for brickmaking. These semi-plastic bricks are stamped out
of ground shale that has been sufficiently moistened with water to enable
it to bind together. The hard-clay, or shale, is crushed under heavy
rollers in an iron grinding-pan having a perforated bottom through which
the crushed clay passes, when sufficiently fine, into a small compartment
underneath. This clay powder is then delivered, by an elevator, into a
sieve or screen, which retains the coarser particles for regrinding. Sets
of rollers may also be used for crushing shales that are only moderately
hard, the ground material being sifted as before. The material, as fed
[v.04 p.0520] into the mould of the press, is a coarse, damp powder which
becomes adhesive under pressure, producing a so-called "semi-plastic"
brick. The presses used are similar to those employed for plastic clay, but
they are generally more strongly and heavily built, and are capable of
applying a greater pressure.

The semi-plastic method has many advantages where shales are used, although
the bricks are not as strong nor as perfect as the best "plastic" bricks.
The method, however, enables the brickmaker to make use of certain kinds of
clay-rock, or shale, that would be impracticable for plastic bricks; and
the weathering, tempering and "ageing" may be largely or entirely dispensed
with. The plant required is heavier and more costly, but the brickyard
becomes more compact, and the processes are simpler than with the "plastic"
method.

The drying of bricks, which was formerly done in the open, is now, in most
cases, conducted in a special shed heated by flues along which the heated
gases from the kilns pass on their way to the chimney. It is important that
the atmosphere of the drying-shed should be fairly dry, to which end
suitable means of ventilation must be arranged (by fans or otherwise). If
the atmosphere is too moist the surface of the brick remains damp for a
considerable time, and the moisture from the interior passes to the surface
as water, carrying with it the soluble salts, which are deposited on the
surface as the water slowly evaporates. This deposit produces the "scum"
already referred to. When the drying is done in a dry atmosphere the
surface quickly dries and hardens, and the moisture from the interior
passes to the surface as vapour, the soluble salts being left distributed
through the whole mass, and consequently no "scum" is produced. Plastic
bricks take much longer to dry than semi-plastic; they shrink more and have
a greater tendency to warp or twist.

The burning or firing of bricks is the most important factor in their
production; for their strength and durability depend very largely on the
character and degree of the firing to which they have been subjected. The
action of the heat brings about certain chemical decompositions and
re-combinations which entirely alter the physical character of the dry
clay. It is important, therefore, that the firing should be carefully
conducted and that it should be under proper control. For ordinary bricks
the firing atmosphere should be oxidizing, and the finishing temperature
should be adjusted to the nature of the clay, the object being to produce a
hard strong brick, of good shape, that will not be too porous and will
withstand the action of frost. The finishing temperature ranges from 900 deg.
C. to 1250 deg. C., the usual temperature being about 1050 deg. C. for ordinary
bricks. As before mentioned, lime-clays require a higher firing temperature
(usually about 1150 deg. C. to 1200 deg. C.) in order to bring the lime into
chemical combination with the other substances present.

It is evident that the best method of firing bricks is to place them in
permanent kilns, but although such kilns were used by the Romans some 2000
years ago, the older method of firing in "clamps" is still employed in the
smaller brickfields, in every country where bricks are made. These clamps
are formed by arranging the unfired bricks in a series of rows or walls,
placed fairly closely together, so as to form a rectangular stack. A
certain number of channels, or firemouths, are formed in the bottom of the
clamp; and fine coal is spread in horizontal layers between the bricks
during the building up of the stack. Fires are kindled in the fire-mouths,
and the clamp is allowed to go on burning until the fuel is consumed
throughout. The clamp is then allowed to cool, after which it is taken
down, and the bricks sorted; those that are under-fired being built up
again in the next clamp for refiring. Sometimes the clamp takes the form of
a temporary kiln, the outside being built of burnt bricks which are
plastered over with clay, and the fire-mouths being larger and more
carefully formed. There are many other local modifications in the manner of
building up the clamps, all with the object of producing a large percentage
of well-fired bricks. Clamp-firing is slow, and also uneconomical, because
irregular and not sufficiently under control; and it is now only employed
where bricks are made on a small scale.

Brick-kilns are of many forms, but they can all be grouped under two main
types--Intermittent kilns and Continuous kilns. The intermittent kiln is
usually circular in plan, being in the form of a vertical cylinder with a
domed top. It consists of a single firing-chamber in which the unfired
bricks are placed, and in the walls of which are contrived a number of
fire-mouths where wood or coal is burned. In the older forms known as
_up-draught_ kilns, the products of combustion pass from the fire-mouth,
through flues, into the bottom of the firing-chamber, and thence directly
upwards and out at the top. The modern plan is to introduce the products of
combustion near the top, or crown, of the kiln, and to draw them downwards
through holes in the bottom which lead to flues connected with an
independent chimney. These _down-draught_ kilns have short chimneys or
"bags" built round the inside wall in connexion with the fire-mouths, which
conduct the flames to the upper part of the firing-chamber, where they are
reverberated and passed down through the bricks in obedience to the pull of
the chimney. The "bags" may be joined together, forming an inner circular
wall entirely round the firing-chamber, except at the doorway; and a number
of kilns may be built in a row or group having their bottom flues connected
with the same tall chimney. Down-draught kilns usually give a more regular
fire and a higher percentage of well-fired bricks; and they are more
economical in fuel consumption than up-draught kilns, while the hot gases,
as they pass from the kiln, may be utilized for drying purposes, being
conducted through flues under the floor of the drying-shed, on their way to
the chimney. The method of using one tall chimney to work a group of
down-draught kilns naturally led to the invention of the "continuous" kiln,
which is really made up of a number of separate kilns or firing-chambers,
built in series and connected up to the main flue of the chimney in such a
manner that the products of combustion from one kiln may be made to pass
through a number of other kilns before entering the flue. The earliest form
of continuous kiln was invented by Friedrich Hoffman, and all kilns of this
type are built on the Hoffman principle, although there are a great number
of modifications of the original Hoffman construction. The great principle
of "continuous" firing is the utilization of the waste heat from one kiln
or section of a kiln in heating up another kiln or section, direct firing
being applied only to finish the burning. In practice a number of kilns or
firing-chambers, usually rectangular in plan, are built side by side in two
parallel lines, which are connected at the ends by other kilns so as to
make a complete circuit. The original form of the complete series was
elliptical in plan, but the tendency in recent years has been to flatten
the sides of the ellipse and bring them together, thus giving two parallel
rows joined at the ends by a chamber or passage at right angles. Coal or
gas is burnt in the chamber or section that is being fired-up, the air
necessary for the combustion being heated on its passage through the kilns
that are cooling down, and the products of combustion, before entering the
chimney flue, are drawn through a number of other kilns or chambers
containing unfired bricks, which are thus gradually heated up by the
otherwise waste-heat from the sections being fired. Continuous kilns
produce a more evenly fired product than the intermittent kilns usually do,
and, of course, at much less cost for fuel. Gas firing is now being
extensively applied to continuous kilns, natural gas in some instances
being used in the United States of America; and the methods of construction
and of firing are carried out with greater care and intelligence, the prime
objects being economy of fuel and perfect control of firing. Pyrometers are
coming into use for the control of the firing temperature, with the result
that a constant and trustworthy product is turned put. The introduction of
machinery greatly helped the brickmaking industry in opening up new sources
of supply of raw material in the shales and hardened clays of the
sedimentary deposits of the older geologic formations, and, with the
extended use of continuous firing plants, it has led to the establishment
of large concerns where everything is co-ordinated for the production of
enormous quantities of bricks at a minimum cost. In the United Kingdom, and
still more in Germany and the United States of America, great improvements
have been made in machinery, firing-plant and organization, so that the
whole manufacture is now being conducted on more scientific lines, to the
great advantage of the industry.

_Blue Brick_ is a very strong vitreous brick of dark, slaty-blue colour,
used in engineering works where great strength or impermeability is
desirable. These bricks are made of clay containing front 7 to 10% of oxide
of iron, and their manufacture is carried out in the ordinary way until the
later stages of the firing process, when they are subjected to the strongly
reducing action of a smoky atmosphere, which is produced by throwing small
bituminous coal upon the fire-mouths and damping down the admission of air.
The smoke thus produced reduces the red ferric oxide to blue-green ferrous
oxide, or to metallic iron, which combines with the silica present to form
a fusible ferrous silicate. This fusible "slag" partly combines with the
other silicates present, and partly fills up the pores, and so produces a
vitreous impermeable layer varying in thickness according to the duration
and character of the smoking, the finishing temperature of the kiln and the
texture of the brick. Particles of carbon penetrate the surface during the
early stages of the smoking, and a small quantity of carbon probably enters
into combination, tending to produce a harder surface and darker colour.

_Floating Bricks_ were first mentioned by Strabo, the Greek geographer, and
afterwards by Pliny as being made at Pitane in the Troad. The secret of
their manufacture was lost for many centuries, but was rediscovered in 1791
by Fabroni, an Italian, who made them from the fossil meal (diatomaceous
earth) found in Tuscany. These bricks are very light, fairly strong, and
being poor conductors of heat, have been employed for the construction of
powder-magazines on board ship, &c.

_Mortar Bricks_ belong to the class of unburnt bricks, and are, strictly
speaking, blocks of artificial stone made in brick moulds. These bricks
have been made for many years by moulding a mixture of sand and slaked lime
and allowing the blocks thus made to harden in the air. This hardening is
brought about partly by evaporation of the water, but chiefly by the
conversion of the calcium hydrate, or slaked lime, into calcium carbonate
by the action of the carbonic acid in the atmosphere. A small proportion of
the lime enters into combination with the silica and water present to form
hydrated calcium silicate, and probably a little hydrated basic carbonate
of lime is also formed, both of which substances are in the nature of
cement. This process of natural hardening by exposure to the air was a very
long one, occupying from six to eighteen months, and many improvements were
introduced during the latter half of the 19th century to improve the
strength of the bricks and to hasten the hardening. [v.04 p.0521] Mixtures
of sand, lime and cement (and of certain ground blast-furnace slags and
lime) were introduced; the moulding was done under hydraulic presses and
the bricks afterwards treated with carbon dioxide under pressure, with or
without the application of mild heat. Some of these mixtures and methods
are still in use, but a new type of mortar brick has come into use during
recent years which has practically superseded the old mortar brick.

_Sand-lime Bricks_.--In the early 'eighties of the 19th century, Dr
Michaelis of Berlin patented a new process for hardening blocks made of a
mixture of sand and lime by treating them with high-pressure steam for a
few hours, and the so-called _sand-lime_ bricks are now made on a very
extensive scale in many countries. There are many differences of detail in
the manufacture, but the general method is in all cases the same. Dry sand
is intimately mixed with about one-tenth of its weight of powdered slaked
lime, the mixture is then slightly moistened with water and afterwards
moulded into bricks under powerful presses, capable of exerting a pressure
of about 60 tons per sq. in. After removal from the press the bricks are
immediately placed in huge steel cylinders usually 60 to 80 ft. long and
about 7 ft. in diameter, and are there subjected to the action of
high-pressure steam (120 lb to 150 lb per sq. in.) for from ten to fifteen
hours. The proportion of slaked lime to sand varies according to the nature
of the lime and the purity and character of the sand, one of lime to ten of
sand being a fair average. The following is an analysis of a typical German
sand-lime brick: silica (SiO_2), 84%; lime (CaO), 7%; alumina and oxide of
iron, 2%; water, magnesia and alkalis, 7%. Under the action of the
high-pressure steam the lime attacks the particles of sand, and a chemical
compound of water, lime and silica is produced which forms a strong bond
between the larger particles of sand. This bond of hydrated calcium
silicate is evidently different from, and of better type than, the filling
of calcium carbonate produced in the mortar-brick, and the sand-lime brick
is consequently much stronger than the ordinary mortar-brick, however the
latter may be made. The sand-lime brick is simple in manufacture, and with
reasonable care is of constant quality. It is usually of a light-grey
colour, but may be stained by the addition of suitable colouring oxides or
pigments unaffected by lime and the conditions of manufacture.

_Strength of Brick._--The following figures indicate the crushing load for
bricks of various types in tons per sq. in.:--

  Common hand-made                from 0.4 to 0.9
 "      machine-made               "  0.9 "  1.2
  London stock                      "  0.7 "  1.3
  Staffordshire blue                "  2.8 "  3.3
  Sand-lime                         "  2.9 "  3.4

See also BRICKWORK.

(J. B.*; W. B.*)

[1] The term "marl" has been wrongly applied to many fire-clays. It should
be restricted to natural mixtures of clay and chalk such as those of the
Paris and London basins.

BRICKFIELDER, a term used in Australia for a hot scorching wind blowing
from the interior, where the sandy wastes, bare of vegetation in summer,
are intensely heated by the sun. This hot wind blows strongly, often for
several days at a time, defying all attempts to keep the dust down, and
parching all vegetation. It is in one sense a healthy wind, as, being
exceedingly dry and hot, it destroys many injurious germs of disease. The
northern brickfielder is almost invariably followed by a strong "southerly
buster," cloudy and cool from the ocean. The two winds are due to the same
cause, viz. a cyclonic system over the Australian Bight. These systems
frequently extend inland as a narrow V-shaped depression (the apex
northward), bringing the winds from the north on their eastern sides and
from the south on their western. Hence as the narrow system passes eastward
the wind suddenly changes from north to south, and the thermometer has been
known to fall fifteen degrees in twenty minutes.

BRICKWORK, in building, the term applied to constructions made of bricks.
The tools and implements employed by the bricklayer are:--the trowel for
spreading the mortar; the plumb-rule to keep the work perpendicular, or in
the case of an inclined or battering wall, to a regular batter, for the
plumb-rule may be made to suit any required inclination; the spirit-level
to keep the work horizontal, often used in conjunction with a straight-edge
in order to test a greater length; and the gauge-rod with the brick-courses
marked on it. The quoins or angles are first built up with the aid of the
gauge-rod, and the intermediate work is kept regular by means of the line
and line pins fixed in the joints. The raker, jointer, pointing rule and
Frenchman are used in pointing joints, the pointing staff being held on a
small board called the hawk. For roughly cutting bricks the large trowel is
used; for neater work such as facings, the bolster and club-hammer; the
cold chisel is for general cutting away, and for chases and holes. When
bricks require to be cut, the work is set out with the square, bevel and
compasses. If the brick to be shaped is a hard one it is placed on a
V-shaped cutting block, an incision made where desired with the tin saw,
and after the bolster and club-hammer have removed the portion of the
brick, the scutch, really a small axe, is used to hack off the rough parts.
For cutting soft bricks, such as rubbers and malms, a frame saw with a
blade of soft iron wire is used, and the face is brought to a true surface
on the rubbing stone, a slab of Yorkshire stone.

In ordinary practice a scaffold is carried up with the walls and made to
rest on them. Having built up as high as he can reach from the ground, the
scaffolder erects a scaffold with standards, ledgers and putlogs to carry
the scaffold boards (see SCAFFOLD, SCAFFOLDING). Bricks are carried to the
scaffold on a hod which holds twenty bricks, or they may be hoisted in
baskets or boxes by means of a pulley and fall, or may be raised in larger
numbers by a crane. The mortar is taken up in a hod or hoisted in pails and
deposited on ledged boards about 3 ft. square, placed on the scaffold at
convenient distances apart along the line of work. The bricks are piled on
the scaffold between the mortar boards, leaving a clear way against the
wall for the bricklayers to move along. The workman, beginning at the
extreme left of his section, or at a quoin, advances to the right,
carefully keeping to his line and frequently testing his work with the
plumb-rule, spirit-level and straight-edge, until he reaches another angle,
or the end of his section. The pointing is sometimes finished off as the
work proceeds, but in other cases the joints are left open until the
completion, when the work is pointed down, perhaps in a different mortar.
When the wall has reached a height from the scaffold beyond which the
workman cannot conveniently reach, the scaffolding is raised and the work
continued in this manner from the new level.

[Illustration: FIG. 1.]

It is most important that the brickwork be kept perfectly plumb, and that
every course be perfectly horizontal or level, both longitudinally and
transversely. Strictest attention should be paid to the levelling of the
lowest course of footings of a wall, for any irregularity will necessitate
the inequality being made up with mortar in the courses above, thus
inducing a liability for the wall to settle unequally, and so perpetuate
the infirmity. To save the trouble of keeping the plumb-rule and level
constantly in his hands and yet ensure correct work, the bricklayer, on
clearing the footings of a wall, builds up six or eight courses of bricks
at the external angles (see fig. 1), which he carefully plumbs and levels
across. These form a gauge for the intervening work, a line being tightly
strained between and fixed with steel pins to each angle at a level with
the top of the next course to be laid, and with this he makes his work
range. If, however, the length between the quoins be great, the line will
of course sag, and it must, therefore, be carefully supported at intervals
to the proper level. Care must be taken to keep the "perpends," or vertical
joints, one immediately over the other. Having been carried up three or
four courses to a level with the guidance of the line which is raised
course by course, the work should be proved with the level and plumb-rule,
particularly with the latter at the quoins and reveals, as well as over the
face. A smart tap with the end of the handle of the trowel will suffice to
make a brick yield what little it may be out of truth, while the work is
green, and not injure it. The work of an efficient craftsman, however, will
need but little adjustment.

For every wall of more than one brick (9 in) thick, two men should be
employed at the same time, one on the outside and the [v.04 p.0522] other
inside; one man cannot do justice from one side to even a 14-in. wall. When
the wall can be approached from one side only, the work is said to be
executed "overhand." In work circular on plan, besides the level and
plumb-rule, a gauge mould or template, or a ranging trammel--a rod working
on a pivot at the centre of the curve, and in length equalling the
radius--must be used for every course, as it is evident that the line and
pins cannot be applied to this in the manner just described.

Bricks should not be merely _laid_, but each should be placed frog upwards,
and rubbed and pressed firmly down in such a manner as to secure absolute
adhesion, and force the mortar into joints. Every brick should be well
wetted before it is laid, especially in hot dry weather, in order to wash
off the dust from its surface, and to obtain more complete adhesion, and
prevent it from absorbing water from the mortar in which it is bedded. The
bricks are wetted either by the bricklayer dipping them in water as he uses
them, or by water being thrown or sprinkled on them as they lie piled on
the scaffold. In bricklaying with quick-setting cements an ample use of
water is of even more importance.

All the walls of a building that are to sustain the same floors and the
same roof, should be carried up simultaneously; in no circumstances should
more be done in one part than can be reached from the same scaffold, until
all the walls are brought up to the same height. Where it is necessary for
any reason to leave a portion of the wall at a certain level while carrying
up the adjoining work the latter should be racked back, i.e. left in steps
as shown in fig. 7, and not carried up vertically with merely the toothing
necessary for the bond.

[Illustration: FIG. 2.--Section of a Hollow Wall.]

Buildings in exposed situations are frequently built with cavity-walls,
consisting of the inside or main walls with an outer skin [Sidenote: Hollow
walls.] usually half a brick thick, separated from the former by a cavity
of 2 or 3 in. (fig. 2). The two walls are tied together at frequent
intervals by iron or stoneware ties, each having a bend or twist in the
centre, which prevents the transmission of water to the inner wall. All
water, therefore, which penetrates the outer wall drops to the base of the
cavity, and trickles out through gratings provided for the purpose a few
inches above the ground level. The base of the cavity should be taken down
a course or two below the level of the damp-proof course. The ties are
placed about 3 ft. apart horizontally, with 12 or 18 in. vertical
intervals; they are about 8 in. long and 3/4 in. wide. It is considered
preferable by some architects and builders to place the thicker wall on the
outside. This course, however, allows the main wall to be attacked by the
weather, whereas the former method provides for its protection by a screen
of brickwork. Where door and window frames occur in hollow walls, it is of
the utmost importance that a proper lead or other flashing be built in,
shaped so as to throw off on each side, clear of the frames and main wall,
the water which may penetrate the outer shell. While building the wall it
is very essential to ensure that the cavity and ties be kept clean and free
from rubbish or mortar, and for this purpose a wisp of straw or a narrow
board, is laid on the ties where the bricklayer is working, to catch any
material that may be inadvertently dropped, this protection being raised as
the work proceeds. A hollow wall tends to keep the building dry internally
and the temperature equable, but it has the disadvantage of harbouring
vermin, unless care be taken to ensure their exclusion. The top of the wall
is usually sealed with brickwork to prevent vermin or rubbish finding its
way into the cavity. Air gratings should be introduced here to allow of air
circulating through the cavity; they also facilitate drying out after rain.

Hollow walls are not much used in London for two reasons, the first being
that, owing to the protection from the weather afforded by surrounding
buildings, one of the main reasons for their use is gone, and the other
that the expense is greatly increased, owing to the authorities ignoring
the outer shell and requiring the main wall to be of the full thickness
stipulated in schedule I. of London Building Act 1894. Many English
provincial authorities in determining the thickness of a cavity-wall, take
the outer portion into consideration.

In London and the surrounding counties, brickwork is measured by the _rod_
of 161/2 ft. square, 11/2 bricks in thickness. A rod of brickwork [Sidenote:
Materials and labour.] gauged four courses to a foot with bricks 83/4 in.
long, 41/4 in. wide, and 23/4 in thick, and joints 1/4 in. in thickness, will
require 4356 bricks, and the number will vary as the bricks are above or
below the average size, and as the joints are made thinner or thicker. The
quantity of mortar, also, will evidently be affected by the latter
consideration, but in London it is generally reckoned at 50 cub. ft. for a
1/4-in. joint, to 72 cub. ft. for a joint 3/8 in. thick. To these figures
must be added an allowance of about 11 cub. ft. if the bricks are formed
with frogs or hollows. Bricks weigh about 7 lb each; they are bought and
sold by the thousand, which quantity weighs about 62 cwt. The weight of a
rod of brickwork is 131/2-15 tons, work in cement mortar being heavier than
that executed in lime. Seven bricks are required to face a sq. ft.; 1 ft.
of reduced brickwork--11/2 bricks thick--will require 16 bricks. The number
of bricks laid by a workman in a day of eight hours varies considerably
with the description of work, but on straight walling a man will lay an
average of 500 in a day.

The absorbent properties of bricks vary considerably with the kind of
brick. The ordinary London stock of good quality should [Sidenote:
Varieties of bricks.] not have absorbed, after twenty-four hours' soaking,
more than one-fifth of its bulk. Inferior bricks will absorb as much as a
third. The Romans were great users of bricks, both burnt and sun-dried. At
the decline of the Roman empire, the art of brickmaking fell into disuse,
but after the lapse of some centuries it was revived, and the ancient
architecture of Italy shows many fine examples of brick and terra-cotta
work. The scarcity of stone in the Netherlands led to the development of a
brick architecture, and fine examples of brickwork abound in the Low
Countries. The Romans seem to have introduced brickmaking into England, and
specimens of the large thin bricks, which they used chiefly as a bond for
rubble masonry, may be seen in the many remains of Roman buildings
scattered about that country. During the reigns of the early Tudor kings
the art of brickmaking arrived at great perfection, and some of the finest
known specimens of ornamental brickwork are to be found among the work of
this period. The rebuilding of London after the Great Fire of 1666 gave
considerable impetus to brickmaking, most of the new buildings being of
brick, and a statute was passed regulating the number of bricks in the
thickness of the walls of the several rates of dwelling-houses.

The many names given to the different qualities of bricks in various parts
of Great Britain are most confusing, but the following are those generally
in use:--

_Stocks_, hard, sound, well-burnt bricks, used for all ordinary purposes.

_Hard Stocks,_ sound but over-burnt, used in footings to walls and other
positions where good appearance is not required.

_Shippers_, sound, hard-burnt bricks of imperfect shape. Obtain their name
from being much used as ballast for ships.

_Rubbers_ or _Cutters_, sandy in composition and suitable for cutting with
a wire saw and rubbing to shape on the stone slab.

_Grizzles_, sound and of fair shape, but under-burnt; used for inferior
work, and in cases where they are not liable to be heavily loaded.

_Place-bricks_, under-burnt and defective; used for temporary work.

_Chuffs_, cracked and defective in shape and badly burnt. [v.04 p.0523]
_Burrs_, lumps which have vitrified or run together in the burning; used
for rough walling, garden work, &c.

_Pressed bricks_, moulded under hydraulic pressure, and much used for
facing work. They usually have a deep frog or hollow on one or both
horizontal faces, which reduces the weight of the brick and forms an
excellent key for the mortar.

_Blue bricks_, chiefly made in South Staffordshire and North Wales. They
are used in engineering work, and where great compressional resistance is
needed, as they are vitrified throughout, hard, heavy, impervious and very
durable. Blue bricks of special shape may be had for paving, channelling
and coping.

_Fire-bricks_, withstanding great heat, used in connexion with furnaces.
They should always be laid with fire-clay in place of lime or cement
mortar.

_Glazed bricks_, either salt-glazed or enamelled. The former, brown in
colour, are glazed by throwing salt on the bricks in the kiln. The latter
are dipped into a slip of the required colour before being burnt, and are
used for decorative and sanitary purposes, and where reflected light is
required.

_Moulded bricks_, for cornices, string courses, plinths, labels and
copings. They are made in the different classes to many patterns; and on
account of their greater durability, and the saving of the labour of
cutting, are preferable in many cases to rubbers. For sewer work and
arches, bricks shaped as voussoirs are supplied.

The strength of brickwork varies very considerably according to the kind of
brick used, the position in which it is used, the kind and [Sidenote:
Strength of brickwork.] quality of the lime or cement mortar, and above all
the quality of the workmanship. The results of experiments with short walls
carried out in 1896-1897 by the Royal Institute of British Architects to
determine the average loads per sq. ft. at which crushing took place, may
be briefly summarized as follows: Stock brickwork in lime mortar crushed
under a pressure of 18.63 tons per sq. ft., and in cement mortar under
39.29 tons per sq. ft. Gault brickwork in lime mortar crushed at 31.14
tons, and in cement mortar at 51.34 tons. Fletton brickwork in lime crushed
under a load of 30.68 tons, in cement under 56.25 tons. Leicester red
brickwork in lime mortar crushed at 45.36 tons per sq. ft., in cement
mortar at 83.36 tons. Staffordshire blue brick work in lime mortar crushed
at 114.34 tons, and in cement mortar at 135.43 tons.

The height of a brick pier should not exceed twelve times its least width.
The London Building Act in the first schedule prescribes that in buildings
not public, or of the warehouse class, in no storey shall any external or
party walls exceed in height sixteen times the thickness. In buildings of
the warehouse class, the height of these walls shall not exceed fourteen
times the thickness.

In exposed situations it is necessary to strengthen the buildings by
increasing the thickness of walls and parapets, and to provide heavier
copings and flashings. Special precautions, too, must be observed in the
fixing of copings, chimney pots, ridges and hips. The greatest wind
pressure experienced in England may be taken at 56 lb on a sq. ft., but
this is only in the most exposed positions in the country or on a sea
front. Forty pounds is a sufficient allowance in most cases, and where
there is protection by surrounding trees or buildings 28 lb per sq. ft. is
all that needs to be provided against.

In mixing mortar, particular attention must be paid to the sand with which
the lime or cement is mixed. The best sand is that [Sidenote: Mortar.]
obtained from the pit, being sharp and angular. It is, however, liable to
be mixed with clay or earth, which must be washed away before the sand is
used. Gravel found mixed with it must be removed by screening or sifting.
River sand is frequently used, but is not so good as pit sand on account of
the particles being rubbed smooth by attrition. Sea sand is objectionable
for two reasons; it cannot be altogether freed from a saline taint, and if
it is used the salt attracts moisture and is liable to keep the brickwork
permanently damp. The particles, moreover, are generally rounded by
attrition, caused by the movement of the sea, which makes it less efficient
for mortar than if they retained their original angular forms. Blue or
black mortar, often used for pointing the joints of external brickwork on
account of its greater durability, is made by using foundry sand or smith's
ashes instead of ordinary sand. There are many other substitutes for the
ordinary sand. As an example, fine stone grit may be used with advantage.
Thoroughly burnt clay or ballast, old bricks, clinkers and cinders, ground
to a uniform size and screened from dust, also make excellent substitutes.

Fat limes (that is, limes which are pure, as opposed to "hydraulic" limes
which are burnt from limestone containing some clay) should not be used for
mortar; they are slow-setting, and there is a liability for some of the
mortar, where there is not a free access of air to assist the setting,
remaining soft for some considerable period, often months, thus causing
unequal settlement and possibly failure. Grey stone lime is feebly
hydraulic, and makes a good mortar for ordinary work. It, however, decays
under the influence of the weather, and it is, therefore, advisable to
point the external face of the work in blue ash or cement mortar, in order
to obtain greater durability. It should never be used in foundation work,
or where exposed to wet. Lias lime is hydraulic, that is, it will set firm
under water. It should be used in all good class work, where Portland
cement is not desired.

Of the various cements used in building, it is necessary only to mention
three as being applicable to use for mortar. The first of these is Portland
cement, which has sprung into very general use, not only for work where
extra strength and durability are required, and for underground work, but
also in general building where a small extra cost is not objected to.
Ordinary lime mortar may have its strength considerably enhanced by the
addition of a small proportion of Portland cement. Roman cement is rarely
used for mortar, but is useful in some cases on account of the rapidity
with which it sets, usually becoming hard about fifteen minutes after
mixing. It is useful in tidal work and embankments, and constructions under
water. It has about one-third of the strength of Portland cement, by which
it is now almost entirely supplanted. Selenitic cement or lime, invented by
Major-General H. Y. D. Scott (1822-1883), is lias lime, to which a small
proportion of plaster of Paris has been added with the object of
suppressing the action of slaking and inducing quicker setting. If
carefully mixed in accordance with the instructions issued by the
manufacturers, it will take a much larger proportion of sand than ordinary
lime.

Lime should be slaked before being made into mortar. The lime is measured
out, deposited in a heap on a wooden "bank" or platform, and after being
well watered is covered with the correct proportion of sand. This retains
the heat and moisture necessary to thorough slaking; the time required for
this operation depends on the variety of the lime, but usually it is from a
few hours to one and a half days. If the mixing is to be done by hand the
materials must be screened to remove any unslaked lumps of lime. The
occurrence of these may be prevented by grinding the lime shortly before
use. The mass should then be well "larried," _i.e._ mixed together with the
aid of a long-handled rake called the "larry." Lime mortar should be
tempered for at least two days, roughly covered up with sacks or other
material. Before being used it must be again turned over and well mixed
together. Portland and Roman cement mortars must be mixed as required on
account of their quick-setting properties. In the case of Portland cement
mortar, a quantity sufficient only for the day's use should be "knocked
up," but with Roman cement fresh mixtures must be made several times a day,
as near as possible to the place of using. Cement mortars should never be
worked up after setting has taken place. Care should be taken to obtain the
proper consistency, which is a stiff paste. If the mortar be too thick,
extra labour is involved in its use, and much time wasted. If it be so thin
as to run easily from the trowel, a longer time is taken in setting, and
the wall is liable to settle; also there is danger that the lime or cement
will be killed by the excess of water, or at least have its binding power
affected. It is not advisable to carry out work when the temperature is
below freezing point, but in urgent cases bricklaying may be successfully
done by using unslaked lime mortar. The mortar must be prepared in small
quantities immediately before being used, so that binding action takes
place before it cools. When the wall is left at night time the top course
should be covered up to prevent the penetration of rain into the work,
which would then be destroyed by the action of frost. Bricks used during
frosty weather should be quite dry, and those that have been exposed to
rain or frost should never be employed. The question whether there is any
limit to bricklayers' work in frost is still an open one. Among the members
of the Norwegian Society of Engineers and Architects, at whose meetings the
subject has been frequently discussed, that limit is variously estimated at
between -6 deg. to -8 deg. Reaumur (181/2 deg. to 14 deg. Fahr.) and -12 deg. to -15 deg. Reaumur (5 deg.
above to 13/4 deg. below zero Fahr.). It has been proved by hydraulic tests that
good bricklayers' work can be executed at the latter minimum. The
conviction is held that the variations in the opinions held on this subject
are attributable to the degree of care bestowed on the preparation of the
mortar. It is generally agreed, however, that from a practical point of
view, bricklaying should not be carried on at temperatures lower than -8 deg.
to -10 deg. Reaumur (14 deg. to 91/2 deg. Fahr.), for as the thermometer falls the
expense of building is greatly increased, owing to a larger proportion of
lime being required.

For grey lime mortar the usual proportion is one part of lime to two or
three parts of sand; lias lime mortar is mixed in similar proportions,
except for work below ground, when equal quantities of lime and sand should
be used. Portland cement mortar is usually in the proportions of one to
three, or five, of sand; good results are obtained with lime mortar
fortified with cement as follows:--one part slaked lime, one part Portland
cement, and seven parts sand. Roman cement mortar should consist of one or
one and a half parts of cement to one part of sand. Selenitic lime mortar
is usually in the proportions of one to four or five, and must be mixed in
a particular manner, the lime being first ground in water in the mortar
mill, and the sand gradually added. Blue or black mortar contains equal
parts of foundry ashes and lime; but is improved by the addition of a
proportion of cement. For setting fire-bricks fire-clay is always used.
Pargetting for rendering inside chimney flues is made of one part of lime
with three parts of cow dung free from straw or litter. No efficient
substitute has been found for this mixture, which should be used fresh. A
mortar that has found approval for tall chimney shafts is composed by
grinding in a mortar-mill one part of blue lias lime with one part each of
sand and foundry ashes. In the external walls of the Albert Hall the mortar
used was one part Portland cement, one part grey Burham lime and six parts
pit sand. The lime was slaked twenty-four hours, and after being mixed
[v.04 p.0524] with the sand for ten minutes the cement was added and the
whole ground for one minute; the stuff was prepared in quantities only
sufficient for immediate use. The by-laws dated 1891, made by the London
County Council under section 16 of the Metropolis Management and Building
Acts Amendment Act 1878, require the proportions of lime mortar to be one
to three of sand or grit, and for cement mortar one to four. Clean soft
water only should be used for the purpose of making mortar.

_Grout_ is thin liquid mortar, and is legitimately used in gauged arches
and other work when fine joints are desired. In ordinary work it is
sometimes used every four or five courses to fill up any spaces that may
have been inadvertently left between the bricks. This at the best is but
doing with grout what should be done with mortar in the operation of laying
the bricks; and filling or flushing up every course with mortar requires
but little additional exertion and is far preferable. The use of grout is,
therefore, a sign of inefficient workmanship, and should not be
countenanced in good work. It is liable, moreover, to ooze out and stain
the face of the brickwork.

_Lime putty_ is pure slaked lime. It is prepared or "run," as it is termed,
in a wooden tub or bin, and should be made as long a time as possible
before being used; at least three weeks should elapse between preparation
and use.

[Illustration: FIG. 3.--Forms of Joints.]

The pointing of a wall, as previously mentioned, is done either with the
bricklaying or at the completion of the work. If the [Sidenote: Pointing.]
pointing is to be of the same mortar as the rest of the work, it would
probably greatly facilitate matters to finish off the work at one operation
with the bricklaying, but where, as in many cases, the pointing is required
to be executed in a more durable mortar, this would be done as the scaffold
is taken down at the completion of the building, the joints being raked out
by the bricklayer to a depth of 1/2 or 3/4 in. By the latter method the whole
face of the work is kept uniform in appearance. The different forms of
joints in general use are clearly shown in fig. 3. Flat or flush joints (A)
are formed by pressing the protruding mortar back flush with the face of
the brickwork. This joint is commonly used for walls intended to be coated
with distemper or limewhite. The flat joint jointed (two forms, B and C) is
a development of the flush joint. In order to increase the density and
thereby enhance the durability of the mortar, a semicircular groove is
formed along the centre, or one on each side of the joint, with an iron
jointer and straight-edge. Another form, rarely used, is the keyed joint
shown at D, the whole width of the joint in this case being treated with
the curved key. Struck or bevelled, or weathered, joints have the upper
portion pressed back with the trowel to form a sloping surface, which
throws off the wet. The lower edge is cut off with the trowel to a straight
edge. This joint is in very common use for new work. Ignorant workmen
frequently make the slope in the opposite direction (F), thus forming a
ledge on the brick; this catches the water, which on being frozen rapidly
causes the disintegration of the upper portion of the brick and of the
joint itself. With recessed jointing, not much used, a deep shadow may be
obtained. This form of joint, illustrated in G, is open to very serious
objections, for it encourages the soaking of the brick with rain instead of
throwing off the wet, as it seems the natural function of good pointing,
and this, besides causing undue dampness in the wall, renders it liable to
damage by frost. It also leaves the arrises of the bricks unprotected and
liable to be damaged, and from its deep recessed form does not make for
stability in the work. Gauged work has very thin joints, as shown at H,
formed by dipping the side of the brick in white lime putty. The sketch I
shows a joint raked out and filled in with pointing mortar to form a flush
joint, or it may be finished in any of the preceding forms. Where the wall
is to be plastered the joints are either left open or raked out, or the
superfluous mortar may be left protruding as shown at J. By either method
an excellent key is obtained, to which the rendering firmly adheres. In
tuck pointing (K) the joints are raked out and stopped, i.e. filled in
flush with mortar coloured to match the brickwork. The face of the wall is
then rubbed over with a soft brick of the same colour, or the work may be
coloured with pigment. A narrow groove is then cut in the joints, and the
mortar allowed to set. White lime putty is next filled into the groove,
being pressed on with a jointing tool, leaving a white joint 1/8 to 1/4 in.
wide, and with a projection of about 1/16 in. beyond the face of the work.
This method is not a good or a durable one, and should only be adopted in
old work when the edges of the bricks are broken or irregular. In bastard
tuck pointing (L), the ridge, instead of being in white lime putty, is
formed of the stopping mortar itself.

Footings, as will be seen on reference to fig. 1, are the wide courses of
brickwork at the base or foot of a wall. They serve to spread [Sidenote:
Footings.] the pressure over a larger area of ground, offsets 21/4 in. wide
being made on each side of the wall until a width equal to double the
thickness of the wall is reached. Thus in a wall 131/2 in. (11/2 bricks) thick,
this bottom course would be 2 ft. 3 in. (3 bricks) wide. It is preferable
for greater strength to double the lowest course. The foundation bed of
concrete then spreading out an additional 6 in. on each side brings the
width of the surface bearing on the ground to 3 ft. 3 in. The London
Building Act requires the projection of concrete on each side of the
brickwork to be only 4 in., but a projection of 6 in. is generally made to
allow for easy working. Footings should be built with hard bricks laid
principally as headers; stretchers, if necessary, should be placed in the
middle of the wall.

[Illustration: FIG. 4.--Diagram of Bonding.]

Bond in brickwork is the arrangement by which the bricks of every course
cover the joints of those in the course below it, and so [Sidenote:
Bonding.] tend to make the whole mass or combination of bricks act as much
together, or as dependently one upon another, as possible. The workmen
should be strictly supervised as they proceed with the work, for many
failures are due to their ignorance or carelessness in this particular. The
object of bonding will be understood by reference to fig. 4. Here it is
evident from the arrangement of the bricks that any weight placed on the
topmost brick (a) is carried down and borne alike in every course; in this
way the weight on each brick is distributed over an area increasing with
every course. But this forms a longitudinal bond only, which cannot extend
its influence beyond the width of the brick; and a wall of one brick and a
half, or two bricks, thick, built in this manner, would in effect consist
of three or four half brick thick walls acting independently of each other.
If the bricks were turned so as to show their short sides or ends in front
instead of their long ones, certainly a compact wall of a whole brick
thick, instead of half a brick, would be produced, and while the thickness
of the wall would be double, the longitudinal bond would be shortened by
one-half: a wall of any great thickness built in this manner would
necessarily be composed of so many independent one-brick walls. To produce
a transverse and yet preserve a true longitudinal bond, the bricks are laid
in a definite arrangement of stretchers and headers.

[Illustration: FIG. 5.--English Bond.

In this and following illustration of bond in brickwork the position of
bricks in the second course is indicated by dotted lines.]

In "English bond" (fig. 5), rightly considered the most perfect in use, the
bricks are laid in alternate courses of headers and stretchers, thus
combining the advantages of the two previous modes of arrangement. A
reference to fig. 5 will show how the process of bonding is pursued in a
wall one and a half bricks in thickness, and how the quoins are formed. In
walls which are a multiple of a whole brick, the appearance of the same
course is similar on the elevations of the front and back faces, but in
walls where an odd half brick must be used to make up the thickness, as is
the case in the illustration, the appearance of the opposite sides of a
course is inverted. The example illustrates the principle of English bond;
thicker walls are constructed in the same manner by an extension of the
same methods. It will be observed that portions of a brick have to be
inserted near a vertical end or a quoin, in order to start the regular
bond. These portions equal a half header in width, and are called queen
closers; they are placed next to the first header. A three-quarter brick is
obviously as available for this purpose as a header and closer combined,
but the latter method is preferred because by the use of it uniformity of
appearance is preserved, and whole bricks are retained on the returns. King
closers are used at rebated openings formed in walls in Flemish bond, and
by reason of the greater width of the back or "tail," add strength to the
work. They are cut on the splay so that the front end is half the width of
a header and one side half the length of the brick. An example of their use
will be seen in fig. 15. In walls of almost all thicknesses above 9 in.,
except in the [v.04 p.0525] English bond, to preserve the transverse and
yet not destroy the longitudinal bond, it is frequently necessary to use
half bricks. It may be taken as a general rule that a brick should never be
cut if it can be worked in whole, for a new joint is thereby created in a
construction, the difficulty of which consists in obviating the debility
arising from the constant recurrence of joints. Great insistence must be
laid on this point, especially at the junctions of walls, where the
admission of closers already constitutes a weakness which would only be
increased by the use of other bats or fragments of bricks.

[Illustration: FIG. 6.--Flemish Bond.]

Another method of bonding brickwork, instead of placing the bricks in
alternate courses of headers and stretchers, places them alternately as
headers and stretchers in the same course, the appearance of the course
being the same on each face. This is called "Flemish bond." Closers are
necessary to this variety of bond. From fig. 6 it will be seen that, owing
to the comparative weakness of the transverse tie, and the numbers of half
bricks required to be used and the thereby increased number of joints, this
bond is not so perfect nor so strong as English. The arrangements of the
face joints, however, presenting in Flemish bond a neater appearance than
in English bond, it is generally selected for the external walls of
domestic and other buildings where good effect is desirable. In buildings
erected for manufacturing and similar purposes, and in engineering works
where the greatest degree of strength and compactness is considered of the
highest importance, English bond should have the preference.

A compromise is sometimes made between the two above-mentioned bonds. For
the sake of appearance the bricks are laid to form Flemish bond on the
face, while the backing is of English bond, the object being to combine the
best features of the two bonds. Undoubtedly the result is an improvement on
Flemish bond, obviating as it does the use of bats in the interior of the
wall. This method of bonding is termed "single Flemish bond," and is shown
in fig. 7.

In stretching bond, which should only be used for walls half a brick in
thickness, all the bricks are laid as stretchers, a half brick being used
in alternate courses to start the bond. In work curved too sharply on plan
to admit of the use of stretchers, and for footings, projecting mouldings
and corbels, the bricks are all laid as headers, i.e. with their ends to
the front, and their length across the thickness of the wall. This is
termed "heading bond."

[Illustration: FIG. 7.--Single Flemish Bond.]

In thick walls, three bricks thick and upwards, a saving of labour is
effected without loss of strength, by the adoption of "herring bone" or
"diagonal bond" in the interior of the wall, the outer faces of the wall
being built in English and Flemish bond. This mode should not be had
recourse to for walls of a less thickness than 27 in., even that being
almost too thin to admit of any great advantage from it.

Hoop-iron, about 11/2 in. wide and 1/16 in. thick, either galvanized or well
tarred and sanded to retard rusting, is used in order to obtain additional
longitudinal tie. The customary practice is to use one strip of iron for
each half-brick in thickness of the wall. Joints at the angles, and where
necessary in the length, are formed by bending the ends of the strips so as
to hook together. A patent stabbed iron now on the market is perforated to
provide a key for the mortar.

A difficulty often arises in bonding when facing work with bricks of a
slightly different size from those used in "backing," as it is technically
termed. As it is, of course, necessary to keep all brickwork in properly
levelled courses, a difference has to be made in the thickness of the
mortar joints. Apart from the extra labour involved, this obviously is
detrimental to the stability of the wall, and is apt to produce unequal
settlement and cracking. Too much care cannot be taken to obtain both
facing and backing bricks of equal size.

[Illustration: FIG. 8.]

Dishonest bricklayers do not hesitate, when using for the face of a wall
bricks of a quality superior to those used for the interior, to use
"snapped headers," that is cutting the heading bricks in halves, one brick
thus serving the purposes of two as regards outward appearance. This is a
most pernicious practice, unworthy of adoption by any craftsman of repute,
for a skin of brickwork 41/2 in. thick is thus carried up with a straight
mortar joint behind it, the proper bonding with the back of the wall by
means of headers being destroyed.

American building acts describe the kind of bond to be used for ordinary
walls, and the kind for faced walls. Tie courses also require an extra
thickness where walls are perforated with over 30% of flues.

The importance for sanitary and other reasons of keeping walls dry is
admitted by all who have observed the deleterious action of damp upon a
building.

Walls are liable to become damp, (1) by wet rising up the wall from the
earth; (2) by water soaking down from the top of the [Sidenote: Prevention
of damp.] wall; (3) by rain being driven on to the face by wind. Dampness
from the first cause may be prevented by the introduction of damp-proof
courses or the construction of dry areas; from the second by means of a
coping of stone, cement or other non-porous material; and from the third by
covering the exterior with impervious materials or by the adoption of
hollow walls.

[Illustration: FIG. 9.]

After the footings have been laid and the wall has been brought up to not
less than 6 in. above the finished surface of the ground, and previous to
fixing the plate carrying the ground floor, there should always be
introduced a course of some damp-proof material to prevent the rise of
moisture from the soil. There are several forms of damp-proof course. A
very usual one is a double layer of roofing slates laid in neat Portland
cement (fig. 8), the joints being well lapped. A course or two of
Staffordshire blue bricks in cement is excellent where heavy weights have
to be considered. Glazed stoneware perforated slabs about 2 in. thick are
specially made for use as damp-proof courses. Asphalt (fig. 9) recently has
come into great favour with architects; a layer 1/2 or 3/4 in. thick is a good
protection against damp, and not likely to crack should a settlement occur,
but in hot weather it is liable to squeeze out at the joints under heavy
weights. Felt covered with bitumen is an excellent substitute for asphalt,
and is not liable to crack or squeeze out. Sheet lead is efficient, but
very costly and also somewhat liable to squeezing. A damp-proof course has
been introduced consisting of a thin sheet of lead sandwiched between
layers of asphalt. Basement storeys to be kept dry require, besides the
damp-proof course horizontally in the wall, a horizontal course, usually of
asphalt, in the thickness of the floor, and also a vertical damp-proof
course from a level below that of the floor to about 6 in. above the level
of the ground, either built in the thickness of the wall or rendered on the
outside between the wall and the surrounding earth (fig. 10).

By means of dry areas or air drains (figs. 11 and 12), a hollow [v.04
p.0526] space 9 in. or more in width is formed around those portions of the
walls situated below the ground, the object being to prevent them from
coming into contact with the brickwork of the main walls and so imparting
its moisture to the building. Arrangements should be made for keeping the
area clear of vermin and for ventilating and draining it. Dry areas, being
far from sanitary, are seldom adopted now, and are being superseded by
asphalt or cement applied to the face of the wall.

[Illustration: FIG. 10.]

[Illustration: FIG. 11.]

[Illustration: FIG. 12.]

Moisture is prevented from soaking down from the top of the wall by using a
covering of some impervious material in the form of a coping. This may
consist of ordinary bricks set on edge in cement with a double course of
tiles immediately below, called a "creasing," or of specially made
non-porous coping bricks, or of stone, cast-iron, or cement sloped or
"weathered" in order to throw the rain off.

[Illustration: FIG. 13.]

The exterior of walls above the ground line may be protected by coating the
surface with cement or rough cast; or covering with slates or tiles fixed
on battens in a similar manner to those on a roof (fig.13).

The use of hollow walls in exposed positions has already been referred to.

The by-laws dated 1891, made by the London County Council under section 16
of the Metropolis Management and Buildings Acts Amendment Act 1878, require
that "every wall of a house or building shall have a damp course composed
of materials impervious to moisture approved by the district surveyor,
extending throughout its whole thickness at the level of not less than 6
in. below the level of the lowest floor. Every external wall or enclosing
wall of habitable rooms or their appurtenances or cellars which abuts
against the earth shall be protected by materials impervious to moisture to
the satisfaction of the district surveyor..." "The top of every party-wall
and parapet-wall shall be finished with one course of hard, well-burnt
bricks set on edge, in cement, or by a coping of any other waterproof and
fire-resisting material, properly secured."

Arches are constructions built of wedge-shaped blocks, which by reason of
their shape give support one to another, and to the [Sidenote: Arches.]
super-imposed weight, the resulting load being transmitted through the
blocks to the abutments upon which the ends of the arch rest. An arch
should be composed of such materials and designed of such dimensions as to
enable it to retain its proper shape and resist the crushing strain imposed
upon it. The abutments also must be strong enough to take safely the thrust
of the weighted arch, as the slightest movement in these supports will
cause deflection and failure. The outward thrust of an arch decreases as it
approaches the semicircular form, but the somewhat prevalent idea that in
the latter form no thrusting takes place is at variance with fact.

[Illustration: FIG. 14.]

Arches in brickwork may be classed under three heads: plain arches,
rough-cut and gauged. Plain arches are built of uncut bricks, and since the
difference between the outer and inner periphery of the arch requires the
parts of which an arch is made up to be wedge-formed, which an ordinary
brick is not, the difference must be made in mortar, with the result that
the joints become wedge-shaped. This obviously gives an objectionable
inconsistency of material in the arch, and for this reason to obtain
greatest strength it is advisable to build these arches in independent
rings of half-brick thickness. The undermost rings should have thin joints,
those of each succeeding ring being slightly thickened. This prevents the
lowest ring from settling while those above remain in position, which would
cause an ugly fissure. In work of large span bonding blocks or "lacing
courses" should be built into the arch, set in cement and running through
its thickness at intervals, care being taken to introduce the lacing course
at a place where the joints of the various rings coincide. Stone blocks in
the shape of a voussoir (fig. 14) may be used instead. Except for these
lacing courses hydraulic lime mortar should be used for large arches, on
account of its slightly accommodating nature.

Rough-cut arches are those in which the bricks are roughly cut with an axe
to a wedge form; they are used over openings, such as doors and windows,
where a strong arch of neat appearance is desired. The joints are usually
made equal in width to those of the ordinary brickwork. Gauged arches are
composed of specially made soft bricks, which are cut and rubbed to gauges
or templates so as to form perfectly fitting voussoirs. Gauging is, of
course, equally applicable to arches and walling, as it means no more than
bringing every brick exactly to a certain form by cutting and rubbing.
Gauged brickwork is set in lime putty instead of common mortar; the
finished joints should not be more than 1/32 in. wide. To give stability
the sides of the voussoirs are gauged out hollow and grouted in Portland
cement, thus connecting each brick with the next by a joggle joint. Gauged
arches, being for the most part but a half-brick in thickness on the soffit
and not being tied by a bond to anything behind them--for behind them is
the lintel with rough discharging arch over, supporting the remaining width
of the wall--require to be executed with great care and nicety. It is a
common fault with workmen to rub the bricks thinner behind than before to
lessen the labour required to obtain a very fine face joint. This practice
tends to make the work bulge outwards; it should rather be inverted if it
be done at all, though the best work is that in which the bricks are gauged
to exactly the same thickness at the back as at the front. The same fault
occurs when a gauged arch is inserted in an old wall, on account of the
difficulty of filling up with cement the space behind the bricks.

The bond of an arch obtains its name from the arrangement of headers and
stretchers on its soffit. The under side of an arch built in English bond,
therefore, will show the same arrangement as the face of a wall built in
English bond. If the arch is in Flemish the soffit presents the same
appearance as the elevation of a wall built in that bond.

It is generally held that the building of wood into brickwork [Sidenote:
Plates.] should as far as is possible be avoided. Wall plates of wood are,
however, necessary where wood joists are used, and where these plates may
not be supported on corbels of projecting brickwork or iron they must be
let flush into the wall, taking the place of a course of bricks. They form
a uniform bed for the joists, to which easy fixing is obtained. The various
modes adopted for resting and fixing the ends of joists on walls are
treated in the article CARPENTRY.

[Illustration: FIG. 15.]

Lintels, which may be of iron, steel, plain or reinforced concrete, or
stone, are used over square-headed openings instead of or in conjunction
with arches. They are useful to preserve the square form and receive the
joiners' fittings, but except when made of steel or of concrete reinforced
with steel bars, they should have relieving arches turned immediately over
them (Fig.15).

"Fixing bricks" were formerly of wood of the same size as the ordinary
brick, and built into the wall as required for fixing joinery. Owing to
their liability to shrinkage and decay, their use is now practically
abandoned, their place being taken by bricks of coke-breeze concrete, which
do not shrink or rot and hold fast nails or screws driven into them.
Another method often adopted for [v.04 p.0527] providing a fixing for
joinery is to build in wood slips the thickness of a joint and 41/2 in. wide.
When suitable provision for fixing has not been made, wood plugs are driven
into the joints of the bricks. Great care must be taken in driving these in
the joints of reveals or at the corners of walls, or damage may be done.

The name "brick-ashlar" is given to walls faced with ashlar stonework
backed in with brickwork. Such constructions are liable in an aggravated
degree to the unequal settling and its attendant evils pointed out as
existing in walls built with different qualities of bricks. The outer face
is composed of unyielding stone with few and very thin joints, which
perhaps do not occupy more than a hundredth part of its height, while the
back is built up of bricks with about one-eighth its height composed of
mortar joints, that is, of a material that by its nature and manner of
application must both shrink in drying and yield to pressure. To obviate
this tendency to settle and thus cause the bulging of the face or failure
of the wall, the mortar used should be composed of Portland cement and sand
with a large proportion of the former, and worked as stiff as it
conveniently can be. In building such work the stones should be in height
equal to an exact number of brick courses. It is a common practice in
erecting buildings with a facing of Kentish rag rubble to back up the
stonework with bricks. Owing to the great irregularity of the stones, great
difficulty is experienced in obtaining proper bond between the two
materials. Through bonding stones or headers should be frequently built in,
and the whole of the work executed in cement mortar to ensure stability.

Not the least important part of the bricklayer's art is the formation of
chimney and other flues. Considerable skill is required in [Sidenote:
Chimneys and flues.] gathering-over properly above the fireplace so as to
conduct the smoke into the smaller flue, which itself requires to be built
with precision, so that its capacity may not vary in different parts. Bends
must be made in gradual curves so as to offer the least possible resistance
to the up-draught, and at least one bend of not less than 60 deg. should be
formed in each flue to intercept down-draughts. Every fireplace must have a
separate flue. The collection of a number of flues into a "stack" is
economical, and tends to increase the efficiency of the flues, the heat
from one flue assisting the up-draught in those adjoining it. It is also
desirable from an aesthetic point of view, for a number of single flue
chimneys sticking up from various parts of the roof would appear most
unsightly. The architects of the Elizabethan and later periods were masters
of this difficult art of treating a stack or stacks as an architectural
feature. The shaft should be carried well above the roof, higher, if
possible, than adjacent buildings, which are apt to cause down-draught and
make the chimney smoke. When this is found impossible, one of the many
forms of patent chimney-pots or revolving cowls must be adopted. Each flue
must be separated by smoke-proof "withes" or divisions, usually half a
brick in thickness; connexion between them causes smoky chimneys. The size
of the flue for an ordinary grate is 14x9 in.; for a kitchen stove 14x14
in. The outer wall of a chimney stack may with advantage be made 9 in.
thick. Fireclay tubes, rectangular or circular in transverse section, are
largely used in place of the pargetting; although more expensive than the
latter they have the advantage in point of cleanliness and durability.
Fireplaces generally require more depth than can be provided in the
thickness of the wall, and therefore necessitate a projection to contain
the fireplace and flues, called the "chimney breast." Sometimes, especially
when the wall is an external one, the projection may be made on the back,
thus allowing a flush wall in the room and giving more space and a more
conveniently-shaped room. The projection on the outside face of the wall
may be treated as an ornamental feature. The fireplace opening is covered
by a brick relieving arch, which is fortified by wrought-iron bar from 1/2 to
3/4 in. thick and 2 to 3 in. wide. It is usually bent to a "camber," and the
brick arch built upon it naturally takes the same curve. Each end is
"caulked," that is, split longitudinally and turned up and down. The
interior of a chimney breast behind the stove should always be filled in
solid with concrete or brickwork. The flooring in the chimney opening is
called the "hearth"; the back hearth covers the space between the jambs of
the chimney breast, and the front hearth rests upon the brick "trimmer
arch" designed to support it. The hearth is now often formed in solid
concrete, supported on the brick wall and fillets fixed to the floor
joists, without any trimmer arch and finished in neat cement or glazed
tiles instead of stone slabs.

Tall furnace chimneys should stand as separate constructions, unconnected
with other buildings. If it is necessary to bring other work close up, a
straight joint should be used. The shaft of the chimney will be built
"overhand," the men working from the inside. Lime mortar is used, cement
being too rigid to allow the chimney to rock in the wind. Not more than 3
ft. in height should be erected in one day, the work of necessity being
done in small portions to allow the mortar to set before it is required to
sustain much weight. The bond usually adopted is one course of headers to
four of stretchers. Scaffolding is sometimes erected outside for a height
of 25 or 30 ft., to facilitate better pointing, especially where the
chimney is in a prominent position. The brickwork at the top must,
according to the London Building Act, be 9 in. thick (it is better 14 in.
in shafts over 100 ft. high), increasing half a brick in thickness for
every additional 20 ft. measured downwards. "The shaft shall taper
gradually from the base to the top at the rate of at least 21/2 in. in 10 ft.
of height. The width of the base of the shaft if square shall be at least
one-tenth of the proposed height of the shaft, or if round or any other
shape, then one-twelfth of the height. Firebricks built inside the lower
portion of the shaft shall be provided, as additional to and independent of
the prescribed thickness of brickwork, and shall not be bonded therewith."
The firebrick lining should be carried up from about 25 ft. for ordinary
temperatures to double that height for very great ones, a space of 11/2 to 3
in. being kept between the lining and the main wall. The lining itself is
usually 41/2 in. thick. The cap is usually of cast iron or terra-cotta
strengthened with iron bolts and straps, and sometimes of stone, but the
difficulty of properly fixing this latter material causes it to be
neglected in favour of one of the former. (See a paper by F.J. Bancroft on
"Chimney Construction," which contains a tabulated description of nearly
sixty shafts, _Proc. Civ. and Mech. Eng. Soc._, December 1883.)

The work of laying bricks or tiles as paving falls to the lot of the
bricklayer. Paving formed of ordinary bricks laid flat or on their
[Sidenote: Brick paving.] edges was once in general use, but is now almost
abandoned in favour of floors of special tiles or cement paving, the latter
being practically non-porous and therefore more sanitary and cleaner.
Special bricks of extremely hard texture are made for stable and similar
paving, having grooves worked on the face to assist drainage and afford
good foothold. A bed of concrete 6 in. thick is usually provided under
paving, or when the bricks are placed on edge the concrete for external
paving may be omitted and the bricks bedded in sand, the ground being
previously well rammed. The side joints of the bricks are grouted in with
lime or cement. Dutch clinkers are small, hard paving bricks burned at a
high temperature and of a light yellow colour; they are 6 in. long, 3 in.
wide, 11/2 in. thick. A variety of paving tile called "oven tiles" is of
similar material to the ordinary red brick, and in size is 10 or 12 in.
square and 1 to 2 in. thick. An immense variety of ornamental paving and
walling tiles is now manufactured of different colours, sizes and shapes,
and the use of these for lining sculleries, lavatories, bathrooms,
provision shops, &c., makes for cleanliness and improved sanitary
conditions. Besides, however, being put to these uses, tiles are often used
in the ornamentation of buildings, externally as well as internally.

Mosaic work is composed of small pieces of marble, stone, glass or pottery,
laid as paving or wall lining, usually in some ornamental pattern or
design. A firm bed of concrete is required, the pieces of [v.04 p.0528]
material being fixed in a float of cement about half or three-quarters of
an inch thick. Roman mosaic is formed with cubes of marble of various
colours pressed into the float. A less costly paving may be obtained by
strewing irregularly-shaped marble chips over the floated surface: these
are pressed into the cement with a plasterer's hand float, and the whole is
then rolled with an iron roller. This is called "terazzo mosaic." In either
the Roman or terazzo method any patterns or designs that are introduced are
first worked in position, the ground-work being filled in afterwards. For
the use of cement for paving see PLASTER.

The principal publications on brickwork are as follows:--Rivington, _Notes
on Building Construction_, vols. i. ii. iii.; Col. H.E. Seddon, _Aide
Memoir_, vol. ii.; _Specification_; J.P. Allen, _Building Construction_;
F.E. Kidder, _Building Construction and Superintendence_, part i. (1903);
Longmans & Green, _Building Construction_; E. Dobson, _Bricks and Tiles_;
Henry Adams, _Building Construction_; C.F. Mitchell, _Building
Construction_, vols. i. ii.; E. Street, _Brick and Marble Architecture in
Italy_.

(J. BT.)

BRICOLE (a French word of unknown origin), a military engine for casting
heavy stones; also a term in tennis for a sidestroke rebounding off the
wall of the court, corrupted into "brickwall" from a supposed reference to
the wall, and in billiards for a stroke off the cushion to make a cannon or
hazard.

BRIDAINE (or BRYDAYNE), JACQUES (1701-1767), French Roman Catholic
preacher, was born at Chuslan in the department of Gard on the 21st of
March 1701. He was educated at Avignon, first in the Jesuit college and
afterwards at the Sulpician seminary of St Charles. Soon after his
ordination to the priesthood in 1725, he joined the _Missions Royales_,
organized to bring back to the Catholic faith the Protestants of France. He
gained their good-will and made many converts; and for over forty years he
visited as a missionary preacher almost every town of central and southern
France. In Paris, in 1744, his sermons created a deep impression by their
eloquence and sincerity. He died at Roquemaure, near Avignon, on the 22nd
of December 1767. He was the author of _Cantiques spirituels_ (Montpelier,
1748, frequently reprinted, in use in most French churches); his sermons
were published in 5 vols. at Avignon in 1823 (ed. Paris, 1861).

See Abbe G. Carron, _Le Modele des pretres_ (1803).

BRIDE (a common Teutonic word, e.g. Goth. _bruths_, O.Eng. _bryd_, O.H.Ger.
_prut_, Mod. Ger. _Braut_, Dut. _bruid_, possibly derived from the root
_bru-_, cook, brew; from the med. latinized form _bruta_, in the sense of
daughter-in-law, is derived the Fr. _bru_), the term used of a woman on her
wedding-day, and applicable during the first year of wifehood. It appears
in combination with many words, some of them obsolete. Thus "bridegroom" is
the newly married man, and "bride-bell," "bride-banquet" are old
equivalents of wedding-bells, wedding-breakfast. "Bridal" (from
_Bride-ale_), originally the wedding-feast itself, has grown into a general
descriptive adjective, e.g. the _bridal_ party, the _bridal_ ceremony. The
_bride-cake_ had its origin in the Roman _confarreatio_, a form of
marriage, the essential features of which were the eating by the couple of
a cake made of salt, water and flour, and the holding by the bride of three
wheat-ears, symbolical of plenty. Under Tiberius the cake-eating fell into
disuse, but the wheat ears survived. In the middle ages they were either
worn or carried by the bride. Eventually it became the custom for the young
girls to assemble outside the church porch and throw grains of wheat over
the bride, and afterwards a scramble for the grains took place. In time the
wheat-grains came to be cooked into thin dry biscuits, which were broken
over the bride's head, as is the custom in Scotland to-day, an oatmeal cake
being used. In Elizabeth's reign these biscuits began to take the form of
small rectangular cakes made of eggs, milk, sugar, currants and spices.
Every wedding guest had one at least, and the whole collection were thrown
at the bride the instant she crossed the threshold. Those which lighted on
her head or shoulders were most prized by the scramblers. At last these
cakes became amalgamated into a large one which took on its full glories of
almond paste and ornaments during Charles II.'s time. But even to-day in
rural parishes, e.g. north Notts, wheat is thrown over the bridal couple
with the cry "Bread for life and pudding for ever," expressive of a wish
that the newly wed may be always affluent. The throwing of rice, a very
ancient custom but one later than the wheat, is symbolical of the wish that
the bridal may be fruitful. The _bride-cup_ was the bowl or loving-cup in
which the bridegroom pledged the bride, and she him. The custom of breaking
this wine-cup, after the bridal couple had drained its contents, is common
to both the Jews and the members of the Greek Church. The former dash it
against the wall or on the ground, the latter tread it under foot. The
phrase "bride-cup" was also sometimes used of the bowl of spiced wine
prepared at night for the bridal couple. _Bride-favours_, anciently called
bride-lace, were at first pieces of gold, silk or other lace, used to bind
up the sprigs of rosemary formerly worn at weddings. These took later the
form of bunches of ribbons, which were at last metamorphosed into rosettes.
_Bridegroom-men_ and _bridesmaids_ had formerly important duties. The men
were called bride-knights, and represented a survival of the primitive days
of marriage by capture, when a man called his friends in to assist to
"lift" the bride. Bridesmaids were usual in Saxon England. The senior of
them had personally to attend the bride for some days before the wedding.
The making of the bridal wreath, the decoration of the tables for the
wedding feast, the dressing of the bride, were among her special tasks. In
the same way the senior groomsman (the _best man_) was the personal
attendant of the husband. The _bride-wain_, the wagon in which the bride
was driven to her new home, gave its name to the weddings of any poor
deserving couple, who drove a "wain" round the village, collecting small
sums of money or articles of furniture towards their housekeeping. These
were called bidding-weddings, or bid-ales, which were in the nature of
"benefit" feasts. So general is still the custom of "bidding-weddings" in
Wales, that printers usually keep the form of invitation in type. Sometimes
as many as six hundred couples will walk in the bridal procession. The
_bride's wreath_ is a Christian substitute for the gilt coronet all Jewish
brides wore. The crowning of the bride is still observed by the Russians,
and the Calvinists of Holland and Switzerland. The wearing of orange
blossoms is said to have started with the Saracens, who regarded them as
emblems of fecundity. It was introduced into Europe by the Crusaders. The
_bride's veil_ is the modern form of the _flammeum_ or large yellow veil
which completely enveloped the Greek and Roman brides during the ceremony.
Such a covering is still in use among the Jews and the Persians.

See Brand, _Antiquities of Great Britain_ (Hazlitt's ed., 1905); Rev J.
Edward Vaux, _Church Folklore_ (1894).

BRIDEWELL, a district of London between Fleet Street and the Thames, so
called from the well of St Bride or St Bridget close by. From William the
Conqueror's time, a castle or Norman tower, long the occasional residence
of the kings of England, stood there by the Fleet ditch. Henry VIII., Stow
says, built there "a stately and beautiful house," specially for the
housing of the emperor Charles V. and his suite in 1525. During the hearing
of the divorce suit by the Cardinals at Blackfriars, Henry and Catharine of
Aragon lived there. In 1553 Edward VI. made it over to the city as a
penitentiary, a house of correction for vagabonds and loose women; and it
was formally taken possession of by the lord mayor and corporation in 1555.
The greater part of the building was destroyed in the Great Fire of 1666.
New Bridewell, built in 1829, was pulled down in 1864. The term has become
a synonym for any reformatory.

BRIDGE, a game of cards, developed out of the game of whist. The country of
its origin is unknown. A similar game is said to have been played in
Denmark in the middle of the 19th century. A game in all respects the same
as bridge, except that in "no trumps" each trick counted ten instead of
twelve, was played in England about 1884 under the name of Dutch whist.
Some connect it with Turkey and Egypt under the name of "Khedive," or with
a Russian game called "Yeralash." It was in Turkey that it first won a
share of popular favour. Under the synonyms of "Biritch," "Bridge," or
"Russian whist," it found its way to the London clubs about 1894, from
which date its popularity rapidly increased.

_Ordinary Bridge._--Bridge, in its ordinary form, differs from [v.04
p.0529] whist in the following respects:--Although there are four players,
yet in each hand the partner of the dealer takes no part in the play of
that particular hand. After the first lead his cards are placed on the
table exposed, and are played by the dealer as at dummy whist; nevertheless
the dealer's partner is interested in the result of the hand equally with
the dealer. The trump suit is not determined by the last card dealt, but is
selected by the dealer or his partner without consultation, the former
having the first option. It is further open to them to play without a trump
suit. The value of tricks and honours varies with the suit declared as
trumps. Honours are reckoned differently from whist, and on a scale which
is somewhat involved. The score for honours does not count towards winning
or losing the rubber, but is added afterwards to the trick score in order
to determine the value of the rubber. There are also scores for holding no
trumps ("chicane"), and for winning all the tricks or all but one ("slam").

The score has to be kept on paper. It is usual for the scoring block to
have two vertical columns divided halfway by a horizontal line. The left
column is for the scorers' side, and the right for the opponents'. Honours
are scored above the horizontal line, and tricks below. The drawback to
this arrangement is that, since the scores for each hand are not kept
separately, it is generally impossible to trace an error in the score
without going through the whole series of hands. A better plan, it seems,
is to have four columns ruled, the inner two being assigned to tricks, the
outer ones to honours. By this method a line can be reserved for each hand,
and any discrepancy in the scores at once rectified.

The Portland Club, London, drew up a code of laws in 1895, and this code,
with a few amendments, was in July 1895 adopted by a joint committee of the
Turf and Portland Clubs. A revised code came into force in January 1905,
the provisions of which are here summarized.

Each trick above 6 counts 2 points in a spade declaration, 4 in a club, 6
in a diamond, 8 in a heart, 12 in a no-trump declaration. The game consists
of 30 points made by tricks alone. When one side has won two games the
rubber is ended. The winners are entitled to add 100 points to their score.
Honours consist of ace, king, queen, knave, ten, in a suit declaration. If
a player and his partner conjointly hold 3 (or "simple") honours they score
twice the value of a trick; if 4 honours, 4 times; if 5 honours, 5 times.
If a player in his own hand hold 4 honours he is entitled to score 4
honours in addition to the score for conjoint honours; thus, if one player
hold 4 honours and his partner the other their total score is 9 by honours.
Similarly if a player hold 5 honours in his own hand he is entitled to
score 10 by honours. If in a no-trump hand the partners conjointly hold 3
aces, they score 30 for honours; if 4 aces, 40 for honours. 4 aces in 1
hand count 100. On the same footing as the score for honours are the
following: _chicane_, if a player hold no trump, in amount equal to simple
honours; _grand slam_, if one side win all the tricks, 40 points; _little
slam_, if they win 12 tricks, 20 points. At the end of the rubber the total
scores, whether made by tricks, honours, chicane, slam, or rubber points,
are added together, and the difference between the two totals is the number
of points won.

At the opening of play, partners are arranged and the cards are shuffled,
cut and dealt (the last card not being turned) as at whist; but the dealer
cannot lose the deal by misdealing. After the deal is completed, the dealer
makes the trump or no-trump (_sans atout_) declaration, or passes the
choice to his partner without remark. If the dealer's partner make the
declaration out of his turn, the adversary on the dealer's left may,
without consultation, claim a fresh deal. If an adversary make a
declaration, the dealer may claim a fresh deal or disregard the
declaration. Then after the declaration, either adversary may double, the
leader having first option. The effect of doubling is that each trick is
worth twice as many points as before; but the scores for honours, chicane
and slam are unaltered. If a declaration is doubled, the dealer and his
partner have the right of redoubling, thus making each trick worth four
times as much as at first. The declarer has the first option. The other
side can again redouble, and so on; but the value of a trick is limited to
100 points. In the play of the hand the laws are nearly the same as the
laws of whist, except that the dealer may expose his cards and lead out of
turn without penalty; after the second hand has played, however, he can
only correct this lead out of turn with the permission of the adversaries.
Dummy cannot revoke. The dealer's partner may take no part in the play of
the hand beyond guarding the dealer against revoking.

_Advice to Players._--In the choice of a suit two objects are to be aimed
at: first, to select the suit in which the combined forces have the best
chance of making tricks; secondly, to select the trump so that the value of
the suit agrees with the character of the hand, _i.e._ a suit of high value
when the hands are strong and of low value when very weak. As the deal is a
great advantage it generally happens that a high value is to be aimed at,
but occasionally a low value is desirable. The task of selection should
fall to the hand which has the most distinctive features, that is, either
the longest suit or unusual strength or weakness. No consultation being
allowed, the dealer must assume only an average amount of variation from
the normal in his partner's hand. If his own hand has distinctive features
beyond the average, he should name the trump suit himself, otherwise pass
it to his partner. It may here be stated what is the average in these
respects.

As regards the length of a suit, a player's long suit is rather more likely
to be fewer than five than over five. If the dealer has in his hand a suit
of five cards including two honours, it is probable that he has a better
suit to make trumps than dummy; if the suit is in hearts, and the dealer
has a fair hand, he ought to name the trump. As regards strength, the
average hand would contain ace, king, queen, knave and ten, or equivalent
strength. Hands stronger or weaker than this by the value of a king or less
may be described as featureless. If the dealer's hand is a king over the
average, it is more likely than not that his partner will either hold a
stronger hand, or will hold such a weak hand as will counteract the
player's strength. The dealer would not generally with such a hand declare
no trump, especially as by making a no-trump declaration the dealer
forfeits the advantage of holding the long trumps.

_Declarations by Dealer._--In calculating the strength of a hand a knave is
worth two tens, a queen is worth two knaves, a king is worth a queen and
knave together, and an ace is worth a king and queen together. A king
unguarded is worth less than a queen guarded; a queen is not fully guarded
unless accompanied by three more cards; if guarded by one small card it is
worth a knave guarded. An ace also loses in value by being sole.

A hand to be strong enough for a no-trump declaration should be a king and
ten above the average with all the honours guarded and all the suits
protected. It must be a king and knave or two queens above the average if
there is protection in three suits. It must be an ace or a king and queen
above the average if only two suits are protected. An established black
suit of six or more cards with a guarded king as card of entry is good
enough for no trumps. With three aces no trumps can be declared. Without an
ace, four kings, two queens and a knave are required in order to justify
the declaration. When the dealer has a choice of declarations, a sound
heart make is to be preferred to a doubtful no-trump. Four honours in
hearts are to be preferred to any but a very strong no-trump declaration;
but four aces counting 100 points constitute a no-trump declaration without
exception.

Six hearts should be made trumps and five with two honours unless the hand
is very weak; five hearts with one honour or four hearts with three honours
should be declared if the hand is nearly strong enough for no trumps, also
if the hand is very irregular with one suit missing or five of a black
suit. Six diamonds with one honour, five with three honours or four all
honours should be declared; weaker diamonds should be declared if the suits
are irregular, especially if blank in hearts. Six clubs with three honours
or five with four honours should be declared. Spades are practically only
declared with a weak hand; with only a king in the hand a suit of five
spades should be declared as a defensive measure. With nothing above a ten
a suit of two or three spades can be declared, though even with the weakest
hands a suit of five clubs or of six red cards will probably prove less
expensive.

_Declarations by Dummy._--From the fact that the call has been passed, the
dealer's partner must credit the dealer with less than average strength as
regards the rank of his cards, and probably a slightly increased number of
black cards; he must therefore be more backward in making a high
declaration whenever he can make a sound declaration of less value. On the
other hand, he has not the option of passing the declaration, and may be
driven to declare on less strength because the only alternative is a short
suit of spades. For example, with the hand: Hearts, ace, kv. 2; diamonds,
qn. 9, 7, 6, 3; clubs, kg. 10, 4; spades, 9, 2, the chances are in the
dealer's favour with five trumps, but decidedly against with only two, and
the diamond declaration is to be preferred to the spade. Still, a hand may
be so weak that spades should be declared with two or less, but five clubs
or six diamonds would be preferable with the weakest of hands.

[v.04 p.0530] _Declarations to the Score._--When one's score is over
twenty, club declarations should be made more frequently by the dealer.
Spades should be declared with six at the score of twenty-six and with five
at twenty-eight. When much behind in the score a risky no-trumper such as
one with an established suit of seven or eight cards without a card of
entry, may be declared.

Declaring to the score is often overdone; an ordinary weak no-trump
declaration carries with it small chances of three by tricks unless dummy
holds a no-trump hand.

_Doubling._--Practically the leader only doubles a no-trump declaration
when he holds what is probably an established suit of seven cards or a suit
which can be established with the loss of one trick and he has good cards
of re-entry. Seven cards of a suit including the ace, king and queen make
sound double without any other card of value in the hand, or six cards
including king, queen and knave with two aces in other suits.

Doubling by the third hand is universally understood to mean that the
player has a very strong suit which he can establish. In response to the
double his partner, according to different conventions, leads either a
heart or his own shortest suit as the one most likely to be the third
player's strongest. Under the short suit convention, if the doubler holds
six of a suit headed by the ace, king and queen, it is about an even chance
that his suit will be selected; he should not double with less strength.
Under the heart convention it is not necessary to have such great strength;
with a strong suit of six hearts and good cards of re-entry, enough tricks
will be saved to compensate for the doubled value. A player should
ascertain the convention followed before beginning to play.

Before doubling a suit declaration a player should feel almost certain that
he is as strong as the declarer. The minimum strength to justify the
declaration is generally five trumps, but it may have been made on six. If,
then, a player holds six trumps with an average hand as regards the rank of
his cards, or five trumps with a hand of no-trump strength, it is highly
probable that he is as strong as the declarer. It must be further taken
into account that the act of doubling gives much valuable information to
the dealer, who would otherwise play with the expectation of finding the
trumps evenly distributed; this is counterbalanced when the doubler is on
the left of the declaring hand by the intimation given to his partner to
lead trumps through the strong hand. In this position, then, the player
should double with the strength stated above. When on the declarer's right,
the player should hold much greater strength unless his hand is free from
tenaces. When a spade declaration has been made by dummy, one trump less is
necessary and the doubler need not be on the declarer's left. A spade
declaration by the dealer can be doubled with even less strength. A
declaration can be rather more freely doubled when a single trick undoubled
will take the dealer out, but even in this position the player must be
cautious of informing the dealer that there is a strong hand against him.

_Redoubling._--When a declaration has been doubled, the declarer knows the
minimum that he will find against him; he must be prepared to find
occasionally strength against him considerably exceeding this minimum.
Except in the case of a spade declaration, cases in which redoubling is
justifiable are very rare.

_The Play of the Hand._--In a no-trump declaration the main object is to
bring in a long suit. In selecting the suit to establish, the following are
favourable conditions:--One hand should hold at least five cards of the
suit. The two hands, unless with a sequence of high cards, should hold
between them eight cards of the suit, so as to render it probable that the
suit will be established in three rounds. The hand which contains the
strong suit should be sufficiently strong in cards of re-entry. The suit
should not be so full of possible tenaces as to make it disadvantageous to
open it. As regards the play of the cards in a suit, it is not the object
to make tricks early, but to make all possible tricks. Deep finesses should
be made when there is no other way of stealing a trick. Tricks may be given
away, if by so doing a favourable opening can be made for a finesse. When,
however, it is doubtful with which hand the finesse should be made, it is
better to leave it as late as possible, since the card to be finessed
against may fall, or an adversary may fail, thus disclosing the suit. It is
in general unsound to finesse against a card that must be unguarded. From a
hand short in cards of re-entry, winning cards should not be led out so as
to exhaust the suit from the partner's hand. Even a trick should sometimes
be given away. For instance, if one hand holds seven cards headed by ace,
king, and the other hand hold's only two of the suit, although there is a
fair chance of making seven tricks in the suit, it would often be right to
give the first trick to the adversaries. When one of the adversaries has
shown a long suit, it is frequently possible to prevent its being brought
in by a device, such as holding up a winning card, until the suit is
exhausted from his partner's hand, or playing in other suits so as to give
the player the lead whilst his partner his a card of his suit to return,
and to give the latter the lead when he has no card to return. The dealer
should give as little information as possible as to what he holds in his
own hand, playing frequent false cards. Usually he should play the higher
or highest of a sequence; still, there are positions in which playing the
higher gives more information than the lower; a strict adherence to a rule
in itself assists the adversaries.

With a suit declaration, if there is no chance of letting the weak hand
make a trump by ruffing, it will generally be the dealer's aim to discard
the losing cards in the declaring hand either to high cards or to the cards
of an established suit in the other hand, sometimes after the adverse
trumps have been taken out, but often before, there being no time for
drawing trumps. With no card of any value in a suit in one hand, the lead
should come from that hand, but it is better, if possible, to let the
adversaries open the suit. It is generally useless to lead a moderately
high card from the weaker hand in order to finesse it, when holding no
cards in sequence with it in either hand. Sometimes (especially in
no-trumps) it is the better play to make the weak hand third player. For
instance, with king, 8, 7, 5, 2 in one hand, knave, 4 in the other, the
best way of opening is from the hand that holds five cards.

In a no-trump declaration the opponents of the dealer should endeavour to
find the longest suit in the two hands, or the one most easily established.
With this object the leader should open his best suit. If his partner next
obtains the lead he ought to return the suit, unless he himself has a suit
which he considers better, having due regard to the fact that the first
suit is already partially established. The opponents should employ the same
tactics as the dealer to prevent the latter from bringing in a long suit;
they can use them with special effect when the long suit is in the exposed
hand.

Against no-trumps the leader should not play his winning cards unless he
has a good chance of clearing the suit without help from his partner; in
most cases it is advisable to give away the first trick, especially if he
has no card of re-entry, in order that his partner on gaining the lead may
have a card of the suit to return; but holding ace, king and queen, or ace,
king with seven in the suit, or ace, king, knave, ten with six, the player
may lead out his best. With three honours any two of which are in sequence
(not to the ace) the player should lead the higher of the sequence. He
should lead his highest card from queen, knave, ten; from queen, knave,
nine; from knave, ten, nine; knave, ten, eight, and ten, nine, eight. In
other cases the player should lead a small card; according to the usual
convention, the fourth best. His partner, and also the dealer, can credit
him with three cards higher than the card led, and can often place the
cards of the suit: for instance, the seven is led, dummy holds queen and
eight, playing the queen, the third player holds the nine and smaller
cards; the unseen cards higher than the seven are ace, king, knave and ten
of which the leader must hold three; he cannot hold both knave and ten or
he would have led the knave; he must therefore hold the ace, king and
either knave or ten. The "eleven" rule is as follows: the number of pips in
the card led subtracted from eleven (11-7=4 in the case stated) gives the
number of cards higher than the one led not in the leader's hand; the three
cards seen (queen, nine and eight) leave one for the dealer to hold. The
mental process is no shorter than assigning three out of the unseen cards
to the leader, and by not noting the unseen cards much valuable information
may be missed, as in the illustrative case given.

With a suit declared the best opening lead is a singleton, failing which a
lead from a strong sequence. A lead from a tenace or a guarded king or
queen is to be avoided. Two small cards may be led from, though the lead is
objected to by some. A suit of three small cards of no great strength
should not be opened. In cases of doubt preference should be given to
hearts and to a less extent to diamonds.

To lead up to dummy's weak suits is a valuable rule. The converse, to lead
through strength, must be used with caution, and does not apply to no-trump
declarations. It is not advisable to adopt any of the recent whist methods
of giving information. It is clear that, if the adversaries signal, the
dealer's hand alone is a secret, and he, in addition to his natural
advantage, has the further advantage of better information than either of
the adversaries. The following signals are however, used, and are of great
trick-making value: playing an unnecessarily high card, whether to one's
partner's suit or in discarding in a no-trump declaration, indicates
strength in the suit; in a suit declaration a similar method of play
indicates two only of the suit and a desire to ruff,--it is best used in
the case of a king led by one's partner.

The highest of a sequence led through dummy will frequently tell the third
player that he has a good finesse. The lowest of a sequence led through the
dealer will sometimes explain the position to the third player, at the same
time keeping the dealer in the dark.

When on dummy's left it is futile to finesse against a card not in dummy's
hand. But with ace and knave, if dummy has either king or queen, the knave
should usually be played, partly because the other high card may be in the
leader's hand, partly because, if the finesse fails, the player may still
hold a tenace over dummy. When a player is with any chance of success
trying to establish his long suit, he should keep every card of it if
possible, whether it is a suit already opened or a suit which he wishes his
partner to lead; when, however, the main object of the hand is to establish
one's partner's suit, it is not necessary for a player to keep his own long
suit, and he should pay attention to guarding the other suits. In some
circles a discard from a suit is always understood to indicate strength in
the suit; this convention, while it makes the game easier for inferior
players, frequently causes the player to throw away one of his most
valuable cards.

_Playing to the Score._--At the beginning of the hand the chances are so
great against any particular result, that at the score of love-all the
advantage of getting to any particular score has no appreciable [v.04
p.0531] effect in determining the choice of suit. In the play of the hand,
the advantage of getting to certain points should be borne in mind. The
principal points to be aimed at are 6, 18, and, in a less degree, 22. The
reason is that the scores 24, 12 and 8, which will just take the dealer out
from the respective points, can each be made in a variety of ways, and are
the most common for the dealer to make. The 2 points that take the score
from 4 to 6 are worth 4, or perhaps 5, average points; and the 2 points
that take the score from 6 to 8 are worth 1 point. When approaching game it
is an advantage to make a declaration that may just take the player out,
and, in a smaller degree, one that will not exactly take the adversaries
out. When the score is 24 to 22 against the dealer, hearts and clubs are
half a trick better relatively to diamonds than at the score of love-all.
In the first and second games of the rubber the value of each point scored
for honours is probably about a half of a point scored for tricks--in a
close game rather less, in a one-sided game rather more. In the deciding
game of the rubber, on account of the importance of winning the game, the
value of each point scored for honours sinks to one-third of a point scored
for tricks.

_Other Forms of Bridge._--The following varieties of the game are also
played:--

_Three-handed Bridge._--The three players cut; the one that cuts the lowest
card deals, and takes dummy for one deal: each takes dummy in turn. Dummy's
cards are dealt face downwards, and the dealer declares without seeing
them. If the dealer declares trumps, both adversaries may look at their
hands; doubling and redoubling proceeds as at ordinary bridge, but dummy's
hand is not exposed till the first card has been led. If the dealer passes
the declaration to dummy, his right-hand adversary, who must not have
looked at his own hand, examines dummy's, and declares trumps, not,
however, exposing the hand. The declaration is forced: with three or four
aces _sans atout_ (no trumps) must be declared: in other cases the longest
suit: if suits are equal in length, the strongest, _i.e._ the suit
containing most pips, ace counting eleven, king, queen and knave counting
ten each. If suits are equal in both length and strength, the one in which
the trick has the higher value must be trumps. On the dummy's declaration
the third player can only double before seeing his own cards. When the
first card has been led, dummy's hand is exposed, never before the lead.
The game is 30: the player wins the rubber who is the first to win two
games. Fifty points are scored for each game won, and fifty more for the
rubber. Sometimes three games are played without reference to a rubber,
fifty points being scored for a game won. No tricks score towards game
except those which a player wins in his own deal; the value of tricks won
in other deals is scored above the line with honours, slam and chicane. At
the end of the rubber the totals are added up, and the points won or lost
are adjusted thus. Suppose A is credited with 212, B with 290, and C with
312, then A owes 78 to B and 100 to C; B owes 22 to C.

_Dummy Bridge._--The player who cuts the lowest card takes dummy. Dummy
deals the first hand of all. The player who takes dummy always looks at his
own hand first, when he deals for himself or for dummy; he can either
declare trumps or "leave it" to dummy. Dummy's declaration is compulsory,
as in three-handed bridge. When the dealer deals for dummy, the player on
the dealer's _left_ must not look at his cards till either the dealer has
declared trumps or, the declaration having been left to dummy, his own
partner has led a card. The latter can double, but his partner can only
double without seeing his hand. The dealer can only redouble on his own
hand. When the player of dummy deals for himself, the player on his _right_
hand looks at dummy's hand if the declaration is passed, the positions and
restrictions of his partner and himself being reversed. If the player of
dummy declares from his own hand, the game proceeds as in ordinary bridge,
except that dummy's hand is not looked at till permission to play has been
given. When the player on dummy's right deals, dummy's partner may look at
dummy's hand to decide if he will double, but he may not look at his own
till a card has been led by dummy. In another form of dummy bridge two
hands are exposed whenever dummy's adversaries deal, but the game is
unsuited for many players, as in every other hand the game is one of
double-dummy.

_Misery Bridge._--This is a form of bridge adapted for two players. The
non-dealer has the dummy, whilst the dealer is allowed to strengthen his
hand by discarding four or fewer cards and taking an equal number from the
fourth packet dealt; the rest of the cards in that packet are unused and
remain unseen. A novel and interesting addition to the game is that the
three of clubs (called "Cato") does not rank as a club but can be played to
any trick and win it. The dealer, in addition to his other calls, may
declare "misery" when he has to make less than two tricks.

_Draw- or Two-handed Bridge._--This is the best form of bridge for two
players. Each player has a dummy, which is placed opposite to him; but the
cards are so arranged that they cannot be seen by his opponent, a special
stand being required for the purpose. The dealer makes the declaration or
passes it to his dummy to make by the same rules as in three-handed or
dummy bridge. The objection to this is that, since the opponent does not
see the dealer's dummy, he has no chance of checking an erroneous
declaration. This could be avoided by not allowing the dealer the option of
passing.

_Auction Bridge._--This variety of the game for four players, which adds an
element characteristic of poker, appears to have been suggested about 1904,
but was really introduced at the Bath Club, London, in 1907, and then was
gradually taken up by a wider circle. The laws were settled in August 1908
by a joint committee of the Bath and Portland clubs. The scoring (except as
below), value of suits, and play are as at ordinary bridge, but the variety
consists in the method of declaration, the declaration not being confined
in auction bridge to the dealer or his partner, and the deal being a
disadvantage rather than otherwise. The dealer, having examined his hand,
_must_ declare to win at least one "odd" trick, and then each player in
turn, beginning with the one on the dealer's left, has the right to pass
the previous declaration, or double, or redouble, or overcall by making a
declaration of higher value any number of times till all are satisfied, the
actual play of the combined hands (or what in ordinary bridge would be
dealer and dummy) resting eventually with the partners making the final
declaration; the partner who made the first call (however small) in the
suit finally constituting the trump (or no-trump) plays the hands, the
other being dummy. A declaration of a greater number of tricks in a suit of
lower value, which equals a previous call in value of points (_e.g._ two in
spades as against one in clubs) is "of higher value"; but doubling and
redoubling only affect the score and not the declaration, so that a call of
two diamonds overcalls one no-trump even though this has been doubled. The
scoring in auction bridge has the additional element that when the eventual
player of the two hands wins what was ultimately declared or more, his side
score the full value below the line (as tricks), but if he fails the
opponents score 50 points above the line (as honours) for each under-trick
(_i.e._ trick short of the declaration), or 100 or 200 if doubled or
redoubled, nothing being scored by either side below the line; the loss on
a declaration of one spade is limited, however, to a maximum of 100 points.
A player whose declaration has been doubled and who fulfils his contract,
scores a bonus of 50 points above the line and a further 50 points for each
additional trick beyond his declaration; if there was a redouble and he
wins, he scores double the bonus. The penalty for a revoke (unaffected by a
double) is (1) in the case of the declarer, that his adversaries add 150
above the line; (2) in the case of one of his adversaries, that the
declarer may either add 150 points above the line or may take three tricks
from his opponents and add them to his own; in the latter case such tricks
may assist him to fulfil his contract, but shall not entitle him to any
bonus for a double or redouble. A revoking side may score nothing either
above or below the line except for honours or chicane. As regards the
essential feature of auction bridge, the competitive declaration, it is
impossible here to discuss the intricacies involved. It entails, clearly,
much reliance on a good partner, since the various rounds of bidding enable
good players to draw inferences as to where the cards lie. The game opens
the door to much larger scores than ordinary bridge, and since the end only
comes from scores made below the line, there are obvious ways of prolonging
it at the cost of scores above the line which involve much more of the
gambling element. It by no means follows that the winner of the rubber is
the winner by points, and many players prefer to go for points (_i.e._
above the line) extorted from their opponents rather than for fulfilling a
declaration made by themselves.

AUTHORITIES.--"Hellespont," _Laws and Principles of Bridge_; W. Dalton,
_Saturday Bridge_, containing full bibliography (London, 1906); J. B.
Elwell, _Advanced Bridge_; R. F. Foster, _Bridge Tactics_; "Badsworth,"
_Laws and Principles of Bridge_; E. Bergholt, _Double-Dummy Bridge:
Biritch, or Russian Whist_, pamphlet in Brit. Mus.; W. Dalton, _Auction
Bridge_ (1908).

(W. H. W.*)

BRIDGEBUILDING BROTHERHOOD, a confraternity (_Fratres Pontifices_) that
arose in the south of France during the latter part of the 12th century,
and maintained hospices at the chief fords of the principal rivers, besides
building bridges and looking after ferries. The brotherhood was recognized
by Pope Clement III. in 1189.

BRIDGE-HEAD (Fr. _tete-du-pont_), in fortification, a work designed to
cover the passage of a river by means of fortifications [v.04 p.0532] on
one or both banks. As the process of moving an army over bridges is slow
and complicated, it is usually necessary to secure it from hostile
interruption, and the works constituting the bridge-head must therefore be
sufficiently far advanced to keep the enemy's artillery out of range of the
bridges. In addition, room is required for the troops to form up on the
farther bank. In former days, with short-range weapons, a bridge-head was
often little more than a screen for the bridge itself, but modern
conditions have rendered necessary far greater extension of bridge
defences.

BRIDGEND, a market town in the southern parliamentary division of
Glamorganshire, Wales, on both sides of the river Ogwr (whence its Welsh
name Penybont-ar-Ogwr). Pop. of urban district (1901) 6062. It has a
station 165 m. from London on the South Wales trunk line of the Great
Western railway, and is the junction of the Barry Company's railway to
Barry via Llantwit Major. Bridgend has a good market for agricultural
produce, and is an important centre owing to its being the natural outlet
for the mining valleys of the Llynvi, Garw and the two Ogwr rivers, which
converge about 3 m. north of the town and are connected with it by branch
lines of the Great Western railway. Though without large manufacturing
industries, the town has joinery works, a brass and iron foundry, a tannery
and brewery. There are brick-works and stone quarries, and much lime is
burnt in the neighbourhood. Just outside the town at Angelton and Parc
Gwyllt are the Glamorgan county lunatic asylums.

There was no civil parish of Bridgend previous to 1905, when one was formed
out of portions of the parishes of Newcastle and Coity. Of the castle of
Newcastle, built on the edge of a cliff above the church of that parish,
there remain a courtyard with flanking towers and a fine Norman gateway. At
Coity, about 2 m. distant, there are more extensive ruins of its castle,
originally the seat of the Turbervilles, lords of Coity, but now belonging
to the earls of Dunraven. Coity church, dating from the 14th century, is a
fine cruciform building with central embattled tower in Early Decorated
style.

BRIDGE OF ALLAN, a police burgh of Stirlingshire, Scotland. Pop. (1901)
3240. It lies on the Allan, a left-hand tributary of the Forth, 3 m. N. of
Stirling by the Caledonian railway and by tramway. Built largely on the
well-wooded slopes of Westerton and Airthrey Hill, sheltered by the Ochils
from the north and east winds, and environed by charming scenery, it has a
great reputation as a health resort and watering-place, especially in
winter and spring. There is a pump-room. The chief buildings are the
hydropathic and the Macfarlane museum of fine art and natural history. The
industries include bleaching, dyeing and paper-making. The Strathallan
Gathering, usually held in the neighbourhood, is the most popular athletic
meeting in mid-Scotland. Airthrey Castle, standing in a fine park with a
lake, adjoins the town on the south-east, and just beyond it are the old
church and burying-ground of Logie, beautifully situated at the foot of a
granite spur of the Ochil range.

BRIDGEPORT, a city, a port of entry, and one of the county-seats of
Fairfield county, Connecticut, U.S.A., co-extensive with the town of
Bridgeport, in the S.W. part of the state, on Long Island Sound, at the
mouth of the Pequonnock river; about 18 m. S.W. of New Haven. Pop. (1880)
27,643; (1890) 48,866; (1900) 70,996, of whom 22,281 were foreign-born,
including 5974 from Ireland, 3172 from Hungary, 2854 from Germany, 2755
from England, and 1436 from Italy; (1910) 102,054. Bridgeport is served by
the New York, New Haven & Hartford railway, by lines of coast steamers, and
by steamers to New York City and to Port Jefferson, directly across Long
Island Sound. The harbour, formed by the estuary of the river and Yellow
Mill Pond, an inlet, is excellent. Between the estuary and the pond is a
peninsula, East Bridgeport, in which are some of the largest manufacturing
establishments, and west of the harbour and the river is the main portion
of the city, the wholesale section extending along the bank, the retail
section farther back, and numerous factories along the line of the railway
far to the westward. There are two large parks, Beardsley, in the extreme
north part of the city, and Seaside, west of the harbour entrance and along
the Sound; in the latter are statues of Elias Howe, who built a large
sewing-machine factory here in 1863, and of P.T. Barnum, the showman, who
lived in Bridgeport after 1846 and did much for the city, especially for
East Bridgeport. In Seaside Park there is also a soldiers' and sailors'
monument, and in the vicinity are many fine residences. The principal
buildings are the St Vincent's and Bridgeport hospitals, the Protestant
orphan asylum, the Barnum Institute, occupied by the Bridgeport Scientific
and Historical Society and the Bridgeport Medical Society; and the United
States government building, which contains the post-office and the customs
house.

In 1905 Bridgeport was the principal manufacturing centre in Connecticut,
the capital invested in manufacturing being $49,381,348, and the products
being valued at $44,586,519. The largest industries were the manufacture of
corsets--the product of Bridgeport was 19.9% of the total for the United
States in 1905, Bridgeport being the leading city in this industry--sewing
machines (one of the factories of the Singer Manufacturing Co. is here),
steam-fitting and heating apparatus, cartridges (the factory of the Union
Metallic Cartridge Co. is here), automobiles, brass goods, phonographs and
gramophones, and typewriters. There are also large foundry and machine
shops. Here, too, are the winter headquarters of "Barnum and Bailey's
circus" and of "Buffalo Bill's Wild West Show." Bridgeport is a port of
entry; its imports in 1908 were valued at $656,271. Bridgeport was
originally a part of the township of Stratford. The first settlement here
was made in 1659. It was called Pequonnock until 1695, when its name was
changed to Stratfield. During the War of Independence it was a centre of
privateering. In 1800 the borough of Bridgeport was chartered, and in 1821
the township was incorporated. The city was not chartered until 1836.

See S. Orcutt's _History of the Township of Stratford and the City of
Bridgeport_ (New Haven, 1886).

BRIDGES, ROBERT (1844- ), English poet, born on the 23rd of October 1844,
was educated at Eton and at Corpus Christi College, Oxford, and studied
medicine in London at St Bartholomew's hospital. He was afterwards
assistant physician at the Children's hospital, Great Ormond Street, and
physician at the Great Northern hospital, retiring in 1882. Two years later
he married Mary, daughter of Alfred Waterhouse, R.A. As a poet Robert
Bridges stands rather apart from the current of modern English verse, but
his work has had great influence in a select circle, by its restraint,
purity, precision, and delicacy yet strength of expression; and it embodies
a distinct theory of prosody. His chief critical works are _Milton's
Prosody_ (1893), a volume made up of two earlier essays (1887 and 1889),
and _John Keats, a Critical Essay_ (1895). He maintained that English
prosody depended on the number of "stresses" in a line, not on the number
of syllables, and that poetry should follow the rules of natural speech.
His poetry was privately printed in the first instance, and was slow in
making its way beyond a comparatively small circle of his admirers. His
best work is to be found in his _Shorter Poems_ (1890), and a complete
edition of his _Poetical Works_ (6 vols.) was published in 1898-1905. His
chief volumes are _Prometheus_ (Oxford, 1883, privately printed), a "mask
in the Greek Manner"; _Eros and Psyche_ (1885), a version of Apuleius; _The
Growth of Love_, a series of sixty-nine sonnets printed for private
circulation in 1876 and 1889; _Shorter Poems_ (1890); _Nero_ (1885), a
historical tragedy, the second part of which appeared in 1894; _Achilles in
Scyros_ (1890), a drama; _Palicio_ (1890), a romantic drama in the
Elizabethan manner; _The Return of Ulysses_ (1890), a drama in five acts;
_The Christian Captives_ (1890), a tragedy on the same subject as
Calderon's _El Principe Constante_; _The Humours of the Court_ (1893), a
comedy founded on the same dramatist's _El secreto a voces_ and on Lope de
Vega's _El Perro del hortelano_; _The Feast of Bacchus_ (1889), partly
translated from the _Heauton-Timoroumenos_ of Terence; _Hymns from the
Yattendon Hymnal_ (Oxford, 1899); and _Demeter, a Mask_ (Oxford, 1905).

[v.04 p.0533] BRIDGES. 1. _Definitions and General
Considerations._--Bridges (old forms, _brig_, _brygge_, _brudge_; Dutch,
_brug_; German, _Bruecke_; a common Teutonic word) are structures carrying
roadways, waterways or railways across streams, valleys or other roads or
railways, leaving a passage way below. Long bridges of several spans are
often termed "viaducts," and bridges carrying canals are termed
"aqueducts," though this term is sometimes used for waterways which have no
bridge structure. A "culvert" is a bridge of small span giving passage to
drainage. In railway work an "overbridge" is a bridge over the railway, and
an "underbridge" is a bridge carrying the railway. In all countries there
are legal regulations fixing the minimum span and height of such bridges
and the width of roadway to be provided. Ordinarily bridges are fixed
bridges, but there are also movable bridges with machinery for opening a
clear and unobstructed passage way for navigation. Most commonly these are
"swing" or "turning" bridges. "Floating" bridges are roadways carried on
pontoons moored in a stream.

In classical and medieval times bridges were constructed of timber or
masonry, and later of brick or concrete. Then late in the 18th century
wrought iron began to be used, at first in combination with timber or cast
iron. Cast iron was about the same time used for arches, and some of the
early railway bridges were built with cast iron girders. Cast iron is now
only used for arched bridges of moderate span. Wrought iron was used on a
large scale in the suspension road bridges of the early part of the 19th
century. The great girder bridges over the Menai Strait and at Saltash near
Plymouth, erected in the middle of the 19th century, were entirely of
wrought iron, and subsequently wrought iron girder bridges were extensively
used on railways. Since the introduction of mild steel of greater tenacity
and toughness than wrought iron (_i.e._ from 1880 onwards) it has wholly
superseded the latter except for girders of less than 100 ft. span. The
latest change in the material of bridges has been the introduction of
ferro-concrete, armoured concrete, or concrete strengthened with steel bars
for arched bridges. The present article relates chiefly to metallic
bridges. It is only since metal has been used that the great spans of 500
to 1800 ft. now accomplished have been made possible.

2. In a bridge there may be distinguished the _superstructure_ and the
_substructure_. In the former the main supporting member or members may be
an arch ring or arched ribs, suspension chains or ropes, or a pair of
girders, beams or trusses. The bridge flooring rests on the supporting
members, and is of very various types according to the purpose of the
bridge. There is also in large bridges wind-bracing to stiffen the
structure against horizontal forces. The _substructure_ consists of (a) the
piers and end piers or abutments, the former sustaining a vertical load,
and the latter having to resist, in addition, the oblique thrust of an
arch, the pull of a suspension chain, or the thrust of an embankment; and
(b) the foundations below the ground level, which are often difficult and
costly parts of the structure, because the position of a bridge may be
fixed by considerations which preclude the selection of a site naturally
adapted for carrying a heavy structure.

3. _Types of Bridges_.--Bridges may be classed as _arched bridges_, in
which the principal members are in compression; _suspension bridges_, in
which the principal members are in tension; and _girder bridges_, in which
half the components of the principal members are in compression and half in
tension. But there are cases of bridges of mixed type. The choice of the
type to be adopted depends on many and complex considerations:--(1) The
cost, having regard to the materials available. For moderate spans brick,
masonry or concrete can be used without excessive cost, but for longer
spans steel is more economical, and for very long spans its use is
imperative. (2) The importance of securing permanence and small cost of
maintenance and repairs has to be considered. Masonry and concrete are more
durable than metal, and metal than timber. (3) Aesthetic considerations
sometimes have great weight, especially in towns. Masonry bridges are
preferable in appearance to any others, and metal arch bridges are less
objectionable than most forms of girder.

Most commonly the engineer has to attach great importance to the question
of cost, and to design his structure to secure the greatest economy
consistent with the provision of adequate strength. So long as bridge
building was an empirical art, great waste of material was unavoidable. The
development of the theory of structures has been largely directed to
determining the arrangements of material which are most economical,
especially in the superstructure. In the case of bridges of large span the
cost and difficulty of erection are serious, and in such cases facility of
erection becomes a governing consideration in the choice of the type to be
adopted. In many cases the span is fixed by local conditions, such as the
convenient sites for piers, or the requirements of waterway or navigation.
But here also the question of economy must be taken into the reckoning. The
cost of the superstructure increases very much as the span increases, but
the greater the cost of the substructure, the larger the span which is
economical. Broadly, the least costly arrangement is that in which the cost
of the superstructure of a span is equal to that of a pier and foundation.

For masonry, brick or concrete the arch subjected throughout to compression
is the most natural form. The arch ring can be treated as a blockwork
structure composed of rigid voussoirs. The stability of such structures
depends on the position of the line of pressure in relation to the extrados
and intrados of the arch ring. Generally the line of pressure lies within
the middle half of the depth of the arch ring. In finding the line of
pressure some principle such as the principle of least action must be used
in determining the reactions at the crown and springings, and some
assumptions must be made of not certain validity. Hence to give a margin of
safety to cover contingencies not calculable, an excess of material must be
provided. By the introduction of hinges the position of the line of
resistance can be fixed and the stress in the arch ring determined with
less uncertainty. In some recent masonry arched bridges of spans up to 150
ft. built with hinges considerable economy has been obtained.

For an elastic arch of metal there is a more complete theory, but it is
difficult of application, and there remains some uncertainty unless (as is
now commonly done) hinges are introduced at the crown and springings.

In suspension bridges the principal members are in tension, and the
introduction of iron link chains about the end of the 18th century, and
later of wire ropes of still greater tenacity, permitted the construction
of road bridges of this type with spans at that time impossible with any
other system of construction. The suspension bridge dispenses with the
compression member required in girders and with a good deal of the
stiffening required in metal arches. On the other hand, suspension bridges
require lofty towers and massive anchorages. The defect of the suspension
bridge is its flexibility. It can be stiffened by girders and bracing and
is then of mixed type, when it loses much of its advantage in economy.
Nevertheless, the stiffened suspension bridge will probably be the type
adopted in future for very great spans. A bridge on this system has been
projected at New York of 3200 ft. span.

The immense extension of railways since 1830 has involved the construction
of an enormous number of bridges, and most of these are girder bridges, in
which about half the superstructure is in tension and half in compression.
The use of wrought iron and later of mild steel has made the construction
of such bridges very convenient and economical. So far as superstructure is
concerned, more material must be used than for an arch or chain, for the
girder is in a sense a combination of arch and chain. On the other hand, a
girder imposes only a vertical load on its piers and abutments, and not a
horizontal thrust, as in the case of an arch or suspension chain. It is
also easier to erect.

A fundamental difference in girder bridges arises from the mode of support.
In the simplest case the main girders are supported at the ends only, and
if there are several spans they are _discontinuous_ or _independent_. But a
main girder may be supported at two or more points so as to be _continuous_
over two [v.04 p.0534] or more spans. The continuity permits economy of
weight. In a three-span bridge the theoretical advantage of continuity is
about 49% for a dead load and 16% for a live load. The objection to
continuity is that very small alterations of level of the supports due to
settlement of the piers may very greatly alter the distribution of stress,
and render the bridge unsafe. Hence many multiple-span bridges such as the
Hawkesbury, Benares and Chittravatti bridges have been built with
independent spans.

Lastly, some bridges are composed of cantilevers and suspended girders. The
main girder is then virtually a continuous girder hinged at the points of
contrary flexure, so that no ambiguity can arise as to the stresses.

[Illustration: FIG. 1.--Trajan's Bridge.]

Whatever type of bridge is adopted, the engineer has to ascertain the loads
to be carried, and to proportion the parts so that the stresses due to the
loads do not exceed limits found by experience to be safe. In many
countries the limits of working stress in public and railway bridges are
prescribed by law. The development of theory has advanced _pari passu_ with
the demand for bridges of greater strength and span and of more complex
design, and there is now little uncertainty in calculating the stresses in
any of the types of structure now adopted. In the modern metal bridge every
member has a definite function and is subjected to a calculated straining
action. Theory has been the guide in the development of bridge design, and
its trustworthiness is completely recognized. The margin of uncertainty
which must be met by empirical allowances on the side of safety has been
steadily diminished.

The larger the bridge, the more important is economy of material, not only
because the total expenditure is more serious, but because as the span
increases the dead weight of the structure becomes a greater fraction of
the whole load to be supported. In fact, as the span increases a point is
reached at which the dead weight of the superstructure becomes so large
that a limit is imposed to any further increase of span.

[Illustration: FIG. 2.--Bridge of Alcantara.]

HISTORY OF BRIDGE BUILDING

[Illustration: FIG. 3.--Ponte Salario.]

4. _Roman Bridges_.--The first bridge known to have been constructed at
Rome over the Tiber was the timber Pons Sublicius, the bridge defended by
Horatius. The Pons Milvius, now Ponte Molle, was reconstructed in stone by
M. Aemilius Scaurus in 109 B.C., and some portions of the old bridge are
believed to exist in the present structure. The arches vary from 51 to 79
ft. span. The Pons Fabricius (mod. Ponte dei Quattro Capi), of about 62
B.C., is practically intact; and the Pons Cestius, built probably in 46
B.C., retains much of the original masonry. The Pons Aelius, built by
Hadrian A.D. 134 and repaired by Pope Nicholas II. and Clement IX., is now
the bridge of St Angelo. It had eight arches, the greatest span being 62
ft.[1] Dio Cassius mentions a bridge, possibly 3000 to 4000 ft. in length,
built by Trajan over the Danube in A.D. 104. Some piers are said still to
exist. A bas-relief on the Trajan column shows this bridge with masonry
piers and timber arches, but the representation is probably conventional
(fig. 1). Trajan also constructed the bridge of Alcantara in Spain (fig.
2), of a total length of 670 ft., at 210 ft. above the stream. This had six
arches and was built of stone blocks without cement. The bridge of Narses,
built in the 6th century (fig. 3), carried the Via Salaria over the Anio.
It was destroyed in 1867, during the approach of Garibaldi to Rome. It had
a fortification such as became usual in later bridges for defence or for
the enforcement of tolls. The great lines of aqueducts built by Roman
engineers, and dating from 300 B.C. onwards, where they are carried above
ground, are arched bridge structures of remarkable magnitude (see
AQUEDUCTS, Sec. _Roman_). They are generally of brick and concrete.

[Illustration: FIG. 4.--First Span of Schaffhausen Bridge.]

5. _Medieval and other Early Bridges_.--Bridges with stone piers and timber
superstructures were no doubt constructed from Roman times onward, but they
have perished. Fig. 4 shows a timber bridge erected by the brothers
Grubenmann at Schaffhausen about the middle of the 18th century. It had
spans of 172 and 193 ft., and may be taken as a representative type of
bridges of this kind. The Wittingen bridge by the same engineers had a span
of 390 ft., probably the longest timber [v.04 p.0535] span ever
constructed. Of stone bridges in Great Britain, the earliest were the
cyclopean bridges still existing on Dartmoor, consisting of stone piers
bridged by stone slabs. The bridge over the East Dart near Tavistock had
three piers, with slabs 15 ft. by 6 ft. (Smiles, _Lives of the Engineers,_
ii. 43). It is reputed to have lasted for 2000 years.

[Illustration: FIG. 5.--Crowland Bridge.]

The curious bridge at Crowland near Peterborough (fig. 5) which now spans
roadways, the streams which formerly flowed under it having been diverted,
is one of the earliest known stone bridges in England. It is referred to in
a charter of the year 943. It was probably built by the abbots. The first
bridges over the Thames at London were no doubt of timber. William of
Malmesbury mentions the existence of a bridge in 994. J. Stow (_Survey of
the Cities of London and Westminster_) describes the building of the first
stone bridge commonly called Old London Bridge: "About the year 1176, the
stone bridge was begun to be founded by Peter of Colechurch, near unto the
bridge of timber, but more towards the west." It carried timber houses
(fig. 6) which were frequently burned down, yet the main structure existed
till the beginning of the 19th century. The span of the arches ranged from
10 to 33 ft., and the total waterway was only 337 ft. The waterway of the
present London Bridge is 690 ft., and the removal of the obstruction caused
by the old bridge caused a lowering of the low-water level by 5 ft., and a
considerable deepening of the river-bed. (See Smiles, _Lives of the
Engineers_, "Rennie.")

[Illustration: FIG. 6.--Old London Bridge, A.D. 1600. From a Drawing in the
Pepysian Library Magdalene College, Cambridge.

From J. R Green's _A Short History of the English People_, by permission of
Macmillan & Co., Ltd.]

The architects of the Renaissance showed great boldness in their designs. A
granite arch built in 1377 over the Adda at Trezzo had a span at low water
of 251 ft. This noble bridge was destroyed for military reasons by
Carmagnola in 1416. The Rialto bridge at Venice, with a span of 91 ft., was
built in 1588 by Antonio da Ponte. Fig. 7 shows the beautiful Ponte della
Trinita erected at Florence in 1566 from the design of B. Ammanati.

6. _Modern Bridges._--(a) _Timber._--In England timber bridges of
considerable span, either braced trusses or laminated arches (_i.e._ arches
of planks bolted together), were built for some of the earlier railways,
particularly the Great Western and the Manchester, Sheffield &
Lincolnshire. They have mostly been replaced, decay having taken place at
the joints. Timber bridges of large span were constructed in America
between the end of the 18th and the middle of the 19th century. The
Amoskeag bridge over the Merrimac at Manchester, N.H., U.S.A., built in
1792, had 6 spans of 92 ft. The Bellows Falls bridge over the Connecticut
(built 1785-1792) had 2 spans of 184 ft. The singular Colossus bridge,
built in 1812 over the Schuylkill, a kind of flat arched truss, had a span
of 340 ft. Some of these timber bridges are said to have lasted ninety
years with ordinary repairs, but they were road bridges not heavily loaded.
From 1840, trusses, chiefly of timber but with wrought-iron tension-rods
and cast-iron shoes, were adopted in America. The Howe truss of 1830 and
the Pratt truss of 1844 are examples. The Howe truss had timber chords and
a lattice of timber struts, with vertical iron ties. In the Pratt truss the
struts were vertical and the ties inclined. Down to 1850 such bridges were
generally limited to 150 ft. span. The timber was white pine. As railway
loads increased and greater spans were demanded, the Howe truss was
stiffened by timber arches on each side of each girder. Such a composite
structure is, however, fundamentally defective, the distribution of loading
to the two independent systems being indeterminate. Remarkably high timber
piers were built. The Genesee viaduct, 800 ft. in length, built in
1851-1852 in 10 spans, had timber trestle piers 190 ft. in height. (See
Mosse, "American Timber Bridges," _Proc. Inst. C.E._ xxii. p. 305, and for
more modern examples, cxlii. p. 409; and clv. p. 382; Cooper, "American
Railroad Bridges," _Trans. Am. Soc. C.E._ vol. xxi pp. 1-28.) These timber
framed structures served as models for the earlier metal trusses which
began to be used soon after 1850, and which, except in a few localities
where iron is costly, have quite superseded them.

[Illustration: FIG. 7.--Ponte della Trinita, Florence.]

7. (b) _Masonry._--The present London Bridge, begun in 1824 and completed
in 1831, is as fine an example of a masonry arch structure as can be found
(figs. 8 and 9). The design was made by John Rennie the elder, and the
acting engineer was his son, Sir John Rennie. The semi-elliptical shape of
the arches the variation of span, the slight curvature of the roadway, and
the simple yet bold architectural details, combine to make it a singularly
beautiful bridge. The centre arch has a span of 152 ft., and rises 29 ft. 6
in above Trinity high-water mark; the arches on each side of the centre
have a span of 140 ft. and the abutment arches 130 ft. The total length of
the bridge is 1005 ft., its width from outside to outside 56 ft., and
height above low [v.04 p.0536] water 60 ft. The two centre piers are 24 ft.
thick, the exterior stones are granite, the interior, half Bramley Fall and
half from Painshaw, Derbyshire. The voussoirs of the centre arch (all of
granite) are 4 ft. 9 in. deep at the crown, and increase to not less than 9
ft. at the springing. The general depth at which the foundations are laid
is about 29 ft. 6 in. below low water. The total cost was L1,458,311, but
the contractor's tender for the bridge alone was L425,081.

[Illustration: FIG. 8.--London New Bridge.]

Since 1867 it had been recognized that London Bridge was inadequate to
carry the traffic passing over it, and a scheme for widening it was adopted
in 1900. This was carried out in 1902-1904, the footways being carried on
granite corbels, on which are mounted cornices and open parapets. The width
between parapets is now 65 ft., giving a roadway of 35 ft. and two footways
of 15 ft. each. The architect was Andrew Murray and the engineer, G. E. W.
Cruttwell. (Cole, _Proc. Inst. C.E._ clxi. p. 290.)

The largest masonry arch is the Adolphe bridge in Luxemburg, erected in
1900-1903. This has a span of 278 ft., 138 ft. rise above the river, and
102 ft. from foundation to crown. The thickness of the arch is 4 ft. 8 in.
at the crown and 7 ft. 2 in. where it joins the spandrel masonry. The
roadway is 52 ft. 6 in. wide. The bridge is not continuous in width, there
are arch rings on each face, each 16.4 ft. wide with a space between of
19.7 ft. This space is filled with a flooring of reinforced concrete,
resting on the two arches, and carrying the central roadway. By the method
adopted the total masonry has been reduced one-third. One centering was
used for the two arch rings, supported on dwarf walls which formed a
slipway, along which it was moved after the first was built.

[Illustration: FIG. 9.--Half Elevation and Half Section of Arch of London
Bridge.]

Till near the end of the 19th century bridges of masonry or brickwork were
so constructed that they had to be treated as rigid blockwork structures.
The stability of such structures depends on the position of the line of
pressure relatively to the intrados and extrados of the arch ring.
Generally, so far as could be ascertained, the line of pressure lies within
the middle half of the depth of the voussoirs. In finding the abutment
reactions some principle such as the principle of least action must be
used, and some assumptions of doubtful validity made. But if hinges are
introduced at crown and springings, the calculation of the stresses in the
arch ring becomes simple, as the line of pressures must pass through the
hinges. Such hinges have been used not only for metal arches, but in a
modified form for masonry and concrete arches. Three cases therefore arise:
(a) The arch is rigid at crown and springings; (b) the arch is two-hinged
(hinges at springings); (c) the arch is three-hinged (hinges at crown and
springings). For an elementary account of the theory of arches, hinged or
not, reference may be made to a paper by H. M. Martin (_Proc. Inst. C. E._
vol. xciii. p. 462); and for that of the elastic arch, to a paper by
A.E.Young (_Proc. Inst. C.E._ vol. cxxxi. p. 323).

In Germany and America two- and three-hinged arches of masonry and concrete
have been built, up to 150 ft. span, with much economy, and the
calculations being simple, an engineer can venture to work closely to the
dimensions required by theory. For hinges, Leibbrand, of Stuttgart, uses
sheets of lead about 1 in. thick extending over the middle third of the
depth of the voussoir joints, the rest of the joints being left open. As
the lead is plastic this construction is virtually an articulation. If the
pressure on the lead is uniformly varying, the centre of pressure must be
within the middle third of the width of the lead; that is, it cannot
deviate from the centre of the voussoir joint by more than one-eighteenth
of its depth. In any case the position of the line of pressures is confined
at the lead articulations within very narrow limits, and ambiguity as to
the stresses is greatly diminished. The restricted area on which the
pressure acts at the lead joints involves greater intensity of stress than
has been usual in arched bridges. In the Wuerttemberg hinged arches a limit
of stress of 110 tons per sq. ft. was allowed, while in the unhinged arches
at Cologne and Coblentz the limit was 50 to 60 tons per sq. ft. (_Annales
des Fonts et Chaussees_, 1891). At Rechtenstein a bridge of two concrete
arches has been constructed, span 751/2 ft., with lead articulations: width
of arch 11 ft.; depth of arch at crown and springing 2.1 and 2.96 ft.
respectively. The stresses were calculated to be 15, 17 and 12 tons per sq.
ft. at crown, joint of rupture, and springing respectively. At Cincinnati a
concrete arch of 70 ft. span has been built, with a rise of 10 ft. The
concrete is reinforced by eleven 9-in. steel-rolled joists, spaced 3 ft.
apart and supported by a cross-channel joist at each springing. The arch is
15 in. thick at the crown and 4 ft. at the abutments. The concrete
consisted of 1 cement, 2 sand and 3 to 4 broken stone. An important series
of experiments on the strength of masonry, brick and concrete structures
will be found in the _Zeitschr. des oesterreichen Ing. und Arch. Vereines_
(1895).

The thermal coefficient of expansion of steel and concrete is nearly the
same, otherwise changes of temperature would cause shearing stress at the
junction of the two materials. If the two materials are disposed
symmetrically, the amount of load carried by each would be in direct
proportion to the coefficient of elasticity and inversely as the moment of
inertia of the cross section. But it is usual in many cases to provide a
sufficient section of steel to carry all the tension. For concrete the
coefficient of elasticity E varies with the amount of stress and diminishes
as the ratio of sand and stone to cement increases. Its value is generally
taken at 1,500,000 to 3,000,000 lb per sq. in. For steel E = 28,000,000 to
30,000,000, or on the average about twelve times its value for concrete.
The maximum compressive working stress on the concrete may be 500 lb per
sq. in., the tensile working stress 50 lb per sq. in., and the working
shearing stress 75 lb per sq. in. The tensile stress on the steel may be
16,000 lb per sq. in. The amount of steel in the structure may vary from
0.75 to 1.5%. The concrete not only affords much of the strength to resist
compression, but effectively protects the steel from corrosion.

8. (c) _Suspension Bridges._--A suspension bridge consists of two or more
chains, constructed of links connected by pins, or of twisted wire strands,
or of wires laid parallel. The chains pass over lofty piers on which they
usually rest on saddles carried by rollers, and are led down on either side
to anchorages in rock chambers. A level platform is hung from the chains by
suspension rods. In the suspension bridge iron or steel can be used in its
strongest form, namely hard-drawn wire. Iron suspension bridges began to be
used at the end of the 18th century for road bridges with spans
unattainable at that time in any other system. In 1819 T. Telford began the
construction of the Menai bridge (fig. 10), the span being 570 ft. and the
dip 43 ft. This bridge suffered some injury in a storm, but it is still in
good condition and one of the most graceful of bridges. Other bridges built
soon after were the Fribourg bridge of 870 ft. span, the Hammersmith bridge
of 422 ft. span, and the Pest bridge of 666 ft. span. The merit of the
simple suspension bridge is its cheapness, and its defect is its
flexibility. This last becomes less [v.04 p.0537] serious as the dead
weight of the structure becomes large in proportion to the live or
temporary load. It is, therefore, a type specially suited for great spans.
Some suspension bridges have broken down in consequence of the oscillations
produced by bodies of men marching in step. In 1850 a suspension bridge at
Angers gave way when 487 soldiers were marching over it, and 226 were
killed.

[Illustration: FIG. 10.--Menai Suspension Bridge.]

To obtain greater stiffness various plans have been adopted. In the Ordish
system a certain number of intermediate points in the span are supported by
oblique chains, on which girders rest. The Ordish bridge built at Prague in
1868 had oblique chains supporting the stiffening girders at intermediate
points of the span. A curved chain supported the oblique chains and kept
them straight. In 1860 a bridge was erected over the Danube canal at
Vienna, of 264 ft. span which had two parallel chains one above the other
and 4 ft. apart on each side of the bridge. The chains of each pair were
connected by bracing so that they formed a stiff inverted arch resisting
deformation under unequal loading. The bridge carried a railway, but it
proved weak owing to errors of calculation, and it was taken down in 1884.
The principle was sound and has been proposed at various times. About 1850
it was perceived that a bridge stiff enough to carry railway trains could
be constructed by combining supporting chains with stiffening girders
suspended from them. W. J. M. Rankine proved (_Applied Mechanics_, p. 370)
that the necessary strength of a stiffening girder would be only
one-seventh part of that of an independent girder of the same span as the
bridge, suited to carry the same moving load (not including the dead weight
of the girder which is supported by the chain). (See "Suspension Bridge
with Stiffened Roadway," by Sir G. Airy, and the discussion, _Proc. Inst,
C.E._, 1867, xxvi. p. 258; also "Suspension Bridges with Stiffening
Girders," by Max am Ende, _Proc. Inst. C.E._ cxxxvii. p. 306.)

[Illustration: FIG. 11.--Niagara Suspension Bridge.]

The most remarkable bridge constructed on this system was the Niagara
bridge built by J. A. Roebling in 1852-1855 (fig. 11). The span was 821
ft., much the largest of any railway bridge at that time, and the height
above the river 245 ft. There were four suspension cables, each 10 in. in
diameter; each was composed of seven strands, containing 520 parallel
wires, or 3640 wires in each cable. Each cable was carried on a separate
saddle on rollers on each pier. The stiffening girder, constructed chiefly
of timber, was a box-shaped braced girder 18 ft. deep and 25 ft. wide,
carrying the railway on top and a roadway within. After various repairs and
strengthenings, including the replacement of the timber girder by an iron
one in 1880, this bridge in 1896-1897 was taken down and a steel arch built
in its place. It was not strong enough to deal with the increasing weight
of railway traffic. In 1836 I. K. Brunei constructed the towers and
abutments for a suspension bridge of 702 ft. span at Clifton over the Avon,
but the project was not then carried further; in 1860, however, the link
chains of the Hungerford suspension bridge which was being taken down were
available at small cost, and these were used to complete the bridge. There
are three chains on each side, of one and two links alternately, and these
support wrought iron stiffening girders. There are wrought iron saddles and
steel rollers on the piers. At 196 ft. on either side from the towers the
chains are carried over similar saddles without rollers, and thence at 45 deg.
with the horizontal down to the anchorages. Each chain has an anchor plate
5 ft. by 6 ft. The links are 24 ft. long at the centre of the bridge, and
longer as they are more inclined, so that their horizontal projection is 24
ft. The chains are so arranged that there is a suspending rod at each 8
ft., attached at the joint of one of the three chains. For erection a
suspended platform was constructed on eight wire ropes, on which the chains
were laid out and connected. Another wire rope with a travelling carriage
took out the links. The sectional area of the chains is 481 sq. in. at the
piers and 440 sq. in. at the centre. The two stiffening girders are plate
girders 3 ft. deep with flanges of 11 sq. in. area. In addition, the hand
railing on each side forms a girder 4 ft. 9 in. deep, with flanges 41/2 sq.
in. area.

[Illustration: FIG. 12.--Williamsburg Suspension Bridge.]

Of later bridges of great span, perhaps the bridges over the East river at
New York are the most remarkable. The Brooklyn bridge, begun in 1872, has a
centre span of 15951/2 and side spans of 930 ft. The Brooklyn approach being
971 ft., and the New York approach 15621/2 ft., the total length of the
bridge is 5989 ft. There are four cables which carry a promenade, a roadway
and an electric railway. The stiffening girders of the main span are 40 ft.
deep and 67 ft. apart. The saddles for the chains are 329 ft. above high
water. The cables are 153/4 in. in diameter. Each cable has 19 strands of 278
parallel steel wires, 7 B.W.G. Each wire is taken separately across the
river and its length adjusted. Roebling preferred parallel wires as 10 %
stronger than twisted wires. Each strand when made up and clamped was
lowered to its position. The Williamsburg bridge (fig. 12), begun in 1897
and opened for traffic in 1903, has a span of 1600 ft., a versed sine of
176 ft., and a width of 118 ft. It has two decks, and carries two elevated
railway tracks, four electric tramcar lines, two carriageways, two footways
and two [v.04 p.0538] bicycle paths. There are four cables, one on each
side of the two main trusses or stiffening girders. These girders are
supported by the cables over the centre span but not in the side spans.
Intermediate piers support the trusses in the side spans. The cables are
183/4 in. in diameter; each weighs about 1116 tons, and has a nominal
breaking strength of 22,320 tons, the actual breaking strength being
probably greater. The saddles are 332 ft. above the water. The four cables
support a dead load of 7140 tons and a live load of 4017 tons. Each cable
is composed of 37 strands of 208 wires, or 7696 parallel steel wires, No. 8
B.W.G., or about 3/16 in. in diameter. The wire was required to have a
tensile strength of 89 tons per sq. in., and 21/2% elongation in 5 ft. and 5%
in 8 in. Cast steel clamps hold the cable together, and to these the
suspending rods are attached. The cables are wrapped in cotton duck soaked
in oxidized oil and varnish, and are sheathed in sheet iron. A later
bridge, the Manhattan, is designed to carry four railway tracks and four
tramway lines, with a wide roadway and footpaths, supported by cables 211/4
in. in diameter, each composed of 9472 galvanized steel wires 3/16 in. in
diameter.

[Illustration: FIG. 13.--Tower Bridge, London.]

The Tower Bridge, London (fig. 13), is a suspension bridge with a secondary
bascule bridge in the centre span to permit the passage of ships. Two main
towers in the river and two towers on the shore abutments carry the
suspension chains. The opening bridge between the river towers consists of
two leaves or bascules, pivoted near the faces of the piers and rotating in
a vertical plane. When raised, the width of 200 ft. between the main river
piers is unobstructed up to the high-level foot-bridge, which is 141 ft.
above Trinity H.W. The clear width of the two shore spans is 270 ft. The
total length of the bridge is 940 ft., and that of the approaches 1260 ft.
on the north and 780 ft. on the south. The width of the bridge between
parapets is 60 ft., except across the centre span, where it is 49 ft. The
main towers consist of a skeleton of steel, enclosed in a facing of granite
and Portland stone, backed with brickwork. There are two high-level
footways for use when the bascules are raised, the main girders of which
are of the cantilever and suspended girder type. The cantilevers are fixed
to the shore side of the towers. The middle girders are 120 ft. in length
and attached to the cantilevers by links. The main suspension chains are
carried across the centre span in the form of horizontal ties resting on
the high-level footway girders. These ties are jointed to the hanging
chains by pins 20 in. in diameter with a ring in halves surrounding it 5
in. thick. One half ring is rigidly attached to the tie and one to the
hanging chain, so that the wear due to any movement is distributed over the
length of the pin. A rocker bearing under these pins transmits the load at
the joint to the steel columns of the towers. The abutment towers are
similar to the river towers. On the abutment towers the chains are
connected by horizontal links, carried on rockers, to anchor ties. The
suspension chains are constructed in the form of braced girders, so that
they are stiff against unsymmetrical loading. Each chain over a shore span
consists of two segments, the longer attached to the tie at the top of the
river tower, the shorter to the link at the top of the abutment tower, and
the two jointed together at the lowest point. Transverse girders are hung
from the chains at distances of 18 ft. There are fifteen main transverse
girders to each shore span, with nine longitudinal girders between each
pair. The trough flooring, 3/8 in. thick and 6 in. deep, is riveted to the
longitudinals. The anchor ties are connected to girders embedded in large
concrete blocks in the foundations of the approach viaducts.

The two bascules are each constructed with four main girders. Over the
river these are lattice girders, with transverse girders 12 ft. apart, and
longitudinal and subsidiary transverse girders dividing the floor into
rectangles 3 ft. by 31/2 ft. covered with buckled plates. The roadway is of
pine blocks dowelled. The bascules rotate through an angle of 82 deg., and
their rear ends in the bascule chambers of the piers carry 365 tons of
counterweight, the total weight of each being 1070 tons. They rotate on
steel shafts 21 in. in diameter and 48 ft. long, and the bascules can be
lifted or lowered in one minute, but usually the time taken is one and a
half minutes. They are worked by hydraulic machinery.

9. (d) _Iron and Steel Girder Bridges._--The main supporting members are
two or more horizontal beams, girders or trusses. The girders carry a floor
or platform either on top (_deck_ bridges) or near the bottom (_through_
bridges). The platform is variously constructed. For railway bridges it
commonly consists of cross girders, attached to or resting on the main
girders, and longitudinal rail girders or stringers carried by the cross
girders and directly supporting the sleepers and rails. For spans over 75
ft., expansion due to change of temperature is provided for by carrying one
end of each chain girder on rollers placed between the bearing-plate on the
girder and the bed-plate on the pier or abutment.

Fig. 14 shows the roller bed of a girder of the Kuilenburg bridge of 490
ft. span. It will be seen that the girder directly rests on a cylindrical
pin or rocker so placed as to distribute the load uniformly to all the
rollers. The pressure on the rollers is limited to about p = 600 d in lb
per in. length of roller, where d is the diameter of the roller in inches.

[Illustration: FIG. 14.--Roller Bed of a Girder.]

In the girders of bridges the horizontal girder is almost exclusively
subjected to vertical loading forces. Investigation of the internal
stresses, which balance the external forces, shows that most of the
material should be arranged in a top flange, boom or chord, subjected to
compression, and a bottom flange or chord, subjected to tension. (See
STRENGTH OF MATERIALS.) Connecting the flanges is a vertical web which may
be a solid plate or a system of bracing bars. In any case, though the exact
form of cross section of girders varies very much, it is virtually an I
section (fig. 15). The function of the flanges is to resist a horizontal
tension and compression distributed practically uniformly on their cross
sections. The web resists forces equivalent [v.04 p.0539] to a shear on
vertical and horizontal planes. The inclined tensions and compressions in
the bars of a braced web are equivalent to this shear. The horizontal
stresses in the flanges are greatest at the centre of a span. The stresses
in the web are greatest at the ends of the span. In the most numerous cases
the flanges or chords are parallel. But girders may have curved chords and
then the stresses in the web are diminished.

[Illustration: FIG. 15.--Flanged Girder.]

At first girders had solid or plate webs, but for spans over 100 ft. the
web always now consists of bracing bars. In some girder bridges the members
are connected entirely by riveting, in others the principal members are
connected by pin joints. The pin system of connexion used in the Chepstow,
Saltash, Newark Dyke and other early English bridges is now rarely used in
Europe. But it is so commonly used in America as to be regarded as a
distinctive American feature. With pin connexions some weight is saved in
the girders, and erection is a little easier. In early pin bridges
insufficient bearing area was allowed between the pins and parts connected,
and they worked loose. In some cases riveted covers had to be substituted
for the pins. The proportions are now better understood. Nevertheless the
tendency is to use riveted connexions in preference to pins, and in any
case to use pins for tension members only.

On the first English railways cast iron girder bridges for spans of 20 to
66 ft. were used, and in some cases these were trussed with wrought iron.
When in 1845 the plans for carrying the Chester and Holyhead railway over
the Menai Straits were considered, the conditions imposed by the admiralty
in the interests of navigation involved the adoption of a new type of
bridge. There was an idea of using suspension chains combined with a
girder, and in fact the tower piers were built so as to accommodate chains.
But the theory of such a combined structure could not be formulated at that
time, and it was proved, partly by experiment, that a simple tubular girder
of wrought iron was strong enough to carry the railway. The Britannia
bridge (fig. 16) has two spans of 460 and two of 230 ft. at 104 ft. above
high water. It consists of a pair of tubular girders with solid or plate
sides stiffened by angle irons, one line of rails passing through each
tube. Each girder is 1511 ft. long and weighs 4680 tons. In cross section
(fig. 17), it is 15 ft. wide and varies in depth from 23 ft. at the ends to
30 ft. at the centre. Partly to counteract any tendency to buckling under
compression and partly for convenience in assembling a great mass of
plates, the top and bottom were made cellular, the cells being just large
enough to permit passage for painting. The total area of the cellular top
flange of the large-span girders is 648 sq. in., and of the bottom 585 sq.
in. As no scaffolding could be used for the centre spans, the girders were
built on shore, floated out and raised by hydraulic presses. The credit for
the success of the Conway and Britannia bridges must be divided between the
engineers. Robert Stephenson and William Fairbairn, and Eaton Hodgkinson,
who assisted in the experimental tests and in formulating the imperfect
theory then available. The Conway bridge was first completed, and the first
train passed through the Britannia bridge in 1850. Though each girder has
been made continuous over the four spans it has not quite the proportions
over the piers which a continuous girder should have, and must be regarded
as an imperfectly continuous girder. The spans were in fact designed as
independent girders, the advantage of continuity being at that time
imperfectly known. The vertical sides of the girders are stiffened so that
they amount to 40% of the whole weight. This was partly necessary to meet
the uncertain conditions in floating when the distribution of supporting
forces was unknown and there were chances of distortion.

[Illustration: FIG. 16.--Britannia Bridge.]

[Illustration: FIG. 17.--Britannia Bridge (Cross Section of Tubular
Girder).]

Wrought iron and, later, steel plate web girders were largely used for
railway bridges in England after the construction of the Conway and Menai
bridges, and it was in the discussions arising during their design that the
proper function of the vertical web between the top and bottom flanges of a
girder first came to be understood. The proportion of depth to span in the
Britannia bridge was 1/16. But so far as the flanges are concerned the
stress [v.04 p.0540] to be resisted varies inversely as the depth of the
girder. It would be economical, therefore, to make the girder very deep.
This, however, involves a much heavier web, and therefore for any type of
girder there must be a ratio of depth to span which is most economical. In
the case of the plate web there must be a considerable excess of material,
partly to stiffen it against buckling and partly because an excess of
thickness must be provided to reduce the effect of corrosion. It was soon
found that with plate webs the ratio of depth to span could not be
economically increased beyond 1/15 to 1/12. On the other hand a framed or
braced web afforded opportunity for much better arrangement of material,
and it very soon became apparent that open web or lattice or braced girders
were more economical of material than solid web girders, except for small
spans. In America such girders were used from the first and naturally
followed the general design of the earlier timber bridges. Now plate web
girders are only used for spans of less than 100 ft.

Three types of bracing for the web very early developed--the Warren type in
which the bracing bars form equilateral triangles, the Whipple Murphy in
which the struts are vertical and the ties inclined, and the lattice in
which both struts and ties are inclined at equal angles, usually 45 deg. with
the horizontal. The earliest published theoretical investigations of the
stresses in bracing bars were perhaps those in the paper by W.T. Doyne and
W.B. Blood (_Proc. Inst. C.E._, 1851, xi. p. 1), and the paper by J.
Barton, "On the economic distribution of material in the sides of wrought
iron beams" (_Proc. Inst. C.E._, 1855, xiv. p. 443).

[Illustration: FIG. 18.--Span of Saltash Bridge.]

The Boyne bridge, constructed by Barton in Ireland, in 1854-1855, was a
remarkable example of the confidence with which engineers began to apply
theory in design. It was a bridge for two lines of railway with lattice
girders continuous over three spans. The centre span was 264 ft., and the
side spans 138 ft. 8 in.; depth 22 ft. 6 in. Not only were the bracing bars
designed to calculated stresses, and the continuity of the girders taken
into account, but the validity of the calculations was tested by a
verification on the actual bridge of the position of the points of contrary
flexure of the centre span. At the calculated position of one of the points
of contrary flexure all the rivets of the top boom were cut out, and by
lowering the end of the girder over the side span one inch, the joint was
opened 1/32 in. Then the rivets were cut out similarly at the other point
of contrary flexure and the joint opened. The girder held its position with
both joints severed, proving that, as should be the case, there was no
stress in the boom where the bending moment changes sign.

[Illustration: FIG. 19.--Newark Dyke Bridge and Section of Newark Dyke
Bridge.]

By curving the top boom of a girder to form an arch and the bottom boom to
form a suspension chain, the need of web except for non-uniform loading is
obviated. I.K. Brunel adopted this principle for the Saltash bridge near
Plymouth, built soon after the Britannia bridge. It has two spans of 455
ft. and seventeen smaller spans, the roadway being 100 ft. above high
water. The top boom of each girder is an elliptical wrought iron tube 17
ft. wide by 12 ft. deep. The lower boom is a pair of chains, of
wrought-iron links, 14 in each chain, of 7 in. by 1 in. section, the links
being connected by pins. The suspending rods and cross bracing are very
light. The depth of the girder at the centre is about one-eighth of the
span.

[Illustration: FIG. 20.--Fink Truss.]

In both England and America in early braced bridges cast iron, generally in
the form of tubes circular or octagonal in section, was used for
compression members, and wrought iron for the tension members. Fig. 19
shows the Newark Dyke bridge on the Great Northern railway over the Trent.
It was a pin-jointed Warren girder bridge erected from designs by C.M. Wild
in 1851-1853. The span between supports was 259 ft., the clear span 2401/2
ft.; depth between joint pins 16 ft. There were four girders, two to each
line of way. The top flange consisted of cast iron hollow castings butted
end to end, and the struts were of cast iron. The lower flange and ties
were flat wrought iron links. This bridge has now been replaced by a
stronger bridge to carry the greater loads imposed by modern traffic. Fig.
20 shows a Fink truss, a characteristic early American type, with cast iron
compression and wrought iron tension members. The bridge is a deck bridge,
the railway being carried on top. The transfer of the loads to the ends of
the bridge by [v.04 p.0541] long ties is uneconomical, and this type has
disappeared. The Warren type, either with two sets of bracing bars or with
intermediate verticals, affords convenient means of supporting the floor
girders. In 1869 a bridge of 390 ft. span was built on this system at
Louisville.

Amongst remarkable American girder bridges may be mentioned the Ohio bridge
on the Cincinnati & Covington railway, which is probably the largest girder
span constructed. The centre span is 550 ft. and the side spans 490
ft.--centre to centre of piers. The girders are independent polygonal
girders. The centre girder has a length of 545 ft. and a depth of 84 ft.
between pin centres. It is 67 ft. between parapets, and carries two lines
of railway, two carriageways, and two footways. The cross girders,
stringers and wind-bracing are wrought iron, the rest of mild steel. The
bridge was constructed in 1888 by the Phoenix Bridge Company, and was
erected on staging. The total weight of iron and steel in three spans was
about 5000 tons.

[Illustration: FIG. 21.--Typical Cantilever Bridge.]

[Illustration: FIG. 22.]

10. (e) _Cantilever Bridges._--It has been stated that if in a girder
bridge of three or more spans, the girders were made continuous there would
be an important economy of material, but that the danger of settlement of
the supports, which would seriously alter the points of contrary flexure or
points where the bending moment changes sign, and therefore the magnitude
and distribution of the stresses, generally prevents the adoption of
continuity. If, however, hinges or joints are introduced at the points of
contrary flexure, they become necessarily points where the bending moment
is zero and ambiguity as to the stresses vanishes. The exceptional local
conditions at the site of the Forth bridge led to the adoption there of the
cantilever system, till then little considered. Now it is well understood
that in many positions this system is the simplest and most economical
method of bridging. It is available for spans greater than those
practicable with independent girders; in fact, on this system the spans are
virtually reduced to smaller spans so far as the stresses are concerned.
There is another advantage which in many cases is of the highest
importance. The cantilevers can be built out from the piers, member by
member, without any temporary scaffolding below, so that navigation is not
interrupted, the cost of scaffolding is saved, and the difficulty of
building in deep water is obviated. The centre girder may be built on the
cantilevers and rolled into place or lifted from the water-level. Fig. 21
shows a typical cantilever bridge of American design. In this case the
shore ends of the cantilevers are anchored to the abutments. J.A.L. Waddell
has shown that, in some cases, it is convenient to erect simple independent
spans, by building them out as cantilevers and converting them into
independent girders after erection. Fig. 22 shows girders erected in this
way, the dotted lines being temporary members during erection, which are
removed afterwards. The side spans are erected first on staging and
anchored to the piers. From these, by the aid of the temporary members, the
centre span is built out from both sides. The most important cantilever
bridges so far erected or projected are as follows:--

[Illustration: FIG. 23.--Forth Bridge.]

(1) The Forth bridge (fig. 23). The original design was for a stiffened
suspension bridge, but after the fall of the Tay bridge in 1879 this was
abandoned. The bridge, which was begun in 1882 and completed in 1889, is at
the only narrowing of the Forth in a distance of 50 m., at a point where
the channel, about a mile in width, is divided by the island of Inchgarvie.
The length of the cantilever bridge is 5330 ft., made up thus: central
tower on Inchgarvie 260 ft.; Fife and Queensferry piers each 145 ft.; two
central girders between cantilevers each 350 ft.; and six cantilevers each
680 ft. The two main spans are each 1710 ft. The clear headway is 157 ft.,
and the extreme height of the towers above high water 361 ft. The outer
ends of the shore cantilevers are loaded to balance half the weight of the
central girder, the rolling load, and 200 tons in addition. An internal
viaduct of lattice girders carries a double line of rails. Provision is
made for longitudinal expansion due to change of temperature, for
distortion due to the sun acting on one side of the structure, and for the
wind acting on one side of the bridge. The amount of steel used was 38,000
tons exclusive of approach viaducts. (See _The Forth Bridge_, by W.
Westhofen; _Reports of the British Association_ (1884 and 1885); _Die Forth
Bruecke_, von G. Barkhausen (Berlin, 1889); _The Forth Bridge_, by Philip
Phillips (1890); Vernon Harcourt, _Proc. Inst. C.E._ cxxi. p. 309.)

(2) The Niagara bridge of a total length of 910 ft., for two lines of
railway. Clear span between towers 495 ft. Completed in 1883, and more
recently strengthened (_Proc. Inst. C.E._ cvii. p. 18, and cxliv. p. 331).

[Illustration: FIG. 24.--Lansdowne Bridge.]

(3) The Lansdowne bridge (completed 1889) at Sukkur, over the Indus. The
clear span is 790 ft., and the suspended girder 200 ft. in length. The span
to the centres of the end uprights is 820 ft.; width between centres of
main uprights at bed-plate 100 ft., and between centres of main members at
end of cantilevers 20 ft. The bridge is for a single line of railway of 5
ft. 6 in. gauge. The back guys are the most heavily strained part of the
structure, the stress provided for being 1200 tons. This is due to the half
weight of centre girder, the weight of the cantilever itself, the rolling
load on half the bridge, and the wind pressure. The anchors are built up of
steel plates and angle, bars, and are buried in a large mass of concrete.
The area of each anchor plate, normal to the line of stress, is 32 ft. by
12 ft. The bridge was designed by Sir A. Rendel, the consulting engineer to
the Indian government (_Proc. Inst. C.E._ ciii. p. 123).

(4) The Red Rock cantilever bridge over the Colorado river, with a centre
span of 660 ft.

(5) The Poughkeepsie bridge over the Hudson, built 1886-1887. There are
five river and two shore spans. The girders over the second and fourth
spans are extended as cantilevers over the adjoining spans. The shore piers
carry cantilevers projecting one way over the river openings and the other
way over a shore span where it is secured to an anchorage. The girder spans
are 525 ft., the cantilever spans 547 ft., and the shore spans 201 ft.

[Illustration: FIG. 25.--Quebec Bridge (original design)]

(6) The Quebec bridge (fig. 25) over the St Lawrence, which collapsed while
in course of construction in 1907. This bridge, connecting very important
railway systems, was designed to carry two lines of rails, a highway and
electric railway on each side, all between the main trusses. Length between
abutments 3240 ft.; [v.04 p.0542] channel span 1800 ft.; suspended span 675
ft.; shore spans 5621/2 ft. Total weight of metal about 32,000 tons.

[Illustration: FIG. 26.--Jubilee Bridge over the Hugli.]

(7) The Jubilee bridge over the Hugli, designed by Sir Bradford Leslie, is
a cantilever bridge of another type (fig. 26). The girders are of the
Whipple Murphy type, but with curved top booms. The bridge carries a double
line of railway, between the main girders. The central double cantilever is
360 ft. long. The two side span girders are 420 ft long. The cantilever
rests on two river piers 120 ft. apart, centre to centre. The side girders
rest on the cantilevers on 15 in. pins, in pendulum links suspended from
similar pins in saddles 9 ft. high.

[Illustration: FIG. 27.--Coalbrookdale Bridge.]

11. (f) _Metal Arch Bridges._--The first iron bridge erected was
constructed by John Wilkinson (1728-1808) and Abraham Darby (1750-1791) in
1773-1779 at Coalbrookdale over the Severn (fig. 27). It had five cast iron
arched ribs with a centre span of 100 ft. This curious bridge is still in
use. Sir B. Baker stated that it had required patching for ninety years,
because the arch and the high side arches would not work together.
Expansion and contraction broke the high arch and the connexions between
the arches. When it broke they fished it. Then the bolts sheared or the
ironwork broke in a new place. He advised that there was nothing unsafe; it
was perfectly strong and the stress in vital parts moderate. All that
needed to be done was to fish the fractured ribs of the high arches, put
oval holes in the fishes, and not screw up the bolts too tight.

Cast iron arches of considerable span were constructed late in the 18th and
early in the 19th century. The difficulty of casting heavy arch ribs led to
the construction of cast iron arches of cast voussoirs, somewhat like the
voussoirs of masonry bridges. Such a bridge was the Wearmouth bridge,
designed by Rowland Burdon and erected in 1793-1796, with a span of 235 ft.
Southwark bridge over the Thames, designed by John Rennie with cast iron
ribs and erected in 1814-1819, has a centre span of 240 ft. and a rise of
24 ft. In Paris the Austerlitz (1800-1806) and Carrousel (1834-1836)
bridges had cast iron arches. In 1858 an aqueduct bridge was erected at
Washington by M.C. Meigs (1816-1892). This had two arched ribs formed by
the cast iron pipes through which the water passed. The pipes were 4 ft. in
diameter inside, 11/2 in. thick, and were lined with staves of pine 3 in.
thick to prevent freezing. The span was 200 ft.

[Illustration: FIG. 28.--Arch of Bridge at Coblenz]

Fig. 28 shows one of the wrought iron arches of a bridge over the Rhine at
Coblenz. The bridge consists of three spans of about 315 ft. each.

[Illustration: FIG. 29.--St Louis Bridge.]

Of large-span bridges with steel arches, one of the most important is the
St Louis bridge over the Mississippi, completed in 1874 (fig. 29). The
river at St Louis is confined to a single channel, 1600 ft. wide, and in a
freshet in 1870 the scour reached a depth of 51 ft. Captain J.B. Eads, the
engineer, determined to establish the piers and abutments on rock at a
depth for the east pier and east abutment of 136 ft. below high water. This
was effected by caissons with air chambers and air locks, a feat
unprecedented in the annals of engineering. The bridge has three spans,
each formed of arches of cast steel. The centre span is 520 ft. and the
side spans 502 ft. in the clear. The rise of the centre arch is 471/2 ft.,
and that of the side arches 46 ft. Each span has four steel double ribs of
steel tubes butted and clasped by wrought iron couplings. The vertical
bracing between the upper and lower members of each rib, which are 12 ft.
apart, centre to centre, consolidates them into a single arch. The arches
carry a double railway track and above this a roadway 54 ft. wide.

The St Louis bridge is not hinged, but later bridges have been constructed
with hinges at the springings and sometimes with hinges at the crown also.

The Alexander III. bridge over the Seine has fifteen steel ribs hinged at
crown and springings with a span of 353 ft. between centres of hinges and
358 ft. between abutments. The rise from side to centre hinges is 20 ft. 7
in. The roadway is 651/2 ft. wide and footways 33 ft. (_Proc. Inst. C.E._
cxxx. p. 335).

[Illustration: FIG. 30.--Viaur Viaduct.]

The largest three-hinged-arch bridge constructed is the Viaur viaduct in
the south of France (fig. 30). The central span is 721 ft. 9 in. and the
height of the rails above the valley 380 ft. It has a very fine appearance,
especially when seen in perspective and not merely in elevation.

[Illustration: FIG. 31.--Douro Viaduct.]

Fig. 31 shows the Douro viaduct of a total length of 1158 ft. carrying a
railway 200 ft. above the water. The span of the central opening is 525 ft.
The principal rib is crescent-shaped 32.8 ft. deep [v.04 p.0543] at the
crown. Rolling load taken at 1.2 ton per ft. Weight of centre span 727
tons. The Luiz I. bridge is another arched bridge over the Douro, also
designed by T. Seyrig. This has a span of 566 ft. There are an upper and
lower roadway, 164 ft. apart vertically. The arch rests on rollers and is
narrowest at the crown. The reason given for this change of form was that
it more conveniently allowed the lower road to pass between the springings
and ensured the transmission of the wind stresses to the abutments without
interrupting the cross-bracing. Wire cables were used in the erection, by
which the members were lifted from barges and assembled, the operations
being conducted from the side piers.

[Illustration: FIG. 32.--Niagara Falls and Clifton Bridge.]

The Niagara Falls and Clifton steel arch (fig. 32) replaces the older
Roebling suspension bridge. The centre span is a two-hinged parabolic
braced rib arch, and there are side spans of 190 and 210 ft. The bridge
carries two electric-car tracks, two roadways and two footways. The main
span weighed 1629 tons, the side spans 154 and 166 tons (Buck, _Proc. Inst.
C.E._ cxliv. p. 70). Prof. Claxton Fidler, speaking of the arrangement
adopted for putting initial stress on the top chord, stated that this
bridge marked the furthest advance yet made in this type of construction.
When such a rib is erected on centering without initial stress, the
subsequent compression of the arch under its weight inflicts a bending
stress and excess of compression in the upper member at the crown. But the
bold expedients adopted by the engineer annulled the bending action.

The Garabit viaduct carries the railway near St Flour, in the Cantal
department, France, at 420 ft. above low water. The deepest part of the
valley is crossed by an arch of 541 ft. span, and 213 ft. rise. The bridge
is similar to that at Oporto, also designed by Seyrig. It is formed by a
crescent-shaped arch, continued on one side by four, on the other side by
two lattice girder spans, on iron piers. The arch is formed by two lattice
ribs hinged at the abutments. Its depth at the crown is 33 ft., and its
centre line follows nearly the parabolic line of pressures. The two arch
ribs are 651/2 ft. apart at the springings and 201/2 ft. at the crown. The
roadway girders are lattice, 17 ft. deep, supported from the arch ribs at
four points. The total length of the viaduct is 1715 ft. The lattice
girders of the side spans were first rolled into place, so as to project
some distance beyond the piers, and then the arch ribs were built out,
being partly supported by wire-rope cables from the lattice girders above.
The total weight of ironwork was 3200 tons and the cost L124,000 (_Annales
des travaux publiques_, 1884).

The Victoria Falls bridge over the Zambezi, designed by Sir Douglas Fox,
and completed in 1905, is a combination of girder and arch having a total
length of 650 ft. The centre arch is 500 ft. span, the rise of the crown 90
ft., and depth at crown 15 ft. The width between centres of ribs of main
arch is 271/2 ft. at crown and 53 ft. 9 in at springings. The curve of the
main arch is a parabola. The bridge has a roadway of 30 ft. for two lines
of rails. Each half arch was supported by cables till joined at the centre.
An electric cableway of 900 ft. span capable of carrying 10 tons was used
in erection.

12. (g) _Movable Bridges_ can be closed to carry a road or railway or in
some cases an aqueduct, but can be opened to give free passage to
navigation. They are of several types:--

[Illustration: FIG. 33.]

(1) _Lifting Bridges._--The bridge with its platform is suspended from
girders above by chains and counterweights at the four corners (fig. 33 a).
It is lifted vertically to the required height when opened. Bridges of this
type are not very numerous or important.

(2) _Rolling Bridges._--The girders are longer than the span and the part
overhanging the abutment is counter-weighted so that the centre of gravity
is over the abutment when the bridge is rolled forward (fig. 33 b). To fill
the gap in the approaches when the bridge is rolled forward a frame
carrying that part of the road is moved into place sideways. At Sunderland,
the bridge is first lifted by a hydraulic press so as to clear the roadway
behind, and is then rolled back.

(3) _Draw or Bascule Bridges._--The fortress draw-bridge is the original
type, in which a single leaf, or bascule, turns round a horizontal hinge at
one abutment. The bridge when closed is supported on abutments at each end.
It is raised by chains and counterweights. A more common type is a bridge
with two leaves or bascules, one hinged at each abutment. When closed [v.04
p.0544] the bascules are locked at the centre (see fig. 13). In these
bridges each bascule is prolonged backwards beyond the hinge so as to
balance at the hinge, the prolongation sinking into the piers when the
bridge is opened.

(4) _Swing or Turning Bridges._--The largest movable bridges revolve about
a vertical axis. The bridge is carried on a circular base plate with a
central pivot and a circular track for a live ring and conical rollers. A
circular revolving platform rests on the pivot and rollers. A toothed arc
fixed to the revolving platform or to the live ring serves to give motion
to the bridge. The main girders rest on the revolving platform, and the
ends of the bridge are circular arcs fitting the fixed roadway. Three
arrangements are found: (a) the axis of rotation is on a pier at the centre
of the river and the bridge is equal armed (fig. 33 c), so that two
navigation passages are opened simultaneously. (b) The axis of rotation is
on one abutment, and the bridge is then usually unequal armed (fig. 33 d),
the shorter arm being over the land. (c) In some small bridges the shorter
arm is vertical and the bridge turns on a kind of vertical crane post at
the abutment (fig. 33 e).

(5) _Floating Bridges_, the roadway being carried on pontoons moored in the
stream.

The movable bridge in its closed position must be proportioned like a fixed
bridge, but it has also other conditions to fulfil. If it revolves about a
vertical axis its centre of gravity must always lie in that axis; if it
rolls the centre of gravity must always lie over the abutment. It must have
strength to support safely its own overhanging weight when moving.

At Konigsberg there is a road bridge of two fixed spans of 39 ft., and a
central span of 60 ft. between bearings, or 41 ft. clear, with balanced
bascules over the centre span. Each bascule consists of two main girders
with cross girders and stringers. The main girders are hung at each side on
a horizontal shaft 8-5/8 in. in diameter, and are 6 ft. deep at the hinge,
diminishing to 1 ft. 7 in. at the centre of the span. The counterweight is
a depressed cantilever arm 12 ft. long, overlapped by the fixed platform
which sinks into a recess in the masonry when the bridge opens. In closed
position the main girders rest on a bed plate on the face of the pier 4 ft.
3 in. beyond the shaft bearings. The bridge is worked by hydraulic power,
an accumulator with a load of 34 tons supplying pressure water at 630 lb
per sq. in. The bridge opens in 15 seconds and closes in 25 seconds.

At the opening span of the Tower bridge (fig. 13) there are four main
girders in each bascule. They project 100 ft. beyond and 62 ft. 6 in.
within the face of the piers. Transverse girders and bracings are inserted
between the main girders at 12 ft. intervals. The floor is of buckled
plates paved with wood blocks. The arc of rotation is 82 deg., and the axis of
rotation is 13 ft. 3 in. inside the face of the piers, and 5 ft. 7 in.
below the roadway. The weight of ballast in the short arms of the bascules
is 365 tons. The weight of each leaf including ballast is about 1070 tons.
The axis is of forged steel 21 in. in diameter and 48 ft. long. The axis
has eight bearings, consisting of rings of live rollers 4-7/16 in. in
diameter and 22 in. long. The bascules are rotated by pinions driven by
hydraulic engines working in steel sectors 42 ft. radius (_Proc. Inst.
C.E._ cxxvii. p. 35).

As an example of a swing bridge, that between Duluth and Superior at the
head of Lake Superior over the St Louis river may be described. The centre
opening is 500 ft., spanned by a turning bridge, 58 ft. wide. The girders
weighing 2000 tons carry a double track for trains between the girders and
on each side on cantilevers a trolley track, roadway and footway. The
bridge can be opened in 2 minutes, and is operated by two large electric
motors. These have a speed reduction from armature shaft to bridge column
of 1500 to 1, through four intermediate spur gears and a worm gear. The end
lifts which transfer the weight of the bridge to the piers when the span is
closed consist of massive eccentrics having a throw of 4 in. The clearance
is 2 in., so that the ends are lifted 2 in. This gives a load of 50 tons
per eccentric. One motor is placed at each end of the span to operate the
eccentrics and also to release the latches and raise the rails of the steam
track.

At Riga there is a floating pontoon bridge over the Duna. It consists of
fourteen rafts, 105 ft. in length, each supported by two pontoons placed 64
ft. apart. The pairs of rafts are joined by three baulks 15 ft. long laid
in parallel grooves in the framing. Two spans are arranged for opening
easily. The total length is 1720 ft. and the width 46 ft. The pontoons are
of iron, 851/2 ft. in length, and their section is elliptical, 101/2 ft.
horizontal and 12 ft. vertical. The displacement of each pontoon is 180
tons and its weight 22 tons. The mooring chains, weighing 22 lb per ft.,
are taken from the upstream end of each pontoon to a downstream screw pile
mooring and from the downstream end to an upstream screw pile.

13. _Transporter Bridges._--This new type of bridge consists of a high
level bridge from which is suspended a car at a low level. The car receives
the traffic and conveys it across the river, being caused to travel by
electric machinery on the high level bridge. Bridges of this type have been
erected at Portugalete, Bizerta, Rouen, Rochefort and more recently across
the Mersey between the towns of Widnes and Runcorn.

[Illustration: FIG. 34.--Widnes and Runcorn Transporter Bridge.]

The Runcorn bridge crosses the Manchester Ship Canal and the Mersey in one
span of 1000 ft., and four approach spans of 551/2 ft. on one side and one
span on the other. The low-level approach roadways are 35 ft. wide with
footpaths 6 ft. wide on each side. The supporting structure is a cable
suspension bridge with stiffening girders. A car is suspended from the
bridge, carried by a trolley running on the underside of the stiffening
girders, the car being [v.04 p.0545] propelled electrically from one side
to the other. The underside of the stiffening girder is 82 ft. above the
river. The car is 55 ft. long by 241/2 ft. wide. The electric motors are
under the control of the driver in a cabin on the car. The trolley is an
articulated frame 77 ft. long in five sections coupled together with pins.
To this are fixed the bearings of the running wheels, fourteen on each
side. There are two steel-clad series-wound motors of 36 B.H.P. For a test
load of 120 tons the tractive force is 70 lb per ton, which is sufficient
for acceleration, and maintaining speed against wind pressure. The brakes
are magnetic, with auxiliary handbrakes. Electricity is obtained by two gas
engines (one spare) each of 75 B.H.P.

On the opening day passengers were taken across at the rate of more than
2000 per hour in addition to a number of vehicles. The time of crossing is
3 or 4 minutes. The total cost of the structure was L133,000.

14. In the United States few railway companies design or build their own
bridges. General specifications as to span, loading, &c., are furnished to
bridge-building companies, which make the design under the direction of
engineers who are experts in this kind of work. The design, with strain
sheets and detail drawings, is submitted to the railway engineer with
estimates. The result is that American bridges are generally of
well-settled types and their members of uniform design, carefully
considered with reference to convenient and accurate manufacture. Standard
patterns of details are largely adopted, and more system is introduced in
the workshop than is possible where the designs are more varied. Riveted
plate girders are used up to 50 ft. span, riveted braced girders for spans
of 50 ft. to 75 ft., and pin-connected girders for longer spans. Since the
erection of the Forth bridge, cantilever bridges have been extensively
used, and some remarkable steel arch and suspension bridges have also been
constructed. Overhead railways are virtually continuous bridge
constructions, and much attention has been given to a study of the special
conditions appertaining to that case.

_Substructure._

15. The substructure of a bridge comprises the piers, abutments and
foundations. These portions usually consist of masonry in some form,
including under that general head stone masonry, brickwork and concrete.
Occasionally metal work or woodwork is used for intermediate piers.

When girders form the superstructure, the resultant pressure on the piers
or abutments is vertical, and the dimensions of these are simply regulated
by the sufficiency to bear this vertical load.

When arches form the superstructure, the abutment must be so designed as to
transmit the resultant thrust to the foundation in a safe direction, and so
distributed that no part may be unduly compressed. The intermediate piers
should also have considerable stability, so as to counterbalance the thrust
arising when one arch is loaded while the other is free from load.

For suspension bridges the abutment forming the anchorage must be so
designed as to be thoroughly stable under the greatest pull which the
chains can exert. The piers require to be carried above the platform, and
their design must be modified according to the type of suspension bridge
adopted. When the resultant pressure is not vertical on the piers these
must be constructed to meet the inclined pressure. In any stiffened
suspension bridge the action of the pier will be analogous to that of a
pier between two arches.

_Concrete in a shell_ is a name which might be applied to all the methods
of founding a pier which depend on the very valuable property which strong
hydraulic concrete possesses of setting into a solid mass under water. The
required space is enclosed by a wooden or iron shell; the soil inside the
shell is removed by dredging, or some form of mechanical excavator, until
the formation is reached which is to support the pier; the concrete is then
shot into the enclosed space from a height of about 10 ft., and rammed down
in layers about 1 ft. thick; it soon consolidates into a permanent
artificial stone.

_Piles_ are used as foundations in compressible or loose soil. The heads of
the piles are sawn off, and a platform of timber or concrete rests on them.
Cast iron and concrete reinforced piles are now used. _Screw piles_ are
cast iron piles which are screwed into the soil instead of being driven in.
At their end is fixed a blade of cast iron from two to eight times the
diameter of the shaft of the pile; the pitch of the screw varies from
one-half to one-fourth of the external diameter of the blade.

_Disk piles_ have been used in sand. These piles have a flat flange at the
bottom, and water is pumped in at the top of the pile, which is weighted to
prevent it from rising. Sand is thus blown or pumped from below the piles,
which are thus easily lowered in ground which baffles all attempts to drive
in piles by blows. In ground which is of the nature of quicksand, piles
will often slowly rise to their original position after each blow.

_Wells._--In some soils foundations may be obtained by the device of
building a masonry casing like that of a well and excavating the soil
inside; the casing gradually sinks and the masonry is continued at the
surface. This method is applicable in running sands. The interior of the
well is generally filled up with concrete or brick when the required depth
has been reached.

_Piers and Abutments._--Piers and abutments are of masonry, brickwork, or
cast or wrought iron. In the last case they consist of any number of hollow
cylindrical pillars, vertical or raking, turned and planed at the ends and
united by a projection or socket and by flanges and bolts. The pillars are
strengthened against lateral yielding by horizontal and diagonal bracing.
In some cases the piers are cast iron cylinders 10 ft. or more in diameter
filled with concrete.

[Illustration: FIG. 35.--Cylinder, Charing Cross Bridge.]

_Cylinder Foundations._--Formerly when bridge piers had to be placed where
a firm bearing stratum could only be reached at a considerable depth, a
timber cofferdam was used in which piles were driven down to the firm
stratum. On the piles the masonry piers were built. Many bridges so
constructed have stood for centuries. A great change of method arose when
iron cylinders and in some cases brick cylinders or wells were adopted for
foundations. These can be sunk to almost any depth or brought up to any
height, and are filled with Portland cement concrete. They are sometimes
excavated by grabs. Sometimes they are closed in and kept free of water by
compressed air so that excavation work can be carried on inside them (fig.
35). Sometimes in silty river beds they are sunk 100 ft. or more, for [v.04
p.0546] security against deep scouring of the river-bed in floods. In the
case of the Empress bridge over the Sutlej each pier consisted of three
brick wells, 19 ft. in diameter, sunk 110 ft. The piers of the Benares
bridge were single iron caissons, 65 ft. by 28 ft., sunk about 100 ft.,
lined with brick and filled with concrete. At the Forth bridge iron
caissons 70 ft. in diameter were sunk about 40 ft. into the bed of the
Forth. In this case the compressed air process was used.

16. _Erection._--Consideration of the local conditions affecting the
erection of bridges is always important, and sometimes becomes a
controlling factor in the determination of the design. The methods of
erection may be classed as--(1) erection on staging or falsework; (2)
floating to the site and raising; (3) rolling out from one abutment; (4)
building out member by member, the completed part forming the stage from
which additions are handled.

(1) In erection on staging, the materials available determine the character
of the staging; stacks of timber, earth banks, or built-up staging of piles
and trestles have all been employed, also iron staging, which can be
rapidly erected and moved from site to site. The most ordinary type of
staging consists of timber piles at nearly equal distances of 20 ft. to 30
ft., carrying a timber platform, on which the bridge is erected. Sometimes
a wide space is left for navigation, and the platform at this part is
carried by a timber and iron truss. When the headway is great or the river
deep, timber-braced piers or clusters of piles at distances of 50 ft. to
100 ft. may be used. These carry temporary trusses of timber or steel. The
Kuilenburg bridge in Holland, which has a span of 492 ft., was erected on a
timber staging of this kind, containing 81,000 cub. ft. of timber and 5
tons of bolts. The bridge superstructure weighed 2150 tons, so that 38 cub.
ft. of timber were used per ton of superstructure.

(2) The Britannia and Conway bridges were built on staging on shore, lifted
by pontoons, floated out to their position between the piers, and lastly
lifted into place by hydraulic presses. The Moerdyk bridge in Holland, with
14 spans of 328 ft., was erected in a similar way. The convenience of
erecting girders on shore is very great, but there is some risk in the
floating operations and a good deal of hauling plant is required.

(3) If a bridge consists of girders continuous over two or more spans, it
may be put together on the embankment at one end and rolled over the piers.
In some cases hauling tackle is used, in others power is applied by levers
and ratchets to the rollers on which the girders travel. In such rolling
operations the girder is subjected to straining actions different from
those which it is intended to resist, and parts intended for tension may be
in compression; hence it may need to be stiffened by timber during rolling.
The bending action on the bottom boom in passing over the rollers is also
severe. Modifications of the system have been adopted for bridges with
discontinuous spans. In narrow ravines a bridge of one span may be rolled
out, if the projecting end is supported on a temporary suspension cable
anchored on each side. The free end is slung to a block running on the
cable. If the bridge is erected when the river is nearly dry a travelling
stage may be constructed to carry the projecting end of the girder while it
is hauled across, the other end resting on one abutment. Sometimes a girder
is rolled out about one-third of its length, and then supported on a
floating pontoon.

(4) Some types of bridge can be built out from the abutments, the completed
part forming an erecting stage on which lifting appliances are fixed.
Generally, in addition, wire cables are stretched across the span, from
which lifting tackle is suspended. In bridges so erected the straining
action during erection must be studied, and material must be added to
resist erecting stresses. In the case of the St Louis bridge, half arches
were built out on either side of each pier, so that the load balanced.
Skeleton towers on the piers supported chains attached to the arched ribs
at suitable points. In spite of careful provision, much difficulty was
experienced in making the connexion at the crown, from the expansion due to
temperature changes. The Douro bridge was similarly erected. The girders of
the side spans were rolled out so as to overhang the great span by 105 ft.,
and formed a platform from which parts of the arch could be suspended.
Dwarf towers, built on the arch ring at the fifth panel from either side,
helped to support the girder above, in erecting the centre part of the arch
(Seyrig, _Proc. Inst. C.E._ lxiii. p. 177). The great cantilever bridges
have been erected in the same way, and they are specially adapted for
erection by building out.

_Straining Actions and Working Stresses._

17. In metal bridges wrought iron has been replaced by mild steel--a
stronger, tougher and better material. Ingot metal or mild steel was
sometimes treacherous when first introduced, and accidents occurred, the
causes of which were obscure. In fact, small differences of composition or
variations in thermal treatment during manufacture involve relatively large
differences of quality. Now it is understood that care must be taken in
specifying the exact quality and in testing the material supplied.
Structural wrought iron has a tenacity of 20 to 221/2 tons per sq. in. in the
direction of rolling, and an ultimate elongation of 8 or 10% in 8 in.
Across the direction of rolling the tenacity is about 18 tons per sq. in.,
and the elongation 3% in 8 in. Steel has only a small difference of quality
in different directions. There is still controversy as to what degree of
hardness, or (which is nearly the same thing) what percentage of carbon,
can be permitted with safety in steel for structures.

The qualities of steel used may be classified as follows:--(a) Soft steel,
having a tenacity of 221/2 to 26 tons per sq. in., and an elongation of 32 to
24% in 8 in. (b) Medium steel, having a tenacity of 26 to 34 tons per sq.
in., and 28 to 25% elongation. (c) Moderately hard steel, having a tenacity
of 34 to 37 tons per sq. in., and 17% elongation, (d) Hard steel, having a
tenacity of 37 to 40 tons per sq. in., and 10% elongation. Soft steel is
used for rivets always, and sometimes for the whole superstructure of a
bridge, but medium steel more generally for the plates, angle bars, &c.,
the weight of the bridge being then reduced by about 7% for a given factor
of safety. Moderately hard steel has been used for the larger members of
long-span bridges. Hard steel, if used at all, is used only for compression
members, in which there is less risk of flaws extending than in tension
members. With medium or moderately hard steel all rivet holes should be
drilled, or punched 1/8 in. less in diameter than the rivet and reamed out,
so as to remove the ring of material strained by the punch.

In the specification for bridge material, drawn up by the British
Engineering Standards Committee, it is provided that the steel shall be
acid or basic open-hearth steel, containing not more than 0.06% of sulphur
or phosphorus. Plates, angles and bars, other than rivet bars, must have a
tensile strength of 28 to 32 tons per sq. in., with an elevation of 20% in
8 in. Rivet bars tested on a gauge length eight times the diameter must
have a tensile strength of 26 to 30 tons per sq. in. and an elongation of
25%.

18. _Straining Actions._--The external forces acting on a bridge may be
classified as follows:--

(1) The _live_ or _temporary load_, for road bridges the weight of a dense
crowd uniformly distributed, or the weight of a heavy wagon or traction
engine; for railway bridges the weight of the heaviest train likely to come
on the bridge. (2) An allowance is sometimes made for _impact_, that is the
dynamical action of the live load due to want of vertical balance in the
moving parts of locomotives, to irregularities of the permanent way, or to
yielding of the structure. (3) The _dead load_ comprises the weight of the
main girders, flooring and wind bracing, or the total weight of the
superstructure exclusive of any part directly carried by the piers. This is
usually treated as uniformly distributed over the span. (4) The _horizontal
pressure_ due to a wind blowing transversely to the span, which becomes of
importance in long and high bridges. (5) The _longitudinal drag_ due to the
friction of a train when braked, about one-seventh of the weight of the
train. (6) On a curved bridge the _centrifugal load_ due to the radical
acceleration of the train. If w is the weight of a locomotive in tons, r
the radius of curvature of the track, v the velocity in feet per sec.; then
the horizontal force exerted on the bridge is wv^2/gr tons. (7) In some
cases, especially in arch and suspension bridges, changes of temperature
set up stresses equivalent to those produced by an external load. In Europe
a variation of temperature of 70 deg. C. or 126 deg. F. is commonly assumed. For
this the expansion is about 1 in. in 100 ft. Generally a structure should
be anchored at one point and free to move if possible in other directions.
Roughly, if expansion is prevented, a stress of one ton per sq. in. is set
up in steel structures for each 12 deg. change of temperature.

i. _Live Load on Road Bridges._--A dense crowd of people may be taken as a
uniform load of 80 to 120 lb per sq. ft. But in recent times the weight of
traction engines and wagons which pass over bridges has increased, and this
kind of load generally produces greater straining action than a crowd of
people. In manufacturing districts and near large towns loads of 30 tons
may come on road bridges, and county and borough authorities insist on
provision being made for such loads. In Switzerland roads are divided into
three classes according to their importance, and the following loads are
prescribed, the designer having to provide sufficient strength either for a
uniformly distributed crowd, or for a heavy wagon anywhere on the
roadway:-- [v.04 p.0547]

                     |      Crowd,     |          Wagon,
                     |  lb per sq. ft. |      tons per axle.
                     |                 |
  Main Roads ....... |       92        | 10 with 13 ft. wheel base
  Secondary Roads .. |       72        |  6  "   10  "      "
  Other Roads ...... |       51        |  3  "    8  "      "

In England still larger loads are now provided for. J.C. Inglis (_Proc.
Inst. C.E._ cxli. p. 35) has considered two cases--(a) a traction engine
and boiler trolley, and (b) a traction engine and trucks loaded with
granite. He has calculated the equivalent load per foot of span which would
produce the same maximum bending moments. The following are some of the
results:--

  Span Ft.                             |10. |20. |30. |40. |50. |
                                       |    |    |    |    |    |
  Equivalent load in tons per ft. run, |    |    |    |    |    |
  Case a ............................. |1.75|0.95|0.70|0.73|0.72|
  Do. Case b ......................... |3.25|1.7 |1.3 |1.2 |1.15|

Large as these loads are on short spans, they are not more than must often
be provided for.

_Live Load on Railway Bridges._--The live load is the weight of the
heaviest train which can come on the bridge. In the earlier girder bridges
the live load was taken to be equivalent to a uniform load of 1 ton per
foot run for each line of way. At that time locomotives on railways of 4
ft. 81/2 in. gauge weighed at most 35 to 45 tons, and their length between
buffers was such that the average load did not exceed 1 ton per foot run.
Trains of wagons did not weigh more than three-quarters of a ton per foot
run when most heavily loaded. The weights of engines and wagons are now
greater, and in addition it is recognized that the concentration of the
loading at the axles gives rise to greater straining action, especially in
short bridges, than the same load uniformly distributed along the span.
Hence many of the earlier bridges have had to be strengthened to carry
modern traffic. The following examples of some of the heaviest locomotives
on English railways is given by W.B. Farr (_Proc. Inst. C.E._ cxli. p.
12):--

  _Passenger Engines._

  Total weights, tons ......... 84.35 | 98.90 | 91.90 | 85.48
  Tons per ft. over all .......  1.58 |  1.71 |  1.62 |  1.61
  Tons per ft. of wheel base ..  1.92 |  2.04 |  1.97 |  1.95
  Maximum axle load, tons ..... 19.00 | 16.00 | 18.70 | 18.50

  _Goods Engines._

  Total weight, tons .......... 77.90 | 78.80 | 76.46 | 75.65
  Tons per ft. over all .......  1.54 |  1.50 |  1.54 |  1.51
  Tons per ft. of wheel base ..  2.02 |  2.02 |  2.03 |  2.00
  Maximum axle load, tons ..... 15.90 | 16.00 | 13.65 | 15.50

  _Tank Engines._

  Total weight, tons .......... 53.80 | 58.61 | 60.80 | 47.00
  Tons per ft. over all .......  1.60 |  1.68 |  1.70 |  1.55
  Tons per ft. of wheel base ..  2.45 |  2.52 |  2.23 |  3.03
  Maximum axle load, tons ..... 17.54 | 15.29 | 17.10 | 15.77

Farr has drawn diagrams of bending moment for forty different very heavy
locomotives on different spans, and has determined for each case a uniform
load which at every point would produce as great a bending moment as the
actual wheel loads. The following short abstract gives the equivalent
uniform load which produces bending moments as great as those of any of the
engines calculated:--

  Span in Ft. |   Load per ft. run equivalent
              |  to actual Wheel Loads in Tons,
              |         for each Track.
              |
      5.0     |              7.6
     10.0     |              4.85
     20.0     |              3.20
     30.0     |              2.63
     50.0     |              2.24
    100.0     |              1.97

Fig. 36 gives the loads per axle and the distribution of loads in some
exceptionally heavy modern British locomotives.

[Illustration: Express Passenger Engine, G.N. Ry.]

[Illustration: Goods Engine, L. & Y. Ry.]

[Illustration: Passenger Engine, Cal. Ry.
FIG. 36.]

[v.04 p.0548] In Austria the official regulations require that railway
bridges shall be designed for at least the following live loads per foot
run and per track:--

  |      Span.     |       Live Load in Tons.      |
  | - - - - - - - -|- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -|
  |Metres. |  Ft.  | Per metre run. | Per ft. run. |
  |        |       |                |              |
  |   1    |  3.3  |      20        |      6.1     |
  |   2    |  6.6  |      15        |      4.6     |
  |   5    | 16.4  |      10        |      3.1     |
  |  20    | 65.6  |       5        |      1.5     |
  |  30    | 98.4  |       4        |      1.2     |

It would be simpler and more convenient in designing short bridges if,
instead of assuming an equivalent uniform rolling load, agreement could be
come to as to a typical heavy locomotive which would produce stresses as
great as any existing locomotive on each class of railway. Bridges would
then be designed for these selected loads, and the process would be safer
in dealing with flooring girders and shearing forces than the assumption of
a uniform load.

Some American locomotives are very heavy. Thus a consolidation engine may
weigh 126 tons with a length over buffers of 57 ft., corresponding to an
average load of 2.55 tons per ft. run. Also long ore wagons are used which
weigh loaded two tons per ft. run. J.A.L. Waddell (_De Pontibus_, New York,
1898) proposes to arrange railways in seven classes, according to the live
loads which may be expected from the character of their traffic, and to
construct bridges in accordance with this classification. For the lightest
class, he takes a locomotive and tender of 93.5 tons, 52 ft. between
buffers (average load 1.8 tons per ft. run), and for the heaviest a
locomotive and tender weighing 144.5 tons, 52 ft. between buffers (average
load 2.77 tons per ft. run). Wagons he assumes to weigh for the lightest
class 1.3 tons per ft. run and for the heaviest 1.9 tons. He takes as the
live load for a bridge two such engines, followed by a train of wagons
covering the span. Waddell's tons are short tons of 2000 lb.

ii. _Impact._--If a vertical load is imposed suddenly, but without
velocity, work is done during deflection, and the deformation and stress
are momentarily double those due to the same load at rest on the structure.
No load of exactly this kind is ever applied to a bridge. But if a load is
so applied that the deflection increases with speed, the stress is greater
than that due to a very gradually applied load, and vibrations about a mean
position are set up. The rails not being absolutely straight and smooth,
centrifugal and lurching actions occur which alter the distribution of the
loading. Again, rapidly changing forces, due to the moving parts of the
engine which are unbalanced vertically, act on the bridge; and, lastly,
inequalities of level at the rail ends give rise to shocks. For all these
reasons the stresses due to the live load are greater than those due to the
same load resting quietly on the bridge. This increment is larger on the
flooring girders than on the main ones, and on short main girders than on
long ones. The impact stresses depend so much on local conditions that it
is difficult to fix what allowance should be made. E.H. Stone (_Trans. Am.
Soc. of C.E._ xli. p. 467) collated some measurements of deflection taken
during official trials of Indian bridges, and found the increment of
deflection due to impact to depend on the ratio of dead to live load. By
plotting and averaging he obtained the following results:--

_Excess of Deflection and straining Action of a moving Load over that due
to a resting Load._

  Dead load in per cent |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |
     of total load .... | 10 | 20 | 30 | 40 | 50 | 70 | 90 |
  Live load in per cent |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |
     of total load .... | 90 | 80 | 70 | 60 | 50 | 30 | 10 |
  Ratio of live to dead |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |
     load ............. |  9 |  4 |2.3 |1.5 |1.0 |0.43|0.10|
  Excess of deflection  |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |
     and stress due to  |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |
     moving load        |    |    |    |    |    |    |    |
     per cent ......... | 23 | 13 |  8 |5.5 |4.0 |1.6 |0.3 |

These results are for the centre deflections of main girders, but Stone
infers that the augmentation of stress for any member, due to causes
included in impact allowance, will be the same percentage for the same
ratios of live to dead load stresses. Valuable measurements of the
deformations of girders and tension members due to moving trains have been
made by S.W. Robinson (_Trans. Am. Soc. C.E._ xvi.) and by F.E. Turneaure
(_Trans. Am. Soc. C.E._ xli.). The latter used a recording deflectometer
and two recording extensometers. The observations are difficult, and the
inertia of the instrument is liable to cause error, but much care was
taken. The most striking conclusions from the results are that the
locomotive balance weights have a large effect in causing vibration, and
next, that in certain cases the vibrations are cumulative, reaching a value
greater than that due to any single impact action. Generally: (1) At speeds
less than 25 m. an hour there is not much vibration. (2) The increase of
deflection due to impact at 40 or 50 m. an hour is likely to reach 40 to
50% for girder spans of less than 50 ft. (3) This percentage decreases
rapidly for longer spans, becoming about 25% for 75-ft. spans. (4) The
increase per cent of boom stresses due to impact is about the same as that
of deflection; that in web bracing bars is rather greater. (5) Speed of
train produces no effect on the mean deflection, but only on the magnitude
of the vibrations.

A purely empirical allowance for impact stresses has been proposed,
amounting to 20% of the live load stresses for floor stringers; 15% for
floor cross girders; and for main girders, 10% for 40-ft. spans, and 5% for
100-ft. spans. These percentages are added to the live load stresses.

iii. _Dead Load._--The dead load consists of the weight of main girders,
flooring and wind-bracing. It is generally reckoned to be uniformly
distributed, but in large spans the distribution of weight in the main
girders should be calculated and taken into account. The weight of the
bridge flooring depends on the type adopted. Road bridges vary so much in
the character of the flooring that no general rule can be given. In railway
bridges the weight of sleepers, rails, &c., is 0.2 to 0.25 tons per ft. run
for each line of way, while the rail girders, cross girders, &c., weigh
0.15 to 0.2 tons. If a footway is added about 0.4 ton per ft. run may be
allowed for this. The weight of main girders increases with the span, and
there is for any type of bridge a limiting span beyond which the dead load
stresses exceed the assigned limit of working stress.

Let W_l be the total live load, W_f the total flooring load on a bridge of
span l, both being considered for the present purpose to be uniform per ft.
run. Let k(W_l+W_f) be the weight of main girders designed to carry
W_l+W_f, but not their own weight in addition. Then

  W_g = (W_l+W_f)(k+k^2+k^3 ...)

will be the weight of main girders to carry W_l+W_f and their own weight
(Buck, _Proc. Inst. C.E._ lxvii. p. 331). Hence,

  W_g = (W_l+W_f)k/(1-k).

Since in designing a bridge W_l+W_f is known, k(W_l+W_f) can be found from
a provisional design in which the weight W_g is neglected. The actual
bridge must have the section of all members greater than those in the
provisional design in the ratio k/(1-k).

Waddell (_De Pontibus_) gives the following convenient empirical relations.
Let w_1, w_2 be the weights of main girders per ft. run for a live load p
per ft. run and spans l_1, l_2. Then

  w_2/w_1 = 1/2 [l_2/l_1+(l_2/l_1)^2].

Now let w_1', w_2' be the girder weights per ft. run for spans l_1, l_2,
and live loads p' per ft. run. Then

  w_2'/w_2 = 1/5(1+4p'/p)

  w_2'/w_1 = 1/10[l_2/l_1+(l_2/l_1)^2](1+4p'/p)

A partially rational approximate formula for the weight of main girders is
the following (Unwin, _Wrought Iron Bridges and Roofs_, 1869, p. 40):--

Let w = total live load per ft. run of girder; w_2 the weight of platform
per ft. run; w_3 the weight of main girders per ft. run, all in tons; l =
span in ft.; s = average stress in tons per sq. in. on gross section of
metal; d = depth of girder at centre in ft.; r = ratio of span to depth of
girder so that r = l/d. Then

  w_3 = (w_1+w_2)l^2/(Cds-l_2) = (w_1+w_2)lr/(Cs-lr),

where C is a constant for any type of girder. It is not easy to fix the
average stress s per sq. in. of gross section. Hence the formula is more
useful in the form

  w = (w_1+w_2)l^2/(Kd-l^2) = (w_1+w_2)lr/(K-lr)

where K = (w_1+w_2+w_3)lr/w_3 is to be deduced from the data of some bridge
previously designed with the same working stresses. From some known
examples, C varies from 1500 to 1800 for iron braced parallel or bowstring
girders, and from 1200 to 1500 for similar girders of steel. K = 6000 to
7200 for iron and = 7200 to 9000 for steel bridges.

iv. _Wind Pressure._--Much attention has been given to wind action since
the disaster to the Tay bridge in 1879. As to the maximum wind pressure on
small plates normal to the wind, there is not much doubt. Anemometer
observations show that pressures of 30 lb per sq. ft. occur in storms
annually in many localities, and that occasionally higher pressures are
recorded in exposed positions. Thus at Bidstone, Liverpool, where the gauge
has an exceptional exposure, a pressure of 80 lb per sq. ft. has been
observed. In tornadoes, such as that at St Louis in 1896, it has been
calculated, from the stability of structures overturned, that pressures of
45 to 90 lb per sq. ft. must have been reached. As to anemometer pressures,
it should be observed that the recorded pressure is made up of a positive
front and negative (vacuum) back pressure, but in structures the latter
must be absent or only partially developed. Great difference of opinion
exists as to whether on large surfaces the average pressure per sq. ft. is
as great as on small surfaces, such as anemometer plates. The experiments
of Sir B. Baker at the Forth bridge showed that on a surface 30 ft. x 15
ft. the intensity of pressure was less than on a similarly exposed
anemometer plate. In the case of bridges there is the further difficulty
that some surfaces partially [v.04 p.0549] shield other surfaces; one
girder, for instance, shields the girder behind it (see _Brit. Assoc.
Report_, 1884). In 1881 a committee of the Board of Trade decided that the
maximum wind pressure on a vertical surface in Great Britain should be
assumed in designing structures to be 56 lb per sq. ft. For a plate girder
bridge of less height than the train, the wind is to be taken to act on a
surface equal to the projected area of one girder and the exposed part of a
train covering the bridge. In the case of braced girder bridges, the wind
pressure is taken as acting on a continuous surface extending from the
rails to the top of the carriages, plus the vertical projected area of so
much of one girder as is exposed above the train or below the rails. In
addition, an allowance is made for pressure on the leeward girder according
to a scale. The committee recommended that a factor of safety of 4 should
be taken for wind stresses. For safety against overturning they considered
a factor of 2 sufficient. In the case of bridges not subject to Board of
Trade inspection, the allowance for wind pressure varies in different
cases. C. Shaler Smith allows 300 lb per ft. run for the pressure on the
side of a train, and in addition 30 lb per sq. ft. on twice the vertical
projected area of one girder, treating the pressure on the train as a
travelling load. In the case of bridges of less than 50 ft. span he also
provides strength to resist a pressure of 50 lb per sq. ft. on twice the
vertical projection of one truss, no train being supposed to be on the
bridge.

19. _Stresses Permitted._--For a long time engineers held the convenient
opinion that, if the total dead and live load stress on any section of a
structure (of iron) did not exceed 5 tons per sq. in., ample safety was
secured. It is no longer possible to design by so simple a rule. In an
interesting address to the British Association in 1885, Sir B. Baker
described the condition of opinion as to the safe limits of stress as
chaotic. "The old foundations," he said, "are shaken, and engineers have
not come to an agreement respecting the rebuilding of the structure. The
variance in the strength of existing bridges is such as to be apparent to
the educated eye without any calculation. In the present day engineers are
in accord as to the principles of estimating the magnitude of the stresses
on the members of a structure, but not so in proportioning the members to
resist those stresses. The practical result is that a bridge which would be
passed by the English Board of Trade would require to be strengthened 5% in
some parts and 60% in others, before it would be accepted by the German
government, or by any of the leading railway companies in America." Sir B.
Baker then described the results of experiments on repetition of stress,
and added that "hundreds of existing bridges which carry twenty trains a
day with perfect safety would break down quickly under twenty trains an
hour. This fact was forced on my attention nearly twenty-five years ago by
the fracture of a number of girders of ordinary strength under a
five-minutes' train service."

Practical experience taught engineers that though 5 tons per sq. in. for
iron, or 61/2 tons per sq. in. for steel, was safe or more than safe for long
bridges with large ratio of dead to live load, it was not safe for short
ones in which the stresses are mainly due to live load, the weight of the
bridge being small. The experiments of A. Woehler, repeated by Johann
Bauschinger, Sir B. Baker and others, show that the breaking stress of a
bar is not a fixed quantity, but depends on the range of variation of
stress to which it is subjected, if that variation is repeated a very large
number of times. Let K be the breaking strength of a bar per unit of
section, when it is loaded once gradually to breaking. This may be termed
the statical breaking strength. Let k_{max.} be the breaking strength of
the same bar when subjected to stresses varying from k_{max.} to k_{min.}
alternately and repeated an indefinitely great number of times; k_{min.} is
to be reckoned + if of the same kind as k_{max.} and - if of the opposite
kind (tension or thrust). The range of stress is therefore
k_{max.}-k_{min.}, if the stresses are both of the same kind, and
k_{max.}+k_{min.}, if they are of opposite kinds. Let [Delta] = k_{max.} +-
k_{min.} = the range of stress, where [Delta] is always positive. Then
Woehler's results agree closely with the rule,

  k_{max.} = 1/2[Delta]+[root](K squared-n[Delta]K),

where n is a constant which varies from 1.3 to 2 in various qualities of
iron and steel. For ductile iron or mild steel it may be taken as 1.5. For
a statical load, range of stress nil, [Delta] = 0, k_{max.} = K, the
statical breaking stress. For a bar so placed that it is alternately loaded
and the load removed, [Delta] = k_{max.} and k_{max.} = 0.6 K. For a bar
subjected to alternate tension and compression of equal amount, [Delta] = 2
f_{max.} and k_{max.} = 0.33 K. The safe working stress in these different
cases is k_{max.} divided by the factor of safety. It is sometimes said
that a bar is "fatigued" by repeated straining. The real nature of the
action is not well understood, but the word fatigue may be used, if it is
not considered to imply more than that the breaking stress under repetition
of loading diminishes as the range of variation increases.

It was pointed out as early as 1869 (Unwin, _Wrought Iron Bridges and
Roofs_) that a rational method of fixing the working stress, so far as
knowledge went at that time, would be to make it depend on the ratio of
live to dead load, and in such a way that the factor of safety for the live
load stresses was double that for the dead load stresses. Let A be the dead
load and B the live load, producing stress in a bar; [rho] = B/A the ratio
of live to dead load; f_1 the safe working limit of stress for a bar
subjected to a dead load only and f the safe working stress in any other
case. Then

  f_1 (A+B)/(A+2B) = f_1(1+[rho])/(1+2[rho]).

The following table gives values of f so computed on the assumption that
f_1 = 71/2 tons per sq. in. for iron and 9 tons per sq. in. for steel.

_Working Stress for combined Dead and Live Load. Factor of Safety twice as
great for Live Load as for Dead Load._

  ----------------------+-------+----------+-----------------------------+
                        | Ratio | 1+[rho]  |Values of f, tons per sq. in.|
                        | [rho] | -------  +-----------------------------+
                        |       | 1+2[rho] |      Iron.     | Mild Steel.|
  ----------------------+-------+----------+----------------+------------+
  All dead load         |     0 |   1.00   |       7.5      |     9.0    |
                        |   .25 |   0.83   |       6.2      |     7.5    |
                        |   .33 |   0.78   |       5.8      |     7.0    |
                        |   .50 |   0.75   |       5.6      |     6.8    |
                        |   .66 |   0.71   |       5.3      |     6.4    |
  Live load = Dead load |  1.00 |   0.66   |       4.9      |     5.9    |
                        |  2.00 |   0.60   |       4.5      |     5.4    |
                        |  4.00 |   0.56   |       4.2      |     5.0    |
  All live load         | [inf] |   0.50   |       3.7      |     4.5    |
  ----------------------+-------+----------+----------------+------------+

Bridge sections designed by this rule differ little from those designed by
formulae based directly on Woehler's experiments. This rule has been revived
in America, and appears to be increasingly relied on in bridge-designing.
(See _Trans. Am. Soc. C.E._ xli. p. 156.)

The method of J.J. Weyrauch and W. Launhardt, based on an empirical
expression for Woehler's law, has been much used in bridge designing (see
_Proc. Inst. C.E._ lxiii. p. 275). Let t be the _statical breaking
strength_ of a bar, loaded once gradually up to fracture (t = breaking load
divided by original area of section); u the breaking strength of a bar
loaded and unloaded an indefinitely great number of times, the stress
varying from u to 0 alternately (this is termed the _primitive strength_);
and, lastly, let s be the breaking strength of a bar subjected to an
indefinitely great number of repetitions of stresses equal and opposite in
sign (tension and thrust), so that the stress ranges alternately from s to
-s. This is termed the _vibration strength_. Woehler's and Bauschinger's
experiments give values of t, u, and s, for some materials. If a bar is
subjected to alternations of stress having the range [Delta] =
f_{max.}-f_{min.}, then, by Woehler's law, the bar will ultimately break, if

  f_{max.} = F[Delta], . . . (1)

where F is some unknown function. Launhardt found that, for stresses always
of the same kind, F = (t-u)/(t-f_{max.}) approximately agreed with
experiment. For stresses of different kinds Weyrauch found F =
(u-s)/(2u-s-f_{max.}) to be similarly approximate. Now let
f_{max.}/f_{min.} = [phi], where [phi] is + or - according as the stresses
are of the same or opposite signs. Putting the values of F in (1) and
solving for f_{max.}, we get for the breaking stress of a bar subjected to
repetition of varying stress,

  f_{max.} = u(1+(t-u)[phi]/u)   [Stresses of same sign.]
  f_{max.} = u(1+(u-s)[phi]/u)   [Stresses of opposite sign.]

The working stress in any case is f_{max.} divided by a factor of safety.
Let that factor be 3. Then Woehler's results for iron and Bauschinger's for
steel give the following equations for tension or thrust:--

  Iron, working stress, f = 4.4 (1+1/2[phi])
  Steel, working stress, f = 5.87 (1+1/2[phi]).

In these equations [phi] is to have its + or - value according to the case
considered. For shearing stresses the working stress may have 0.8 of its
value for tension. The following table gives values of the working stress
calculated by these equations:--

_Working Stress for Tension or Thrust by Launhardt and Weyrauch Formula._

  ------------------------+-------+-----------+--------------------+
                          | [phi] |     [phi] | Working Stress f,  |
                          |       | 1 + ----- |  tons per sq. in.  |
                          |       |       2   +--------------------+
                          |       |           |  Iron.   | Steel.  |
  ------------------------+-------+-----------+--------------------+
  All dead load           |  1.0  |   1.5     |   6.60   |  8.80   |
                          |  0.75 |   1.375   |   6.05   |  8.07   |
                          |  0.50 |   1.25    |   5.50   |  7.34   |
                          |  0.25 |   1.125   |   4.95   |  6.60   |
  All live load           |  0.00 |   1.00    |   4.40   |  5.87   |
                          | -0.25 |   0.875   |   3.85   |  5.14   |
                          | -0.50 |   0.75    |   3.30   |  4.40   |
                          | -0.75 |   0.625   |   2.75   |  3.67   |
  Equal stresses + and -  | -1.00 |   0.500   |   2.20   |  2.93   |
  ------------------------+-------+-----------+--------------------+

[v.04 p.0550] To compare this with the previous table, [phi] = (A+B)/A =
1+[rho]. Except when the limiting stresses are of opposite sign, the two
tables agree very well. In bridge work this occurs only in some of the
bracing bars.

It is a matter of discussion whether, if fatigue is allowed for by the
Weyrauch method, an additional allowance should be made for impact. There
was no impact in Woehler's experiments, and therefore it would seem rational
to add the impact allowance to that for fatigue; but in that case the
bridge sections become larger than experience shows to be necessary. Some
engineers escape this difficulty by asserting that Woehler's results are not
applicable to bridge work. They reject the allowance for fatigue (that is,
the effect of repetition) and design bridge members for the total dead and
live load, plus a large allowance for impact varied according to some
purely empirical rule. (See Waddell, _De Pontibus_, p.7.) Now in applying
Woehler's law, f_{max.} for any bridge member is found for the maximum
possible live load, a live load which though it may sometimes come on the
bridge and must therefore be provided for, is not the usual live load to
which the bridge is subjected. Hence the range of stress,
f_{max.}-f_{min.}, from which the working stress is deduced, is not the
ordinary range of stress which is repeated a practically infinite number of
times, but is a range of stress to which the bridge is subjected only at
comparatively long intervals. Hence practically it appears probable that
the allowance for fatigue made in either of the tables above is sufficient
to cover the ordinary effects of impact also.

English bridge-builders are somewhat hampered in adopting rational limits
of working stress by the rules of the Board of Trade. Nor do they all
accept the guidance of Woehler's law. The following are some examples of
limits adopted. For the Dufferin bridge (steel) the working stress was
taken at 6.5 tons per sq. in. in bottom booms and diagonals, 6.0 tons in
top booms, 5.0 tons in verticals and long compression members. For the
Stanley bridge at Brisbane the limits were 6.5 tons per sq. in. in
compression boom, 7.0 tons in tension boom, 5.0 tons in vertical struts,
6.5 tons in diagonal ties, 8.0 tons in wind bracing, and 6.5 tons in cross
and rail girders. In the new Tay bridge the limit of stress is generally 5
tons per sq. in., but in members in which the stress changes sign 4 tons
per sq. in. In the Forth bridge for members in which the stress varied from
0 to a maximum frequently, the limit was 5.0 tons per sq. in., or if the
stress varied rarely 5.6 tons per sq. in.; for members subjected to
alternations of tension and thrust frequently 3.3 tons per sq. in. or 5
tons per sq. in. if the alternations were infrequent. The shearing area of
rivets in tension members was made 11/2 times the useful section of plate in
tension. For compression members the shearing area of rivets in butt-joints
was made half the useful section of plate in compression.

[Illustration: FIG. 37.]

20. _Determination of Stresses in the Members of Bridges._--It is
convenient to consider beam girder or truss bridges, and it is the stresses
in the main girders which primarily require to be determined. A main girder
consists of an upper and lower flange, boom or chord and a vertical web.
The loading forces to be considered are vertical, the horizontal forces due
to wind pressure are treated separately and provided for by a horizontal
system of bracing. For practical purposes it is accurate enough to consider
the booms or chords as carrying exclusively the horizontal tension and
compression and the web as resisting the whole of the vertical and, in a
plate web, the equal horizontal shearing forces. Let fig. 37 represent a
beam with any system of loads W_1, W_2, ... W_n.

The reaction at the right abutment is

  R_2 = W_1x_1/l+W_2x_2/l+...

That at the left abutment is

  R_1 = W_1+W_2+...-R_2.

Consider any section a b. The total shear at a b is

  S = R-[Sigma](W_1+W_2 ...)

where the summation extends to all the loads to the left of the section.
Let p_1, p_2 ... be the distances of the loads from a b, and p the distance
of R_1 from a b; then the bending moment at a b is

  M = R_1p-[Sigma](W_1p_1+W_2p_2 ...)

where the summation extends to all the loads to the left of a b. If the
loads on the right of the section are considered the expressions are
similar and give the same results.

If A_t A_c are the cross sections of the tension and compression flanges or
chords, and h the distance between their mass centres, then on the
assumption that they resist all the direct horizontal forces the total
stress on each flange is

  H_t = H_c = M/h

and the intensity of stress of tension or compression is

  f_t = M/A_th,
  f_c = M/A_ch.

If A is the area of the plate web in a vertical section, the intensity of
shearing stress is

  f_x = S/A

and the intensity on horizontal sections is the same. If the web is a
braced web, then the vertical component of the stress in the web bars cut
by the section must be equal to S.

[Illustration: FIG. 38.]

21. _Method of Sections. A. Ritter's Method._--In the case of braced
structures the following method is convenient: When a section of a girder
can be taken cutting only three bars, the stresses in the bars can be found
by taking moments. In fig. 38 m n cuts three bars, and the forces in the
three bars cut by the section are C, S and T. There are to the left of the
section the external forces, R, W_1, W_2. Let s be the perpendicular from
O, the join of C and T on the direction of S; t the perpendicular from A,
the join of C and S on the direction of T; and c the perpendicular from B,
the join of S and T on the direction of C. Taking moments about O,

  R_x-W_1(x+a)-W_2(x+2a) = Ss;

taking moments about A,

  R3a-W_12a-W_2a = Tt;

and taking moments about B,

  R2a-W_1a = Cc

Or generally, if M_1 M_2 M_3 are the moments of the external forces to the
left of O, A, and B respectively, and s, t and c the perpendiculars from O,
A and B on the directions of the forces cut by the section, then

  Ss = M_1; Tt = M_2 and Cc = M_3.

Still more generally if H is the stress on any bar, h the perpendicular
distance from the join of the other two bars cut by the section, and M is
the moment of the forces on one side of that join,

  Hh = M.

[Illustration: Fig. 39.]

[Illustration: Fig. 40.]

22. _Distribution of Bending Moment and Shearing Force._--Let a girder of
span l, fig. 39, supported at the ends, carry a fixed load W at m from the
right abutment. The reactions at the abutments are R_1 = Wm/l and R_2 =
W(l-m)/l. The shears on vertical sections to the left and right of the load
are R_1 and -R_2, and the distribution of shearing force is given by two
rectangles. Bending moment increases uniformly from either abutment to the
load, at which the bending moment is M = R_2m = R_1(l-m). The distribution
of bending moment is given by the ordinates of a triangle. Next let the
girder carry a uniform load w per ft. run (fig. 40). The total load [v.04
p.0551] is wl; the reactions at abutments, R_1 = R_2 = 1/2wl. The
distribution of shear on vertical sections is given by the ordinates of a
sloping line. The greatest bending moment is at the centre and = M_c =
1/8wl^2. At any point x from the abutment, the bending moment is M =
1/2wx(l-x), an equation to a parabola.

[Illustration: Fig. 41.]

[Illustration: Fig. 42.]

23. _Shear due to Travelling Loads._--Let a uniform train weighing w per
ft. run advance over a girder of span 2c, from the left abutment. When it
covers the girder to a distance x from the centre (fig. 41) the total load
is w(c+x); the reaction at B is

  R_2 = w(c+x)x(c+x)/4c = w/4c(c+x) squared,

[Illustration: FIG. 41.]

[Illustration: FIG. 42.]

which is also the shearing force at C for that position of the load. As the
load travels, the shear at the head of the train will be given by the
ordinates of a parabola having its vertex at A, and a maximum F_{max.} =
-1/2wl at B. If the load travels the reverse way, the shearing force at the
head of the train is given by the ordinates of the dotted parabola. The
greatest shear at C for any position of the load occurs when the head of
the train is at C. For any load p between C and B will increase the
reaction at B and therefore the shear at C by part of p, but at the same
time will diminish the shear at C by the whole of p. The web of a girder
must resist the maximum shear, and, with a travelling load like a railway
train, this is greater for partial than for complete loading. Generally a
girder supports both a dead and a live load. The distribution of total
shear, due to a dead load w_l per ft. run and a travelling load w_l per ft.
run, is shown in fig. 42, arranged so that the dead load shear is added to
the maximum travelling load shear of the same sign.

[Illustration: FIG. 43.]

24. _Counterbracing._--In the case of girders with braced webs, the tension
bars of which are not adapted to resist a thrust, another circumstance due
to the position of the live load must be considered. For a train advancing
from the left, the travelling load shear in the left half of the span is of
a different sign from that due to the dead load. Fig. 43 shows the maximum
shear at vertical sections due to a dead and travelling load, the latter
advancing (fig. 43, a) from the left and (fig. 43, b) from the right
abutment. Comparing the figures it will be seen that over a distance x near
the middle of the girder the shear changes sign, according as the load
advances from the left or the right. The bracing bars, therefore, for this
part of the girder must be adapted to resist either tension or thrust.
Further, the range of stress to which they are subjected is the sum of the
stresses due to the load advancing from the left or the right.

[Illustration: FIG. 44.]

[Illustration: FIG. 45.]

[Illustration: FIG. 46.]

25. _Greatest Shear when concentrated Loads travel over the Bridge._--To
find the greatest shear with a set of concentrated loads at fixed
distances, let the loads advance from the left abutment, and let C be the
section at which the shear is required (fig. 44). The greatest shear at C
may occur with W_1 at C. If W_1 passes beyond C, the shear at C will
probably be greatest when W_2 is at C. Let R be the resultant of the loads
on the bridge when W_1 is at C. Then the reaction at B and shear at C is
Rn/l. Next let the loads advance a distance a so that W_2 comes to C. Then
the shear at C is R(n+a)/l-W_1, plus any reaction d at B, due to any
additional load which has come on the girder during the movement. The shear
will therefore be increased by bringing W_2 to C, if Ra/l+d > W_1 and d is
generally small and negligible. This result is modified if the action of
the load near the section is distributed to the bracing intersections by
rail and cross girders. In fig. 45 the action of W is distributed to A and
B by the flooring. Then the loads at A and B are W(p-x)/p and Wx/p. Now let
C (fig. 46) be the section at which the greatest shear is required, and let
the loads advance from the left till W_1 is at C. If R is the resultant of
the loads then on the girder, the reaction at B and shear at C is Rn/l. But
the shear may be greater when W_2 is at C. In that case the shear at C
becomes R(n+a)/l+d-W_1, if a > p, and R(n+a)/l+d-W_1a/p, if a < p. If we
neglect d, then the shear increases by moving W_2 to C, if Ra/l > W_1 in
the first case, and if Ra/l > W_1a/p in the second case.

[Illustration: FIG. 47.]

[Illustration: FIG. 48.]

26. _Greatest Bending Moment due to travelling concentrated Loads._--For
the greatest bending moment due to a travelling live load, let a load of w
per ft. run advance from the left abutment (fig. 47), and let its centre be
at x from the left abutment. The reaction at B is 2wx squared/l and the bending
moment at any section C, at m from the left abutment, is 2wx squared/(l-m)/l,
which increases as x increases till the span is covered. Hence, for uniform
travelling loads, the bending moments are greatest when the loading is
complete. In that case the loads on either side of C are proportional to m
and l-m. In the case of a series of travelling loads at fixed distances
apart passing over the girder from the left, let W_1, W_2 (fig. 48), at
distances x and x+a from the left abutment, be their resultants on either
side of C. Then the reaction at B is W_1x/l+W_2(x+a)/l. The bending moment
at C is

  M = W_1x(l-m)/l+W_2m{1-(x+a)/l}.

If the loads are moved a distance [Delta]x to the right, the bending moment
becomes

  M+[Delta]M = W_1(x+[Delta]x)(l-m)/l+W_2m{1-(x+[Delta]x+a)/l}
          [Delta]m = W_1[Delta]x(l-m)/l-W_2[Delta]xm/l,

and this is positive or the bending moment increases, if W_1(l-m) > W_2m,
or if W_1/m > W_2/(l-m). But these are the average loads per ft. run to the
left and right of C. Hence, if the average load to the left of a section is
greater than that to the right, the bending moment at the section will be
increased by moving the loads to the right, and vice versa. Hence the
maximum bending moment at C for a series of travelling loads will occur
when the average load is the same on either side of C. If one of the loads
is at C, spread over a very small distance in the neighbourhood of C, then
a very small displacement of the loads will permit the fulfilment of the
condition. Hence the criterion for the position of the loads which makes
the moment at C greatest is this: one load must be at C, and the other
loads must be distributed, so that the average loads per ft. on either side
of C (the load at C being neglected) are nearly equal. If the loads are
very unequal in magnitude or distance this condition may be satisfied for
more than one position of the loads, but it is not difficult to ascertain
which position gives the maximum moment. Generally one of the largest of
the loads must be at C with as many others to right and left as is
consistent with that condition.

[Illustration: FIG. 49.]

This criterion may be stated in another way. The greatest bending moment
will occur with one of the greatest loads at the section, and when this
further condition is satisfied. Let fig. 49 represent a beam with the
series of loads travelling from the right. Let a b be [v.04 p.0552] the
section considered, and let W_x be the load at a b when the bending moment
there is greatest, and W_n the last load to the right then on the bridge.
Then the position of the loads must be that which satisfies the condition

    x                W_1+W_2+... W_{x-1}
   --- greater than ------------------------
    l                W_1+W_2+... W_n

       x             W_1+W_2+... W_x
      --- less than ------------------------
       l             W_1+W_2+... W_n

[Illustration: FIG. 50.]

Fig. 50 shows the curve of bending moment under one of a series of
travelling loads at fixed distances. Let W_1, W_2, W_3 traverse the girder
from the left at fixed distances a, b. For the position shown the
distribution of bending moment due to W_1 is given by ordinates of the
triangle A'CB'; that due to W_2 by ordinates of A'DB'; and that due to W_3
by ordinates A'EB'. The total moment at W_1, due to three loads, is the sum
mC+mn+mo of the intercepts which the triangle sides cut off from the
vertical under W_1. As the loads move over the girder, the points C, D, E
describe the parabolas M_1, M_2, M_3, the middle ordinates of which are
1/4W_1l, 1/4W_2l, and 1/4W_3l. If these are first drawn it is easy, for any
position of the loads, to draw the lines B'C, B'D, B'E, and to find the sum
of the intercepts which is the total bending moment under a load. The lower
portion of the figure is the curve of bending moments under the leading
load. Till W_1 has advanced a distance a only one load is on the girder,
and the curve A"F gives bending moments due to W_1 only; as W_1 advances to
a distance a+b, two loads are on the girder, and the curve FG gives moments
due to W_1 and W_2. GB" is the curve of moments for all three loads
W_1+W_2+W_3.

[Illustration: FIG. 51.]

Fig. 51 shows maximum bending moment curves for an extreme case of a short
bridge with very unequal loads. The three lightly dotted parabolas are the
curves of maximum moment for each of the loads taken separately. The three
heavily dotted curves are curves of maximum moment under each of the loads,
for the three loads passing over the bridge, at the given distances, from
left to right. As might be expected, the moments are greatest in this case
at the sections under the 15-ton load. The heavy continuous line gives the
last-mentioned curve for the reverse direction of passage of the loads.

With short bridges it is best to draw the curve of maximum bending moments
for some assumed typical set of loads in the way just described, and to
design the girder accordingly. For longer bridges the funicular polygon
affords a method of determining maximum bending moments which is perhaps
more convenient. But very great accuracy in drawing this curve is
unnecessary, because the rolling stock of railways varies so much that the
precise magnitude and distribution of the loads which will pass over a
bridge cannot be known. All that can be done is to assume a set of loads
likely to produce somewhat severer straining than any probable actual
rolling loads. Now, except for very short bridges and very unequal loads, a
parabola can be found which includes the curve of maximum moments. This
parabola is the curve of maximum moments for a travelling load uniform per
ft. run. Let w_e be the load per ft. run which would produce the maximum
moments represented by this parabola. Then w_e may be termed the uniform
load per ft. equivalent to any assumed set of concentrated loads. Waddell
has calculated tables of such equivalent uniform loads. But it is not
difficult to find w_e, approximately enough for practical purposes, very
simply. Experience shows that (a) a parabola having the same ordinate at
the centre of the span, or (b) a parabola having the same ordinate at
one-quarter span as the curve of maximum moments, agrees with it closely
enough for practical designing. A criterion already given shows the
position of any set of loads which will produce the greatest bending moment
at the centre of the bridge, or at one-quarter span. Let M_c and M_a be
those moments. At a section distant x from the centre of a girder of span
2c, the bending moment due to a uniform load w_e per ft run is

  M = 1/2w_e(c-x)(c+x).

Putting x = 0, for the centre section

  M_c = 1/2w_ec^2;

and putting x = 1/2c, for section at quarter span

  M_a = 3/8w_ec^2.

From these equations a value of w_e can be obtained. Then the bridge is
designed, so far as the direct stresses are concerned, for bending moments
due to a uniform dead load and the uniform equivalent load w_e.

[Illustration: FIG. 52.]

27. _Influence Lines._--In dealing with the action of travelling loads much
assistance may be obtained by using a line termed an _influence line_. Such
a line has for abscissa the distance of a load from one end of a girder,
and for ordinate the bending moment or shear at any given section, or on
any member, due to that load. Generally the influence line is drawn for
unit load. In fig. 52 let A'B' be a girder supported at the ends and let it
be required to investigate the bending moment at C' due to unit load in any
position on the girder. When the load is at F', the reaction at B' is m/l
and the moment at C' is m(l-x)/l, which will be reckoned positive, when it
resists a tendency of the right-hand part of the girder to turn
counter-clockwise. Projecting A'F'C'B' on to the horizontal AB, take Ff =
m(l-x)/l, the moment at C of unit load at F. If this process is repeated
for all positions of the load, we get the influence line AGB for the
bending moment at C. The area AGB is termed the influence area. The
greatest moment CG at C is x(l-x)/l. To use this line to investigate the
maximum moment at C due to a series of travelling loads at fixed distances,
let P_1, P_2, P_3, ... be the loads which at the moment considered are at
distances m_1, m_2, ... from the left abutment. Set off these distances
along AB and let y_1, y_2, ... be the corresponding ordinates of the
influence curve (y = Ff) on the verticals under the loads. Then the moment
at C due to all the loads is

  M = P_1y_1+P_2y_2+...

[v.04 p.0553] [Illustration: FIG. 53.]

The position of the loads which gives the greatest moment at C may be
settled by the criterion given above. For a uniform travelling load w per
ft. of span, consider a small interval Fk = [Delta]m on which the load is
w[Delta]m. The moment due to this, at C, is wm(l-x)[Delta]m/l. But
m(l-x)[Delta]m/l is the area of the strip Ffhk, that is y[Delta]m. Hence
the moment of the load on [Delta]m at C is wy[Delta]m, and the moment of a
uniform load over any portion of the girder is w x the area of the
influence curve under that portion. If the scales are so chosen that a inch
represents 1 in. ton of moment, and b inch represents 1 ft. of span, and w
is in tons per ft. run, then ab is the unit of area in measuring the
influence curve.

If the load is carried by a rail girder (stringer) with cross girders at
the intersections of bracing and boom, its effect is distributed to the
bracing intersections D'E' (fig. 53), and the part of the influence line
for that bay (panel) is altered. With unit load in the position shown, the
load at D' is (p-n)/p, and that at E' is n/p. The moment of the load at C
is m(l-x)/l-n(p-n)/p. This is the equation to the dotted line RS (fig. 52).

[Illustration: FIG. 54.]

[Illustration: FIG. 55]

If the unit load is at F', the reaction at B' and the shear at C' is m/l,
positive if the shearing stress resists a tendency of the part of the
girder on the right to move upwards; set up Ff = m/l (fig. 54) on the
vertical under the load. Repeating the process for other positions, we get
the influence line AGHB, for the shear at C due to unit load anywhere on
the girder. GC = x/l and CH = -(l-x)/l. The lines AG, HB are parallel. If
the load is in the bay D'E' and is carried by a rail girder which
distributes it to cross girders at D'E', the part of the influence line
under this bay is altered. Let n (Fig. 55) be the distance of the load from
D', x_1 the distance of D' from the left abutment, and p the length of a
bay. The loads at D', E, due to unit weight on the rail girder are (p-n)/p
and n/p. The reaction at B' is {(p-n)x_1+n(x_1+p)}/pl. The shear at C' is
the reaction at B' less the load at E', that is, {p(x_1+n)-nl}/pl, which is
the equation to the line DH (fig. 54). Clearly, the distribution of the
load by the rail girder considerably alters the distribution of shear due
to a load in the bay in which the section considered lies. The total shear
due to a series of loads P_1, P_2, ... at distances m_1, m_2, ... from the
left abutment, y_1, y_2, ... being the ordinates of the influence curve
under the loads, is S = P_1y_1+P_2y_2+.... Generally, the greatest shear S
at C will occur when the longer of the segments into which C divides the
girder is fully loaded and the other is unloaded, the leading load being at
C. If the loads are very unequal or unequally spaced, a trial or two will
determine which position gives the greatest value of S. The greatest shear
at C' of the opposite sign to that due to the loading of the longer segment
occurs with the shorter segment loaded. For a uniformly distributed load w
per ft. run the shear at C is w x the area of the influence curve under the
segment covered by the load, attention being paid to the sign of the area
of the curve. If the load rests directly on the main girder, the greatest +
and - shears at C will be w x AGC and -w x CHB. But if the load is
distributed to the bracing intersections by rail and cross girders, then
the shear at C' will be greatest when the load extends to N, and will have
the values w x ADN and -w x NEB. An interesting paper by F.C. Lea, dealing
with the determination of stress due to concentrated loads, by the method
of influence lines will be found in _Proc. Inst. C.E._ clxi. p.261.

Influence lines were described by Fraenkel, _Der Civilingenieur_, 1876. See
also _Handbuch der Ingenieur-wissenschaften_, vol. ii. ch. x. (1882), and
Levy, _La Statique graphique_ (1886). There is a useful paper by Prof. G.F.
Swain (_Trans. Am. Soc. C.E._ xvii., 1887), and another by L.M. Hoskins
(_Proc. Am. Soc. C.E._ xxv., 1899).

[Illustration: FIG. 56.]

28. _Eddy's Method._--Another method of investigating the maximum shear at
a section due to any distribution of a travelling load has been given by
Prof. H.T. Eddy (_Trans. Am. Soc. C.E._ xxii., 1890). Let hk (fig. 56)
represent in magnitude and position a load W, at x from the left abutment,
on a girder AB of span l. Lay off kf, hg, horizontal and equal to l. Join f
and g to h and k. Draw verticals at A, B, and join no. Obviously no is
horizontal and equal to l. Also mn/mf = hk/kf or mn-W(l-x)/l, which is the
reaction at A due to the load at C, and is the shear at any point of AC.
Similarly, po is the reaction at B and shear at any point of CB. The shaded
rectangles represent the distribution of shear due to the load at C, while
no may be termed the datum line of shear. Let the load move to D, so that
its distance from the left abutment is x+a. Draw a vertical at D,
intersecting fh, kg, in s and q. Then qr/ro = hk/hg or ro = W(l-x-a)/l,
which is the reaction at A and shear at any point of AD, for the new
position of the load. Similarly, rs = W(x+a)/l is the shear on DB. The
distribution of shear is given by the partially shaded rectangles. For the
application of this method to a series of loads Prof. Eddy's paper must be
referred to.

29. _Economic Span._--In the case of a bridge of many spans, there is a
length of span which makes the cost of the bridge least. The cost of
abutments and bridge flooring is practically independent of the length of
span adopted. Let P be the cost of one pier; C the cost of the main girders
for one span, erected; n the number of spans; l the length of one span, and
L the length of the bridge between abutments. Then, n = L/l nearly. Cost of
piers (n-1)P. Cost of main girders nG. The cost of a pier will not vary
materially with the span adopted. It depends mainly on the character of the
foundations and height at which the bridge is carried. The cost of the main
girders for one span will vary nearly as the square of the span for any
given type of girder and intensity of live load. That is, G = al squared, where a
is a constant. Hence the total cost of that part of the bridge which varies
with the span adopted is--

  C = (n-i)P+nal squared
    = LP/l-P+Lal.

Differentiating and equating to zero, the cost is least when

  dC     LP
  -- = - -- + La = 0,
  dl     l squared

  /*
      P = al squared = G;

that is, when the cost of one pier is equal to the cost erected of the main
girders of one span. Sir Guilford Molesworth puts this in a convenient but
less exact form. Let G be the cost of superstructure of a 100-ft. span
erected, and P the cost of one pier with its protection. Then the economic
span is l = 100[root]P/[root]G.

30. _Limiting Span._--If the weight of the main girders of a bridge, per
ft. run in tons, is--

  w_3 = (w_1+w_2)lr/(K-lr)

according to a formula already given, then w_3 becomes infinite if k-lr =
0, or if

  l = K/r,

[v.04 p.0554] where l is the span in feet and r is the ratio of span to
depth of girder at centre. Taking K for steel girders as 7200 to 9000,

                        Limiting Span in Ft.
          r = 12          l = 600 to 750
            = 10            = 720 to 900
            =  8            = 900 to 1120

[Illustration: FIG. 58.]

[Illustration: FIG. 59.]

[Illustration: FIG. 60.]

In a three-span bridge continuous girders are lighter than discontinuous
ones by about 45% for the dead load and 15% for the live load, if no
allowance is made for ambiguity due to uncertainty as to the level of the
supports. The cantilever and suspended girder types are as economical and
free from uncertainty as to the stresses. In long-span bridges the
cantilever system permits erection by building out, which is economical and
sometimes necessary. It is, however, unstable unless rigidly fixed at the
piers. In the Forth bridge stability is obtained partly by the great excess
of dead over live load, partly by the great width of the river piers. The
majority of bridges not of great span have girders with parallel booms.
This involves the fewest difficulties of workmanship and perhaps permits
the closest approximation of actual to theoretical dimensions of the parts.
In spans over 200 ft. it is economical to have one horizontal boom and one
polygonal (approximately parabolic) boom. The hog-backed girder is a
compromise between the two types, avoiding some difficulties of
construction near the ends of the girder.

[Illustration: FIG. 61.]

[Illustration: FIG. 62.]

Most braced girders may be considered as built up of two simple forms of
truss, the king-post truss (fig. 61, a), or the queen-post truss (fig. 61,
b). These may be used in either the upright or the inverted position. A
_multiple truss_ consists of a number of simple trusses, e.g. Bollman
truss. Some timber bridges consist of queen-post trusses in the upright
position, as shown diagrammatically in fig. 62, where the circles indicate
points at which the flooring girders transmit load to the main girders.
_Compound_ trusses consist of simple trusses used as primary, secondary and
tertiary trusses, the secondary supported on the primary, and the tertiary
on the secondary. Thus, the Fink truss consists of king-post trusses; the
Pratt truss (fig. 63) and the Whipple truss (fig. 64) of queen-post trusses
alternately upright and inverted.

[Illustration: FIG. 63.]

[Illustration: FIG. 64.]

A combination bridge is built partly of timber, partly of steel, the
compression members being generally of timber and the tension members of
steel. On the Pacific coast, where excellent timber is obtainable and steel
works are distant, combination bridges are still largely used (Ottewell,
_Trans. Am. Soc. C.E._ xxvii. p. 467). The combination bridge at Roseburgh,
Oregon, is a cantilever bridge, The shore arms are 147 ft. span, the river
arms 105 ft., and the suspended girder 80 ft., the total distance between
anchor piers being 584 ft. The floor beams, floor and railing are of
timber. The compression members are of timber, except the struts and bottom
chord panels next the river piers, which are of steel. The tension members
are of iron and the pins of steel. The chord blocks and post shoes are of
cast-iron.

[Illustration: FIG. 65.]

33. _Graphic Method of finding the Stresses in Braced Structures._--Fig. 65
shows a common form of bridge truss known as a _Warren girder_, with lines
indicating external forces applied to the joints; half the load carried
between the two lower joints next the piers on either side is directly
carried by the abutments. The sum of the two upward vertical reactions must
clearly be equal to the sum of the loads. The lines in the diagram
represent the directions of a series of forces which must all be in
equilibrium; these lines may, for an object to be explained in the next
paragraph, be conveniently named by the letters in the spaces which they
separate instead of by the method usually employed in geometry. Thus we
shall call the first inclined line on the left hand the line AG, the line
representing the first force on the top left-hand joint AB, the first
horizontal member at the top left hand the line BH, &c; similarly each
point requires at least three letters to denote it; the top first left-hand
joint may be called ABHG, being the point where these four spaces meet. In
this method of lettering, every enclosed space must be designated by a
letter; all external forces must be represented by lines _outside_ the
frame, and each space between any two forces must receive a distinctive
letter; this method of lettering was first proposed by O. Henrici and R. H.
Bow (_Economics of Construction_), and is convenient in applying the theory
of reciprocal figures to the computation of stresses on frames.

34. _Reciprocal Figures._--J. Clerk Maxwell gave (_Phil. Mag. 1864_) the
following definition of reciprocal figures:--"Two plane figures are
reciprocal when they consist of an equal number of lines so that
corresponding lines in the two figures are parallel, and corresponding
lines which converge to a point in one figure form a closed polygon in the
other."

Let a frame (without redundant members), and the external forces which keep
it in equilibrium, be represented by a diagram constituting one of these
two plane figures, then the lines in the other plane figure or the
reciprocal will represent in direction and magnitude the forces between the
joints of the frame, and, consequently, the stress on each member, as will
now be explained.

Reciprocal figures are easily drawn by following definite rules, and afford
therefore a simple method of computing the stresses on members of a frame.

The external forces on a frame or bridge in equilibrium under those forces
may, by a well-known proposition in statics, be represented by a closed
polygon, each side of which is parallel to one force, and represents the
force in magnitude as well as in direction. The sides of the polygon may be
arranged in any order, provided care is taken so to draw them that in
passing round the polygon in one direction this direction may for each side
correspond to the direction of the force which it represents.

[Illustration: FIG. 66.]

This polygon of forces may, by a slight extension of the above definition,
be called the _reciprocal figure_ of the external forces, if the sides are
arranged in the same order as that of the joints on which they act, so that
if the joints and forces be numbered 1, 2, 3, 4, &c., passing round the
outside of the frame in one direction, and returning at last to joint 1,
then in the polygon the side representing the force 2 will be next the side
representing the force 1, and will be followed by the side representing the
force 3, and so forth. [v.04 p.0555] This polygon falls under the
definition of a reciprocal figure given by Clerk Maxwell, if we consider
the frame as a point in equilibrium under the external forces.

Fig. 66 shows a frame supported at the two end joints, and loaded at each
top joint. The loads and the supporting forces are indicated by arrows.
Fig. 67a shows the reciprocal figure or polygon for the external forces on
the assumption that the reactions are slightly inclined. The lines in fig.
67 a, lettered in the usual manner, correspond to the forces indicated by
arrows in fig. 66, and lettered according to Bow's method. When all the
forces are vertical, as will be the case in girders, the polygon of
external forces will be reduced to two straight lines, fig. 67 b,
superimposed and divided so that the length AX represents the load AX, the
length AB the load AB, the length YX the reaction YX, and so forth. The
line XZ consists of a series of lengths, as XA, AB ... DZ, representing the
loads taken in their order. In subsequent diagrams the two reaction lines
will, for the sake of clearness, be drawn as if slightly inclined to the
vertical.

[Illustration: FIG. 67.]

If there are no redundant members in the frame there will be only two
members abutting at the point of support, for these two members will be
sufficient to balance the reaction, whatever its direction may be; we can
therefore draw two triangles, each having as one side the reaction YX, and
having the two other sides parallel to these two members; each of these
triangles will represent a polygon of forces in equilibrium at the point of
support. Of these two triangles, shown in fig. 67 c, select that in which
the letters X and Y are so placed that (naming the apex of the triangle E)
the lines XE and YE are the lines parallel to the two members of the same
name in the frame (fig. 66). Then the triangle YXE is the reciprocal figure
of the three lines YX, XE, EY in the frame, and represents the three forces
in equilibrium at the point YXE of the frame. The direction of YX, being a
thrust upwards, shows the direction in which we must go round the triangle
YXE to find the direction of the two other forces; doing this we find that
the force XE must act down towards the point YXE, and the force EY away
from the same point. Putting arrows on the frame diagram to indicate the
direction of the forces, we see that the member EY must pull and therefore
act as a tie, and that the member XE must push and act as a strut. Passing
to the point XEFA we find two known forces, the load XA acting downwards,
and a push from the strut XE, which, being in compression, must push at
both ends, as indicated by the arrow, fig. 66. The directions and
magnitudes of these two forces are already drawn (fig. 67 a) in a fitting
position to represent part of the polygon of forces at XEFA; beginning with
the upward thrust EX, continuing down XA, and drawing AF parallel to AF in
the frame we complete the polygon by drawing EF parallel to EF in the
frame. The point F is determined by the intersection of the two lines, one
beginning at A, and the other at E. We then have the polygon of forces
EXAF, the reciprocal figure of the lines meeting at that point in the
frame, and representing the forces at the point EXAF; the direction of the
forces on EH and XA being known determines the direction of the forces due
to the elastic reaction of the members AF and EF, showing AF to push as a
strut, while EF is a tie. We have been guided in the selection of the
particular quadrilateral adopted by the rule of arranging the order of the
sides so that the same letters indicate corresponding sides in the diagram
of the frame and its reciprocal. Continuing the construction of the diagram
in the same way, we arrive at fig. 67 d as the complete reciprocal figure
of the frame and forces upon it, and we see that each line in the
reciprocal figure measures the stress on the corresponding member in the
frame, and that the polygon of forces acting at any point, as IJKY, in the
frame is represented by a polygon of the same name in the reciprocal
figure. The direction of the force in each member is easily ascertained by
proceeding in the manner above described. A single known force in a polygon
determines the direction of all the others, as these must all correspond
with arrows pointing the same way round the polygon. Let the arrows be
placed on the frame round each joint, and so as to indicate the direction
of each force on that joint; then when two arrows point to one another on
the same piece, that piece is a tie; when they point from one another the
piece is a strut. It is hardly necessary to say that the forces exerted by
the two ends of any one member must be equal and opposite. This method is
universally applicable where there are no redundant members. The reciprocal
figure for any loaded frame is a complete formula for the stress on every
member of a frame of that particular class with loads on given joints.

[Illustration: FIG. 68]

[Illustration: FIG. 69]

Consider a Warren girder (fig. 68), loaded at the top and bottom joints.
Fig. 69 b is the polygon of external forces, and 69 c is half the
reciprocal figure. The complete reciprocal figure is shown in fig. 69 a.

The method of sections already described is often more convenient than the
method of reciprocal figures, and the method of influence lines is also
often the readiest way of dealing with braced girders.

35. _Chain Loaded uniformly along a Horizontal Line._--If the lengths of
the links be assumed indefinitely short, the chain under given simple
distributions of load will take the form of comparatively simple
mathematical curves known as catenaries. The true catenary is that assumed
by a chain of uniform weight per unit of length, but the form generally
adopted for suspension bridges is that assumed by a chain under a weight
uniformly distributed relatively to a horizontal line. This curve is a
parabola.

Remembering that in this case the centre bending moment [Sigma]wl will be
equal to wL squared/8, we see that the horizontal tension H at the vertex for a
span L (the points of support being at equal heights) is given by the
expression

  1 . . . H = wL squared/8y,

or, calling x the distance from the vertex to the point of support,

  H = wx squared/2y,

The value of H is equal to the maximum tension on the bottom flange, or
compression on the top flange, of a girder of equal span, equally and
similarly loaded, and having a depth equal to the dip of the suspension
bridge.

[Illustration: FIG. 70.]

Consider any other point F of the curve, fig. 70, at a distance x [v.04
p.0556] from the vertex, the horizontal component of the resultant (tangent
to the curve) will be unaltered; the vertical component V will be simply
the sum of the loads between O and F, or wx. In the triangle FDC, let FD be
tangent to the curve, FC vertical, and DC horizontal; these three sides
will necessarily be proportional respectively to the resultant tension
along the chain at F, the vertical force V passing through the point D, and
the horizontal tension at O; hence

  H : V = DC : FC = wx squared/2y : wx = x/2 : y,

hence DC is the half of OC, proving the curve to be a parabola.

The value of R, the tension at any point at a distance x from the vertex,
is obtained from the equation

  R squared = H squared+V squared = w squaredx^4/4y squared+w squaredx squared,

or,

  2 . . . R = wx[root](1+x squared/4y squared).

Let i be the angle between the tangent at any point having the co-ordinates
x and y measured from the vertex, then

  3 . . . tan i = 2y/x.

Let the length of half the parabolic chain be called s, then

  4 . . . s = x+2y squared/3x.

The following is the approximate expression for the relation between a
change [Delta]s in the length of the half chain and the corresponding
change [Delta]y in the dip:--

  s+[Delta]s = x+(2/3x) {y squared+2y[Delta]y+([Delta]y) squared} =
      x+2y squared/3x+4y[Delta]y/3x+2[Delta]y squared/3x,

or, neglecting the last term,

  5 . . . [Delta]s = 4y[Delta]y/3x,

and

  6 . . . [Delta]y = 3x[Delta]s/4y.

From these equations the deflection produced by any given stress on the
chains or by a change of temperature can be calculated.

[Illustration: FIG. 71.]

36. _Deflection of Girders._-- Let fig. 71 represent a beam bent by
external loads. Let the origin O be taken at the lowest point of the bent
beam. Then the deviation y = DE of the neutral axis of the bent beam at any
point D from the axis OX is given by the relation

  d squaredy   M
  --- = -- ,
  dx squared   EI

where M is the bending moment and I the amount of inertia of the beam at D,
and E is the coefficient of elasticity. It is usually accurate enough in
deflection calculations to take for I the moment of inertia at the centre
of the beam and to consider it constant for the length of the beam. Then

  dy    1
  -- = ---[Integral]Mdx
  dx   EI

       1
  y = ---[Integral][Integral]Mdx squared.
      EI

The integration can be performed when M is expressed in terms of x. Thus
for a beam supported at the ends and loaded with w per inch length M =
w(a squared-x squared), where a is the half span. Then the deflection at the centre is
the value of y for x = a, and is

             5  wa^4
  [delta] = --- ----.
             24  EI

The radius of curvature of the beam at D is given by the relation

  R = EI/M.

[Illustration: FIG. 72.]

37. _Graphic Method of finding Deflection._--Divide the span L into any
convenient number n of equal parts of length l, so that nl = L; compute the
radii of curvature R_1, R_2, R_3 for the several sections. Let measurements
along the beam be represented according to any convenient scale, so that
calling L_1 and l_1 the lengths to be drawn on paper, we have L = aL_1; now
let r_1, r_2, r_3 be a series of radii such that r_1 = R_1/ab, r_2 =
R_2/ab, &c., where b is any convenient constant chosen of such magnitude as
will allow arcs with the radii, r_1, r_2, &c., to be drawn with the means
at the draughtsman's disposal. Draw a curve as shown in fig. 72 with arcs
of the length l_1, l_2, l_3, &c., and with the radii r_1, r_2, &c. (note,
for a length 1/2l_1 at each end the radius will be infinite, and the curve
must end with a straight line tangent to the last arc), then let v be the
measured deflection of this curve from the straight line, and V the actual
deflection of the bridge; we have V = av/b, approximately. This method
distorts the curve, so that vertical ordinates of the curve are drawn to a
scale b times greater than that of the horizontal ordinates. Thus if the
horizontal scale be one-tenth of an inch to the foot, a = 120, and a beam
100 ft. in length would be drawn equal to 10 in.; then if the true radius
at the centre were 10,000 ft., this radius, if the curve were undistorted,
would be on paper 1000 in., but making b = 50 we can draw the curve with a
radius of 20 in. The vertical distortion of the curve must not be so great
that there is a very sensible difference between the length of the arc and
its chord. This can be regulated by altering the value of b. In fig. 72
distortion is carried too far; this figure is merely used as an
illustration.

38. _Camber._--In order that a girder may become straight under its working
load it should be constructed with a camber or upward convexity equal to
the calculated deflection. Owing to the yielding of joints when a beam is
first loaded a smaller modulus of elasticity should be taken than for a
solid bar. For riveted girders E is about 17,500,000 lb per sq. in. for
first loading. W.J.M. Rankine gives the approximate rule

  Working deflection = [delta] = l squared/10,000h,

where l is the span and h the depth of the beam, the stresses being those
usual in bridgework, due to the total dead and live load.

(W. C. U.)

[1] For the ancient bridges in Rome see further ROME: _Archaeology_, and
such works as R. Lanciani, _Ruins and Excavations of Ancient Rome_ (Eng.
trans., 1897), pp. 16 foll.

BRIDGET, SAINT, more properly BRIGID (c. 452-523), one of the patron saints
of Ireland, was born at Faughart in county Louth, her father being a prince
of Ulster. Refusing to marry, she chose a life of seclusion, making her
cell, the first in Ireland, under a large oak tree, whence the place was
called Kil-dara, "the church of the oak." The city of Kildare is supposed
to derive its name from St Brigid's cell. The year of her death is
generally placed in 523. She was buried at Kildare, but her remains were
afterwards translated to Downpatrick, where they were laid beside the
bodies of St Patrick and St Columba. Her feast is celebrated on the 1st of
February. A large collection of miraculous stories clustered round her
name, and her reputation was not confined to Ireland, for, under the name
of St Bride, she became a favourite saint in England, and numerous churches
were dedicated to her in Scotland.

See the five lives given in the Bollandist _Acta Sanctorum_, Feb. 1, i. 99,
119, 950. Cf. Whitley-Stokes, _Three Middle-Irish Homilies on the Lives of
Saint Patrick, Brigit and Columba_ (Calcutta, 1874); Colgan, _Acta SS.
Hiberniae_; D. O'Hanlon, _Lives of Irish Saints_, vol. ii.; Knowles, _Life
of St Brigid_ (1907); further bibliography in Ulysse Chevalier, _Repertoire
des sources hist. Bio.-Bibl._ (2nd ed., Paris, 1905), s.v.

BRIDGET, BRIGITTA, BIRGITTA, OF SWEDEN, SAINT (c. 1302-1373), the most
celebrated saint of the northern kingdoms, was the daughter of Birger
Persson, governor and _lagman_ (provincial judge) of Uppland, and one of
the richest landowners of the country. In 1316 she was married to Ulf
Gudmarson, lord of Nericia, to whom she bore eight children, one of whom
was [v.04 p.0557] afterwards honoured as St Catherine of Sweden. Bridget's
saintly and charitable life soon made her known far and wide; she gained,
too, great religious influence over her husband, with whom (1341-1343) she
went on pilgrimage to St James of Compostella. In 1344, shortly after their
return, Ulf died in the Cistercian monastery of Alvastra in East Gothland,
and Bridget now devoted herself wholly to religion. As a child she had
already believed herself to have visions; these now became more frequent,
and her records of these "revelations," which were translated into Latin by
Matthias, canon of Linkoeping, and by her confessor, Peter, prior of
Alvastra, obtained a great vogue during the middle ages. It was about this
time that she founded the order of St Saviour, or Bridgittines (_q.v._), of
which the principal house, at Vadstena, was richly endowed by King Magnus
II. and his queen. About 1350 she went to Rome, partly to obtain from the
pope the authorization of the new order, partly in pursuance of her
self-imposed mission to elevate the moral tone of the age. It was not till
1370 that Pope Urban V. confirmed the rule of her order; but meanwhile
Bridget had made herself universally beloved in Rome by her kindness and
good works. Save for occasional pilgrimages, including one to Jerusalem in
1373, she remained in Rome till her death on the 23rd of July 1373. She was
canonized in 1391 by Pope Boniface IX., and her feast is celebrated on the
9th of October.

BIBLIOGRAPHY.--Cf. the Bollandist _Acta Sanctorum_, Oct. 8, iv. 368-560;
the _Vita Sanctae Brigittae_, edited by C. Annerstedt in _Scriptores rerum
Suedicarum medii aevi_, iii. 185-244 (Upsala, 1871). The best modern work
on the subject is by the comtesse Catherine de Flavigny, entitled _Sainte
Brigitte de Suede, sa vie, ses revelations et son oeuvre_ (Paris, 1892),
which contains an exhaustive bibliography. The Revelations are contained in
the critical edition of St Bridget's works published by the Swedish
Historical Society and edited by G.E. Klemming (Stockholm, 1857-1884, II
vols.). For full bibliography (to 1904) see Ulysse Chevalier, _Repertoire
des sources hist. Bio.-Bibl._, _s.v._ "Brigitte."

BRIDGETON, a city, port of entry, and the county-seat of Cumberland county,
New Jersey, U.S.A., in the south part of the state, on Cohansey creek, 38
m. S. of Philadelphia. Pop. (1890) 11,424; (1900) 13,913, of whom 653 were
foreign-born and 701 were negroes; (1905) 13,624; (1910) 14,209. It is
served by the West Jersey & Sea Shore and the Central of New Jersey
railways, by electric railways connecting with adjacent towns, and by
Delaware river steamboats on Cohansey creek, which is navigable to this
point. It is an attractive residential city, has a park of 650 acres and a
fine public library, and is the seat of West Jersey academy and of Ivy
Hall, a school for girls. It is an important market town and distributing
centre for a rich agricultural region; among its manufactures are glass
(the product, chiefly glass bottles, being valued in 1905 at
$1,252,795--42.3% of the value of all the city's factory products--and
Bridgeton ranking eighth among the cities of the United States in this
industry), machinery, clothing, and canned fruits and vegetables; it also
has dyeing and finishing works. Though Bridgeton is a port of entry, its
foreign commerce is relatively unimportant. The first settlement in what is
now Bridgeton was made toward the close of the 18th century. A pioneer
iron-works was established here in 1814. The city of Bridgeton, formed by
the union of the township of Bridgeton and the township of Cohansey
(incorporated in 1845 and 1848 respectively), was chartered in 1864.

BRIDGETT, THOMAS EDWARD (1829-1899), Roman Catholic priest and historical
writer, was born at Derby on the 20th of January 1829. He was brought up a
Baptist, but in his sixteenth year joined the Church of England. In 1847 he
entered St John's College, Cambridge, with the intention of taking orders.
Being unable to subscribe to the Thirty-Nine Articles he could not take his
degree, and in 1850 became a Roman Catholic, soon afterwards joining the
Congregation of the Redemptorists. He went through his novitiate at St
Trond in Belgium, and after a course of five years of theological study at
Wittem, in Holland, was ordained priest. He returned to England in 1856,
and for over forty years led an active life as a missioner in England and
Ireland, preaching in over 80 missions and 140 retreats to the clergy and
to nuns. His stay in Limerick was particularly successful, and he founded a
religious confraternity of laymen which numbered 5000 members. Despite his
arduous life as a priest, Bridgett found time to produce literary works of
value, chiefly dealing with the history of the Reformation in England;
among these are _The Life of Blessed John Fisher, Bishop of Rochester_
(1888); _The Life and Writings of Sir Thomas More_ (1890); _History of the
Eucharist in Great Britain_ (2 vols., 1881); _Our Lady's Dowry_ (1875, 3rd
ed. 1890). He died at Clapham on the 17th of February 1899.

For a complete list of Bridgett's works see _The Life of Father Bridgett_,
by C. Ryder (London, 1906).

BRIDGEWATER, FRANCIS EGERTON, 3RD DUKE OF (1736-1803), the originator of
British inland navigation, younger son of the 1st duke, was born on the
21st of May 1736. Scroop, 1st duke of Bridgewater (1681-1745), was the son
of the 3rd earl of Bridgewater, and was created a duke in 1720; he was the
great-grandson of John Egerton, 1st earl of Bridgewater (d. 1649; cr.
1617), whose name is associated with the production of Milton's _Comus_;
and the latter was the son of Sir Thomas Egerton (1540-1617), Queen
Elizabeth's lord keeper and James I.'s lord chancellor, who was created
baron of Ellesmere in 1603, and in 1616 Viscount Brackley (_q.v._).

Francis Egerton succeeded to the dukedom at the age of twelve on the death
of his brother, the 2nd duke. As a child he was sickly and of such
unpromising intellectual capacity that at one time the idea of cutting the
entail was seriously entertained. Shortly after attaining his majority he
became engaged to the beautiful duchess of Hamilton, but her refusal to
give up the acquaintance of her sister, Lady Coventry, led to the breaking
off of the match. Thereupon the duke broke up his London establishment, and
retiring to his estate at Worsley, devoted himself to the making of canals.
The navigable canal from Worsley to Manchester which he projected for the
transport of the coal obtained on his estates was (with the exception of
the Sankey canal) the first great undertaking of the kind executed in Great
Britain in modern times. The construction of this remarkable work, with its
famous aqueduct across the Irwell, was carried out by James Brindley, the
celebrated engineer. The completion of this canal led the duke to undertake
a still more ambitious work. In 1762 he obtained parliamentary powers to
provide an improved waterway between Liverpool and Manchester by means of a
canal. The difficulties encountered in the execution of the latter work
were still more formidable than those of the Worsley canal, involving, as
they did, the carrying of the canal over Sale Moor Moss. But the genius of
Brindley, his engineer, proved superior to all obstacles, and though at one
period of the undertaking the financial resources of the duke were almost
exhausted, the work was carried to a triumphant conclusion. The untiring
perseverance displayed by the duke in surmounting the various difficulties
that retarded the accomplishment of his projects, together with the
pecuniary restrictions he imposed on himself in order to supply the
necessary capital (at one time he reduced his personal expenses to L400 a
year), affords an instructive example of that energy and self-denial on
which the success of great undertakings so much depends. Both these canals
were completed when the duke was only thirty-six years of age, and the
remainder of his life was spent in extending them and in improving his
estates; and during the latter years of his life he derived a princely
income from the success of his enterprise. Though a steady supporter of
Pitt's administration, he never took any prominent part in politics.

He died unmarried on the 8th of March 1803, when the ducal title became
extinct, but the earldom of Bridgewater passed to a cousin, John William
Egerton, who became 7th earl. By his will he devised his canals and estates
on trust, under which his nephew, the marquess of Stafford (afterwards
first duke of Sutherland), became the first beneficiary, and next his son
Francis Leveson Gower (afterwards first earl of Ellesmere) and his issue.
In order that the trust should last as long as possible, an extraordinary
use was made of the legal rule that property may be [v.04 p.0558] settled
for the duration of lives in being and twenty-one years after, by choosing
a great number of persons connected with the duke and their living issue
and adding to them the peers who had taken their seats in the House of
Lords on or before the duke's decease. Though the last of the peers died in
1857, one of the commoners survived till the 19th of October 1883, and
consequently the trust did not expire till the 19th of October 1903, when
the whole property passed under the undivided control of the earl of
Ellesmere. The canals, however, had in 1872 been transferred to the
Bridgewater Navigation Company, by whom they were sold in 1887 to the
Manchester Ship Canal Company.

BRIDGEWATER, FRANCIS HENRY EGERTON, 8TH EARL OF (1756-1829), was educated
at Eton and Christ Church, Oxford, and became fellow of All Souls in 1780,
and F.R.S. in 1781. He held the rectories of Middle and Whitchurch in
Shropshire, but the duties were performed by a proxy. He succeeded his
brother (see above) in the earldom in 1823, and spent the latter part of
his life in Paris. He was a fair scholar, and a zealous naturalist and
antiquarian. When he died in February 1829 the earldom became extinct. He
bequeathed to the British Museum the valuable Egerton MSS. dealing with the
literature of France and Italy, and also L12,000. He also left L8000 at the
disposal of the president of the Royal Society, to be paid to the author or
authors who might be selected to write and publish 1000 copies of a
treatise "On the Power, Wisdom and Goodness of God, as manifested in the
Creation." Mr Davies Gilbert, who then filled the office, selected eight
persons, each to undertake a branch of this subject, and each to receive
L1000 as his reward, together with any benefit that might accrue from the
sale of his work, according to the will of the testator.

The Bridgewater treatises were published as follows:--1. _The Adaptation of
External Nature to the Moral and Intellectual Condition of Man_, by Thomas
Chalmers, D.D. 2. _The Adaptation of External Nature to the Physical
Condition of Man_, by John Kidd, M.D. 3. _Astronomy and General Physics
considered with reference to Natural Theology_, by William Whewell, D.D. 4.
_The Hand, its Mechanism and Vital Endowments as evincing Design_, by Sir
Charles Bell. 5. _Animal and Vegetable Physiology considered with reference
to Natural Theology_, by Peter Mark Roget. 6. _Geology and Mineralogy
considered with reference to Natural Theology_, by William Buckland, D.D.
7. _The Habits and Instincts of Animals with reference to Natural
Theology_, by William Kirby. 8. _Chemistry, Meteorology, and the Function
of Digestion, considered with reference to Natural Theology_, by William
Prout, M.D. The works are of unequal merit; several of them took a high
rank in apologetic literature. They first appeared during the years 1833 to
1840, and afterwards in Bohn's Scientific Library.

BRIDGITTINES, an order of Augustinian canonesses founded by St Bridget of
Sweden (_q.v._) c. 1350, and approved by Urban V. in 1370. It was a "double
order," each convent having attached to it a small community of canons to
act as chaplains, but under the government of the abbess. The order spread
widely in Sweden and Norway, and played a remarkable part in promoting
culture and literature in Scandinavia; to this is to be attributed the fact
that the head house at Vastein, by Lake Vetter, was not suppressed till
1595. There were houses also in other lands, so that the total number
amounted to 80. In England, the famous Bridgittine convent of Syon at
Isleworth, Middlesex, was founded and royally endowed by Henry V. in 1415,
and became one of the richest and most fashionable and influential
nunneries in the country. It was among the few religious houses restored in
Mary's reign, when nearly twenty of the old community were re-established
at Syon. On Elizabeth's accession they migrated to the Low Countries, and
thence, after many vicissitudes, to Rouen, and finally in 1594 to Lisbon.
Here they remained, always recruiting their numbers from England, till
1861, when they returned to England. Syon House is now established at
Chudleigh in Devon, the only English community that can boast an unbroken
conventual existence since pre-Reformation times. Some six other
Bridgittine convents exist on the Continent, but the order is now composed
only of women.

See Helyot, _Histoire des ordres religieux_ (1715), iv. c. 4; Max
Heimbucher, _Orden u. Kongregationen_ (1907), ii. Sec. 83; Herzog-Hauck,
_Realencyklopaedie_ (ed. 3), art. "Birgitta"; A. Hamilton in _Dublin
Review_, 1888, "The Nuns of Syon."

(E. C. B.)

BRIDGMAN, FREDERICK ARTHUR (1847- ), American artist, was born at Tuskegee,
Alabama, on the 10th of November 1847. He began as a draughtsman in New
York for the American Bank Note Company in 1864-1865, and studied art in
the same years at the Brooklyn Art School and at the National Academy of
Design; but he went to Paris in 1866 and became a pupil of J.L. Gerome.
Paris then became his headquarters. A trip to Egypt in 1873-1874 resulted
in pictures of the East that attracted immediate attention, and his large
and important composition, "The Funeral Procession of a Mummy on the Nile,"
in the Paris Salon (1877), bought by James Gordon Bennett, brought him the
cross of the Legion of Honour. Other paintings by him were "An American
Circus in Normandy," "Procession of the Bull Apis" (now in the Corcoran Art
Gallery, Washington), and a "Rumanian Lady" (in the Temple collection,
Philadelphia).

BRIDGMAN, LAURA DEWEY (1829-1889), American blind deaf-mute, was born on
the 21st of December 1829 at Hanover, New Hampshire, U.S.A., being the
third daughter of Daniel Bridgman (d. 1868), a substantial Baptist farmer,
and his wife Harmony, daughter of Cushman Downer, and grand-daughter of
Joseph Downer, one of the five first settlers (1761) of Thetford, Vermont.
Laura was a delicate infant, puny and rickety, and was subject to fits up
to twenty months old, but otherwise seemed to have normal senses; at two
years, however, she had a very bad attack of scarlet fever, which destroyed
sight and hearing, blunted the sense of smell, and left her system a wreck.
Though she gradually recovered health she remained a blind deaf-mute, but
was kindly treated and was in particular made a sort of playmate by an
eccentric bachelor friend of the Bridgmans, Mr Asa Tenney, who as soon as
she could walk used to take her for rambles a-field. In 1837 Mr James
Barrett, of Dartmouth College, saw her and mentioned her case to Dr Mussey,
the head of the medical department, who wrote an account which attracted
the attention of Dr S.G. Howe (_q.v._), the head of the Perkins Institution
for the Blind at Boston. He determined to try to get the child into the
Institution and to attempt to educate her; her parents assented, and in
October 1837 Laura entered the school. Though the loss of her eye-balls
occasioned some deformity, she was otherwise a comely child and of a
sensitive and affectionate nature; she had become familiar with the world
about her, and was imitative in so far as she could follow the actions of
others; but she was limited in her communication with others to the
narrower uses of touch--patting her head meant approval, rubbing her hand
disapproval, pushing one way meant to go, drawing another to come. Her
mother, preoccupied with house-work, had already ceased to be able to
control her, and her father's authority was due to fear of superior force,
not to reason. Dr Howe at once set himself to teach her the alphabet by
touch. It is impossible, for reasons of space, to describe his efforts in
detail. He taught words before the individual letters, and his first
experiment consisting in pasting upon several common articles such as keys,
spoons, knives, &c., little paper labels with the names of the articles
printed in raised letters, which he got her to feel and differentiate; then
he gave her the same labels by themselves, which she learnt to associate
with the articles they referred to, until, with the spoon or knife alone
before her she could find the right label for each from a mixed heap. The
next stage was to give her the component letters and teach her to combine
them in the words she knew, and gradually in this way she learnt all the
alphabet and the ten digits, &c. The whole process depended, of course, on
her having a human intelligence, which only required stimulation, and her
own interest in learning became keener as she progressed. On the 24th of
July 1839 she first wrote her own name legibly. Dr Howe devoted himself
with the utmost patience and assiduity to her education and was rewarded by
increasing success. On the 20th of June 1840 she had her first arithmetic
lesson, by the aid of a metallic case perforated with square holes, square
types being used; and in nineteen days she could add a column of figures
amounting to thirty. She was in good health and happy, and was treated by
Dr Howe as his daughter. Her case already began to interest the public, and
others were brought to Dr Howe [v.04 p.0559] for treatment. In 1841 Laura
began to keep a journal, in which she recorded her own day's work and
thoughts. In January 1842 Charles Dickens visited the Institution, and
afterwards wrote enthusiastically in _American Notes_ of Dr Howe's success
with Laura. In 1843 funds were obtained for devoting a special teacher to
her, and first Miss Swift, then Miss Wight, and then Miss Paddock, were
appointed; Laura by this time was learning geography and elementary
astronomy. By degrees she was given religious instruction, but Dr Howe was
intent upon not inculcating dogma before she had grasped the essential
moral truths of Christianity and the story of the Bible. She grew up a gay,
cheerful girl, loving, optimistic, but with a nervous system inclining to
irritability, and requiring careful education in self-control. In 1860 her
eldest sister Mary's death helped to bring on a religious crisis, and
through the influence of some of her family she was received into the
Baptist church; she became for some years after this more self-conscious
and rather pietistic. In 1867 she began writing compositions which she
called poems; the best-known is called "Holy Home." In 1872, Dr Howe having
been enabled to build some separate cottages (each under a matron) for the
blind girls, Laura was moved from the larger house of the Institution into
one of them, and there she continued her quiet life. The death of Dr Howe
in 1876 was a great grief to her; but before he died he had made
arrangements by which she would be financially provided for in her home at
the Institution for the rest of her life. In 1887 her jubilee was
celebrated there, but in 1889 she was taken ill, and she died on the 24th
of May. She was buried at Hanover. Her name has become familiar everywhere
as an example of the education of a blind deaf-mute, leading to even
greater results in Helen Keller.

See _Laura Bridgman_, by Maud Howe and Florence Howe Hall (1903), which
contains a bibliography; and _Life and Education of Laura Dewey Bridgman_
(1878), by Mary S. Lamson.

(H. CH.)

BRIDGNORTH, a market town and municipal borough in the Ludlow parliamentary
division of Shropshire, England, 150 m. N.W. by W. from London by the Great
Western railway, on the Worcester-Shrewsbury line. Pop. (1901) 6052. The
river Severn separates the upper town on the right bank from the lower on
the left. A steep line of rail connects them. The upper town is built on
the acclivities and summit of a rock which rises abruptly from the river to
the height of 180 ft., and gives the town a very picturesque appearance.
The railway passes under by a long tunnel. On the summit is the tower of
the old castle, leaning about 17 deg. from the perpendicular. There are also
two parish churches. That of St Leonard, formerly collegiate, was
practically rebuilt in 1862. This parish was held by Richard Baxter, the
famous divine, in 1640. St Mary's church is in classic style of the late
18th century. The picturesque half-timbered style of domestic building is
frequently seen in the streets. In this style are the town hall (1652), and
a house dated 1580, in which was born in 1729 Thomas Percy, bishop of
Dromore, the editor of the _Reliques of Ancient English Poetry_. The
grammar school, founded in 1503, occupies an Elizabethan building; there
are also a college of divinity, a blue-coat school, and a literary
institute with library and school of art. There are large charities. Near
the town is a curious ancient hermitage cave, in the sandstone. At
Quatford, 1 m. south-east, the site of a castle dating from 1085 may be
traced. This dominated the ancient Forest of Morf. Here Robert de Belesme
originally founded the college which was afterwards moved to Bridgnorth.
Bridgnorth manufactures carpets; brewing is carried on, and there is trade
in agricultural produce. The town is governed by a mayor, 4 aldermen and 12
councillors. Area, 3018 acres.

The early history of Bridgnorth is connected with AEthelfleda, lady of the
Mercians, who raised a mound there in 912 as part of her offensive policy
against the Danes of the five boroughs. After the Conquest William I.
granted the manor of Bridgnorth to Earl Roger of Shrewsbury, whose son
Robert de Belesme transferred his castle and borough from Quatford to
Bridgnorth, but on Robert's attainder in 1102 the town became a royal
borough. It is probable that Henry I. granted the burgesses certain
privileges, for Henry II. confirmed to them all the franchises and customs
which they had in the time of Henry I. King John in 1215 granted them
freedom from toll throughout England except the city of London, and in 1227
Henry III. conferred several new rights and liberties, among which were a
gild merchant with a hanse. These early charters were confirmed by several
succeeding kings, Henry VI. granting in addition assize of bread and ale
and other privileges. Bridgnorth was incorporated by James I. in 1546. The
burgesses returned two members to parliament in 1295, and continued to do
so until 1867, when they were assigned only one member. The town was
disfranchised in 1885. A yearly fair on the feast of the Translation of St
Leonard and three following days was granted to the burgesses in 1359, and
in 1630 Charles I. granted them licence to hold another fair on the
Thursday before the first week in Lent and two following days.

BRIDGWATER, a market town, port and municipal borough in the Bridgwater
parliamentary division of Somerset, England, on the river Parret, 10 m.
from its mouth, and 1513/4 m. by the Great Western railway W. by S. of
London. Pop. (1901) 15,209. It is pleasantly situated in a level and
well-wooded country, having on the east the Mendip range and on the west
the Quantock hills. The town lies along both sides of the river, here
crossed by a handsome iron bridge. Among several places of worship the
chief is St Mary Magdalene's church; this has a north porch and windows
dating from the 14th century, besides a lofty and slender spire; but it has
been much altered by restoration. It possesses a fine painted reredos. A
house in Blake Street, largely restored, was the birthplace of Admiral
Blake in 1598. Near the town are the three fine old churches of Weston
Zoyland, Chedzoy and Middlezoy, containing some good brasses and carved
woodwork. The battlefield of Sedgemoor, where the Monmouth rebellion was
finally crushed in 1685, is within 3 m.; while not far off is Charlinch,
the home of the Agapemonites (_q.v._). Bridgwater has a considerable
coasting trade, importing grain, coal, wine, hemp, tallow and timber, and
exporting Bath brick, farm produce, earthenware, cement and plaster of
Paris. The river is navigable by vessels of 700 tons, though liable, when
spring-tides are flowing, to a bore which rises, in rough weather, to a
height of 9 ft. Bath brick, manufactured only here, and made of the mingled
sand and clay deposited by every tide, is the staple article of commerce;
iron-founding is also carried on. The town is governed by a mayor, 6
aldermen and 18 councillors. Area, 926 acres.

A settlement probably grew up in Saxon times at Bridgwater (_Briges_,
_Briggewalteri_, _Brigewauter_), owing its origin as a trade centre to its
position at the mouth of the chief river in Somerset. It became a mesne
borough by the charter granted by John in 1201, which provided that the
town should be a free borough, the burgesses to be free and quit of all
tolls, and made William de Briwere overlord. Other charters were granted by
Henry III. in 1227 (confirmed in 1318, 1370, 1380), which gave Bridgwater a
gild merchant. It was incorporated by charter of Edward IV. (1468),
confirmed in 1554, 1586, 1629 and 1684. Parliamentary representation began
in 1295 and continued until the Reform Act of 1870. A Saturday market and a
fair on the 24th of June were granted by the charter of 1201. Another fair
at the beginning of Lent was added in 1468, and a second market on
Thursday, and fairs at Midsummer and on the 21st of September were added in
1554. Charles II. granted another fair on the 29th of December. The
medieval importance of these markets and fairs for the sale of wool and
wine and later of cloth has gone. The shipping trade of the port revived
after the construction of the new dock in 1841, and corn and timber have
been imported for centuries.

See S. G. Jarman, "History of Bridgwater," _Historical MSS. Commission_,
Report 9, Appendix; _Victoria County History: Somerset_, vol. ii.

BRIDLINGTON, a market town, municipal borough and seaside resort in the
Buckrose parliamentary division of the East Riding of Yorkshire, England,
31 m. N.N.E. from Hull by a branch of the North Eastern railway. Pop.
(1891) 8919; (1901) 12,482. It is divided into two parts, the ancient
market town lying about 1 m. from the coast, while the modern houses of
Bridlington Quay, the watering-place, fringe the shore of Bridlington Bay.
Southward the coast becomes low, but northward it is steep and very fine,
where the great spur of Flamborough Head (_q.v._) projects eastward. In the
old town of Bridlington the church of St Mary and St Nicholas consists of
the fine Decorated and Perpendicular nave, with Early English portions, of
the priory church of an Augustinian foundation of the time of Henry I.
There remains also the Perpendicular gateway, serving as the town-hall. The
founder of the priory was Walter de Gaunt, about 1114, and the institution
[v.04 p.0560] flourished until 1537, when the last prior was executed for
taking part in the Pilgrimage of Grace. A Congregational society was
founded in 1662, and its old church, dating from 1702, stood until 1906. At
Bridlington Quay there is excellent sea-bathing, and the parade and
ornamental gardens provide pleasant promenades. Extensive works have been
carried out along the sea front. There is a chalybeate spring. The harbour
is enclosed by two stone piers, and there is good anchorage in the bay. The
municipal borough is under a mayor, 6 aldermen and 18 councillors, and has
an area of 2751 acres.

The mention of four burgesses at Bridlington (Brellington, Burlington) in
the Domesday survey shows it to have been a borough before the Conquest.
With the rest of the north of England, Bridlington suffered from the
ravages of the Normans, and decreased in value from L32 in the reign of
Edward the Confessor, when it formed part of the possessions of Earl
Morcar, to 8s. at the time of the Domesday survey. By that time it was in
the hands of the king by the forfeiture of Earl Morcar. It was granted by
William II. to Gilbert de Gaunt, whose son and heir Walter founded the
priory and endowed it with the manor of Bridlington and other lands. From
this date the importance of the town steadily increased. Henry I. and
several succeeding kings confirmed Walter de Gaunt's gift, Stephen granting
in addition the right to have a port. In 1546 Henry IV. granted the prior
and convent exemption from fifteenths, tenths and subsidies, in return for
prayer for himself and his queen in every mass sung at the high altar.
After the Dissolution the manor remained with the crown until 1624, when
Charles I. granted it to Sir John Ramsey, whose brother and heir, Sir
George Ramsey, sold it in 1633 to thirteen inhabitants of the town on
behalf of all the tenants of the manor. The thirteen lords were assisted by
twelve other inhabitants chosen by the freeholders, and when the number of
lords was reduced to six, seven others were chosen from the assistants. A
chief lord was chosen every year. This system still holds good. It is
evident from the fact of thirteen inhabitants being allowed to hold the
manor that the town had some kind of incorporation in the 17th century,
although its incorporation charter was not granted until 1899, when it was
created a municipal borough. In 1200 King John granted the prior of
Bridlington a weekly market on Saturday and an annual fair on the vigil,
feast and morrow of the Assumption of the Virgin Mary. Henry VI. in 1446
granted the prior three new fairs yearly on the vigil, day and morrow of
the Nativity of the Virgin Mary, the Deposition of St John, late prior of
Bridlington, and the Translation of the same St John. All fairs and markets
were sold with the manor to the inhabitants of the town.

See J. Thompson, _Historical Sketches of Bridlington_ (1821); _Victoria
County History: Yorkshire_.

BRIDPORT, ALEXANDER HOOD, VISCOUNT (1727-1814), British admiral, was the
younger brother of Samuel, Lord Hood, and cousin of Sir Samuel and Captain
Alexander Hood. Entering the navy in January 1741, he was appointed
lieutenant of the "Bridgewater" six years later, and in that rank served
for ten years in various ships. He was then posted to the "Prince," the
flag-ship of Rear-Admiral Saunders (under whom Hood had served as a
lieutenant) and in this command served in the Mediterranean for some time.
Returning home, he was appointed to the "Minerva" frigate, in which he was
present at Hawke's great victory in Quiberon Bay (20th November 1759). In
1761 the "Minerva" recaptured, after a long struggle, the "Warwick" of
equal force, and later in the same year Captain Alexander Hood went in the
"Africa" to the Mediterranean, where he served until the conclusion of
peace. From this time forward he was in continuous employment afloat and
ashore, and in the "Robust" was present at the battle of Ushant in 1778.
Hood was involved in the court-martial on Admiral (afterwards Viscount)
Keppel which followed this action, and although adverse popular feeling was
aroused by the course which he took in Keppel's defence, his conduct does
not seem to have injured his professional career. Two years later he was
made rear-admiral of the white, and succeeded Kempenfeldt as one of Howe's
flag-officers, and in the "Queen" (90) he was present at the relief of
Gibraltar in 1782. For a time he sat in the House of Commons. Promoted
vice-admiral in 1787, he became K.B. in the following year, and on the
occasion of the Spanish armament in 1790 flew his flag again for a short
time. On the outbreak of the war with France in 1793 Sir Alexander Hood
once more went to sea, this time as Howe's second in command, and he had
his share in the operations which culminated in the "Glorius First of
June," and for his services was made Baron Bridport of Cricket St Thomas in
Somerset in the Irish peerage. Henceforth Bridport was practically in
independent command. In 1795 he fought the much-criticized partial action
of the 23rd of June off Belle-Ile, which, however unfavourably it was
regarded in some quarters, was counted as a great victory by the public.
Bridport's peerage was made English, and he became vice-admiral of England.
In 1796-1797 he practically directed the war from London, rarely hoisting
his flag afloat save at such critical times as that of the Irish expedition
in 1797. In the following year he was about to put to sea when the Spithead
fleet mutinied. He succeeded at first in pacifying the crew of his
flag-ship, who had no personal grudge against their admiral, but a few days
later the mutiny broke out afresh, and this time was uncontrollable. For a
whole week the mutineers were supreme, and it was only by the greatest
exertions of the old Lord Howe that order was then restored and the men
returned to duty. After the mutiny had been suppressed, Bridport took the
fleet to sea as commander-in-chief in name as well as in fact, and from
1798 to 1800 personally directed the blockade of Brest, which grew stricter
and stricter as time went on. In 1800 he was relieved by St Vincent, and
retired from active duty after fifty-nine years' service. In reward for his
fine record his peerage was made a viscounty. He spent the remaining years
of his life in retirement. He died on the 2nd of May 1814. The viscounty in
the English peerage died with him; the Irish barony passed to the younger
branch of his brother's family, for whom the viscounty was recreated in
1868.

See Charnock, _Biographia Navalis_, vi. 153; _Naval Chronicle_, i. 265;
Ralfe, _Nav. Biog._ i. 202.

BRIDPORT, a market town and municipal borough in the Western parliamentary
division of Dorsetshire, England, 18 m. N.W. of Dorchester, on a branch of
the Great Western railway. Pop. (1901) 5710. It is pleasantly situated in a
hilly district on the river Brit, from which it takes its name. The main
part of the town is about a mile from the sea, with which it is connected
by a winding street, ending at a quay surrounded by the fishing village of
West Bay, where the railway terminates. The church of St Mary is a handsome
cruciform Perpendicular building. The harbour is accessible only to small
vessels. There is some import trade in flax, timber and coal. The principal
articles of manufacture have long been sailcloth, cordage, linen and
fishing-nets. The municipal borough is under a mayor, 6 aldermen and 18
councillors. Area, 593 acres.

Bridport was evidently of some importance before the Conquest, when it
consisted of 120 houses rated for all the king's services and paying geld
for five hides. By 1086 the number of houses had decreased to 100, and of
these 20 were in such a wretched condition that they could not pay geld.
The town is first mentioned as a borough in the Pipe Roll of 1189, which
states that William de Bendenges owed L9: 10s. for the ancient farm of
Bridport, and that the men of the town owed tallage to the amount of 53s.
10d. Henry III. granted the first charter in 1252-1253, making the town a
free borough and granting the burgesses the right to hold it at the ancient
fee farm with an increase of 40s., and to choose two bailiffs to answer at
the exchequer for the farm. A deed of 1381 shows that Henry III. also
granted the burgesses freedom from toll. Bridport was incorporated by James
I. in 1619, but Charles II. granted a new charter in 1667, and by this the
town was governed until 1835. The first existing grant of a market and
fairs to Bridport is dated 1593, but it appears from the _Quo Warranto_
Rolls that Edward I. possessed a market there. The town was noted for the
manufacture of ropes and cables as early as 1213, and an act of parliament
(21 Henry VIII.) shows that the inhabitants had "from time out of mind"
made the cables, ropes and hawsers for the royal navy and for most of the
other ships. Bridport was represented in parliament by two members from
1395 to 1867. In the latter year the number was reduced to one, and in 1885
the town was disfranchised.

BRIE (_Briegus saltus_, from Celtic _briek_, clay), an agricultural
district of northern France, to the E. of Paris, bounded W. and S. by the
Seine, N. by the Marne. It has an area of 2400 sq. m., comprising the
greater part of the department of Seine-et-Marne, together with portions of
the departments of Seine, Seine-et-Oise, Aisne, Marne and Aube. The western
portion was known as the _Brie francaise_, the eastern portion as the _Brie
champenoise_. The Brie forms a plateau with few eminences, varying in
altitude between 300 and 500 ft. in the west, and between 500 and 650 ft.
in the east. Its scenery is varied by forests of some size--the [v.04
p.0561] chief being the Foret de Senart, the Foret de Crecy and the Foret
d'Armainvilliers. The surface soil is clay in which are embedded fragments
of siliceous sandstone, used for millstones and constructional purposes;
the subsoil is limestone. The Yeres, a tributary of the Seine, and the
Grand Morin and Petit Morin, tributaries of the Marne, are the chief
rivers, but the region is not abundantly watered and the rainfall is only
between 20 and 24 in. The Brie is famous for its grain and its dairy
products, especially cheeses.

BRIEF (Lat. _brevis_, short), in English legal practice, the written
statement given to a barrister to form the basis of his case. It was
probably so called from its at first being only a copy of the original
writ. Upon a barrister devolves the duty of taking charge of a case when it
comes into court, but all the preliminary work, such as the drawing up of
the case, serving papers, marshalling evidence, &c., is performed by a
solicitor, so that a brief contains a concise summary for the information
of counsel of the case which he has to plead, with all material facts in
chronological order, and frequently such observations thereon as the
solicitor may think fit to make, the names of witnesses, with the "proofs,"
that is, the nature of the evidence which each witness is ready to give, if
called upon. The brief may also contain suggestions for the use of counsel
when cross-examining witnesses called by the other side. Accompanying the
brief may be copies of the pleadings (see PLEADING), and of all documents
material to the case. The brief is always endorsed with the title of the
court in which the action is to be tried, with the title of the action, and
the names of the counsel and of the solicitor who delivers the brief.
Counsel's fee is also marked. The delivery of a brief to counsel gives him
authority to act for his client in all matters which the litigation
involves. The result of the action is noted on the brief by counsel, or if
the action is compromised, the terms of the compromise are endorsed on each
brief and signed by the leading counsel on the opposite side. In Scotland a
brief is called a memorial.

In the United States the word has, to a certain extent, a different
meaning, a brief in its English sense not being required, for the American
attorney exercises all the functions distributed in England between
barristers and solicitors. A lawyer sometimes prepares for his own use what
is called a "trial brief" for use at the trial. This corresponds in all
essential particulars with the "brief" prepared by the solicitor in England
for the use of counsel. But the more distinctive use of the term in America
is in the case of the brief "in error or appeal," before an appellate
court. This is a written or printed document, varying according to
circumstances, but embodying the argument on the question affected. Most of
the appellate courts require the filing of printed briefs for the use of
the court and opposing counsel at a time designated for each side before
hearing. In the rules of the United States Supreme Court and circuit courts
of appeals the brief is required to contain a concise statement of the
case, a specification of errors relied on, including the substance of
evidence, the admission or rejection of which is to be reviewed, or any
extract from a charge excepted to, and an argument exhibiting clearly the
points of law or fact to be discussed. This form of brief, it may be added,
is also adopted for use at the trial in certain states of the Union which
require printed briefs to be delivered to the court.

In English ecclesiastical law a brief meant letters patent issued out of
chancery to churchwardens or other officers for the collection of money for
church purposes. Such briefs were regulated by a statute of 1704, but are
now obsolete, though they are still to be found named in one of the rubrics
in the Communion service of the Book of Common Prayer.

The _brief-bag_, in which counsel's papers are carried to and from court,
now forms an integral part of a barrister's outfit, but in the early part
of the 19th century the possession of a brief-bag was strictly confined to
those who had received one from a king's counsel. King's counsel were then
few in number, were considered officers of the court, and had a salary of
L40 a year, with a supply of paper, pens and purple bags. These bags they
distributed among rising juniors of their acquaintance, whose bundles of
briefs were getting inconveniently large to be carried in their hands.
These perquisites were abolished in 1830. English brief-bags are now either
blue or red. Blue bags are those with which barristers provide themselves
when first called, and it is a breach of etiquette to let this bag be
visible in court. The only brief-bag allowed to be placed on the desks is
the red bag, which by English legal etiquette is given by a leading counsel
to a junior who has been useful to him in some important case.

BRIEG, a town of Germany, in the Prussian province of Silesia, on the left
bank of the Oder, and on the Breslau and Beuthen railway, 27 m. S.E. of the
former city. Pop. (1900) 24,090. It has a castle (the residence of the old
counts of Brieg), a lunatic asylum, a gymnasium with a good library,
several churches and hospitals, and a theatre. Its fortifications were
destroyed by the French in 1807, and are now replaced by beautiful
promenades. Brieg carries on a considerable trade, its chief manufactures
being linen, embroideries, cotton and woollen goods, ribbons, leather,
machinery, hats, pasteboard and cigars. Important cattle-markets are held
here. Brieg, or, as it is called in early documents, _Civitas Altae Ripae_,
obtained municipal rights in 1250 from Duke Henry III. of Breslau, and was
fortified in 1297; its name is derived from the Polish _Brzeg_ (shore).
Burned by the Hussites in 1428, the town was soon afterwards rebuilt, and
in 1595 it was again fortified by Joachim Frederick, duke of Brieg. In the
Thirty Years' War it suffered greatly; in that of the Austrian succession
it was heavily bombarded by the Prussian forces; and in 1807 it was
captured by the French and Bavarians. From 1311 to 1675 Brieg was the
capital of an independent line of dukes, a cadet branch of the Polish dukes
of Lower Silesia, by one of whom the castle was built in 1341. In 1537
Frederick II., duke of Liegnitz, Brieg and Wohlau, concluded with Joachim
II., elector of Brandenburg, a treaty according to which his duchy was to
pass to the house of Brandenburg in the event of the extinction of his
line. On the death of George William the last duke in 1675, however,
Austria refused to acknowledge the validity of the treaty and annexed the
duchies. It was the determination of Frederick II. of Prussia to assert his
claim that led in 1740 to the war that ended two years later in the cession
of Silesia to Prussia.

See Stokvis, _Manuel d'histoire_, iii. pp. 54, 64.

BRIEG, often now spelt BRIG (Fr. _Brigue_, Ital. _Briga_), a picturesque
small town in the Swiss canton of the Valais, situated at the foot of the
northern slope of the Simplon Pass, on the right bank of the Saltine
stream, and a little above its junction with the Rhone. Its older houses
are very Italian in appearance, while its most prominent buildings (castle,
former Jesuits' college and Ursuline convent) all date from the 17th
century, and are due to the generosity of a single member of the local
Stockalper family. The prosperity of Brieg is bound up with the Simplon
Pass (_q.v._), so that it gradually supplanted the more ancient village of
Naters opposite, becoming a separate parish (the church is at Glis, a few
minutes from the town) in 1517. Its medieval name was _Briga dives_. The
opening of the carriage road across the Simplon (1807) and of the tunnel
beneath the pass (1906), as well as the fact that above Brieg is the
steeper and less fertile portion of the Upper Valais (now much frequented
by tourists), have greatly increased the importance and size of the town.
The opening of the railway tunnel beneath the Loetschen Pass, affording
direct communication with Bern and the Bernese Oberland, is calculated
still further to contribute to its prosperity. The new town extends below
the old one and is closer to the right bank of the Rhone. In 1900 the
population was 2182, almost all Romanists, while 1316 were German-speaking,
719 Italian-speaking (the Simplon tunnel workmen), and 142 French-speaking,
one person only speaking Romonsch.

(W. A. B. C.)

BRIELLE (_Briel_ or _Bril_), a seaport in the province of South Holland,
Holland, on the north side of the island of Voorne, at the mouth of the New
Maas, 51/2 m. N. of Hellevoetsluis. Pop. (1900) 4107. It is a fortified place
and has a good harbour, arsenal, magazine and barracks. It also possesses a
quaint town hall, and an orphanage dating from 1533. The tower of the
Groote [v.04 p.0562] Kerk of St Catherine serves as a lighthouse. Most of
the trade of Brielle was diverted to Hellevoetsluis by the cutting of the
Voornsche Canal in 1829, but it still has some business in corn and fodder,
as well as a few factories. A large number of the inhabitants are also
engaged in the fisheries and as pilots.

The chief event in the history of Brielle is its capture by the _Gueux sur
Mer_, a squadron of privateers which raided the Dutch coast under
commission of the prince of Orange. This event, which took place on the 1st
of April 1572, was the first blow in the long war of Dutch independence,
and was followed by a general outbreak of the patriotic party (Motley,
_Rise of the Dutch Republic_, part iii. chapter vi.). "The Brill" was one
of the four Dutch towns handed over to Queen Elizabeth in 1584 as security
for English expenses incurred in aiding the Dutch. Brielle is the
birthplace of the famous admiral Martin van Tromp, and also of Admiral van
Almonde, a distinguished commander of the early 18th century.

BRIENNE-LE-CHATEAU, a town of north-eastern France, in the department of
Aube, 1 m. from the right bank of the Aube and 26 m. N.E. of Troyes on the
Eastern railway. Pop. (1906) 1761. The chateau, which overlooks the town,
is an imposing building of the latter half of the 18th century, built by
the cardinal de Brienne (see below). It possesses an important collection
of pictures, many of them historical portraits of the 17th and 18th
centuries. The church dates from the 16th century and contains good stained
glass. A statue of Napoleon commemorates his sojourn at Brienne from 1779
to 1784, when he was studying at the military school suppressed in 1790. In
1814 Brienne was the scene of fighting between Napoleon and the Allies (see
NAPOLEONIC CAMPAIGNS). Brewing is carried on in the town.
Brienne-la-Vieille, a village 11/2 m. south of Brienne-le-Chateau, has a
church of the 12th and 16th centuries with fine stained windows. The portal
once belonged to the ancient abbey of Bassefontaine, the ruins of which are
situated near the village.

_Counts of Brienne._--Under the Carolingian dynasty Brienne-le-Chateau was
the capital town of a French countship. In the 10th century it was captured
by two adventurers named Engelbert and Gobert, and from the first of these
sprang the noble house of Brienne. In 1210 John of Brienne (1148-1237)
became king of Jerusalem, through his marriage with Mary of Montsserrat,
heiress of the kingdom of Jerusalem. He led a crusade in Egypt which had no
lasting success; and when in 1229 he was elected emperor of the East, for
the period of Baldwin II.'s minority, he fought and conquered the Greek
emperor John III. (Batatzes or Vatatzes). Walter V., count of Brienne and
of Lecce (Apulia) and duke of Athens, fought against the Greeks and at
first drove them from Thessaly, but was eventually defeated and killed near
Lake Copais in 1311. His son, Walter VI., after having vainly attempted to
reconquer Athens in 1331, served under Philip of Valois against the
English. Having defended Florence against the Pisans he succeeded in
obtaining dictatorial powers for himself in the republic; but his
tyrannical conduct brought about his expulsion. He was appointed constable
of France by John the Good, and was killed at the battle of Poitiers in
1356. His sister and heiress Isabelle married Walter of Enghien, and so
brought Brienne to the house of Enghien, and, by his marriage with Margaret
of Enghien, John of Luxemburg-St Pol (d. about 1397) became count of
Brienne. The house of Luxemburg retained the countship until Margaret
Charlotte of Luxemburg sold it to a certain Marpon, who ceded it to Henri
Auguste de Lomenie (whose wife, Louise de Beon, descended from the house of
Luxemburg-Brienne) in 1640. The Limousin house of Lomenie (the genealogies
which trace this family to the 15th century are untrustworthy) produced
many well-known statesmen, among others the celebrated cardinal Etienne
Charles de Lomenie de Brienne (1727-1794), minister of Louis XV.; and the
last lords of Brienne were members of this family.

(M. P.*)

BRIENZ, LAKE OF, in the Swiss canton of Bern, the first lake into which the
river Aar expands. It lies in a deep hollow between the village of Brienz
on the east (2580 inhabitants, the chief centre of the Swiss wood-carving
industry) and, on the west, Boenigen (1515 inhabitants), close to
Interlaken. Its length is about 9 m., its width 11/2 m., and its maximum
depth 856 ft., while its area is 111/2 sq. m., and the surface is 1857 ft.
above the sea-level. On the south shore are the Giessbach Falls and the
hamlet of Iseltwald. On the north shore are a few small villages. The
character of the lake is gloomy and sad as compared with its neighbour,
that of Thun. Its chief affluent is the Luetschine (flowing from the valleys
of Grindelwald and Lauterbrunnen). The first steamer was placed on the lake
in 1839.

(W. A. B. C.)

BRIERLEY, BENJAMIN (1825-1896), English weaver and writer in Lancashire
dialect, was born near Manchester, the son of humble parents, and started
life in a textile factory, educating himself in his spare time. At about
the age of thirty he began to contribute articles to local papers, and the
republication of some of his sketches of Lancashire character in _A Summer
Day in Daisy Nook_ (1859) attracted attention. In 1863 he definitely took
to journalism and literature as his work, publishing in 1863 his
_Chronicles of Waverlow_, and in 1864 a long story called _The Layrock of
Langley Side_ (afterwards dramatized), followed by others. He started in
1869 _Ben Brierley's Journal_, a weekly, which continued till 1891, and he
gave public readings from his own writings, visiting America in 1880 and
1884. His various _Ab-o'-th'-Yate_ sketches (about America, London, &c.),
and his pictures of Lancashire common life were very popular, and were
collected after his death. In 1884 he lost his savings by the failure of a
building society, and a fund was raised for his support. He died on the
18th of January 1896, and two years later a statue was erected to him in
Queen's Park, Manchester.

BRIERLY, SIR OSWALD WALTERS (1817-1894), English marine painter, who came
of an old Cheshire family, was born at Chester. He entered Sass's
art-school in London, and after studying naval architecture at Plymouth he
exhibited some drawings of ships at the Royal Academy in 1839. He had a
passion for the sea, and in 1841 started round the world with Benjamin Boyd
(1796-1851), afterwards well known as a great Australian squatter, in the
latter's ship "Wanderer," and having got to New South Wales, made his home
at Auckland for ten years. Brierly Point is called after him. He added to
his sea experiences by voyages on H.M.S. "Rattlesnake" in 1848, and with
Sir Henry Keppel on the "Meander" in 1850; he returned to England in 1851
on this ship, and illustrated Keppel's book about his cruise (1853). He was
again with Keppel during the Crimean War, and published in 1855 a series of
lithographs illustrating "The English and French fleets in the Baltic." He
was now taken up by Queen Victoria and other members of the royal family,
and was attached to the suites of the duke of Edinburgh and the prince of
Wales on their tours by sea, the results being seen in further marine
pictures by him; and in 1874 he was made marine-painter to the queen. He
exhibited at the Academy, but more largely at the Royal Water-colour
Society, his more important works including the historical pictures, "The
Retreat of the Spanish Armada" (1871) and "The Loss of the Revenge" (1877).
In 1885 he was knighted, and he died on the 14th of December 1894. He was
twice married and had an active and prosperous life, but was no great
artist; his best pictures are at Melbourne and Sydney.

BRIEUX, EUGENE (1858- ), French dramatist, was born in Paris of poor
parents on the 19th of January 1858. A one-act play, _Bernard Palissy_,
written in collaboration with M. Gaston Salandri, was produced in 1879, but
he had to wait eleven years before he obtained another hearing, his _Menage
d' artistes_ being produced by Antoine at the Theatre Libre in 1890. His
plays are essentially didactic, being aimed at some weakness or iniquity of
the social system. _Blanchette_ (1892) pointed out the evil results of
education of girls of the working classes; _M. de Reboval_ (1892) was
directed against pharisaism; _L'Engrenage_ (1894) against corruption in
politics; _Les Bienssaiteurs_ (1896) against the frivolity of fashionable
charity; and _L'Evasion_ (1896) satirized an indicriminate belief in the
doctrine of heredity. _Les Trois Filles de M. Dupont_ (1897) is a powerful,
somewhat brutal, study of the miseries imposed on poor middle-class girls
by the French [v.04 p.0563] system of dowry; _Le Resultat des courses_
(1898) shows the evil results of betting among the Parisian workmen; _La
Robe rouge_ (1900) was directed against the injustices of the law; _Les
Remplacantes_ (1901) against the practice of putting children out to nurse.
_Les Avaries_ (1901), forbidden by the censor, on account of its medical
details, was read privately by the author at the Theatre Antoine; and
_Petite amie_ (1902) describes the life of a Parisian shop-girl. Later
plays are _La Couvee_ (1903, acted privately at Rouen in 1893), _Maternite_
(1904), _La Deserteuse_ (1904), in collaboration with M. Jean Sigaux, and
_Les Hannetons_, a comedy in three acts (1906).

BRIGADE (Fr. and Ger. _brigade_, Ital. _brigata_, Span. _brigada_; the
English use of the word dates from the early 17th century), a unit in
military organization commanded by a major-general, brigadier-general or
colonel, and composed of two or more regiments of infantry, cavalry or
artillery. The British infantry brigade consists as a rule of four
battalions (or about 4000 bayonets) with supply, transport and medical
units attached; the cavalry brigade of two or three regiments of cavalry.
An artillery "brigade" (field, horse, and heavy) is in Great Britain a
smaller unit, forming a lieut.-colonel's command and consisting of two or
three batteries. (See ARMY, ARTILLERY, INFANTRY, and CAVALRY.) The staff of
an infantry or cavalry brigade usually consists of the brigadier
commanding, his aide-de-camp, and the brigade-major, a staff officer whose
duties are intermediate between those of an adjutant and those of a general
staff officer.

BRIGANDAGE. The brigand is supposed to derive his name from the O. Fr.
_brigan_, which is a form of the Ital. _brigante,_ an irregular or partisan
soldier. There can be no doubt as to the origin of the word "bandit," which
has the same meaning. In Italy, which is not unjustly considered the home
of the most accomplished European brigands, a _bandito_ was a man declared
outlaw by proclamation, or _bando_, called in Scotland "a decree of
horning" because it was delivered by a blast of a horn at the town cross.
The brigand, therefore, is the outlaw who conducts warfare after the manner
of an irregular or partisan soldier by skirmishes and surprises, who makes
the war support itself by plunder, by extorting blackmail, by capturing
prisoners and holding them to ransom, who enforces his demands by violence,
and kills the prisoners who cannot pay. In certain conditions the brigand
has not been a mere malefactor. "It is you who are the thieves"--"_I
Ladroni, siete voi,_"--was the defence of the Calabrian who was tried as a
brigand by a French court-martial during the reign of Murat in Naples.
Brigandage may be, and not infrequently has been, the last resource of a
people subject to invasion. The Calabrians who fought for Ferdinand of
Naples, and the Spanish irregular levies, which maintained the national
resistance against the French from 1808 to 1814, were called brigands by
their enemies. In the Balkan peninsula, under Turkish rule, the brigands
(called _klephts_ by the Greeks and _hayduks_ or _haydutzi_ by the Slavs)
had some claim to believe themselves the representatives of their people
against oppressors. The only approach to an attempt to maintain order was
the permission given to part of the population to carry arms in order to
repress the klephts. They were hence called "armatoli." As a matter of fact
the armatole were rather the allies than the enemies of the klephts. The
invader who reduces a nation to anarchy, and then suffers from the disorder
he creates, always calls his opponents brigands. It is a natural
consequence of such a war, but a very disastrous one, for the people who
have to have recourse to these methods of defence, that the brigand
acquires some measure of honourable prestige from his temporary association
with patriotism and honest men. The patriot band attracts the brigand
proper, who is not averse to continue his old courses under an honourable
pretext. "_Viva Fernando y vamos robando_" (Long life to Ferdinand, and let
us go robbing) has been said by not unfair critics to have been the maxim
of many Spanish guerrilleros. Italy and Spain suffered for a long time from
the disorder developed out of the popular resistance to the French. Numbers
of the guerrilleros of both countries, who in normal conditions might have
been honest, had acquired a preference for living on the country, and for
occasional booty, which they could not resign when the enemy had retired.
Their countrymen had to work for a second deliverance from their late
defenders. In the East the brigand has had a freer scope, and has even
founded kingdoms. David's following in the cave of Adullam was such
material as brigands are made of. "And every one that was in distress, and
every one that was in debt, and every one that was discontented, gathered
themselves unto him, and he became a captain over them: and there were with
him about four hundred men." Nadir Shah of Persia began in just such a cave
of Adullam, and lived to plunder Delhi with a host of Persians and Afghans.

The conditions which favour the development of brigandage may be easily
summed up. They are first bad administration, and then, in a less degree,
the possession of convenient hiding-places. A country of mountain and
forest is favourable to the brigand. The highlands of Scotland supplied a
safe refuge to the "gentlemen reavers," who carried off the cattle of the
Sassenach landlords. The Apennines, the mountains of Calabria, the Sierras
of Spain, were the homes of the Italian "banditos" and the Spanish
"bandoleros" (banished men) and "salteadores" (raiders). The forests of
England gave cover to the outlaws whose very much flattered portrait is to
be found in the ballads of Robin Hood. The "maquis," i.e. the bush of
Corsica, and its hills, have helped the Corsican brigand, as the bush of
Australia covered the bushranger. But neither forest thicket nor mountain
is a lasting protection against a good police, used with intelligence by
the government, and supported by the law-abiding part of the community. The
great haunts of brigands in Europe have been central and southern Italy and
the worst-administered parts of Spain, except those which fell into the
hands of the Turks. "Whenever numerous troops of banditti, multiplied by
success and impunity, publicly defy, instead of eluding, the justice of
their country, we may safely infer that the excessive weakness of the
government is felt and abused by the lowest ranks of the community," is the
judgment passed by Gibbon on the disorders of Sicily in the reign of the
emperor Gallienus. This weakness has not always been a sign of real
feebleness in the government. England was vigorously ruled in the reign of
William III., when "a fraternity of plunderers, thirty in number according
to the lowest estimate, squatted near Waltham Cross under the shades of
Epping Forest, and built themselves huts, from which they sallied forth
with sword and pistol to bid passengers stand." It was not because the
state was weak that the Gubbings (so called in contempt from the trimmings
and refuse of fish) infested Devonshire for a generation from their
headquarters near Brent Tor, on the edge of Dartmoor. It was because
England had not provided herself with a competent rural police. In
relatively unsettled parts of the United States there has been a
considerable amount of a certain kind of brigandage. In early days the
travel routes to the far West were infested by highwaymen, who, however,
seldom united into bands, and such outlaws, when captured, were often dealt
with in an extra-legal manner, e.g. by "vigilance committees." The Mexican
brigand Cortina made incursions into Texas before the Civil War. In Canada
the mounted police have kept brigandage down, and in Mexico the "Rurales"
have made an end of the brigands. Such curable evils as the highwaymen of
England, and their like in the States, are not to be compared with the
"Ecorcheurs," or Skinners, of France in the 15th century, or the
"Chauffeurs" of the revolutionary epoch. The first were large bands of
discharged mercenary soldiers who pillaged the country. The second were
ruffians who forced their victims to pay ransom by holding their feet in
fires. Both flourished because the government was for the time disorganized
by foreign invasion or by revolution. These were far more terrible evils
than the licence of criminals, who are encouraged by a fair prospect of
impunity because there is no permanent force always at hand to check them,
and to bring them promptly to justice. At the same time it would be going
much too far to say that the absence of an efficient police is the sole
cause of brigandage in countries not subject to foreign invasion, or where
[v.04 p.0564] the state is not very feeble. The Sicilian peasants of whom
Gibbon wrote were not only encouraged by the hope of impunity, but were
also maddened by an oppressive system of taxation and a cruel system of
land tenure. So were the Gauls and Spaniards who throughout the 3rd and 4th
centuries were a constant cause of trouble to the empire, under the name of
Bagaudae, a word of uncertain origin. In the years preceding the French
Revolution, the royal government commanded the services of a strong army,
and a numerous _marechaussee_ or gendarmerie. Yet it was defied by the
troops of smugglers and brigands known as _faux saulniers_, unauthorized
salt-sellers, and gangs of poachers haunted the king's preserves round
Paris. The salt monopoly and the excessive preservation of the game were so
oppressive that the peasantry were provoked to violent resistance and to
brigandage. They were constantly suppressed, but as the cause of the
disorder survived, so its effects were continually renewed. The offenders
enjoyed a large measure of public sympathy, and were warned or concealed by
the population, even when they were not actively supported. The traditional
outlaw who spared the poor and levied tribute on the rich was, no doubt,
always a creature of fiction. The ballad which tells us how "Rich, wealthy
misers were abhorred, By brave, free-hearted Bliss" (a rascal hanged for
highway robbery at Salisbury in 1695) must have been a mere echo of the
Robin Hood songs. But there have been times and countries in which the law
and its administration have been so far regarded as enemies by people who
were not themselves criminals, that all who defied them have been sure of a
measure of sympathy. Then and there it was that brigandage has flourished,
and has been difficult to extirpate. Schinder-Hannes, Jack the Skinner,
whose real name was Johann Buckler, and who was born at Muklen on the
Rhine, flourished from 1797 to 1802 because there was no proper police to
stop him; it is also true that as he chiefly plundered the Jews he had a
good deal of Christian sympathy. When caught and beheaded he had no
successors.

The brigandage of Greece, southern Italy, Corsica and Spain had deeper
roots, and has never been quite suppressed. All four countries are well
provided with hiding-places in forest and mountain. In all the
administration has been bad, the law and its officers have been regarded as
dangers, if not as deliberate enemies, so that they have found little
native help, and, what is not the least important cause of the persistence
of brigandage, there have generally been local potentates who found it to
their interest to protect the brigand. The case of Greece under Turkish
rule need not be dealt with. Whoever was not a klepht was the victim of
some official extortioner. It would be grossly unfair to apply the name
brigand to the Mainotes and similar clans, who had to choose between being
flayed by the Turks or living by the sword under their own law. When it
became independent Greece was extremely ill administered under a nominal
parliamentary government by politicians who made use of the brigands for
their own purposes. The result was the state of things described with only
pardonable exaggeration in Edmond About's amusing _Roi de la montagne_. An
authentic and most interesting picture of the Greek brigands will be found
in the story of the captivity of S. Soteropoulos, an ex-minister who fell
into their hands. It was translated into English under the title of _The
Brigands of the Morea_, by the Rev. J.O. Bagdon (London, 1868). The
misfortunes of Soteropoulos led to the adoption of strong measures which
cleared the Morea, where the peasantry gave active support to the troops
when they saw that the government was in earnest. But brigandage was not
yet extinct in Greece. In 1870 an English party, consisting of Lord and
Lady Muncaster, Mr Vyner, Mr Lloyd, Mr Herbert, and Count de Boyl, was
captured at Oropos, near Marathon, and a ransom of L25,000 was demanded.
Lord and Lady Muncaster were set at liberty to seek for the ransom, but the
Greek government sent troops in pursuit of the brigands, and the other
prisoners were then murdered. The scoundrels were hunted down, caught, and
executed, and Greece has since then been tolerably free from this reproach.
In the Balkan peninsula, under Turkish rule, brigandage continued to exist
in connexion with Christian revolt against the Turk, and the race conflicts
of Albanians, Walachians, Pomuks, Bulgarians and Greeks. In Corsica the
"maquis" has never been without its brigand hero, because industry has been
stagnant, family feuds persist, and the government has never quite
succeeded in persuading the people to support the law. The brigand is
always a hero to at least one faction of Corsicans.

The conditions which favour brigandage have been more prevalent, and for
longer, in Italy than elsewhere in western Europe, with the standing
exception of Corsica, which is Italian in all but political allegiance.
Until the middle of the 19th century Italy was divided into small states,
so that the brigand who was closely pursued in one could flee to another.
Thus it was that Marco Sciarra of the Abruzzi, when hard pressed by the
Spanish viceroy of Naples--just before and after 1600--could cross the
border of the papal states and return on a favourable opportunity. When
pope and viceroy combined against him he took service with Venice, from
whence he could communicate with his friends at home, and pay them
occasional visits. On one such visit he was led into a trap and slain.
Marco Sciarra had terrorized the country far and wide at the head of 600
men. He was the follower and imitator of Benedetto Mangone, of whom it is
recorded that, having stopped a party of travellers which included Torquato
Tasso, he allowed them to pass unharmed out of his reverence for poets and
poetry. Mangone was finally taken, and beaten to death with hammers at
Naples. He and his like are the heroes of much popular verse, written in
_ottava rima_, and beginning with the traditional epic invocation to the
muse. A fine example is "The most beautiful history of the life and death
of Pietro Mancino, chief of Banditti," which has remained popular with the
people of southern Italy. It begins:--

 "Io canto li ricatti, e il fiero ardire
  Del gran Pietro Mancino fuoruscito"
  (Pietro Mancino that great outlawed man
  I sing, and all his rage.)

In Naples the number of competing codes and jurisdictions, the survival of
the feudal power of the nobles, who sheltered banditti, just as a Highland
chief gave refuge to "caterans" in Scotland, and the helplessness of the
peasantry, made brigandage chronic, and the same conditions obtained in
Sicily. The Bourbon dynasty reduced brigandage very much, and secured order
on the main high-roads. But it was not extinguished, and it revived during
the French invasion. This was the flourishing time of the notorious Fra
Diavolo, who began as brigand and blossomed into a patriot. Fra Diavolo was
captured and executed by the French. When Ferdinand was restored on the
fall of Napoleon he employed an English officer, General Sir Richard
Church, to suppress the brigands. General Church, who kept good order among
his soldiers, and who made them pay for everything, gained the confidence
of the peasantry, and restored a fair measure of security. It was he who
finally brought to justice the villainous Don Ciro Anicchiarico--priest and
brigand--who declared at his trial with offhand indifference that he
supposed he had murdered about seventy people first and last. When a
brother priest was sent to give him the consolations of religion, Ciro cut
him short, saying, "Stop that chatter, we are two of a trade: we need not
play the fool to one another" (_Lasciate queste chiacchiere, siamo dell'
istessa professione: non ci burliamo fra noi_). Every successive
revolutionary disturbance in Naples saw a recrudescence of brigandage down
to the unification of 1860-1861, and then it was years before the Italian
government rooted it out. The source of the trouble was the support the
brigands received from various kinds of "_manutengoli_"
(maintainers)--great men, corrupt officials, political parties, and the
peasants who were terrorized, or who profited by selling the brigands food
and clothes. In Sicily brigandage has been endemic. In 1866 two English
travellers, Mr E.J.C. Moens and the Rev. J.C. Murray Aynesley, were
captured and held to ransom. Mr Moens found that the "manutengoli" of the
brigands among the peasants charged famine prices for food, and
extortionate prices for clothes and cartridges. What is true of Naples and
Sicily is true of other parts of Italy _mutatis [v.04 p.0565] mutandis_. In
Tuscany, Piedmont and Lombardy the open country has been orderly, but the
borders infested with brigands. The worst district outside Calabria has
been the papal states. The Austrian general, Frimont, did, however, partly
clear the Romagna about 1820, though at a heavy cost of life to his
soldiers--mostly Bohemian Jaegers--from the malaria.

The history of brigandage in Spain is very similar. It may be said to have
been endemic in and south of the Sierra Morena. In the north it has
flourished when government was weak, and after foreign invasion and civil
wars. But it has always been put down easily by a capable administration.
It reached its greatest heights in Catalonia, where it began in the strife
of the peasants against the feudal exactions of the landlords. It had its
traditional hero, Roque Guinart, who figures in the second part of Don
Quixote. The revolt against the house of Austria in 1640, and the War of
the Succession (1700-1714), gave a great stimulus to Catalan brigandage.
But it was then put down in a way for which Italy offers no precedent. A
country gentleman named Pedro Veciana, hereditary _balio_ (military and
civil lieutenant) of the archbishop of Tarragona in the town of Valls,
armed his farm-servants, and resisted the attacks of the brigands. With the
help of neighbouring country gentlemen he formed a strong band, known as
the Mozos (Boys) of Veciana. The brigands combined to get rid of him by
making an attack on the town of Valls, but were repulsed with great loss.
The government of Philip V. then commissioned Veciana to raise a special
corps of police, the "escuadra de Cataluna," which still exists. For five
generations the colonel of the escuadra was always a Veciana. At all times
in central and northern Spain the country population has supported the
police when the government would act firmly. Since the organization of the
excellent constabulary called "La Guardia Civil" by the duke of Ahumada,
about 1844, brigandage has been well kept down. At the close of the Carlist
War in 1874 a few bands infested Catalonia, but one of the worst was
surprised, and all its members battered to death with boxwood cudgels by a
gang of charcoal-burners on the ruins of the castle of San Martin de
Centellas. In such conditions as these brigandage cannot last. More
sympathy is felt for "bandoleros" in the south, and there also they find
Spanish equivalents for the "manutengoli" of Italy. The tobacco smuggling
from Gibraltar keeps alive a lawless class which sinks easily into pure
brigandage. Perhaps the influence of the Berber blood in the population
helps to prolong this barbarism. The Sierra Morena, and the Serrania de
Ronda, have produced the bandits whose achievements form the subject of
popular ballads, such as Francisco Esteban El Guapo (Francis Stephen, the
Buck or Dandy), Don Juan de Serralonga, Pedranza, &c. The name of Jose
Maria has been made familiar to all the world by Merimee's story, _Carmen_,
and by Bizet's opera. Jose Maria, called El Tempranillo (the early bird),
was a historical personage, a liberal in the rising against Ferdinand VII.,
1820-1823, then a smuggler, then a "bandolero." He was finally bought off
by the government, and took a commission to suppress the other brigands.
Jose Maria was at last shot by one of them, whom he was endeavouring to
arrest. The civil guard prevents brigandage from reaching any great height
in normal times, but in 1905 a bandit of the old stamp, popularly known as
"El Vivillo" (the Vital Spark), haunted the Serrania de Ronda.

The brigand life has been made the subject of much romance. But when
stripped of fiction it appears that the bands have been mostly recruited by
men who had been guilty of homicide, out of jealousy or in a gambling
quarrel, and who remained in them not from love of the life, but from fear
of the gallows. A reformed brigand, known as Passo di Lupo (Wolf's Step),
confessed to Mr McFarlane about 1820 that the weaker members of the band
were terrorized and robbed by the bullies, and that murderous conflicts
were constant among them.

The "dacoits" or brigands of India were of the same stamp as their European
colleagues. The Pindaris were more than brigands, and the Thugs were a
religious sect.

AUTHORITIES.--The literature of brigandage, apart from pure romances, or
official reports of trials, is naturally extensive. Mr McFarlane's _Lives
and Exploits of Banditti and Robbers_ (London, 1837) is a useful
introduction to the subject. The author saw a part of what he wrote about,
and gives many references, particularly for Italy. A good bibliography of
Spanish brigandage will be found in the _Resena Historica de la Guardia
Civil_ of Eugenio de la Iglesia (Madrid, 1898). For actual pictures of the
life, nothing is better than the _English Travellers and Italian Brigands_
of W.J.C. Moens (London, 1866), and _The Brigands of the Morea_, by S.
Soteropoulos, translated by the Rev. J.O. Bagdon (London, 1868).

(D. H.)

BRIGANDINE, a French word meaning the armour for the _brigandi_ or
_brigantes_, light-armed foot soldiers; part of the armour of a foot
soldier in the middle ages, consisting of a padded tunic of canvas,
leather, &c., and lined with closely sewn scales or rings of iron.

BRIGANTES (Celtic for "mountaineers" or "free, privileged"), a people of
northern Britain, who inhabited the country from the mouth of the Abus
(Humber) on the east and the Belisama (Mersey; according to others, Ribble)
on the west as far northwards as the Wall of Antoninus. Their territory
thus included most of Yorkshire, the whole of Lancashire, Durham,
Westmorland, Cumberland and part of Northumberland. Their chief town was
Eburacum (or Eboracum; York). They first came into contact with the Romans
during the reign of Claudius, when they were defeated by Publius Ostorius
Scapula. Under Vespasian they submitted to Petillius Cerealis, but were not
finally subdued till the time of Antoninus Pius (Tac. _Agricola_, 17;
Pausan. viii. 43. 4). The name of their eponymous goddess Brigantia is
found on inscriptions (_Corp. Inscr. Lat._ vii. 200, 875, 1062; F.
Haverfield in _Archaeological Journal_, xlix., 1892), and also that of a
god Bergans = Brigans (_Ephemeris Epigraphica_, vii. No. 920). A branch of
the Brigantes also settled in the south-east corner of Ireland, near the
river Birgus (Barrow).

See A. Holder, _Altceltischer Sprachschatz_, i. (1896), for ancient
authorities; J. Rhys, _Celtic Britain_ (3rd ed., 1904); Pauly-Wissowa,
_Realencyclopaedie_, iii. pt. i. (1897).

BRIGG (properly Glanford Briggs or Glamford Bridge), a market town in the
North Lindsey or Brigg parliamentary division of Lincolnshire, England,
situated on the river Ancholme, which affords water communication with the
Humber. Pop. of urban district (1901) 3137. It is 23 m. by road north of
Lincoln, and is served by the Grimsby line of the Great Central railway.
Trade is principally agricultural. In 1885 a remarkable boat, assigned to
early British workmanship, was unearthed near the river; it is hollowed out
of the trunk of an oak, and measures 48 ft. 6 in. by about 5 ft. Other
prehistoric relics have also been discovered.

BRIGGS, CHARLES AUGUSTUS (1841- ), American Hebrew scholar and theologian,
was born in New York City on the 15th of January 1841. He was educated at
the university of Virginia (1857-1860), graduated at the Union Theological
Seminary in 1863, and studied further at the university of Berlin. He was
pastor of the Presbyterian church of Roselle, New Jersey, 1869-1874, and
professor of Hebrew and cognate languages in Union Theological Seminary
1874-1891, and of Biblical theology there from 1891 to 1904, when he became
professor of theological encyclopaedia and symbolics. From 1880 to 1890 he
was an editor of the _Presbyterian Review_. In 1892 he was tried for heresy
by the presbytery of New York and acquitted. The charges were based upon
his inaugural address of the preceding year. In brief they were as follows:
that he had taught that reason and the Church are each a "fountain of
divine authority which apart from Holy Scripture may and does savingly
enlighten men"; that "errors may have existed in the original text of the
Holy Scripture"; that "many of the Old Testament predictions have been
reversed by history" and that "the great body of Messianic prediction has
not and cannot be fulfilled"; that "Moses is not the author of the
Pentateuch," and that "Isaiah is not the author of half of the book which
bears his name"; that "the processes of redemption extend to the world to
come"--he had considered it a fault of Protestant theology that it limits
redemption to this world--and that "sanctification is not complete at
death." The general assembly, to which the case was appealed, suspended Dr
Briggs [v.04 p.0566] in 1893, being influenced, it would seem, in part, by
the manner and tone of his expressions--by what his own colleagues in the
Union Theological Seminary called the "dogmatic and irritating" nature of
his inaugural address. He was ordained a priest of the Protestant Episcopal
Church in 1899. His scholarship procured for him the honorary degree of
D.D. from Edinburgh (1884) and from Glasgow (1901), and that of Litt.D.
from Oxford (1901). With S.R. Driver and Francis Brown he prepared a
revised _Hebrew and English Lexicon_ (1891-1905), and with Driver edited
the "International Commentary Series." His publications include _Biblical
Study: Its Principles, Methods and History_ (1883); _Hebrew Poems of the
Creation_ (1884); _American Presbyterianism: Its Origin and Early History_
(1885); _Messianic Prophecy_ (1886); _Whither? A Theological Question for
the Times_ (1889); _The Authority of the Holy Scripture_ (1891); _The
Bible, the Church and the Reason_ (1892); _The Higher Criticism of the
Hexateuch_ (1893); _The Messiah of the Gospels_ (1804), _The Messiah of the
Apostles_ (1894); _New Light on the Life of Jesus_ (1904); _The Ethical
Teaching of Jesus_ (1904); _A Critical and Exegetical Commentary on the
Book of Psalms_ (2 vols., 1906-1907), in which he was assisted by his
daughter; and _The Virgin Birth of Our Lord_ (1909).

BRIGGS, HENRY (1556-1630), English mathematician, was born at Warley Wood,
near Halifax, in Yorkshire. He graduated at St John's College, Cambridge,
in 1581, and obtained a fellowship in 1588. In 1592 he was made reader of
the physical lecture founded by Dr Thomas Linacre, and in 1596 first
professor of geometry in Gresham House (afterwards College), London. In his
lectures at Gresham House he proposed the alteration of the scale of
logarithms from the hyperbolic form which John Napier had given them, to
that in which unity is assumed as the logarithm of the ratio of ten to one;
and soon afterwards he wrote to the inventor on the subject. In 1616 he
paid a visit to Napier at Edinburgh in order to discuss the suggested
change; and next year he repeated his visit for a similar purpose. During
these conferences the alteration proposed by Briggs was agreed upon; and on
his return from his second visit to Edinburgh in 1617 he accordingly
published the first chiliad of his logarithms. (See NAPIER, JOHN.) In 1619
he was appointed Savilian professor of geometry at Oxford, and resigned his
professorship of Gresham College on the 25th of July 1620. Soon after his
settlement at Oxford he was incorporated master of arts. In 1622 he
published a small tract on the _North-West Passage to the South Seas,
through the Continent of Virginia and Hudson's Bay_; and in 1624 his
_Arithmetica Logarithmica_, in folio, a work containing the logarithms of
thirty thousand natural numbers to fourteen places of figures besides the
index. He also completed a table of logarithmic sines and tangents for the
hundredth part of every degree to fourteen places of figures besides the
index, with a table of natural sines to fifteen places, and the tangents
and secants for the same to ten places; all of which were printed at Gouda
in 1631 and published in 1633 under the title of _Trigonometria Britannica_
(see TABLE, MATHEMATICAL). Briggs died on the 26th of January 1630, and was
buried in Merton College chapel, Oxford. Dr Smith, in his _Lives of the
Gresham Professors_, characterizes him as a man of great probity, a
contemner of riches, and contented with his own station, preferring a
studious retirement to all the splendid circumstances of life.

His works are: _A Table to find the Height of the Pole, the Magnetical
Declination being given_ (London, 1602, 4to); "Tables for the Improvement
of Navigation," printed in the second edition of Edward Wright's treatise
entitled _Certain Errors in Navigation detected and corrected_ (London,
1610, 4to); _A Description of an Instrumental Table to find the part
proportional, devised by Mr Edward Wright_ (London, 1616 and 1618, 12mo);
_Logarithmorum Chilias prima_ (London, 1617, 8vo); _Lucubrationes et
Annotationes in opera posthuma J. Neperi_ (Edinburgh, 1619, 4to); _Euclidis
Elementorum VI. libri priores_ (London, 1620. folio); _A Treatise on the
North-West Passage to the South Sea_ (London, 1622, 4to), reprinted in
Purchas's _Pilgrims_, vol. iii. p. 852; _Arithmetica Logarithmica_ (London,
1624, folio); _Trigonometria Britannica_ (Goudae, 1663, folio); two
_Letters_ to Archbishop Usher; _Mathematica ab Antiquis minus cognita_.
Some other works, as his _Commentaries on the Geometry of Peter Ramus_, and
_Remarks on the Treatise of Longomontanus respecting the Quadrature of the
Circle_, have not been published.

BRIGHOUSE, a municipal borough in the Elland parliamentary division of the
West Riding of Yorkshire, England, 51/2 m. N. of Huddersfield by the
Lancashire & Yorkshire railway, on the river Calder. Pop. (1901) 21,735. It
is in the heart of the manufacturing district of the West Riding, and has
large woollen and worsted factories; carpets, machinery and soap are also
produced. The town was incorporated in 1893, and is governed by a mayor, 8
aldermen and 24 councillors. Area, 2231 acres.

BRIGHT, SIR CHARLES TILSTON (1832-1888), English telegraph engineer, who
came of an old Yorkshire family, was born on the 8th of June 1832, at
Wanstead, Essex. At the age of fifteen he became a clerk under the Electric
Telegraph Company. His talent for electrical engineering was soon shown,
and his progress was rapid; so that in 1852 he was appointed engineer to
the Magnetic Telegraph Company, and in that capacity superintended the
laying of lines in various parts of the British Isles, including in 1853
the first cable between Great Britain and Ireland, from Portpatrick to
Donaghadee. His experiments convinced him of the practicability of an
electric submarine cable connexion between Ireland and America; and having
in 1855 already discussed the question with Cyrus Field, who with J. W.
Brett controlled the Newfoundland Telegraph Company on the other side of
the ocean, Bright organized with them the Atlantic Telegraph Company in
1856 for the purpose of carrying out the idea, himself becoming
engineer-in-chief. The story of the first Atlantic cable is told elsewhere
(see TELEGRAPH), and it must suffice here to say that in 1858, after two
disappointments, Bright successfully accomplished what to many had seemed
an impossible feat, and within a few days of landing the Irish end of the
line at Valentia he was knighted in Dublin. Subsequently Sir Charles Bright
supervised the laying of submarine cables in various regions of the world,
and took a leading part as pioneer in other developments of the electrical
industry. In conjunction with Josiah Latimer Clark, with whom he entered
into partnership in 1861, he invented improved methods of insulating
submarine cables, and a paper on electrical standards read by them before
the British Association in the same year led to the establishment of the
British Association committee on that subject, whose work formed the
foundations of the system still in use. From 1865 to 1868 he was Liberal
M.P. for Greenwich. He died on the 3rd of May 1888, at Abbey Wood, near
London.

See _Life Story of Sir C. T. Bright_, by his son Charles Bright (revised
ed. 1908).

BRIGHT, JOHN (1811-1889), British statesman, was born at Rochdale on the
16th of November 1811. His father, Jacob Bright, was a much-respected
Quaker, who had started a cottonmill at Rochdale in 1809. The family had
reached Lancashire by two migrations. Abraham Bright was a Wiltshire
yeoman, who, early in the 18th century, removed to Coventry, where his
descendants remained, and where, in 1775, Jacob Bright was born. Jacob
Bright was educated at the Ackworth school of the Society of Friends, and
was apprenticed to a fustian manufacturer at New Mills. He married his
employer's daughter, and settled with his two brothers-in-law at Rochdale
in 1802, going into business for himself seven years later. His first wife
died without children, and in 1809 he married Martha Wood, daughter of a
tradesman of Bolton-le-Moors. She had been educated at Ackworth school, and
was a woman of great strength of character and refined taste. There were
eleven children of this marriage, of whom John Bright was the second, but
the death of his elder brother in childhood made him the eldest son. He was
a delicate child, and was sent as a day-scholar to a boarding-school near
his home, kept by Mr William Littlewood. A year at the Ackworth school, two
years at a school at York, and a year and a half at Newton, near Clitheroe,
completed his education. He learned, he himself said, but little Latin and
Greek, but acquired a great love of English literature, which his mother
fostered, and a love of outdoor pursuits. In his sixteenth year he entered
his father's mill, and in due time became a partner in the business. Two
agitations were then going on in Rochdale--the first (in which Jacob Bright
was a leader) in opposition to a local [v.04 p.0567] church-rate, and the
second for parliamentary reform, by which Rochdale successfully claimed to
have a member allotted to it under the Reform Bill. In both these movements
John Bright took part. He was an ardent Nonconformist, proud to number
among his ancestors John Gratton, a friend of George Fox, and one of the
persecuted and imprisoned preachers of the Society of Friends. His
political interest was probably first kindled by the Preston election in
1830, in which Lord Stanley, after a long struggle, was defeated by
"Orator" Hunt. But it was as a member of the Rochdale Juvenile Temperance
Band that he first learned public speaking. These young men went out into
the villages, borrowed a chair of a cottager, and spoke from it at open-air
meetings. In Mrs John Mills's life of her husband is an account of John
Bright's first extempore speech. It was at a temperance meeting. Bright got
his notes muddled, and broke down. The chairman gave out a temperance song,
and during the singing told Bright to put his notes aside and say what came
into his mind. Bright obeyed, began with much hesitancy, but found his
tongue and made an excellent address. On some early occasions, however, he
committed his speech to memory. In 1832 he called on the Rev. John Aldis,
an eminent Baptist minister, to accompany him to a local Bible meeting. Mr
Aldis described him as a slender, modest young gentleman, who surprised him
by his intelligence and thoughtfulness, but who seemed nervous as they
walked to the meeting together. At the meeting he made a stimulating
speech, and on the way home asked for advice. Mr Aldis counselled him not
to learn his speeches, but to write out and commit to memory certain
passages and the peroration. Bright took the advice, and acted on it all
his life.

This "first lesson in public speaking," as Bright called it, was given in
his twenty-first year, but he had not then contemplated entering on a
public career. He was a fairly prosperous man of business, very happy in
his home, and always ready to take part in the social, educational and
political life of his native town. He was one of the founders of the
Rochdale Literary and Philosophical Society, took a leading part in its
debates, and on returning from a holiday journey in the East, gave the
society a lecture on his travels. He first met Richard Cobden in 1836 or
1837. Cobden was an alderman of the newly formed Manchester corporation,
and Bright went to ask him to speak at an education meeting in Rochdale. "I
found him," said Bright, "in his office in Mosley Street, introduced myself
to him, and told him what I wanted." Cobden consented, and at the meeting
was much struck by Bright's short speech, and urged him to speak against
the Corn Laws. His first speech on the Corn Laws was made at Rochdale in
1838, and in the same year he joined the Manchester provisional committee
which in 1839 founded the Anti-Corn Law League He was still only the local
public man, taking part in all public movements, especially in opposition
to John Feilden's proposed factory legislation, and to the Rochdale
church-rate. In 1839 he built the house which he called "One Ash," and
married Elizabeth, daughter of Jonathan Priestman of Newcastle-on-Tyne. In
November of the same year there was a dinner at Bolton to Abraham Paulton,
who had just returned from a successful Anti-Corn Law tour in Scotland.
Among the speakers were Cobden and Bright, and the dinner is memorable as
the first occasion on which the two future leaders appeared together on a
Free Trade platform. Bright is described by the historian of the League as
"a young man then appearing for the first time in any meeting out of his
own town, and giving evidence, by his energy and by his grasp of the
subject, of his capacity soon to take a leading part in the great
agitation." But his call had not yet come. In 1840 he led a movement
against the Rochdale church-rate, speaking from a tombstone in the
churchyard, where it looks down on the town in the valley below. A very
happy married life at home contented him, and at the opening of the Free
Trade hall in January 1840 he sat with the Rochdale deputation,
undistinguished in the body of the meeting. A daughter, Helen, was born to
him; but his young wife, after a long illness, died of consumption in
September 1841. Three days after her death at Leamington, Cobden called to
see him. "I was in the depths of grief," said Bright, when unveiling the
statue of his friend at Bradford in 1877, "I might almost say of despair,
for the life and sunshine of my house had been extinguished." Cobden spoke
some words of condolence, but after a time he looked up and said, 'There
are thousands of homes in England at this moment where wives, mothers and
children are dying of hunger. Now, when the first paroxysm of your grief is
past, I would advise you to come with me, and we will never rest till the
Corn Laws are repealed.' "I accepted his invitation," added Bright, "and
from that time we never ceased to labour hard on behalf of the resolution
which we had made." At the general election in 1841 Cobden was returned for
Stockport, and in 1843 Bright was the Free Trade candidate at a by-election
at Durham. He was defeated, but his successful competitor was unseated on
petition, and at the second contest Bright was returned. He was already
known in the country as Cobden's chief ally, and was received in the House
of Commons with a suspicion and hostility even greater than had met Cobden
himself. In the Anti-Corn Law movement the two speakers were the
complements and correlatives of each other. Cobden had the calmness and
confidence of the political philosopher, Bright had the passion and the
fervour of the popular orator. Cobden did the reasoning, Bright supplied
the declamation, but like Demosthenes he mingled argument with appeal. No
orator of modern times rose more rapidly to a foremost place. He was not
known beyond his own borough when Cobden called him to his side in 1841,
and he entered parliament towards the end of the session of 1843 with a
formidable reputation as an agitator. He had been all over England and
Scotland addressing vast meetings and, as a rule, carrying them with him;
he had taken a leading part in a conference held by the Anti-Corn Law
League in London, had led deputations to the duke of Sussex, to Sir James
Graham, then home secretary, and to Lord Ripon and Mr Gladstone, the
secretary and under secretary of the Board of Trade; and he was universally
recognized as the chief orator of the Free Trade movement. Wherever "John
Bright of Rochdale" was announced to speak, vast crowds assembled. He had
been so announced, for the last time, at the first great meeting in Drury
Lane theatre on 15th March 1843; henceforth his name was enough. He took
his seat in the House of Commons as one of the members for Durham on 28th
July 1843, and on 7th August delivered his maiden speech in support of a
motion by Mr Ewart for reduction of import duties. He was there, he said,
"not only as one of the representatives of the city of Durham, but also as
one of the representatives of that benevolent organization, the Anti-Corn
Law League." A member who heard the speech described Bright as "about the
middle size, rather firmly and squarely built, with a fair, clear
complexion, and an intelligent and pleasing expression of countenance. His
voice is good, his enunciation distinct, and his delivery free from any
unpleasant peculiarity or mannerism." He wore the usual Friend's coat, and
was regarded with much interest and hostile curiosity on both sides of the
House.

Mr Ewart's motion was defeated, but the movement of which Cobden and Bright
were the leaders continued to spread. In the autumn the League resolved to
raise L100,000; an appeal was made to the agricultural interest by great
meetings in the farming counties, and in November _The Times_ startled the
world by declaring, in a leading article, "The League is a great fact. It
would be foolish, nay, rash, to deny its importance." In London great
meetings were held in Covent Garden theatre, at which William Johnson Fox
was the chief orator, but Bright and Cobden were the leaders of the
movement. Bright publicly deprecated the popular tendency to regard Cobden
and himself as the chief movers in the agitation, and Cobden told a
Rochdale audience that he always stipulated that he should speak first, and
Bright should follow. His "more stately genius," as Mr John Morley calls
it, was already making him the undisputed master of the feelings of his
audiences. In the House of Commons his progress was slower. Cobden's
argumentative speeches were regarded more sympathetically than Bright's
more rhetorical appeals, and in a debate on Villiers's annual motion
against the Corn Laws Bright was heard with so much impatience that [v.04
p.0568] he was obliged to sit down. In the next session (1845) he moved for
an inquiry into the operation of the Game Laws. At a meeting of county
members earlier in the day Peel had advised them not to be led into
discussion by a violent speech from the member for Durham, but to let the
committee be granted without debate. Bright was not violent, and Cobden
said that he did his work admirably, and won golden opinions from all men.
The speech established his position in the House of Commons. In this
session Bright and Cobden came into opposition, Cobden voting for the
Maynooth Grant and Bright against it. On only one other occasion--a vote
for South Kensington--did they go into opposite lobbies, during twenty-five
years of parliamentary life. In the autumn of 1845 Bright retained Cobden
in the public career to which Cobden had invited him four years before.
Bright was in Scotland when a letter came from Cobden announcing his
determination, forced on him by business difficulties, to retire from
public work. Bright replied that if Cobden retired the mainspring of the
League was gone. "I can in no degree take your place," he wrote. "As a
second I can fight, but there are incapacities about me, of which I am
fully conscious, which prevent my being more than second in such a work as
we have laboured in." A few days later he set off for Manchester, posting
in that wettest of autumns through "the rain that rained away the Corn
Laws," and on his arrival got his friends together, and raised the money
which tided Cobden over the emergency. The crisis of the struggle had come.
Peel's budget in 1845 was a first step towards Free Trade. The bad harvest
and the potato disease drove him to the repeal of the Corn Laws, and at a
meeting in Manchester on 2nd July 1846 Cobden moved and Bright seconded a
motion dissolving the league. A library of twelve hundred volumes was
presented to Bright as a memorial of the struggle.

Bright married, in June 1847, Miss Margaret Elizabeth Leatham, of
Wakefield, by whom he had seven children, Mr John Albert Bright being the
eldest. In the succeeding July he was elected for Manchester, with Mr
Milner Gibson, without a contest. In the new parliament, as in the previous
session, he opposed legislation restricting the hours of labour, and, as a
Nonconformist, spoke against clerical control of national education. In
1848 he voted for Hume's household suffrage motion, and introduced a bill
for the repeal of the Game Laws. When Lord John Russell brought forward his
Ecclesiastical Titles Bill, Bright opposed it as "a little, paltry,
miserable measure," and foretold its failure. In this parliament he spoke
much on Irish questions. In a speech in favour of the government bill for a
rate in aid in 1849, he won loud cheers from both sides, and was
complimented by Disraeli for having sustained the reputation of that
assembly. From this time forward he had the ear of the House, and took
effective part in the debates. He spoke against capital punishment, against
church-rates, against flogging in the army, and against the Irish
Established Church. He supported Cobden's motion for the reduction of
public expenditure, and in and out of parliament pleaded for peace. In the
election of 1852 he was again returned for Manchester on the principles of
free trade, electoral reform and religious freedom. But war was in the air,
and the most impassioned speeches he ever delivered were addressed to this
parliament in fruitless opposition to the Crimean War. Neither the House
nor the country would listen. "I went to the House on Monday," wrote
Macaulay in March 1854, "and heard Bright say everything I thought." His
most memorable speech, the greatest he ever made, was delivered on the 23rd
of February 1855. "The angel of death has been abroad throughout the land.
You may almost hear the beating of his wings," he said, and concluded with
an appeal to the prime minister that moved the House as it had never been
moved within living memory. There was a tremor in Bright's voice in the
touching parts of his great speeches which stirred the feelings even of
hostile listeners. It was noted for the first time in this February speech,
but the most striking instance was in a speech on Mr Osborne Morgan's
Burials Bill in April 1875, in which he described a Quaker funeral, and
protested against the "miserable superstition of the phrase 'buried like a
dog.'" "In that sense," he said, "I shall be buried like a dog, and all
those with whom I am best acquainted, whom I best love and esteem, will be
'buried like a dog.' Nay more, my own ancestors, who in past time suffered
persecution for what is now held to be a righteous cause, have all been
buried like dogs, if that phrase is true." The tender, half-broken tones in
which these words were said, the inexpressible pathos of his voice and
manner, were never forgotten by those who heard that Wednesday morning
speech.

Bright was disqualified by illness during the whole of 1856 and 1857. In
Palmerston's penal dissolution in the latter year, Bright was rejected by
Manchester, but in August, while ill and absent, Birmingham elected him
without a contest. He returned to parliament in 1858, and in February
seconded the motion which threw out Lord Palmerston's government. Lord
Derby thereupon came into office for the second time, and Bright had the
satisfaction of assisting in the passing of two measures which he had long
advocated--the admission of Jews to parliament and the transfer of the
government of India from the East India Company to the crown. He was now
restored to full political activity, and in October addressed his new
constituents, and started a movement for parliamentary reform. He spoke at
great gatherings at Edinburgh, Glasgow, Bradford and Manchester, and his
speeches filled the papers. For the next nine years he was the protagonist
of Reform. Towards the close of the struggle he told the House of Commons
that a thousand meetings had been held, that at every one the doors were
open for any man to enter, yet that an almost unanimous vote for reform had
been taken. In the debates on the Reform Bills submitted to the House of
Commons from 1859. to 1867, Bright's was the most influential voice. He
rebuked Lowe's "Botany Bay view," and described Horsman as retiring to his
"cave of Adullam," and hooking in Lowe. "The party of two," he said,
"reminds me of the Scotch terrier, which was so covered with hair that you
could not tell which was the head and which was the tail." These and
similar phrases, such as the excuse for withdrawing the Reform Bill in the
year of the great budget of 1860--"you cannot get twenty wagons at once
through Temple Bar"--were in all men's mouths. It was one of the triumphs
of Bright's oratory that it constantly produced these popular cries. The
phrase "a free breakfast table" was his; and on the rejection of Forster's
Compensation for Disturbance Bill he used the phrase as to Irish
discontent, "Force is not a remedy."

During his great reform agitation Bright had vigorously supported Cobden in
the negotiations for the treaty of commerce with France, and had taken,
with his usual vehemence, the side of the North in the discussions in
England on the American Civil War. In March 1865 Cobden died, and Bright
told the House of Commons he dared not even attempt to express the feelings
which oppressed him, and sat down overwhelmed with grief. Their friendship
was one of the most characteristic features of the public life of their
time. "After twenty years of intimate and almost brotherly friendship with
him," said Bright, "I little knew how much I loved him till I had lost
him." In June 1865 parliament was dissolved, and Bright was returned for
Birmingham without opposition. Palmerston's death in the early autumn
brought Lord John Russell into power, and for the first time Bright gave
his support to the government. Russell's fourth Reform Bill was introduced,
was defeated by the Adullamites, and the Derby-Disraeli ministry was
installed. Bright declared Lord Derby's accession to be a declaration of
war against the working classes, and roused the great towns in the demand
for reform. Bright was the popular hero of the time. As a political leader
the winter of 1866-1867 was the culminating point in his career. The Reform
Bill was carried with a clause for minority representation, and in the
autumn of 1868 Bright, with two Liberal colleagues, was again returned for
Birmingham. Mr Gladstone came into power with a programme of Irish reform
in church and land such as Bright had long urged, and he accepted the post
of president of the Board of Trade. He thus became a member of the privy
council, with the title of Right Honourable, and from this time forth was a
recognized leader of the Liberal party in parliament and in the country. He
made a great speech [v.04 p.0569] on the second reading of the Irish Church
Bill, and wrote a letter on the House of Lords, in which he said, "In
harmony with the nation they may go on for a long time, but throwing
themselves athwart its course they may meet with accidents not pleasant for
them to think of." He also spoke strongly in the same session in favour of
the bill permitting marriage with a deceased wife's sister. The next
session found him disqualified by a severe illness, which caused his
retirement from office at the end of the year, and kept him out of public
life for four years. In August 1873 Mr Gladstone reconstructed his cabinet,
and Bright returned to it as chancellor of the duchy of Lancaster. But his
hair had become white, and though he spoke again with much of his former
vigour, he was now an old man. In the election in January 1874 Bright and
his colleagues were returned for Birmingham without opposition. When Mr
Gladstone resigned the leadership of his party in 1875, Bright was chairman
of the party meeting which chose Lord Hartington as his successor. He took
a less prominent part in political discussion till the Eastern Question
brought Great Britain to the verge of war with Russia, and his old energy
flamed up afresh. In the debate on the vote of credit in February 1878, he
made one of his impressive speeches, urging the government not to increase
the difficulties manufacturers had in finding employment for their
workpeople by any single word or act which could shake confidence in
business. The debate lasted five days. On the fifth day a telegram from Mr
Layard was published announcing that the Russians were nearing
Constantinople. The day, said _The Times_, "was crowded with rumours,
alarms, contradictions, fears, hopes, resolves, uncertainties." In both
Houses Mr Layard's despatch was read, and in the excited Commons Mr
Forster's resolution opposing the vote of credit was withdrawn. Bright,
however, distrusted the ambassador at the Porte, and gave reasons for
doubting the alarming telegram. While he was speaking a note was put into
the hands of Sir Stafford Northcote, and when Bright sat down he read it to
the House. It was a confirmation from the Russian prime minister of
Bright's doubts: "There is not a word of truth in the rumours which have
reached you." At the general election in 1880 he was re-elected at
Birmingham, and joined Mr Gladstone's new government as chancellor of the
duchy of Lancaster. For two sessions he spoke and voted with his
colleagues, but after the bombardment of the Alexandria forts he left the
ministry and never held office again. He felt most painfully the severance
from his old and trusted leader, but it was forced on him by his conviction
of the danger and impolicy of foreign entanglements. He, however, gave a
general support to Mr Gladstone's government. In 1883 he took the chair at
a meeting of the Liberation Society in Mr Spurgeon's chapel; and in June of
that year was the object of an unparalleled demonstration at Birmingham to
celebrate his twenty-five years of service as its representative. At this
celebration he spoke strongly of "the Irish rebel party," and accused the
Conservatives of "alliance" with them, but withdrew the imputation when Sir
Stafford Northcote moved that such language was a breach of the privileges
of the House of Commons. At a banquet to Lord Spencer he accused the Irish
members of having "exhibited a boundless sympathy for criminals and
murderers." He refused in the House of Commons to apologise for these
words, and was supported in his refusal by both sides of the House. At the
Birmingham election in 1885 he stood for the central division of the
redistributed constituency; he was opposed by Lord Randolph Churchill, but
was elected by a large majority. In the new parliament he voted against the
Home Rule Bill, and it was generally felt that in the election of 1886
which followed its defeat, when he was re-elected without opposition, his
letters told with fatal effect against the Home Rule Liberals. His
contribution to the discussion was a suggestion that the Irish members
should form a grand committee to which every Irish bill should go after
first reading. The break-up of the Liberal party filled him with gloom. His
last speech at Birmingham was on 29th March 1888, at a banquet to celebrate
Mr Chamberlain's return from his peace mission to the United States. He
spoke of imperial federation as a "dream and an absurdity." In May his
illness returned, he took to his bed in October, and died on the 27th of
March 1889. He was buried in the graveyard of the meeting-house of the
Society of Friends in Rochdale.

Bright had much literary and social recognition in his later years. In 1882
he was elected lord rector of the university of Glasgow, and Dr Dale wrote
of his rectorial address: "It was not the old Bright." "I am weary of
public speaking," he had told Dr Dale; "my mind is almost a blank." He was
given an honorary degree of the university of Oxford in 1886, and in 1888 a
statue of him was erected at Birmingham. The 3rd marquess of Salisbury said
of him, and it sums up his character as a public man: "He was the greatest
master of English oratory that this generation--I may say several
generations--has seen.... At a time when much speaking has depressed, has
almost exterminated eloquence, he maintained that robust, powerful and
vigorous style in which he gave fitting expression to the burning and noble
thoughts he desired to utter."

See _The Life and Speeches of the Right Hon. John Bright, M.P_., by George
Barnett Smith, 2 vols. 8vo (1881); _The Life of John Bright, M.P._, by John
M^cGilchrist, in Cassell's Representative Biographies (1868); _John
Bright_, by C.A. Vince (1898); _Speeches on Parliamentary Reform by John
Bright, M.P., revised by Himself_ (1866); _Speeches on Questions of Public
Policy_, by John Bright, M.P., edited by J.E. Thorold Rogers, 2 vols. 8vo
(1868); _Public Addresses_, edited by J.E. Thorold Rogers, 8vo (1879);
_Public Letters of the Right Hon. John Bright, M.P._, collected by H.J.
Leech (1885).

(P. W. C.)

BRIGHTLINGSEA (pronounced BRITTLESEA), a port and fishing station in the
Harwich parliamentary division of Essex, England, on a creek opening from
the east shore of the Colne estuary, the terminus of a branch from
Colchester of the Great Eastern railway, 621/2 m. E.N.E. of London. Pop. of
urban district (1901) 4501. The Colchester oyster beds are mainly in this
part of the Colne, and the oyster fishery is the chief industry.
Boat-building is carried on. This is also a favourite yachting centre. The
church of All Saints, principally Perpendicular, has interesting monuments
and brasses, and a fine lofty tower and west front. Brightlingsea, which
appears in Domesday, is a member of the Cinque Port of Sandwich in Kent.
Near the opposite shore of the creek is St Osyth's priory, which originated
as a nunnery founded by Osyth, a grand-daughter of Penda, king of Mercia,
martyred (c. 653) by Norse invaders. A foundation for Augustinian canons
followed on the site early in the 12th century. The remains, incorporated
with a modern residence, include a late Perpendicular gateway, abbots'
tower, clock tower and crypt. The gateway, an embattled structure with
flanking turrets, is particularly fine, the entire front being panelled and
ornamented with canopied niches. The church of St Osyth, also Perpendicular
in the main, is of interest.

BRIGHTON, a watering-place of Bourke county, Victoria, Australia, 71/2 m. by
rail S.E. of Melbourne, of which it is practically a suburb. It stands on
the east shore of Port Phillip, and has two piers, a great extent of sandy
beach and numerous beautiful villas. Pop. (1901) 10,029.

BRIGHTON, a municipal, county and parliamentary borough of Sussex, England,
one of the best-known seaside resorts in the United Kingdom, 51 m. S. from
London by the London, Brighton & South Coast railway. Pop. (1901) 123,478.
Its ready accessibility from the metropolis is the chief factor in its
popularity. It is situated on the seaward slope of the South Downs; the
position is sheltered from inclement winds, and the climate is generally
mild. The sea-front, overlooking the English Channel, stretches nearly 4 m.
from Kemp Town on the east to Hove (a separate municipal borough) on the
west. Inland, including the suburb of Preston, the town extends some 2 m.
The tendency of the currents in the Channel opposite Brighton is to drive
the shingle eastward, and encroachments of the sea were frequent and
serious until the erection of a massive sea-wall, begun about 1830, 60 ft.
high, 23 ft. thick at the base, and 3 ft. at the summit. There are numerous
modern churches and chapels, many of them very handsome; and the former
parish church of St Nicholas remains, a Decorated structure containing a
Norman font and a memorial to the great duke of Wellington. The incumbency
of Trinity Chapel was held by the famous [v.04 p.0570] preacher Frederick
William Robertson (1847-1853). The town hall and the parochial offices are
the principal administrative buildings. Numerous institutions contribute to
the entertainment of visitors. Of these the most remarkable is the
Pavilion, built as a residence for the prince regent (afterwards George
IV.) and remodelled in 1819 by the architect, John Nash, in a grotesque
Eastern style of architecture. In 1849 it was purchased by the town for
L53,000, and is devoted to various public uses, containing a museum,
assembly-rooms and picture-galleries. The detached building, formerly the
stables, is converted into a fine concert hall; it is lighted by a vast
glazed dome approaching that of St Paul's cathedral, London, in dimensions.
There are several theatres and music-halls. The aquarium, the property of
the corporation, contains an excellent marine collection, but is also used
as a concert hall and winter garden, and a garden is laid out on its roof.
The Booth collection of British birds, bequeathed to the corporation by
E.T. Booth, was opened in 1893. There are two piers, of which the Palace
pier, near the site of the old chain pier (1823), which was washed away in
1896, is near the centre of the town, while the West pier is towards Hove.
Preston and Queen's parks are the principal of several public recreation
grounds; and the racecourse at Kemp Town is also the property of the town.
Educational establishments are numerous, and include Brighton College,
which ranks high among English public schools. There are municipal schools
of science, technology and art. St Mary's Hall (1836) is devoted to the
education of poor clergymen's daughters. Among many hospitals, the county
hospital (1828), "open to the sick and lame poor of every country and
nation," may be mentioned. There are an extensive mackerel and herring
fishery, and motor engineering works. The parliamentary borough, which
includes the parish of Hove, returns two members. The county borough was
created in 1888. The municipal borough is under a mayor, 14 aldermen and 42
councillors. Area, 2536 acres.

Although there is evidence of Roman and Saxon occupation of the site, the
earliest mention of Brighton (Bristelmeston, Brichelmestone,
Brighthelmston) is the Domesday Book record that its three manors belonged
to Earl Godwin and were held by William de Warenne. Of these, two passed to
the priories of Lewes and Michelham respectively, and after the dissolution
of the monasteries were subject to frequent sale and division. The third
descended to the earls of Arundel, falling to the share of the duke of
Norfolk in 1415, and being divided in 1502 between the families of Howard
and Berkeley. That Brighton was a large fishing village in 1086 is evident
from the rent of 4000 herrings; in 1285 it had a separate constable, and in
1333 it was assessed for a tenth, and fifteenth at L5:4:63/4, half the
assessment of Shoreham. In 1340 there were no merchants there, only tenants
of lands, but its prosperity increased during the 15th and 16th centuries,
and it was assessed at L6:12:8 in 1534. There is, however, no indication
that it was a borough. In 1580 commissioners sent to decide disputes
between the fishermen and landsmen found that from time immemorial Brighton
had been governed by two head boroughs sitting in the borough court, and
assisted by a council called the Twelve. This constitution disappeared
before 1772, when commissioners were appointed. Brighton refused a charter
offered by George, prince of Wales, but was incorporated in 1854. It had
become a parliamentary borough in 1832. From a fishing town in 1656 it
became a fashionable resort in 1756; its popularity increased after the
visit of the prince of Wales (see GEORGE IV.) to the duke of Cumberland in
1783, and was ensured by his building the Pavilion in 1784-1787, and his
adoption of it as his principal residence; and his association with Mrs
Fitzherbert at Brighton was the starting-point of its fashionable repute.

See _Victoria County History--Sussex; Sussex Archaeological Society
Transactions_, vol. ii.; L. Melville, _Brighton, its History, its Follies
and its Fashions_ (London, 1909).

BRIGHT'S DISEASE, a term in medicine applied to a class of diseases of the
kidneys (acute and chronic nephritis) which have as their most prominent
symptom the presence of albumen in the urine, and frequently also the
coexistence of dropsy. These associated symptoms in connexion with kidney
disease were first described in 1827 by Dr Richard Bright (1789-1858).
Since that period it has been established that the symptoms, instead of
being, as was formerly supposed, the result of one form of disease of the
kidneys, may be dependent on various morbid conditions of those organs (see
KIDNEY DISEASES). Hence the term Bright's disease, which is retained in
medical nomenclature in honour of Dr Bright, must be understood as having a
generic application.

The symptoms are usually of a severe character. Pain in the back, vomiting
and febrile disturbance commonly usher in the attack. Dropsy, varying in
degree from slight puffiness of the face to an accumulation of fluid
sufficient to distend the whole body, and to occasion serious embarrassment
to respiration, is a very common accompaniment. The urine is reduced in
quantity, is of dark, smoky or bloody colour, and exhibits to chemical
reaction the presence of a large amount of albumen, while, under the
microscope, blood corpuscles and casts, as above mentioned, are found in
abundance.

This state of acute inflammation may by its severity destroy life, or,
short of this, may by continuance result in the establishment of one of the
chronic forms of Bright's disease. On the other hand an arrest of the
inflammatory action frequently occurs, and this is marked by the increased
amount of the urine, and the gradual disappearance of its albumen and other
abnormal constituents; as also by the subsidence of the dropsy and the
rapid recovery of strength.

In the treatment of acute Bright's disease, good results are often obtained
from local depletion, from warm baths and from the careful employment of
diuretics and purgatives. Chronic Bright's disease is much less amenable to
treatment, but by efforts to maintain the strength and improve the quality
of the blood by strong nourishment, and at the same time by guarding
against the risks of complications, life may often be prolonged in
comparative comfort, and even a certain measure of improvement be
experienced.

BRIGNOLES, a town in the department of Var in the S.E. of France, 36 m. by
rail N. of Toulon. Pop. (1906) 3639. It is built at a height of 754 ft.
above the sea-level, in a fertile valley, and on the right bank of the
Carami river. It contains the old summer palace of the counts of Provence,
and has an active trade, especially in prunes, known as _prunes de
Brignoles_. Its old name was _Villa Puerorum_, as the children of the
counts of Provence were often brought up here. It was sacked on several
occasions during the religious wars in the 16th century. Twelve miles to
the N.W. is St Maximin (with a fine medieval church), which is one of the
best starting-points for the most famous pilgrimage resort in Provence, the
Sainte Baume, wherein St Mary Magdalene is said to have taken refuge. This
is 20 m. distant by road.

(W. A. B. C.)

BRIHASPATI, or BRAHMANASPATI ("god of strength"), a deity of importance in
early Hindu mythology. In the Rigveda he is represented as the god of
prayer, aiding Indra in his conquest of the cloud-demon, and at times
appears to be identified with Agni, god of fire. He is the offspring of
Heaven and Earth, the two worlds; is the inspirer of prayer and the guide
and protector of the pious. He is pictured as having seven mouths, a
hundred wings and horns and is armed with bow and arrows and an axe. He
rides in a chariot drawn by red horses. In the later scriptures he is
represented as a Rishi or seer.

See A.A. Macdonell, _Vedic Mythology_ (Strassburg, 1897).

BRIL, PAUL (1554-1626), Flemish painter, was born at Antwerp. The success
of his elder brother Matthew (1550-1584) in the Vatican induced him to go
to Rome to live. On the death of Matthew, Paul, who far surpassed him as an
artist, succeeded to his pensions and employments. He painted landscapes
with a depth of chiaroscuro then little practised in Italy, and introduced
into them figures well drawn and finely coloured. One of his best
compositions is the "Martyrdom of St Clement," in the Sala Clementina of
the Vatican.

BRILL, the name given to a flat-fish (_Psetta laevis_, or _Rhombus laevis_)
which is a species closely related to the turbot, differing [v.04 p.0571]
from it in having very small scales, being smaller in size, having no bony
tubercules in the skin, and being reddish in colour. It abounds on parts of
the British coast, and is only less favoured for the table than the turbot
itself.

BRILLAT-SAVARIN, ANTHELME (1755-1826), French gastronomist, was born at
Belley, France, on the 1st of April 1755. In 1789 he was a deputy, in 1793
mayor of Belley. To escape proscription he fled from France to Switzerland,
and went thence to the United States, where he played in the orchestra of a
New York theatre. On the fall of Robespierre he returned to France, and in
1797 became a member of the court of cassation. He wrote various volumes on
political economy and law, but his name is famous for his _Physiologie du
gout_, a compendium of the art of dining. Many editions of this work have
been published. Brillat-Savarin died in Paris on the 2nd of February 1826.

BRIMSTONE, the popular name of sulphur (_q.v._), particularly of the
commercial "roll sulphur." The word means literally "burning stone"; the
first part being formed from the stem of the Mid. Eng. _brennen_, to burn.
Earlier forms of the word are _brenstone_, _bernstone_, _brynstone,_ &c.

BRIN, BENEDETTO (1833-1898), Italian naval administrator, was born at Turin
on the 17th of May 1833, and until the age of forty worked with distinction
as a naval engineer. In 1873 Admiral Saint-Bon, minister of marine,
appointed him under-secretary of state. The two men completed each other;
Saint-Bon conceived a type of ship, Brin made the plans and directed its
construction. On the advent of the Left to power in 1876, Brin was
appointed minister of marine by Depretis, a capacity in which he continued
the programme of Saint-Bon, while enlarging and completing it in such way
as to form the first organic scheme for the development of the Italian
fleet. The huge warships "Italia" and "Dandolo" were his work, though he
afterwards abandoned their type in favour of smaller and faster vessels of
the "Varese" and the "Garibaldi" class. By his initiative Italian naval
industry, almost non-existent in 1873, made rapid progress. During his
eleven years' ministry (1876-1878 with Depretis, 1884-1891 with Depretis
and Crispi, 1896-1898 with Rudini), he succeeded in creating large private
shipyards, engine works and metallurgical works for the production of
armour, steel plates and guns. In 1892 he entered the Giolitti cabinet as
minister for foreign affairs, accompanying, in that capacity, the king and
queen of Italy to Potsdam, but showed weakness towards France on the
occasion of the massacre of Italian workmen at Aigues-Mortes. He died on
the 24th of May 1898, while minister of marine in the Rudini cabinet. He,
more than any other man, must be regarded as the practical creator of the
Italian navy.

BRINDABAN, a town of British India, in the Muttra district of the United
Provinces, on the right bank of the Jumna, 6 m. N. of Muttra. Pop. (1901)
22,717. Brindaban is one of the most popular places of pilgrimage in India,
being associated with the cult of Krishna as a shepherd. It contains
bathing-stairs, tanks and wells, and a great number of handsome temples, of
which the finest is that of Govind Deva, a cruciform vaulted building of
red sandstone, dating from 1590. The town was founded earlier in the same
century.

BRINDISI (anc. _Brundisium_, _q.v._), a seaport town and archiepiscopal see
of Apulia, Italy, in the province of Lecce, 24 m. N.W. by rail from the
town of Lecce, and 346 m. from Ancona. Pop.(1861) 8000; (1871) 13,755;
(1901) 25,317. The chief importance of Brindisi is due to its position as a
starting-point for the East. The inner harbour, admirably sheltered and 27
to 30 ft. in depth, allows ocean steamers to lie at the quays. Brindisi
has, however, been abandoned by the large steamers of the Peninsular &
Oriental Steam Navigation Company, which had called there since 1870, but
since 1898 call at Marseilles instead; small express boats, carrying the
mails, still leave every week, connecting with the larger steamers at Port
Said; but the number of passengers leaving the port, which for the years
1893-1897 averaged 14,728, was only 7608 in 1905, and only 943 of these
were carried by the P. & O. boats. The harbour railway station was not
completed until 1905 (_Consular Report_, No. 3672, 1906, pp. 13 sqq.). The
port was cleared in 1905 by 1492 vessels of 1,486,269 tons. The imports
represented a value of L629,892 and the exports a value of L663,201--an
increase of L84,077 and L57,807 respectively on the figures of the previous
year, while in 1899 the amounts, which were below the average, were only
L298,400 and L253,000. The main imports are coal, flour, sulphur, timber
and metals; and the main exports, wine and spirits, oil and dried fruits.

Frederick II. erected a castle, with huge round towers, to guard the inner
harbour; it is now a convict prison. The cathedral, ruined by earthquakes,
was restored in 1743-1749, but has some remains of its mosaic pavement
(1178). The baptismal church of S. Giovanni al Sepolcro (11th century) is
now a museum. The town was captured in 836 by the Saracens, and destroyed
by them; but was rebuilt in the 11th century by Lupus the protospatharius,
Byzantine governor. In 1071 it fell into the hands of the Normans, and
frequently appears in the history of the Crusades. Early in the 14th
century the inner port was blocked by Giovanni Orsini, prince of Taranto;
the town was devastated by pestilence in 1348, and was plundered in 1352
and 1383; but even greater damage was done by the earthquake of 1456.

(T. AS.)

BRINDLEY, JAMES (1716-1772), English engineer, was born at Thornsett,
Derbyshire, in 1716. His parents were in very humble circumstances, and he
received little or no education. At the age of seventeen he was apprenticed
to a millwright near Macclesfield, and soon after completing his
apprenticeship he set up in business for himself as a wheelwright at Leek,
quickly becoming known for his ingenuity and skill in repairing all kinds
of machinery. In 1752 he designed and set up an engine for draining some
coal-pits at Clifton in Lancashire. Three years later he extended his
reputation by completing the machinery for a silk-mill at Congleton. In
1759, when the duke of Bridgewater was anxious to improve the outlets for
the coal on his estates, Brindley advised the construction of a canal from
Worsley to Manchester. The difficulties in the way were great, but all were
surmounted by his genius, and his crowning triumph was the construction of
an aqueduct to carry the canal at an elevation of 39 ft. over the river
Irwell at Barton. The great success of this canal encouraged similar
projects, and Brindley was soon engaged in extending his first work to the
Mersey, at Runcorn. He then designed and nearly completed what he called
the Grand Trunk Canal, connecting the Trent and Humber with the Mersey. The
Staffordshire and Worcestershire, the Oxford and the Chesterfield Canals
were also planned by him, and altogether he laid out over 360 m. of canals.
He died at Turnhurst, Staffordshire, on the 30th of September 1772.
Brindley retained to the last a peculiar roughness of character and
demeanour; but his innate power of thought more than compensated for his
lack of training. It is told of him that when in any difficulty he used to
retire to bed, and there remain thinking out his problem until the solution
became clear to him. His mechanical ingenuity and fertility of resource
were very remarkable, and he undoubtedly possessed the engineering faculty
in a very high degree. He was an enthusiastic believer in canals, and his
reported answer, when asked the use of navigable rivers, "To feed canals,"
is characteristic, if not altogether authentic.

BRINTON, DANIEL GARRISON (1837-1899), American archaeologist and
ethnologist, was born at Thornbury, Pennsylvania, on the 13th of May 1837.
He graduated at Yale in 1858, studied for two years in the Jefferson
Medical College, and then for one year travelled in Europe and continued
his studies at Paris and Heidelberg. From 1862 to 1865, during the Civil
War in America, he was a surgeon in the Union army, acting for one year,
1864-1865, as surgeon in charge of the U.S. Army general hospital at
Quincy, Illinois. After the war he practised medicine at Westchester,
Pennsylvania, for several years; was the editor of a weekly periodical, the
_Medical and Surgical Reporter_, in Philadelphia, from 1874 to 1887; became
professor of ethnology and archaeology in the Academy of Natural Sciences
in Philadelphia in 1884, and was professor of American linguistics and
archaeology in the university of Pennsylvania from 1886 until his death at
Philadelphia on the 31st of July 1899. [v.04 p.0572] He was a member of
numerous learned societies in the United States and in Europe, and was
president at different times of the Numismatic and Antiquarian Society of
Philadelphia, of the American Folk-Lore Society and of the American
Association for the Advancement of Science. During the period from 1859
(when he published his first book) to 1899, he wrote a score of books,
several of them of great value, and a large number of pamphlets, brochures,
addresses and magazine articles. His principal works are:--_The Myths of
the New World_ (1868), the first attempt to analyse and correlate,
according to true scientific principles, the mythology of the American
Indians; _The Religious Sentiment: Its Sources and Aim: A Contribution to
the Science and Philosophy of Religion_ (1876); _American Hero Myths_
(1882); _Essays of an Americanist_ (1890); _Races and Peoples_ (1890); _The
American Race_ (1891); _The Pursuit of Happiness_ (1893); and _Religions of
Primitive People_ (1897). In addition, he edited and published a _Library
of American Aboriginal Literature_ (8 vols. 1882-1890), a valuable
contribution to the science of anthropology in America. Of the eight
volumes, six were edited by Brinton himself, one by Horatio Hale and one by
A.S. Gatschet.

BRINVILLIERS, MARIE MADELEINE MARGUERITE D'AUBRAY, MARQUISE DE (c.
1630-1676), French poisoner, daughter of Dreux d'Aubray, civil lieutenant
of Paris, was born in Paris about 1630. In 1651 she married the marquis de
Brinvilliers, then serving in the regiment of Normandy. Contemporary
evidence describes the marquise at this time as a pretty and much-courted
little woman, with a fascinating air of childlike innocence. In 1659 her
husband introduced her to his friend Godin de Sainte-Croix, a handsome
young cavalry officer of extravagant tastes and bad reputation, whose
mistress she became. Their relations soon created a public scandal, and as
the marquis de Brinvilliers, who had left France to avoid his creditors,
made no effort to terminate them, M. d'Aubray secured the arrest of
Sainte-Croix on a _lettre de cachet_. For a year Sainte-Croix remained a
prisoner in the Bastille, where he is popularly supposed to have acquired a
knowledge of poisons from his fellow-prisoner, the Italian poisoner Exili.
When he left the Bastille, he plotted with his willing mistress his revenge
upon her father. She cheerfully undertook to experiment with the poisons
which Sainte-Croix, possibly with the help of a chemist, Christopher
Glaser, prepared, and found subjects ready to hand in the poor who sought
her charity, and the sick whom she visited in the hospitals. Meanwhile
Sainte-Croix, completely ruined financially, enlarged his original idea,
and determined that not only M. Dreux d'Aubray but also the latter's two
sons and other daughter should be poisoned, so that the marquise de
Brinvilliers and himself might come into possession of the large family
fortune. In February 1666, satisfied with the efficiency of Sainte-Croix's
preparations and with the ease with which they could be administered
without detection, the marquise poisoned her father, and in 1670, with the
connivance of their valet La Chaussee, her two brothers. A post-mortem
examination suggested the real cause of death, but no suspicion was
directed to the murderers. Before any attempt could be made on the life of
Mlle Therese d'Aubray, Sainte-Croix suddenly died. As he left no heirs the
police were called in, and discovered among his belongings documents
seriously incriminating the marquise and La Chaussee. The latter was
arrested, tortured into a complete confession, and broken alive on the
wheel (1673), but the marquise escaped, taking refuge first probably in
England, then in Germany, and finally in a convent at Liege, whence she was
decoyed by a police emissary disguised as a priest. A full account of her
life and crimes was found among her papers. Her attempt to commit suicide
was frustrated, and she was taken to Paris, where she was beheaded and her
body burned on the 16th of July 1676.

See G. Roullier, _La Marquise de Brinvilliers_ (Paris, 1883); Toiseleur,
_Trois enigmes historiques_ (Paris, 1882).

BRIONIAN ISLANDS, a group of small islands, in the Adriatic Sea, off the
west coast of Istria, from which they are separated by the narrow Canale di
Fasana. They belong to Austria and are twelve in number. Up to a recent
period they were chiefly noted for their quarries, which have been worked
for centuries and have supplied material not only for the palaces and
bridges of Venice and the whole Adriatic coast, but latterly for Vienna and
Berlin also. As they command the entrance to the naval harbour of Pola, a
strong fortress, "Fort Tegetthoff," has been erected on the largest of them
(Brioni), together with minor fortifications on some of the others. The
islands are inhabited by about 100 Italian quarrymen.

BRIOSCO, ANDREA (c. 1470-1532), Italian sculptor and architect, known as
Riccio ("curly-headed"), was born at Padua. In architecture he is known by
the church of Sta Giustina in his native city, but he is most famous as a
worker in metal. His masterpieces are the bronze Paschal candelabrum (11
ft. high) in the choir of the Santo (S. Antonio) at Padua (1515), and the
two bronze reliefs (1507) of "David dancing before the Ark" and "Judith and
Holofernes" in the same church. His bronze and marble tomb of the physician
Girolamo della Torre in San Fermo at Verona was beautifully decorated with
reliefs, which were taken away by the French and are now in the Louvre. A
number of other works which emanated from his workshop are attributed to
him; and he has been suggested, but doubtfully, as the author of a fine
bronze relief, a "Dance of Nymphs," in the Wallace collection at Hertford
House, London.

BRIOUDE, a town of central France, capital of an arrondissement in the
department of Haute-Loire, on the left bank of the Allier, 1467 ft. above
the sea, 47 m. N.W. of Le Puy on the Paris-Lyon railway. Pop. (1906) 4581.
Brioude has to a great extent escaped modernization and still has many old
houses and fountains. Its streets are narrow and irregular, but the town is
surrounded by wide boulevards lined with trees. The only building of
consequence is the church of St Julian (12th and 13th centuries) in the
Romanesque style of Auvergne, of which the choir, with its apse and
radiating chapels and the mosaic ornamentation of the exterior, is a fine
example. Brioude is the seat of a sub-prefect, and of tribunals of first
instance and of commerce. The plain in which it is situated is of great
fertility; the grain trade of the town is considerable, and
market-gardening is carried on in the outskirts. The industries include
brewing, saw-milling, lace-making and antimony mining and founding.

Brioude, the ancient _Brinas_, was formerly a place of considerable
importance. It was in turn besieged and captured by the Goths (532), the
Burgundians, the Saracens (732) and the Normans. In 1181 the viscount of
Polignac, who had sacked the town two years previously, made public apology
in front of the church, and established a body of twenty-five knights to
defend the relics of St Julian. For some time after 1361 the town was the
headquarters of Berenger, lord of Castelnau, who was at the head of one of
the bands of military adventurers which then devastated France. The knights
(or canons, as they afterwards became) of St Julian bore the title of
counts of Brioude, and for a long time opposed themselves to the civic
liberties of the inhabitants.

BRIQUEMAULT (or BRIQUEMAUT), FRANCOIS DE BEAUVAIS, SEIGNEUR DE (c.
1502-1572), leader of the Huguenots during the first religious wars, was
the son of Adrien de Briquemault and Alexane de Sainte Ville, and was born
about 1502. His first campaign was under the count of Brissac in the
Piedmontese wars. On his return to France in 1554 he joined Admiral
Coligny. Charged with the defence of Rouen, in 1562, he resigned in favour
of Montgomery, to whom the prince of Conde had entrusted the task, and went
over to England, where he concluded the treaty of Hampton Court on the 20th
of September. He then returned to France, and took Dieppe from the
Catholics before the conclusion of peace. If his share in the second
religious war was less important, he played a very active part in the
third. He fought at Jarnac, Roche-Abeille and Montcontour, assisted in the
siege of Poitiers, was nearly captured by the Catholics at Bourg-Dieu,
re-victualled Vezelay, and almost surprised Bourges. In 1570, being charged
by Coligny to stop the army of the princes in its ascent of the Rhone
valley, he crossed Burgundy and effected his junction [v.04 p.0573] with
the admiral at St. Etienne in May. On the 21st of the following June he
assisted in achieving the victory of Arnay-le-Duc, and was then employed to
negotiate a marriage between the prince of Navarre and Elizabeth of
England. Being in Paris on the night of St Bartholomew he took refuge in
the house of the English ambassador, but was arrested there. With his
friend Arnaud da Cavagnes he was delivered over to the parlement, and
failed in courage when confronted with his judges, seeking to escape death
by unworthy means. He was condemned, nevertheless, on the 27th of October
1572, to the last penalty and to the confiscation of his property, and on
the 29th of October he and Cavagnes were executed.

See _Histoire ecclesiastique des Eglises reformees au royaume de France_
(new edition, 1884), vol. ii.; _La France protestante_ (2nd edition), vol.
ii., article "Beauvais."

BRIQUETTE (diminutive of Fr. _brique_, brick), a form of fuel, known also
as "patent fuel," consisting of small coal compressed into solid blocks by
the aid of some binding material. For making briquettes the small coal, if
previously washed, is dried to reduce the moisture to at most 4%, and if
necessary crushed in a disintegrator. It is then incorporated in a pug mill
with from 8 to 10% of gas pitch, and softened by heating to between 70 deg. and
90 deg. C. to a plastic mass, which is moulded into blocks and compacted by a
pressure of 1/2 to 2 tons per sq. in. in a machine with a rotating die-plate
somewhat like that used in making semi-plastic clay bricks. When cold, the
briquettes, which usually weigh from 7 to 20 lb each, although smaller
sizes are made for domestic use, become quite hard, and can be handled with
less breakage than the original coal. Their principal use is as fuel for
marine and locomotive boilers, the evaporative value being about the same
as, or somewhat greater than, that of coal. The principal seat of the
manufacture in Great Britain is in South Wales, where the dust and smalls
resulting from the handling of the best steam coals (which are very
brittle) are obtainable in large quantities and find no other use. Some
varieties of lignite, when crushed and pressed at a steam heat, soften
sufficiently to furnish compact briquettes without requiring any cementing
material. Briquettes of this kind are made to a large extent from the
tertiary lignites in the vicinity of Cologne; they are used mainly for
house fuel on the lower Rhine and in Holland, and occasionally come to
London.

BRISBANE, SIR THOMAS MAKDOUGALL (1773-1860), Scottish soldier and
astronomer, was born on the 23rd of July 1773 at Brisbane House, near
Largs, in Ayrshire. He entered the army in 1789, and served in Flanders,
the West Indies and the Peninsula. In 1814 he was sent to North America; on
the return of Napoleon from Elba he was recalled, but did not arrive in
time to take part in the battle of Waterloo. In 1821 he was appointed
governor of New South Wales. During the four years for which he held that
office, although he allowed the finances of the colony to get into
confusion, he endeavoured to improve its condition by introducing the vine,
sugar-cane and tobacco plant, and by encouraging the breeding of horses and
the reclamation of land. At his instigation exploring parties were sent
out, and one of these discovered the Brisbane river which was named after
him. He established an astronomical observatory at Paramatta in 1822, and
the _Brisbane Catalogue_, which was printed in 1835 and contained 7385
stars, was the result of observations made there in 1822-1826. The
observatory was discontinued in 1855. After his return to Scotland he
resided chiefly at Makerstoun in Roxburghshire, where, as at Brisbane
House, he had a large and admirably equipped observatory. Important
magnetic observations were begun at Makerstoun in 1841, and the results
gained him in 1848 the Keith prize of the Royal Society of Edinburgh, in
whose _Transactions_ they were published. In 1836 he was made a baronet,
and G.C.B. in 1837; and in 1841 he became general. He was elected president
of the Royal Society of Edinburgh after the death of Sir Walter Scott in
1833, and in the following year acted as president of the British
Association. He died at Brisbane House on the 27th of January 1860. He
founded two gold medals for the encouragement of scientific research, one
in the award of the Royal Society of Edinburgh, and the other in that of
the Scottish Society of Arts.

BRISBANE, the capital of Queensland, Australia. It is situated in Stanley
county, on the banks of the river Brisbane, 25 m. from its mouth in Moreton
Bay. It is built on a series of hills rising from the river-banks, but some
parts of it, such as Woollongabba and South Brisbane, occupy low-lying
flats, which have sometimes been the scene of disastrous floods. The main
streets and principal buildings of the city are situated on a tongue of
land formed by a southward bend of the river. The extremity of the tongue,
however, is open. Here, adjoining one another, are the botanical gardens,
the grounds surrounding Government House, the official residence of the
governor of the colony, and the Houses of Parliament, and Queen's Park,
which is used as a recreation ground. From this park Albert Street runs for
about three-quarters of a mile through the heart of the city, leading to
Albert Park, in which is the observatory. Queen's Street, the main
thoroughfare of Brisbane, crosses Albert Street midway between the two
parks and leads across the Victoria Bridge to the separate city of South
Brisbane on the other side of the river. The Victoria Bridge is a fine
steel structure, which replaced the bridge swept away by floods in February
1893. Brisbane has a large number of buildings of architectural merit,
though in some cases their effect is marred by the narrowness of the
streets in which they stand. Among the most prominent are the Houses of
Parliament, the great domed custom-house on the river-bank, the lands
office, the general post-office, the town halls of Brisbane and South
Brisbane, and the opera house. The Roman Catholic cathedral of St Stephen
(Elizabeth Street) is an imposing building, having a detached campanile
containing the largest bell in Australia. The foundation-stone of the
Anglican cathedral, on an elevated site in Ann Street, was laid by the
prince of Wales (as duke of York) in 1901. The city is the seat of a Roman
Catholic archbishop and of an Anglican bishop. Many of the commercial and
private buildings are also worthy of notice, especially the Queensland
National Bank, a classic Italian structure, the massive treasury buildings,
one of the largest erections in Australia, the Queensland Club with its
wide colonnades in Italian Renaissance style, and the great buildings of
the Brisbane Newspaper Company. Brisbane is well provided with parks and
open spaces; the Victoria Park and Bowen Park are the largest; the
high-lying Mount Coot-tha commands fine views, and there are other parks
and numerous recreation grounds in various parts of the city, besides the
admirable botanical gardens and the gardens of the Acclimatization Society.
Electric tramways and omnibuses serve all parts of the city, and numerous
ferries ply across the river. There is railway communication to north,
south and west. By careful dredging, the broad river is navigable as far as
Brisbane for ocean-going vessels, and the port is the terminal port for the
Queensland mail steamers to Europe, and is visited by steamers to China,
Japan and America, and for various inter-colonial lines. There is wharf
accommodation on both banks of the river, a graving dock which can be used
by vessels up to 5000 tons, and two patent slips which can take up ships of
1000 and 400 tons respectively. The exports are chiefly coal, sheep,
tallow, wool, frozen meat and hides. The annual value of imports and
exports exceeds seven and nine millions sterling respectively. There are
boot factories, soap works, breweries, tanneries, tobacco works, &c. The
climate is on the whole dry and healthy, but during summer the temperature
is high, the mean shade temperature being about 70 deg. F.

Brisbane was founded in 1825 as a penal settlement, taking its name from
Sir Thomas Brisbane, then governor of Australia; in 1842 it became a free
settlement and in 1859 capital of Queensland, the town up to that time
having belonged to New South Wales. It was incorporated in the same year.
South Brisbane became a separate city in 1903. The municipal government of
the city, and also of South Brisbane, is in the hands of a mayor and ten
alderman; the suburbs are controlled by shire councils and divisional
boards. The chief suburbs are Kangaroo Point, Fortitude Valley, New Farm,
Red Hill, Paddington, Milon, Toowong, Breakfast Creek, Bulimba,
Woolongabba, [v.04 p.0574] Highgate and Indooroopilly. The population of
the metropolitan area in 1901 was 119,907; of the city proper, 28,953; of
South Brisbane, 25,481.

BRISEUX, CHARLES ETIENNE (c. 1680-1754), French architect. He was
especially successful as a designer of internal decorations--mantelpieces,
mirrors, doors and overdoors, ceilings, consoles, candelabra, wall
panellings and other fittings, chiefly in the Louis Quinze mode. He was
also an industrious writer on architectural subjects. His principal works
are:--_L'Architecture moderne_ (2 vols., 1728); _L'Art de batir les maisons
de campagne_ (2 vols., 1743); _Traite du beau essentiel dans les arts,
applique particulierement a l'architecture_ (1752); and _Traite des
proportions harmoniques._

BRISSAC, DUKES OF. The fief of Brissac in Anjou was acquired at the end of
the 15th century by a noble French family named Cosse belonging to the same
province. Rene de Cosse married into the Gouffier family, just then very
powerful at court, and became _premier panelier_ (chief pantler) to Louis
XII. Two of his sons were marshals of France. Brissac was made a countship
in 1560 for Charles, the eldest, who was grandmaster of artillery, and
governor of Piedmont and of Picardy. The second, Artus, who held the
offices of _grand panetier_ of France and superintendent of finance,
distinguished himself in the religious wars. Charles II. de Cosse fought
for the League, and as governor of Paris opened the gates of that town to
Henry IV., who created him marshal of France in 1594. Brissac was raised to
a duchy in the peerage of France in 1611. Louis Hercule Timoleon de Cosse,
due de Brissac, and commandant of the constitutional guard of Louis XVI.,
was killed at Versailles on the 9th of September 1792 for his devotion to
the king.

(M. P.*)

BRISSON, EUGENE HENRI (1835- ), French statesman, was born at Bourges on
the 31st of July 1835. He followed his father's profession of advocate, and
having made himself conspicuous in opposition during the last days of the
empire, was appointed deputy-mayor of Paris after its overthrow. He was
elected to the Assembly on the 8th of February 1871, as a member of the
extreme Left. While not approving of the Commune, he was the first to
propose amnesty for the condemned (on the 13th of September 1871), but the
proposal was voted down. He strongly supported obligatory primary
education, and was a firm anti-clerical. He was president of the chamber
from 1881--replacing Gambetta--to March 1885, when he became prime minister
upon the resignation of Jules Ferry; but he resigned when, after the
general elections of that year, he only just obtained a majority for the
vote of credit for the Tongking expedition. He remained conspicuous as a
public man, took a prominent part in exposing the Panama scandals, was a
powerful candidate for the presidency after the murder of President Carnot
in 1894, and was again president of the chamber from December 1894 to 1898.
In June of the latter year he formed a cabinet when the country was
violently excited over the Dreyfus affair; his firmness and honesty
increased the respect in which he was already held by good citizens, but a
chance vote on an occasion of especial excitement overthrew his ministry in
October. As one of the leaders of the radicals he actively supported the
ministries of Waldeck-Rousseau and Combes, especially concerning the laws
on the religious orders and the separation of church and state. In 1899 he
was a candidate for the presidency. In May 1906 he was elected president of
the chamber of deputies by 500 out of 581 votes.

BRISSON, MATHURIN JACQUES (1723-1806), French zoologist and natural
philosopher, was born at Fontenay le Comte on the 30th of April 1723. The
earlier part of his life was spent in the pursuit of natural history, his
published works in this department including _Le Regne animal_ (1756) and
_Ornithologie_ (1760). After the death of R.A.F. Reaumur (1683-1757), whose
assistant he was, he abandoned natural history, and was appointed professor
of natural philosophy at Navarre and later at Paris. His most important
work in this department was his _Poids specifiques des corps_ (1787), but
he published several other books on physical subjects which were in
considerable repute for a time. He died at Croissy near Paris, on the 23rd
of June 1806.

BRISSOT, JACQUES PIERRE (1754-1793), who assumed the name of DE WARVILLE, a
celebrated French Girondist, was born at Chartres, where his father was an
inn-keeper, in January 1754. Brissot received a good education and entered
the office of a lawyer at Paris. His first works, _Theorie des lois
criminelles_ (1781) and _Bibliotheque philosophique du legislateur_ (1782),
were on the philosophy of law, and showed how thoroughly Brissot was imbued
with the ethical precepts of Rousseau. The first work was dedicated to
Voltaire, and was received by the old _philosophe_ with much favour.
Brissot became known as a facile and able writer, and was engaged on the
_Mercure_, on the _Courrier de l'Europe_, and on other papers. Ardently
devoted to the service of humanity, he projected a scheme for a general
concourse of all the savants in Europe, and started in London a paper,
_Journal du Lycee de Londres_, which was to be the organ of their views.
The plan was unsuccessful, and soon after his return to Paris Brissot was
lodged in the Bastille on the charge of having published a work against the
government. He obtained his release after four months, and again devoted
himself to pamphleteering, but had speedily to retire for a time to London.
On this second visit he became acquainted with some of the leading
Abolitionists, and founded later in Paris a Societe des Amis des Noirs, of
which he was president during 1790 and 1791. As an agent of this society he
paid a visit to the United States in 1788, and in 1791 published his
_Nouveau Voyage dans les Etats-Unis de l'Amerique Septentrionale_ (3
vols.).

From the first, Brissot threw himself heart and soul into the Revolution.
He edited the _Patriote francais_ from 1789 to 1793, and being a
well-informed and capable man took a prominent part in affairs. Upon the
demolition of the Bastille the keys were presented to him. Famous for his
speeches at the Jacobin club, he was elected a member of the municipality
of Paris, then of the Legislative Assembly, and later of the National
Convention. During the Legislative Assembly his knowledge of foreign
affairs enabled him as member of the diplomatic committee practically to
direct the foreign policy of France, and the declaration of war against the
emperor on the 20th of April 1792, and that against England on the 1st of
July 1793, were largely due to him. It was also Brissot who gave these wars
the character of revolutionary propaganda. He was in many ways the leading
spirit of the Girondists, who were also known as Brissotins. Vergniaud
certainly was far superior to him in oratory, but Brissot was quick, eager,
impetuous, and a man of wide knowledge. But he was at the same time
vacillating, and not qualified to struggle against the fierce energies
roused by the events of the Revolution. His party fell before the Mountain;
sentence of arrest was passed against the leading members of it on the 2nd
of June 1793. Brissot attempted to escape in disguise, but was arrested at
Moulins. His demeanour at the trial was quiet and dignified; and on the
31st of October 1793 he died bravely with several other Girondists.

See _Memoires de Brissot, sur ses contemporains et la Revolution
francaise_, published by his sons, with notes by F. de Montrol (Paris,
1830); Helena Williams, _Souvenirs de la Revolution francaise_ (Paris,
1827); F. A. Aulard, _Les Orateurs de la Legislative et de la Convention_
2nd ed., (Paris, 1905); F. A. Aulard, _Les Portraits litteraires a la fin
du XVIII^e siecle, pendant la Revolution_ (Paris, 1883).

BRISTOL, EARLS AND MARQUESSES OF. This English title has been held in the
Hervey family since 1714, though previously an earldom of Bristol, in the
Digby family, is associated with two especially famous representatives, of
whom separate biographies are given. The Herveys are mentioned during the
13th century as seated in Bedfordshire, and afterwards in Suffolk, where
they have held the estate of Ickworth since the 15th century. John Hervey
(1616-1679) was the eldest son of Sir William Hervey (d. 1660), and was
born on the 18th of August 1616. He held a high position in the household
of Catherine, wife of Charles II., and was for many years member of
parliament for Hythe. He married Elizabeth, the only surviving child of his
kinsman, William, Lord Hervey of Kidbrooke (d. 1642), but left no children
when he died on the 18th of January 1679, and his estates passed to his
brother, Sir Thomas Hervey. Sir Thomas, who was member of parliament for
Bury St Edmunds, [v.04 p.0575] died on the 27th of May 1694, and was
succeeded by his son, John, who became the 1st earl of Bristol.

JOHN HERVEY, 1st earl of Bristol (1665-1751), born on the 27th of August
1665, was educated at Clare Hall, Cambridge, and became member of
parliament for Bury St Edmunds in March 1694. In March 1703 he was created
Baron Hervey of Ickworth, and in October 1714 was made earl of Bristol as a
reward for his zeal in promoting the principles of the revolution and
supporting the Hanoverian succession. He died on the 20th of January 1751.
By his first wife, Isabella (d. 1693), daughter of Sir Robert Carr, Bart.,
of Sleaford, he had one son, Carr, Lord Hervey (1691-1723), who was
educated at Clare Hall, Cambridge, and was member for Bury St Edmunds from
1713 to 1722. (It has been suggested that Carr, who died unmarried on the
14th of November 1723, was the father of Horace Walpole.) He married
secondly Elizabeth (d. 1741), daughter and co-heiress of Sir Thomas Felton,
Bart., of Playford, Suffolk, by whom he had ten sons and six daughters. His
eldest son, John (1696-1743), took the courtesy title of Lord Hervey on the
death of his half-brother, Carr, in 1723, and gained some renown both as a
writer and a politician (see HERVEY OF ICKWORTH). Another son, Thomas
(1699-1775), was one of the members for Bury from 1733 to 1747; held
various offices at court; and eloped with Elizabeth, wife of Sir Thomas
Hanmer. He had very poor health, and his reckless life frequently brought
him into pecuniary and other difficulties. He wrote numerous pamphlets, and
when he died Dr Johnson said of him, "Tom Hervey, though a vicious man, was
one of the genteelest men who ever lived." Another of the 1st earl's sons,
Felton (1712-1773), was also member for the family borough of Bury St
Edmunds. Having assumed the additional name of Bathurst, Felton's grandson,
Felton Elwell Hervey-Bathurst (1782-1819), was created a baronet in 1818,
and on his death a year later the title descended to his brother, Frederick
Anne (1783-1824), the direct ancestor of the present baronet. The 1st earl
died in January 1751, the title and estates descending to his grandson.

GEORGE WILLIAM HERVEY, 2nd earl of Bristol (1721-1775), the eldest son of
John, Lord Hervey of Ickworth, by his marriage with Mary (1700-1768),
daughter of Nicholas Lepell, was born on the 31st of August 1721. He served
for some years in the army, and in 1755 was sent to Turin as envoy
extraordinary. He was ambassador at Madrid from 1758 to 1761, filling a
difficult position with credit and dignity, and ranked among the followers
of Pitt. Appointed lord-lieutenant of Ireland in 1766, he never visited
that country during his short tenure of this office, and, after having
served for a short time as keeper of the privy seal, became groom of the
stole to George III. in January 1770. He died unmarried on the 18th or 20th
of March 1775, and was succeeded by his brother.

AUGUSTUS JOHN HERVEY, 3rd earl of Bristol (1724-1779), was born on the 19th
of May 1724, and entered the navy, where his promotion was rapid. He
distinguished himself in several encounters with the French, and was of
great assistance to Admiral Hawke in 1759, although he had returned to
England before the battle of Quiberon Bay in November 1759. Having served
with distinction in the West Indies under Rodney, his active life at sea
ceased when the peace of Paris was concluded in February 1763. He was,
however, nominally commander-in-chief in the Mediterranean in this year,
and was made vice-admiral of the blue in January 1778. Hervey was member of
parliament for Bury from 1757 to 1763, and after being for a short time
member for Saltash, again represented Bury from 1768 until he succeeded his
brother in the peerage in 1775. He often took part in debates in
parliament, and was a frequent contributor to periodical literature. Having
served as a lord of the admiralty from 1771 to 1775 he won some notoriety
as an opponent of the Rockingham ministry and a defender of Admiral Keppel.
In August 1744 he had been secretly married to Elizabeth Chudleigh
(1720-1788), afterwards duchess of Kingston (_q.v._), but this union was
dissolved in 1769. The earl died in London on the 23rd of December 1779,
leaving no legitimate issue, and having, as far as possible, alienated his
property from the title. He was succeeded by his brother. Many of his
letters are in the Record Office, and his journals in the British Museum.
Other letters are printed in the _Grenville Papers_, vols. iii. and iv.
(London, 1852-1853), and the _Life of Admiral Keppel_, by the Hon. T.
Keppel (London, 1852).

FREDERICK AUGUSTUS HERVEY, bishop of Derry (1730-1803), who now became 4th
earl of Bristol, was born on the 1st of August 1730, and educated at
Westminster school and Corpus Christi College, Cambridge, graduating in
1754. Entering the church he became a royal chaplain; and while waiting for
other preferment spent some time in Italy, whither he was led by his great
interest in art. In February 1767, while his brother, the 2nd earl, was
lord-lieutenant of Ireland, he was made bishop of Cloyne, and having
improved the property of the see he was translated to the rich bishopric of
Derry a year later. Here again he was active and philanthropic. While not
neglecting his luxurious personal tastes he spent large sums of money on
making roads and assisting agriculture, and his munificence was shared by
the city of Londonderry. He built splendid residences at Downhill and
Ballyscullion, which he adorned with rare works of art. As a bishop, Hervey
was industrious and vigilant; he favoured complete religious equality, and
was opposed to the system of tithes. In December 1779 he became earl of
Bristol, and in spite of his brother's will succeeded to a considerable
property. Having again passed some time in Italy, he returned to Ireland
and in 1782 threw himself ardently into the Irish volunteer movement,
quickly attaining a prominent position among the volunteers, and in great
state attending the convention held in Dublin in November 1783. Carried
away by his position and his popularity he talked loudly of rebellion, and
his violent language led the government to contemplate his arrest.
Subsequently he took no part in politics, spending his later years mainly
on the continent of Europe. In 1798 he was imprisoned by the French at
Milan, remaining in custody for eighteen months. He died at Albano on the
8th of July 1803, and was buried in Ickworth church. Varying estimates have
been found of his character, including favourable ones by John Wesley and
Jeremy Bentham. He was undoubtedly clever and cultured, but licentious and
eccentric. In later life he openly professed materialistic opinions; he
fell in love with the countess Lichtenau, mistress of Frederick William
II., king of Prussia; and by his bearing he gave fresh point to the saying
that "God created men, women and Herveys." In 1752 he had married Elizabeth
(d. 1800), daughter of Sir Jermyn Davers, Bart., by whom he had two sons
and three daughters. His elder son, Augustus John, Lord Hervey (1757-1796),
had predeceased his father, and he was succeeded in the title by his
younger son.

FREDERICK WILLIAM HERVEY, 5th earl and 1st marquess of Bristol (1769-1859),
was born on the 2nd of October 1769. He married Elizabeth Albana (d. 1844),
daughter of Clotworthy, 1st Baron Templetown, by whom he had six sons and
three daughters. In 1826 he was created marquess of Bristol and Earl
Jermyn, and died on the 15th of February 1859. He was succeeded by his son
Frederick William (1800-1864), M.P. for Bury St Edmunds 1830-1859, as 2nd
marquess; and by the latter's son Frederick William John (1834-1907), M.P.
for West Suffolk 1859-1864, as 3rd marquess. The latter's nephew, Frederick
William Fane Hervey (b. 1863), who succeeded as 4th marquess, served with
distinction in the royal navy, and was M.P. for Bury St Edmunds from 1906
to 1907.

See John, Lord Hervey, _Memoirs of the Reign of George II_., edited by J.W.
Croker (London, 1884); John Hervey, 1st earl of Bristol, _Diary_ (Wells,
1894); and _Letter Books of Bristol; with Sir T. Hervey's Letters during
Courtship and Poems during Widowhood_ (Wells, 1894). Also the articles in
the _Dictionary of National Biography_, vol. xxvi. (London, 1891).

BRISTOL, GEORGE DIGBY, 2ND EARL OF[1] (1612-1677), eldest son of the 1st
earl (see below), was born in October 1612. At the age of twelve he
appeared at the bar of the House of Commons and pleaded for his father,
then in the Tower, when his youth, graceful person and well-delivered
speech made a great [v.04 p.0576] impression. He was admitted to Magdalen
College, Oxford, on the 15th of August 1626, where he was a favourite pupil
of Peter Heylin, and became M.A. in 1636. He spent the following years in
study and in travel, from which he returned, according to Clarendon, "the
most accomplished person of our nation or perhaps any other nation," and
distinguished by a remarkably handsome person. In 1638 and 1639 were
written the _Letters between Lord George Digby and Sir Kenelm Digby, Knt.
concerning Religion_ (publ. 1651), in which Digby attacked Roman
Catholicism. In June 1634 Digby was committed to the Fleet till July for
striking Crofts, a gentleman of the court, in Spring Gardens; and possibly
his severe treatment and the disfavour shown to his father were the causes
of his hostility to the court. He was elected member for Dorsetshire in
both the Short and Long parliaments in 1640, and in conjunction with Pym
and Hampden he took an active part in the opposition to Charles. He moved
on the 9th of November for a committee to consider the "deplorable state"
of the kingdom, and on the 11th was included in the committee for the
impeachment of Strafford, against whom he at first showed great zeal. He,
however, opposed the attainder, made an eloquent speech on the 21st of
April 1641, accentuating the weakness of Vane's evidence against the
prisoner, and showing the injustice of _ex post facto_ legislation. He was
regarded in consequence with great hostility by the parliamentary party,
and was accused of having stolen from Pym's table Vane's notes on which the
prosecution mainly depended. On the 15th of July his speech was burnt by
the hangman by the order of the House of Commons. Meanwhile on the 8th of
February he had made an important speech in the Commons advocating the
reformation and opposing the abolition of episcopacy. On the 8th of June,
during the angry discussion on the army plot, he narrowly escaped assault
in the House; and the following day, in order to save him from further
attacks, the king called him up to the Lords in his father's barony of
Digby.

He now became the evil genius of Charles, who had the incredible folly to
follow his advice in preference to such men as Hyde and Falkland. In
November he is recorded as performing "singular good service," and "doing
beyond admiration," in speaking in the Lords against the instruction
concerning evil counsellors. He suggested to Charles the impeachment of the
five members, and urged upon him the fatal attempt to arrest them on the
4th of January 1642; but he failed to play his part in the Lords in
securing the arrest of Lord Mandeville, to whom on the contrary he declared
that "the king was very mischievously advised"; and according to Clarendon
his imprudence was responsible for the betrayal of the king's plan. Next
day he advised the attempt to seize them in the city by force. The same
month he was ordered to appear in the Lords to answer a charge of high
treason for a supposed armed attempt at Kingston, but fled to Holland,
where he joined the queen, and on the 26th of February was impeached.
Subsequently he visited Charles at York disguised as a Frenchman, but on
the return voyage to Holland he was captured and taken to Hull, where he
for some time escaped detection; and at last he cajoled Sir John Hotham,
after discovering himself, into permitting his escape. Later he ventured on
a second visit to Hull to persuade Hotham to surrender the place to
Charles, but this project failed. He was present at Edgehill, and greatly
distinguished himself at Lichfield, where he was wounded while leading the
assault. He soon, however, threw down his commission in consequence of a
quarrel with Prince Rupert, and returned to the king at Oxford, over whom
he obtained more influence as the prospect became more gloomy. On the 28th
of September 1643 he was appointed secretary of state and a privy
councillor, and on the 31st of October high steward of Oxford University.
He now supported the queen's disastrous policy of foreign alliances and
help from Ireland, and engaged in a series of imprudent and ill-conducted
negotiations which greatly injured the king's affairs, while his fierce
disputes with Rupert and his party further embarrassed them. On the 14th of
October 1645 he was made lieutenant general of the royal forces north of
the Trent, with the object of pushing through to join Montrose, but he was
defeated on the 15th at Sherburn, where his correspondence was captured,
disclosing the king's expectations from abroad and from Ireland and his
intrigues with the Scots; and after reaching Dumfries, he found his way
barred. He escaped on the 24th to the Isle of Man, thence crossing to
Ireland, where he caused Glamorgan to be arrested. Here, on this new stage,
he believed he was going to achieve wonders. "Have I not carried my body
swimmingly," he wrote to Hyde in irrepressible good spirits, "who being
before so irreconcilably hated by the Puritan party, have thus seasonably
made myself as odious to the Papists?"[2] His project now was to bring over
Prince Charles to head a royalist movement in the island; and having joined
Charles at Jersey in April 1646, he intended to entrap him on board, but
was dissuaded by Hyde. He then travelled to Paris to gain the queen's
consent to his scheme, but returned to persuade Charles to go to Paris, and
accompanied him thither, revisiting Ireland on the 29th of June once more,
and finally escaping to France on the surrender of the island to the
parliament. At Paris amongst the royalists he found himself in a nest of
enemies eager to pay off old scores. Prince Rupert challenged him, and he
fought a duel with Lord Wilmot. He continued his adventures by serving in
Louis XIV.'s troops in the war of the Fronde, in which he greatly
distinguished himself. He was appointed in 1651 lieutenant-general in the
French army, and commander of the forces in Flanders. These new honours,
however, were soon lost. During Mazarin's enforced absence from the court
Digby aspired to become his successor; and the cardinal, who had from the
first penetrated his character and regarded him as a mere adventurer,[3] on
his restoration to power sent Digby away on an expedition in Italy; and on
his return informed him that he was included in the list of those expelled
from France, in accordance with the new treaty with Cromwell. In August
1656 he joined Charles II. at Bruges, and desirous of avenging himself upon
the cardinal offered his services to Don John of Austria in the
Netherlands, being instrumental in effecting the surrender of the garrison
of St Ghislain to Spain in 1657. On the 1st of January 1657 he was
appointed by Charles II. secretary of state, but shortly afterwards, having
become a Roman Catholic--probably with the view of adapting himself better
to his new Spanish friends--he was compelled to resign office. Charles,
however, on account of his "jollity" and Spanish experience took him with
him to Spain in 1659, though his presence was especially deprecated by the
Spanish; but he succeeded in ingratiating himself, and was welcomed by the
king of Spain subsequently at Madrid.

By the death of his father Digby had succeeded in January 1659 to the
peerage as 2nd earl of Bristol, and had been made K.G. the same month. He
returned to England at the restoration, when he found himself excluded from
office on account of his religion, and relegated to only secondary
importance. His desire to make a brilliant figure induced a restless and
ambitious activity in parliament. He adopted an attitude of violent
hostility to Clarendon. In foreign affairs he inclined strongly to the side
of Spain, and opposed the king's marriage with Catherine of Portugal. He
persuaded Charles to despatch him to Italy to view the Medici princesses,
but the royal marriage and treaty with Portugal were settled in his
absence. In June 1663 he made an attempt to upset Clarendon's management of
the House of Commons, but his intrigue was exposed to the parliament by
Charles, and Bristol was obliged to attend the House to exonerate himself,
when he confessed that he had "taken the liberty of enlarging," and his
"comedian-like speech" excited general amusement. Exasperated by these
failures, in a violent scene with the king early in July, he broke out into
fierce and disrespectful reproaches, ending with a threat that unless
Charles granted his requests within twenty-four hours "he would do somewhat
that should awaken him out of his slumbers, and make him look better to his
own business." Accordingly on the 10th he impeached Clarendon in the Lords
of high treason, and on the charge being dismissed renewed [v.04 p.0577]
his accusation, and was expelled from the court, only avoiding the warrant
issued for his apprehension by a concealment of two years. In January 1664
he caused a new sensation by his appearance at his house at Wimbledon,
where he publicly renounced before witnesses his Roman Catholicism, and
declared himself a Protestant, his motive being probably to secure immunity
from the charge of recusancy preferred against him.[4] When, however, the
fall of Clarendon was desired, Bristol was again welcomed at court. He took
his seat in the Lords on the 29th of July 1667. "The king," wrote Pepys in
November, "who not long ago did say of Bristoll that he was a man able in
three years to get himself a fortune in any kingdom in the world and lose
all again in three months, do now hug him and commend his parts everywhere
above all the world."[5] He pressed eagerly for Clarendon's commital, and
on the refusal of the Lords accused them of mutiny and rebellion, and
entered his dissent with "great fury."[6] In March 1668 he attended prayers
in the Lords. On the 15th of March 1673 though still ostensibly a Roman
Catholic, he spoke in favour of the Test Act, describing himself as "a
Catholic of the church of Rome, not a Catholic of the court of Rome," and
asserting the unfitness of Romanists for public office. His adventurous and
erratic career closed by death on the 20th of March 1677.

Bristol was one of the most striking and conspicuous figures of his time, a
man of brilliant abilities, a great orator, one who distinguished himself
without effort in any sphere of activity he chose to enter, but whose
natural gifts were marred by a restless ambition and instability of
character fatal to real greatness. Clarendon describes him as "the only man
I ever knew of such incomparable parts that was none the wiser for any
experience or misfortune that befell him," and records his extraordinary
facility in making friends and making enemies. Horace Walpole characterized
him in a series of his smartest antitheses as "a singular person whose life
was one contradiction." "He wrote against popery and embraced it; he was a
zealous opposer of the court and a sacrifice for it; was conscientiously
converted in the midst of his prosecution of Lord Strafford and was most
unconscientiously a persecutor of Lord Clarendon. With great parts, he
always hurt himself and his friends; with romantic bravery, he was always
an unsuccessful commander. He spoke for the Test Act, though a Roman
Catholic; and addicted himself to astrology on the birthday of true
philosophy." Besides his youthful correspondence with Sir K. Digby on the
subject of religion already mentioned, he was the author of an _Apologie_
(1643, Thomason Tracts, E. 34 (32)), justifying his support of the king's
cause; of _Elvira ... a comedy_ (1667), printed in R. Dodsley's _Select
Collect. of Old English Plays_ (Hazlitt, 1876), vol. xv., and of _Worse and
Worse_, an adaptation from the Spanish, acted but not printed. Other
writings are also ascribed to him, including the authorship with Sir Samuel
Tuke of _The Adventures of Five Hours_ (1663). His eloquent and pointed
speeches, many of which were printed, are included in the article in the
_Biog. Brit._ and among the _Thomason Tracts_; see also the general
catalogue in the British Museum. The catalogue of his library was published
in 1680. He married Lady Anne Russell, daughter of Francis, 4th earl of
Bedford, by whom, besides two daughters, he had two sons, Francis, who
predeceased him unmarried, and John, who succeeded him as 3rd earl of
Bristol, at whose death without issue the peerage became extinct.

AUTHORITIES.--See the article in _Dict. Nat. Biog._; Wood's _Ath. Oxon._
(Bliss), iii. 1100-1105; _Biographia Brit._ (Kippis), v. 210-238; H.
Walpole's _Royal and Noble Authors_ (Park, 1806), iii. 191; _Roscius
Anglicanus_, by J. Downes, pp. 31, 36 (1789); Cunningham's _Lives of
Eminent Englishmen_ (1837), iii. 29; _Somers Tracts_ (1750), iii. (1809),
iv.; _Harleian Miscellany_ (1808), v., vi.; _Life_ by T. H. Lister (1838);
_State Papers_.

(P. C. Y.)

[1] _I.e._ in the Digby line; for the Herveys see above.

[2] _Clarendon State Papers_, ii. 201.

[3] _Memoires du Cardinal de Retz_ (1859), app. iii. 437, 442.

[4] Pepys's _Diary_, iv. 51.

[5] _Ib._ vii. 199.

[6] _Ib._ 207; _Protests of the Lords_, by J.E.T. Rogers, i. 36.

BRISTOL, JOHN DIGBY, 1ST EARL OF[1] (1580-1653) English diplomatist, son of
Sir George Digby of Coleshill, Warwickshire, and of Abigail, daughter of
Sir Arthur Henningham, was born in 1580, and entered Magdalen College,
Oxford, in 1595 (M.A. 1605), becoming a member of the Inner Temple in 1598.
In 1605 he was sent to James to inform him of the safety of the princess
Elizabeth at the time of the Gunpowder Plot. He gained his favour, was made
a gentleman of the privy chamber and one of the king's carvers, and was
knighted in 1607. From 1610 to 1611 he was member of parliament for Heydon.
In 1611 he was sent as ambassador to Spain to negotiate a marriage between
Prince Henry and the infanta Anne, and to champion the cause of the English
merchants, for whom he obtained substantial concessions, and arranged the
appointment of consuls at Lisbon and Seville. He also discovered a list of
the English pensioners of the Spanish court, which included some of the
ministers, and came home in 1613 to communicate this important intelligence
to the king. In 1614 he again went to Spain to effect a union between the
infanta Maria and Charles, though he himself was in favour of a Protestant
marriage, and desired a political and not a matrimonial treaty. In 1616, on
the disgrace of Somerset, he was recalled home to give evidence concerning
the latter's connexions with Spain, was made vice-chamberlain and a privy
councillor, and obtained from James the manor of Sherborne forfeited by the
late favourite. In 1618 he went once more to Spain to reopen the
negotiations, returning in May, and being created Baron Digby on the 25th
of November. He endeavoured to avoid a breach with Spain on the election of
the elector palatine, the king's son-in-law, to the Bohemian throne; and in
March 1621, after the latter's expulsion from Bohemia, Digby was sent to
Brussels to obtain a suspension of hostilities in the Palatinate. On the
4th of July he went to Vienna and drew up a scheme of pacification with the
emperor, by which Frederick was to abandon Bohemia and be secured in his
hereditary territories, but the agreement could never be enforced. After
raising money for the defence of Heidelberg he returned home in October,
and on the 21st of November explained his policy to the parliament, and
asked for money and forces for its execution. The sudden dissolution of
parliament, however, prevented the adoption of any measure of support, and
entirely ruined Digby's plans. In 1622 he returned to Spain with nothing on
which to rely but the goodwill of Philip IV., and nothing to offer but
entreaties.

On the 15th of September he was created earl of Bristol. He urged on the
marriage treaty, believing it would include favourable conditions for
Frederick, but the negotiations were taken out of his control, and finally
wrecked by the arrival of Charles himself and Buckingham in March 1623. He
incurred their resentment, of which the real inspiration was Buckingham's
implacable jealousy, by a letter written to James informing him of
Buckingham's unpopularity among the Spanish ministers, and by his
endeavouring to maintain the peace with Spain after their departure. In
January 1624 he left Spain, and on arriving at Dover in March, Buckingham
and Charles having now complete ascendancy over the king, he was forbidden
to appear at court and ordered to confine himself at Sherborne. He was
required by Buckingham to answer a series of interrogatories, but he
refused to inculpate himself and demanded a trial by parliament. On the
death of James he was removed by Charles I. from the privy council, and
ordered to absent himself from his first parliament. On his demand in
January 1626 to be present at the coronation Charles angrily refused, and
accused him of having tried to pervert his religion in Spain. In March
1626, after the assembling of the second parliament, Digby applied to the
Lords, who supported his rights, and Charles sent him his writ accompanied
by a letter from Lord Keeper Coventry desiring him not to use it. Bristol,
however, took his seat and demanded justice against Buckingham (Thomason
Tracts, E. 126 (20)). The king endeavoured to obstruct his attack by
causing Bristol on the 1st of May to be himself brought to the bar, on an
accusation of high treason by the attorney-general. The Lords, however,
ordered that both charges should be investigated simultaneously. Further
proceedings were stopped by the dissolution of parliament on the 15th of
June; a prosecution was ordered by Charles in the Star Chamber, and Bristol
was sent to the [v.04 p.0578] Tower, where he remained till the 17th of
March 1628, when the peers, on the assembling of Charles's third
parliament, insisted on his liberation and restoration to his seat in the
Lords.

In the discussions upon the Petition of Right, Bristol supported the use of
the king's prerogative in emergencies, and asserted that the king besides
his legal had a regal power, but joined in the demand for a full acceptance
of the petition by the king after the first unsatisfactory answer. He was
now restored to favour, but took no part in politics till the outbreak of
the Scottish rebellion, when he warned Charles of the danger of attacking
with inadequate forces. He was the leader in the Great Council held at
York, was a commissioner to treat with the Scots in September 1640 at
Ripon, and advised strongly the summoning of the parliament. In February
1641 he was one of the peers who advocated reforms in the administration
and were given seats in the council. Though no friend to Strafford, he
endeavoured to save his life, desiring only to see him excluded from
office, and as a witness was excused from voting on the attainder. He was
appointed gentleman of the bedchamber on the king's departure for Scotland,
and on the 27th of December he was declared an evil counsellor by the House
of Commons, Cromwell on the 28th moving an address to the king to dismiss
him from his councils, on the plea that he had advocated the bringing up of
the northern army to overawe parliament in the preceding spring. There is
no evidence to support the charge, but Digby was regarded by the
parliamentary party with special hatred and distrust, of which the chief
causes were probably his Spanish proclivities and his indifference on the
great matter of religion, to which was added the unpopularity reflected
from his misguided son. On the 28th of March 1642 he was sent to the Tower
for having failed to disclose to parliament the Kentish petition. Liberated
in April, he spoke in the Lords on the 20th of May in favour of an
accommodation, and again in June in vindication of the king; but finding
his efforts ineffectual, and believing all armed rebellion against the king
a wicked violation of the most solemn oaths, he joined Charles at York, was
present at Edgehill and accompanied him to Oxford. On the 1st of February
1643 he was named with Lord Herbert of Raglan for removal from the court
and public office for ever, and in the propositions of November 1644 was
one of those excepted from pardon. In January he had endeavoured to
instigate a breach of the Independents with the Scots. Bristol, however,
was not in favour of continuing the war, and withdrew to Sherborne,
removing in the spring of 1644 to Exeter, and after the surrender of the
city retiring abroad on the 11th of July by order of the Houses, which
rejected his petition to compound for his estate. He took up his residence
at Caen, passing the rest of his life in exile and poverty, and
occasionally attending the young king. In 1647 he printed at Caen _An
Apology_, defending his support of the royal cause. This was reprinted in
1656 (Thomason Tracts, E. 897, 6). He died at Paris on the 16th of January
1653.

He is described by Clarendon as "a man of grave aspect, of a presence that
drew respect, and of great parts and ability, but passionate and
supercilious and too voluminous a discourser in council." His aim was to
effect a political union between England and Spain apart from the religious
or marriage questions--a policy which would probably have benefited both
English and European interests; but it was one understood neither in Spain
nor in England, and proved impracticable. He was a man of high character,
who refused to compound with falsehood and injustice, whose misfortune it
was to serve two Stuart sovereigns, and whose firm resistance to the king's
tyranny led the way to the great movement which finally destroyed it.
Besides his _Apology_, he was the author of several printed speeches and
poems, and translated _A Defence of the Catholic Faith_ by Peter du Moulin
(1610). He married Beatrix, daughter of Charles Walcot, and widow of Sir
John Dyve, and besides two daughters left two sons, George, who succeeded
him as 2nd earl of Bristol, and John, who died unmarried.

BIBLIOGRAPHY.--The best account of Bristol will be found in the scattered
notices of him in the _Hist. of England_ and of the _Civil War_, by S. R.
Gardiner, who also wrote the short sketch of his career in the _Dict. of
Nat. Biog._, and who highly eulogizes his character and diplomacy. For
lives, see _Biographia Britannica_ (Kippis), v. 199; Wood's _Ath. Oxon._
(Bliss), iii. 338; D. Lloyd's _Memoires_ (1668), 579; Collins's _Peerage_
(Brydges, 1812), v. 362; Fuller's _Worthies_ (Nichols, 1811), ii. 412; H.
Walpole's _Royal and Noble Authors_ (Park, 1806), iii. 49; also Clarendon's
_Hist of the Rebellion_, esp. vi. 388; _Clarendon State Papers_ and _Cal.
of Cl. State Papers_; _Old Parliamentary History_; _Cabala_ (1691;
letters); Camden Soc., _Miscellany_, vol. vi. (1871); _Defence of his
Spanish Negotiations_, ed. by S.R. Gardiner; _Somers Tracts_ (1809), ii.
501; _Thomason Tracts_ in Brit. Museum; _Hardwicke State Papers_, i. 494.
The MSS. at Sherborne Castle, of which a selection was transcribed and
deposited in the Public Record Office, were calendared by the Hist. MSS.
Commission in _Rep._ viii. app. i. p. 213 and 10th _Rep._ app. i. p. 520;
there are numerous references to Bristol in various collections calendared
in the same publication and in the _Cal. of State Papers, Dom. Series_; see
also _Harleian MSS._, Brit. Mus. 1580, art. 31-48, and _Add. MSS._ indexes
and calendars.

(P. C. Y.)

[1] _I.e._ in the Digby line; for the Herveys see above.

BRISTOL, a township of Hartford county, Connecticut, U.S.A., in the central
part of the state, about 16 m. S.W. of Hartford. It has an area of 27 sq.
m., and contains the village of Forestville and the borough of Bristol
(incorporated in 1893). Both are situated on the Pequabuck river, and are
served by the western branch of the midland division of the New York, New
Haven & Hartford railway, and by electric railway to Hartford, New Britain
and Terryville. Pop. (1890) 7382; (1900) 9643, including that of the
borough, 6268 (1910) 13,502 (borough, 9527). Among the manufactures of the
borough of Bristol are clocks, woollen goods, iron castings, hardware,
brass ware, silverplate and bells. Bristol clocks, first manufactured soon
after the War of Independence, have long been widely known. Bristol,
originally a part of the township of Farmington, was first settled about
1727, but did not become an independent corporation until the formation, in
1742, of the first church, known after 1744 as the New Cambridge Society.
In 1748 a Protestant Episcopal Church was organized, and before and during
the War of Independence its members belonged to the Loyalist party; their
rector, Rev. James Nichols, was tarred and feathered by the Whigs, and
Moses Dunbar, a member of the church, was hanged for treason by the
Connecticut authorities. Chippen's Hill (about 3 m. from the centre of the
township) was a favourite rendezvous of the local Loyalists; and a cave
there, known as "The Tories' Den," is a well-known landmark. In 1785 New
Cambridge and West Britain, another ecclesiastical society of Farmington,
were incorporated as the township of Bristol, but in 1806 they were divided
into the present townships of Bristol and Burlington.

BRISTOL, a city, county of a city, municipal, county and parliamentary
borough, and seaport of England, chiefly in Gloucestershire but partly in
Somersetshire, 1181/2 m. W. of London. Pop. (1901) 328,945. The Avon, here
forming the boundary between Gloucestershire and Somerset, though entering
the estuary of the Severn (Bristol Channel) only 8 m. below the city, is
here confined between considerable hills, with a narrow valley-floor on
which the nucleus of the city rests. Between Bristol and the Channel the
valley becomes a gorge, crossed at a single stride by the famous Clifton
Suspension Bridge. Above Bristol the hills again close in at Keynsham, so
that the city lies in a basin-like hollow some 4 m. in diameter, and
extends up the heights to the north. The Great Western railway, striking
into the Avon valley near Bath, serves Bristol from London, connects it
with South Wales by the Severn tunnel, and with the southern and
south-western counties of England. Local lines of this company encircle the
city on the north and the south, serving the outports of Avonmouth and
Portishead on the Bristol Channel. A trunk line of the Midland railway
connects Bristol with the north of England by way of Gloucester, Worcester,
Birmingham and Derby. Both companies use the central station, Temple Meads.

The nucleus of Bristol lies to the north of the river. The business centre
is in the district traversed by Broad Street, High Street, Wine Street and
Corn Street, which radiate from a centre close to the Floating Harbour. To
the south of this centre, connected with it by Bristol Bridge, an island is
formed between the Floating Harbour and the New Course of the Avon, [v.04
p.0579] and here are Temple Meads station, above Victoria Street, two of
the finest churches (the Temple and St Mary Redcliffe) the general hospital
and other public buildings. Immediately above the bridge the little river
Frome joins the Avon. Owing to the nature of the site the streets are
irregular; in the inner part of the city they are generally narrow, and
sometimes, with their ancient gabled houses, extremely picturesque. The
principal suburbs surround the city to the west, north and east.

_Churches, &c._--In the centre of Bristol a remarkable collection of
architectural antiquities is found, principally ecclesiastical. This the
city owes mainly to a few great baronial families, such as the earls of
Gloucester and the Berkeleys, in its early history, and to a few great
merchants, the Canyngs, Shipwards and Framptons, in its later career. The
see of Bristol, founded by Henry VIII. in 1542, was united to that of
Gloucester in 1836; but again separated in 1896. The diocese includes parts
of Gloucestershire and Wiltshire, and a small but populous [Sidenote:
Cathedral.] portion of Somerset. The cathedral, standing above the
so-called Canons' Marsh which borders the Floating Harbour, is pleasantly
situated on the south side of College Green. It has two western towers and
a central tower, nave, short transepts, choir with aisles, an eastern Lady
chapel and other chapels; and on the south, a chapter-house and cloister
court. The nave is modern (by Street, 1877), imitating the choir of the
14th century, with its curious skeleton-vaulting in the aisles. Besides the
canopied tombs of the Berkeleys with their effigies in chain mail, and
similarly fine tombs of the crosiered abbots, there are memorials to Bishop
Butler, to Sterne's Eliza (Elizabeth Draper), and to Lady Hesketh (the
friend of Cowper), who are all interred here. There is also here William
Mason's fine epitaph to his wife (d. 1767), beginning "Take, holy earth,
all that my soul holds dear." Of Fitz-Harding's abbey of St Augustine,
founded in 1142 (of which the present cathedral was the church), the
stately entrance gateway, with its sculptured mouldings, remains hardly
injured. The abbot's gateway, the vestibule to the chapter-house, and the
chapter-house itself, which is carved with Byzantine exuberance of
decoration, and acknowledged to be one of the finest Norman chambers in
Europe, are also perfect. On the north side of College Green is the small
but ornate Mayor's chapel (originally St Mark's), devoted to the services
of the mayor and corporation. It is mainly Decorated and Perpendicular. Of
the churches within the centre of the city, the following are found within
a radius of half-a-mile from Bristol Bridge. St Stephen's church, built
between 1450 and 1490, is a dignified structure, chiefly interesting for
its fan-traceried porch and stately tower. It was built entirely by the
munificence of John Shipward, a wealthy merchant. The tower and spire of St
John's (15th century) stand on one of the gateways of the city. This church
is a parallelogram, without east or west windows or aisles, and is built
upon a fine groined crypt. St James's church, the burial place of its
founder, Robert, earl of Gloucester, dates from 1130, and fine Norman work
remains in the nave. The tower is of the 14th century. St Philip's has an
Early English tower, but its external walls and windows are for the most
part debased Perpendicular. Robert FitzHamon's Norman tower of St Peter,
the oldest church tower in Bristol, still presents its massive square to
the eye. This church stands in Castle Street, which commemorates the castle
of Robert, earl of Gloucester, the walls of which were 25 ft. thick at the
base. Nothing remains of this foundation, but there still exist some walls
and vaults of the later stronghold, including a fine Early English cell.
Adjacent to the church is St Peter's hospital, a picturesque gabled
building of Jacobean and earlier date, with a fine court room. St Mary le
Port and St Augustine the Less are churches of the Perpendicular era, and
not the richest specimens of their kind. St Nicholas church is modern, on a
crypt of the date 1503, and earlier. On the island south of the Floating
Harbour are two of the most interesting churches in the city. Temple
church, with its leaning tower, 5 ft. off the perpendicular, retains
nothing of the Templars' period, but is a fine building of the Decorated
and Perpendicular periods. The church of St Mary Redcliffe, for grandeur of
proportion and elaboration of design and finish, is the first
ecclesiastical building in Bristol, and takes high rank among the parish
churches of England. It was built for the most part in the latter part of
the 14th century by William Canyng or Canynges (_q.v._), but the sculptured
north porch is externally Decorated, and internally Early English. The fine
tower is also Decorated, on an Early English base. The spire, Decorated in
style, is modern. Among numerous monuments is that of Admiral Penn (d.
1718), the father of the founder of Pennsylvania. The church exhibits the
rare feature of transeptal aisles. Of St Thomas's, in the vicinity, only
the tower (15th century) remains of the old structures. All Hallows church
has a modern Italian campanile, but is in the main of the 15th century,
with the retention of four Norman piers in the nave; and is interesting
from its connexion with the ancient gild of calendars, whose office it was
"to convert Jews, instruct youths," and keep the archives of the town.
Theirs was the first free library in the city, possibly in England. The
records of the church contain a singularly picturesque representation of
the ancient customs of the fraternity.

Among conventual remains, besides those already mentioned, there exist of
the Dominican priory the Early English refectory and dormitory, the latter
comprising a row of fifteen original windows and an oak roof of the same
date; and of St Bartholomew's hospital there is a double arch, with
intervening arcades, also Early English. These, with the small chapel of
the Three Kings of Cologne, Holy Trinity Hospital, both Perpendicular, and
the remains of the house of the Augustinian canons attached to the
cathedral, comprise the whole of the monastic relics.

There are many good specimens of ancient domestic architecture--notably
some arches of a grand Norman hall and some Tudor windows of Colston's
house, Small Street; and Canyng's house, with good Perpendicular oak roof.
Of buildings to which historic interest attaches, there are the Merchant
Venturers' almshouses (1699), adjoining their hall. This gild was
established in the 16th century. A small house near St Mary Redcliffe was
the school where the poet Chatterton received his education. His memorial
is in the churchyard of St Mary, and in the church a chest contains the
records among which he claimed to have discovered some of the manuscripts
which were in reality his own. A house in Wine Street was the birthplace of
the poet-laureate Robert Southey (1744).

_Public Buildings, &c._--The public buildings are somewhat overshadowed in
interest by the ecclesiastical. The council house, at the "Cross" of the
four main thoroughfares, dates from 1827, was enlarged in 1894, and
contains the city archives and many portraits, including a Van Dyck and a
Kneller. The Guildhall is close by--a modern Gothic building. The exchange
(used as a corn-market) is a noteworthy building by the famous architect of
Bath, John Wood (1743). Edward Colston, a revered citizen and benefactor of
the city (d. 1721), is commemorated by name in several buildings and
institutions, notably in Colston Hall, which is used for concerts and
meetings. A bank close by St Stephen's church claims to have originated in
the first savings-bank established in England (1812). Similarly, the city
free library (1613) is considered to be the original of its kind. The
Bristol museum and reference library were transferred to the corporation in
1893. Vincent Stuckey Lean (d. 1899) bequeathed to the corporation of
Bristol the sum of L50,000 for the further development of the free
libraries of the city, and with especial regard to the formation and
sustenance of a general reference library of a standard and scientific
character. The central library was opened in 1906. An art gallery,
presented by Sir William Henry Wills, was opened in 1905.

Among educational establishments, the technical college of the Company of
Merchant Venturers (1885) supplies scientific, technical and commercial
education. The extensive buildings of this institution were destroyed by
fire in 1906. University College (1876) forms the nucleus of the university
of Bristol (chartered 1909). Clifton College, opened in 1862 and
incorporated in 1877, includes a physical science school, with
laboratories, [v.04 p.0580] a museum and observatory. Colston's girls' day
school (1891) includes domestic economy and calisthenics. Among the many
charitable institutions are the general hospital, opened in 1858, and since
repeatedly enlarged; royal hospital for sick children and women, Royal
Victoria home, and the Queen Victoria jubilee convalescent home.

Of the open spaces in and near Bristol the most extensive are those
bordering the river in the neighbourhood of the gorge, Durdham and Clifton
Downs, on the Gloucestershire side (see CLIFTON). Others are Victoria Park,
south of the river, near the Bedminster station, Eastville Park by the
Frome, on the north-east of the city beyond Stapleton Road station, St
Andrew's Park near Montpelier station to the north, and Brandon Hill, west
of the cathedral, an abrupt eminence commanding a fine view over the city,
and crowned with a modern tower commemorating the "fourth centenary of the
discovery of America by John Cabot, and sons Lewis, Sebastian and Sanctus."
Other memorials in the city are the High Cross on College Green (1850), and
statues of Queen Victoria (1888), Samuel Morley (1888), Edmund Burke
(1894), and Edward Colston (1895), in whose memory are held annual Colston
banquets.

_Harbour and Trade._--Bristol harbour was formed in 1809 by the conversion
of the Avon and a branch of the Frome into "the Float," by the cutting of a
new channel for the Avon and the formation of two basins. Altogether the
water area, at fixed level, is about 85 acres. Four dry docks open into the
floating harbour. In 1884 the Avonmouth and Portishead docks at the river
entrance were bought up by the city; and the port extends from Hanham Mills
on the Avon to the mouth of the river, and for some distance down the
estuary of the Severn. The city docks have a depth of 22 ft., while those
at Avonmouth are accessible to the largest vessels. In 1902 the
construction of the extensive Royal Edward dock at Avonmouth was put in
hand by the corporation, and the dock was opened by King Edward VII. in
1908. It is entered by a lock 875 ft. long and 100 ft. wide, with a depth
of water on the sill of 46 ft. at ordinary spring, and 36 ft. at ordinary
neap tides. The dock itself has a mean length of 1120 ft. and a breadth of
1000 ft., and there is a branch and passage connecting with the old dock.
The water area is about 30 acres, and the dock is so constructed as to be
easily capable of extension. Portishead dock, on the Somerset shore, has an
area of 12 acres. The port has a large trade with America, the West Indies
and elsewhere, the principal imports being grain, fruit, oils, ore, timber,
hides, cattle and general merchandise; while the exports include machinery,
manufactured oils, cotton goods, tin and salt. The Elder Dempster, Dominion
and other large steamship companies trade at the port.

The principal industries are shipbuilding, ropewalks, chocolate factories,
sugar refineries, tobacco mills and pipe-making, glass works, potteries,
soaperies, shoe factories, leather works and tanneries, chemical works, saw
mills, breweries, copper, lead and shot works, iron works, machine works,
stained-paper works, anchors, chain cables, sail-cloth, buttons. A
coalfield extending 16 m. south-east to Radstock avails much for Bristol
manufactures.

The parliamentary borough is divided into four divisions, each returning
one member. The government of the city is in the hands of a lord mayor, 22
aldermen and 66 councillors. The area in 1901 was 11,705 acres; but in 1904
it was increased to 17,004 acres.

_History._--Bristol (Brigstow, Bristou, Bristow, Bristole) is one of the
best examples of a town that has owed its greatness entirely to trade. It
was never a shire town or the site of a great religious house, and it owed
little to its position as the head of a feudal lordship, or as a military
post. Though it is near both British and Roman camps, there is no evidence
of a British or Roman settlement. It was the western limit of the Saxon
invasion of Britain, and about the year 1000 a Saxon settlement began to
grow up at the junction of the rivers Frome and Avon, the natural
advantages of the situation favouring the growth of the township. Bristol
owed much to Danish rule, and during the reign of Canute, when the wool
trade with Ireland began, it became the market for English slaves. In the
reign of Edward the Confessor the town was included in the earldom of Sweyn
Godwinsson, and at the date of the Domesday survey it was already a royal
borough governed by a reeve appointed by the king as overlord, the king's
geld being assessed at 110 marks. There was a mint at the time of the
Conquest, which proves that Bristol must have been already a place of some
size, though the fact that the town was a member of the royal manor of
Baston shows that its importance was still of recent growth. One-third of
the geld was paid to Geoffrey de Coutances, bishop of Exeter, who threw up
the earthworks of the castle. He joined in a rebellion against William II.,
and after his death the king granted the town and castle, as part of the
honour of Gloucester, to Robert FitzHamon, whose daughter Mabel, marrying
Earl Robert of Gloucester in 1119, brought him Bristol as her dowry. Earl
Robert still further strengthened the castle, probably with masonry, and
involved Bristol in the rebellion against Stephen. From the castle he
harried the whole neighbourhood, threatened Bath, and sold his prisoners as
slaves to Ireland. A contemporary chronicler describes Bristol castle as
"seated on a mighty mound, and garrisoned with knights and foot soldiers or
rather robbers and raiders," and he calls Bristol the stepmother of
England.

The history of the charters granted to Bristol begins about this time. A
charter granted by Henry II. in 1172 exempted the burgesses of Bristol from
certain tolls throughout the kingdom, and confirmed existing liberties.
Another charter of the same year granted the city of Dublin to the men of
Bristol as a colony with the same liberties as their own town.

As a result probably of the close connexion between Bristol and Ireland the
growth of the wool trade was maintained. Many Bristol men settled in
Dublin, which for a long time was a Bristol beyond the seas, its charters
being almost duplicates of those granted to Bristol. About this time
Bristol began to export wool to the Baltic, and had developed a wine trade
with the south of France, while soap-making and tanning were flourishing
industries. Bristol was still organized manorially rather than municipally.
Its chief courts were the weekly hundred court and the court leet held
three times a year, and presided over by the reeve appointed by the earl of
Gloucester. By the marriage of Earl John with the heiress of Earl William
of Gloucester, Bristol became part of the royal demesne, the rent payable
to the king being fixed, and the town shook off the feudal yoke. The
charter granted by John in 1190 was an epoch in the history of the borough.
It provided that no burgess should be impleaded without the walls, that no
non-burgess should sell wine, cloth, wool, leather or corn in Bristol, that
all should hold by burgage tenure, that corn need not be ground at the
lord's mill, and that the burgesses should have all their reasonable gilds.
At some uncertain date soon after this a commune was established in Bristol
on the French model, Robert FitzNichol, the first mayor of Bristol, taking
the oath in 1200. The mayor was chosen, not, like the reeve whom he had
displaced, by the overlord, but by the merchants of Bristol who were
members of the merchant gild. The first documentary evidence of the
existence of the merchant gild appears in 1242. In addition, there were
many craft gilds (later at least twenty-six were known to exist), the most
important being the gilds of the weavers, tuckers and fullers, and the Gild
of the Kalendars of Bristol, which devoted itself to religious, educational
and social work. The mayor of Bristol was helped by two assistants, who
were called provosts until 1267, and from 1267 to 1311 were known as
stewards, and after that date as bailiffs. Before this time many religious
houses had been founded. Earl Robert of Gloucester established the
Benedictine priory of St James; there were Dominican and Franciscan
priories, a monastery of Carmelites, and an abbey of St Augustine founded
by Robert FitzHardinge.

In the reign of John, Bristol began the struggle to absorb the neighbouring
manor of Bedminster, the eastern half of which was held by the Templars by
gift of Earl Robert of Gloucester, and the western half, known as
Redcliffe, was sold by the same earl to Robert FitzHardinge, afterwards
Lord Berkeley. The [v.04 p.0581] Templars acquiesced without much
difficulty, but the wealthy owners of the manor of Redcliffe, who had their
own manorial courts, market, fair and quay, resisted the union for nearly
one hundred years. In 1247 a new course was cut for the river Frome which
vastly improved the harbour, and in the same year a stone bridge was built
over the Avon, bringing Temple and Redcliffe into closer touch with the
city. The charter granted by Henry III. in 1256 was important. It gave the
burgesses the right to choose coroners, and as they already farmed the geld
payable to the king, Bristol must have been practically independent of the
king. The growing exclusiveness of the merchant gild led to the great
insurrection of 1312. The oligarchical party was supported by the
Berkeleys, but the opposition continued their rebellion until 1313, when
the town was besieged and taken by the royal forces. During the reign of
Edward III. cloth manufacture developed in Bristol. Thomas Blanket set up
looms in 1337, employing many foreign workmen, and in 1353 Bristol was made
one of the Staple towns, the office of mayor of the staple being held by
the mayor of the town.

The charter of 1373 extended the boundaries of the town to include
Redcliffe (thus settling the long-standing dispute) and the waters of the
Avon and Severn up to the Steep and Flat Holmes; and made Bristol a county
in itself, independent of the county courts, with an elected sheriff, and a
council of forty to be chosen by the mayor and sheriff. The town was
divided into five wards, each represented by an alderman, the aldermen
alone being eligible for the mayoralty. This charter (confirmed in 1377 and
1488) was followed by the period of Bristol's greatest prosperity, the era
of William Canyng, of the foundation of the Society of Merchant Venturers,
and of the voyages of John and Sebastian Cabot. William Canyng (1399-1474)
was five times mayor and twice represented Bristol in parliament; he
carried on a huge cloth trade with the Baltic and rebuilt St Mary
Redcliffe. At the same time cloth was exported by Bristol merchants to
France, Spain and the Levant. The records of the Society of Merchant
Venturers began in 1467, and the society increased in influence so rapidly
that in 1500 it directed all the foreign trade of the city and had a lease
of the port dues. It was incorporated in 1552, and received other charters
in 1638 and 1662. Henry VII. granted Bristol a charter in 1499 (confirmed
in 1510) which removed the theoretically popular basis of the corporation
by the provision that the aldermen were to be elected by the mayor and
council. At the dissolution of the monasteries the diocese of Bristol was
founded, which included the counties of Bristol and Dorset. The voyages of
discovery in which Bristol had played a conspicuous part led to a further
trade development. In the 16th century Bristol traded with Spain, the
Canaries and the Spanish colonies in America, shared in the attempt to
colonize Newfoundland, and began the trade in African slaves which
flourished during the 17th century. Bristol took a great share in the Civil
War and was three times besieged. Charles II. granted a formal charter of
incorporation in 1664, the governing body being the mayor, 12 aldermen, 30
common councilmen, 2 sheriffs, 2 coroners, a town clerk, clerk of the peace
and 39 minor officials, the governing body itself filling up all vacancies
in its number. In the 18th century the cloth trade declined owing to the
competition of Ireland and to the general migration of manufactures to the
northern coalfields, but the prosperity of the city was maintained by the
introduction of manufactures of iron, brass, tin and copper, and by the
flourishing West Indian trade, sugar being taken in exchange for African
slaves.

The hot wells became fashionable in the reign of Anne (who granted a
charter in 1710), and a little later Bristol was the centre of the
Methodist revival of Whitefield and Wesley. The city was small, densely
populated and dirty, with dark, narrow streets, and the mob gained an
unenviable notoriety for violence in the riots of 1708, 1753, 1767 and
1831. At the beginning of the 19th century it was obvious that the
prosperity of Bristol was diminishing, comparatively if not actually, owing
to (1) the rise of Liverpool, which had more natural facilities as a port
than Bristol could offer, (2) the abolition of the slave trade, which
ruined the West Indian sugar trade, and (3) the extortionate rates levied
by the Bristol Dock Company, incorporated in 1803. These rates made
competition with Liverpool and London impossible, while other tolls were
levied by the Merchant Venturers and the corporation. The decline was
checked by the efforts of the Bristol chamber of commerce (founded in 1823)
and by the Municipal Reform Act of 1835. The new corporation, consisting of
48 councillors and 16 aldermen who elected the mayor, being themselves
chosen by the burgesses of each ward, bought the docks in 1848 and reduced
the fees. In 1877-1880 the docks at the mouth of the river at Avonmouth and
Portishead were made, and these were bought by the corporation in 1884. A
revival of trade, rapid increase of population and enlargement of the
boundaries of the city followed. The chief magistrate became a lord mayor
in 1899.

See J. Corry, _History of Bristol_ (Bristol, 1816); J. Wallaway,
_Antiquities_ (1834); J. Evans, _Chronological History of Bristol_ (1824);
Bristol vol. of _Brit. Archaeol. Inst._; J.F. Nicholl and J. Taylor,
_Bristol Past and Present_ (Bristol and London, 1882); W. Hunt, _Bristol_,
in "Historic Towns" series (London, 1887); J. Latimer, _Annals of Bristol_
(various periods); G.E. Weare, _Collectanea relating to the Bristol Friars_
(Bristol, 1893); Samuel Seyer, _History of Bristol and Bristol Charters_
(1812); _The Little Red Book of Bristol_ (1900); _The Maior's Kalendar_
(Camden Soc., 1872); _Victoria County History, Gloucester_.

BRISTOL, a borough of Bucks county, Pennsylvania, U.S.A., on the Delaware
river, opposite Burlington, New Jersey, 20 m. N.E. of Philadelphia. Pop.
(1890) 6553; (1900) 7104 (1134 foreign-born); (1910) 9256. It is served by
the Pennsylvania railway. The borough is built on level ground elevated
several feet above the river, and in the midst of an attractive farming
country. The principal business houses are on Mill Street; while Radcliffe
Street extends along the river. Among Bristol's manufacturing
establishments are machine shops, rolling mills, a planing mill, yarn,
hosiery and worsted mills, and factories for making carpets, wall paper and
patent leather. Bath Springs are located just outside the borough limits;
though not so famous as they were early in the 18th century, these springs
are still well known for the medicinal properties of their chalybeate
waters. Bristol was one of the first places to be settled in Pennsylvania
after William Penn received his charter for the province in 1681, and from
its settlement until 1725 it was the seat of government of the county. It
was laid out in 1697 and was incorporated as a borough in 1720; the present
charter, however, dates only from 1851.

BRISTOL, the shire-township of Bristol county, Rhode Island, U.S.A., about
15 m. S.S.E. of Providence, between Narragansett Bay on the W. and Mount
Hope Bay on the E., thus being a peninsula. Pop. (1900) 6901, of whom 1923
were foreign-born; (1905; state census) 7512; (1910) 8565; area 12 sq. m.
It is served by the New York, New Haven & Hartford, and the Rhode Island
Suburban railways, and is connected with the island of Rhode Island by
ferry. Mount Hope (216 ft.), on the eastern side, commands delightful views
of landscape, bay and river scenery. Elsewhere in the township the surface
is gently undulating and generally well adapted to agriculture, especially
to the growing of onions. A small island, Hog Island, is included in the
township. The principal village, also known as Bristol, is a port of entry
with a capacious and deep harbour, has manufactories of rubber and woollen
goods, and is well known as a yacht-building centre, several defenders of
the America's Cup, including the "Columbia" and the "Reliance," having been
built in the Herreshoff yards here. At the close of King Philip's War in
1676, Mount Hope Neck (which had been the seat of the vanquished sachem),
with most of what is now the township of Bristol, was awarded to Plymouth
Colony. In 1680, immediately after Plymouth had conveyed the "Neck" to a
company of four, the village was laid out; the following year, in
anticipation of future commercial importance, the township and the village
were named Bristol, from the town in England. The township became the
shire-township in 1685, passed under the jurisdiction of Massachusetts in
1692, and in 1747 was annexed to Rhode Island. During the War of
Independence the village was bombarded by the British on the 7th of October
1775, but [v.04 p.0582] suffered little damage; on the 25th of May 1778 it
was visited and partially destroyed by a British force.

BRISTOL, a city of Sullivan county, Tennessee, and Washington county,
Virginia, U.S.A., 130 m. N.E. of Knoxville, Tennessee, at an altitude of
about 1700 ft. Pop. (1880) 3209; (1890) 6226; (1900) 9850 (including 1981
negroes); (1910) 13,395, of whom 7148 were in Tennessee and 6247 were in
Virginia. Bristol is served by the Holston Valley, the Southern, the
Virginia & South-Western, and the Norfolk & Western railways, and is a
railway centre of some importance. It is near the great mineral deposits of
Virginia, Tennessee, West Virginia, Kentucky and North Carolina; an
important distributing point for iron, coal and coke; and has tanneries and
lumber mills, iron furnaces, tobacco factories, furniture factories and
packing houses. It is the seat of Sullins College (Methodist Episcopal,
South; 1870) for women, and of the Virginia Institute for Women (Baptist,
1884), both in the state of Virginia, and of a normal college for negroes,
on the Tennessee side of the state line. The Tennessee-Virginia boundary
line runs through the principal street, dividing the place into two
separate corporations, the Virginia part, which before 1890 (when it was
chartered as a city) was known as Goodson, being administratively
independent of the county in which it is situated. Bristol was settled
about 1835, and the town of Bristol, Tennessee, was first incorporated in
1856.

BRISTOW, BENJAMIN HELM (1832-1896), American lawyer and politician, was
born in Elkton, Kentucky, on the 20th of June 1832, the son of Francis
Marion Bristow (1804-1864), a Whig member of Congress in 1854-1855 and
1859-1861. He graduated at Jefferson College, Canonsburg, Pennsylvania, in
1851, studied law under his father, and was admitted to the Kentucky bar in
1853. At the beginning of the Civil War he became lieutenant-colonel of the
25th Kentucky Infantry; was severely wounded at Shiloh; helped to recruit
the 8th Kentucky Cavalry, of which he was lieutenant-colonel and later
colonel; and assisted at the capture of John H. Morgan in July 1863. In
1863-1865 he was state senator; in 1865-1866 assistant United States
district-attorney, and in 1866-1870 district-attorney for the Louisville
district; and in 1870-1872, after a few months' practice of law with John
M. Harlan, was the (first appointed) solicitor-general of the United
States. In 1873 President Grant nominated him attorney-general of the
United States in case George H. Williams were confirmed as chief justice of
the United States,--a contingency which did not arise. As secretary of the
treasury (1874-1876) he prosecuted with vigour the so-called "Whisky Ring,"
the headquarters of which was at St Louis, and which, beginning in 1870 or
1871, had defrauded the Federal government out of a large part of its
rightful revenue from the distillation of whisky. Distillers and revenue
officers in St Louis, Milwaukee, Cincinnati and other cities were
implicated, and the illicit gains--which in St Louis alone probably
amounted to more than $2,500,000 in the six years 1870-1876--were divided
between the distillers and the revenue officers, who levied assessments on
distillers ostensibly for a Republican campaign fund to be used in
furthering Grant's re-election. Prominent among the ring's alleged
accomplices at Washington was Orville E. Babcock, private secretary to
President Grant, whose personal friendship for Babcock led him to
indiscreet interference in the prosecution. Through Bristow's efforts more
than 200 men were indicted, a number of whom were convicted, but after some
months' imprisonment were pardoned. Largely owing to friction between
himself and the president, Bristow resigned his portfolio in June 1876; as
secretary of the treasury he advocated the resumption of specie payments
and at least a partial retirement of "greenbacks"; and he was also an
advocate of civil service reform. He was a prominent candidate for the
Republican presidential nomination in 1876. After 1878 he practised law in
New York City, where he died on the 22nd of June 1896.

See _Memorial of Benjamin Helm Bristow_, largely prepared by David Willcox
(Cambridge, Mass., privately printed, 1897); _Whiskey Frauds_, 44th Cong.,
1st Sess., Mis. Doc. No. 186; _Secrets of the Great Whiskey Ring_ (Chicago,
1880), by John McDonald, who for nearly six years had been supervisor of
internal revenue at St Louis,--a book by one concerned and to be considered
in that light.

BRISTOW, HENRY WILLIAM (1817-1889), English geologist, son of Major-General
H. Bristow, who served in the Peninsular War, was born on the 17th of May
1817. He was educated at King's College, London, under John Phillips, then
professor of geology. In 1842 he was appointed assistant geologist on the
Geological Survey, and in that service he remained for forty-six years,
becoming director for England and Wales in 1872, and retiring in 1888. He
was elected F.R.S. in 1862. He died in London on the 14th of June 1889. His
publications (see _Geol. Mag._, 1889, p. 384) include _A Glossary of
Mineralogy_ (1861) and _The Geology of the Isle of Wight_ (1862).

BRITAIN (Gr. [Greek: Pretanikai nesoi, Brettania]; Lat. _Britannia_, rarely
_Brittania_), the anglicized form of the classical name of England, Wales
and Scotland, sometimes extended to the British Isles as a whole
(_Britannicae Insulae_). The Greek and Roman forms are doubtless attempts
to reproduce a Celtic original, the exact form of which is still matter of
dispute. Brittany (Fr. _Bretagne_) in western France derived its name from
Britain owing to migrations in the 5th and 6th century A.D. The
personification of Britannia as a female figure may be traced back as far
as the coins of Hadrian and Antoninus Pius (early 2nd century A.D.); its
first appearance on modern coins is on the copper of Charles II. (see
NUMISMATICS).

In what follows, the archaeological interest of early Britain is dealt
with, in connexion with the history of Britain in Pre-Roman, Roman, and
Anglo-Saxon days; this account being supplementary to the articles ENGLAND;
ENGLISH HISTORY; SCOTLAND, &c.

PRE-ROMAN BRITAIN

Geologists are not yet agreed when and by whom Britain was first peopled.
Probably the island was invaded by a succession of races. The first, the
Paleolithic men, may have died out or retired before successors arrived.
During the Neolithic and Bronze Ages we can dimly trace further
immigrations. Real knowledge begins with two Celtic invasions, that of the
Goidels in the later part of the Bronze Age, and that of the Brythons and
Belgae in the Iron Age. These invaders brought Celtic civilization and
dialects. It is uncertain how far they were themselves Celtic in blood and
how far they were numerous enough to absorb or obliterate the races which
they found in Britain. But it is not unreasonable to think that they were
no mere conquering caste, and that they were of the same race as the
Celtic-speaking peoples of the western continent. By the age of Julius
Caesar all the inhabitants of Britain, except perhaps some tribes of the
far north, were Celts in speech and customs. Politically they were divided
into separate and generally warring tribes, each under its own princes.
They dwelt in hill forts with walls of earth or rude stone, or in villages
of round huts sunk into the ground and resembling those found in parts of
northern Gaul, or in subterranean chambered houses, or in hamlets of
pile-dwellings constructed among the marshes. But, at least in the south,
market centres had sprung up, town life was beginning, houses of a better
type were perhaps coming into use, and the southern tribes employed a gold
coinage and also a currency of iron bars or ingots, attested by Caesar and
by surviving examples, which weigh roughly, some two-thirds of a pound,
some 2-2/3 lb, but mostly 1-1/3 lb. In religion, the chief feature was the
priesthood of Druids, who here, as in Gaul, practised magical arts and
barbarous rites of human sacrifice, taught a secret lore, wielded great
influence, but, at least as Druids, took ordinarily no part in politics. In
art, these tribes possessed a native Late Celtic fashion, descended from
far-off Mediterranean antecedents and more directly connected with the
La-Tene culture of the continental Celts. Its characteristics were a
flamboyant and fantastic treatment of plant and animal (though not of
human) forms, a free use of the geometrical device called the "returning
spiral," and much skill in enamelling. Its finest products were in bronze,
but the artistic impulse spread to humbler work in wood and pottery. The
late Celtic age was one which genuinely delighted in beauty of form and
detail. In this it resembled the middle ages rather than the Roman empire
or the present day, and it resembled [v.04 p.0583] them all the more in
that its love of beauty, like theirs, was mixed with a feeling for the
fantastic and the grotesque. The Roman conquest of northern Gaul (57-50
B.C.) brought Britain into definite relation with the Mediterranean. It was
already closely connected with Gaul, and when Roman civilization and its
products invaded Gallia Belgica, they passed on easily to Britain. The
British coinage now begins to bear Roman legends, and after Caesar's two
raids (55, 54 B.C.) the southern tribes were regarded at Rome, though they
do not seem to have regarded themselves, as vassals. Actual conquest was,
however, delayed. Augustus planned it. But both he and his successor
Tiberius realized that the greater need was to consolidate the existing
empire, and absorb the vast additions recently made to it by Pompey, Caesar
and Augustus.

ROMAN BRITAIN

I. _The Roman Conquest._--The conquest of Britain was undertaken by
Claudius in A.D. 43. Two causes coincided to produce the step. On the one
hand a forward policy then ruled at Rome, leading to annexations in various
lands. On the other hand, a probably philo-Roman prince, Cunobelin (known
to literature as Cymbeline), had just been succeeded by two sons,
Caractacus (_q.v._) and Togodumnus, who were hostile to Rome. Caligula, the
half-insane predecessor of Claudius, had made in respect to this event some
blunder which we know only through a sensational exaggeration, but which
doubtless had to be made good. An immediate reason for action was the
appeal of a fugitive British prince, presumably a Roman partisan and victim
of Cunobelin's sons. So Aulus Plautius with a singularly well equipped army
of some 40,000 men landed in Kent and advanced on London. Here Claudius
himself appeared--the one reigning emperor of the 1st century who crossed
the waves of ocean,--and the army, crossing the Thames, moved forward
through Essex and captured the native capital, Camulod[=u]num, now
Colchester. From the base of London and Colchester three corps continued
the conquest. The left wing, the Second Legion (under Vespasian, afterwards
emperor), subdued the south; the centre, the Fourteenth and Twentieth
Legions, subdued the midlands, while the right wing, the Ninth Legion,
advanced through the eastern part of the island. This strategy was at first
triumphant. The lowlands of Britain, with their partly Romanized and partly
scanty population and their easy physical features, presented no obstacle.
Within three or four years everything south of the Humber and east of the
Severn had been either directly annexed or entrusted, as protectorates, to
native client-princes.

A more difficult task remained. The wild hills and wilder tribes of Wales
and Yorkshire offered far fiercer resistance. There followed thirty years
of intermittent hill fighting (A.D. 47-79). The precise steps of the
conquest are not known. Legionary fortresses were established at Wroxeter
(for a time only), Chester and Caerleon, facing the Welsh hills, and at
Lincoln in the northeast. Monmouthshire, and Flintshire with its lead
mines, were early overrun; in 60 Suetonius Paulinus reached Anglesea. The
method of conquest was the establishment of small detached forts in
strategic positions, each garrisoned by 500 or 1000 men, and it was
accompanied by a full share of those disasters which vigorous barbarians
always inflict on civilized invaders. Progress was delayed too by the great
revolt of Boadicea (_q.v._) and a large part of the nominally conquered
Lowlands. Her rising was soon crushed, but the government was obviously
afraid for a while to move its garrisons forward. Indeed, other needs of
the empire caused the withdrawal of the Fourteenth Legion about 67. But the
decade A.D. 70-80 was decisive. A series of three able generals commanded
an army restored to its proper strength by the addition of Legio II.
Adiutrix, and achieved the final subjugation of Wales and the first
conquest of Yorkshire, where a legionary fortress at York was substituted
for that at Lincoln.

The third and best-known, if not the ablest, of these generals, Julius
Agricola, moved on in A.D. 80 to the conquest of the farther north. He
established between the Clyde and Forth a frontier meant to be permanent,
guarded by a line of forts, two of which are still traceable at Camelon
near Falkirk, and at Bar Hill. He then advanced into Caledonia and won a
"famous victory" at Mons Graupius (sometimes, but incorrectly, spelt
Grampius), probably near the confluence of the Tay and the Isla, where a
Roman encampment of his date, Inchtuthill, has been partly examined (see
GALGACUS). He dreamt even of invading Ireland, and thought it an easy task.
The home government judged otherwise. Jealous possibly of a too brilliant
general, certainly averse from costly and fruitless campaigns and needing
the Legio II. Adiutrix for work elsewhere, it recalled both governor and
legion, and gave up the more northerly of his nominal conquests. The most
solid result of his campaigns is that his battlefield, misspelt Grampius,
has provided to antiquaries, and through them to the world, the modern name
of the Grampian Hills.

What frontier was adopted after Agricola's departure, whether Tweed or
Cheviot or other, is unknown. For thirty years (A.D. 85-115) the military
history of Britain is a blank. When we recover knowledge we are in an
altered world. About 115 or 120 the northern Britons rose in revolt and
destroyed the Ninth Legion, posted at York, which would bear the brunt of
any northern trouble. In 122 the second reigning emperor who crossed the
ocean, Hadrian, came himself to Britain, brought the Sixth Legion to
replace the Ninth, and introduced the frontier policy of his age. For over
70 m. from Tyne to Solway, more exactly from Wallsend to Bowness, he built
a continuous rampart, more probably of turf than of stone, with a ditch in
front of it, a number of small forts along it, one or two outposts a few
miles to the north of it, and some detached forts (the best-known is on the
hill above Maryport) guarding the Cumberland coast beyond its western end.
The details of his work are imperfectly known, for though many remains
survive, it is hard to separate those of Hadrian's date from others that
are later. But that Hadrian built a wall here is proved alike by literature
and by inscriptions. The meaning of the scheme is equally certain. It was
to be, as it were, a Chinese wall, marking the definite limit of the Roman
world. It was now declared, not by the secret resolutions of cabinets, but
by the work of the spade marking the solid earth for ever, that the era of
conquest was ended.

[Illustration]

But empires move, though rulers bid them stand still. Whether the land
beyond Hadrian's wall became temptingly peaceful or remained in vexing
disorder, our authorities do not say. We know only that about 142 Hadrian's
successor, Antoninus Pius, acting through his general Lollius Urbicus,
advanced from the Tyne and Solway frontier to the narrower isthmus between
Forth and Clyde, 36 m. across, which Agricola had fortified before him.
Here he reared a continuous rampart with a ditch in front of it, fair-sized
forts, probably a dozen in number, built either close behind it or actually
abutting on it, and a connecting road running from end to end. An ancient
writer states that the rampart was built of regularly laid sods (the same
method which had probably been employed by Hadrian), and excavations in
1891-1893 have verified the statement. The work still survives visibly,
though in varying preservation, except in the agricultural districts near
its two ends. Occasionally, as on Croyhill (near Kilsyth), at Westerwood,
and in the covers of Bonnyside (3 m. west of Falkirk), wall and ditch and
even road can be distinctly traced, and the sites of many of the forts are
plain to practised eyes. Three of these forts have been excavated. All
three show the ordinary features of Roman _castella_, though they differ
more than one would expect in forts built at one time by one general. Bar
Hill, the most completely explored, covers three acres--nearly five times
as much as the earlier fort of Agricola on the same site. It had ramparts
of turf, barrack-rooms of wood, and a headquarters building, storehouse and
bath in stone: it stands a few yards back from the wall. Castle Cary covers
nearly four acres: its ramparts contain massive and well-dressed masonry;
its interior buildings, though they agree in material, do not altogether
agree in plan with those of Bar Hill, and its north face falls in line with
the frontier wall. Rough Castle, near Falkirk, is very much smaller; it is
remarkable for the astonishing [v.04 p.0584] strength of its turf-built and
earthen ramparts and ravelins, and for a remarkable series of defensive
pits, reminiscent of Caesar's _lilia_ at Alesia, plainly intended to break
an enemy's charge, and either provided with stakes to impale the assailant
or covered over with hurdles or the like to deceive him. Besides the dozen
forts on the wall, one or two outposts may have been held at Ardoch and
Abernethy along the natural route which runs by Stirling and Perth to the
lowlands of the east coast. This frontier was reached from the south by two
roads. One, known in medieval times as Dere Street and misnamed Watling
Street by modern antiquaries, ran from Corbridge on the Tyne past
Otterburn, crossed Cheviot near Makendon Camps, and passed by an important
fort at Newstead near Melrose, and another at Inveresk (outside of
Edinburgh), to the eastern end of the wall. The other, starting from
Carlisle, ran to Birrens, a Roman fort near Ecclefechan, and thence, by a
line not yet explored and indeed not at all certain, to Carstairs and the
west end of the wall. This wall was in addition to, and not instead of, the
wall of Hadrian. Both barriers were held together, and the district between
them was regarded as a military area, outside the range of civilization.

The work of Pius brought no long peace. Sixteen years later disorder broke
out in north Britain, apparently in the district between the Cheviots and
the Derbyshire hills, and was repressed with difficulty after four or five
years' fighting. Eighteen or twenty years later (180-185) a new war broke
out with a different issue. The Romans lost everything beyond Cheviot, and
perhaps even more. The government of Commodus, feeble in itself and vexed
by many troubles, could not repair the loss, and the civil wars which soon
raged in Europe (193-197) gave the Caledonians further chance. It was not
till 208 that Septimius Severus, the ablest emperor of his age, could turn
his attention to the island. He came thither in person, invaded Caledonia,
commenced the reconstruction of the wall of Hadrian, rebuilding it from end
to end in stone, and then in the fourth year of his operations died at
York. Amid much that is uncertain and even legendary about his work in
Britain, this is plain, that he fixed on the line of Hadrian's wall as his
substantive frontier. His successors, Caracalla and Severus Alexander
(211-235), accepted the position, and many inscriptions refer to building
or rebuilding executed by them for the greater efficiency of the frontier
defences. The conquest of Britain was at last over. The wall of Hadrian
remained for nearly two hundred years more the northern limit of Roman
power in the extreme west.

II. _The Province of Britain and its Military System._--Geographically,
Britain consists of two parts: (1) the comparatively flat lowlands of the
south, east and midlands, suitable to agriculture and open to easy
intercourse with the continent, i.e. with the rest of the Roman empire; (2)
the district consisting of the hills of Devon and Cornwall, of Wales and of
northern England, regions lying more, and often very much more, than 600
ft. above the sea, scarred with gorges and deep valleys, mountainous in
character, difficult for armies to traverse, ill fitted to the peaceful
pursuits in agriculture. These two parts of the province differ also in
their history. The lowlands, as we have seen, were conquered easily and
quickly. The uplands were hardly subdued completely till the end of the 2nd
century. They differ, thirdly, in the character of their Roman occupation.
The lowlands were the scene of civil life. Towns, villages and country
houses were their prominent features; troops were hardly seen in them save
in some fortresses on the edge of the hills and in a chain of forts built
in the 4th century to defend the south-east coast, the so-called Saxon
Shore. The uplands of Wales and the north presented another spectacle. Here
civil life was almost wholly absent. No country town or country house has
been found more than 20 m. north of York or west of Monmouthshire. The
hills were one extensive military frontier, covered with forts and
strategic roads connecting them, and devoid of town life, country houses,
farms or peaceful civilized industry. This geographical division was not
reproduced by Rome in any administrative partitions of the province. At
first the whole was governed by one _legatus Augusti_ of consular standing.
Septimius Severus made it two provinces, Superior and Inferior, with a
boundary which probably ran from Humber to Mersey, but we do not know how
long this arrangement lasted. In the 5th century there were five provinces,
Britannia Prima and Secunda, Flavia and Maxima Caesariensis and (for a
while) Valentia, ruled by _praesides_ and _consulares_ under a _vicartus_,
but the only thing known of them is that Britannia Prima included
Cirencester.

[Illustration: FIG. 1.--Plan of Housesteads (Borcovicium) on Hadrian's
Wall.]

The army which guarded or coerced the province consisted, from the time of
Hadrian onwards, of (1) three legions, the Second at Isca Silurum
(Caerleon-on-Usk, _q.v._), the Ninth at Ebur[=a]cum (_q.v._; now York), the
Twentieth at Deva (_q.v._; now Chester), a total of some 15,000 heavy
infantry; and (2) a large but uncertain number of auxiliaries, troops of
the second grade, organized in infantry cohorts or cavalry _alae_, each 500
or 1000 strong, and posted in _castella_ nearer the frontiers than the
legions. The legionary fortresses were large rectangular enclosures of 50
or 60 acres, surrounded by strong walls of which traces can still be seen
in the lower courses of the north and east town-walls of Chester, in the
abbey gardens at York, and on the south side of Caerleon. The auxiliary
_castella_ were hardly a tenth of the size, varying generally from three to
six acres according to the size of the regiment and the need for stabling.
Of these upwards of 70 are known in England and some 20 more in Scotland.
Of the English examples a few have been carefully excavated, notably
Gellygaer between Cardiff and Brecon, one of the most perfect specimens to
be found anywhere in the Roman empire of a Roman fort dating from the end
of the 1st century A.D.; Hardknott, on a Cumberland moor overhanging Upper
Eskdale; and Housesteads on Hadrian's wall. In Scotland excavation has been
more active, in particular at the forts of Birrens, Newstead near Melrose,
Lyne near Peebles, Ardoch between Stirling and Perth, and Castle Cary,
Rough Castle and Bar Hill on the wall of Pius. The internal arrangements of
all these forts follow one general plan. But in some of them the internal
buildings are all of stone, while in [v.04 p.0585] others, principally (it
seems) forts built before 150, wood is used freely and only the few
principal buildings seem to have been constructed throughout of stone.

We may illustrate their character from Housesteads, which, in the form in
which we know it, perhaps dates from Septimius Severus. This fort measures
about 360 by 600 ft. and covers a trifle less than 5 acres. Its ramparts
are of stone, and its north rampart coincides with the great wall of
Hadrian. Its interior is filled with stone buildings. Chief among these
(see fig. 1), and in the centre of the whole fort, is the Headquarters, in
Lat. _Principia_ or, as it is often (though perhaps less correctly) styled
by moderns, _Praetorium_. This is a rectangular structure with only one
entrance which gives access, first, to a small cloistered court (x. 4),
then to a second open court (x. 7), and finally to a row of five rooms (x.
8-12) containing the shrine for official worship, the treasury and other
offices. Close by were officers' quarters, generally built round a tiny
cloistered court (ix., xi., xii.), and substantially built storehouses with
buttresses and dry basements (viii.). These filled the middle third of the
fort. At the two ends were barracks for the soldiers (i.-vi.,
xiii.-xviii.). No space was allotted to private religion or domestic life.
The shrines which voluntary worshippers might visit, the public bath-house,
and the cottages of the soldiers' wives, camp followers, &c., lay outside
the walls. Such were nearly all the Roman forts in Britain. They differ
somewhat from Roman forts in Germany or other provinces, though most of the
differences arise from the different usage of wood and of stone in various
places.

Forts of this kind were dotted all along the military roads of the Welsh
and northern hill-districts. In Wales a road ran from Chester past a fort
at Caer-hyn (near Conway) to a fort at Carnarvon (Segontium). A similar
road ran along the south coast from Caerleon-on-Usk past a fort at Cardiff
and perhaps others, to Carmarthen. A third, roughly parallel to the shore
of Cardigan Bay, with forts at Llanio and Tommen-y-mur (near Festiniog),
connected the northern and southern roads, while the interior was held by a
system of roads and forts not yet well understood but discernible at such
points as Caer-gai on Bala Lake, Castle Collen near Llandrindod Wells, the
Gaer near Brecon, Merthyr and Gellygaer. In the north of Britain we find
three principal roads. One led due north from York past forts at Catterick
Bridge, Piers Bridge, Binchester, Lanchester, Ebchester to the wall and to
Scotland, while branches through Chester-le-Street reached the Tyne Bridge
(Pons Aelius) at Newcastle and the Tyne mouth at South Shields. A second
road, turning north-west from Catterick Bridge, mounted the Pennine Chain
by way of forts at Rokeby, Bowes and Brough-under-Stainmoor, descended into
the Eden valley, reached Hadrian's wall near Carlisle (Luguvallium), and
passed on to Birrens. The third route, starting from Chester and passing up
the western coast, is more complex, and exists in duplicate, the result
perhaps of two different schemes of road-making. Forts in plenty can be
detected along it, notably Manchester (Mancunium or Mamucium), Ribchester
(Bremetennacum), Brougham Castle (Brocavum), Old Penrith (Voreda), and on a
western branch, Watercrook near Kendal, Waterhead near the hotel of that
name on Ambleside, Hardknott above Eskdale, Maryport (Uxellod[=u]num), and
Old Carlisle (possibly Petriana). In addition, two or three cross roads,
not yet sufficiently explored, maintained communication between the troops
in Yorkshire and those in Cheshire and Lancashire. This road system bears
plain marks of having been made at different times, and with different
objectives, but we have no evidence that any one part was abandoned when
any other was built. There are signs, however, that various forts were
dismantled as the country grew quieter. Thus, Gellygaer in South Wales and
Hardknott in Cumberland have yielded nothing later than the opening of the
2nd century.

[Illustration: FIG. 2.--Hadrian's Wall.

From _Social England_, by permission of Cassell & Co., Ltd.]

Besides these detached forts and their connecting roads, the north of
Britain was defended by Hadrian's wall (figs. 2 and 3). The history of this
wall has been given above. The actual works are threefold. First, there is
that which to-day forms the most striking feature in the whole, the wall of
stone 6-8 ft. thick, and originally perhaps 14 ft. high, with a deep ditch
in front, and forts and "mile castles" and turrets and a connecting road
behind it. On the high moors between Chollerford and Gilsland its traces
are still plain, as it climbs from hill to hill and winds along perilous
precipices. Secondly, there is the so-called "Vallum," in reality no
_vallum_ at all, but a broad flat-bottomed ditch out of which the earth has
been cast up on either side into regular and continuous mounds that
resemble ramparts. Thirdly, nowhere very clear on the surface and as yet
detected only at a few points, there are the remains of the "turf wall,"
constructed of sods laid in regular courses, with a ditch in front. This
turf wall is certainly older than the stone wall, and, as our ancient
writers mention two wall-builders, Hadrian and Septimius Severus, the
natural inference is that Hadrian built his wall of [v.04 p.0586] turf and
Severus reconstructed it in stone. The reconstruction probably followed in
general the line of Hadrian's wall in order to utilize the existing ditch,
and this explains why the turf wall itself survives only at special points.
In general it was destroyed to make way for the new wall in stone.
Occasionally (as at Birdoswald) there was a deviation, and the older work
survived. This conversion of earthwork into stone in the age of Severus can
be paralleled from other parts of the Roman empire.

[Illustration: FIG. 3.--Section of Hadrian's Wall.]

The meaning of the _vallum_ is much more doubtful. John Hodgson and Bruce,
the local authorities of the 19th century, supposed that it was erected to
defend the wall from southern insurgents. Others have ascribed it to
Agricola, or have thought it to be the wall of Hadrian, or even assigned it
to pre-Roman natives. The two facts that are clear about it are, that it is
a Roman work, no older than Hadrian (if so old), and that it was not
intended, like the wall, for military defence. Probably it is
contemporaneous with either the turf wall or the stone wall, and marked
some limit of the civil province of Britain. Beyond this we cannot at
present go.

III. _The Civilization of Roman Britain._--Behind these formidable
garrisons, sheltered from barbarians and in easy contact with the Roman
empire, stretched the lowlands of southern and eastern Britain. Here a
civilized life grew up, and Roman culture spread. This part of Britain
became Romanized. In the lands looking on to the Thames estuary (Kent,
Essex, Middlesex) the process had perhaps begun before the Roman conquest.
It was continued after that event, and in two ways. To some extent it was
definitely encouraged by the Roman government, which here, as elsewhere,
founded towns peopled with Roman citizens--generally discharged
legionaries--and endowed them with franchise and constitution like those of
the Italian municipalities. It developed still more by its own automatic
growth. The coherent civilization of the Romans was accepted by the
Britons, as it was by the Gauls, with something like enthusiasm. Encouraged
perhaps by sympathetic Romans, spurred on still more by their own
instincts, and led no doubt by their nobles, they began to speak Latin, to
use the material resources of Roman civilized life, and in time to consider
themselves not the unwilling subjects of a foreign empire, but the British
members of the Roman state. The steps by which these results were reached
can to some extent be dated. Within a few years of the Claudian invasion a
_colonia_, or municipality of time-expired soldiers, had been planted in
the old native capital of Colchester (Camulod[=u]num), and though it served
at first mainly as a fortress and thus provoked British hatred, it came
soon to exercise a civilizing influence. At the same time the British town
of Verulamium (St Albans) was thought sufficiently Romanized to deserve the
municipal status of a _municipium_, which at this period differed little
from that of a _colonia_. Romanized Britons must now have begun to be
numerous. In the great revolt of Boadicea (60) the nationalist party seem
to have massacred many thousands of them along with actual Romans. Fifteen
or twenty years later, the movement increases. Towns spring up, such as
Silchester, laid out in Roman fashion, furnished with public buildings of
Roman type, and filled with houses which are Roman in fittings if not in
plan. The baths of Bath (Aquae Sulis) are exploited. Another _colonia_ is
planted at Lincoln (Lindum), and a third at Gloucester (Glevum) in 96. A
new "chief judge" is appointed for increasing civil business. The
tax-gatherer and recruiting officer begin to make their way into the hills.
During the 2nd century progress was perhaps slower, hindered doubtless by
the repeated risings in the north. It was not till the 3rd century that
country houses and farms became common in most parts of the civilized area.
In the beginning of the 4th century the skilled artisans and builders, and
the cloth and corn of Britain were equally famous on the continent. This
probably was the age when the prosperity and Romanization of the province
reached its height. By this time the town populations and the educated
among the country-folk spoke Latin, and Britain regarded itself as a Roman
land, inhabited by Romans and distinct from outer barbarians.

The civilization which had thus spread over half the island was genuinely
Roman, identical in kind with that of the other western provinces of the
empire, and in particular with that of northern Gaul. But it was defective
in quantity. The elements which compose it are marked by smaller size, less
wealth and less splendour than the same elements elsewhere. It was also
uneven in its distribution. Large tracts, in particular Warwickshire and
the adjoining midlands, were very thinly inhabited. Even densely peopled
areas like north Kent, the Sussex coast, west Gloucestershire and east
Somerset, immediately adjoin areas like the Weald of Kent and Sussex where
Romano-British remains hardly occur.

The administration of the civilized part of the province, while subject to
the governor of all Britain, was practically entrusted to local
authorities. Each Roman municipality ruled itself and a territory perhaps
as large as a small county which belonged to it. Some districts belonged to
the Imperial Domains, and were administered by agents of the emperor. The
rest, by far the larger part of the country, was divided up among the old
native tribes or cantons, some ten or twelve in number, each grouped round
some country town where its council (_ordo_) met for cantonal business.
This cantonal system closely resembles that which we find in Gaul. It is an
old native element recast in Roman form, and well illustrates the Roman
principle of local government by devolution.

In the general framework of Romano-British life the two chief features were
the town, and the _villa_. The towns of the province, as we have already
implied, fall into two classes. Five modern cities, Colchester, Lincoln,
York, Gloucester and St Albans, stand on the sites, and in some fragmentary
fashion bear the names of five Roman municipalities, founded by the Roman
government with special charters and constitutions. All of these reached a
considerable measure of prosperity. None of them rivals the greater
municipalities of other provinces. Besides them we trace a larger number of
country towns, varying much in size, but all possessing in some degree the
characteristics of a town. The chief of these seem to be cantonal capitals,
probably developed out of the market centres or capitals of the Celtic
tribes before the Roman conquest. Such are Isurium Brigantum, capital of
the Brigantes, 12 m. north-west of York and the most northerly
Romano-British town; Ratae, now Leicester, capital of the Coritani;
Viroconium, now Wroxeter, near Shrewsbury, capital of the Cornovii; Venta
Silurum, now Caerwent, near Chepstow; Corinium, now Cirencester, capital of
the Dobuni; Isca Dumnoniorum, now Exeter, the most westerly of these towns;
Durnovaria, now Dorchester, in Dorset, capital of the Durotriges; Venta
Belgarum, now Winchester; Calleva Atrebatum, now Silchester, 10 m. south of
Reading; Durovernum Cantiacorum, now Canterbury; and Venta Icenorum, now
Caistor-by-Norwich. Besides these country towns, Londinium (London) was a
rich and important trading town, centre of the road system, and the seat of
the finance officials of the province, as the remarkable objects discovered
in it abundantly prove, while Aquae Sulis (Bath) was a spa provided with
splendid baths, and a richly adorned temple of the native patron deity, Sul
or Sulis, whom the Romans called Minerva. Many smaller places, too, for
example, Magna or Kenchester near Hereford, Durobrivae or Rochester in
Kent, another Durobrivae near Peterborough, a site of uncertain name near
Cambridge, another of uncertain name near Chesterford, exhibited some
measure of town life.

As a specimen we may take Silchester, remarkable as the one town in the
whole Roman empire which has been completely [v.04 p.0587] and
systematically uncovered. As we see it to-day, it is an open space of 100
acres, set on a hill with a wide prospect east and south and west, in shape
an irregular hexagon, enclosed in a circuit of a mile and a half by the
massive ruins of a city wall which still stands here and there some 20 ft.
high (fig. 4). Outside, on the north-east, is the grassy hollow of a tiny
amphitheatre; on the west a line of earthworks runs in wider circuit than
the walls. The area within the walls is a vast expanse of cultivated land,
unbroken by any vestige of antiquity; yet the soil is thick with tile and
potsherd, and in hot summers the unevenly growing corn reveals the remains
of streets beneath the surface. Casual excavations were made here in 1744
and 1833; more systematic ones intermittently between 1864 and 1884 by the
Rev. J.G. Joyce and others; finally, in May 1890, the complete uncovering
of the whole site was begun by Mr G.E. Fox and others. The work was carried
on with splendid perseverance, and the uncovering of the interior was
completed in 1908.

[Illustration: FIG. 4.--General Plan of Silchester (Calleva Atrebatum).]

The chief results concern the buildings. Though these have vanished wholly
from the surface, the foundations and lowest courses of their walls survive
fairly perfect below ground: thus the plan of the town can be minutely
recovered, and both the character of the buildings which make up a place
like Calleva, and the character of Romano-British buildings generally,
become plainer. Of the buildings the chief are:--

1. _Forum._--Near the middle of the town was a rectangular block covering
two acres. It comprised a central open court, 132 ft. by 140 ft. in size,
surrounded on three sides by a corridor or cloister, with rooms opening on
the cloister (fig. 5). On the fourth side was a great hall, with rooms
opening into it from behind. This hall was 270 ft. long and 58 ft. wide;
two rows of Corinthian columns ran down the middle, and the clerestory roof
may have stood 50 ft. above the floor; the walls were frescoed or lined
with marble, and for ornament there were probably statues. Finally, a
corridor ran round outside the whole block. Here the local authorities had
their offices, justice was administered, traders trafficked, citizens and
idlers gathered. Though we cannot apportion the rooms to their precise
uses, the great hall was plainly the basilica, for meetings and business;
the rooms behind it were perhaps law courts, and some of the rooms on the
other three sides of the quadrangle may have been shops. Similar municipal
buildings existed in most towns of the western Empire, whether they were
full municipalities or (as probably Calleva was) of lower rank. The
Callevan Forum seems in general simpler than others, but its basilica is
remarkably large. Probably the British climate compelled more indoor life
than the sunnier south.

2. _Temples._--Two small square temples, of a common western-provincial
type, were in the east of the town; the _cella_ of the larger measured 42
ft. sq., and was lined with Purbeck marble. A third, circular temple stood
between the forum and the south gate. A fourth, a smaller square shrine
found in 1907 a little east of the forum, yielded some interesting
inscriptions which relate to a gild (_collegium_) and incidentally confirm
the name Calleva.

[Illustration: FIG. 5.--Plan of Forum, Basilica and surroundings,
Silchester.]

3. _Christian Church._--Close outside the south-east angle of the forum was
a small edifice, 42 ft. by 27 ft., consisting of a nave and two aisles
which ended at the east in a porch as wide as the building, and at the west
in an apse and two flanking chambers. The nave and porch were floored with
plain red tesserae: in the apse was a simple mosaic panel in red, black and
white. Round the building was a yard, fenced with wooden palings; in it
were a well near the apse, and a small structure of tile with a pit near
the east end. No direct proof of date or use was discovered. But the ground
plan is that of an early Christian church of the "basilican" type. This
type comprised nave and aisles, ending at one end in an apse and two
chambers resembling rudimentary transepts, and at the other end in a porch
(_narthex_). Previous to about A.D. 420 the porch was often at the east end
and the apse at the west, and the altar, often movable, stood in the
apse--as at Silchester, perhaps, on the mosaic panel. A court enclosed the
whole; near the porch was a laver for the ablutions of intending
worshippers. Many such churches have been found in other countries,
especially in Roman Africa; no other satisfactory instance is known in
Britain.

4. _Town Baths._--A suite of public baths stood a little east of the forum.
At the entrance were a peristyle court for loungers and a latrine: hence
the bather passed into the Apodyterium (dressing-room), the Frigidarium
(cold room) fitted with a cold bath for use at the end of the bathing
ceremony, and a series of hot rooms--the whole resembling many modern
Turkish baths. In their first form the baths of Silchester were about 160
ft. by 80 ft., but they were later considerably extended.

5. _Private Houses._--The private houses of Silchester are of two types.
They consist either of a row of rooms, with a corridor along them, and
perhaps one or two additional rooms at one or both ends, or of three such
corridors and rows of rooms, forming three sides of a large square open
yard. They are detached houses, standing each in its own garden, and not
forming terraces or rows. The country houses of Roman Britain have long
been recognized as embodying these (or allied) types; now it becomes plain
that they were the normal types throughout Britain. They differ widely from
the town houses of Rome and Pompeii: they are less unlike some of the
country houses of Italy and Roman Africa; but their real parallels occur in
Gaul, and they may be Celtic types modified to Roman use--like Indian
bungalows. Their internal fittings--hypocausts, frescoes, mosaics--are
everywhere Roman; those at Silchester are average specimens, and, except
for one mosaic, not individually striking. The largest Silchester house,
with a special annexe for baths, is usually taken to be a guest-house or
inn for travellers between London and the west (fig. 6). Altogether, the
town probably did not contain more than seventy or eighty houses of any
size, and large spaces were not built over at all. This fact and the
peculiar character of the houses must have given to Silchester rather the
appearance of a village with scattered cottages, each in its own plot
facing its own way, than a town with regular and continuous streets.

6. _Industries._--Shops are conjectured in the forum and elsewhere, [v.04
p.0588] but were not numerous. Many dyers' furnaces, a little silver
refinery, and perhaps a bakery have also been noticed.

[Illustration: FIG. 6.--Plan of supposed Inn and Baths at Silchester.]

7. _Streets, Roads, &c._--The streets were paved with gravel: they varied
in width up to 281/2 ft. They intersect regularly at right angles, dividing
the town into square blocks, like modern Mannheim or Turin, according to a
Roman system usual in both Italy and the provinces: plainly they were laid
out all at once, possibly by Agricola (Tac. _Agr._ 21) and most probably
about his time. There were four chief gates, not quite symmetrically
placed. The town-walls are built of flint and concrete bonded with
ironstone, and are backed with earth. In the plans, though not in the
reports, of the excavations, they are shown as built later than the
streets. No traces of meat-market, theatre or aqueduct have come to light:
water was got from wells lined with wooden tubs, and must have been scanty
in dry summers. Smaller objects abound--coins, pottery, window and bottle
and cup glass, bronze ornaments, iron tools, &c.--and many belong to the
beginnings of Calleva, but few pieces are individually notable. Traces of
late Celtic art are singularly absent; Roman fashions rule supreme, and
inscriptions show that even the lower classes here spoke and wrote Latin.
Outside the walls were the cemeteries, not yet explored. Of suburbs we have
as yet no hint. Nor indeed is the neighbourhood of Calleva at all rich in
Roman remains. In fact, as well as in Celtic etymology, it was "the town in
the forest." A similar absence of remains may be noticed outside other
Romano-British towns, and is significant of their economic position. Such
doubtless were most of the towns of Roman Britain--thoroughly Romanized,
peopled with Roman-speaking citizens, furnished with Roman appurtenances,
living in Roman ways, but not very large, not very rich, a humble witness
to the assimilating power of the Roman civilization in Britain.

The country, as opposed to the towns, of Roman Britain seems to have been
divided into estates, commonly (though perhaps incorrectly) known as
"villas." Many examples survive, some of them large and luxurious
country-houses, some mere farms, constructed usually on one of the two
patterns described in the account of Silchester above. The inhabitants were
plainly as various--a few of them great nobles and wealthy landowners,
others small farmers or possibly bailiffs. Some of these estates were
worked on the true "villa" system, by which the lord occupied the "great
house," and cultivated the land close round it by slaves, while he let the
rest to half-free _coloni_. But other systems may have prevailed as well.
Among the most important country-houses are those of Bignor in west Sussex,
and Woodchester and Chedworth in Gloucestershire.

The wealth of the country was principally agrarian. Wheat and wool were
exported in the 4th century, when, as we have said, Britain was especially
prosperous. But the details of the trade are unrecorded. More is known of
the lead and iron mines which, at least in the first two centuries, were
worked in many districts--lead in Somerset, Shropshire, Flintshire and
Derbyshire; iron in the west Sussex Weald, the Forest of Dean, and (to a
slight extent) elsewhere. Other minerals were less notable. The gold
mentioned by Tacitus proved scanty. The Cornish tin, according to present
evidence, was worked comparatively little, and perhaps most in the later
Empire.

Lastly, the roads. Here we must put aside all idea of "Four Great Roads."
That category is probably the invention of antiquaries, and certainly
unconnected with Roman Britain (see ERMINE STREET). Instead, we may
distinguish four main groups of roads radiating from London, and a fifth
which runs obliquely. One road ran south-east to Canterbury and the Kentish
ports, of which Richborough (Rutupiae) was the most frequented. A second
ran west to Silchester, and thence by various branches to Winchester,
Exeter, Bath, Gloucester and South Wales. A third, known afterwards to the
English as Watling Street, ran by St Albans Wall near Lichfield
(Letocetum), to Wroxeter and Chester. It also gave access by a branch to
Leicester and Lincoln. A fourth served Colchester, the eastern counties,
Lincoln and York. The fifth is that known to the English as the Fosse,
which joins Lincoln and Leicester with Cirencester, Bath and Exeter.
Besides these five groups, an obscure road, called by the Saxons Akeman
Street, gave alternative access from London through Alchester (outside of
Bicester) to Bath, while another obscure road winds south from near
Sheffield, past Derby and Birmingham, and connects the lower Severn with
the Humber. By these roads and their various branches the Romans provided
adequate communications throughout the lowlands of Britain.

IV. _The End of Roman Britain._--Early in the 4th century it was necessary
to establish a special coast defence, reaching from the Wash to Spithead,
against Saxon pirates: there were forts at Brancaster, Borough Castle (near
Yarmouth), Bradwell (at the mouth of the Colne and Blackwater), Reculver,
Richborough, Dover and Lymme (all in Kent), Pevensey in Sussex, Porchester
near Portsmouth, and perhaps also at Felixstowe in Suffolk. After about
350, barbarian assaults, not only of Saxons but also of Irish (Scoti) and
Picts, became commoner and more terrible. At the end of the century Magnus
Maximus, claiming to be emperor, withdrew many troops from Britain and a
later pretender did the same. Early in the 5th century the Teutonic
conquest of Gaul cut the island off from Rome. This does not mean that
there was any great "departure of Romans." The central government simply
ceased to send the usual governors and high officers. The Romano-British
were left to themselves. Their position was weak. Their fortresses lay in
the north and west, while the Saxons attacked the east and south. Their
trained troops, and even their own numbers, must have been few. It is
intelligible that they followed a precedent set by Rome in that age, and
hired Saxons to repel Saxons. But they could not command the fidelity of
their mercenaries, and the Saxon peril only grew greater. It would seem as
if the Romano-Britons were speedily driven from the east of the island.
Even Wroxeter on the Welsh border may have been finally destroyed before
the end of the 5th century. It seems that the Saxons though apparently
unable to maintain their hold so far to the west, were able to prevent the
natives from recovering the lowlands. Thus driven from the centres of
Romanized life, from the region of walled cities and civilized houses, into
the hills of Wales and the north-west, the provincials underwent an
intelligible change. The Celtic element, never quite extinct in those hills
and, like most forms of barbarism, reasserting itself in this wild age--not
without reinforcement from Ireland--challenged the remnants of Roman
civilization and in the end absorbed them. The Celtic language reappeared;
the Celtic art emerged from its shelters in the west to develop in new and
medieval fashions.

AUTHORITIES.--The principal references to early Britain in classical
writers occur in Strabo, Diodorus, Julius Caesar, the elder Pliny, Tacitus,
Ptolemy and Cassius Dio, and in the lists of the Antonine Itinerary
(probably about A.D. 210-230; ed. Parthey, 1848), the _Notitia Dignitatum_
(about A.D. 400; ed. Seeck, 1876), and the Ravennas (7th-century
_rechauffe_; ed. Parthey 1860). The chief passages are collected in
Petrie's _Monumenta Hist. Britann._ (1848), and (alphabetically) in
Holder's _Altkeltische Sprachschatz_ (1896-1908). The Roman inscriptions
have been collected by Huebner, _Corpus Inscriptionum Latin._ vii. (1873),
and in supplements by Huebner and Haverfield in the periodical _Ephemeris
epigraphica_; see also Huebner, _Inscript. Britann. Christianae_ (1876, now
out of date), and J. Rhys on Pictish, &c., inscriptions, _Proceedings Soc.
Antiq. Scotland_, xxvi., xxxii.

Of modern works the best summary for Roman Britain and for Caesar's
invasions is T.R. Holmes, _Ancient Britain_ (1907), who cites numerous
authorities. See also Sir John Evans, _Stone Implements, [v.04 p.0589]
Bronze Implements_, and _Ancient British Coins_ (with suppl.); Boyd
Dawkins, _Early Man in Britain_ (1880); J. Rhys, _Celtic Britain_ (3rd ed.,
1904). For late Celtic art see J.M. Kemble and A.W. Franks' _Horae Ferales_
(1863), and Arthur J. Evans in _Archaeologia_, vols. lii.-lv. Celtic
ethnology and philology (see CELT) are still in the "age of discussion."
For ancient earthworks see A. Hadrian Allcroft, _Earthwork of England_
(1909).

For Roman Britain see, in general, Prof. F. Haverfield, _The Romanization
of Roman Britain_ (Oxford, 1906), and his articles in the _Victoria County
History_; also the chapter in Mommsen's _Roman Provinces_; and an article
in the _Edinburgh Review_, 1899. For the wall of Hadrian see John Hodgson,
_History of Northumberland_ (1840); J.C. Bruce, _Roman Wall_ (3rd ed.,
1867); reports of excavations by Haverfield in the _Cumberland
Archaeological Society Transactions_ (1894-1904); and R.C. Bosanquet,
_Roman Camp at Housesteads_ (Newcastle, 1904). For the Scottish Excavations
see _Proceedings of the Society of Antiquaries of Scotland_, xx.-xl., and
especially J. Macdonald, _Bar Hill_ (reprint, Glasgow, 1906). For other
forts see R.S. Ferguson, _Cumberland Arch. Soc. Trans._ xii., on Hardknott;
and J. Ward, _Roman Fort of Gellygaer_ (London, 1903). For the Roman
occupation of Scotland see Haverfield in _Antonine Wall Report_ (1899); J.
Macdonald, _Roman Stones in Hunterian Mus._ (1897); and, though an older
work, Stuart's _Caledonia Romana_ (1852). For Silchester, _Archaeologia_
(1890-1908); for Caerwent (ib. 1901-1908); for London, Charles Roach Smith,
_Roman London_ (1859); for Christianity in Roman Britain, _Engl. Hist.
Rev._ (1896); for the villages, Gen. Pitt-Rivers' _Excavations in Cranborne
Chase, &c._ (4 vols., 1887-1908), and _Proc. Soc. of Ant._ xviii. For the
end of Roman Britain see _Engl. Hist. Rev._ (1904); Prof. Bury's _Life of
St Patrick_ (1905); Haverfield's _Romanization_ (cited above); and P.
Vinogradoff, _Growth of the Manor_ (1905), bk. i.

(F. J. H.)

ANGLO-SAXON BRITAIN

1. _History._--The history of Britain after the withdrawal of the Roman
troops is extremely obscure, but there can be little doubt that for many
years the inhabitants of the provinces were exposed to devastating raids by
the Picts and Scots. According to Gildas it was for protection against
these incursions that the Britons decided to call in the Saxons. Their
allies soon obtained a decisive victory; but subsequently they turned their
arms against the Britons themselves, alleging that they had not received
sufficient payment for their services. A somewhat different account,
probably of English origin, may be traced in the _Historia Brittonum_,
according to which the first leaders of the Saxons, Hengest and Horsa, came
as exiles, seeking the protection of the British king, Vortigern. Having
embraced his service they quickly succeeded in expelling the northern
invaders. Eventually, however, they overcame the Britons through treachery,
by inducing the king to allow them to send for large bodies of their own
countrymen. It was to these adventurers, according to tradition, that the
kingdom of Kent owed its origin. The story is in itself by no means
improbable, while the dates assigned to the first invasion by various
Welsh, Gaulish and English authorities, with one exception all fall within
about a quarter of a century, viz. between the year 428 and the joint reign
of Martian and Valentinian III. (450-455).

For the subsequent course of the invasion our information is of the most
meagre and unsatisfactory character. According to the Anglo-Saxon Chronicle
the kingdom of Sussex was founded by a certain Ella or AElle, who landed in
477, while Wessex owed its origin to Cerdic, who arrived some eighteen
years later. No value, however, can be attached to these dates; indeed, in
the latter case the story itself is open to suspicion on several grounds
(see WESSEX). For the movements which led to the foundation of the more
northern kingdoms we have no evidence worth consideration, nor do we know
even approximately when they took place. But the view that the invasion was
effected throughout by small bodies of adventurers acting independently of
one another, and that each of the various kingdoms owes its origin to a
separate enterprise, has little probability in its favour. Bede states that
the invaders belonged to three different nations, Kent and southern
Hampshire being occupied by Jutes (_q.v._), while Essex, Sussex and Wessex
were founded by the Saxons, and the remaining kingdoms by the Angli
(_q.v._). The peculiarities of social organization in Kent certainly tend
to show that this kingdom had a different origin from the rest; but the
evidence for the distinction between the Saxons and the Angli is of a much
less satisfactory character (see ANGLO-SAXONS). The royal family of Essex
may really have been of Saxon origin (see ESSEX), but on the other hand the
West Saxon royal family claimed to be of the same stock as that of
Bernicia, and their connexions in the past seem to have lain with the
Angli.

We need not doubt that the first invasion was followed by a long period of
warfare between the natives and the invaders, in which the latter gradually
strengthened their hold on the conquered territories. It is very probable
that by the end of the 5th century all the eastern part of Britain, at
least as far as the Humber, was in their hands. The first important check
was received at the siege of "Mons Badonicus" in the year 517 (_Ann.
Cambr._), or perhaps rather some fifteen or twenty years earlier. According
to Gildas this event was followed by a period of peace for at least
forty-four years. In the latter part of the 6th century, however, the
territories occupied by the invaders seem to have been greatly extended. In
the south the West Saxons are said to have conquered first Wiltshire and
then all the upper part of the Thames valley, together with the country
beyond as far as the Severn. The northern frontier also seems to have been
pushed considerably farther forward, perhaps into what is now Scotland, and
it is very probable that the basin of the Trent, together with the central
districts between the Trent and the Thames, was conquered about the same
time, though of this we have no record. Again, the destruction of Chester
about 615 was soon followed by the overthrow of the British kingdom of
Elmet in south-west Yorkshire, and the occupation of Shropshire and the
Lothians took place perhaps about the same period, that of Herefordshire
probably somewhat later. In the south, Somerset is said to have been
conquered by the West Saxons shortly after the middle of the 7th century.
Dorset had probably been acquired by them before this time, while part of
Devon seems to have come into their hands soon afterwards.

The area thus conquered was occupied by a number of separate kingdoms, each
with a royal family of its own. The districts north of the Humber contained
two kingdoms, Bernicia (_q.v._) and Deira (_q.v._), which were eventually
united in Northumbria. South of the Humber, Lindsey seems to have had a
dynasty of its own, though in historical times it was apparently always
subject to the kings of Northumbria or Mercia. The upper basin of the Trent
formed the nucleus of the kingdom of Mercia (_q.v._), while farther down
the east coast was the kingdom of East Anglia (_q.v._). Between these two
lay a territory called Middle Anglia, which is sometimes described as a
kingdom, though we do not know whether it ever had a separate dynasty.
Essex, Kent and Sussex (see articles on these kingdoms) preserve the names
of ancient kingdoms, while the old diocese of Worcester grew out of the
kingdom of the Hwicce (_q.v._), with which it probably coincided in area.
The south of England, between Sussex and "West Wales" (eventually reduced
to Cornwall), was occupied by Wessex, which originally also possessed some
territory to the north of the Thames. Lastly, even the Isle of Wight
appears to have had a dynasty of its own. But it must not be supposed that
all these kingdoms were always, or even normally, independent. When history
begins, AEthelberht, king of Kent, was supreme over all the kings south of
the Humber. He was followed by the East Anglian king Raedwald, and the
latter again by a series of Northumbrian kings with an even wider
supremacy. Before AEthelberht a similar position had been held by the West
Saxon king Ceawlin, and at a much earlier period, according to tradition,
by Ella or AElle, the first king of Sussex. The nature of this supremacy has
been much discussed, but the true explanation seems to be furnished by that
principle of personal allegiance which formed such an important element in
Anglo-Saxon society.

2. _Government._--Internally the various states seem to have been organized
on very similar lines. In every case we find kingly government from the
time of our earliest records, and there is no doubt that the institution
goes back to a date anterior to the invasion of Britain (see OFFA;
WERMUND). The royal title, however, was frequently borne by more than one
person. Sometimes we find one supreme king together with a number of
under-kings (_subreguli_); sometimes again, especially in the smaller
kingdoms, Essex, Sussex and Hwicce, we meet with two [v.04 p.0590] or more
kings, generally brothers, reigning together apparently on equal terms.
During the greater part of the 8th century Kent seems to have been divided
into two kingdoms; but as a rule such divisions did not last beyond the
lifetime of the kings between whom the arrangement had been made. The kings
were, with very rare exceptions, chosen from one particular family in each
state, the ancestry of which was traced back not only to the founder of the
kingdom but also, in a remoter degree, to a god. The members of such
families were entitled to special wergilds, apparently six times as great
as those of the higher class of nobles (see below).

The only other central authority in the state was the king's council or
court (_þeod_, _witan_, _plebs_, _concilium_). This body consisted partly
of young warriors in constant attendance on the king, and partly of senior
officials whom he called together from time to time. The terms used for the
two classes by Bede are _milites_ (_ministri_) and _comites_, for which the
Anglo-Saxon version has _þegnas_ and _gesiethas_ respectively. Both classes
alike consisted in part of members of the royal family. But they were by no
means confined to such persons or even to born subjects of the king.
Indeed, we are told that popular kings like Oswine attracted young nobles
to their service from all quarters. The functions of the council have been
much discussed, and it has been claimed that they had the right of electing
and deposing kings. This view, however, seems to involve the existence of a
greater feeling for constitutionalism than is warranted by the information
at our disposal. The incidents which have been brought forward as evidence
to this effect may with at least equal probability be interpreted as cases
of profession or transference of personal allegiance. In other respects the
functions of the council seem to have been of a deliberative character. It
was certainly customary for the king to seek their advice and moral support
on important questions, but there is nothing to show that he had to abide
by the opinion of the majority.

For administrative purposes each of the various kingdoms was divided into a
number of districts under the charge of royal reeves (_cyninges gerefa_,
_praefectus_, _praepositus_). These officials seem to have been located in
royal villages (_cyninges tun_, _villa regalis_) or fortresses (_cyninges
burg_, _urbs regis_), which served as centres and meeting-places (markets,
&c.) for the inhabitants of the district, and to which their dues, both in
payments and services had to be rendered. The usual size of such districts
in early times seems to have been 300, 600 or 1200 hides.[1] In addition to
these districts we find mention also of much larger divisions containing
2000, 3000, 5000 or 7000 hides. To this category belong the shires of
Wessex (Hampshire, Wiltshire, Berkshire, &c.), each of which had an earl
(_aldormon_, _princeps_, _dux_) of its own, at all events from the 8th
century onwards. Many, if not all, of these persons were members of the
royal family, and it is not unlikely that they originally bore the kingly
title. At all events they are sometimes described as _subreguli_.

3. _Social Organization._--The officials mentioned above, whether of royal
birth or not, were probably drawn from the king's personal retinue. In
Anglo-Saxon society, as in that of all Teutonic nations in early times, the
two most important principles were those of kinship and personal
allegiance. If a man suffered injury it was to his relatives and his lord,
rather than to any public official, that he applied first for protection
and redress. If he was slain, a fixed sum (_wergild_), varying according to
his station, had to be paid to his relatives, while a further but smaller
sum (_manbot_) was due to his lord. These principles applied to all classes
of society alike, and though strife within the family was by no means
unknown, at all events in royal families, the actual slaying of a kinsman
was regarded as the most heinous of all offences. Much the same feeling
applied to the slaying of a lord--an offence for which no compensation
could be rendered. How far the armed followers of a lord were entitled to
compensation when the latter was slain is uncertain, but in the case of a
king they received an amount equal to the wergild. Another important
development of the principle of allegiance is to be found in the custom of
heriots. In later times this custom amounted practically to a system of
death-duties, payable in horses and arms or in money to the lord of the
deceased. There can be little doubt, however, that originally it was a
restoration to the lord of the military outfit with which he had presented
his man when he entered his service. The institution of thegnhood, _i.e._
membership of the _comitatus_ or retinue of a prince, offered the only
opening by which public life could be entered. Hence it was probably
adopted almost universally by young men of the highest classes. The thegn
was expected to fight for his lord, and generally to place his services at
his disposal in both war and peace. The lord, on the other hand, had to
keep his thegns and reward them from time to time with arms and treasure.
When they were of an age to marry he was expected to provide them with the
means of doing so. If the lord was a king this provision took the form of a
grant, perhaps normally ten hides, from the royal lands. Such estates were
not strictly hereditary, though as a mark of favour they were not
unfrequently re-granted to the sons of deceased holders.

The structure of society in England was of a somewhat peculiar type. In
addition to slaves, who in early times seem to have been numerous, we find
in Wessex and apparently also in Mercia three classes, described as
_twelfhynde_, _sixhynde_ and _twihynde_ from the amount of their wergilds,
viz. 1200, 600 and 200 shillings respectively. It is probable that similar
classes existed also in Northumbria, though not under the same names.
Besides these terms there were others which were probably in use
everywhere, viz. _gesiethcund_ for the two higher classes and _ceorlisc_ for
the lowest. Indeed, we find these terms even in Kent, though the social
system of that kingdom seems to have been of an essentially different
character. Here the wergild of the _ceorlisc_ class amounted to 100
shillings, each containing twenty silver coins (_sceattas_), as against 200
shillings of four (in Wessex five) silver coins, and was thus very much
greater than the latter. Again, there was apparently but one _gestiethcund_
class in Kent, with a wergild of 300 shillings, while, on the other hand,
below the _ceorlisc_ class we find three classes of persons described as
_laetas_, who corresponded in all probability to the _liti_ or freedmen of
the continental laws, and who possessed wergilds of 80, 60 and 40 shillings
respectively. To these we find nothing analogous in the other kingdoms,
though the poorer classes of Welsh freemen had wergilds varying from 120 to
60 shillings. It should be added that the differential treatment of the
various classes was by no means confined to the case of wergilds. We find
it also in the compensations to which they were entitled for various
injuries, in the fines to which they were liable, and in the value attached
to their oaths. Generally, though not always, the proportions observed were
the same as in the wergilds.

The nature of the distinction between the _gesiethcund_ and _ceorlisc_
classes is nowhere clearly explained; but it was certainly hereditary and
probably of considerable antiquity. In general we may perhaps define them
as nobles and commons, though in view of the numbers of the higher classes
it would probably be more correct to speak of gentry and peasants. The
distinction between the _twelfhynde_ and _sixhynde_ classes was also in
part at least hereditary, but there is good reason for believing that it
arose out of the possession of land. The former consisted of persons who
possessed, whether as individuals or families, at least five hides of
land--which practically means a village--while the latter were landless,
_i.e._ probably without this amount of land. Within the _ceorlisc_ class we
find similar subdivisions, though they were not marked by a difference in
wergild. The _gafolgelda_ or _tributarius_ (tribute-payer) seems to have
been a ceorl who possessed at least a hide, while the _gebur_ was without
land of his own, and received his outfit as a loan from his lord.

4. _Payments and Services._--We have already had occasion to refer to the
dues which were rendered by different classes of the population, and which
the reeves in royal villages had to collect and superintend. The payments
seem to have varied greatly according to the class from which they were
due. Those [v.04 p.0591] rendered by landowners seem to have been known as
_feorm_ or _fostor_, and consisted of a fixed quantity of articles paid in
kind. In Ine's Laws (cap. 70) we find a list of payments specified for a
unit of ten hides, perhaps the normal holding of a _twelfhynde_ man--though
on the other hand it may be nothing more than a mere fiscal unit in an
aggregate of estates. The list consists of oxen, sheep, geese, hens, honey,
ale, loaves, cheese, butter, fodder, salmon and eels. Very similar
specifications are found elsewhere. The payments rendered by the
_gafolgelda_ (_tributarius_) were known as _gafol_ (_tributuni_), as his
name implies. In Ine's Laws we hear only of the _hwitel_ or white cloak,
which was to be of the value of six pence per household (hide), and of
barley, which was to be six pounds in weight for each worker. In later
times we meet with many other payments both in money and in kind, some of
which were doubtless in accordance with ancient custom. On the other hand
the _gebur_ seems not to have been liable to payments of this kind,
presumably because the land which he cultivated formed part of the demesne
(_inland_) of his lord. The term _gafol_, however, may have been applied to
the payments which he rendered to the latter.

The services required of landowners were very manifold in character.
Probably the most important were military service (_fird_, _expeditio_) and
the repairing of fortifications and bridges--the _trinoda necessitas_ of
later times. Besides these we find reference in charters of the 9th century
to the keeping of the king's hunters, horses, dogs and hawks, and the
entertaining of messengers and other persons in the king's service. The
duties of men of the _sixhynde_ class, if they are to be identified with
the _radcnihtas_ (_radmanni_) of later times, probably consisted chiefly in
riding on the king's (or their lord's) business. The services of the
peasantry can only be conjectured from what we find in later times.
Presumably their chief duty was to undertake a share in the cultivation of
the demesne land. We need scarcely doubt also that the labour of repairing
fortifications and bridges, though it is charged against the landowners,
was in reality delegated by them to their dependents.

5. _Warfare._--All classes are said to have been liable to the duty of
military service. Hence, since the ceorls doubtless formed the bulk of the
population, it has been thought that the Anglo-Saxon armies of early times
were essentially peasant forces. The evidence at our disposal, however,
gives little justification for such a view. The regulation that every five
or six hides should supply a warrior was not a product of the Danish
invasions, as is sometimes stated, but goes back at least to the beginning
of the 9th century. Had the fighting material been drawn from the
_ceorlisc_ class a warrior would surely have been required from each hide,
but for military service no such regulation is found. Again, the fird
(_fyrd_) was composed of mounted warriors during the 9th century, though
apparently they fought on foot, and there are indications that such was the
case also in the 7th century. No doubt ceorls took part in military
expeditions, but they may have gone as attendants and camp-followers rather
than as warriors, their chief business being to make stockades and bridges,
and especially to carry provisions. The serious fighting, however, was
probably left to the _gesiethcund_ classes, who possessed horses and more or
less effective weapons. Indeed, there is good reason for regarding these
classes as essentially military.

The chief weapons were the sword and spear. The former were two-edged and
on the average about 3 ft. long. The hilts were often elaborately
ornamented and sometimes these weapons were of considerable value. No
definite line can be drawn between the spear proper and the javelin. The
spear-heads which have been found in graves vary considerably in both form
and size. They were fitted on to the shaft, by a socket which was open on
one side. Other weapons appear to have been quite rare. Bows and arrows
were certainly in use for sporting purposes, but there is no reason for
believing that they were much used in warfare before the Danish invasions.
They are very seldom met with in graves. The most common article of
defensive armour was the shield, which was small and circular and
apparently of quite thin lime-wood, the edge being formed probably by a
thin band of iron. In the centre of the shield, in order to protect the
hand which held it, was a strong iron boss, some 7 in. in diameter and
projecting about 3 in. It is clear from literary evidence that the helmet
(_helm_) and coat of chain mail (_byrne_) were also in common use. They are
seldom found in graves, however, whether owing to the custom of heriots or
to the fact that, on account of their relatively high value, they were
frequently handed on from generation to generation as heirlooms. Greaves
are not often mentioned. It is worth noting that in later times the heriot
of an "ordinary thegn" (_medema þegn_)--by which is meant apparently not a
king's thegn but a man of the _twelfhynde_ class--consisted of his horse
with its saddle, &c. and his arms, or two pounds of silver as an equivalent
of the whole. The arms required were probably a sword, helmet, coat of mail
and one or two spears and shields. There are distinct indications that a
similar outfit was fairly common in Ine's time, and that its value was much
the same. One would scarcely be justified, however, in supposing that it
was anything like universal; for the purchasing power of such a sum was at
that time considerable, representing as it did about 16-20 oxen or 100-120
sheep. It would hardly be safe to credit men of the _sixhynde_ class in
general with more than a horse, spear and shield.

6. _Agriculture and Village Life._--There is no doubt that a fairly
advanced system of agriculture must have been known to the Anglo-Saxons
before they settled in Britain. This is made clear above all by the
representation of a plough drawn by two oxen in one of the very ancient
rock-carvings at Tegneby in Bohuslaen. In Domesday Book the heavy plough
with eight oxen seems to be universal, and it can be traced back in Kent to
the beginning of the 9th century. In this kingdom the system of
agricultural terminology was based on it. The unit was the _sulung_
(_aratrum_) or ploughland (from _sulh_, "plough"), the fourth part of which
was the _geocled_ or _geoc_ (_jugum_), originally a yoke of oxen. An
analogy is supplied by the _carucata_ of the Danelagh, the eighth part of
which was the _bouata_ or "ox-land." In the 10th century the _sulung_ seems
to have been identified with the hide, but in earlier times it contained
apparently two hides. The hide itself, which was the regular unit in the
other kingdoms, usually contained 120 acres in later times and was divided
into four _girda_ (_virgatae_) or yardlands. But originally it seems to
have meant simply the land pertaining to a household, and its area in early
times is quite uncertain, though probably far less. For the acre also there
was in later times a standard length and breadth, the former being called
_furhlang_ (_furlong_) and reckoned at one-eighth of a mile, while the
_aecerbraedu_ or "acre-breadth" (chain) was also a definite measure. We
need not doubt, however, that in practice the form of the acre was largely
conditioned by the nature of the ground. Originally it is thought to have
been the measure of a day's ploughing, in which case the dimensions given
above would scarcely be reached. Account must also be taken of the
possibility that in early times lighter teams were in general use. If so
the normal dimensions of the acre may very well have been quite different.

The husbandry was of a co-operative character. In the 11th century it was
distinctly unusual for a peasant to possess a whole team of his own, and
there is no reason for supposing the case to have been otherwise in early
times; for though the peasant might then hold a hide, the hide itself was
doubtless smaller and not commensurate in any way with the ploughland. The
holdings were probably not compact but consisted of scattered strips in
common fields, changed perhaps from year to year, the choice being
determined by lot or otherwise. As for the method of cultivation itself
there is little or no evidence. Both the "two-course system" and the
"three-course system" may have been in use; but on the other hand it is
quite possible that in many cases the same ground was not sown more than
once in three years. The prevalence of the co-operative principle, it may
be observed, was doubtless due in large measure to the fact that the
greater part of England, especially towards the east, was settled not in
scattered farms or hamlets but in compact villages with the cultivated
lands lying round them.

[v.04 p.0592] The mill was another element which tended to promote the same
principle. There can be little doubt that before the Anglo-Saxons came to
Britain they possessed no instrument for grinding corn except the quern
(_cweorn_), and in remote districts this continued in use until quite late
times. The grinding seems to have been performed chiefly by female slaves,
but occasionally we hear also of a donkey-mill (_esolcweorn_). The mill
proper, however, which was derived from the Romans, as its name (_mylen_,
from Lat. _molina_) indicates, must have come into use fairly early. In the
11th century every village of any size seems to have possessed one, while
the earliest references go back to the 8th century. It is not unlikely that
they were in use during the Roman occupation of Britain, and consequently
that they became known to the invaders almost from the first. The mills
were presumably driven for the most part by water, though we have a
reference to a windmill as early as the year 833.

All the ordinary domestic animals were known. Cattle and sheep were
pastured on the common lands appertaining to the village, while pigs, which
(especially in Kent) seem to have been very numerous, were kept in the
woods. Bee-keeping was also practised. In all these matters the invasion of
Britain had brought about no change. The cultivation of fruit and
vegetables on the other hand was probably almost entirely new. The names
are almost all derived from Latin, though most of them seem to have been
known soon after the invasion, at all events by the 7th century.

From the considerations pointed out above we can hardly doubt that the
village possessed a certain amount of corporate life, centred perhaps in an
ale-house where its affairs were discussed by the inhabitants. There is no
evidence, however, which would justify us in crediting such gatherings with
any substantial degree of local authority. So far as the limited
information at our disposal enables us to form an opinion, the
responsibility both for the internal peace of the village, and for its
obligations to the outside world, seems to have lain with the lord or his
steward (_gerefa_, _villicus_) from the beginning. A quite opposite view
has, it is true, found favour with many scholars, viz. that the villages
were orginally settlements of free kindreds, and that the lord's authority
was superimposed on them at a later date. This view is based mainly on the
numerous place-names ending in _-ing_, _-ingham_, _-ington_, &c., in which
the syllable _-ing_ is thought to refer to kindreds of cultivators. It is
more probable, however, that these names are derived from persons of the
_twelfhynde_ class to whom the land had been granted. In many cases indeed
there is good reason for doubting whether the name is a patronymic at all.

The question how far the villages were really new settlements is difficult
to answer, for the terminations _-ham_, _-ton_, &c. cannot be regarded as
conclusive evidence. Thus according to the Anglo-Saxon Chronicle (ann. 571)
Bensington and Eynsham were formerly British villages. Even if the first
part of Egonesham is English--which is by no means certain--it is hardly
sufficient reason for discrediting this statement, for Canterbury
(_Cantwaraburg_) and Rochester (_Hrofes ceaster_) were without doubt Roman
places in spite of their English names. On the whole it seems likely that
the cultivation of the land was not generally interrupted for more than a
very few years; hence the convenience of utilizing existing sites of
villages would be obvious, even if the buildings themselves had been burnt.

7. _Towns._--Gildas states that in the time of the Romans Britain contained
twenty-eight cities (_civitates_), besides a number of fortresses
(_castetta_). Most of these were situated within the territories eventually
occupied by the invaders, and reappear as towns in later times. Their
history in the intervening period, however, is wrapped in obscurity.
Chester appears to have been deserted for three centuries after its
destruction early in the 7th century, and in most of the other cases there
are features observable in the situation and plan of the medieval town
which suggest that its occupation had not been continuous. Yet London and
Canterbury must have recovered a certain amount of importance quite early,
at all events within two centuries after the invasion, and the same is
probably true of York, Lincoln and a few other places. The term applied to
both the cities and the fortresses of the Romans was _ceaster_ (Lat.
_castra_), less frequently the English word _burg_. There is little or no
evidence for the existence of towns other than Roman in early times, for
the word _urbs_ is merely a translation of _burg_, which was used for any
fortified dwelling-place, and it is improbable that anything which could
properly be called a town was known to the invaders before their arrival in
Britain. The Danish settlements at the end of the 9th century and the
defensive system initiated by King Alfred gave birth to a new series of
fortified towns, from which the boroughs of the middle ages are mainly
descended.

8. _Houses._--Owing to the fact that houses were built entirely of
perishable materials, wood and wattle, we are necessarily dependent almost
wholly upon literary evidence for knowledge of this subject. Stone seems to
have been used first for churches, but this was not before the 7th century,
and we are told that at first masons were imported from Gaul. Indeed wood
was used for many churches, as well as for most secular buildings, until a
much later period. The walls were formed either of stout planks laid
together vertically or horizontally, or else of posts at a short distance
from one another, the interstices being filled up with wattlework daubed
with clay. It is not unlikely that the houses of wealthy persons were
distinguished by a good deal of ornamentation in carving and painting. The
roof was high-pitched and covered with straw, hay, reeds or tiles. The
regular form of the buildings was rectangular, the gable sides probably
being shorter than the others. There is little evidence for partitions
inside, and in wealthy establishments the place of rooms seems to have been
supplied by separate buildings within the same enclosure. The windows must
have been mere openings in the walls or roof, for glass was not used for
this purpose before the latter part of the 7th century. Stoves were known,
but most commonly heat was obtained from an open fire in the centre of the
building. Of the various buildings in a wealthy establishment the chief
were the hall (_heall_), which was both a dining and reception room, and
the "lady's bower" (_brydbur_), which served also as a bedroom for the
master and mistress. To these we have to add buildings for the attendants,
kitchen, bakehouse, &c., and farm buildings. There is little or no evidence
for the use of two-storeyed houses in early times, though in the 10th and
11th centuries they were common. The whole group of buildings stood in an
enclosure (_tun_) surrounded by a stockade (_burg_), which perhaps rested
on an earthwork, though this is disputed. Similarly the homestead of the
peasant was surrounded by a fence (_edor_).

9. _Clothes._--The chief material for clothing was at first no doubt wool,
though linen must also have been used and later became fairly common. The
chief garments were the coat (_roc_), the trousers (_brec_), and the cloak,
for which there seem to have been a number of names (_loetha_, _hacele_,
_sciccing_, _pad_, _hwitel_). To these we may add the hat (_haet_), belt
(_gyrdel_), stockings (_hosa_), shoes (_scoh_, _gescy_, _rifeling_) and
gloves (_glof_). The _crusene_ was a fur coat, while the _serc_ or _smoc_
seems to have been an undergarment and probably sleeveless. The whole
attire was of national origin and had probably been in use long before the
invasion of Britain. In the great bog-deposit at Thorsbjaerg in Angel,
which dates from about the 4th century, there were found a coat with long
sleeves, in a fair state of preservation, a pair of long trousers with
remains of socks attached, several shoes and portions of square cloaks, one
of which had obviously been dyed green. The dress of the upper classes must
have been of a somewhat gorgeous character, especially when account is
taken of the brooches and other ornaments which they wore. It is worth
noting that according to Jordanes the Swedes in the 6th century were
splendidly dressed.

10. _Trade._--The few notices of this subject which occur in the early laws
seem to refer primarily to cattle-dealing. But there can be no doubt that a
considerable import and export trade with the continent had sprung up quite
early. In Bede's time, if not before, London was resorted to by many
merchants both by land and by sea. At first the chief export trade was
[v.04 p.0593] probably in slaves. English slaves were to be obtained in
Rome even before the end of the 6th century, as appears from the well-known
story of Gregory the Great. Since the standard price of slaves on the
continent was in general three or four times as great as it was in England,
the trade must have been very profitable. After the adoption of
Christianity it was gradually prohibited by the laws. The nature of the
imports during the heathen period may be learned chiefly from the graves,
which contain many brooches and other ornaments of continental origin, and
also a certain number of silver, bronze and glass vessels. With the
introduction of Christianity the ecclesiastical connexion between England
and the continent without doubt brought about a large increase in the
imports of secular as well as religious objects, and the frequency of
pilgrimages by persons of high rank must have had the same effect. The use
of silk (_seoluc_) and the adoption of the mancus (see below) point to
communication, direct or indirect, with more distant countries. In the 8th
century we hear frequently of tolls on merchant ships at various ports,
especially London.

11. _Coinage._--The earliest coins which can be identified with certainty
are some silver pieces which bear in Runic letters the name of the Mercian
king AEthelred (675-704). There are others, however, of the same type and
standard (about 21 grains) which may be attributed with probability to his
father Penda (d. 655). But it is clear from the laws of AEthelberht that a
regular silver coinage was in use at least half a century before this time,
and it is not unlikely that many unidentified coins may go back to the 6th
century. These are fairly numerous, and are either without inscriptions or,
if they do bear letters at all, they seem to be mere corruptions of Roman
legends. Their designs are derived from Roman or Frankish coins, especially
the former, and their weight varies from about 10 to 21 grains, though the
very light coins are rare. Anonymous gold coins, resembling Frankish
trientes in type and standard (21 grains), are also fairly common, though
they must have passed out of use very early, as the laws give no hint of
their existence. Larger gold coins (_solidi_) are very rare. In the early
laws the money actually in use appears to have been entirely silver. In
Offa's time a new gold coin, the _mancus_, resembling in standard the Roman
solidus (about 70 grains), was introduced from Mahommedan countries. The
oldest extant specimen bears a faithfully copied Arabic inscription. In the
same reign the silver coins underwent a considerable change in type, being
made larger and thinner, while from this time onwards they always bore the
name of the king (or queen or archbishop) for whom they were issued. The
design and execution also became remarkably good. Their weight was at first
unaffected, but probably towards the close of Offa's reign it was raised to
about 23 grains, at which standard it seems to have remained, nominally at
least, until the time of Alfred. It is to be observed that with the
exception of Burgred's coins and a few anonymous pieces the silver was
never adulterated. No bronze coins were current except in Northumbria,
where they were extremely common in the 9th century.

Originally _scilling_ ("shilling") and _sceatt_ seem to have been the terms
for gold and silver coins respectively. By the time of Ine, however,
_pending_, _pen(n)ing_ ("penny"), had already come into use for the latter,
while, owing to the temporary disappearance of a gold coinage, _scilling_
had come to denote a mere unit of account. It was, however, a variable
unit, for the Kentish shilling contained twenty _sceattas_ (pence), while
the Mercian contained only four. The West Saxon shilling seems originally
to have been identical with the Mercian, but later it contained five pence.
Large payments were generally made by weight, 240-250 pence being reckoned
to the pound, perhaps from the 7th century onwards. The mancus was equated
with thirty pence, probably from the time of its introduction. This means
that the value of gold relatively to silver was 10:1 from the end of Offa's
reign. There is reason, however, for thinking that in earlier times it was
as low as 6:1, or even 5:1. In Northumbria a totally different monetary
system prevailed, the unit being the _tryms_, which contained three
_sceattas_ or pence. As to the value of the bronze coins we are without
information.

The purchasing power of money was very great. The sheep was valued at a
shilling in both Wessex and Mercia, from early times till the 11th century.
One pound was the normal price of a slave and half a pound that of a horse.
The price of a pig was twice, and that of an ox six times as great as that
of a sheep. Regarding the prices of commodities other than live-stock we
have little definite information, though an approximate estimate may be
made of the value of arms. It is worth noticing that we often hear of
payments in gold and silver vessels in place of money. In the former case
the mancus was the usual unit of calculation.

12. _Ornaments._--Of these the most interesting are the brooches which were
worn by both sexes and of which large numbers have been found in heathen
cemeteries. They may be classed under eight leading types: (1) circular or
ring-shaped, (2) cruciform, (3) square-headed, (4) radiated, (5) S-shaped,
(6) bird-shaped, (7) disk-shaped, (8) cupelliform or saucer-shaped. Of
these Nos. 5 and 6 appear to be of continental origin, and this is probably
the case also with No. 4 and in part with No. 7. But the last-mentioned
type varies greatly, from rude and almost plain disks of bronze to
magnificent gold specimens studded with gems. No. 8 is believed to be
peculiar to England, and occurs chiefly in the southern Midlands, specimens
being usually found in pairs. The interiors are gilt, often furnished with
detachable plates and sometimes set with brilliants. The remaining types
were probably brought over by the Anglo-Saxons at the time of the invasion.
Nos. 1 and 3 are widespread outside England, but No. 2, though common in
Scandinavian countries, is hardly to be met with south of the Elbe. It is
worth noting that a number of specimens were found in the cremation
cemetery at Borgstedterfeld near Rendsburg. In England it occurs chiefly in
the more northern counties. Nos. 2 and 3 vary greatly in size, from 21/2 to 7
in. or more. The smaller specimens are quite plain, but the larger ones are
gilt and generally of a highly ornamental character. In later times we hear
of brooches worth as much as six mancusas, _i.e._ equivalent to six oxen.

Among other ornaments we may mention hairpins, rings and ear-rings, and
especially buckles which are often of elaborate workmanship. Bracelets and
necklets are not very common, a fact which is rather surprising, as in
early times, before the issuing of a coinage, these articles (_beagas_)
took the place of money to a large extent. The glass vessels are finely
made and of somewhat striking appearance, though they closely resemble
contemporary continental types. Since the art of glass-working was unknown,
according to Bede, until nearly the end of the 7th century, it is probable
that these were all of continental or Roman-British origin.

13. _Amusements_.--It is clear from the frequent references to dogs and
hawks in the charters that hunting and falconry were keenly pursued by the
kings and their retinues. Games, whether indoor or outdoor, are much less
frequently mentioned, but there is no doubt that the use of dice (_taefl_)
was widespread. At court much time was given to poetic recitation, often
accompanied by music, and accomplished poets received liberal rewards. The
chief musical instrument was the harp (_hearpe_), which is often mentioned.
Less frequently we hear of the flute (_pipe_) and later also of the fiddle
(_fiethele_). Trumpets (_horn_, _swegelhorn_, _byme_) appear to have been
used chiefly as signals.

14. _Writing._--The Runic alphabet seems to have been the only form of
writing known to the Anglo-Saxons before the invasion of Britain, and
indeed until the adoption of Christianity. In its earliest form, as it
appears in inscriptions on various articles found in Schleswig and in
Scandinavian countries, it consisted of twenty-four letters, all of which
occur in abecedaria in England. In actual use, however, two letters soon
became obsolete, but a number of others were added from time to time, some
of which are found also on the continent, while others are peculiar to
certain parts of England. Originally the Runic alphabet seems to have been
used for writing on wooden boards, though none of these have survived. The
inscriptions which have come down to us are engraved partly on memorial
stones, [v.04 p.0594] which are not uncommon in the north of England, and
partly on various metal objects, ranging from swords to brooches. The
adoption of Christianity brought about the introduction of the Roman
alphabet; but the older form of writing did not immediately pass out of
use, for almost all the inscriptions which we possess date from the 7th or
following centuries. Coins with Runic legends were issued at least until
the middle of the 8th century, and some of the memorial stones date
probably even from the 9th. The most important of the latter are the column
at Bewcastle, Cumberland, believed to commemorate Alhfrith, the son of
Oswio, who died about 670, and the cross at Ruthwell, Dumfriesshire, which
is probably about a century later. The Roman alphabet was very soon applied
to the purpose of writing the native language, _e.g._ in the publication of
the laws of AEthelberht. Yet the type of character in which even the
earliest surviving MSS. are written is believed to be of Celtic origin.
Most probably it was introduced by the Irish missionaries who evangelized
the north of England, though Welsh influence is scarcely impossible.
Eventually this alphabet was enlarged (probably before the end of the 7th
century) by the inclusion of two Runic letters for _th_ and _w_.

15. _Marriage._--This is perhaps the subject on which our information is
most inadequate. It is evident that the relationships which prohibited
marriage were different from those recognized by the Church; but the only
fact which we know definitely is that it was customary, at least in Kent,
for a man to marry his stepmother. In the Kentish laws marriage is
represented as hardly more than a matter of purchase; but whether this was
the case in the other kingdoms also the evidence at our disposal is
insufficient to decide. We know, however, that in addition to the sum paid
to the bride's guardian, it was customary for the bridegroom to make a
present (_morgengifu_) to the bride herself, which, in the case of queens,
often consisted of a residence and considerable estates. Such persons also
had retinues and fortified residences of their own. In the Kentish laws
provision is made for widows to receive a proportionate share in their
husbands' property.

16. _Funeral Rites._--Both inhumation and cremation were practised in
heathen times. The former seems to have prevailed everywhere; the latter,
however, was much more common in the more northern counties than in the
south, though cases are fairly numerous throughout the valley of the
Thames. In _Beowulf_ cremation is represented as the prevailing custom.
There is no evidence that it was still practised when the Roman and Celtic
missionaries arrived, but it is worth noting that according to the
tradition given in the Anglo-Saxon Chronicle, Oxfordshire, where the custom
seems to have been fairly common, was not conquered before the latter part
of the 6th century. The burnt remains were generally, if not always,
enclosed in urns and then buried. The urns themselves are of clay, somewhat
badly baked, and bear geometrical patterns applied with a punch. They vary
considerably in size (from 4 to 12 in. or more in diameter) and closely
resemble those found in northern Germany. Inhumation graves are sometimes
richly furnished. The skeleton is laid out at full length, generally with
the head towards the west or north, a spear at one side and a sword and
shield obliquely across the middle. Valuable brooches and other ornaments
are often found. In many other cases, however, the grave contained nothing
except a small knife and a simple brooch or a few beads. Usually both
classes of graves lie below the natural surface of the ground without any
perceptible trace of a barrow.

17. _Religion._--Here again the information at our disposal is very
limited. There can be little doubt that the heathen Angli worshipped
certain gods, among them Ti (Tig), Woden, Thunor and a goddess Frigg, from
whom the names Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday and Friday are derived. Ti was
probably the same god of whom early Roman writers speak under the name Mars
(see TYR), while Thunor was doubtless the thunder-god (see THOR). From
Woden (_q.v._) most of the royal families traced their descent. Seaxneat,
the ancestor of the East Saxon dynasty, was also in all probability a god
(see ESSEX, KINGDOM OF).

Of anthropomorphic representations of the gods we have no clear evidence,
though we do hear of shrines in sacred enclosures, at which sacrifices were
offered. It is clear also that there were persons specially set apart for
the priesthood, who were not allowed to bear arms or to ride except on
mares. Notices of sacred trees and groves, springs, stones, &c., are much
more frequent than those referring to the gods. We hear also a good deal of
witches and valkyries, and of charms and magic; as an instance we may cite
the fact that certain (Runic) letters were credited, as in the North, with
the power of loosening bonds. It is probable also that the belief in the
spirit world and in a future life was of a somewhat similar kind to what we
find in Scandinavian religion. (See TEUTONIC PEOPLES, Sec.6.)

The chief primary authorities are Gildas, _De Excidio Britanniae_, and
Nennius, _Historia Britonum_ (ed. San-Marte, Berlin, 1844); Th. Mommsen in
_Mon. Germ. Hist., Auct. Antiquiss._, tom. xiii. (Berlin, 1898); Bede,
_Hist. Eccl._ (ed. C. Plummer, Oxford, 1896); the _Saxon Chronicle_ (ed. C.
Plummer, Oxford, 1892-1899); and the _Anglo-Saxon Laws_ (ed. F. Liebermann,
Halle, 1903), and Charters (W. de G. Birch, _Cartularium Saxonicum_,
London, 1885-1893). Modern authorities: Sh. Turner, _History of the
Anglo-Saxons_ (London, 1799-1805; 7th ed., 1852); Sir F. Palgrave, _Rise
and Progress of the English Commonwealth_ (London, 1831-1832); J.M. Kemble,
_The Saxons in England_ (London, 1849; 2nd ed., 1876); K. Maurer,
_Kritische Ueberschau d. deutschen Gesetzgebung u. Rechtswissenschaft_,
vols. i.-iii. (Munich, 1853-1855); J.M. Lappenberg, _Geschichte von
England_ (Hamburg, 1834); _History of England under the Anglo-Saxon Kings_
(London, 1845; 2nd ed., 1881); J.R. Green, _The Making of England_ (London,
1881); T. Hodgkin, _History of England from the Earliest Times to the
Norman Conquest_ (vol. i. of _The Political History of England_) (London,
1906); F. Seebohm, _The English Village Community_ (London, 1883); A.
Meitzen, _Siedelung und Agrarwesen d. Westgermanen, u. Ostgermanen, &c._
(Berlin, 1895); Sir F. Pollock and F.W. Maitland, _History of English Law_
(Cambridge, 1895; 2nd ed., 1898); F.W. Maitland, _Domesday Book and Beyond_
(Cambridge, 1897); F. Seebohm, _Tribal Custom in Anglo-Saxon Law_ (London,
1903); P. Vinogradoff, _The Growth of the Manor_ (London, 1905); H.M.
Chadwick, _Studies on Anglo-Saxon Institutions_ (Cambridge, 1905); _The
Origin of the English Nation_ (_ib._, 1907); M. Heyne, _Ueber die Lage und
Construction der Halle Heorot_ (Paderborn, 1864); R. Henning, _Das deutsche
Haus_ (_Quellen u. Forschungen_, 47) (Strassburg, 1882); M. Heyne,
_Deutsche Hausaltertuemer_, i., ii., iii. (Leipzig, 1900-1903); G. Baldwin
Brown, _The Arts in Early England_ (London, 1903); C.F. Keary, _Catalogue
of Anglo-Saxon Coins in the British Museum_, vol. i. (London, 1887); C.
Roach Smith, _Collectanea Antiqua_ (London, 1848-1868); R.C. Neville,
_Saxon Obsequies_ (London, 1852); J.Y. Akerman, _Remains of Pagan Saxondom_
(London, 1855); Baron J. de Baye, _Industrie anglo-saxonne_ (Paris, 1889);
_The Industrial Arts of the Anglo-Saxons_ (London, 1893); G. Stephens, _The
Old Northern Runic Monuments_ (London and Copenhagen, 1866-1901); W.
Vietor, _Die northumbrischen Runensteine_ (Marburg, 1895). Reference must
also be made to the articles on Anglo-Saxon antiquities in the _Victoria
County Histories_, and to various papers in _Archaeologia_, the
_Archaeological Journal_, the _Journal of the British Archaeological
Society_, the _Proceedings of the Society of Antiquaries_, the _Associated
Architectural Societies' Reports_, and other antiquarian journals.

(H. M. C.)

[1] The hide (_hid_, _hiwisc_, _familia_, _tributarius_, _cassatus_,
_manens_, &c.) was in later times a measure of land, usually 120 acres. In
early times, however, it seems to have meant (1) household, (2) normal
amount of land appertaining to a household.

BRITANNICUS, son of the Roman emperor Claudius by his third wife
Messallina, was born probably A.D. 41. He was originally called Claudius
Tiberius Germanicus, and received the name Britannicus from the senate on
account of the conquest made in Britain about the time of his birth. Till
48, the date of his mother's execution, he was looked upon as the heir
presumptive; but Agrippina, the new wife of Claudius, soon persuaded the
feeble emperor to adopt Lucius Domitius, known later as Nero, her son by a
previous marriage. After the accession of Nero, Agrippina, by playing on
his fears, induced him to poison Britannicus at a banquet (A.D. 55). A
golden statue of the young prince was set up by the emperor Titus.
Britannicus is the subject of a tragedy by Racine.

Tacitus, _Annals_, xii. 25, 41, xiii. 14-16; Suetonius, _Nero_, 33; Dio
Cassius lx. 32, 34; works quoted under NERO.

BRITISH CENTRAL AFRICA, the general name given to the British protectorates
in South Central Africa north of the Zambezi river, but more particularly
to a large territory lying between 8 deg. 25' S. on Lake Tanganyika and 17 deg. 6'
S. on the river Shire, near its confluence with the Zambezi, and between
36 deg. 10' E. (district of Mlanje) and 26 deg. 30' E. (river Luengwe-Kafukwe).
Originally the term "British Central Africa" was applied by Sir H.H.
Johnston to all the territories under British [v.04 p.0595] influence north
of the Zambezi which were formerly intended to be under one administration;
but the course of events having prevented the connexion of Barotseland (see
BAROTSE) and the other Rhodesian territories with the more direct British
administration north of the Zambezi, the name of British Central Africa was
confined officially (in 1893) to the British protectorate on the Shire and
about Lake Nyasa. In 1907 the official title of the protectorate was
changed to that of Nyasaland Protectorate, while the titles "North Eastern
Rhodesia" and "North Western Rhodesia" (Barotseland) have been given to the
two divisions of the British South Africa Company's territory north of the
Zambezi. The western boundary, however, of the territory here described has
been taken to be a line drawn from near the source of the Lualaba on the
southern boundary of Belgian Congo to the western source of the Luanga
river, and thence the course of the Luanga to its junction with the
Luengwe-Kafukwe, after which the main course of the Kafukwe delimits the
territory down to the Zambezi. Thus, besides the Nyasaland Protectorate and
North Eastern Rhodesia, part of North Western Rhodesia is included, and for
the whole of this region British Central Africa is the most convenient
designation.

_Physical Features._--Within these limits we have a territory of about
250,000 sq. m., which includes two-thirds of Lake Nyasa, the south end of
Lake Tanganyika, more than half Lake Mweru, and the whole of Lake
Bangweulu, nearly the whole courses of the rivers Shire and Luangwa (or
Loangwa), the whole of the river Chambezi (the most remote of the
headwaters of the river Congo), the right or east bank of the Luapula (or
upper Congo) from its exit from Lake Bangweulu to its issue from the north
end of Lake Mweru; also the river Luanga and the whole course of the Kafue
or Kafukwe.[1] Other lesser sheets of water included within the limits of
this territory are the Great Mweru Swamp, between Tanganyika and Mweru,
Moir's Lake (a small mountain tarn--possibly a crater lake--lying between
the Luangwa and the Luapula), Lake Malombe (on the upper Shire), and the
salt lake Chilwa (wrongly styled Shirwa, being the Bantu word _Kilwa_),
which lies on the borders of the Portuguese province of Mocambique. The
southern border of this territory is the north bank of the Zambezi from the
confluence of the Kafukwe to that of the Luangwa at Zumbo. Eastwards of
Zumbo, British Central Africa is separated from the river Zambezi by the
Portuguese possessions; nevertheless, considerably more than two-thirds of
the country lies within the Zambezi basin, and is included within the
subordinate basins of Lake Nyasa and of the rivers Luangwa and
Luengwe-Kafukwe. The remaining portions drain into the basins of the river
Congo and of Lake Tanganyika, and also into the small lake or half-dried
swamp called Chilwa, which at the present time has no outlet, though in
past ages it probably emptied itself into the Lujenda river, and thence
into the Indian Ocean.

As regards orographical features, much of the country is high plateau, with
an average altitude of 3500 ft. above sea-level. Only a very minute portion
of its area--the country along the banks of the river Shire--lies at
anything like a low elevation; though the Luangwa valley may not be more
than about 900 ft. above sea-level. Lake Nyasa lies at an elevation of 1700
ft. above the sea, is about 350 m. long, with a breadth varying from 15 to
40 m. Lake Tanganyika is about 2600 ft. above sea-level, with a length of
about 400 m. and an average breadth of nearly 40 m. Lake Mweru and Lake
Bangweulu are respectively 3000 and 3760 ft. above sea-level; Lake Chilwa
is 1946 ft. in altitude. The highest mountain found within the limits
previously laid down is Mount Mlanje, in the extreme south-eastern corner
of the protectorate. This remarkable and picturesque mass is an isolated
"chunk" of the Archean plateau, through which at a later date there has
been a volcanic outburst of basalt. The summit and sides of this mass
exhibit several craters. The highest peak of Mlanje reaches an altitude of
9683 ft. (In German territory, near the north end of Lake Nyasa, and close
to the British frontier, is Mount Rungwe, the altitude of which exceeds
10,000 ft.) Other high mountains are Mounts Chongone and Dedza, in
Angoniland, which reach an altitude of 7000 ft., and points on the Nyika
Plateau and in the Konde Mountains to the north-west of Lake Nyasa, which
probably exceed a height of 8000 ft. There are also Mounts Zomba (6900 ft.)
and Chiradzulu (5500 ft.) in the Shire Highlands. The principal plateaus or
high ridges are (1) the Shire Highlands, a clump of mountainous country
lying between the river Shire, the river Ruo, Lake Chilwa and the south end
of Lake Nyasa; (2) Angoniland--a stretch of elevated country to the west of
Lake Nyasa and the north-west of the river Shire; (3) the Nyika Plateau,
which lies to the north of Angoniland; and (4) the Nyasa-Tanganyika
Plateau, between the basin of the river Luangwa, the vicinity of Tanganyika
and the vicinity of Lake Mweru (highest point, 7000-8000 ft.). Finally may
be mentioned the tract of elevated country between Lake Bangweulu and the
river Luapula, and between Lake Bangweulu and the basin of the Luangwa; and
also the Lukinga (Mushinga) or Ugwara Mountains of North Western Rhodesia,
which attain perhaps to altitudes of 6000 ft.

The whole of this part of Africa is practically without any stretch of
desert country, being on the whole favoured with an abundant rainfall. The
nearest approach to a desert is the rather dry land to the east and
north-east of Lake Mweru. Here, and in parts of the lower Shire district,
the annual rainfall probably does not exceed an average of 35 in.
Elsewhere, in the vicinity of the highest mountains, the rainfall may
attain an average of 75 in., in parts of Mount Mlanje possibly often
reaching to 100 in. in the year. The average may be put at 50 in. per
annum, which is also about the average rainfall of the Shire Highlands,
that part of British Central Africa which at present attracts the greatest
number of European settlers.

_Geology._--The whole formation is Archean and Primary (with a few modern
plutonic outbursts), and chiefly consists of granite, felspar, quartz,
gneiss, schists, amphibolite and other Archean rocks, with Primary
sandstones and limestones in the basin of Lake Nyasa (a great rift
depression), the river Shire, and the regions within the northern watershed
of the Zambezi river. Sandstones of Karroo age occur in the basin of the
Luangwa (N.E. Rhodesia). There are evidences of recent volcanic activity on
the summit of the small Mlanje plateau (S.E. corner of the protectorate:
here there are two extinct craters with a basaltic outflow), and at the
north end of Lake Nyasa and the eastern edge of the Tanganyika plateau.
Here there are many craters and much basalt, or even lava; also hot
springs.

_Metals and Minerals._--Gold has been found in the Shire Highlands, in the
hills along the Nyasa-Zambezi waterparting, and in the mountainous region
west of Lake Nyasa; silver (galena, silver-lead) in the hills of the
Nyasa-Zambezi waterparting; lead in the same district; graphite in the
western basin of Lake Nyasa; copper (pyrites and pure ore) in the west
Nyasa region and in the hills of North Western and North Eastern Rhodesia;
iron ore almost universally; mica almost universally; coal occurs in the
north and west Nyasa districts (especially in the Karroo sandstones of the
Rukuru valley), and perhaps along the Zambezi-Nyasa waterparting; limestone
in the Shire basin; malachite in south-west Angoniland and North Western
Rhodesia; and perhaps petroleum in places along the Nyasa-Zambezi
waterparting. (See also RHODESIA.)

_Flora_.--No part of the country comes within the forest region of West
Africa. The whole of it may be said to lie within the savannah or park-like
division of the continent. As a general rule, the landscape is of a
pleasing and attractive character, well covered with vegetation and fairly
well watered. Actual forests of lofty trees, forests of a West African
type, are few in number, and are chiefly limited to portions of the Nyika,
Angoniland and Shire Highlands plateaus, and to a few nooks in valleys near
the south end of Tanganyika. Patches of forest of tropical luxuriance may
still be seen on the slopes of Mounts Mlanje and Chiradzulu. On the upper
plateaus of Mount Mlanje there are forests of a remarkable conifer
(_Widdringtonia whytei_), a relation of the cypress, which in appearance
resembles much more the cedar, and is therefore wrongly styled the "Mlanje
cedar." This tree is remarkable as being the most northern form of a group
of yew-like conifers confined otherwise to South Africa (Cape Colony).
Immense areas in the lower-lying plains are covered by long, coarse grass,
sometimes reaching 10 ft. in height. Most of the West African forest trees
are represented in British Central Africa. A full list of the known flora
has been compiled by Sir W. Thiselton-Dyer and his assistants at Kew, and
is given in the first and second editions of Sir H. H. Johnston's work on
British Central Africa. Amongst the principal vegetable products of the
country interesting for commercial purposes may be mentioned tobacco
(partly native varieties and partly introduced); coffee (wild coffee is
said to grow in some of the mountainous districts, but the actual coffee
cultivated by the European settlers has been introduced from abroad);
rubber--derived chiefly from the various species of _Landolphia_, _Ficus_,
_Clitandra_, _Carpodinus_ and _Conopharygia_, and from other apocynaceous
plants; the _Strophanthus_ pod (furnishing a valuable drug); ground-nuts
(_Arachis_ and _Voandzeia_); the cotton plant; all African cultivated
cereals (_Sorghum_, _Pennisetum_, maize, rice, wheat--cultivated chiefly by
Europeans--and _Eleusine_); and six species of palms--the oil palm on the
north-west (near Lake Nyasa, at the south end of Tanganyika and on the
Luapula), the _Borassus_ and _Hyphaene_, _Phoenix_ (or wild date), _Raphia_
and the coco-nut palm. The last named was introduced by Arabs and
Europeans, and is found on Lake Nyasa and on the lower Shire. Most of the
European vegetables have been introduced, and thrive exceedingly well,
especially the potato. The mango has also been introduced from India, and
has taken to the Shire Highlands as to a second home. Oranges, lemons and
limes have been planted by Europeans and Arabs in a few districts. European
fruit trees do not ordinarily flourish, though apples are grown to some
extent at Blantyre. The vine hitherto has proved a failure. Pineapples give
the best result [v.04 p.0596] among cultivated fruit, and strawberries do
well in the higher districts. In the mountains the native wild brambles
give blackberries of large size and excellent flavour. The vegetable
product through which this protectorate first attracted trade was coffee,
the export of which, however, has passed through very disheartening
fluctuations. In 1905-1906, 773,919 lb of coffee (value L16,123) were
exported; but during this twelve months the crop of cotton--quite a newly
developed product, rose to 776,621 lb, from 285,185 lb in 1904-1905. An
equally marked increase in tobacco and ground-nuts (_Arachis_) has taken
place. Beeswax is a rising export.

_Fauna._--The fauna is on the whole very rich. It has affinities in a few
respects with the West African forest region, but differs slightly from the
countries to the north and south by the absence of such animals as prefer
drier climates, as for instance the oryx antelopes, gazelles and the
ostrich. There is a complete blank in the distribution of this last between
the districts to the south of the Zambezi and those of East Africa between
Victoria Nyanza and the Indian Ocean. The giraffe is found in the Luanga
valley; it is also met with in the extreme north-east of the country. The
ordinary African rhinoceros is still occasionally, but very rarely, seen in
the Shire Highlands, The African elephant is fairly common throughout the
whole territory. Lions and leopards are very abundant; the zebra is still
found in great numbers, and belongs to the Central African variety of
Burchell's zebra, which is completely striped down to the hoofs, and is
intermediate in many particulars between the true zebra of the mountains
and Burchell's zebra of the plains. The principal antelopes found are the
sable and the roan (_Hippotragus_), five species of _Cobus_ or waterbuck
(the puku, the Senga puku, the lechwe, Crawshay's waterbuck and the common
waterbuck); the pallah, tsessebe (_Damaliscus_), hartebeest, brindled gnu
(perhaps two species), several duykers (including the large _Cephalophus
sylvicultrix_), klipspringer, oribi, steinbok and reedbuck. Among
tragelaphs are two or more bushbucks, the inyala, the water tragelaph
(_Limnotragus selousi_), the kudu and Livingstone's eland. The only buffalo
is the common Cape species. The hyaena is the spotted kind. The hunting dog
is present. There are some seven species of monkeys, including two baboons
and one colobus. The hippopotamus is found in the lakes and rivers, and all
these sheets of water are infested with crocodiles, apparently belonging to
but one species, the common Nile crocodile.

_Inhabitants._--The human race is represented by only one indigenous native
type--the Negro. No trace is anywhere found of a Hamitic intermixture
(unless perhaps at the north end of Lake Nyasa, where the physique of the
native Awankonde recalls that of the Nilotic negro). Arabs from Zanzibar
have settled in the country, but not, as far as is known, earlier than the
beginning of the 19th century. As the present writer takes the general term
"Negro" to include equally the Bantu, Hottentot, Bushman and Congo Pygmy,
this designation will cover all the natives of British Central Africa. The
Bantu races, however, exhibit in some parts signs of Hottentot or Bushman
intermixture, and there are legends in some mountain districts, especially
Mount Mlanje, of the former existence of unmixed Bushman tribes, while
Bushman stone implements are found at the south end of Tanganyika. At the
present day the population is, as a rule, of a black or chocolate-coloured
Negro type, and belongs, linguistically, entirely and exclusively to the
Bantu family. The languages spoken offer several very interesting forms of
Bantu speech, notably in the districts between the north end of Lake Nyasa,
the south end of Lake Tanganyika, and the river Luapula. In the more or
less plateau country included within these geographical limits, the Bantu
dialects are of an archaic type, and to the present writer it has seemed as
though one of them, Kibemba or Kiwemba, came near to the original form of
the Bantu mother-language, though not nearer than the interesting Subiya of
southern Barotseland. Through dialects spoken on the west and north of
Tanganyika, these languages of North Eastern Rhodesia and northern
Nyasaland and of the Kafukwe basin are connected with the Bantu languages
of Uganda. They also offer a slight resemblance to Zulu-Kaffir, and it
would seem as though the Zulu-Kaffir race must have come straight down from
the countries to the north-east of Tanganyika, across the Zambezi, to their
present home. Curiously enough, some hundreds of years after this southward
migration, intestine wars and conflicts actually determined a
north-eastward return migration of Zulus. From Matabeleland, Zulu tribes
crossed the Zambezi at various periods (commencing from about 1820), and
gradually extended their ravages and dominion over the plateaus to the
west, north and north-east of Lake Nyasa. The Zulu language is still spoken
by the dominating caste in West Nyasaland (see further ZULULAND:
_Ethnology_; RHODESIA: _Ethnology_; and YAOS). As regards foreign settlers
in this part of Africa, the Arabs may be mentioned first, though they are
now met with only in very small numbers. The Arabs undoubtedly first
_heard_ of this rich country--rich not alone in natural products such as
ivory, but also in slaves of good quality--from their settlements near the
delta of the river Zambezi, and these settlements may date back to an early
period, and might be coeval with the suggested pre-Islamite Arab
settlements in the gold-bearing regions of South East Africa. But the Arabs
do not seem to have made much progress in their penetration of the country
in the days before firearms; and when firearms came into use they were for
a long time forestalled by the Portuguese, who ousted them from the
Zambezi. But about the beginning of the 19th century the increasing power
and commercial enterprise of the Arab sultanate of Zanzibar caused the
Arabs of Maskat and Zanzibar to march inland from the east coast. They
gradually founded strong slave-trading settlements on the east and west
coasts of Lake Nyasa, and thence westwards to Tanganyika and the Luapula.
They never came in great numbers, however, and, except here and there on
the coast of Lake Nyasa, have left no mixed descendants in the population.
The total native population of all British Central Africa is about
2,000,000, that of the Nyasaland Protectorate being officially estimated in
1907 at 927,355. Of Europeans the protectorate possesses about 600 to 700
settlers, including some 100 officials. (For the European population of the
other territories, see RHODESIA.) The Europeans of British Central Africa
are chiefly natives of the United Kingdom or South Africa, but there are a
few Germans, Dutchmen, French, Italians and Portuguese. The protectorate
has also attracted a number of Indian traders (over 400), besides whom
about 150 British Indian soldiers (Sikhs) are employed as the nucleus of an
armed force.[2]

_Trade and Communications._--The total value of the trade of the
protectorate in the year 1899-1900 was L255,384, showing an increase of 75%
on the figures for the previous year, 1898-1899. Imports were valued at
L176,035, an increase of 62%, and exports at L79,449, an increase of 109%.
In 1905-1906 the imports reached L222,581 and the exports L56,778. The
value of imports into the Rhodesian provinces during the same period was
about L50,000, excluding railway material, and the exports L18,000. The
principal exports are (besides minerals) coffee, cotton, tobacco, rubber
and ivory. A number of Englishmen and Scotsmen (perhaps 200) are settled,
mainly in the Shire Highlands, as coffee planters.

From the Chinde mouth of the Zambezi to Port Herald on the lower Shire
communication is maintained by light-draught steamers, though in the dry
season (April-November) steamers cannot always ascend as far as Port
Herald, and barges have to be used to complete the voyage. A railway runs
from Port Herald to Blantyre, the commercial capital of the Shire
Highlands. The "Cape to Cairo" railway, which crossed the Zambezi in 1905
and the Kafukwe in 1906, reached the Broken Hill mine in 1907, and in 1909
was continued to the frontier of Belgian Congo. There are regular services
by steamer between the ports on Lakes Nyasa and Tanganyika. The African
trans-continental telegraph line (founded by Cecil Rhodes) runs through the
protectorate, and a branch line has been established from Lake Nyasa to
Fort Jameson, the present headquarters of the Chartered Company in North
Eastern Rhodesia.

_Towns._--The principal European settlement or town is Blantyre (_q.v._),
at a height of about 3000 ft. above the sea, in the Shire Highlands. This
place was named after Livingstone's birthplace, and was founded in 1876 by
the Church of Scotland mission. The government capital of the protectorate,
however, is Zomba, at the base of the mountain of that name. Other
townships or sites of European settlements are Port Herald (on the lower
Shire), Chiromo (at the junction of the Ruo and the Shire), Fort Anderson
(on Mount Mlanje), Fort Johnston (near the outlet of the river Shire from
the south end of Lake Nyasa), Kotakota and Bandawe (on the west coast of
Lake Nyasa), Likoma (on an island off the east coast of Lake Nyasa),
Karonga (on the north-west coast of Lake Nyasa), Fife (on the
Nyasa-Tanganyika plateau), Fort Jameson (capital of N.E. Rhodesia, near the
river Luangwa), Abercorn (on the south end of Lake Tanganyika), Kalungwisi
(on the east coast of Lake Mweru) and Fort Rosebery (near the Johnston
Falls on the Luapula [upper Congo]).

_Administration._--The present political divisions of the country [v.04
p.0597] are as follows:--The Nyasaland Protectorate, _i.e._ the districts
surrounding Lake Nyasa and the Shire province, are administered directly
under the imperial government by a governor, who acts under the orders of
the colonial office. The governor is assisted by an executive council and
by a nominated legislative council, which consists of at least three
members. The districts to the westward, forming the provinces of North
Eastern and North Western Rhodesia, are governed by two administrators of
the British South Africa Chartered Company, in consultation with the
governor of Nyasaland and the colonial office.

_History._--The history of the territory dealt with above is recent and
slight. Apart from the vague Portuguese wanderings during the 16th and 17th
centuries, the first European explorer of any education who penetrated into
this country was the celebrated Portuguese official, Dr F.J.M. de Lacerda e
Almeida, who journeyed from Tete on the Zambezi to the vicinity of Lake
Mweru. But the real history of the country begins with the advent of David
Livingstone, who in 1859 penetrated up the Shire river and discovered Lake
Nyasa. Livingstone's subsequent journeys, to the south end of Tanganyika,
to Lake Mweru and to Lake Bangweulu (where he died in 1873), opened up this
important part of South Central Africa and centred in it British interests
in a very particular manner. Livingstone's death was soon followed by the
entry of various missionary societies, who commenced the evangelization of
the country; and these missionaries, together with a few Scottish settlers,
steadily opposed the attempts of the Portuguese to extend their sway in
this direction from the adjoining provinces of Mocambique and of the
Zambezi. From out of the missionary societies grew a trading company, the
African Lakes Trading Corporation. This body came into conflict with a
number of Arabs who had established themselves on the north end of Lake
Nyasa. About 1885 a struggle began between Arab and Briton for the
possession of the country, which was not terminated until the year 1896.
The African Lakes Corporation in its unofficial war enlisted volunteers,
amongst whom were Captain (afterwards Sir F.D.) Lugard and Mr (afterwards
Sir) Alfred Sharpe. Both these gentlemen were wounded, and the operations
they undertook were not crowned with complete success. In 1889 Mr
(afterwards Sir) H.H. Johnston was sent out to endeavour to effect a
possible arrangement of the dispute between the Arabs and the African Lakes
Corporation, and also to ensure the protection of friendly native chiefs
from Portuguese aggression beyond a certain point. The outcome of these
efforts and the treaties made was the creation of the British protectorate
and sphere of influence north of the Zambezi (see AFRICA; Sec. 5). In 1891
Johnston returned to the country as imperial commissioner and
consul-general. In the interval between 1889 and 1891 Mr Alfred Sharpe, on
behalf of Cecil Rhodes, had brought a large part of the country into treaty
with the British South Africa Company, These territories (Northern
Rhodesia) were administered for four years by Sir Harry Johnston in
connexion with the British Central Africa protectorate. Between 1891 and
1895 a long struggle continued, between the British authorities on the one
hand and the Arabs and Mahommedan Yaos on the other, regarding the
suppression of the slave trade. By the beginning of 1896 the last Arab
stronghold was taken and the Yaos were completely reduced to submission.
Then followed, during 1896-1898, wars with the Zulu (Angoni) tribes, who
claimed to dominate and harass the native populations to the west of Lake
Nyasa. The Angoni having been subdued, and the British South Africa Company
having also quelled the turbulent Awemba and Bashukulumbwe, there is a
reasonable hope of the country enjoying a settled peace and considerable
prosperity. This prospect has been, indeed, already realized to a
considerable extent, though the increase of commerce has scarcely been as
rapid as was anticipated. In 1897, on the transference of Sir Harry
Johnston to Tunis, the commissionership was conferred on Mr Alfred Sharpe,
who was created a K.C.M.G. in 1903. In 1904 the administration of the
protectorate, originally directed by the foreign office, was transferred to
the colonial office. In 1907, on the change in the title of the
protectorate, the designation of the chief official was altered from
commissioner to governor, and executive and legislative councils were
established. The mineral surveys and railway construction commenced under
the foreign office were carried on vigorously under the colonial office.
The increased revenue, from L51,000 in 1901-1902 to L76,000 in 1905-1906,
for the protectorate alone (see also RHODESIA), is an evidence of
increasing prosperity. Expenditure in excess of revenue is met by grants in
aid from the imperial exchequer, so far as the Nyasaland Protectorate is
concerned. The British South Africa Company finances the remainder. The
native population is well disposed towards European rule, having, indeed,
at all times furnished the principal contingent of the armed force with
which the African Lakes Company, British South Africa Company or the
British government endeavoured to oppose Arab, Zulu or Awemba aggression.
The protectorate government maintains three gunboats on Lake Nyasa, and the
British South Africa Company an armed steamer on Lake Tanganyika.

Unfortunately, though so rich and fertile, the land is not as a rule very
healthy for Europeans, though there are signs of improvement in this
respect. The principal scourges are black-water fever and dysentery,
besides ordinary malarial fever, malarial ulcers, pneumonia and bronchitis.
The climate is agreeable, and except in the low-lying districts is never
unbearably hot; while on the high mountain plateaus frost frequently occurs
during the dry season.

See _Narrative of an Expedition to the Zambezi_, &c., by David and Charles
Livingstone (1865); _Last Journals of David Livingstone_, edited by the
Rev. Horace Waller (1874); L. Monteith Fotheringham, _Adventures in
Nyasaland_ (1891); Henry Drummond, _Tropical Africa_ (4th ed., 1891); Rev.
D.C. Scott, _An Encyclopaedic Dictionary of the Mang'anja Language, as
spoken in British Central Africa_ (1891); Sir H.H. Johnston, _British
Central Africa_ (2nd ed., 1898); Miss A. Werner, _The Natives of British
Central Africa_ (1906); John Buchanan, _The Shire Highlands_ (1885); Lionel
Decle, _Three Years in Savage Africa_ (1898); H.L. Duff, _Nyasaland under
the Foreign Office_ (1903); J.E.S. Moore, _The Tanganyika Problem_ (1904);
articles on North Eastern and North Western Rhodesia (chiefly by Frank
Melland) in the _Journal of the African Society_ (1902-1906); annual
_Reports_ on British Central Africa published by the Colonial Office;
various linguistic works by Miss A. Werner, the Rev. Govan Robertson, Dr R.
Laws, A.C. Madan, Father Torrend and Monsieur E. Jacottet.

(H. H. J.)

[1] The nomenclature of several of these rivers is perplexing. It should be
borne in mind that the Luanga (also known as the Lunga) is a tributary of
the Luengwe-Kafukwe, itself often called Kafue, and that the Luangwa (or
Loangwa) is an independent affluent of the Zambezi (_q.v._).

[2] The organized armed forces and police are under the direction of the
imperial government throughout British Central Africa, and number about 880
(150 Sikhs, 730 negroes and 14 British officers).

BRITISH COLUMBIA, the western province of the Dominion of Canada. It is
bounded on the east by the continental watershed in the Rocky Mountains,
until this, in its north-westerly course, intersects 120 deg. W., which is
followed north to 60 deg. N., thus including within the province a part of the
Peace river country to the east of the mountains. The southern boundary is
formed by 49 deg. N. and the strait separating Vancouver Island from the state
of Washington. The northern boundary is 60 deg. N., the western the Pacific
Ocean, upon which the province fronts for about 600 m., and the coast strip
of Alaska for a further distance of 400 m. Vancouver Island and the Queen
Charlotte Islands, as well as the smaller islands lying off the western
coast of Canada, belong to the province of British Columbia.

_Physical Features._--British Columbia is essentially a mountainous
country, for the Rocky Mountains which in the United States lie to the east
of the Great Basin, on running to the north bear toward the west and
approach the ranges which border the Pacific coast. Thus British Columbia
comprises practically the entire width of what has been termed the
Cordillera or Cordilleran belt of North America, between the parallels of
latitude above indicated. There are two ruling mountain systems in this
belt--the Rocky Mountains proper on the north-east side, and the Coast
Range on the south-west or Pacific side. Between these are subordinate
ranges to which various local names have been given, as well as the
"Interior Plateau"--an elevated tract of hilly country, the hill summits
having an accordant altitude, which lies to the east of the Coast Range.
The several ranges, having been produced by successive foldings of the
earth's crust in a direction parallel to the border of the Pacific Ocean,
have a common trend which is south-east and north-west. Vancouver Island
and the Queen Charlotte Islands are remnants of still another mountain
range, which runs parallel to the coast but is now almost entirely
submerged beneath the waters of the Pacific. The province might be said to
consist of a series of parallel mountain ranges with long narrow valleys
lying between them.

The Rocky Mountains are composed chiefly of palaeozoic sediments ranging in
age from the Cambrian to the Carboniferous, with subordinate infolded areas
of Cretaceous which hold coal. The average height of the range along the
United States boundary is 8000 ft., but the range culminates between the
latitudes of 51 deg. and 53 deg., the highest peak in the Canadian Rockies being
Mount Robson, 13,700 [v.04 p.0598] ft., although the highest peak in
British Columbia is Mount Fairweather on the International Boundary, which
rises to 15,287 ft. Other high peaks in the Rocky Mountains of Canada are
Columbia, 12,740 ft.; Forbes, 12,075; Assiniboine, 11,860; Bryce. 11,686;
Temple, 11,626; Lyell, 11,463. There are a number of passes over the Rocky
Mountains, among which may be mentioned, beginning from the south, the
South Kootenay or Boundary Pass, 7100 ft.; the Crow's Nest Pass, 5500 (this
is traversed by the southern branch of the Canadian Pacific railway and
crosses great coal fields); the Kicking Horse or Wapta Pass, 5300 (which is
traversed by the main line of the Canadian Pacific railway); the Athabasca
Pass, 6025; the Yellow Head Pass, 3733 (which will probably be used by the
Grand Trunk Pacific railway); the Pine River Pass, 2850; and the Peace
River Pass, 2000, through which the Peace river flows.

The Coast Range, sometimes called the Cascade Range, borders the Pacific
coast for 900 m. and gives to it its remarkable character. To its partially
submerged transverse valleys are due the excellent harbours on the coast,
the deep sounds and inlets which penetrate far inland at many points, as
well as the profound and gloomy fjords and the stupendous precipices which
render the coast line an exaggerated reproduction of that of Norway. The
coast is, in fact, one of the most remarkable in the world, measuring with
all its indentations 7000 m. in the aggregate, and being fringed with an
archipelago of innumerable islands, of which Vancouver Island and the Queen
Charlotte Islands are the largest.

Along the south-western side of the Rocky Mountains is a very remarkable
valley of considerable geological antiquity, in which some seven of the
great rivers of the Pacific slope, among them the Kootenay, Columbia,
Fraser and Finlay, flow for portions of their upper courses. This valley,
which is from 1 to 6 m. in width, can be traced continuously for a length
of at least 800 m. One of the most important rivers of the province is the
Fraser, which, rising in the Rocky Mountains, flows for a long distance to
the north-west, and then turning south eventually crosses the Coast Range
by a deep canton-like valley and empties into the Strait of Georgia, a few
miles south of the city of Vancouver. The Columbia, which rises farther
south in the same range, flows north for about 150 m., crossing the main
line of the Canadian Pacific railway at Donald, and then bending abruptly
back upon its former course, flows south, recrossing the Canadian Pacific
railway at Revelstoke, and on through the Arrow Lakes in the Kootenay
country into the United States, emptying into the Pacific Ocean at Astoria
in the state of Oregon. These lakes, as well as the other large lakes in
southern British Columbia, remain open throughout the winter. In the
north-western part of the province the Skeena flows south-west into the
Pacific, and still farther to the north the Stikine rises in British
Columbia, but before entering the Pacific crosses the coast strip of
Alaska. The Liard, rising in the same district, flows east and falls into
the Mackenzie, which empties into the Arctic Ocean. The headwaters of the
Yukon are also situated in the northern part of the province. All these
rivers are swift and are frequently interrupted by rapids, so that, as
means of communication for commercial purposes, they are of indifferent
value. Wherever lines of railway are constructed, they lose whatever
importance they may have held in this respect previously.

At an early stage in the Glacial period British Columbia was covered by the
Cordilleran glacier, which moved south-eastwards and north-westwards, in
correspondence with the ruling features of the country, from a
gathering-ground situated in the vicinity of the 57th parallel. Ice from
this glacier poured through passes in the coast ranges, and to a lesser
extent debouched upon the edge of the great plains, beyond the Rocky
Mountain range. The great valley between the coast ranges and Vancouver
Island was also occupied by a glacier that moved in both directions from a
central point in the vicinity of Valdez Island. The effects of this glacial
action and of the long periods of erosion preceding it and of other
physiographic changes connected with its passing away, have most important
bearings on the distribution and character of the gold-bearing alluviums of
the province.

_Climate._--The subjoined figures relating to temperature and precipitation
are from a table prepared by Mr R.F. Stupart, director of the
meteorological service. The station at Victoria may be taken as
representing the conditions of the southern part of the coast of British
Columbia, although the rainfall is much greater on exposed parts of the
outer coast. Agassiz represents the Fraser delta and Kamloops the southern
interior district. The mean temperature naturally decreases to the
northward of these selected stations, both along the coast and in the
interior, while the precipitation increases. The figures given for Port
Simpson are of interest, as the Pacific terminus of the Grand Trunk Pacific
railway will be in this vicinity.

  +----------------+-----------------------------+----------------+
  |                |                             |    Absolute    |
  |                |       Mean Temp., Fahr.     |  Temperature.  |
  +----------------+----------+----------+-------+--------+-------+
  |                |  Coldest |  Warmest |Average|Highest.|Lowest.|
  |                |   Month. |   Month. |Annual.|        |       |
  +----------------+----------+----------+-------+--------+-------+
  | Victoria[1]    |Jan. 37.5 deg.|July 60.3 deg.| 48.8 deg. |   90 deg.  |   -1 deg. |
  | Agassiz[2]     |Jan. 33.0 deg.|Aug. 64.7 deg.| 48.9 deg. |   97 deg.  |  -13 deg. |
  | Kamloops[3]    |Jan. 24.2 deg.|Aug. 68.5 deg.| 47.1 deg. |  101 deg.  |  -27 deg. |
  | Port Simpson[4]|Jan. 34.9 deg.|Aug. 56.9 deg.| 45.1 deg. |   88 deg.  |  -10 deg. |
  +----------------+----------+----------+-------+--------+-------+

  +--------------+-----------------------------+
  |              |                             |
  |              |      Rainfall--Inches.      |
  +--------------+----------+----------+-------+
  |              |  Wettest |  Driest  |Average|
  |              |   Month. |  Month.  |Annual.|
  +--------------+----------+----------+-------+
  | Victoria     |Dec.  7.98|July   .4 | 37.77 |
  | Agassiz      |Dec.  9.43|July  1.55| 66.85 |
  | Kamloops     |July  1.61|April  .37| 11.46 |
  | Port Simpson |Oct. 12.42|June  4.37| 94.63 |
  +--------------+----------+----------+-------+

[1] 48 deg. 24' N., 123 deg. 19' W., height 85 ft.

[2] 49 deg. 14' N., 121 deg. 31' W., height 52 ft.

[3] 50 deg. 41' N., 120 deg. 29' W., height 1193 ft.

[4] 54 deg. 34' N., 130 deg. 26' W., height 26 ft.

_Fauna._--Among the larger mammals are the big-horn or mountain sheep
(_Ovis canadensis_), the Rocky Mountain goat (_Mazama montana_), the
grizzly bear, moose, woodland caribou, black-tailed or mule deer,
white-tailed deer, and coyote. All these are to be found only on the
mainland. The black bear, wolf, puma, lynx, wapiti, and Columbian or coast
deer are common to parts of both mainland and islands. Of marine mammals
the most characteristic are the sea-lion, fur-seal, sea-otter and
harbour-seal. About 340 species of birds are known to occur in the
province, among which, as of special interest, may be mentioned the
burrowing owl of the dry, interior region, the American magpie, Steller's
jay and a true nut-cracker, Clark's crow (_Picicorvus columbianus_). True
jays and orioles are also well represented. The gallinaceous birds include
the large blue grouse of the coast, replaced in the Rocky Mountains by the
dusky grouse. The western form of the "spruce partridge" of eastern Canada
is also abundant, together with several forms referred to the genus
_Bonasa_, generally known as "partridges" or ruffed grouse. Ptarmigans also
abound in many of the higher mountain regions. Of the _Anatidae_ only
passing mention need be made. During the spring and autumn migrations many
species are found in great abundance, but in the summer a smaller number
remain to breed, chief among which are the teal, mallard, wood-duck,
spoon-bill, pin-tail, buffle-head, red-head, canvas-back, scaup-duck, &c.

_Area and Population._--The area of British Columbia is 357,600 sq. m., and
its population by the census of 1901 was 190,000. Since that date this has
been largely increased by the influx of miners and others, consequent upon
the discovery of precious metals in the Kootenay, Boundary and Atlin
districts. Much of this is a floating population, but the opening up of the
valleys by railway and new lines of steamboats, together with the
settlements made in the vicinity of the Canadian Pacific railway, has
resulted in a considerable increase of the permanent population. The white
population comprises men of many nationalities. There is a large Chinese
population, the census of 1901 returning 14,201. The influx of Chinamen
has, however, practically ceased, owing to the tax of $500 per head imposed
by the government of the dominion. Many Japanese have also come in. The
Japanese are engaged chiefly in lumbering and fishing, but the Chinese are
found everywhere in the province. Great objection is taken by the white
population to the increasing number of "Mongolians," owing to their
competition with whites in the labour markets. The Japanese do not appear
to be so much disliked, as they adapt themselves to the ways of white men,
but they are equally objected to on the score of cheap labour; and in
1907-1908 considerable friction occurred with the Dominion government over
the Anti-Japanese attitude of British Columbia, which was shown in some
rather serious riots. In the census of 1901 the Indian population is
returned at 25,488; of these 20,351 are professing Christians and 5137 are
pagans. The Indians are divided into very many tribes, under local names,
but fall naturally on linguistic grounds into a few large groups. Thus the
southern part of the interior is occupied by the Salish and Kootenay, and
the northern interior by the Tinneh or Athapackan people. On the coast are
the Haida, Tsimshian, Kwakiatl, Nootka, and about the Gulf of Georgia
various tribes related to the Salish proper. There is no treaty with the
Indians of British Columbia, as with those of the plains, for the
relinquishment of their title to the land, but the government otherwise
assists them. There is an Indian superintendent at Victoria, and under him
are nine agencies throughout the province to attend to the
Indians--relieving their sick and destitute, supplying them with seed and
implements, settling their disputes and administering justice. The Indian
fishing stations and burial grounds are reserved, and other land has been
set apart for them for agricultural and pastoral purposes. A number of
schools have been established for their education. They were at one time a
dangerous element, but are now quiet and peaceable.

The chief cities are Victoria, the capital, on Vancouver Island; and
Vancouver on the mainland, New Westminster on the Fraser and Nanaimo on
Vancouver Island. Rossland and Nelson in West Kootenay, as well as Fernie
in East Kootenay and Grand Forks in the Boundary district, are also places
of importance.

_Mining._--Mining is the principal industry of British Columbia. The
country is rich in gold, silver, copper, lead and coal, and has also iron
deposits. From 1894 to 1904 the mining output increased from $4,225,717 to
$18,977,359. In 1905 it had reached $22,460,295. The principal minerals, in
order of value of output, are gold, copper, coal, lead and silver. Between
1858--the year of the placer discoveries on the Fraser river and in the
Cariboo district--and 1882, the placer yields were much heavier than in
subsequent years, running from one to nearly four million dollars annually,
but there was no quartz mining. Since 1899 placer mining has increased
considerably, although the greater part of the return has been from lode
mining. The Rossland, the Boundary and the Kootenay districts are the chief
centres of vein-mining, yielding auriferous and cupriferous sulphide ores,
as well as large quantities of silver-bearing lead ores. Ores of copper and
the precious metals are being prospected and worked also, in several places
along the coast and on Vancouver Island. The mining laws are liberal, and
being based on the experience gained in the adjacent mining centres of the
Western States, are convenient and effective. The most important smelting
and reducing plants are those at Trail and Nelson in the West Kootenay
country, and at Grand Forks and Greenwood in the Boundary district. There
are also numerous concentrating plants. Mining machinery of the most modern
types is employed wherever machinery is required.

The province contains enormous supplies of excellent coal, most of which
are as yet untouched. It is chiefly of Cretaceous age. The producing
collieries are chiefly on Vancouver Island and on the western slope of the
Rockies near the Crow's Nest Pass in the extreme south-eastern portion of
the provinces. Immense beds of high grade bituminous coal and
semi-anthracite are exposed in the Bulkley Valley, south of the Skeena
river, not far from the projected line of the Grand Trunk Pacific railway.
About one-half the coal mined is exported to the United States.

_Fisheries._--A large percentage of the commerce is derived from the sea,
the chief product being salmon. Halibut, cod (several varieties), oolachan,
sturgeon, herring, shad and many other fishes are also plentiful, but with
the exception of the halibut these have not yet become the objects of
extensive industries. There are several kinds of salmon, and they run in
British Columbia waters at different seasons of the year. The quinnat or
spring salmon is the largest and best table fish, and is followed in the
latter part of the summer by the sockeye, which runs in enormous numbers up
the Fraser and Skeena rivers. This is the fish preferred for canning. It is
of brighter colour, more uniform in size, and comes in such quantities that
a constant supply can be reckoned upon by the canneries. About the mouth of
the Fraser river from 1800 to 2600 boats are occupied during the run. There
is an especially large run of sockeye salmon in the Fraser river every
fourth year, while in the year immediately following there is a poor run.
The silver salmon or cohoe arrives a little later than the sockeye, but is
not much used for packing except when required to make up deficiencies. The
dog-salmon is not canned, but large numbers are caught by the Japanese, who
salt them for export to the Orient. The other varieties are of but little
commercial importance at present, although with the increasing demand for
British Columbia salmon, the fishing season is being extended to cover the
runs of all the varieties of this fish found in the waters of the province.

Great Britain is the largest but not the only market for British Columbia
salmon. The years vary in productiveness, 1901 having been unusually large
and 1903 the smallest in eleven years, but the average pack is about
700,000 cases of forty-eight 1-lb tins, the greater part of all returns
being from the Fraser river canneries, the Skeena river and the Rivers
Inlet coming next in order. There are between 60 and 70 canneries, of which
about 40 are on the banks of [v.04 p.0600] the Fraser river. There is
urgent need for the enactment of laws restricting the catch of salmon, as
the industry is now seriously threatened. The fish oils are extracted
chiefly from several species of dog-fish, and sometimes from the basking
shark, as well as from the oolachan, which is also an edible fish.

The fur-seal fishery is an important industry, though apparently a
declining one. Owing to the scarcity of seals and international
difficulties concerning pelagic sealing in Bering Sea, where the greatest
number have been taken, the business of seal-hunting is losing favour.
Salmon fish-hatcheries have been established on the chief rivers frequented
by these fish. Oysters and lobsters from the Atlantic coast have been
planted in British Columbia waters.

_Timber._--The province is rich in forest growth, and there is a steady
demand for its lumber in the other parts of Canada as well as in South
America, Africa, Australia and China. The following is a list of some of
the more important trees--large leaved maple (_Acer macrophyllum_), red
alder (_Alnus rubra_), western larch (_Larix occidentalis_), white spruce
(_Picea alba_), Engellmann's spruce (_Picea Engelmanii_), Menzies's spruce
(_Picea sitchensis_), white mountain pine (_Pinus monticola_), black pine
(_Pinus murrayana_), yellow pine (_Pinus ponderosa_), Douglas fir
(_Pseudotsuga Douglasii_), western white oak (_Quercus garryana_), giant
cedar (_Thuya gigantea_), yellow cypress or cedar (_Thuya excelsa_),
western hemlock (_Tsuga mertensiana_). The principal timber of commerce is
the Douglas fir. The tree is often found 300 ft. high and from 8 to 10ft.
in diameter. The wood is tough and strong and highly valued for ships'
spars as well as for building purposes. Red or giant cedar, which rivals
the Douglas fir in girth, is plentiful, and is used for shingles as well as
for interior work. The western white spruce is also much employed for
various purposes. There are about eighty sawmills, large and small, in the
province. The amount of timber cut on Dominion government lands in 1904 was
22,760,222 ft., and the amount cut on provincial lands was 325,271,568 ft.,
giving a total of 348,031,790 ft. In 1905 the cut on dominion lands
exceeded that in 1904, while the amount cut on provincial lands reached
450,385,554 ft. The cargo shipments of lumber for the years 1904 and 1905
were as follows:--

                                 1904.                 1905.
                                  Ft.                   Ft.
  United Kingdom               7,498,301            13,690,869
  South America               15,647,808            13.332,993
  Australia                   10,045,094            11,596,482
  South Africa                 2,517,154             7,093,681
  China and Japan              4,802,426             4,787,784
  Germany                                              983,342
  Fiji Islands                   308,332                29,949
  France                       1,308,662
                               ---------             ----------
                              42,199,777            51,515,100

There is a very large market for British Columbia lumber in the western
provinces of Canada.

_Agriculture._--Although mountainous in character the province contains
many tracts of good farming land. These lie in the long valleys between the
mountain ranges of the interior, as well as on the lower slopes of the
mountains and on the deltas of the rivers running out to the coast. On
Vancouver Island also there is much good farming land. The conditions are
in most places best suited to mixed farming; the chief crops raised are
wheat, oats, potatoes and hay. Some areas are especially suited for cattle
and sheep raising, among which may be mentioned the Yale district and the
country about Kamloops. Much attention has been given to fruit raising,
especially in the Okanagan valley. Apples, plums and cherries are grown, as
well as peaches, apricots, grapes and various small fruits, notably
strawberries. All these are of excellent quality. Hops are also cultivated.
A large market for this fruit is opening up in the rapidly growing
provinces of Alberta and Saskatchewan.

_Imports and Exports._--For the year ending June 30th 1905 the total
exports and imports (showing a slight gradual increase on the two preceding
years) were valued at $16,677,882 and $12,565,019 respectively. The exports
were classified as follows:--Mines, $9,777,423; fisheries, $2,101,533;
forests, $1,046,718; animals, $471,231; agriculture, $119,426;
manufactures, $1,883,777; miscellaneous, $1,106,643; coin and bullion,
$171,131.

_Railways._--The Pacific division of the Canadian Pacific railway enters
British Columbia through the Rocky Mountains on the east and runs for about
500 m. across the province before reaching the terminus at Vancouver. A
branch of the same railway leaves the main line at Medicine Hat, and
running to the south-west, crosses the Rocky Mountains through the Crow's
Nest Pass, and thus enters British Columbia a short distance north of the
United States boundary. This continues across the province, running
approximately parallel to the boundary as far as Midway in what is known as
the Boundary district. The line has opened up extensive coal fields and
crosses a productive mining district. On Vancouver Island there are two
railways, the Esquimalt & Nanaimo railway (78 m.) connecting the coal
fields with the southern ports, and the Victoria & Sydney railway, about 16
m. in length. The Great Northern has also a number of short lines in the
southern portion of the province, connecting with its system in the United
States. In 1905 there were 1627m. of railway in the province, of which 1187
were owned or controlled by the Canadian Pacific railway.

_Shipping._--The Canadian Pacific Railway Company has two lines of mail
steamer running from Vancouver and Victoria: (l) the Empress line, which
runs to Japan and China once in three weeks, and (2) the Australian line to
Honolulu, Fiji and Sydney, once a month. The same company also has a line
of steamers running to Alaska, as well as a fleet of coasting steamers.

_Government._--The province is governed by a lieutenant-governor, appointed
by the governor-general in council for five years, but subject to removal
for cause, an executive council of five ministers, and a single legislative
chamber. The executive council is appointed by the lieutenant-governor on
the advice of the first minister, and retains office so long as it enjoys
the support of a majority of the legislature. The powers of the
lieutenant-governor in regard to the provincial government are analogous to
those of governor-general in respect of the dominion government.

The British North America Act (1867) confederating the colonies, defines
the jurisdiction of the provincial legislature as distinguished from that
of the federal parliament, but within its own jurisdiction the province
makes the laws for its own governance. The act of the legislature may be
disallowed, within one year of its passage, by the governor-general in
council, and is also subject to challenge as to its legality in the supreme
court of Canada or on appeal to the juridical committee of the privy
council of the United Kingdom. British Columbia sends three senators and
seven members to the lower house of the federal parliament, which sits at
Ottawa.

_Justice._--There is a supreme court of British Columbia presided over by a
chief justice and five puisne judges, and there are also a number of county
courts. In British Columbia the supreme court has jurisdiction in divorce
cases, this right having been invested in the colony before confederation.

_Religion and Education._--In 1901 the population was divided by creeds as
follows: Church of England, 40,687; Methodist, 25,047; Presbyterian,
34,081; Roman Catholic, 33,639; others, 40,197; not stated, 5003; total,
178,654. The educational system of British Columbia differs slightly from
that of other provinces of Canada. There are three classes of
schools--common, graded and high--all maintained by the government and all
free and undenominational. There is only one college in the province, the
"McGill University College of British Columbia" at Vancouver, which is one
of the colleges of McGill University, whose chief seat is at Montreal. The
schools are controlled by trustees selected by the ratepayers of each
school district, and there is a superintendent of education acting under
the provincial secretary.

_Finance._--Under the terms of union with Canada, British Columbia receives
from the dominion government annually a certain contribution, which in 1905
amounted to $307,076. This, with provincial taxes on real property,
personal property, income tax, sales of public land, timber dues, &c.,
amounted in the year 1905 to $2,920,461. The expenditure for the year was
$2,302,417. The gross debt of the province in 1905 was $13,252,097, with
assets of $4,463,869, or a net debt of $8,788,228. These assets do not
include new legislative buildings or other public works. The income tax is
on a sliding scale. In 1899 a fairly close estimate was made of the capital
invested in the province, which amounted to $307,385,000 including timber,
$100,000,000; railways and telegraphs, $47,500,000; mining plant and
smelters, $10,500,000; municipal assessments, $45,000,000; provincial
assessments, $51,500,000; in addition to private wealth, $280,000,000.
There are branch offices of one or more of the Canadian banks in each of
the larger towns.

[Illustration]

_History._--The discovery of British Columbia was made by the Spaniard
Perez in 1774. With Cook's visit the geographical exploration of the coast
began in 1778. Vancouver, in 1792-1794, surveyed almost the entire coast of
British Columbia with much of that to the north and south, for the British
government. The interior, about the same time, was entered by Mackenzie and
traders of the N.W. Company, which in 1821 became amalgamated with the
Hudson's Bay Company. For the next twenty-eight years the Hudson's Bay
Company ruled this immense territory with beneficent despotism. In 1849
Vancouver Island was proclaimed a British colony. In 1858, consequent on
the discovery of gold and the large influx of miners, the mainland
territory was erected into a colony under the name of British Columbia, and
in 1866 this was united with the colony of Vancouver Island, under the same
name. In 1871 British Columbia entered the confederation and became part of
the Dominion of Canada, sending three senators and six (now seven) members
to the House of Commons of the federal parliament. One of the conditions
under which the colony entered the dominion was the speedy construction of
the Canadian Pacific railway, and in 1876 the non-fulfilment of this
promise and the apparent indifference of the government at Ottawa to the
representations of British Columbia created [v.04 p.0601] strained
relations, which were only ameliorated when the construction of a
transcontinental road was begun. In subsequent years the founding of the
city of Vancouver by the C.P.R., the establishment of the first Canadian
steamship line to China and Japan, and that to Australia, together with the
disputes with the United States on the subject of pelagic sealing, and the
discovery of the Kootenay and Boundary mining districts, have been the
chief events in the history of the province.

AUTHORITIES.--Cook's _Voyage to the Pacific Ocean_ (London, 1784);
Vancouver, _Voyage of Discovery to the Pacific Ocean_ (London, 1798); H.H.
Bancroft's works, vol. xxxii., _History of British Columbia_ (San
Francisco, 1887); Begg's _History of British Columbia_ (Toronto, 1894);
Gosnell, _Year Book_ (Victoria, British Columbia, 1897 and 1903); _Annual
Reports British Columbia Board of Trade_ (Victoria); _Annual Reports of
Minister of Mines and other Departmental Reports of the Provincial and
Dominion Governments; Catalogue of Provincial Museum_ (Victoria); _Reports
Geological Survey of Canada_ (from 1871 to date); _Reports of Canadian
Pacific (Government) Surveys_ (1872-1880); _Reports of Committee of Brit.
Assn. Adv. Science on N.W. Tribes_ (1884-1895); Lord, _Naturalist in
Vancouver Island_ (London, 1866); _Bering Sea Arbitration_ (reprint of
letters to _Times_), (London, 1893); _Report of Bering Sea Commission_
(London, Government, 1892); A. Metin, _La Colombie Britannique_ (Paris,
1908). See also various works of reference under CANADA.

(G. M. D.; M. ST J.; F. D. A.)

BRITISH EAST AFRICA, a term, in its widest sense, including all the
territory under British influence on the eastern side of Africa between
German East Africa on the south and Abyssinia and the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan
on the north. It comprises the protectorates of Zanzibar, Uganda and East
Africa. Apart from a narrow belt of coastland, the continental area belongs
almost entirely to the great plateau of East Africa, rarely falling below
an elevation of 2000 ft., while extensive sections rise to a height of 6000
to 8000 ft. From the coast lowlands a series of steps with intervening
plateaus leads to a broad zone of high ground remarkable for the abundant
traces of volcanic action. This broad upland is furrowed by the eastern
"rift-valley," formed by the subsidence of its floor and occupied in parts
by lakes without outlet. Towards the west a basin of lower elevation is
partially occupied by Victoria Nyanza, drained north to the Nile, while
still farther inland the ground again rises to a second volcanic belt,
culminating in the Ruwenzori range. (See ZANZIBAR, and for Uganda
protectorate see UGANDA.) The present article treats of the East Africa
protectorate only.

[Illustration]

_Topography._--The southern frontier, coterminous with the northern
frontier of German East Africa, runs north-west from the mouth of the Umba
river in 4 deg. 40' S. to Victoria Nyanza, which it strikes at 1 deg. S.,
deviating, however, so as to leave Mount Kilimanjaro wholly in German
territory. The eastern boundary is the Indian Ocean, the coast line being
about 400 m. On the north the protectorate is bounded by Abyssinia and
Italian Somaliland; on the west by Uganda. It has an area of about 240,000
sq. m., and a population estimated at from 2,000,000 to 4,000,000,
including some 25,000 Indians and 3000 Europeans. Of the Europeans many are
emigrants from South Africa; they include some hundreds of Boer families.

The first of the parallel zones--the coast plain or "Temborari"--is
generally of insignificant width, varying from 2 to 10 m., except in the
valleys of the main rivers. The shore line is broken by bays and branching
creeks, often cutting off islands from the mainland. Such are Mvita or
Mombasa in 4 deg. 4' S., and the larger islands of Lamu, Manda and Patta (the
Lamu archipelago), between 2 deg. 20' and 2 deg. S. Farther north the coast becomes
straighter, with the one indentation of Port Durnford in 1 deg. 10' S., but
skirted seawards by a row of small islands. Beyond the coast plain the
country rises in a generally well defined step or steps to an altitude of
some 800 ft., forming the wide level plain called "Nyika" (uplands),
largely composed of quartz. It contains large waterless areas, such as the
Taru desert in the Mombasa district. The next stage in the ascent is marked
by an intermittent line of mountains--gneissose or schistose--running
generally north-north-west, sometimes in parallel chains, and representing
the primitive axis of the continent. Their height varies from 5000 to 8000
ft. Farther inland grassy uplands extend to the eastern edge of the
rift-valley, though varied with cultivated ground and forest, the former
especially in Kikuyu, the latter between 0 deg. and 0 deg. 40' S. The most
extensive grassy plains are those of Kapte or Kapote and Athi, between 1 deg.
and 2 deg. S. The general altitude of these uplands, the surface of which is
largely composed of lava, varies from 5000 to 8000 ft. This zone contains
the highest elevations in British East Africa, including the volcanic pile
of Kenya (_q.v._) (17,007 ft.), Sattima (13,214 ft.) and Nandarua (about
12,900 ft.). The Sattima (Settima) range, or Aberdare Mountains, has a
general elevation of fully 10,000 ft. To the west the fall to the
rift-valley is marked by a line of cliffs, of which the best-defined
portions are the Kikuyu escarpment (8000 ft.), just south of 1 deg. S., and the
Laikipia escarpment, on the equator. One of the main watersheds of East
Africa runs close to the eastern wall of the rift-valley, separating the
basins of inland drainage from the rivers of the east coast, of which the
two largest wholly within British East Africa are the Sabaki and Tana, both
separately noticed. The Guaso Nyiro rises in the hills north-west of Kenya
and flows in a north-east direction. After a course of over 350 m. the
river in about 1 deg. N., 39 deg. 30' E. is lost in a marshy expanse known as the
Lorian Swamp.

The rift-valley, though with a generally level floor, is divided by
transverse ridges into a series of basins, each containing a lake without
outlet. The southernmost section within British East Africa is formed by
the arid Dogilani plains, drained south towards German territory. At their
north end rise the extinct volcanoes of Suswa (7800 ft.) and Longonot
(8700), the latter on the ridge dividing off the next basin--that of Lake
Naivasha. This is a small fresh-water lake, 6135 ft. above the sea,
measuring some 13 m each way. Its basin is closed to the north by the ridge
of Mount Buru, beyond which is the basin of the [v.04 p.0602] still smaller
Lakes Nakuro (5845 ft.) and Elmenteita (5860 ft.), followed in turn by that
of Lakes Hannington and Baringo (_q.v._). Beyond Baringo the valley is
drained north into Lake Sugota, in 2 deg. N., some 35 m. long, while north of
this lies the much larger Lake Rudolf (_q.v._), the valley becoming here
somewhat less defined.

On the west of the rift-valley the wall of cliffs is best marked between
the equator and 1 deg. S., where it is known as the Mau Escarpment, and about
1 deg. N., where the Elgeyo Escarpment falls to a longitudinal valley separated
from Lake Baringo by the ridge of Kamasia. Opposite Lake Naivasha the Mau
Escarpment is over 8000 ft. high. Its crest is covered with a vast forest.
To the south the woods become more open, and the plateau falls to an open
country drained towards the Dogilani plains. On the west the cultivated
districts of Sotik and Lumbwa, broken by wooded heights, fall towards
Victoria Nyanza. The Mau plateau reaches a height of 9000 ft. on the
equator, north of which is the somewhat lower Nandi country, well watered
and partly forested. In the treeless plateau of Uasin Gishu, west of
Elgeyo, the land again rises to a height of over 8000 ft., and to the west
of this is the great mountain mass of Elgon (_q.v._). East of Lake Rudolf
and south of Lake Stefanie is a large waterless steppe, mainly volcanic in
character, from which rise mountain ranges. The highest peak is Mount
Kanjora, 6900 ft. high. South of this arid region, strewn with great lava
stones, are the Rendile uplands, affording pasturage for thousands of
camels. Running north-west and south-east between Lake Stefanie and the
Daua tributary of the Juba is a mountain range with a steep escarpment
towards the south. It is known as the Goro Escarpment, and at its eastern
end it forms the boundary between the protectorate and Abyssinia.
South-east of it the country is largely level bush covered plain, mainly
waterless.

[_Geology._--The geological formations of British East Africa occur in four
regions possessing distinct physiographical features. The coast plain,
narrow in the south and rising somewhat steeply, consists of recent rocks.
The foot plateau which succeeds is composed of sedimentary rocks dating
from Trias to Jurassic. The ancient plateau commencing at Taru extends to
the borders of Kikuyu and is composed of ancient crystalline rocks on which
immense quantities of volcanic rocks--post-Jurassic to Recent--have
accumulated to form the volcanic plateau of Central East Africa.

The formations recognized are given in the following table:--

  _Sedimentary._

               (  1. Alluvium and superficial sands.
  Recent       <  2. Modern lake deposits, living coral rock.
               (  3. Raised coral rock, conglomerate of Mombasa Island.

  Pleistocene  (  4. Gravels with flint implements.
               (  5. Glacial beds of Kenya

  Jurassic        6. Shales and limestones of Changamwe.

  Karroo       (  7. Flags and sandstones.
               (  8. Grits and shales of Masara and Taru.

  Carboniferous?  9. Shales of the Sabaki river.

  Archaean     ( 10. Schists and quartzites of Nandi.
               ( 11. Gneisses, schists, granites.

  _Igneous and Volcanic._

  Recent        Active, dormant and extinct volcanoes.

  Post-Jurassic ( Kibo and volcanoes of the rift-valley.
  to Pleistocene( Kimawenzi, Kenya and plateau eruptions.

_Archaean._--These rocks prevail in the districts of Taru, Nandi and
throughout Ukamba. A course gneiss is the predominant rock, but is
associated with garnetiferous mica-schists and much intrusive granite.
Hornblende schists and beds of metamorphic limestone are rare. Cherty
quartzites interbedded with mylonites occur on the flanks of the Nandi
hills, but their age is not known.

_Carboniferous?_--From shales on the Sabaki river Dr Gregory obtained
fish-scales and specimens of _Palaeanodonta Fischeri._

_Karroo._--The grits of Masara, near Rabai mission station and Mombasa,
have yielded specimens of _Glossopteris browniana_ var. _indica_, thus
indicating their Karroo age.

_Jurassic._--Shales and limestones of this age are well seen along the
railway near Changamwe. They contain gigantic ammonites. According to Dr
Waagen the ammonites show a striking analogy to forms from the Acanthicus
zone of East India. Belemnites are plentiful.

_Pleistocene._--These are feebly represented by some boulder beds on the
higher slopes of Kilimanjaro and Kenya. They show that in Pleistocene times
the glaciers of Kilimanjaro and Kenya extended much farther down the
mountain slopes.

_Recent._--The ancient and more modern lake deposits have so far yielded no
mammalian or other organic remains of interest.

_Igneous and Volcanic._--A belt of volcanic rocks, over 150,000 sq. m. in
area, extends from beyond the southern to beyond the northern territorial
limits. They belong to an older and a newer set. The older group commenced
with a series of fissure eruptions along the site of the present
rift-valley and parallel with it. From these fissures immense and repeated
flows of lava spread over the Kapte and Laikipia plateaus. At about the
same time, or a little later, Kenya and Kimawenzi, Elgon and Chibcharagnani
were in eruption. The age of these volcanic outbursts cannot be more
definitely stated than that they are post-Jurassic, and probably extended
through Cretaceous into early Tertiary times. This great volcanic period
was followed by the eruptions of Kibo and some of the larger volcanoes of
the rift-valley. The flows from Kibo include nepheline and leucite basanite
lavas rich in soda felspars. They bear a close resemblance to the Norwegian
"Rhombenporphyrs." The chain of volcanic cones along the northern lower
slopes of Kilimanjaro, those of the Kyulu mountains, Donyo Longonot and
numerous craters in the rift-valley region, are of a slightly more recent
date. A few of the volcanoes in the latter region have only recently become
extinct; a few may be only dormant. Donyo Buru still emits small quantities
of steam, while Mount Teleki, in the neighbourhood of Lake Rudolf, was in
eruption at the close of the 19th century.]

_Climate, Flora and Fauna._--In its climate and vegetation British East
Africa again shows an arrangement of zones parallel to the coast. The coast
region is hot but is generally more healthy than the coast lands of other
tropical countries, this being due to the constant breeze from the Indian
Ocean and to the dryness of the soil. The rainfall on the coast is about 35
in. a year, the temperature tropical. The succeeding plains and the outer
plateaus are more arid. Farther inland the highlands--in which term may be
included all districts over 5000 ft. high--are very healthy, fever being
almost unknown. The average temperature is about 66 deg. F. in the cool season
and 73 deg. F. in the hot season. Over 7000 ft. the climate becomes distinctly
colder and frosts are experienced. The average rainfall in the highlands is
between 40 and 50 in. The country bordering Victoria Nyanza is typically
tropical; the rainfall exceeds 60 in. in the year, and this region is quite
unsuitable to Europeans. The hottest period throughout the protectorate is
December to April, the coolest, July to September. The "greater rains" fall
from March to June, the "smaller rains" in November and December. The
rainfall is not, however, as regular as is usual in countries within the
tropics, and severe droughts are occasionally experienced.

In the districts bordering Victoria Nyanza the flora resembles that of
Uganda (_q.v._). The characteristic trees of the coast regions are the
mangrove and coco-nut palm. Ebony grows in the scrub-jungle. Vast forests
of olives and junipers are found on the Mau escarpment; the cotton, fig and
bamboo on the Kikuyu escarpment; and in several regions are dense forests
of great trees whose lowest branches are 50 ft. from the ground. Two
varieties of the valuable rubber-vine, _Landolphia florida_ and _Landolphia
Kirkii_, are found near the coast and in the forests. The higher mountains
preserve distinct species, the surviving remnants of the flora of a cooler
period.

The fauna is not abundant except in large mammals, which are very numerous
on the drier steppes. They include the camel (confined to the arid northern
regions), elephant (more and more restricted to unfrequented districts),
rhinoceros, buffalo, many kinds of antelope, zebra, giraffe, hippopotamus,
lion and other carnivora, and numerous monkeys. In many parts the
rhinoceros is particularly abundant and dangerous. Crocodiles are common in
the larger rivers and in Victoria Nyanza. Snakes are somewhat rare, the
most dangerous being the puff-adder. Centipedes and scorpions, as well as
mosquitoes and other insects, are also less common than in most tropical
countries. In some districts bees are exceedingly numerous. The birds
include the ostrich, stork, bustard and secretary-bird among the larger
varieties, the guinea fowl, various kinds of spur fowl, and the lesser
bustard, the wild pigeon, weaver and hornbill. By the banks of lakes and
rivers are to be seen thousands of cranes, pelicans and flamingoes.

_Inhabitants._--The white population is chiefly in the Kikuyu uplands, the
rift-valley, and in the Kenya region. The whites are mostly agriculturists.
There are also numbers of Indian settlers in the same districts. The
African races include representatives of various stocks, as the country
forms a borderland between the Negro and Hamitic peoples, and contains many
tribes of doubtful affinities. The Bantu division of the negroes is
represented chiefly in the south, the principal tribes being the Wakamba,
Wakikuyu and Wanyika. By the north-east shores of Victoria Nyanza dwell the
Kavirondo (_q.v._), a race remarkable among the tribes of the protectorate
for their nudity. Nilotic tribes, including the Nandi (_q.v._), Lumbwa, Suk
and Turkana, are found in the north-west. Of Hamitic strain are the Masai
(_q.v._), a race of cattle-rearers speaking a Nilotic language, who occupy
part of the uplands bordering on the eastern rift-valley. A branch of the
Masai which has adopted the settled life of agriculturists is known as the
Wakuafi. The Galla section of the Hamites is represented, among others, by
Borani living [v.04 p.0603] south of the Goro Escarpment (though the true
Boran countries are Liban and Dirri in Abyssinian territory), while Somali
occupy the country between the Tana and Juba rivers. Of the Somali tribes
the Herti dwell near the coast and are more or less stationary. Further
inland is the nomadic tribe of Ogaden Somali. The Gurre, another Somali
tribe, occupy the country south of the lower Daua. Primitive hunting tribes
are the Wandorobo in Masailand, and scattered tribes of small stature in
various parts. The coast-land contains a mixed population of Swahili, Arab
and Indian immigrants, and representatives of numerous interior tribes.

_Provinces and Towns._--The protectorate has been divided into the
provinces of Seyyidie (the south coast province, capital Mombasa); Ukamba,
which occupies the centre of the protectorate (capital Nairobi); Kenya, the
district of Mt. Kenya (capital Fort Hall); Tanaland, to the north of the
two provinces first named (capital Lamu); Jubaland, the northern region
(capital Kismayu); Naivasha (capital Naivasha); and Kisumu (capital
Kisumu); each being in turn divided into districts and sub-districts.
Naivasha and Kisumu, which adjoin the Victoria Nyanza, formed at first the
eastern province of Uganda, but were transferred to the East Africa
protectorate on the 1st of April 1902. The chief port of the protectorate
is Mombasa (_q.v._) with a population of about 30,000. The harbour on the
south-west side of Mombasa island is known as Kilindini, the terminus of
the Uganda railway. On the mainland, nearly opposite Mombasa town, is the
settlement of freed slaves named Freretown, after Sir Bartle Frere.
Freretown (called by the natives Kisaoni) is the headquarters in East
Africa of the Church Missionary Society. It is the residence of the bishop
of the diocese of Mombasa and possesses a fine church and mission house.
Lamu, on the island of the same name, 150 m. north-east of Mombasa, is an
ancient settlement and the headquarters of the coast Arabs. Here are some
Portuguese ruins, and a large Arab city is buried beneath the sands. The
other towns of note on the coast are Malindi, Patta, Kipini and Kismayu. At
Malindi, the "Melind" of _Paradise Lost_, is the pillar erected by Vasco da
Gama when he visited the port in 1498. The harbour is very shallow.
Kismayu, the northernmost port of the protectorate, 320 m. north-east of
Mombasa, is the last sheltered anchorage on the east coast and is
invaluable as a harbour of refuge. Flourishing towns have grown up along
the Uganda railway. The most important, Nairobi (_q.v._), 327 m. from
Mombasa, 257 from Port Florence, was chosen in 1907 as the administrative
capital of the protectorate. Naivasha, 64 m. north-north-west of Nairobi,
lies in the rift-valley close to Lake Naivasha, and is 6230 ft. above the
sea. It enjoys an excellent climate and is the centre of a European
agricultural settlement. Kisumu or Port Florence (a term confined to the
harbour) is a flourishing town built on a hill overlooking Victoria Nyanza.
It is the entrepot for the trade of Uganda.

_Communications._--Much has been done to open up the country by means of
roads, including a trunk road from Mombasa, by Kibwezi in the upper Sabaki
basin, and Lake Naivasha, to Berkeley Bay on Victoria Nyanza. But the most
important engineering work undertaken in the protectorate was the
construction of a railway from Mombasa to Victoria Nyanza, for which a
preliminary survey was executed in 1892, and on which work was begun in
1896. The line chosen roughly coincides with that of the road, until the
equator is reached, after which it strikes by a more direct route across
the Mau plateau to the lake, which it reaches at Port Florence on Kavirondo
Gulf. The railway is 584 m. long and is of metre (3.28 ft.) gauge, the
Sudan, and South and Central African lines being of 3 ft. 6 in. gauge. The
Uganda railway is essentially a mountain line, with gradients of one in
fifty and one in sixty. From Mombasa it crosses to the mainland by a bridge
half a mile long, and ascends the plateau till it reaches the edge of the
rift-valley, 346 m. from its starting point, at the Kikuyu Escarpment,
where it is 7600 ft. above the sea. It then descends across ravines bridged
by viaducts to the valley floor, dropping to a level of 6011 ft., and next
ascending the opposite (Mau) escarpment to the summit, 8321 ft. above
sea-level--the highest point on the line. In the remaining 100 m. of its
course the level sinks to 3738 ft., the altitude of the station at Port
Florence. The railway was built by the British government at a cost of
L5,331,000, or about L9500 per mile. The first locomotive reached Victoria
Nyanza on the 26th of December 1901; and the permanent way was practically
completed by March 1903, when Sir George Whitehouse, the engineer who had
been in charge of the construction from the beginning, resigned his post.
The railway, by doing away with the carriage of goods by men, gave the
final death-blow to the slave trade in that part of East Africa. It also
facilitated the continued occupation and development of Uganda, which was,
previous to its construction, an almost impossible task, owing to the
prohibitive cost of the carriage of goods from the coast--L60 per ton. The
two avowed objects of the railway--the destruction of the slave trade and
the securing of the British position in Uganda--have been attained;
moreover, the railway by opening up land suitable for European settlement
has also done much towards making a prosperous colony of the protectorate,
which was regarded before the advent of the line as little better than a
desert (see below, _History_). The railway also shows a fair return on the
capital expenditure, the surplus after defraying all working expenses being
L56,000 in 1905-1906 and L76,000 in 1906-1907.

Mombasa is visited by the boats of several steamship companies, the German
East Africa line maintaining a fortnightly service from Hamburg. There is
also a regular service to and from India. A cable connecting Mombasa with
Zanzibar puts the protectorate in direct telegraphic communication with the
rest of the world. There is also an inland system of telegraphs connecting
the chief towns with one another and with Uganda.

_Agriculture and other Industries._--In the coast region and by the shores
of Victoria Nyanza the products are tropical, and cultivation is mainly in
the hands of the natives or of Indian immigrants. There are, however,
numerous plantations owned by Europeans. Rice, maize and other grains are
raised in large quantities; cotton and tobacco are cultivated. The coco-nut
palm plantations yield copra of excellent quality, and the bark of the
mangrove trees is exported for tanning purposes. In some inland districts
beans of the castor oil plant, which grows in great abundance, are a
lucrative article of trade. The sugar-cane, which grows freely in various
places, is cultivated by the natives. The collection of rubber likewise
employs numbers of people.

Among the European settlers in the higher regions much attention is devoted
to the production of vegetables, and very large crops of potatoes are
raised. Oats, barley, wheat and coffee are also grown. The uplands are
peculiarly adapted for the raising of stock, and many of the white settlers
possess large flocks and herds. Merino sheep have been introduced from
Australia. Ostrich farms have also been established. Clover, lucerne,
ryegrass and similar grasses have been introduced to improve and vary the
fodder. Other vegetable products of economic value are many varieties of
timber trees, and fibre-producing plants, which are abundant in the scrub
regions between the coast and the higher land bordering the rift-valley.
Over the greater part of the country the soil is light reddish loam; in the
eastern plains it is a heavy black loam. As a rule it is easily cultivated.
While the majority of the African tribes in the territory are not averse
from agricultural labour, the number of men available for work on European
holdings is small. Moreover, on some of the land most suited for
cultivation by white men there is no native population.

In addition to the fibre industry and cotton ginning there are factories
for the curing of bacon. Native industries include the weaving of cloth and
the making of mats and baskets. Stone and lime quarries are worked, and
copper is found in the Tsavo district. Diamonds have been discovered in the
Thika river, one of the headstreams of the Tana.

_Trade._--The imports consist largely of textiles, hardware and
manufactured goods from India and Europe; Great Britain and India between
them supplying over 50% of the total imports. Of other countries Germany
has the leading share in the trade. The exports, which include the larger
part of the external trade of Uganda, are chiefly copra, hides and skins,
grains, potatoes, rubber, ivory, chillies, beeswax, cotton and fibre. The
retail trade is largely in the hands of Indians. The value of the exports
rose from L89,858 in 1900-1901 to L234,664 in 1904-1905, in which year the
value of the imports for the first time exceeded L500,000. In 1906-1907 the
volume of trade was L1,194,352, imports being valued at L753,647 and
exports at L440,705. The United States takes 33% of the exports, Great
Britain coming next with 15%.

_Government._--The system of government resembles that of a British crown
colony. At the head of the administration is a governor, who has a deputy
styled lieutenant-governor, provincial commissioners presiding over each
province. There are also executive and legislative councils, unofficial
nominated members serving on the last-named council. In the "ten-mile
strip" (see below, _History_), the sultan of Zanzibar being territorial
sovereign, the laws of Islam apply to the native and Arab population. The
extra-territorial jurisdiction granted by the sultan to various Powers was
in 1907 transferred to Great Britain. Domestic slavery formerly existed;
but on the advice of the British government a decree was issued by the
sultan on the 1st of August 1890, enacting that no one born after that date
could be a slave, and this was followed in 1907 by a decree abolishing the
legal status of slavery. In the rest of the protectorate slavery is not
recognized in any form. Legislation is by ordinances made by the governor,
with the assent of the legislative council. The judicial system is based on
Indian models, though in cases in which Africans are concerned regard is
had to [v.04 p.0604] native customs. Europeans have the right to trial by
jury in serious cases. There is a police force of about 2000 men, and two
battalions of the King's African Rifles are stationed in the protectorate.
Revenue is derived chiefly from customs, licences and excise, railway
earnings, and posts and telegraphs. Natives pay a hut tax. Since the
completion of the Uganda railway, trade, and consequently revenue, has
increased greatly. In 1900-1901 the revenue was L64,275 and the expenditure
L193,438; in 1904-1905 the figures were: revenue L154,756, expenditure
L302,559; in 1905-1906 the totals were L270,362 and L418,839, and in
1906-1907 (when the railway figures were included for the first time)
L461,362 and L616,088. The deficiencies were made good by grants-in-aid
from the imperial exchequer. The standard coin used is the rupee (16d.).

Education is chiefly in the hands of the missionary societies, which
maintain many schools where instruction is given in handicrafts, as well as
in the ordinary branches of elementary education. There are Arab schools in
Mombasa, and government schools for Europeans and Indians at Nairobi.

_History._--From the 8th century to the 11th Arabs and Persians made
settlements along the coast and gained political supremacy at many places,
leading to the formation of the so-called Zenj empire. The history of the
coast towns from that time until the establishment of British rule is
identified with that of Zanzibar (_q.v._). The interior of what is now
British East Africa was first made known in the middle of the 19th century
by the German missionaries Ludwig Krapf and Johannes Rebmann, and by Baron
Karl von der Decken (1833-1865) and others. Von der Decken and three other
Europeans were murdered by Somali at a town called Bardera in October 1865,
whilst exploring the Juba river. The countries east of Victoria Nyanza
(Masailand, &c.) were, however, first traversed throughout their whole
extent by the Scottish traveller Joseph Thomson (_q.v._) in 1883-1884. In
1888 Count S. Teleki (a Hungarian) discovered Lakes Rudolf and Stefanie.

The growth of British interests in the country now forming the protectorate
arises from its connexion with the sultanate of Zanzibar. At Zanzibar
British influence was very strong in the last quarter of the 19th century,
and the seyyid or sultan, Bargash, depended greatly on the advice of the
British representative, Sir John Kirk. In 1877 Bargash offered to Mr
(afterwards Sir) William Mackinnon (1823-1893), chairman of the British
India Steam Navigation Company, a merchant in whom he had great confidence,
or to a company to be formed by him, a lease for 70 years of the customs
and administration of the whole of the mainland dominions of Zanzibar
including, with certain reservations, rights of sovereignty. This was
declined owing to a lack of support by the foreign office, and concessions
obtained in 1884 by Mr (afterwards Sir) H.H. Johnston in the Kilimanjaro
district were, at the time, disregarded. The large number of concessions
acquired by Germans in 1884-1885 on the East African coast aroused,
however, the interest of those who recognized the paramount importance of
the maintenance of British influence in those regions. A British claim,
ratified by an agreement with Germany in 1886, was made to the districts
behind Mombasa; and in May 1887 Bargash granted to an association formed by
Mackinnon a concession for the administration of so much of his mainland
territory as lay outside the region which the British government had
recognized as the German sphere of operations. By international agreement
the mainland territories of the sultan were defined as extending 10 m.
inland from the coast. Mackinnon's association, whose object [Sidenote: A
chartered company formed.] was to open up the hinterland as well as this
ten-mile strip, became the Imperial British East Africa Company by a
founder's agreement of April 1888, and received a royal charter in
September of the same year. To this company the sultan made a further
concession dated October 1888. On the faith of these concessions and the
charters a sum of L240,000 was subscribed, and the company received formal
charge of their concessions. The path of the company was speedily beset
with difficulties, which in the first instance arose out of the aggressions
of the German East African Company. This company had also received a grant
from the sultan in October 1888, and its appearance on the coast was
followed by grave disturbances among the tribes which had welcomed the
British. This outbreak led to a joint British and German blockade, which
seriously hampered trade operations. It had also been anticipated, in
reliance on certain assurances of Prince Bismarck, emphasized by Lord
Salisbury, that German enterprise in the interior of the country would be
confined to the south of Victoria Nyanza. Unfortunately this expectation
was not realized. Moreover German subjects put forward claims to coast
districts, notably Lamu, within the company's sphere and in many ways
obstructed the company's operations. In all these disputes the German
government countenanced its own subjects, while the British foreign office
did little or nothing to assist the company, sometimes directly
discouraging its activity. Moreover, the company had agreed by the
concession of October 1888 to pay a high revenue to the sultan--Bargash had
died in the preceding March and the Germans were pressing his successor to
give them a grant of Lamu--in lieu of the customs collected at the ports
they took over. The disturbance caused by the German claims had a
detrimental effect on trade and put a considerable strain on the resources
of the company. The action of the company in agreeing to onerous financial
burdens was dictated partly by regard for imperial interests, which would
have been seriously weakened had Lamu gone to the Germans.

By the hinterland doctrine, accepted both by Great Britain and Germany in
the diplomatic correspondence of July 1887, Uganda would fall within Great
Britain's "sphere of influence"; but German public opinion did not so
regard the matter. German maps assigned the territory to Germany, while in
England public opinion as strongly expected British influence to be
paramount. In 1889 Karl Peters, a German official, led what was practically
a raiding expedition into that country, after running a blockade of the
ports. An expedition under F.J. Jackson had been sent by the company in the
same year to Victoria Nyanza, but with instructions to avoid Uganda. In
consequence of representations from Uganda, and of tidings he received of
Peters's doings, Jackson, however, determined to go to that country. Peters
retired at Jackson's approach, claiming, nevertheless, to have made certain
treaties which constituted "effective occupation." Peters's treaty was
dated the 1st of March 1890: Jackson concluded another in April. Meantime
negotiations were proceeding in Europe; and by the Anglo-German agreement
of the 1st of July 1890 Uganda was assigned to the British sphere. To
consolidate their position in Uganda--the French missionaries there were
hostile to Great Britain--the company sent thither Captain F.D. Lugard, who
reached Mengo, the capital, in December 1890 and established the authority
of the company despite French intrigues. In July 1890 representatives of
the powers assembled at Brussels had agreed on common efforts for the
suppression of the slave trade. The interference of the company in Uganda
had been a material step towards that object, which they sought to further
and at the same time to open up the country by the construction of a
railway from Mombasa to Victoria Nyanza. But their resources being
inadequate for such an undertaking they sought imperial aid. Although Lord
Salisbury, then prime minister, paid the highest tribute to the company's
labours, and a preliminary grant for the survey had been practically agreed
upon, the scheme was wrecked in parliament. At a later date, however, the
railway was built entirely at government cost (_supra_, Sec.
_Communications_). Owing to the financial strain imposed upon it the
company decided to withdraw Captain Lugard and his forces in August 1891;
and eventually the British government assumed a protectorate over the
country (see UGANDA).

Further difficulties now arose which led finally to the extinction of the
company. Its pecuniary interests sustained a severe [Sidenote: The company
and the crown.] blow owing to the British government--which had taken
Zanzibar under its protection in November 1890--declaring (June 1892) the
dominions of the sultan within the free trade zone. This act extinguished
the treaties regulating all tariffs and duties with foreign powers, and
gave free trade all along the coast. The result for the company was that
dues were now swept away without compensation, and the company was left
saddled with the payment of the rent, and with the cost, in addition, of
administration, [v.04 p.0605] the necessary revenue for which had been
derived from the dues thus abolished. Moreover, a scheme of taxation which
it drew up failed to gain the approval of the foreign office.

In every direction the company's affairs had drifted into an _impasse_.
Plantations had been taken over on the coast and worked at a loss, money
had been advanced to native traders and lost, and expectations of trade had
been disappointed. At this crisis Sir William Mackinnon, the guiding spirit
of the company, died (June 1893). At a meeting of shareholders on the 8th
of May 1894 an offer to surrender the charter to the government was
approved, though not without strong protests. Negotiations dragged on for
over two years, and ultimately the terms of settlement were that the
government should purchase the property, rights and assets of the company
in East Africa for L250,000. Although the company had proved unprofitable
for the shareholders (when its accounts were wound up they disclosed a
total deficit of L193,757) it had accomplished a great deal of good work
and had brought under British sway not only the head waters of the upper
Nile, but a rich and healthy upland region admirably adapted for European
colonization. To the judgment, foresight and patriotism of Sir William
Mackinnon British East Africa practically owes its foundation. Sir William
and his colleagues of the company were largely animated by humanitarian
motives--the desire to suppress slavery and to improve the condition of the
natives. With this aim they prohibited the drink traffic, started
industrial missions, built roads, and administered impartial justice. In
the opinion of a later administrator (Sir C. Eliot), their work and that of
their immediate successors was the greatest philanthropic achievement of
the latter part of the 19th century.

On the 1st of July 1895 the formal transfer to the British crown of the
territory administered by the company took place at Mombasa, the foreign
office assuming responsibility for its administration. The territory,
hitherto known as "Ibea," from the initials of the company, was now styled
the East Africa protectorate. The small sultanate of Witu (_q.v._) on the
mainland opposite Lamu, from 1885 to 1890 a German protectorate, was
included in the British protectorate. Coincident with the transfer of the
administration to the imperial government a dispute as to the succession to
a chieftainship in the Mazrui, the most important Arab family on the coast,
led to a revolt which lasted ten months and involved much hard fighting. It
ended in April 1896 in the flight of the rebel leaders to German territory,
where they were interned. The rebellion marks an important epoch in the
history of the protectorate as its suppression definitely substituted
European for Arab influence. "Before the rebellion," says Sir C. Eliot,
"the coast was a protected Arab state; since its suppression it has been
growing into a British colony."

From 1896, when the building of the Mombasa-Victoria Nyanza railway was
begun, until 1903, when the line was [Sidenote: A white man's country.]
practically completed, the energies of the administration were largely
absorbed in that great work, and in establishing effective control over the
Masai, Somali, and other tribes. The coast lands apart, the protectorate
was regarded as valuable chiefly as being the high road to Uganda. But as
the railway reached the high plateaus the discovery was made that there
were large areas of land--very sparsely peopled--where the climate was
excellent and where the conditions were favourable to European
colonization. The completion of the railway, by affording transport
facilities, made it practicable to open the country to settlers. The first
application for land was made in April 1902 by the East Africa Syndicate--a
company in which financiers belonging to the Chartered Company of South
Africa were interested--which sought a grant of 500 sq. m.; and this was
followed by other applications for considerable areas, a scheme being also
propounded for a large Jewish settlement.

During 1903 the arrival of hundreds of prospective settlers, chiefly from
South Africa, led to the decision to entertain no more applications for
large areas of land, especially as questions were raised concerning the
preservation for the Masai of their rights of pasturage. In the carrying
out of this policy a dispute arose between Lord Lansdowne, foreign
secretary, and Sir Charles Eliot, who had been commissioner since 1900. The
foreign secretary, believing himself bound by pledges given to the
syndicate, decided that they should be granted the lease of the 500 sq. m.
they had applied for; but after consulting officials of the protectorate
then in London, he refused Sir Charles Eliot permission to conclude leases
for 50 sq. m. each to two applicants from South Africa. Sir Charles
thereupon resigned his post, and in a public telegram to the prime
minister, dated Mombasa, the 21st of June 1904, gave as his reason:--"Lord
Lansdowne ordered me to refuse grants of land to certain private persons
while giving a monopoly of land on unduly advantageous terms to the East
Africa Syndicate. I have refused to execute these instructions, which I
consider unjust and impolitic."[1]

On the day Sir Charles sent this telegram the appointment of Sir Donald W.
Stewart, the chief commissioner of Ashanti, to succeed him was announced.
Sir Donald induced the Masai whose grazing rights were threatened to remove
to another district, and a settlement of the land claims was arranged. An
offer to the Zionist Association of land for colonization by Jews was
declined in August 1905 by that body, after the receipt of a report by a
commissioner sent to examine the land (6000 sq. m.) offered. Sir Donald
Stewart died on the 1st of October 1905, and was succeeded by Colonel Hayes
Sadler, the commissioner of Uganda. Meantime, in April 1905, the
administration of the protectorate had been transferred from the foreign to
the colonial office. By the close of 1905 considerably over a million acres
of land had been leased or sold by the protectorate authorities--about half
of it for grazing purposes. In 1907, to meet the demands of the increasing
number of white inhabitants, who had formed a Colonists' Association[2] for
the promotion of their interests, a legislative council was established,
and on this council representatives of the settlers were given seats. The
style of the chief official was also altered, "governor" being substituted
for "commissioner". In the same year a scheme was drawn up for assisting
the immigration of British Indians to the regions adjacent to the coast and
to Victoria Nyanza, districts not suitable for settlement by Europeans.

In general the relations of the British with the tribes of the interior
have been satisfactory. The Somali in Jubaland have given some trouble, but
the Masai, notwithstanding their warlike reputation, accepted peaceably the
control of the whites. This was due, in great measure, to the fact that at
the period in question plague carried off their cattle wholesale and
reduced them for years to a state of want and weakness which destroyed
their warlike habits. One of the most troublesome tribes proved to be the
Nandi, who occupied the southern part of the plateau west of the Mau
escarpment. They repeatedly raided their less warlike neighbours and
committed wholesale thefts from the railway and telegraph lines. In
September 1905 an expedition was sent against them which reduced the tribe
to submission in the following November; and early in 1906 the Nandi were
removed into a reserve. The majority of the natives, unaccustomed to
regular work, showed themselves averse from taking service under the white
farmers. The inadequacy of the labour supply was an early cause of trouble
to the settlers, while the labour regulations enforced led, during
1907-1908, to considerable friction between the colonists and the
administration.

For several years after the establishment of the protectorate the northern
region remained very little known and no attempt was made to administer the
district. The natives were frequently raided by parties of Gallas and
Abyssinians, and in the absence of a defined frontier Abyssinian government
posts were pushed south to Lake Rudolf. The Abyssinians also made
themselves masters of the Boran country. After long negotiations an
agreement as to the boundary line between the lake and [v.04 p.0606] the
river Juba was signed at Adis Ababa on the 6th of December 1907, and in
1908-1909 the frontier was delimited by an Anglo-Abyssinian commission,
Major C.W. Gwynn being the chief British representative. Save for its
north-eastern extremity Lake Rudolf was assigned to the British, Lake
Stefanie falling to Abyssinia, while from about 4 deg. 20' N. the Daua to its
junction with the Juba became the frontier.

BIBLIOGRAPHY.--The most comprehensive account of the protectorate to the
close of 1904, especially of its economic resources, is _The East Africa
Protectorate_, by Sir Charles Eliot (London, 1905). The progress of the
protectorate is detailed in the _Reports_ by the governor issued annually
by the British government since 1896, and in _Drumkey's Year Book for East
Africa_ (Bombay), first issued in 1908. The _Precis of Information_
concerning the British East Africa Protectorate (issued by the War Office,
London, 1901) is chiefly valuable for its historical information. The work
of the Imperial British East Africa Company is concisely and
authoritatively told from official documents in _British East Africa or
Ibea_, by P.L. McDermont (new ed., London, 1895). Another book, valuable
for its historical perspective, is _The Foundation of British East Africa_,
by J.W. Gregory (London, 1901). Bishop A.R. Tucker's _Eighteen Years in
Uganda and East Africa_ (London, 1908) contains a summary of missionary
labours. Of the works of explorers _Through Masai Land_, by Joseph Thomson
(London, 1886), is specially valuable. For the northern frontier see Capt.
P. Maud's report in _Africa No. 13_ (1904). For geology see, besides
Thomson's book, _The Great Rift Valley_, by J.W. Gregory (London, 1896);
_Across an East African Glacier_, by Hans Meyer (London and Leipzig, 1890);
and _Report relating to the Geology of the East Africa Protectorate_, by
H.B. Muff (Colonial Office, London, 1908). For big game and ornithology see
_On Safari_, by A. Chapman (London, 1908). The story of the building of the
Uganda railway is summarized in the _Final Report of the Uganda Railway
Committee, Africa, No. 11_ (1904), published by the British government.

(F. R. C.)

[1] See _Correspondence relating to the Resignation of Sir C. Eliot,
Africa, No. 8_ (1904).

[2] The Planters and Farmers' Association, as this organization was
originally called, dates from 1903.

BRITISH EMPIRE, the name now loosely given to the whole aggregate of
territory, the inhabitants of which, under various forms of government,
ultimately look to the British crown as the supreme head. The term "empire"
is in this connexion obviously used rather for convenience than in any
sense equivalent to that of the older or despotic empires of history.

The land surface of the earth is estimated to extend over about 52,500,000
sq. m. Of this area the British empire occupies [Sidenote: Extent.] nearly
one-quarter, extending over an area of about 12,000,000 sq. m. By far the
greater portion lies within the temperate zones, and is suitable for white
settlement. The notable exceptions are the southern half of India and
Burma; East, West and Central Africa; the West Indian colonies; the
northern portion of Australia; New Guinea, British Borneo and that portion
of North America which extends into Arctic regions. The area of the
territory of the empire is divided almost equally between the southern and
the northern hemispheres, the great divisions of Australasia and South
Africa covering between them in the southern hemisphere 5,308,506 sq. m.,
while the United Kingdom, Canada and India, including the native states,
cover between them in the northern hemisphere 5,271,375 sq. m. The
alternation of the seasons is thus complete, one-half of the empire
enjoying summer, while one-half is in winter. The division of territory
between the eastern and western hemispheres is less equal, Canada occupying
alone in the western hemisphere 3,653,946 sq. m., while Australasia, South
Africa, India and the United Kingdom occupy together in the eastern
hemisphere 6,925,975 sq. m. As a matter of fact, however, the eastern
portions of Australasia border so nearly upon the western hemisphere that
the distribution of day and night throughout the empire is, like the
alternations of the seasons, almost complete, one-half enjoying daylight,
while the other half is in darkness. These alternations of time and of
seasons, combined with the variety of soils and climates, are calculated to
have an increasingly important effect upon the material and industrial, as
well as upon the social and political developments of the empire. This will
become evident in considering the industrial productions of the different
divisions, and the harvest seasons which permit the summer produce of one
portion of the empire to supply the winter requirements of its other
markets, and conversely.

[Illustration]

The empire contains or is bounded by some of the highest mountains, the
greatest lakes, and the most important rivers of the world. Its climates
may be said to include all the known climates of the world; its soils are
no less various. In the prairies of central Canada it possesses some of the
most valuable wheat-producing land; in the grass lands of the interior of
Australia the best pasture country; and in the uplands of South Africa the
most valuable gold- and diamond-bearing beds which exist. The United
Kingdom at present produces more coal than any other single country except
the United States. The effect of climate throughout the empire in modifying
the type of the Anglo-Saxon race has as yet received only partial
attention, and conclusions regarding it are of a somewhat empiric nature.
The general tendency in Canada is held to be towards somewhat smaller size,
and a hardy active habit; in Australia to a tall, slight, pale development
locally known as "cornstalkers," characterized by considerable nervous and
intellectual activity. In New Zealand the type preserves almost exactly the
characteristics of the British Isles. The South African, both Dutch and
British, is readily recognized by an apparently sun-dried, lank and hard
habit of body. In the tropical possessions of the empire, where white
settlement does not take place to any considerable extent, the individual
alone is affected. The type undergoes no modification. It is to be observed
in reference to this interesting aspect of imperial development, that the
multiplication and cheapening of channels of communication and means of
travel throughout the empire will tend to modify the future accentuation of
race difference, while the variety of elements in the vast area occupied
should have an important, though as yet not scientifically traced, effect
upon the British imperial type.

The white population of the empire[1] reached in 1901 a total of over
53,000,000, or something over one-eighth of its entire [Sidenote:
Population.] population, which, including native races, is estimated at
about 400,000,000. The white population includes some French, Dutch and
Spanish peoples, but is mainly of Anglo-Saxon race. It is distributed
roughly as follows:--

  United Kingdom and home dependencies  41,608,791
  Australasia                            4,662,000
  British North America                  5,500,000
  Africa (Dutch and British)             1,000,000[2]
  India                                    169,677
  West Indies and Bermuda                  100,000
                                        ----------
                                        53,040,468

The native population of the empire includes types of the principal black,
yellow and brown races, classing with these the high-type races of the
East, which may almost be called white. The native population of India,
mainly high type, brown, was returned at the census of 1901 as 294,191,379.
The population of India is divided into 118 groups on the basis of
language. These may, however, be collected into the following principal
groups:--

  (A) Malayo-Polynesian.
  (B) Indo-Chinese:
      i. Mon-Khmer.
      ii. Tibeto-Burman.
      iii. Siamese-Chinese.
  (C) Dravido-Mu[n.][d.][=a]:
      i. Mu[n.][d.][=a] (Kolarian).
      ii. Dravidian.
  (D) Indo-European.
      Indo-Aryan sub-family.
  (E) Semitic.
  (F) Hamitic.
  (G) Unclassed, e.g. Gipsy.

_Eastern Colonies_


  Ceylon, high type, brown and mixed            3,568,824
  Straits Settlements, brown, mixed and Chinese   570,000
  Hong-Kong, Chinese and brown                    306,130
  North Borneo, mixed brown and Sarawak           700,000
                                                ---------
                                                5,144,954

[v.04 p.0607] Of the various races which inhabit these Eastern dependencies
the most important are the 2,000,000 Sinhalese and the 954,000 Tamil that
make up the greater part of the population of Ceylon. The rest is made up
of Arabs, Malays, Chinese (in the Straits Settlements and Hong-Kong),
Dyaks, Eurasians and others.

_West Indies._

The West Indies, including the continental colonies of British Guiana and
Honduras, and seventeen islands or groups of islands, have a total coloured
population of about 1,912,655. The colonies of this group which have the
largest coloured populations are:--

  Jamaica--Chiefly black, some brown and yellow    790,000
  Trinidad and Tobago--Black and brown             250,000
  British Guiana--Black and brown                  286,000
                                                 ---------
                                                 1,326,000

The populations of the West Indies are very various, being made up largely
of imported African negroes. In Jamaica these contribute four-fifths of the
population. There are also in the islands a considerable number of imported
East Indian coolies and some Chinese. The aboriginal races include American
Indians of the mainland and Caribs. With these there has been intermixture
of Spanish and Portuguese blood, and many mixed types have appeared. The
total European population of this group of colonies amounts to upwards of
80,000, to which 15,000 on account of Bermuda may be added.

_Africa._

  Chiefly black, estimated
  South                                          5,211,329
  Central                                        2,000,000

The aboriginal races of South Africa were the Bushmen and Hottentots. Both
these races are rapidly diminishing in numbers, and in British South Africa
it is expected that they will in the course of the twentieth century become
extinct. Besides these primitive races there are the dark-skinned negroids
of Bantu stock, commonly known in their tribal groups as Kaffirs, Zulu,
Bechuana and Damara, which are again subdivided into many lesser groups.
The Bantu compose the greater part of the native population. There are also
in South Africa Malays and Indians and others, who during the last two
hundred years have been introduced from Java, Ceylon, Madagascar,
Mozambique and British India, and by intermarriage with each other and with
the natives have produced a hybrid population generally classed together
under the heading of the Mixed Races. These are of all colours, varying
from yellow to dark brown. The tribes of Central Africa are as yet less
known. Many of them exhibit racial characteristics allied to those of the
tribes of South Africa, but with in some cases an admixture of Arab blood.

_East Africa._


  Protectorate--Black and brown:
      Natives  (estimated)                     4,000,000
      Asiatics (estimated)                        25,000
  Zanzibar--Black and brown                      200,000
  Uganda                                       3,200,000
                                               ---------
                           Total               7,425,000

_West Africa._

                                                Estimated.
  Nigeria (including Lagos)--Black and brown   15,000,000
  Gold Coast and hinterland--Chiefly black      2,700,000
  Sierra Leone                   "     "        1,000,000
  Gambia                         "     "          163,000
                                               ----------
                                               18,863,000

From east to west across Africa the aboriginal nations are mostly of the
black negroid type, their varieties being only imperfectly known. The
tendency of some of the lower negroid types has been to drift towards the
west coast, where they still practise cannibalistic and fetish rites. On
the east coast are found much higher types approaching to the Christian
races of Abyssinia, and from east to west there has been a wide admixture
of Arab blood producing a light-brown type. In Uganda and Nigeria a large
proportion of the population is Arab and relatively light-skinned.

_Australasia_.

  Australia--Black, very low type                      200,000
             Chinese and half castes, yellow            50,000
  New Zealand--Maoris, brown, Chinese and half castes   53,000
  Fiji--Polynesian, black and brown                    121,000
  Papua--Polynesian, black and brown                   400,000
                                                       -------
                                                       824,000

The native races of Australia and the Polynesian groups of islands are
divided into two main types known as the dark and light Polynesian. The
dark type, which is black, is of a very low order, and in some of the
islands still retains its cannibal habits. The aboriginal tribes of
Australia are of a low-class black race, but generally peaceful and
inoffensive in their habits. The white Polynesian races are of a very
superior type, and exhibit, as in the Maoris of New Zealand,
characteristics of a high order. The natives of Papua (New Guinea) are in a
very low state of civilization. The estimate given of their numbers is
approximate, as no census has been taken.

_Canada._

  Indians--Brown                                     100,000

The only coloured native races of Canada are the Red Indians, many in
tribal variety, but few in number.

_Summary_.

  Native Populations:
  India                                          294,191,379
  Ceylon and Eastern Colonies                      5,144,954
  West Indies                                      1,912,655
  South Africa                                     5,211,329
  British Central Africa                           2,000,000
  East Africa                                      7,425,000
  West Africa                                     18,863,000
  Australasia and Islands                            824,000
  Canada                                             100,000
                                                 -----------
                                                 335,672,317
  White populations                               53,040,468
                                  Total          388,712,785

This is without taking into account the population of the lesser crown
colonies or allowing for the increase likely to be shown by later censuses.
Throughout the empire, and notably in the United Kingdom, there is among
the white races a considerable sprinkling of Jewish blood.

The latest calculation of the entire population of the world, including a
liberal estimate of 650,000,000 for peoples not brought under any census,
gives a total of something over 1,500,000,000. The population of the empire
may therefore be calculated as amounting to something more than one-fourth
of the population of the world.

It is a matter of first importance in the geographical distribution of the
empire that the five principal divisions, the United [Sidenote: Divisions.]
Kingdom, South Africa, India, Australia and Canada are separated from each
other by the three great oceans of the world. The distance as usually
calculated in nautical miles: from an English port to the Cape of Good Hope
is 5840 m.; from the Cape of Good Hope to Bombay is 4610; from Bombay to
Melbourne is 5630; from Melbourne to Auckland is 1830; from Auckland to
Vancouver is 6210; from Halifax to Liverpool is 2744. From a British port
direct to Bombay by way of the Mediterranean it is 6272; from a British
port by the same route to Sydney 11,548 m. These great distances have
necessitated the acquisition of intermediate ports suitable for coaling
stations on the trade routes, and have determined the position of many of
the lesser crown colonies which are held simply for military and commercial
purposes. Such are the Bermudas, Gibraltar, Malta, Aden, Ceylon, the
Straits Settlements, Labuan, Hong-Kong, which complete the [v.04 p.0608]
chain of connexion on the eastern route, and such on other routes are the
lesser West African stations, Ascension, St. Helena, the Mauritius and
Seychelles, the Falklands, Tristan da Cunha, and the groups of the western
Pacific. Other annexations of the British empire have been rocky islets of
the northern Pacific required for the purpose of telegraph stations in
connexion with an all-British cable.

For purposes of political administration the empire falls into the three
sections of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, with the
dependencies of the Channel Islands and the Isle of Man; the Indian empire,
consisting of British India and the feudatory native states; and the
colonial empire, comprising all other colonies and dependencies.

In the modern sense of extension beyond the limits of the United Kingdom
the growth of the empire is of comparatively [Sidenote: Growth.] recent
date. The Channel Islands became British as a part of the Norman
inheritance of William the Conqueror. The Isle of Man, which was for a
short time held in conquest by Edward I. and restored, was sold by its
titular sovereign to Sir William Scrope, earl of Wiltshire, in 1393, and by
his subsequent attainder for high treason and the confiscation of his
estates, became a fief of the English crown. It was granted by Henry IV. in
1406 to Sir John Stanley, K.C., ancestor of the earls of Derby, by whom it
was held till 1736, when it passed to James Murray, 2nd duke of Atholl, as
heir-general of the 10th earl. It was inherited by his daughter Charlotte,
wife of the 3rd duke of Atholl, who sold it to the crown for L70,000 and an
annuity of L2000. With these exceptions and the nominal possession taken of
Newfoundland by Sir Humphrey Gilbert in 1583, all the territorial
acquisitions of the empire have been made in the 17th and subsequent
centuries.

The following is a list of the British colonies and dependencies (other
than those belonging to the Indian empire) together with a summary
statement of the date and method of their acquisition. Arranged in
chronological order they give some idea of the rate of growth of the
empire. The dates are not, however, in all cases those in which British
sovereignty was established. They indicate in some instances only the first
definite step, such as the building of a fort, the opening of a trading
station, or other act, which led later to the incorporation in the empire
of the country indicated. In the case of Australian states or Canadian
provinces originally part of other states or provinces the date is that,
approximately, of the first settlement of British in the district named;
_e.g._ there were British colonists in Saskatchewan in the last half of the
18th century, but the province was not constituted until 1905. Save where
otherwise stated, British authority has been continuous from the first date
mentioned in the table. Reference should be made to the articles on the
various colonies.

Name.                           Date.     Method of Acquisition.

Newfoundland                    1583     Possession taken by Sir H. Gilbert
                                           for the crown.

                 _17th Century._

Barbados                      1605-1625  Settlement.
Bermudas                        1609         "
Gambia                       c. 1618         "   A second time in 1816.
St Christopher                  1623         "   Did not become wholly
                                                   British until 1713.
Novia Scotia                    1628         "   Ceded to France 1632;
                                           recovered 1713.
Nevis                           1628         "
Montserrat                      1632         "
Antigua                         1632         "
Honduras                        1638         "
St Lucia                        1638         "    Finally passed to Great
                                           Britain in 1803.
Gold Coast                   c. 1650     Settlement. Danish forts bought
                                           1850, Dutch forts 1871. Northern
                                           Territories added 1897.
St Helena                       1651     Settled by East India Co.
                                           Government vested in British
                                           crown 1833.
Jamaica                         1655     Conquest.
Bahamas                         1666     Settlement.
Virgin Islands               1666-1672   Settlement and conquest.
N.W. Territories of Canada      1669     Settlement under royal charter of
                                           Hudson's Bay Co. Purchased from
                                           imp. gov. 1869, and transferred
                                           to Canada 1870.
Turks and Caicos Is.            1678     Settlement.

                 _18th Century._
Gibraltar                       1704     Capitulation.
New Brunswick                   1713     Cession.
Prince Edward Is.               1758     Conquest.
Ontario                       1759-1790  With New Brunswick and Nova
Quebec                        1759-1790  Scotia constituted Dominion of
                                           Canada 1867. Prince Edward Is.
                                           enters the confederation 1873.
                                           In 1880 all British possessions
                                           (other than Newfoundland) in
                                           North America annexed to the
                                           Dominion.
Dominica                        1761     Conquest.
St Vincent                      1762     Capitulation.
Grenada                         1762          "
Tobago                          1763     Cession. Afterwards in French
                                           possession. Reconquered 1803.
Falkland Is.                    1765     Settlement. Reoccupied 1832.
Saskatchewan                    1766     Settlement. Separation from N.W.
                                           Territories of Canada 1905.
Pitcairn I.                     1780     Settlement.
Straits Settlements         1786 to 1824  Settlement and cession. Vested
                                           (1858) in crown by E.I. Co.
                                           Transferred from Indian to
                                           colonial possessions 1867.
                                           Malacca in British occupation
                                           1795-1818.
Sierra Leone                    1787     Settlement.
Alberta                        c. 1788   Separated from N. W. Territories
                                           of Canada 1905.
New South Wales                 1788     Settlement.
Ceylon                          1795     Capitulation.
Trinidad                        1797          "
Malta                           1800          "

              _19th Century._

British Guiana                  1803     Capitulation.
Tasmania                        1803     Settlement.
Cape of Good Hope               1806     Capitulation. Present limits not
                                           attained until 1895. First
                                           British occupation 1795-1803.
Seychelles                      1806     Capitulation.
Mauritius                       1810          "
Manitoba                        1811     Settlement by Red River or Selkirk
                                           colony. Created province of
                                           Canada 1870.
Ascension and Tristan da Cunha  1815     Military occupation.
B. Columbia and Vancouver Island  1821   Settlement under Hudson's Bay Co.
                                           Entered Canadian confederation
                                           1871.
Natal                           1824     Settlement. Natal Boers submit
                                           1843.
Queensland                      1824     Separated from New South Wales
                                           1859.
West Australia                  1826     Settlement.
Victoria                        1834     Separated from New South Wales
                                           1851.
South Australia                 1836     Settlement.
New Zealand                     1840     Settlement and treaty.
Hong-Kong                       1841     Treaties. Kowloon on the mainland
                                           added in 1860; additional area
                                           leased 1898.
Labuan                          1846     Cession. Incorporated in Straits
                                           Settlements 1906.
Lagos                           1861     Cession. South Nigeria amalgamated
                                           with Lagos, under style of
                                           Colony and Protectorate of
                                           Southern Nigeria 1906.
Basutoland                      1868     Annexation.
Fiji                            1874     Cession.
[v.04 p.0609]
W. Pacific Islands, including   1877     High commission created by order
  including Union, Ellice,                 in council, giving jurisdiction
  Gilbert, Southern Solomon,               over islands not included in
  and other groups                         other colonial governments, nor
                                           within jurisdiction of other
                                           civilized powers. Protectorates
                                           over all these islands by 1900.
Federated Malay States        1874-1895  Treaty.
Cyprus                          1878     Occupied by treaty.
North Borneo                    1881     Treaty and settlement under royal
                                           charter. Protectorate assumed
                                           1888.
Papua                           1884     Protectorate declared.
Nigeria                       1884-1886  Treaty, conquest and settlement
                                           under royal charter. Chartered
                                           Co.'s territory transferred to
                                           crown, and whole divided into
                                           North and South Nigeria 1900.
Somaliland                    1884-1886  Occupation and cession.
                                         Protectorate declared 1887.
Bechuanaland                  1885-1891  Protectorate declared. Southern
                                           portion annexed to Cape Colony
                                           1895.
Zululand                        1887     Annexation. Incorporated in Natal
                                           1897.
Sarawak                         1888     Protectorate declared.
Brunei                          1888           "          "
British East Africa             1888     Treaty, conquest and settlement
                                         under royal charter. Transferred
                                         to crown 1895.
Rhodesia                      1888-1893  Treaty, conquest and settlement
                                         under royal charter.
Zanzibar                        1890     Protectorate declared.
Uganda                        1890-1896  Treaty and protectorate.
Nyasaland                       1891     Protectorate declared.
Ashanti                         1896     Military occupation.
Wei-hai-wei                     1898     Lease from China.
Pacific Islands--
  Christmas, Fanning,           1898     Annexed for purposes of projected
  Penrhyn, Suvarov                       Pacific cable.
  Choiseul and Isabel Is.       1899     Cession.
    (Solomon Group)
  Tonga and Niue                1900     Protectorate declared.
Orange Free State               1900     Annexation. Formerly British
                                           1848-1854.
Transvaal and Swaziland         1900     Annexation. Formerly British
                                           1877-1881.

                               _20th Century._
Kelantan, Trengganu, &c.        1909     Cession from Siam.

In the Pacific are also Bird Island, Bramble Cay, Cato Island, Cook
Islands, Danger Islands, Ducie Island, Dudosa, Howland Island, Jarvis
Island, Kermadec Islands, Macquarie Island, Manihiki Islands, Nassau
Island, Palmerston Island, Palmyra Island, Phoenix Group, Purdy Group,
Raine Island, Rakaanga Island, Rotumah Island, Surprise Island, Washington
or New York Island, Willis Group and Wreck Reef.

In the Indian Ocean there are, besides the colonies already mentioned,
Rodriguez, the Chagos Islands, St Brandon Islands, Amirante Islands,
Aldabra, Kuria Muria Islands, Maldive Islands and some other small groups.

In certain dependencies the sovereignty of Great Britain is not absolute.
The island of Cyprus is nominally still part of the Turkish empire, but in
1878 was handed over to Great Britain for occupation and administration;
Great Britain now making to the Porte on account of the island an annual
payment of L5000. The administration is in the hands of an official styled
high commissioner, who is invested with the powers usually conferred on a
colonial governor. In Zanzibar and other regions of equatorial Africa the
native rulers retain considerable powers; in the Far East certain areas are
held on lease from China.

Egypt, without forming part of the British empire, came under the military
occupation of Great Britain in 1882. "By right of conquest" Great Britain
subsequently claimed a share in the administration of the former Sudan
provinces of Egypt, and an agreement of the 19th of January 1899
established the joint sovereignty of Great Britain and Egypt over what is
now known as the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan.

The Indian section of the empire was acquired during the 17th-19th
centuries under a royal charter granted to the East India Company by Queen
Elizabeth in 1600. It was transferred to the imperial government in 1858,
and Queen Victoria was proclaimed empress under the Royal Titles Act in
1877. The following list gives the dates and method of acquisition of the
centres of the main divisions of the Indian empire. They have, in most
instances, grown by general process of extension to their present
dimensions.

  Name.                 Date.     Method of Acquisition.

  Madras                1639      By treaty and subsequent conquest.
                         to         Fort St George, the foundation
                        1748        of Madras was the first territorial
                                    possession of the E.I. Co. in India.
                                    It was acquired by treaty with its
                                    Indian ruler. Madras was raised into
                                    a presidency in 1683; ceded to France
                                    1746; recovered 1748.

  Bombay                1608      Treaty and cession. Trade first
                         to         established 1608. Ceded to British
                        1685        crown by Portugal 1661. Transferred
                                    to E.I. Co. 1668. Presidency removed
                                    from Surat 1687.

  Bengal                1633      Treaty and subsequent conquests. First
                         to         trade settlement established by
                        1765        treaty at Pipli in Orissa 1633.
                                    Erected into presidency by separation
                                    from Madras 1681. Virtual sovereignty
                                    announced by E.I. Co., as result of
                                    conquests of Clive, 1765.

  United Provinces      1764      By conquests and treaty through
    of Agra and Oudh     to         successive stages, of which the
                        1856        principal dates were 1801-3-14-15.
                                    In 1832 the nominal sovereignty of
                                    Delhi, till then retained by the
                                    Great Mogul, was resigned into the
                                    hands of the E.I. Co. Oudh, of which
                                    the conquest may be said to have
                                    begun with the battle of Baxar in
                                    1764, was finally annexed in 1856.

  Central Provinces   1802-1817   By conquest and treaty.
  Eastern Bengal      1825-1826   Conquest and cession. The Bengal
    and Assam                       portion of the province by
                                    separation from Bengal in 1905.
  Burma               1824-1852   Conquest and cession.
  Punjab                1849      Conquest and annexation. Made into
                                    distinct province 1859.
  N.-W. Frontier        1901      Subdivision.
    Province
  Ajmere and Merwara    1818      By conquest and cession.
  Coorg                 1834      Conquest and annexation.
  British Baluchistan 1854-1876   Conquest and treaty.
  Andaman Islands       1858      Annexation.

The following is a list of some of the principal Indian states which are
more or less under the control of the British government:--

1. In direct political relations with the governor-general in council.

  Hyderabad.
  Baroda.
  Mysote.
  Kashmir.

2. Under the Rajputana agency.

  Udaipur.
  Jodhpur.
  Bikanir.
  Jaipur (and feudatories).
  Bharatpur.
  Dholpur.
  Alwar.
  Tonk.

3. Under the Central Indian agency.

  Indore.
  Rewa.
  Bhopal.
  Gwalior.

4. Under the Bombay government.

  Cutch.
  Kolhapur (and dependencies).
  Khairpur (Sind).
  Bhaunagar.

[v.04 p.0610] 5. Under the Madras government.

  Travancore.
  Cochin.

6. Under the Central Provinces government.

  Bastar.

7. Under the Bengal government.

  Kuch Behar.
  Sikkim.

8. Under United Provinces government.

  Rampur.
  Garhwal.

9. Under the Punjab government.

  Patiala.
  Bahawalpur.
  Jind.
  Nabha.
  Kapurthala.
  Mandi.
  Sirmur (Nahan).
  Faridkot.
  Chamba.

10. Under the government of Burma.

  Shan states.
  Karen states.

In addition to these there are British tracts known as the Upper Burma
frontier and the Burma frontier. There is also a sphere of British
influence in the border of Afghanistan. The state of Nepal, though
independent as regards its internal administration, has been since the
campaign of 1814-15 in close relations with Great Britain. It is bound to
receive a British resident, and its political relations with other states
are controlled by the government of India. All these native states have
come into relative dependency upon Great Britain as a result of conquest or
of treaty consequent upon the annexation of the neighbouring provinces. The
settlement of Aden, with its dependencies of Perim and Sokotra Island,
forms part of the government of Bombay.

This vast congeries of states, widely different in character, and acquired
by many different methods, holds together under [Sidenote: Administration.]
the supreme headship of the crown on a generally acknowledged triple
principle of self-government, self-support and self-defence. The principle
is more fully applied in some parts of the empire than in others; there are
some parts which have not yet completed their political evolution; some
others in which the principle is temporarily or for special reasons in
abeyance; others, again--chiefly those of very small extent, which are held
for purposes of the defence or advantage of the whole--to which it is not
applicable; but the principle is generally acknowledged as the structural
basis upon which the constitution of the empire exists.

In its relation to the empire the home section of the British Isles is
distinguished from the others as the place of origin of the British race
and the residence of the crown. The history and constitutional development
of this portion of the empire will be found fully treated under separate
headings. (See ENGLAND; WALES; IRELAND; SCOTLAND; UNITED KINGDOM; ENGLISH
HISTORY; INDIA; AFRICA; AUSTRALIA; CANADA; &c.)

It is enough to say that for purposes of administration the Indian empire
is divided into nine great provinces and four minor commissionerships. The
nine great provinces are presided over by two governors (Bombay and
Madras), five lieut.-governors (Bengal, Eastern Bengal and Assam, United
Provinces [Agra and Oudh], the Punjab and Burma), a chief commissioner (the
Central Provinces) and an agent to the governor-general (the N.-W. Frontier
Province). The four minor commissionerships are presided over each by a
chief commissioner. Above these the supreme executive authority in India is
vested in the viceroy in council. The council consists of six ordinary
members besides the existing commander-in-chief. For legislative purposes
the governor-general's council is increased by the addition of fifteen
members nominated by the crown, and has power under certain restrictions to
make laws for British India, for British subjects in the native states, and
for native Indian subjects of the crown in any part of the world. The
administration of the Indian empire in England is carried on by a secretary
of state for India assisted by a council of not less than ten members. The
expenditure of the revenues is under the control of the secretary in
council.

The colonial empire comprises over fifty distinct governments. It is
divided into colonies of three classes and dependencies; these, again, are
in some instances associated for administrative purposes in federated
groups. The three classes of colonies are crown colonies, colonies
possessing representative institutions but not responsible government, and
colonies possessing representative institutions and responsible government.
In crown colonies the crown has entire control of legislation, and the
public officers are under the control of the home government. In
representative colonies the crown has only a veto on legislation, but the
home government retains control of the public officers. In responsible
colonies the crown retains a veto upon legislation, but the home government
has no control of any public officer except the governor.

In crown colonies--with the exception of Gibraltar and St Helena, where
laws may be made by the governor alone--laws are made by the governor with
the concurrence of a council nominated by the crown. In some crown
colonies, chiefly those acquired by conquest or cession, the authority of
this council rests wholly on the crown; in others, chiefly those acquired
by settlement, the council is created by the crown under the authority of
local or imperial laws. The crown council of Ceylon may be cited as an
example of the first kind, and the crown council of Jamaica of the second.

In colonies possessing representative institutions without responsible
government, the crown cannot (generally) legislate by order in council, and
laws are made by the governor with the concurrence of the legislative body
or bodies, one at least of these bodies in cases where a second chamber
exists possessing a preponderance of elected representatives. The Bahamas,
Barbados, and Bermuda have two legislative bodies--one elected and one
nominated by the crown; Malta and the Leeward Islands have but one, which
is partly elected and partly nominated.

Under responsible government legislation is carried on by parliamentary
means exactly as at home, with a cabinet responsible to parliament, the
crown reserving only a right of veto, which is exercised at the discretion
of the governor in the case of certain bills. The executive councils in
those colonies, designated as at home by parliamentary choice, are
appointed by the governor alone, and the other public officers only
nominally by the governor on the advice of his executive council.

Colonial governors are classed as governors-general; governors;
lieut.-governors; administrators; high commissioners; and commissioners,
according to the status of the colony and dependency, or group of colonies
and dependencies, over which they preside. Their powers vary according to
the position which they occupy. In all cases they represent the crown.

As a consequence of this organization the finance of crown colonies is
under the direct control of the imperial government; the finance of
representative colonies, though not directly controlled, is usually
influenced in important departures by the opinion of the imperial
government. In responsible colonies the finance is entirely under local
control, and the imperial government is dissociated from either moral or
material responsibility for colonial debts.

In federated groups of colonies and dependencies matters which are of
common interest to a given number of separate governments are by mutual
consent of the federating communities adjudged to the authority of a common
government, which, in the case of self-governing colonies, is voluntarily
created for the purpose. The associated states form under the federal
government one federal body, but the parts retain control of local matters,
and exercise all their original rights of government in regard to these.
The two great self-governing groups of federated colonies within the empire
are the Dominion of Canada and the Commonwealth of Australia. In South
Africa unification was preferred to federation, the then self-governing
colonies being united in 1910 into one state--the Union of South Africa.
India, of which the associated provinces are under the control of the
central government, may be given as an example of the practical federation
of dependencies. Examples [v.04 p.0611] of federated crown colonies and
lesser dependencies are to be found in the Leeward Island group of the West
Indies and the federated Malay States.

This rough system of self-government for the empire has been evolved not
without some strain and friction, by the recognition through the
vicissitudes of three hundred years of the value of independent initiative
in the development of young countries. Queen Elizabeth's first patent to
Sir Walter Raleigh permitted British subjects to accompany him to America,
"with guarantee of a continuance of the enjoyment of all the rights which
her subjects enjoyed at home."

This guarantee may presumably have been intended at the time only to assure
the intending settlers that they should lose no rights of British
citizenship at home by taking up their residence in America. Its mutual
interpretation in a wider sense, serving at once to establish in the colony
rights of citizenship equivalent to those enjoyed in England, and to
preserve for the colonist the status of British subject at home and abroad,
has formed in application to all succeeding systems of British colonization
the unconscious charter of union of the empire.

The first American colonies were settled under royal grants, each with its
own constitution. The immense distance in time which in those days
separated America from Great Britain secured them from interference by the
home authorities. They paid their own most moderate governing expenses, and
they contributed largely to their own defence. From the middle of the 17th
century their trade was not free, but this was the only restriction from
which they suffered. The great war with France in the middle of the 18th
century temporarily destroyed this system. That war, which resulted in the
conquest of Canada and the delivery of the North American colonies from
French antagonism, cost the imperial exchequer L90,000,000. The attempt to
avert the repetition of such expenditure by the assertion of a right to tax
the colonies through the British parliament led to the one great rupture
which has marked the history of the empire. It has to be noted that at home
during the latter half of the 17th century and the earlier part of the 18th
century parliamentary power had to a great extent taken the place of the
divine right of kings. But parliamentary power meant the power of the
English people and taxpayers. The struggle which developed itself between
the American colonies and the British parliament was in fact a struggle on
the part of the people and taxpayers of one portion of the empire to resist
the domination of the people and taxpayers of another portion. In this
light it may be accepted as having historically established the fundamental
axiom of the constitution of the empire, that the crown is the supreme head
from which the parts take equal dependence.

The crown requiring advice in the ordinary and constitutional manner
receives it in matters of colonial administration from the secretaries of
state for the colonies and for India. After the great rupture separate
provision in the home government for the administration of colonial affairs
was at first judged to be unnecessary, and the "Council[3] of Trade and
Plantations," which up to that date had supplied the place now taken by the
two offices of the colonies and India, was suppressed in 1782. There was a
reaction from the liberal system of colonial self-government, and an
attempt was made to govern the colonies simply as dependencies.

In 1791, not long after the extension of the range of parliamentary
authority in another portion of the empire, by the creation in 1784 of the
Board of Control for India, Pitt made the step forward of granting to
Canada representative institutions, of which the home government kept the
responsible control. Similar institutions were also given at a later period
to Australia and South Africa. But the long peace of the early part of the
19th century was marked by great colonial developments; Australia, Canada
and South Africa became important communities. Representative institutions
controlled by the home government were insufficient, and they reasserted
the claim for liberty to manage their own affairs.

Fully responsible government was granted to Canada in 1840, and gradually
extended to the other colonies. In 1854 a separate secretary of state for
the colonies was appointed at home, and the colonial office was established
on its present footing. In India, as in the colonies, there came with the
growing needs of empire a recognition of the true relations of the parts to
each other and of the whole to the crown. In 1858, on the complete
transference of the territories of the East India Company to the crown, the
board of control was abolished, and the India Council, under the presidency
of a secretary of state for India, was created. It was especially provided
that the members of the council may not sit in parliament.

Thus, although it has not been found practicable in the working of the
British constitution to carry out the full theory of the direct and
exclusive dependence of colonial possessions on the crown, the theory is
recognized as far as possible. It is understood that the principal sections
of the empire enjoy equal rights under the crown, and that none is
subordinate to another. The intervention of the imperial parliament in
colonial affairs is only admitted theoretically in so far as the support of
parliament is required by the constitutional advisers of the crown. To
bring the practice of the empire into complete harmony with the theory it
would be necessary to constitute, for the purpose of advising the crown on
imperial affairs, a council in which all important parts of the empire
should be represented.

The gradual recognition of the constitutional theory of the British empire,
and the assumption by the principal [Sidenote: Imperialism.] colonies of
full self-governing responsibilities, has cleared the way for a movement in
favour of a further development which should bring the supreme headship of
the empire more into accord with modern ideas.

It was during the period of domination of the "Manchester school," of which
the most effective influence in public affairs was exerted for about thirty
years, extending from 1845 to 1875, that the fullest development of
colonial self-government was attained, the view being generally accepted at
that time that self-governing institutions were to be regarded as the
preliminary to inevitable separation. A general inclination to withdraw
from the acceptance of imperial responsibilities throughout the world gave
to foreign nations at the same time an opportunity by which they were not
slow to profit, and contributed to the force of a reaction of which the
part played by Great Britain in the scramble for Africa marked the
culmination. Under the increasing pressure of foreign enterprise, the value
of a federation of the empire for purposes of common interest began to be
discussed. Imperial federation was openly spoken of in New Zealand as early
as 1852. A similar suggestion was officially put forward by the general
association of the Australian colonies in London in 1857. The Royal
Colonial Institution, of which the motto "United Empire" illustrates its
aims, was founded in 1868. First among leading British statesmen to
repudiate the old interpretation of colonial self-government as a
preliminary to separation, Lord Beaconsfield, in 1872, spoke of the
constitutions accorded to the colonies as "part of a great policy of
imperial consolidation." In 1875 W. E. Forster, afterwards a member of the
Liberal government, made a speech in which he advocated imperial federation
as a means by which it might become practicable to "replace dependence by
association." The foundation of the Imperial Federation League--in 1884,
with Forster for its first president, shortly to be succeeded by Lord
Rosebery--marked a distinct step forward. The Colonial Conferences of 1887
and subsequent years (the title being changed to Imperial Conference in
1907), in which colonial opinion was sought and accepted in respect of
important questions of imperial organization and defence, and the
enthusiastic loyalty displayed by the colonies towards the crown on the
occasion of the jubilee manifestations of Queen Victoria's reign, were
further indications of progress in the same direction. Coincidently with
this development, the achievements of Sir George Goldie and Cecil Rhodes,
who, the one in West Africa and the other in South Africa, added between
them to the empire in a space of less than twenty years a dominion of
greater extent than the whole of British [v.04 p.0612] India, followed by
the action of a host of distinguished disciples in other parts of the
world, effectually stemmed the movement initiated by Cobden and Bright. A
tendency which had seemed temporarily to point towards a complacent
dissolution of the empire was arrested, and the closing years of the 19th
century were marked by a growing disposition to appreciate the value and
importance of the unique position which the British empire has created for
itself in the world. No stronger demonstration of the reality of imperial
union could be needed than that which was afforded by the support given to
the imperial forces by the colonies and India in the South African War. It
remained only to be seen by what process of evolution the further
consolidation of the empire would find expression in the machinery of
government. A step in this direction was taken in 1907, when at the
Colonial Conference held in London that year it was decided to form a
permanent secretariat to deal with the common interests of the
self-governing colonies and the mother-country. It was further decided that
conferences, to be called in future Imperial Conferences, between the home
government and the governments of the self-governing dominions, should be
held every four years, and that the prime minister of Great Britain should
be _ex officio_ president of the conference. No executive power was,
however, conferred upon the conference.

The movement in favour of tariff reform initiated by Mr Chamberlain
(_q.v._) in 1903 with the double object of giving a preference to colonial
goods and of protecting imperial trade by the imposition in certain cases
of retaliative duties on foreign goods, was a natural evolution of the
imperialist idea, and of the fact that by this time the trade-statistics of
the United Kingdom had proved that trade with the colonies was forming an
increasingly large proportion of the whole. In spite of the defeat of the
Unionist party in England in 1906, and the accession to power of a Liberal
government opposed to anything which appeared to be inconsistent with free
trade, the movement for colonial preference, based on tariff reform,
continued to make headway in the United Kingdom, and was definitely adopted
by the Unionist party. And at the Imperial Conference of 1907 it was
advocated by all the colonial premiers, who could point to the progress
made in their own states towards giving a tariff preference to British
goods and to those of one another.

The question of self-government is closely associated with the question of
self-support. Plenty of good land and the liberty to manage their own
affairs were the causes assigned by Adam Smith for the marked prosperity of
the British colonies towards the end of the 18th century. The same causes
are still observed to produce the same effects, and it may be pointed out
that, since the date of the latest of Adam Smith's writings, upwards of
6,000,000 sq. m. of virgin soil, rich with possibilities of agricultural,
pastoral and mineral wealth, have been added to the empire. In the same
period the white population has grown from about 12,000,000 to 53,000,000,
and the developments of agricultural and industrial machinery have
multiplied, almost beyond computation, the powers of productive labour.

It is scarcely possible within this article to deal with so widely varied a
subject as that of the productions and industry of the [Sidenote: The
imperial factor in industry and trade.] empire. For the purposes of a
general statement, it is interesting to observe that concurrently with the
acquisition of the vast continental areas during the 19th century, the
progress of industrial science in application to means of transport and
communication brought about a revolution of the most radical character in
the accepted laws of economic development. Railways did away with the old
law that the spread of civilization is necessarily governed by facilities
for water carriage and is consequently confined to river valleys and
sea-shores. Steam and electricity opened to industry the interior of
continents previously regarded as unapproachable. The resources of these
vast inland spaces which have lain untouched since history began became
available to individual enterprise, and over a great portion of the earth's
surface were brought within the possessions of the British empire. The
production of raw material within the empire increased at a rate which can
only be appreciated by a careful study of figures, and by a comparison of
the total of these figures with the total figures of the world. The
tropical and temperate possessions of the empire include every field of
production which can be required for the use of man. There is no main
staple of human food which is not grown; there is no material of textile
industry which is not produced. The British empire gives occupation to more
than one-third of the persons employed in mining and quarrying in the
world. It may be interesting, as an indication of the relative position in
this respect of the British empire to the world, to state that at present
it produces one-third of the coal supply of the world, one-sixth of the
wheat supply, and very nearly two-thirds of the gold supply. But while
these figures may be taken as in themselves satisfactory, it is far more
important to remember that as yet the potential resources of the new lands
opened to enterprise have been barely conceived, and their wealth has been
little more than scratched. Population as yet has been only very sparsely
sprinkled over the surface of many of the areas most suitable for white
settlement. In the wheat lands of Canada, the pastoral country of
Australasia, and the mineral fields of South Africa and western Canada
alone, the undeveloped resources are such as to ensure employment to the
labour and satisfaction to the needs of at least as many millions as they
now contain thousands of the British race. In respect of this promise of
the future the position of the British empire is unique.

It is not too much to say that trade has been at once the most active cause
of expansion and the most potent bond of union in the development of the
empire. Trade with the tropical and settlement in the temperate regions of
the world formed the basis upon which the foundations of the empire were
laid. Trading companies founded most of the American and West Indian
colonies; a trading company won India; a trading company colonized the
north-western districts of Canada; commercial wars during the greater part
of the 18th century established the British command of the sea, which
rendered the settlement of Australasia possible. The same wars gave Great
Britain South Africa, and chartered companies in the 19th century carried
the British flag into the interior of the African continent from south and
east and west. Trading companies developed Borneo and Fiji. The bonds of
prosperous trade have kept the Australasian colonies within the empire. The
protection of colonial commerce by the imperial navy is one of the
strongest of material links which connect the crown with the outlying
possessions of the empire.

The trade of the empire, like the other developments of imperial public
life, has been profoundly influenced by the variety of [Sidenote: Imperial
trade policy.] local conditions under which it has flourished. In the early
settlement of the North American colonies their trade was left practically
free; but by the famous Navigation Act of 1660 the importation and
exportation of goods from British colonies were restricted to British
ships, of which the master and three-fourths of the mariners were English.
This act, of which the intention was to encourage British shipping and to
keep the monopoly of British colonial trade for the benefit of British
merchants, was followed by many others of a similar nature up to the time
of the repeal of the Corn Laws in 1846 and the introduction of free trade
into Great Britain. The Navigation Acts were repealed in 1849. Thus for
very nearly two hundred years British trade was subject to restrictions, of
which the avowed intention was to curtail the commercial intercourse of the
empire with the world. During this period the commercial or mercantile
system, of which the fallacies were exposed by the economists of the latter
half of the 18th century, continued to govern the principles of British
trade. Under this system monopolies were common, and among them few were
more important than that of the East India Company. In 1813 the trade of
India was, however, thrown open to competition, and in 1846, after the
introduction of free trade at home, the principal British colonies which
had not yet at that date received the grant of responsible government were
specially empowered to abolish differential duties upon foreign trade. A
first result of the commercial emancipation of the [v.04 p.0613] colonies
was the not altogether unnatural rise in the manufacturing centres of the
political school known as the Manchester school, which was disposed to
question the value to Great Britain of the retention of colonies which were
no longer bound to give her the monopoly of their commercial markets. An
equally natural desire on the part of the larger colonies to profit by the
opportunity which was opened to them of establishing local manufactures of
their own, combined with the convenience in new countries of using the
customs as an instrument of taxation, led to something like a reciprocal
feeling of resentment, and there followed a period during which the policy
of Great Britain was to show no consideration for colonial trade, and the
policy of the principal colonies was to impose heavy duties upon British
trade. By a gradual process of better understanding, largely helped by the
development of means of communication, the antagonistic extreme was
abandoned, and a tendency towards a system of preferential duties within
the empire displayed itself.

At the Colonial Conference held in London in 1887 a proposal was formally
submitted by the South [Sidenote: Colonial preference.] African delegate
for the establishment within the empire of a preferential system, imposing
a duty of 2% upon all foreign goods, the proceeds to be directed to the
maintenance of the imperial navy. To this end it was requested that certain
treaties with foreign nations which imposed restrictions on the trade of
various parts of the empire with each other should be denounced. Some years
later, a strong feeling having been manifested in England against any
foreign engagement standing in the way of new domestic trade arrangements
between a colony and the mother-country, the German and Belgian treaties in
question were denounced (1897). Meanwhile, simultaneously with the movement
in favour of reciprocal fiscal advantages to be granted within the empire
by the many local governments to each other, there was a growth of the
perception that an increase of the foreign trade of Great Britain, carried
on chiefly in manufactured goods, was accompanied by a corresponding
enlargement of the home markets for colonial raw material, and consequently
that injury to the foreign trade of Great Britain, while as yet it so
largely outweighed the trade between the United Kingdom and the colonies,
must necessarily react upon the colonies. This view was definitely
expressed at the Colonial Conference at Ottawa in 1894, and was one of the
factors which led to the relinquishment of the demand that in return for
colonial concessions there should be an imposition on the part of Great
Britain of a differential duty upon foreign goods. Canada was the first
important British colony to give substantial expression to the new imperial
sentiment in commercial matters by the introduction in 1897 of an imperial
tariff, granting without any reciprocal advantage a deduction of 25% upon
customs duties imposed upon British goods. The same advantage was offered
to all British colonies trading with her upon equal terms. In later years
the South African states, Australia and New Zealand also granted
preferential treatment to British goods. Meanwhile in Great Britain the
system of free imports, regarded as "free trade" (though only one-sided
free trade), had become the established policy, customs duties being only
imposed for purposes of revenue on a few selected articles, and about half
the national income was derived from customs and excise. In most of the
colonies customs form of necessity one of the important sources of revenue.
It is, however, worthy of remark that in the self-governing colonies, even
those which are avowedly protectionist, a smaller proportion of the public
revenue was derived from customs and excise than was derived from these
sources in the United Kingdom. The proportion in Australasia before
federation was about one quarter. In Canada it is more difficult to
estimate it, as customs and excise form the principal provision made for
federal finance, and note must therefore be taken of the separate sources
of revenue in the provinces. With these reservations it will still be seen
that customs, or, in other words, a tax upon the movements of trade, forms
one of the chief sources of imperial revenue.

The development of steam shipping and electricity gave to the movements of
trade a stimulus no less remarkable than that given by the introduction of
railroads and industrial machinery to production and manufactures. Whereas
at the beginning of the 19th century the journey to Australia occupied
eight months, and business communications between Sydney and London could
not receive answers within the year, at the beginning of the 20th century
the journey could be accomplished in thirty-one days, and telegraphic
despatches enabled the most important business to be transacted within
twenty-four hours. For one cargo carried in the year at the beginning of
the 19th century at least six could now be carried by the same ship, and
from the point of view of trade the difference of a venture which realizes
its profits in two months, as compared with one which occupied a whole
year, does not need to be insisted on. The increased rapidity of the voyage
and the power of daily communication by telegraph with the most distant
markets have introduced a wholly new element into the national trade of the
empire, and commercial intercourse between the southern and the northern
hemispheres has received a development from the natural alternation of the
seasons, of which until quite recent years the value was not even
conceived. Fruit, eggs, butter, meat, poultry and other perishable
commodities pass in daily increasing quantities between the northern and
the southern hemispheres with an alternate flow which contributes to raise
in no inconsiderable degree the volume of profitable trade. Thus the butter
season of Australasia is from October to March, while the butter season of
Ireland and northern Europe is from March to October. In three years after
the introduction of ice-chambers into the steamers of the great shipping
lines, Victoria and New South Wales built up a yearly butter trade of
L1,000,000 with Great Britain without seriously affecting the Irish and
Danish markets whence the summer supply is drawn. These facilities,
combined with the enormous additions made to the public stock of land and
labour, contributed to raise the volume of trade of the empire from a total
of less than L100,000,000 in the year 1800 to a total of nearly
L1,500,000,000 in 1900. The declared volume of British exports to all parts
of the world in 1800 was L38,120,120, and the value of British imports from
all parts of the world was L30,570,605; total, L68,690,725. As in those
days the colonies were not allowed to trade with any other country this
must be taken as representing imperial trade. The exact figures of the
trade of India, the colonies, and the United Kingdom for 1900 were:
imports, L809,178,209; exports, L657,899,363; total, L1,467,077,572.

A question of sovereign importance to the continued existence of the empire
is the question of defence. A country of which [Sidenote: Imperial
defence.] the main thoroughfares are the oceans of the world demands in the
first instance a strong navy. It has of late years been accepted as a
fundamental axiom of defence that the British navy should exceed in
strength any reasonable combination of foreign navies which could be
brought against it, the accepted formula being the "two-power standard,"
_i.e._ a 10% margin over the joint strength of the two next powers. The
expense of maintaining such a floating armament must be colossal, and until
within the decade 1890-1900 it was borne exclusively by the taxpayers of
the United Kingdom. As the benefits of united empire have become more
consciously appreciated in the colonies, and the value of the fleet as an
insurance for British commerce has been recognized, a desire has manifested
itself on the part of the self-governing colonies to contribute towards the
formation of a truly imperial navy. In 1895 the Australasian colonies voted
a subsidy of L126,000 per annum for the maintenance of an Australasian
squadron, and in 1897 the Cape Colony also offered a contribution of
L30,000 a year to be used at the discretion of the imperial government for
naval purposes. The Australian contribution was in 1902 increased to
L240,000, and that of the Cape to L50,000, while Natal voted L35,000 a year
and Newfoundland L3000. But apart from these comparatively slight
contributions, and the local up-keep of colonial fortifications,--and the
beginning in 1908-1909 of an Australian torpedo-boat flotilla provided by
the Commonwealth,--the whole cost of the imperial navy, on which ultimately
the security of the empire rested, remained to be [v.04 p.0614] borne by
the taxpayers in the British islands. The extent of this burden was
emphasized in 1909 by the revelations as to the increase of the German (and
the allied Austrian) fleet. At this crisis in the history of the two-power
standard a wave of enthusiasm started in the colonies, resulting in the
offer of "Dreadnoughts" from New Zealand and elsewhere; and the British
government called an Imperial Conference to consider the whole question
afresh.

Land defence, though a secondary branch of the great question of imperial
defence, has been intimately connected with the development and internal
growth of the empire. In the case of the first settlement of the American
colonies they were expected to provide for their own land defence. To some
extent in the early part of their career they carried out this expectation,
and even on occasion, as in the taking of Louisburg, which was subsequently
given back at the peace of Aix-la-Chapelle as the price of the French
evacuation of Madras, rendered public service to the empire at large. In
India the principle of local self-defence was from the beginning carried
into practice by the East India Company. But in America the claim of the
French wars proved too heavy for local resources. In 1755 Great Britain
intervened with troops sent from home under General Braddock, and up to the
outbreak of the American War the cost of the defence of the North American
colonies was borne by the imperial exchequer. To meet this expense the
imperial parliament took upon itself the right to tax the American
colonies. In 1765 a Quartering Act was passed by which 10,000 imperial
troops were quartered in the colonies. As a result of the American War
which followed and led to the loss of the colonies affected, the imperial
authorities accepted the charge of the land defences of the empire, and
with the exception of India and the Hudson Bay territories, where the
trading companies determined to pay their own expenses, the whole cost of
imperial defence was borne, like the cost of the navy, by the taxpayers of
the United Kingdom. This condition of affairs lasted till the end of the
Napoleonic Wars. During the thirty years' peace which followed there came
time for consideration. The fiscal changes which towards the middle of the
19th century gave to the self-governing colonies the command of their own
resources very naturally carried with them the consequence that a call
should be made on colonial exchequers to provide for their own governing
expenses. Of these defence is obviously one of the most essential.
Coincidently, therefore, with the movements of free trade at home, the
renunciation of what was known as the mercantile system and the
accompanying grants of constitutional freedom to the colonies, a movement
for the reorganization of imperial defence was set on foot. In the decade
which elapsed between 1846 and 1856 the movement as regards the colonies
was confined chiefly to calls made upon them to contribute to their own
defence by providing barracks, fortifications, &c., for the accommodation
of imperial troops, and in some cases paying for the use of troops not
strictly required for imperial purposes. In 1857 the Australian colonies
agreed to pay the expenses of the imperial garrison quartered in Australia.
This was a very wide step from the imperial attempt to tax the American
colonies for a similar purpose in the preceding century. Nevertheless, in
evidence given before a departmental committee in 1859, it was shown that
at that time the colonies of Great Britain were free from almost every
obligation of contributing either by personal service or money payment
towards their own defence, and that the cost of military expenditure in the
colonies in the preceding year had amounted in round figures to L4,000,000.
A committee of the House of Commons sat in 1861 to consider the question,
and in 1862 it was resolved, without a division, that "colonies exercising
the right of self-government ought to undertake the main responsibility of
providing for their own internal order and security, and ought to assist in
their own external defence." The decision was accepted as the basis of
imperial policy. The first effect was the gradual withdrawing of imperial
troops from the self-governing colonies, together with the encouragement of
the development of local military systems by the loan, when desired, of
imperial military experts. A call was also made for larger military
contributions from some of the crown colonies. The committee of 1859 had
emphasized in its report the fact that the principal dependence of the
colonies for defence is necessarily upon the British navy, and in 1865,
exactly 100 years after the Quartering Act, which had been the cause of the
troubles that led to the independence of the United States, a Colonial
Naval Defence Act was passed which gave power to the colonies to provide
ships of war, steamers, and volunteers for their own defence, and in case
of necessity to place them at the disposal of the crown. In 1868 the
Canadian Militia Act gave the fully organized nucleus of a local army to
Canada. In the same year the imperial troops were withdrawn from New
Zealand, leaving the colonial militia to deal with the native war still in
progress. In 1870 the last imperial troops were withdrawn from Australia,
and in 1873 it was officially announced that military expenditure in the
colonies was almost "wholly for imperial purposes." In 1875 an imperial
officer went to Australia to report for the Australian government upon
Australian defence. The appointment in 1879 of a royal commission to
consider the question of imperial defence, which presented its report in
1882, led to a considerable development and reorganization of the system of
imperial fortifications. Coaling stations were also selected with reference
to the trade routes. In 1885 rumours of war roused a very strong feeling in
connexion with the still unfinished and in many cases unarmed condition of
the fortifications recommended by the commission of 1879. Military activity
was stimulated throughout the empire, and the Colonial Defence Committee
was created to supply a much-felt need for organized direction and advice
to colonial administrations acting necessarily in independence of each
other. The question of colonial defence was among the most important of the
subjects discussed at the colonial conference held in London in 1887, and
it was at this conference that the Australasian colonies first agreed to
contribute to the expense of their own naval defence. From this date the
principle of local responsibility for self-defence has been fully accepted.
India has its own native army, and pays for the maintenance within its
frontiers of an imperial garrison. Early in the summer of 1899, when
hostilities in South Africa appeared to be imminent, the governments of the
principal colonies took occasion to express their approval of the South
African policy pursued by the imperial government, and offers were made by
the governments of India, the Australasian colonies, Canada, Hong-Kong, the
Federal Malay states, some of the West African and other colonies, to send
contingents for active service in the event of war. On the outbreak of
hostilities these offers, on the part of the self-governing colonies, were
accepted, and colonial contingents upwards of 30,000 strong were among the
most efficient sections of the British fighting force. The manner in which
these colonial contingents were raised, their admirable fighting qualities,
and the service rendered by them in the field, disclosed altogether new
possibilities of military organization within the empire, and in subsequent
years the subject continued to engage the attention of the statesmen of the
empire. Progress in this field lay chiefly in the increased support given
in the colonial states to the separate local movements for self-defence;
but in 1909 a scheme was arranged by Mr Haldane, by which the British War
Office should co-operate with the colonial governments in providing for the
training of officers and an interchange of views on a common military
policy.

The important questions of justice, religion and instruction will be found
dealt with in detail under the headings of separate [Sidenote: Justice,
&c.] sections of the empire. Systems of justice throughout the empire have
a close resemblance to each other, and the judicial committee of the privy
council, on which the self-governing colonies and India are represented,
constitutes a supreme court of appeal (_q.v._) for the entire empire. In
the matter of religion, while no imperial organization in the strict sense
is possible, the progress made by the Lambeth Conferences and otherwise
(see ANGLICAN COMMUNION) has done much to bring the work of the Church of
England in different parts of the world into a co-operative system.
Religion, of which the forms are infinitely varied, is however everywhere
free, [v.04 p.0615] except in cases where the exercise of religious rites
leads to practices foreign to accepted laws of humanity. It is perhaps
interesting to state that the number of persons in the empire nominally
professing the Christian religion is 58,000,000, of Mahommedans 94,000,000,
of Buddhists 12,000,000, of Hindus 208,000,000, of pagans and others
25,000,000. Systems of instruction, of which the aim is generally similar
in the white portions of the empire and is directed towards giving to every
individual the basis of a liberal education, are governed wholly by local
requirements. Native schools are established in all settled communities
under British rule.

LITERATURE.--In recent years the subject of British imperialism has
inspired a growing literature, and it is only possible here to name a
selected number of the more important works which may usefully be consulted
on different topics: Sir C.P. Lucas, _Historical Geography of the British
Colonies_ (1888, et seq.); H.E. Egerton, _Short History of British Colonial
Policy_ (1897); H.J. Mackinder, _Britain and the British Seas_ (1902); Sir
J.R. Seeley, _Expansion of England_ (1883); _Growth of British Policy_
(1895); Sir Charles Dilke, _Greater Britain_ (1869), _Problems of Greater
Britain_ (1890), _The British Empire_ (1899); G.R. Parkin, _Imperial
Federation_ (1892); Sir John Colomb, _Imperial Federation, Naval and
Military_ (1886); Sir G.S. Clarke, _Imperial Defence_ (1897); Sidney
Goldmann and others, _The Empire and the Century_ (1905); J.L. Garvin,
_Imperial Reciprocity_ (1903); J.W. Welsford, _The Strength of a Nation_
(1907); _Compatriots Club Essays_ (1906); Sir H. Jenkyns, _British Rule and
Jurisdiction beyond the Seas_ (1902); Bernard Holland, _Imperium et
libertas_ (1901); (for an anti-imperialist view) J.A. Hobson, _Imperialism_
(1902). See also the Reports of the various colonial conferences,
especially that of the Imperial Conference of 1907; and for trade
statistics, J. Holt Schooling's _British Trade Book_. For the tariff reform
movement in England see the articles FREE TRADE and PROTECTION.

(F. L. L.)

[1] The census returns for 1901 from the various parts of the empire were
condensed for the first time in 1906 into a blue-book under the title of
_Census of the British Empire, Report with Summary_.

[2] The white population of British South Africa according to the census of
1904 was 1,132,226.

[3] Or "Board," as it became in 1605.

BRITISH HONDURAS, formerly called BALIZE, or BELIZE, a British crown colony
in Central America; bounded on the N. and N.W. by the Mexican province of
Yucatan, N.E. and E. by the Bay of Honduras, an inlet of the Caribbean Sea,
and S. and W. by Guatemala. (For map, see CENTRAL AMERICA.) Pop. (1905)
40,372; area, 7562 sq. m. The frontier of British Honduras, as defined by
the conventions of 1859 and 1893 between Great Britain and Guatemala,
begins at the mouth of the river Sarstoon or Sarstun, in the Bay of
Honduras; ascends that river as far as the rapids of Gracias a Dios; and
thence, turning to the right, runs in a straight line to Garbutt's Rapids,
on the Belize river. From this point it proceeds due north to the Mexican
frontier, where it follows the river Hondo to its mouth in Chetumal Bay.

British Honduras differs little from the rest of the Yucatan peninsula. The
approach to the coast is through the islets known as cays, and through
coral reefs. It is both difficult and dangerous. For some miles inland the
ground is low and swampy, thickly covered with mangroves and tropical
jungle. Next succeeds a narrow belt of rich alluvial land, not exceeding a
mile in width, beyond which, and parallel to the rivers, are vast tracts of
sandy, arid land, called "pine ridges," from the red pines with which they
are covered. Farther inland these give place, first, to the less elevated
"broken ridges," and then to what are called "cahoon ridges," with a deep
rich soil covered with myriads of palm trees. Next come broad savannas,
studded with clumps of, trees, through which the streams descending from
the mountains wind in every direction. The mountains themselves rise in a
succession of ridges parallel to the coast. The first are the Manatee
Hills, from 800 to 1000 ft. high; and beyond these are the Cockscomb
Mountains, which are about 4000 ft. high. No less than sixteen streams,
large enough to be called rivers, descend from these mountains to the sea,
between the Hondo and Sarstoon. The uninhabited country between Garbutt's
Rapids and the coast south of Deep river was first explored in 1879, by
Henry Fowler, the colonial secretary of British Honduras; it was then found
to consist of open and undulating grasslands, affording fine pasturage in
the west and of forests full of valuable timber in the east. Its elevation
varies from 1200 to 3300 ft. Auriferous quartz and traces of other minerals
have been discovered, but not in sufficient quantity to repay the cost of
mining. The geology, fauna and flora of British Honduras do not materially
differ from those of the neighbouring regions (see CENTRAL AMERICA).

Although the colony is in the tropics, its climate is subtropical. The
highest shade temperature recorded is 98 deg. F., the lowest 50 deg.. Easterly
sea-winds prevail during the greater part of the year. The dry season lasts
from the middle of February to the middle of May; rain occurs at intervals
during the other months, and almost continuously in October, November and
December. The annual rainfall averages about 811/2 in., but rises in some
districts to 150 in. or more. Cholera, yellow fever and other tropical
diseases occur sporadically, but, on the whole, the country is not
unhealthy by comparison with the West Indies or Central American states.

_Inhabitants._--British Honduras is a little larger than Wales, and has a
population smaller than that of Chester (England). In 1904 the inhabitants
of European descent numbered 1500, the Europeans 253, and the white
Americans 118. The majority belong to the hybrid race descended from negro
slaves, aboriginal Indians and white settlers. At least six distinct racial
groups can be traced. These consist of (1) native Indians, to be found
chiefly in forest villages in the west and north of the colony away from
the sea coast; (2) descendants of the English buccaneers, mixed with
Scottish and German traders; (3) the woodcutting class known as "Belize
Creoles," of more or less pure descent from African negroes imported, as
slaves or as labourers, from the West Indies; (4) the Caribs of the
southern districts, descendants of the population deported in 1796 from St
Vincent, who were of mixed African and Carib origin; (5) a mixed population
in the south, of Spanish-Indian origin, from Guatemala and Honduras; and
(6) in the north another Spanish-Indian group which came from Yucatan in
1848. The population tends slowly to increase; about 45% of the births are
illegitimate, and males are more numerous than females. Many tracts of
fallow land and forest were once thickly populated, for British Honduras
has its ruined cities, and other traces of a lost Indian civilization, in
common with the rest of Central America.

_Natural Products._---For more than two centuries British Honduras has been
supported by its trade in timber, especially in mahogany, logwood, cedar
and other dye-woods and cabinet-woods, such as lignum-vitae, fustic,
bullet-wood, santa-maria, ironwood, rosewood, &c. The coloured inhabitants
are unsurpassed as woodmen, and averse from agriculture; so that there are
only about 90 sq. m. of tilled land. Sugar-cane, bananas, cocoanut-palms,
plantains, and various other fruits are cultivated; vanilla, sarsaparilla,
sapodilla or chewing-gum, rubber, and the cahoon or coyol palm, valuable
for its oil, grow wild in large quantities. In September 1903 all the pine
trees on crown lands were sold to Mr B. Chipley, a citizen of the United
States, at one cent (1/2 d.) per tree; the object of the sale being to secure
the opening up of undeveloped territory. Unsuccessful attempts have been
made to establish sponge fisheries on a large scale.

_Chief Towns and Communications._--Belize (pop. in 1904, 9969), the capital
and principal seaport, is described in a separate article. Other towns are
Stann Creek (2459), Corosal (1696), Orange Walk (1244), Punta Gorda (706),
the Cayo (421), Monkey River (384) and Mullins River (243). All these are
administered by local boards, whose aggregate revenue amounts to some
L7000. Telegraph and telephone lines connect the capital with Corosal in
the north, and Punta Gorda in the south; but there are no railways, and few
good roads beyond municipal limits. Thus the principal means of
communication are the steamers which ply along the coast. Mail steamers
from New Orleans, Liverpool, Colon and Puerto Cortes in Honduras, regularly
visit Belize.

_Commerce and Finance._--Between 1901 and 1905 the tonnage of vessels
accommodated at the ports of British Honduras rose from 300,000 to 496,465;
the imports rose from L252,500 to L386,123; the exports from L285,500 to
L377,623. The exports consist of the timber, fruit and other vegetable
products already mentioned, besides rum, deerskins, tortoiseshell, turtles
and sponges, while the principal imports are cotton goods, hardware, beer,
wine, spirits, groceries and specie. The sea-borne trade is mainly shared
by Great Britain and the United States. On the 14th of October 1894, the
American gold dollar was adopted as the standard coin, in place of the
Guatemalan dollar; and the silver of North, South and Central America
ceased to be legal tender. Government notes are issued to the value of 1,
2, 5, 10, 50 and 100 dollars, and there is a local currency of one cent
bronze pieces, and of 5, 10, 25 and 50 cent silver pieces. The British
sovereign and half sovereign are legal tender. In 1846 the government
savings bank was founded in Belize; branches were afterwards opened in the
principal towns; and in 1903 the British Bank of Honduras was established
at Belize. The revenue, chiefly derived from customs, rose from L60,150 in
1901 to L68,335 in 1905. The expenditure, in which the cost of police [v.04
p.0616] and education are important items, rose, during the same period,
from L51,210 to L61,800. The public debt, amounting in 1905 to L34,736,
represents the balance due on three loans which were raised in 1885, 1887,
and 1891, for public works in Belize. The loans are repayable between 1916
and 1923.

_Constitution and Administration._--From 1638 to 1786 the colonists were
completely independent, and elected their own magistrates, who performed
all judicial and executive functions. The customs and precedents thus
established were codified and published under the name of "Burnaby's Laws,"
after the visit of Admiral Sir W. Burnaby, in 1756, and were recognized as
valid by the crown. In 1786 a superintendent was appointed by the home
government, and although this office was vacant from 1790 to 1797, it was
revived until 1862. An executive council was established in 1839, and a
legislative assembly, of three nominated and eighteen elected members, in
1853. British Honduras was declared a colony in 1862, with a lieutenant
governor, subject to the governor of Jamaica, as its chief magistrate. In
1870 the legislative assembly was abolished, and a legislative council
substituted--the constitution of this body being fixed, in 1892, at three
official and five unofficial members. In 1884 the lieutenant governor was
created governor and commander-in-chief, and rendered independent of
Jamaica. He is assisted by an executive council of three official and three
unofficial members. For administrative purposes the colony is divided into
six districts--Belize, Corosal, Orange Walk, the Cayo, Stann Creek and
Toledo. The capital of the last named is Punta Gorda; the other districts
take the names of their chief towns. English common law is valid throughout
British Honduras, subject to modification by local enactments, and to the
operation of the _Consolidated Laws of British Honduras_. This collection
of ordinances, customs, &c., was officially revised and published between
1884 and 1888. Appeals may be carried before the privy council or the
supreme court of Jamaica,

_Religion and Education._--The churches represented are Roman Catholic,
Anglican, Wesleyan, Baptist and Presbyterian; but none of them receives
assistance from public funds. The bishopric of British Honduras is part of
the West Indian province of the Church of England. Almost all the schools,
secondary as well as primary, are denominational. School fees are charged,
and grants-in-aid are made to elementary schools. Most of these, since
1894, have been under the control of a board, on which the religious bodies
managing the schools are represented.

_Defence._--The Belize volunteer light infantry corps, raised in 1897,
consists of about 200 officers and men; a mounted section, numbering about
40, was created in 1904. For the whole colony, the police Dumber about 120.
There is also a volunteer fire brigade of 335 officers and men.

_History._--"His Majesty's Settlement in the Bay of Honduras," as the
territory was formerly styled in official documents, owes, its origin, in
1638, to log-wood cutters who had formerly been buccaneers. These were
afterwards joined by agents of the Chartered Company which exploited the
pearl fisheries of the Mosquito coast. Although thus industriously
occupied, the settlers so far retained their old habits as to make frequent
descents on the logwood establishments of the Spaniards, whose attempts to
expel them were generally successfully resisted. The most formidable of
these was made by the Spaniards in April 1754, when, in consequence of the
difficulty of approaching the position from the sea, an expedition,
consisting of 1500 men, was organized inland at the town of Peten. As it
neared the coast, it was met by 250 British, and completely routed. The
log-wood cutters were not again disturbed for a number of years, and their
position had become so well established that, in the treaty of 1763 with
Spain, Great Britain, while agreeing to demolish "all fortifications which
English subjects had erected in the Bay of Honduras," insisted on a clause
in favour of the cutters of logwood, that "they or their Workmen were not
to be disturbed or molested, under any pretext whatever, in their said
places of cutting and loading logwood." Strengthened by the recognition of
the crown, the British settlers made fresh encroachments on Spanish
territory. The Spaniards, asserting that they were engaged in smuggling and
other illicit practices, organized a large force, and on the 15th of
September 1779, suddenly attacked and destroyed the establishment at
Belize, taking the inhabitants prisoners to Merida in Yucatan, and
afterwards to Havana, where most of them died, The survivors were liberated
in 1782, and allowed to go to Jamaica. In 1783 they returned with many new
adventurers, and were soon engaged in cutting woods. On the 3rd of
September in that year a new treaty was signed between Great Britain and
Spain, in which it was expressly agreed that his Britannic Majesty's
subjects should have "the right of cutting, loading, and carrying away
logwood in the district lying between the river Wallis or Belize and Rio
Hondo, taking the course of these two rivers for unalterable boundaries."
These concessions "were not to be considered as derogating from the rights
of sovereignty of the king of Spain" over the district in question, where
all the English dispersed in the Spanish territories were to concentrate
themselves within eighteen months. This did not prove a satisfactory
arrangement; for in 1786 a new treaty was concluded, in which the king of
Spain made an additional grant of territory, embracing the area between the
rivers Sibun or Jabon and Belize. But these extended limits were coupled
with still more rigid restrictions. It is not to be supposed that a
population composed of so lawless a set of men was remarkably exact in its
observance of the treaty. They seem to have greatly annoyed their Spanish
neighbours, who eagerly availed themselves of the breaking out of war
between the two countries in 1796 to concert a formidable attack on Belize.
They concentrated a force of 2000 men at Campeachy, which, under the
command of General O'Neill, set sail in thirteen vessels for Belize, and
arrived on the 10th of July, 1798. The settlers, aided by the British sloop
of war "Merlin," had strongly fortified a small island in the harbour,
called St George's Cay. They maintained a determined resistance against the
Spanish forces, which were obliged to retire to Campeachy. This was the
last attempt to dislodge the British.

The defeat of the Spanish attempt of 1798 has been adduced as an act of
conquest, thereby permanently establishing British sovereignty. But those
who take this view overlook the important fact that, in 1814, by a new
treaty with Spain, the provisions of the earlier treaty were revived. They
forget also that for many years the British government never laid claim to
any rights acquired in virtue of the successful defence; for so late as
1817-1819 the acts of parliament relating to Belize always refer to it as
"a settlement, for certain purposes, under the protection of His Majesty."
After Central America had attained its independence (1819-1822) Great
Britain secured its position by incorporating the provisions of the treaty
of 1786 in a new treaty with Mexico (1826), and in the drafts of treaties
with New Granada (1825) and the United States of Central America (1831).
The territories between the Belize and Sarstoon rivers were claimed by the
British in 1836. The subsequent peaceful progress of the country under
British rule; the exception of Belize from that provision of the
Clayton-Bulwer Treaty (_q.v._) of 1850 which forbade Great Britain and the
United States to fortify or colonize any point on the Central American
mainland; and the settlement of the boundary disputes with Guatemala in
1859, finally confirmed the legal sovereignty of Great Britain over the
whole colony, including the territories claimed in 1836. The Bay Islands
were recognized as part of the republic of Honduras in 1859. Between 1849,
when the Indians beyond the Hondo rose against their Mexican rulers, and
1901, when they were finally subjugated, rebel bands occasionally attacked
the northern and north-western marches of the colony. The last serious raid
was foiled in 1872.

BIBLIOGRAPHY.--For all statistical matter relating to the colony, see the
annual reports to the British Colonial Office (London). For the progress of
exploration, see _A Narrative of a Journey across the unexplored Portion of
British Honduras_, by H. Fowler (Belize, 1879); and "An Expedition to the
Cockscomb Mountains," by J. Bellamy, in _Proceedings of the Royal
Geographical Society_, vol. xi. (London, 1889). A good general description
is given in the _Handbook of British Honduras_, by L.W. Bristowe and P.B.
Wright (Edinburgh, 1892); and the local history is recounted in the
_History of British Honduras_, by A.R. Gibbs (London, 1883); in _Notes on
Central America_, by E.J. Squier (New York, 1855); and in _Belize or
British Honduras_, a paper read before the Society of Arts by Chief Justice
Temple (London, 1847).

(K. G. J.)

BRITOMARTIS ("sweet maiden"), an old Cretan goddess, later identified with
Artemis. According to Callimachus (_Hymn to Diana_, 190), she was a nymph,
the daughter of Zeus and Carme, and a favourite companion of Artemis. Being
pursued by Minos, king of Crete, who was enamoured of her, she sprang from
a rock into the sea, but was saved from drowning by falling into some
fishermen's nets. She was afterwards made a goddess by Artemis under the
name of Dictynna ([Greek: diktuon], "a [v.04 p.0617] net"). She was the
patroness of hunters, fishermen and sailors, and also a goddess of birth
and health. The centre of her worship was Cydonia, whence it extended to
Sparta and Aegina (where she was known as Aphaea) and the islands of the
Mediterranean. By some she is considered to have been a moon-goddess, her
flight from Minos and her leap into the sea signifying the revolution and
disappearance of the moon (Pausanias ii. 30, iii. 14; Antoninus Liberalis
40).

BRITON-FERRY, a seaport in the mid-parliamentary division of
Glamorganshire, Wales, on the eastern bank of the estuary of the Neath
river in Swansea Bay, with stations on the Great Western and the Rhondda &
Swansea Bay railways, being 174 m. by rail from London. Pop. of urban
district (1901) 6973. A tram-line connects it with Neath, 2 m. distant, and
the Vale of Neath Canal (made in 1797) has its terminus here. The district
was formerly celebrated for its scenery, but this has been considerably
marred by industrial development which received its chief impetus from the
construction in 1861 of a dock of 13 acres, the property of the Great
Western Railway Company, and the opening up about the same time of the
mining districts of Glyncorrwg and Maesteg by means of the South Wales
mineral railway, which connects them with the dock and supplies it with its
chief export, coal. Steel and tinplates are manufactured here on a large
scale. There are also iron-works and a foundry.

The name La Brittone was given by the Norman settlers of the 12th century
to its ferry across the estuary of the Neath (where Archbishop Baldwin and
Giraldus crossed in 1188, and which is still used), but the Welsh name of
the town from at least the 16th century has been Llansawel.

BRITTANY, or BRITANNY (Fr. _Bretagne_), known as Armorica (_q.v._) until
the influx of Celts from Britain, an ancient province and duchy of France,
consisting of the north-west peninsula, and nearly corresponding to the
departments of Finistere, Cotes-du-Nord, Morbihan, Ille-et-Vilaine and
Lower Loire. It is popularly divided into Upper or Western, and Lower or
Eastern Brittany. Its greatest length between the English Channel and the
Atlantic Ocean is 250 kilometres (about 155 English miles), and its
superficial extent is 30,000 sq. kilometres (about 18,630 English sq. m.).
It comprises two distinct zones, a maritime zone and an inland zone. In the
centre there are two plateaus, partly covered with _landes_, unproductive
moorland: the southern plateau is continued by the Montagnes Noires, and
the northern is dominated by the Monts d'Arree. These ranges nowhere exceed
1150 ft. in height, but from their wild nature they recall the aspect of
high mountains. The waterways of Brittany are for the most part of little
value owing to their torrent-like character. The only river basin of any
importance is that of the Vilaine, which flows through Rennes. The coast is
very much indented, especially along the English Channel, and is rocky and
lined with reefs and islets. The mouths of the rivers form deep estuaries.
Thus nature itself condemned Brittany to remain for a long time shut out
from civilization. But in the 19th century the development of railways and
other means of communication drew Brittany from its isolation. In the 19th
century also agriculture developed in a remarkable manner. Many of the
_landes_ were cleared and converted into excellent pasturage, and on the
coast market-gardening made great progress. In the fertile districts
cereals too are cultivated. Industrial pursuits, except in a few seaport
towns, which are rather French than Breton, have hitherto received but
little attention.

The Bretons are by nature conservative. They cling with almost equal
attachment to their local customs and their religious superstitions. It was
not till the 17th century that paganism was even nominally abolished in
some parts, and there is probably no district in Europe where the popular
Christianity has assimilated more from earlier creeds. Witchcraft and the
influence of fairies are still often believed in. The costume of both sexes
is very peculiar both in cut and colour, but varies considerably in
different districts. Bright red, violet and blue are much used, not only by
the women, but in the coats and waistcoats of the men. The reader will find
full illustrations of the different styles in Bouet's _Breiz-izel, ou vie
des Breions de l'Armorique_ (1844). The Celtic language is still spoken in
lower Brittany. Four dialects are pretty clearly marked (see the article
CELT: _Language_, "_Breton_," p. 328). Nowhere has the taste for marvellous
legends been kept so green as in Brittany; and an entire folk-literature
still flourishes there, as is manifested by the large number of folk-tales
and folk-songs which have been collected of late years.

The whole duchy was formerly divided into nine bishoprics:--Rennes, Dol,
Nantes, St Malo and St Brieuc, in Upper Brittany and Treguier, Vannes,
Quimper and St Pol de Leon in Lower.

_History._--Of Brittany before the coming of the Romans we have no exact
knowledge. The only traces left by the primitive populations are the
megalithic monuments (dolmens, menhirs and cromlechs), which remain to this
day in great numbers (see STONE MONUMENTS). In 56 B.C. the Romans destroyed
the fleet of the Veneti, and in 52 the inhabitants of Armorica took part in
the great insurrection of the Gauls against Caesar, but were subdued
finally by him in 51. Roman civilization was then established for several
centuries in Brittany.

In the 5th century numbers of the Celtic inhabitants of Britain, flying
from the Angles and Saxons, emigrated to Armorica, and populated a great
part of the peninsula. Converted to Christianity, the new-comers founded
monasteries which helped to clear the land, the greater part of which was
barren and wild. The Celtic immigrants formed the counties of Vannes,
Cornouaille, Leon and Domnonee. A powerful aristocracy was constituted,
which owned estates and had them cultivated by serfs or villeins. The Celts
sustained a long struggle against the Frankish kings, who only nominally
occupied Brittany. Louis the Pious placed a native chief Nomenoe at the
head of Brittany. There was then a fairly long period of peace; but Nomenoe
rebelled against Charles the Bald, defeated him, and forced him, in 846, to
recognize the independence of Brittany. The end of the 9th century and the
beginning of the 10th were remarkable for the invasions of the Northmen. On
several occasions they were driven back--by Salomon (d. 874) and afterwards
by Alain, count of Vannes (d. 907)--but it was Alain Barbetorte (d. 952)
who gained the decisive victory over them.

In the second half of the 10th century and in the 11th century the counts
of Rennes were predominant in Brittany. Geoffrey, son of Conan, took the
title of duke of Brittany in 992. Conan II., Geoffrey's grandson,
threatened by the revolts of the nobles, was attacked also by the duke of
Normandy (afterwards William I. of England). Alain Fergent, one of his
successors, defeated William in 1085, and forced him to make peace. But in
the following century the Plantagenets succeeded in establishing themselves
in Brittany. Conan IV., defeated by the revolted Breton nobles, appealed to
Henry II. of England, who, in reward for his help, forced Conan to give his
daughter in marriage to his son Geoffrey. Thus Henry II. became master of
Brittany, and Geoffrey was recognized as duke of Brittany. But this new
dynasty was not destined to last long. Geoffrey's posthumous son, Arthur,
was assassinated by John of England in 1203, and Arthur's sister Alix, who
succeeded to his rights, was married in 1212 to Pierre de Dreux, who became
duke. This was the beginning of a ducal dynasty of French origin, which
lasted till the end of the 15th century.

From that moment the ducal power gained strength in Brittany and succeeded
in curbing the feudal nobles. Under French influence civilization made
notable progress. For more than a century peace reigned undisturbed in
Brittany. But in 1341 the death of John III., without direct heir, provoked
a war of succession between the houses of Blois and Montfort, which lasted
till 1364. This war of succession was, in reality, an incident of the
Hundred Years' War, the partisans of Blois and Montfort supporting
respectively the kings of France and England. In 1364 John of Montfort (d.
1399) was recognized as duke of Brittany under the style of John IV.[1],
but his reign [v.04 p.0618] was constantly troubled, notably by his
struggle with Olivier de Clisson (1336-1407). John V. (d. 1442), on the
other hand, distinguished himself by his able and pacific policy. During
his reign and the reigns of his successors, Francis I., Peter II. and
Arthur III., the ducal authority developed in a remarkable manner. The
dukes formed a standing army, and succeeded in levying hearth taxes
(_fouages_) throughout Brittany. Francis II. (1435-1488) fought against
Louis XI., notably during the War of the Public Weal, and afterwards
engaged in the struggle against Charles VIII., known as "The Mad War" (_La
Guerre Folle_). After the death of Francis II. the king of France invaded
Brittany, and forced Francis's daughter, Anne of Brittany, to marry him in
1491. Thus the reunion of Brittany and France was prepared. After the death
of Charles VIII. Anne married Louis XII. Francis I., who married Claude,
the daughter of Louis XII. and Anne, settled the definitive annexation of
the duchy by the contract of 1532, by which the maintenance of the
privileges and liberties of Brittany was guaranteed. Until the Revolution
Brittany retained its own estates. The royal power, however, was exerted to
reduce the privileges of the province as much as possible. It often met
with vigorous resistance, notably in the 18th century. The struggle was
particularly keen between 1760 and 1769, when E. A. de V. du Plessis
Richelieu, duc d'Aiguillon, had to fight simultaneously the estates and the
parliament, and had a formidable adversary in L. R. de C. de la Chalotais.
But under the monarchy the only civil war in Brittany in which blood was
shed was the revolt of the duc de Mercoeur (d. 1602) against the crown at
the time of the troubles of the League, a revolt which lasted from 1589 to
1598. Mention, however, must also be made of a serious popular revolt which
broke out in 1675--"the revolt of the stamped paper."

See Bertrand d'Argentre, _Histoire de Bretagne_ (Paris, 1586); Dom
Lobineau, _Histoire de Bretagne_ (Paris, 1702); Dom Morice, _Histoire de
Bretagne_ (1742-1756); T. A. Trollope, _A Summer in Brittany_ (1840); A. du
Chatellier, _L'Agriculture et les classes agricoles de la Bretagne_ (1862);
F. M. Luzel, _Legendes chretiennes de la Basse-Bretagne_ (Paris, 1881), and
_Veillees bretonnes_ (Paris, 1879); A. Dupuy, _La Reunion de la Bretagne a
la France_ (Paris, 1880), and _Etudes sur l'administration municipale en
Bretagne au XVIII^e siecle_ (1891); J. Loth, _L'Emigration bretonne en
Armorique du V^e au VII^e siecle_ (Rennes, 1883); H. du Cleuziou, _Bretagne
artistique et pittoresque_ (Paris, 1886); Arthur de la Borderie, _Histoire
de Bretagne_ (Rennes, 1896 seq.); J. Lemoine, _La Revolte du papier timbre
ou des bonnets rouges en Bretagne en 1675_ (1898); M. Marion, _La Bretagne
et le duc d'Aiguillon_ (Paris, 1898); B. Pocquet, _Le Duc d'Aiguillon et la
Chalotais_ (Paris, 1900-1902); Anatole le Braz, _Vieilles Histoires du pays
breton_ (1897), and _La Legende de la mort_ (Paris, 1902); Ernest Lavisse,
_Histoire de France_, vol. i. (Paris, 1903); Henri See, _Etude sur les
classes rurales en Bretagne au moyen age_ (1896), and _Les Classes rurales
en Bretagne du XVI^e siecle a la Revolution_ (1906).

[1] Certain authorities count the father of this duke, another John of
Montfort (d. 1345), among the dukes of Brittany, and according to this
enumeration the younger John becomes John V., not John IV., and his
successor John VI. and not John V.

BRITTON, JOHN (1771-1857), English antiquary, was born on the 7th of July
1771 at Kington-St-Michael, near Chippenham. His parents were in humble
circumstances, and he was left an orphan at an early age. At sixteen he
went to London and was apprenticed to a wine merchant. Prevented by
ill-health from serving his full term, he found himself adrift in the
world, without money or friends. In his fight with poverty he was put to
strange shifts, becoming cellarman at a tavern and clerk to a lawyer,
reciting and singing at a small theatre, and compiling a collection of
common songs. After some slight successes as a writer, a Salisbury
publisher commissioned him to compile an account of Wiltshire and, in
conjunction with his friend Edward Wedlake Brayley, Britton produced _The
Beauties of Wiltshire_ (1801; 2 vols., a third added in 1825), the first of
the series _The Beauties of England and Wales_, nine volumes of which
Britton and his friend wrote. Britton was the originator of a new class of
literary works. "Before his time," says Digby Wyatt, "popular topography
was unknown." In 1805 Britton published the first part of his
_Architectural Antiquities of Great Britain_ (9 vols., 1805-1814); and this
was followed by _Cathedral Antiquities of England_ (14 vols., 1814-1835).
In 1845 a Britton Club was formed, and a sum of L1000 was subscribed and
given to Britton, who was subsequently granted a civil list pension by
Disraeli, then chancellor of the exchequer. Britton was an earnest advocate
of the preservation of national monuments, proposing in 1837 the formation
of a society such as the modern Society for the Preservation of Ancient
Monuments. Britton himself supervised the reparation of Waltham Cross and
Stratford-on-Avon church. He died in London on the 1st of January 1857.

Among other works with which Britton was associated either as author or
editor are _Historical Account of Redcliffe Church, Bristol_ (1813);
_Illustrations of Fonthill Abbey_ (1823); _Architectural Antiquities of
Normandy_, with illustrations by Pugin (1825-1827); _Picturesque
Antiquities of English Cities_ (1830); and _History of the Palace and
Houses of Parliament at Westminster_ (1834-1836), the joint work of Britton
and Brayley. He contributed much to the _Gentleman's Magazine_ and other
periodicals.

His _Autobiography_ was published in 1850. A _Descriptive Account of his
Literary Works_ was published by his assistant T.E. Jones.

BRITTON, the title of the earliest summary of the law of England in the
French tongue, which purports to have been written by command of King
Edward I. The origin and authorship of the work have been much disputed. It
has been attributed to John le Breton, bishop of Hereford, on the authority
of a passage found in some MSS. of the history of Matthew of Westminster;
there are difficulties, however, involved in this theory, inasmuch as the
bishop of Hereford died in 1275, whereas allusions are made in _Britton_ to
several statutes passed after that time, and more particularly to the
well-known statute _Quia emptores terrarum_, which was passed in 1290. It
was the opinion of Selden that the book derived its title from Henry de
Bracton, the last of the chief justiciaries, whose name is sometimes
spelled in the fine Rolls "Bratton" and "Bretton", and that it was a royal
abridgment of Bracton's great work on the customs and laws of England, with
the addition of certain subsequent statutes. The arrangement, however, of
the two works is different, and but a small proportion of Bracton's work is
incorporated in _Britton_. The work is entitled in an early MS. of the 14th
century, which was once in the possession of Selden, and is now in the
Cambridge university library, _Summa de legibus Anglie que vocatur
Bretone_; and it is described as "a book called Bretoun" in the will of
Andrew Horn, the learned chamberlain of the city of London, who bequeathed
it to the chamber of the Guildhall in 1329, together with another book
called _Mirroir des Justices_.

_Britton_ was first printed in London by Robert Redman, without a date,
probably about the year 1530. Another edition of it was printed in 1640,
corrected by E. Wingate. A third edition of it, with an English
translation, was published at the University Press, Oxford, 1865, by F. M.
Nichol. An English translation of the work without the Latin text had been
previously published by R. Kelham in 1762.

BRITZSKA, or BRITSKA (from the Polish _bryczka_; a diminutive of _bryka_, a
goods-wagon), a form of carriage, copied in England from Austria early in
the 19th century; as used in Poland and Russia it had four wheels, with a
long wicker-work body constructed for reclining and a calash (hooded) top.

BRIVE, or BRIVES-LA-GAILLARDE, a town of south-central France, capital of
an arrondissement in the department of Correze, 62 m. S.S.E. of Limoges on
the main line of the Orleans railway from Paris to Montauban. Pop. (1906)
town 14,954; commune 20,636. It lies on the left bank of the Correze in an
ample and fertile plain, which is the meeting-place of important roads and
railways. The _enceinte_ which formerly surrounded the town has been
replaced by shady boulevards, and a few wide thoroughfares have been made,
but many narrow winding streets and ancient houses still remain. Outside
the boulevards lie the modern quarters, also the fine promenade planted
with plane trees which stretches to the Correze and contains the chief
restaurants and the theatre. Here also is the statue of Marshal Guillaume
Marie Anne Brune, who was a native of Brive. A fine bridge leads over the
river to suburbs on its right bank. The public buildings are of little
interest apart from the church of St Martin, which stands in the heart of
the old town. It is a building of the 12th century in the Romanesque style
of Limousin, with three narrow naves of almost equal height. The
ecclesiastical seminary occupies a graceful mansion of the 16th century,
with a facade, a staircase and fireplaces of fine Renaissance workmanship.
Brive is the seat of a sub-prefect [v.04 p.0619] and has a tribunal of
first instance, a tribunal of commerce, a communal college and a school of
industry. Its position makes it a market of importance, and it has a very
large trade in the early vegetables and fruit of the valley of the Correze,
and in grain, live-stock and truffles. Table-delicacies, paper, wooden
shoes, hats, wax and earthenware are manufactured, and there are slate and
millstone workings and dye-works.

In the vicinity are numerous rock caves, many of them having been used as
dwellings in prehistoric times. The best known are those of Lamouroux,
excavated in stages in a vertical wall of rock, and four grotto-chapels
resorted to by pilgrims in memory of St Anthony of Padua, who founded a
Franciscan monastery at Brive in 1226. Under the Romans Brive was known as
_Briva Curretiae_ (bridge of the Correze). In the middle ages it was the
capital of lower Limousin.

BRIXEN (Ital. _Bressanone_), a small city in the Austrian province of
Tirol, and the chief town of the administrative district of Brixen. Pop.
(1900) 5767. It is situated in the valley of the Eisack, at the confluence
of that stream with the Rienz, and is a station on the Brenner railway,
being 34 m. south-east of that pass, and 24 m. north-east of Botzen. The
aspect of the city is very ecclesiastical; it is still the see of a bishop,
and contains an 18th-century cathedral church, an episcopal palace and
seminary, twelve churches and five monasteries. The see was founded at the
end of the 8th century (possibly of the 6th century) at Saeben on the rocky
heights above the town of Klausen (some way to the south of Brixen), but in
992 was transferred to Brixen, which, perhaps a Roman station, became later
a royal estate, under the name of _Prichsna_, and in 901 was given by Louis
the Child to the bishop. In 1027 the bishop received from the emperor
Conrad II. very extensive temporal powers, which he only lost to Austria in
1803. The town was surrounded in 1030 by walls. In 1525 it was the scene of
the first outbreak of the great peasants' revolt. About 51/2 m. north of
Brixen is the great fortress of Franzensfeste, built 1833-1838, to guard
the route over the Brenner and the way to the east up the Pusterthal.

(W. A. B. C.)

BRIXHAM, a seaport and market town in the Torquay parliamentary division of
Devonshire, England, 33 m. S. of Exeter, on a branch of the Great Western
railway. Pop. of urban district (1901) 8092. The town is irregularly built
on the cliffs to the south of Torbay, and its harbour is sheltered by a
breakwater. Early in the 19th century it was an important military post,
with fortified barracks on Berry Head. It is the headquarters of the
Devonshire sea-fisheries, having also a large coasting trade. Shipbuilding
and the manufacture of ropes, paint and sails are industries. There is
excellent bathing, and Brixham is in favour as a seaside resort. St Mary's,
the ancient parish church, has an elaborate 14th-century font and some
monuments of interest. At the British Seamen's Orphans' home boys are fed,
clothed and trained as apprentices for the merchant service. A statue
commemorates the landing, in 1688, of William of Orange.

_Brixham Cave_, called also Windmill Hill Cavern, is a well-known
ossiferous cave situated near Brixham, on the brow of a hill composed of
Devonian limestone. It was discovered by chance in 1858, having been until
then hermetically sealed by a mass of limestone breccia. Dr Hugh Falconer
with the assistance of a committee of geologists excavated it. The
succession of beds in descending order is as follows:--(1) Shingle
consisting of pebbles of limestone, slate and other local rocks, with
fragments of stalagmite and containing a few bones and worked flints. The
thickness varies from five to sixteen feet. (2) Red cave earth with angular
fragments of limestone, bones and worked flints, and having a thickness of
3 to 4 ft. (3) Remnants (_in situ_) of an old stalagmitic floor about nine
inches thick. (4) Black peaty soil varying in thickness, the maximum being
about a foot. (5) Angular debris fallen from above varying in thickness
from one to ten feet. (6) Stalagmite with a few bones and antlers of
reindeer, the thickness varying from one to fifteen inches. Of particular
interest is the presence of patches or ledges of an old stalagmitic floor,
three to four feet above the present floor. On the under-side, there are
found attached fragments of limestone and quartz, showing that the shingle
bed once extended up to it, and that it then formed the original floor. The
shingle therefore stood some feet higher than it does now, and it is
supposed that a shock or jar, such as that of an earthquake, broke up the
stalagmite, and the pebbles and sand composing the shingle sunk deeper into
the fissures in the limestone. This addition to the size of the cave was
partially filled up by the cave earth. At a later period the fall of
angular fragments at the entrance finally closed the cave, and it ceased to
be accessible except to a few burrowing animals, whose remains are found
above the second and newer stalagmite floor.

The fauna of Brixham cavern closely resembles that of Kent's Hole. The
bones of the bear, horse, rhinoceros, lion, elephant, hyena and of many
birds and small rodents were unearthed. Altogether 1621 bones, nearly all
broken and gnawed, were found; of these 691 belonged to birds and small
rodents of more recent times. The implements are of a roughly-chipped type
resembling those of the Mousterian period. From these structural and
palaeontological evidences, geologists suppose that the formation of the
cave was carried on simultaneously with the excavation of the valley; that
the small streams, flowing down the upper ramifications of the valley,
entered the western opening of the cave, and traversing the fissures in the
limestone, escaped by the lower openings in the chief valley; and that the
rounded pebbles found in the shingle bed were carried in by these streams.
It would be only at times of drought that the cave was frequented by
animals, a theory which explains the small quantity of animal remains in
the shingle. The implements of man are relatively more common, seventeen
chipped flints having been found. As the excavation of the valley
proceeded, the level of the stream was lowered and its course diverted; the
cave consequently became drier and was far more frequently inhabited by
predatory animals. It was now essentially an animal den, the occasional
visits of man being indicated by the rare occurrence of flint-implements.
Finally, the cave became a resort of bears; the remains of 334 specimens,
in all stages of growth, including even sucking cubs, being discovered.

See Sir Joseph Prestwich, _Geology_ (1888); Sir John Evans, _Ancient Stone
Implements of Great Britain_, p. 512; Report on the Cave, _Phil. Trans._
(Royal Society, 1873).

BRIXTON, a district in the south of London, England, included in the
metropolitan borough of Lambeth (_q.v._).

BRIZEUX, JULIEN AUGUSTE PELAGE (1803-1858), French poet, was born at
Lorient (Morbihan) on the 12th of September 1803. He belonged to a family
of Irish origin, long settled in Brittany, and was educated for the law,
but in 1827 he produced at the Theatre Francais a one-act verse comedy,
_Racine_, in collaboration with Philippe Busoni. A journey to Italy in
company with Auguste Barbier made a great impression on him, and a second
visit (1834) resulted in 1841 in the publication of a complete translation
of the _Divina Commedia_ in _terza rima_. With _Primel el Nola_ (1852) he
included poems written under Italian influence, entitled _Les Ternaires_
(1841), but in the rustic idyl of _Marie_ (1836) turned to Breton country
life; in _Les Bretons_ (1845) he found his inspiration in the folklore and
legends of his native province, and in _Telen-Aroor_ (1844) he used the
Breton dialect. His _Histoires poetiques_ (1855) was crowned by the French
Academy. His work is small in bulk, but is characterized by simplicity and
sincerity. Brizeux was an ardent student of the philology and archaeology
of Brittany, and had collected materials for a dictionary of Breton
place-names He died at Montpellier on the 3rd of May 1858.

His _Oeuvres completes_ (2 vols., 1860) were edited with a notice of the
author by Saint-Rene Taillandier. Another edition appeared in 1880-1884 (4
vols.). A long list of articles on his work may be consulted in an
exhaustive monograph, _Brizeux; sa vie et ses oeuvres_ (1898), by the abbe
C. Lecigne.

BRIZO, an ancient goddess worshipped in Delos. She delivered oracles in
dreams to those who consulted her about fishery and seafaring. The women of
Delos offered her presents consisting of little boats filled with all kinds
of eatables (with the exception of [v.04 p.0620] fish) in order to obtain
her protection for those engaged on the sea (Athenaeus viii. p. 335).

BROACH, or BHARUCH, an ancient city and modern district of British India,
in the northern division of Bombay. The city is on the right bank of the
Nerbudda, about 30 m. from the sea, and 203 m. N. of Bombay. The area,
including suburbs, occupies 2-1/6 sq. m. Pop. (1901) 42,896. The sea-borne
trade is confined to a few coasting vessels. Handloom-weaving is almost
extinct, but several cotton mills have been opened. There are also large
flour-mills. Broach is the Barakacheva of the Chinese traveller Hsuean Tsang
and the Barygaza of Ptolemy and Arrian. Upon the conquest of Gujarat by the
Mahommedans, and the formation of the state of that name, Broach formed
part of the new kingdom. On its overthrow by Akbar in 1572, it was annexed
to the Mogul empire and governed by a Nawab. The Mahrattas became its
masters in 1685, from which period it was held in subordination to the
peshwa until 1772, when it was captured by a force under General Wedderburn
(brother to Lord Loughborough), who was killed in the assault. In 1783 it
was ceded by the British to Sindhia in acknowledgment of certain services.
It was stormed in 1803 by a detachment commanded by Colonel Woodington, and
was finally ceded to the East India Company by Sindhia under the treaty of
Sarji Anjangaom.

The DISTRICT OF BROACH contains an area of 1467 sq. m. Consisting chiefly
of the alluvial plain at the mouth of the river Nerbudda, the land is rich
and highly cultivated, and though it is without forests it is not wanting
in trees. The district is well supplied with rivers, having in addition to
the Nerbudda the Mahi in the north and the Kim in the south. The population
comprises several distinct races or castes, who, while speaking a common
dialect, Gujarati, inhabit separate villages. Thus there are Koli, Kunbi or
Voro (Bora) villages, and others whose lands are almost entirely held and
cultivated by high castes, such as Rajputs, Brahmans or Parsees. In 1901
the population was 291,763, showing a decrease of 15%, compared with an
increase of 5% in the preceding decade. The principal crops are cotton,
millet, wheat and pulse. Dealing in cotton is the chief industry, the
dealers being organized in a gild. Besides the cotton mills in Broach city
there are several factories for ginning and pressing cotton, some of them
on a very large scale. The district is traversed throughout its length by
the Bombay & Baroda railway, which crosses the Nerbudda opposite Broach
city on an iron-girder bridge of 67 spans. The district suffered severely
from the famine of 1899-1900.

BROACH (Fr. _broche_, a pointed instrument, Med. Lat. _brocca_, cf. the
Latin adjective _brochus_ or _broccus_, projecting, used of teeth), a word,
of which the doublet "brooch" (_q.v._) has a special meaning, for many
forms of pointed instruments, such as a bodkin, a wooden needle used in
tapestry-making, a spit for roasting meat, and a tool, also called a
"rimer," used with a wrench for enlarging or smoothing holes (see TOOL).
From the use of a similar instrument to tap casks, comes "to broach" or
"tap" a cask. A particular use in architecture is that of "broach-spire," a
term employed to designate a particular form of spire, found only in
England, which takes its name from the stone roof of the lower portion. The
stone spire being octagonal and the tower square on plan, there remained
four angles to be covered over. This was done with a stone roof of slight
pitch, compared with that of the spire, and it is the intersection of this
roof with the octagonal faces of the spire which forms the broach.

BROADSIDE, sometimes termed BROADSHEET, a single sheet of paper containing
printed matter on one side only. The broadside seems to have been employed
from the very beginning of printing for royal proclamations, papal
indulgences and similar documents. England appears to have been its chief
home, where it was used chiefly for ballads, particularly in the 16th
century, but also as a means of political agitation and for personal
statements of all kinds, especially for the dissemination of the dying
speeches and confessions of criminals. It is prominent in the history of
literature because, particularly during the later part of the 17th century,
several important poems, by Dryden, Butler and others, originally appeared
printed on the "broad side" of a sheet. The term is also used of the
simultaneous discharge of the guns on one side of a ship of war.

BROADSTAIRS, a watering-place, in the Isle of Thanet parliamentary division
of Kent, England, 3 m. S.E. of Margate, on the South-Eastern & Chatham
railway. Pop. of urban district, Broadstairs and St Peter's (1901) 6466.
From 1837 to 1851 Broadstairs was a favourite summer resort of Charles
Dickens, who, in a sketch called "Our English Watering-Place," described it
as a place "left high and dry by the tide of years." This seaside village,
with its "semicircular sweep of houses," grew into a considerable town
owing to the influx of summer visitors, for whose entertainment there are,
besides the "Albion" mentioned by Dickens, numerous hotels and
boarding-houses, libraries, a bathing establishment and a fine promenade.
Dickens' residence was called Fort House, but it became known as Bleak
House, through association with his novel of that name, though this was
written after his last visit to Broadstairs in 1851. Broadstairs has a
small pier for fishing-boats, first built in the reign of Henry VIII. An
archway leading down to the shore bears an inscription showing that it was
erected by George Culmer in 1540, and not far off is the site of a chapel
of the Virgin, to which ships were accustomed to lower their top-sails as
they passed. St Peter's parish, lying on the landward side of Broadstairs,
and included in the urban district, has a church dating from the 12th to
the end of the 16th century. Kingsgate, on the North Foreland, north of
Broadstairs on the coast, changed its name from St Bartholomew's Gate in
honour of Charles II.'s landing here with the duke of York in 1683 on his
way from London to Dover. Stonehouse, close by, now a preparatory school
for boys, was the residence of Archbishop Tait, whose wife established the
orphanage here.

BROCA, PAUL (1824-1880), French surgeon and anthropologist, was born at
Sainte-Foy la Grande, Gironde, on the 28th of June 1824. He early developed
a taste for higher mathematics, but circumstances decided him in adopting
medicine as his profession. Beginning his studies at Paris in 1841, he made
rapid progress, becoming house-surgeon in 1844, assistant anatomical
lecturer in 1846, and three years later professor of surgical anatomy. He
had already gained a reputation by his pathological researches. In 1853 he
was named fellow of the Faculty of Medicine, and in 1867 became member of
the Academy of Medicine and professor of surgical pathology to the Faculty.
During the years occupied in winning his way to the head of his profession
he had published treatises of much value on cancer, aneurism and other
subjects. It was in 1861 that he announced his discovery of the seat of
articulate speech in the left side of the frontal region of the brain,
since known as the convolution of Broca. But famous as he was as a surgeon,
his name is associated most closely with the modern school of anthropology.
Establishing the Anthropological Society of Paris in 1859, of which he was
secretary till his death, he was practically the inventor of the modern
science of craniology. He rendered distinguished service in the
Franco-German War, and during the Commune by his organization and
administration of the public hospitals. He founded _La Revue
d'Anthropologie_ in 1872, and it was in its pages that the larger portion
of his writings appeared. In his last years Broca turned from his labours
in the region of craniology to the exclusive study of the brain, in which
his greatest triumphs were achieved (see APHASIA). He was decorated with
the Legion of Honour in 1868, and was honorary fellow of the leading
anatomical, biological and anthropological societies of the world. He died
on the 9th of July 1880. A statue of him by Choppin was erected in 1887 in
front of the Faculty of Medicine in Paris.

BROCADE, the name usually given to a class of richly decorative
shuttle-woven fabrics, often made in coloured silks and with or without
gold and silver threads. Ornamental features in brocade are emphasized and
wrought as additions to the main fabric, sometimes stiffening it, though
more frequently producing on its face the effect of low relief. These
additions present a distinctive appearance on the back of the stuff where
[v.04 p.0621] the weft or floating threads of the brocaded or broached
parts hang in loose groups or are clipped away.

[Illustration: FIG. 1.--Brocade woven in red and olive green silks and gold
thread on a cream-coloured ground. Along the top is the Kufic inscription
"Arrahm[=a]n" (The Merciful) several times repeated in olive green on a
gold-thread ground. Pairs of seated animals, _addorsed regardant_ and geese
_vis-a-vis_ are worked within the lozenge-shaped compartments of the
trellis framework which regulates the pattern. Both animals and birds are
separated by conventional trees, and the latter are enclosed in
inscriptions of Kufic characters. _Siculo-Saracenic_; 11th or 12th century.
51/2 in. sq.]

[Illustration: FIG. 2.--Part of a Siculo-Saracenic brocade woven in the
12th century. l61/2 in. wide.]

[Illustration: FIG. 3.--Piece of stuff woven or brocaded with red silk and
gold thread, with an ogival framing enclosing alternately, pairs of
parrots, _addorsed regardant_, and a well-known Persian (or Sassanian)
leaf-shaped fruit device. Probably of Rhenish-Byzantine manufacture in the
12th or 13th century. 9 in. long.]

The Latin word _broccus_ is related equally to the Italian _brocato_, the
Spanish _brocar_ and the French _brocarts_ and _brocher_, and implies a
form of stitching or broaching, so that textile fabrics woven with an
appearance of stitching or broaching have consequently come to be termed
"brocades." A Spanish document dated 1375 distinguishes between _los draps
d'or e d'argent o de seda_ and _brocats d'or e d'argent_, a difference
which is readily perceived, upon comparing for instance cloths of gold,
Indian kincobs, with Lyons silks that are _broches_ with threads of gold,
silk or other material. Notwithstanding this, many Indian kincobs and
dainty gold and coloured silk-weavings of Persian workmanship, both without
floating threads, are often called brocades, although in neither is the
ornamentation really _broche_ or brocaded. Contemporary in use with the
Spanish _brocats_ is the word _brocado_. In addition to _brocarts_ the
French now use the word _brocher_ in connexion with certain silk stuffs
which however are not brocades in the same sense as the _brocarts_. A
wardrobe account of King Edward IV. (1480) has an entry of "satyn broched
with gold"--a description that fairly applies to such an enriched satin as
that for instance shown in fig. 4. But some three centuries earlier than
the date of that specimen, decorative stuffs were partly _broches_ with
gold threads by oriental weavers, especially those of Persia, Syria and
parts of southern Europe and northern Africa under the domination of the
Saracens, to whom the earlier germs, so to speak, of brocading may be
traced. Of such is the 11th or 12th century Siculo-Saracenic specimen in
fig. 1, in which the heads only of the pairs of animals and birds are
broched with gold thread. Another sort of brocaded material is indicated in
fig. 2, taken from a part of a sumptuous Siculo-Saracenic weaving produced
in coloured silks and gold threads at the famous Hotel des Tiraz in Palermo
for an official robe of Henry IV. (1165-1197) as emperor of the Holy Roman
Empire, and still preserved in the cathedral of Regensburg. Fig. 3 is a
further variety of textile that would be classed as _brocat_. This is of
the 12th or 13th century manufacture, possibly by German or
Rhenish-Byzantine weavers, or even by Spanish weavers, many of whom at
Almeria, Malaga, Grenada and Seville rivalled those at Palermo. In the 14th
century the making of satins heavily brocaded with gold threads was
associated conspicuously with such Italian towns as Lucca, Genoa, Venice
and Florence. Fig. 4 is from a piece of 14th-century dark-blue satin
broached in relief with gold thread in a design the like of which appears
in the background of Orcagna's "Coronation of the Virgin," now in the
National Gallery, London. During the 17th century Genoa, Florence and Lyons
vied with each other in making brocades in which the enrichments were as
frequently of coloured silks as of gold intermixed with silken threads.
Fig. 5 is from a piece of crimson silk damask flatly brocaded with flowers,
scroll forms, fruit and birds in gold. This is probably of Florentine
workmanship. Rather more closely allied to modern brocades is the Lyons
specimen given in fig. 6, in which the brocading is done not only with
silver but also with coloured silks. Early in the 18th century Spitalfields
was busy as a competitor with Lyons in manufacturing many sorts of
brocades, specified in a collection of designs preserved in the national
art library of the Victoria and [v.04 p.0622] Albert Museum, under such
trade titles as "brocade lutstring, brocade tabby, brocade tissue, brocade
damask, brocade satin, Venetian brocade, and India figured brocade."
Brocading in China seems to be of considerable antiquity, and Dr Bushell in
his valuable handbook on Chinese art cites a notice of five rolls of
brocade with dragons woven upon a crimson ground, presented by the emperor
Ming Ti of the Wei dynasty, in the year A.D. 238, to the reigning empress
of Japan; and varieties of brocade patterns are recorded as being in use
during the Sung dynasty (960-1279). The first edition of an illustrated
work upon tillage and weaving was published in China in 1210, and contains
an engraving of a loom constructed to weave flowered-silk brocades such as
are woven at the present time at Suchow and Hangchow and elsewhere. On the
other hand, although they are described usually as brocades, certain
specimens of imperial Chinese robes sumptuous in ornament, sheen of
coloured silks and the glisten of golden threads, are woven in the
tapestry-weaving manner and without any floating threads. It seems
reasonable to infer that Persians and Syrians derived the art of weaving
brocades from the Chinese, and as has been indicated, passed it on to
Saracens as well as Europeans.

(A. S. C.)

[Illustration: FIG. 4.--Piece of blue satin brocaded with gold threads. The
unit of the pattern is a symmetrical arrangement of fantastic birds, vine
leaves and curving stems. The bird shapes are remotely related to, if not
derived from, the Chinese mystical "fonghoang." North Italian weaving of
the 14th century; about 11 in. square.]

Illustration: FIG. 5.--Piece of crimson silk damask brocaded in gold thread
with symmetrically arranged flowers, scrolls, birds, &c. Italian
(?Florentine). Late 17th century; about 2 ft. 6 in. long.]

[Illustration: FIG. 6.--Piece of pink silk brocaded in silver and white and
coloured silks. French middle 18th century; about 15 in. square.]

BROCCHI, GIOVANNI BATTISTA (1772-1826), Italian mineralogist and geologist,
was born at Bassano on the 18th of February 1772. He studied at the
university of Pisa, where his attention was turned to mineralogy and
botany. In 1802 he was appointed professor of botany in the new lyceum of
Brescia; but he more especially devoted himself to geological researches in
the adjacent districts. The fruits of these labours appeared in different
publications, particularly in his _Trattato mineralogico e chemico sulle
miniere di ferro del dipartimento del Mella_ (1808)--treatise on the iron
mines of Mella. These researches procured him the office of inspector of
mines in the recently established kingdom of Italy, and enabled him to
extend his investigations over great part of the country. In 1811 he
produced a valuable essay entitled _Memoria mineralogica sulla Valle di
Fassa in Tirolo_; but his most important work is the _Conchiologia fossile
subapennina con osservazioni geologiche sugli Apennini, e sul suolo
adiacente_ (2 vols., 4to, Milan, 1814), containing accurate details of the
structure of the Apennine range, and an account of the fossils of the
Italian Tertiary strata compared with existing species. These subjects were
further illustrated by his geognostic map, and his _Catalogo ragionato di
una raccolta di rocce, disposto con ordine geografico, per servire alla
geognosia dell' Italia_ (Milan, 1817). His work _Dello stato fisico del
suolo di Roma_ (1820), with its accompanying map, is likewise noteworthy.
In it he corrected the erroneous views of Breislak, who conceived that Rome
occupies the site of a volcano, to which he ascribed the volcanic materials
that cover the seven hills. Brocchi pointed out that these materials were
derived either from Mont Albano, [v.04 p.0623] an extinct volcano, 12 m.
from the city, or from Mont Cimini, still farther to the north. Several
papers by him, on mineralogical subjects, appeared in the _Biblioteca
Italiana_ from 1816 to 1823. In the latter year Brocchi sailed for Egypt,
in order to explore the geology of that country and report on its mineral
resources. Every facility was granted by Mehemet Ali, who in 1823 appointed
him one of a commission to examine the district of Sennaar; but Brocchi,
unfortunately for science, fell a victim to the climate, and died at
Khartum on the 25th of September 1826.

BROCHANT DE VILLIERS, ANDRE JEAN FRANCOIS MARIE (1772-1840), French
mineralogist and geologist, was born at Villiers, near Nantes, on the 6th
of August 1772. After studying at the Ecole Polytechnique, he was in 1794
the first pupil admitted to the Ecole des Mines. In 1804 he was appointed
professor of geology and mineralogy in the Ecole des Mines, which had been
temporarily transferred to Pezay in Savoy, and he returned with the school
to Paris in 1815. Later on he became inspector general of mines and a
member of the Academy of Sciences. He investigated the transition strata of
the Tarantaise, wrote on the position of the granite rocks of Mont Blanc,
and on the lead minerals of Derbyshire and Cumberland. He was charged with
the superintendence of the construction of the geological map of France,
undertaken by his pupils Dufrenoy and Elie de Beaumont. He died in Paris on
the 16th of May 1840. His publications include _Traite elementaire de
mineralogie_ (2 vols., 1801-1802; 2nd ed., 1808), and _Traite abrege de
cristallographie_ (Paris, 1818).

[Illustration]

BROCHANTITE, a mineral species consisting of a basic copper sulphate
Cu_4(OH)_6SO_4, crystallizing in the orthorhombic system. The crystals are
usually small and are prismatic or acicular in habit; they have a perfect
cleavage parallel to the face lettered a in the adjoining figure. They are
transparent to translucent, with a vitreous lustre, and are of an
emerald-green to blackish-green colour. Specific gravity 3.907; hardness
31/2-4. The mineral was first found associated with malachite and native
copper in the copper mines of the Urals, and was named by A. Levy in 1824
after A.J.M. Brochant de Villiers. Several varieties, differing somewhat in
crystalline form, have been distinguished, some of them having originally
been described as distinct species, but afterwards proved to be essentially
identical with brochantite; these are koenigine from the Urals,
brongniartine from Mexico, krisuvigite from Iceland, and warringtonite from
Cornwall. Of other localities, mention may be made of Roughten Gill,
Caldbeck Fells, Cumberland, where small brilliant crystals are associated
with malachite and chrysocolla in a quartzose rock; Rezbanya in the Bihar
Mountains, Hungary; Atacama in Chile, with atacamite, which closely
resembles brochantite in general appearance; the Tintic district in Utah. A
microscopical examination of the green copper ores of secondary origin in
the Clifton and Morenci district of Arizona proves brochantite to be of
extremely common occurrence mostly intergrown with malachite which
effectually masks its presence: it is not unlikely that the malachite of
other localities will on examination be found to be intergrown with
brochantite.

Mention may be here made of another orthorhombic basic copper sulphate not
unlike brochantite in general characters, but differing from it in
containing water of crystallization and in its fine blue colour; this is
the Cornish mineral langite, which has the composition
CuSO_4.3Cu(OH)_2+H_2O.

(L. J. S.)

BROCK, SIR ISAAC (1769-1812), British soldier and administrator, was born
at St Peter Port, Guernsey, on the 6th of October 1769. Joining the army at
the age of fifteen as an ensign of the 8th regiment, he became a
lieutenant-colonel in 1797, after less than thirteen years' service. He
commanded the 49th regiment in the expedition to North Holland in 1799, was
wounded at the battle of Egmont-op-Zee, and subsequently served on board
the British fleet at the battle of Copenhagen. From 1802 to 1805 he was
with his regiment in Canada, returning thither in 1806 in view of the
imminence of war between Great Britain and the United States. From
September 1806 till August 1810 he was in charge of the garrison at Quebec;
in the latter year he assumed the command of the troops in Upper Canada,
and soon afterwards took over the civil administration of that province as
provisional lieutenant-governor. On the outbreak of the war of 1812 Brock
had to defend Upper Canada against invasion by the United States. In the
face of many difficulties and not a little disaffection, he organized the
militia of the province, drove back the invaders, and on the 16th of August
1812, with about 730 men and 600 Indians commanded by their chief Tecumseh,
compelled the American force of 2500 men under General William Hull
(1753-1825) to surrender at Detroit, an achievement which gained him a
knighthood of the Bath and the popular title of "the hero of Upper Canada"
From Detroit he hurried to the Niagara frontier, but on the 13th of October
in the same year was killed at the battle of Queenston Heights. The House
of Commons voted a public monument to his memory, which was erected in
Saint Paul's cathedral, London. On the 13th of October 1824, the twelfth
anniversary of his death, his remains were removed from the bastions of
Fort George, where they had been originally interred, and placed beneath a
monument on Queenston Heights, erected by the provincial legislature. This
was blown up by a fanatic in 1840, but as the result of a mass-meeting of
over 8000 citizens held on the spot, a new and more stately monument was
erected.

His _Life and Correspondence_ by his nephew, Ferdinand Brock Tupper (2nd
edition, London, 1847), still remains the best; later lives are by D.R.
Read (Toronto, 1894), and by Lady Edgar (Toronto and London,1905).

(W. L. G.)

BROCK, THOMAS (1847- ), English sculptor, was the chief pupil of Foley, and
later became influenced by the new romantic movement. His group "The Moment
of Peril" was followed by "The Genius of Poetry," "Eve," and other ideal
works that mark his development. His busts, such as those of Lord Leighton
and Queen Victoria; his statues, such as "Sir Richard Owen" and "Dr
Philpott, bishop of Worcester"; his sepulchral monuments, such as that to
Lord Leighton in St Paul's cathedral, a work of singular significance,
refinement and beauty; and his memorial statues of Queen Victoria, at Hove
and elsewhere, are examples of his power as a portraitist, sympathetic in
feeling, sound and restrained in execution, and dignified and decorative in
arrangement. The colossal equestrian statue of "Edward the Black Prince"
was set up in the City Square in Leeds in 1901, the year in which the
sculptor was awarded the commission to execute the vast Imperial Memorial
to Queen Victoria in front of Buckingham Palace. Brock was elected an
associate of the Royal Academy in 1883 and full member in 1891.

BROCKEN, a mountain of Germany, in Prussian Saxony, the highest point (3733
ft.) of the Harz. It is a huge, bare, granite-strewn, dome-shaped mass and,
owing to its being the greatest elevation in north Germany, commands
magnificent views in all directions. From it Magdeburg and the Elbe, the
towers of Leipzig and the Thuringian forest are distinctly visible in clear
weather. Access to the summit is attained by a mountain railway (12 m.)
from Dreiannen-Hohne, a station on the normal gauge line
Wernigerode-Nordhausen, and by two carriage roads from the Bodetal and
Ilsenburg respectively. In the folklore of north Germany the Brocken holds
an important place, and to it cling many legends. Long after Christianity
had penetrated to these regions, the Brocken remained a place of heathen
worship. Annually, on Walpurgis night (1st of May), curious rites were here
enacted, which, condemned by the priests of the Christian church, led to
the belief that the devil and witches here held their orgies. Even to this
day, this superstition possesses the minds of many country people around,
who believe the mountain to be haunted on this night. In literature [v.04
p.0624] it is represented by the famous "Brocken scene" in Goethe's
_Faust_.

See Jacobs, _Der Brocken in Geschichte und Sage_ (Halle, 1878); and Proehle,
_Brockensagen_ (Magdeburg, 1888).

BROCKEN, SPECTRE OF THE (so named from having been first observed in 1780
on the Brocken), an enormously magnified shadow of an observer cast upon a
bank of cloud when the sun is low in high mountain regions, reproducing
every motion of the observer in the form of a gigantic but misty image of
himself.

BROCKES, BARTHOLD HEINRICH (1680-1747), German poet, was born at Hamburg on
the 22nd of September 1680. He studied jurisprudence at Halle, and after
extensive travels in Italy, France and Holland, settled in his native town
in 1704. In 1720 he was appointed a member of the Hamburg senate, and
entrusted with several important offices. Six years (from 1735 to 1741) he
spent as _Amtmann_ (magistrate) at Ritzebtuetel. He died in Hamburg on the
16th of January 1747. Brockes' poetic works were published in a series of
nine volumes under the fantastic title _Irdisches Vergnuegen in Gott_
(1721-1748); he also translated Marini's _La Strage degli innocenti_
(1715), Pope's _Essay on Man_ (1740) and Thomson's _Seasons_ (1745). His
poetry has small intrinsic value, but it is symptomatic of the change which
came over German literature at the beginning of the 18th century. He was
one of the first German poets to substitute for the bombastic imitations of
Marini, to which he himself had begun by contributing, a clear and simple
diction. He was also a pioneer in directing the attention of his countrymen
to the new poetry of nature which originated in England. His verses,
artificial and crude as they often are, express a reverential attitude
towards nature and a religious interpretation of natural phenomena which
was new to German poetry and prepared the way for Klopstock.

Brockes' autobiography was published by J.M. Lappenberg in the _Zeitschrift
des Vereins fuer Hamburger Geschichte,_ ii. pp. 167 ff. (1847). See also A.
Brandl, _B. H. Brockes_ (1878), and D.F. Strauss, _Brockes und H.S.
Reimarus_ (_Gesammelte Schriften_, ii.). A short selection of his poetry
will be found in vol. 39 (1883) of Kuerschner's _Deutsche
Nationalliteratur_.

BROCKHAUS, FRIEDRICH ARNOLD (1772-1823), German publisher, was born at
Dortmund, on the 4th of May 1772. He was educated at the gymnasium of his
native place, and from 1788 to 1793 served an apprenticeship in a
mercantile house at Duesseldorf. He then devoted two years at Leipzig to the
study of modern languages and literature, after which he set up at Dortmund
an emporium for English goods. In 1801 he transferred this business to
Arnheim, and in the following year to Amsterdam. In 1805, having given up
his first line of trade, he began business as a publisher. Two journals
projected by him were not allowed by the government to survive for any
length of time, and in 1810 the complications in the affairs of Holland
induced him to return homewards. In 1811 he settled at Altenburg. About
three years previously he had purchased the copyright of the
_Konversations-Lexikon_, started in 1796, and in 1810-1811 he completed the
first edition of this celebrated work (14th ed. 1901-4). A second edition
under his own editorship was begun in 1812, and was received with universal
favour. His business extended rapidly, and in 1818 Brockhaus removed to
Leipzig, where he established a large printing-house. Among the more
extensive of his many literary undertakings were the critical
periodicals--_Hermes_, the _Literarisches Konversationsblatt_ (afterwards
the _Blaetter fuer literarische Unterhaltung_), and the _Zeitgenossen_, and
some large historical and bibliographical works, such as Raumer's
_Geschichte der Hohenstaufen_, and Ebert's _Allgemeines bibliographisches
Lexikon_. F.A. Brockhaus died at Leipzig on the 20th of August 1823. The
business was carried on by his sons, Friedrich Brockhaus (1800-1865) who
retired in 1850, and Heinrich Brockhaus (1804-1874), under whom it was
considerably extended. The latter especially rendered great services to
literature and science, which the university of Jena recognized by making
him, in 1858, honorary doctor of philosophy. In the years 1842-1848,
Heinrich Brockhaus was member of the Saxon second chamber, as
representative for Leipzig, was made honorary citizen of that city in 1872,
and died there on the 15th of November 1874.

See H. E. Brockhaus, _Friedrich A. Brockhaus, sein Leben und Wirken nach
Briefen und andern Aufzeichnungen_ (3 vols., Leipzig, 1872-1881); also by
the same author, _Die Firma F. A. Brockhaus von der Begrundung bis zum
hundertjahrigen Jubilaum_ (1805-1905, Leipzig, 1905).

Another of Friedrich's sons, HERMANN BROCKHAUS (1806-1877), German
Orientalist, was born at Amsterdam on the 28th of January 1806. While his
two brothers carried on the business he devoted himself to an academic
career. He was appointed extraordinary professor in Jena in 1838, and in
1841 received a call in a similar capacity to Leipzig, where in 1848 he was
made ordinary professor of ancient Semitic. He died at Leipzig on the 5th
of January 1877. Brockhaus was an Oriental scholar in the old sense of the
word, devoting his attention, not to one language only, but to acquiring a
familiarity with the principal languages and literature of the East. He
studied Hebrew, Arabic and Persian, and was able to lecture on Sanskrit,
afterwards his specialty, Pali, Zend and even on Chinese. His most
important work was the _editio princeps_ of the _Katha-sarit-sagara_, "The
Ocean of the Streams of Story," the large collection of Sanskrit stories
made by Soma Deva in the 12th century. By this publication he gave the
first impetus to a really scientific study of the origin and spreading of
popular tales, and enabled Prof. Benfey and others to trace the great bulk
of Eastern and Western stories to an Indian, and more especially to a
Buddhistic source. Among Prof. Brockhaus's other publications were his
edition of the curious philosophical play _Prabodhachandrodaya_, "The Rise
of the Moon of Intelligence," his critical edition of the "Songs of Hafiz,"
and his publication in Latin letters of the text of the "Zend-Avesta."

BROCKLESBY, RICHARD (1722-1797), English physician, was born at Minehead,
Somersetshire, on the 11th of August 1722. He was educated at Ballitore, in
Ireland, where Edmund Burke was one of his schoolfellows, studied medicine
at Edinburgh, and finally graduated at Leiden in 1745. Appointed physician
to the army in 1758, he served in Germany during part of the Seven Years'
War, and on his return settled down to practise in London. In 1764 he
published _Economical and Medical Observations_, which contained
suggestions for improving the hygiene of army hospitals. In his latter
years he withdrew altogether into private life. The circle of his friends
included some of the most distinguished literary men of the age. He was
warmly attached to Dr Johnson, to whom about 1784 he offered an annuity of
L100 for life, and whom he attended on his death-bed, while in 1788 he
presented Burke, of whom he was an intimate friend, with L1000, and offered
to repeat the gift "every year until your merit is rewarded as it ought to
be at court." He died on the 11th of December 1797, leaving his house and
part of his fortune to his grand-nephew, Dr Thomas Young.

BROCKTON, a city of Plymouth county, Massachusetts, U.S.A., about 20 m. S.
of Boston, and containing an area of 21 sq. m. of rolling surface. Pop.
(1870) 8007; (1880)13,608; (1890) 27,294; (1900) 40,063, of whom 9484 were
foreign-born, including 2667 Irish, 2199 English Canadians and 1973 Swedes;
(1910, census) 56,878. It is served by the New York, New Haven & Hartford
railway. Brockton has a public library, with 54,000 volumes, in 1908. By
popular vote, beginning in 1886 (except in 1898), the liquor traffic was
prohibited annually. The death-rate, 13.18 in 1907, is very low for a
manufacturing city of its size. Brockton is the industrial centre of a
large population surrounding it (East and West Bridgewater, North Easton,
Avon, Randolph, Holbrook and Whitman), and is an important manufacturing
place. Both in 1900 and in 1905 it ranked first among the cities of the
United States in the manufacture of boots and shoes. The city's total
factory product in 1900 was valued at $24,855,362, and in 1905 at
$37,790,982, an increase during the five years of 52%. The boot and shoe
product in 1905 was valued at $30,073,014 (9.4% of the value of the total
boot and shoe product of the United States), the boot [v.04 p.0625] and
shoe cut stock at $1,344,977, and the boot and shoe findings at
$2,435,137--the three combined representing 89.6% of the city's total
manufactured product. In 1908 there were 35 shoe factories, including the
W.L. Douglas, the Ralston, the Walkover, the Eaton, the Keith and the
Packard establishments, and, in 1905, 14,000,000 (in 1907 about 17,000,000)
pairs of shoes were produced in the city. Among the other products are
lasts, blacking, paper and wooden packing boxes, nails and spikes, and shoe
fittings and tools. The assessed valuation of the city rose from $6,876,427
in 1881 to $37,408,332 in 1907. Brockton was a part of Bridgewater until
1821, when it was incorporated as the township of North Bridgewater. Its
present name was adopted in 1874, and it was chartered as a city in 1881.
Brockton was the first city in Massachusetts to abolish all grade crossings
(1896) within its limits.

BROCKVILLE, a town and port of entry of Ontario, Canada, and capital of
Leeds county, named after General Sir Isaac Brock, situated 119 m. S.W. of
Montreal, on the left bank of the St Lawrence, and on the Grand Trunk, and
Brockville & Westport railways. A branch line connects it with the Canadian
Pacific. It has steamer communication with the St Lawrence and Lake Ontario
ports, and is a summer resort. The principal manufactures are hardware,
furnaces, agricultural implements, carriages and chemicals. It is the
centre of one of the chief dairy districts of Canada, and ships large
quantities of cheese and butter. Pop. (1881) 7609; (1901) 8940.

BROD, a town of Croatia-Slavonia, in the county of Pozega, on the left bank
of the river Save, 124 m. by rail S.E. by E. of Agram. Pop. (1900) 7310.
The principal Bosnian railway here crosses the river, to meet the Hungarian
system. Brod has thus a considerable transit trade, especially in cereals,
wine, spirits, prunes and wood. It is sometimes called Slavonisch-Brod, to
distinguish it from Bosna-Brod, or Bosnisch-Brod, across the river. The
town owes its name to a ford (Servian _brod_) of the Save, and dates at
least from the 15th century. Brod was frequently captured and recaptured in
the wars between Turkey and Austria; and it was here that the Austrian army
mustered, in 1879, for the occupation of Bosnia.

BRODERIP, WILLIAM JOHN (1789-1859), English naturalist, was born in Bristol
on the 21st of November 1789. After graduating at Oxford he was called to
the bar in 1817, and for some years was engaged in law-reporting. In 1822
he was appointed a metropolitan police magistrate, and filled that office
until 1856, first at the Thames police court and then at Westminster. His
leisure was devoted to natural history, and his writings did much to
further the study of zoology in England. The zoological articles in the
_Penny Cyclopaedia_ were written by him, and a series of articles
contributed to _Fraser's Magazine_ were reprinted in 1848 as _Zoological
Recreations_, and were followed in 1852 by _Leaves from the Note-book of a
Naturalist_. He was one of the founders of the Zoological Society of
London, and a large collection of shells which he formed was ultimately
bought by the British Museum. He died in London on the 27th of February
1859.

BRODHEAD, JOHN ROMEYN (1814-1873), American historical scholar, was born in
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, on the 2nd of January 1814, the son of Jacob
Brodhead (1782-1855), a prominent clergyman of the Dutch Reformed Church.
He graduated at Rutgers College in 1831, and in 1835 was admitted to the
bar in New York City. After 1837, however, he devoted himself principally
to the study of American colonial history, and in order to have access to
the records of the early Dutch settlements in America he obtained in 1839
an appointment as attache of the American legation at the Hague. His
investigations here soon proved that the Dutch archives were rich in
material on the early history of New York, and led the state legislature to
appropriate funds for the systematic gathering from various European
archives of transcripts of documents relating to New York. Brodhead was
appointed (1841) by Governor William H. Seward to undertake the work, and
within several years gathered from England, France and Holland some eighty
manuscript volumes of transcriptions, largely of documents which had not
hitherto been used by historians. These transcriptions were subsequently
edited by Edward O'Callaghan (vols. i.-xi. incl.) and by Berthold Fernow
(vols. xii.-xv., incl.), and published by the state under the title
_Documents relating to the Colonial History of New York_ (15 vols.,
1853-1883). From 1846 to 1849, while George Bancroft was minister to Great
Britain, Brodhead held under him the post of secretary of legation. In
1853-1857 he was naval officer of the port of New York. He published
several addresses and a scholarly _History of the State of New York_ (2
vols., 1853-1871), generally considered the best for the brief period
covered (1609-1690). He died in New York City on the 6th of May 1873.

BRODIE, SIR BENJAMIN COLLINS, 1st Bart. (1783-1862), English physiologist
and surgeon, was born in 1783 at Winterslow, Wiltshire. He received his
early education from his father; then choosing medicine as his profession
he went to London in 1801, and attended the lectures of John Abernethy. Two
years later he became a pupil of Sir Everard Home at St George's hospital,
and in 1808 was appointed assistant surgeon at that institution, on the
staff of which he served for over thirty years. In 1810 he was elected a
fellow of the Royal Society, to which in the next four or five years he
contributed several papers describing original investigations in
physiology. At this period also he rapidly obtained a large and lucrative
practice, and from time to time he wrote on surgical questions,
contributing numerous papers to the Medical and Chirurgical Society, and to
the medical journals. Probably his most important work is that entitled
_Pathological and Surgical Observations on the Diseases of the Joints_, in
which he attempts to trace the beginnings of disease in the different
tissues that form a joint, and to give an exact value to the symptom of
pain as evidence of organic disease. This volume led to the adoption by
surgeons of measures of a conservative nature in the treatment of diseases
of the joints, with consequent reduction in the number of amputations and
the saving of many limbs and lives. He also wrote on diseases of the
urinary organs, and on local nervous affections of a surgical character. In
1854 he published anonymously a volume of _Psychological Inquiries_; to a
second volume which appeared in 1862 his name was attached. He received
many honours during his career. He attended George IV., was
sergeant-surgeon to William IV. and Queen Victoria, and was made a baronet
in 1834. He became a corresponding member of the French Institute in 1844,
D.C.L. of Oxford in 1855, and president of the Royal Society in 1858, and
he was the first president of the general medical council. He died at
Broome Park, Surrey, on the 21st of October 1862. His collected works, with
autobiography, were published in 1865 under the editorship of Charles
Hawkins.

His eldest son, Sir Benjamin Collins Brodie, 2nd Bart. (1817-1880), was
appointed professor of chemistry at Oxford in 1865, and is chiefly known
for his investigations on the allotropic states of carbon and for his
discovery of graphitic acid.

BRODIE, PETER BELLINGER (1815-1897), English geologist, son of P.B. Brodie,
barrister, and nephew of Sir Benjamin C. Brodie, was born in London in
1815. While still residing with his father at Lincoln's Inn Fields, he
gained some knowledge of natural history and an interest in fossils from
visits to the museum of the Royal College of Surgeons, at a time when W.
Clift was curator. Through the influence of Clift he was elected a fellow
of the Geological Society early in 1834. Proceeding afterwards to Emmanuel
College, Cambridge, he came under the spell of Sedgwick, and henceforth
devoted all his leisure time to geology. Entering the church in 1838, he
was curate at Wylye in Wiltshire, and for a short time at Steeple Claydon
in Buckinghamshire, becoming later rector of Down Hatherley in
Gloucestershire, and finally (1855) vicar of Rowington in Warwickshire, and
rural dean. Records of geological observations in all these districts were
published by him. At Cambridge he obtained fossil shells from the
Pleistocene deposit at Barn well; in the Vale of Wardour he discovered in
Purbeck Beds the isopod named by Milne-Edwards _Archaeoniscus Brodiei_; in
Buckinghamshire he described the outliers of Purbeck and [v.04 p.0626]
Portland Beds; and in the Vale of Gloucester the Lias and Oolites claimed
his attention. Fossil insects, however, formed the subject of his special
studies (_History of the Fossil Insects of the Secondary Rocks of England_,
1845), and many of his published papers relate to them. He was an active
member of the Cotteswold Naturalists' Club and of the Warwickshire Natural
History and Archaeological Society, and in 1854 he was chief founder of the
Warwickshire Naturalists' and Archaeologists' Field Club. In 1887 the
Murchison medal was awarded to him by the Geological Society of London. He
died at Rowington, on the 1st of November 1897.

See Memoir by H. B. Woodward in _Geological Magazine_, 1897, p. 481 (with
portrait).

BRODY, a town of Austria, in Galicia, 62 m. E. of Lemberg by rail. Pop.
(1900) 17,360, of which about two-thirds are Jews. It is situated near the
Russian frontier, and has been one of the most important commercial centres
in Galicia, especially for the trade with Russia. But since 1879, when its
charter as a free commercial city was withdrawn, its trade has also greatly
diminished. Brody was created a town in 1684, and was raised to the rank of
a free commercial city in 1779.

BROEKHUIZEN, JAN VAN [JANUS BROUKHUSIUS], (1649-1707), Dutch classical
scholar and poet, was born on the 20th of November 1649, at Amsterdam.
Having lost his father when very young, he was placed with an apothecary,
with whom he lived several years. Not liking this employment, he entered
the army, and in 1674 was sent with his regiment to America, in the fleet
under Admiral de Ruyter, but returned to Holland the same year. In 1678 he
was sent to the garrison at Utrecht, where he contracted a friendship with
the celebrated Graevius; here he had the misfortune to be so deeply
implicated in a duel that, according to the laws of Holland, his life was
forfeited. Graevius, however, wrote immediately to Nicholas Heinsius, who
obtained his pardon. Not long afterwards he became a captain of one of the
companies then at Amsterdam. After the peace of Ryswick, 1697, his company
was disbanded, and he retired on a pension to a country house near
Amsterdam and pursued his classical and literary studies at leisure. His
Dutch poems, in which he followed the model of Pieter Hooft, were first
published in 1677; a later edition, with a biography by D. van Hoogstraten,
appeared in 1712, the last edition, 1883, was edited by R.A. Kollewijn. His
classical reputation rests on his editions of Propertius (1702) and
Tibullus (1707). His Latin poems (_Carmina_) appeared in 1684; a later
edition(_Poemata_) by D. van Hoogstraten appeared in 1711. The _Select
Letters_ (_Jani Browkhusii Epistolae Selectae_, 1889 and 1893) were edited
by J.A. Worp, who also wrote his biography, 1891. Broekhuizen died on the
15th of December 1707.

BROeGGER, WALDEMAR CHRISTOFER (1851- ), Norwegian geologist, was born in
Christiania on the 10th of November 1851, and educated in that city. In
1876 he was appointed curator of the geological museum in his native city,
and assistant on the Geological Survey. He was professor of mineralogy and
geology from 1881 to 1890 in the university of Stockholm, and from 1890 in
the university of Christiania. He also became rector and president of the
senate of the royal university of Christiania. His observations on the
igneous rocks of south Tirol compared with those of Christiania afford much
information on the relations of the granitic and basic rocks. The subject
of the differentiation of rock-types in the process of solidification as
plutonic or volcanic rocks from a particular magma received much attention
from him. He dealt also with the Palaeozoic rocks of Norway, and with the
late glacial and post-glacial changes of level in the Christiania region.
The honorary degree of Ph.D. was conferred upon him by the university of
Heidelberg and that of LL.D. by the university of Glasgow. The Murchison
medal of the Geological Society of London was awarded to him in 1891.

BROGLIE, DE, the name of a noble French family which, originally
Piedmontese, emigrated to France in the year 1643. The head of the family,
FRANCOIS MARIE (1611-1656), then took the title of comte de Broglie. He had
already distinguished himself as a soldier, and died, as a
lieutenant-general, at the siege of Valenza on the 2nd of July 1656. His
son, VICTOR MAURICE, COMTE DE BROGLIE (1647-1727), served under Conde,
Turenne and other great commanders of the age of Louis XIV., becoming
_marechal de camp_ in 1676, lieutenant-general in 1688, and finally marshal
of France in 1724.

The eldest son of Victor Marie, FRANCOIS MARIE, afterwards DUC DE BROGLIE
(1671-1745), entered the army at an early age, and had a varied career of
active service before he was made, at the age of twenty-three,
lieutenant-colonel of the king's regiment of cavalry. He served
continuously in the War of the Spanish Succession and was present at
Malplaquet. He was made lieutenant-general in 1710, and served with Villars
in the last campaign of the war and at the battle of Denain. During the
peace he continued in military employment, and in 1719 he was made
director-general of cavalry and dragoons. He was also employed in
diplomatic missions, and was ambassador in England in 1724. The war in
Italy called him into the field again in 1733, and in the following year he
was made marshal of France. In the campaign of 1734 he was one of the chief
commanders on the French side, and he fought the battles of Parma and
Guastalla. A famous episode was his narrow personal escape when his
quarters on the Secchia were raided by the enemy on the night of the 14th
of September 1734. In 1735 he directed a war of positions with credit, but
he was soon replaced by Marshal de Noailles. He was governor-general of
Alsace when Frederick the Great paid a secret visit to Strassburg (1740).
In 1742 de Broglie was appointed to command the French army in Germany, but
such powers as he had possessed were failing him, and he had always been
the "man of small means," safe and cautious, but lacking in elasticity and
daring. The only success obtained was in the action of Sahay (25th May
1742), for which he was made a duke. He returned to France in 1743, and
died two years later.

His son, VICTOR FRANCOIS, DUC DE BROGLIE (1718-1804), served with his
father at Parma and Guastalla, and in 1734 obtained a colonelcy. In the
German War he took part in the storming of Prague in 1742, and was made a
brigadier. In 1744 and 1745 he saw further service on the Rhine, and in
1756 he was made _marechal de camp_. He subsequently served with Marshal
Saxe in the low countries, and was present at Roucoux, Val and Maastricht.
At the end of the war he was made a lieutenant-general. During the Seven
Years' War he served successively under d'Estrees, Soubise and Contades,
being present at all the battles from Hastenbeck onwards. His victory over
Prince Ferdinand at Bergen (1759) won him the rank of marshal of France
from his own sovereign and that of prince of the empire from the emperor
Francis I. In 1760 he won an action at Corbach, but was defeated at
Vellinghausen in 1761. After the war he fell into disgrace and was not
recalled to active employment until 1778, when he was given command of the
troops designed to operate against England. He played a prominent part in
the Revolution, which he opposed with determination. After his emigration,
de Broglie commanded the "army of the princes" for a short time (1792). He
died at Muenster in 1804.

Another son of the first duke, CHARLES FRANCOIS, COMTE DE BROGLIE
(1719-1781), served for some years in the army, and afterwards became one
of the foremost diplomatists in the service of Louis XV. He is chiefly
remembered in connexion with the _Secret du Roi_, the private, as distinct
from the official, diplomatic service of Louis, of which he was the ablest
and most important member. The son of Victor Francois, VICTOR CLAUDE,
PRINCE DE BROGLIE (1757-1794), served in the army, attaining the rank of
_marechal de camp_. He adopted revolutionary opinions, served with
Lafayette and Rochambeau in America, was a member of the Jacobin Club, and
sat in the Constituent Assembly, constantly voting on the Liberal side. He
served as chief of the staff to the Republican army on the Rhine; but in
the Terror he was denounced, arrested and executed at Paris on the 27th of
June 1794. His dying admonition to his little son was to remain [v.04
p.0627] faithful to the principles of the Revolution, however unjust and
ungrateful.

ACHILLE CHARLES LEONCE VICTOR, DUC DE BROGLIE (1785-1870), statesman and
diplomatist, son of the last-named, was born at Paris on the 28th of
November 1785. His mother had shared her husband's imprisonment, but
managed to escape to Switzerland, where she remained till the fall of
Robespierre. She now returned to Paris with her children and lived there
quietly until 1796, when she married a M. d'Argenson, grandson of Louis
XV.'s minister of war. Under the care of his step-father young de Broglie
received a careful and liberal education and made his entree into the
aristocratic and literary society of Paris under the Empire. In 1809, he
was appointed a member of the council of state, over which Napoleon
presided in person; and was sent by the emperor on diplomatic missions, as
attache, to various countries. Though he had never been in sympathy with
the principles of the Empire, de Broglie was not one of those who rejoiced
at its downfall. In common with all men of experience and sense he realized
the danger to France of the rise to power of the forces of violent
reaction. With Decazes and Richelieu he saw that the only hope for a calm
future lay in "the reconciliation of the Restoration with the Revolution."
By the influence of his uncle, Prince Amedee de Broglie, his right to a
peerage had been recognized; and to his own great surprise he received, in
June 1814, a summons from Louis XVIII. to the Chamber of Peers. There,
after the Hundred Days, he distinguished himself by his courageous defence
of Marshal Ney, for whose acquittal he, alone of all the peers, both spoke
and voted. After this defiant act of opposition it was perhaps fortunate
that his impending marriage gave him an excuse for leaving the country. On
the 15th of February 1816, he was married at Leghorn to the daughter of
Madame de Stael. He returned to Paris at the end of the year, but took no
part in politics until the elections of September 1817 broke the power of
the "ultra-royalists" and substituted for the _Chambre introuvable_ a
moderate assembly. De Broglie's political attitude during the years that
followed is best summed up in his own words: "From 1812 to 1822 all the
efforts of men of sense and character were directed to reconciling the
Restoration and the Revolution, the old regime and the new France. From
1822 to 1827 all their efforts were directed to resisting the growing power
of the counter-revolution. From 1827 to 1830 all their efforts aimed at
moderating and regulating the reaction in a contrary sense." During the
last critical years of Charles X.'s reign, de Broglie identified himself
with the _doctrinaires_, among whom Royer-Collard and Guizot were the most
prominent. The July revolution placed him in a difficult position; he knew
nothing of the intrigues which placed Louis Philippe on the throne; but,
the revolution once accomplished, he was ready to uphold the _fait
accompli_ with characteristic loyalty, and on the 9th of August took office
in the new government as minister of public worship and education. As he
had foreseen, the ministry was short-lived, and on the 2nd of November he
was once more out of office. During the critical time that followed he
consistently supported the principles which triumphed with the fall of
Laffitte and the accession to power of Casimir Perier in March 1832. After
the death of the latter and the insurrection of June 1832, de Broglie took
office once more as minister for foreign affairs (October 11th). His tenure
of the foreign office was coincident with a very critical period in
international relations. But for the sympathy of Great Britain under
Palmerston, the July monarchy would have been completely isolated in
Europe; and this sympathy the aggressive policy of France in Belgium and on
the Mediterranean coast of Africa had been in danger of alienating. The
Belgian crisis had been settled, so far as the two powers were concerned,
before de Broglie took office; but the concerted military and naval action
for the coercion of the Dutch, which led to the French occupation of
Antwerp, was carried out under his auspices. The good understanding of
which this was the symbol characterized also the relations of de Broglie
and Palmerston during the crisis of the first war of Mehemet Ali (_q.v._)
with the Porte, and in the affairs of the Spanish peninsula their common
sympathy with constitutional liberty led to an agreement for common action,
which took shape in the treaty of alliance between Great Britain, France,
Spain and Portugal, signed at London on the 22nd of April 1834. De Broglie
had retired from office in the March preceding, and did not return to power
till March of the following year, when he became head of the cabinet. In
1836, the government having been defeated on a proposal to reduce the five
per cents, he once more resigned, and never returned to official life. He
had remained in power long enough to prove what honesty of purpose,
experience of affairs, and common sense can accomplish when allied with
authority. The debt that France and Europe owed him may be measured by
comparing the results of his policy with that of his successors under not
dissimilar circumstances. He had found France isolated and Europe full of
the rumours of war; he left her strong in the English alliance and the
respect of Liberal Europe, and Europe freed from the restless apprehensions
which were to be stirred into life again by the attitude of Thiers in the
Eastern Question and of Guizot in the affair of the "Spanish marriages."
From 1836 to 1848 de Broglie held almost completely aloof from politics, to
which his scholarly temperament little inclined him, a disinclination
strengthened by the death of his wife on the 22nd of September 1838. His
friendship for Guizot, however, induced him to accept a temporary mission
in 1845, and in 1847 to go as French ambassador to London. The revolution
of 1848 was a great blow to him, for he realized that it meant the final
ruin of the Liberal monarchy--in his view the political system best suited
to France. He took his seat, however, in the republican National Assembly
and in the Convention of 1848, and, as a member of the section known as the
"Burgraves," did his best to stem the tide of socialism and to avert the
reaction in favour of autocracy which he foresaw. He shared with his
colleagues the indignity of the _coup d'etat_ of the 2nd of December 1851,
and remained for the remainder of his life one of the bitterest enemies of
the imperial regime, though he was heard to remark, with that caustic wit
for which he was famous, that the empire was "the government which the
poorer classes in France desired and the rich deserved." The last twenty
years of his life were devoted chiefly to philosophical and literary
pursuits. Having been brought up by his step-father in the sceptical
opinions of the time, he gradually arrived at a sincere belief in the
Christian religion. "I shall die," said he, "a penitent Christian and an
impenitent Liberal." His literary works, though few of them have been
published, were rewarded in 1856 by a seat in the French Academy, and he
was also a member of another branch of the French Institute, the Academy of
Moral and Political Science. In the labours of those learned bodies he took
an active and assiduous part. He died on the 25th of January 1870.

Besides his _Souvenirs_, in 4 vols. (Paris, 1885-1888), the duc de Broglie
left numerous works, of which only some have been published. Of these may
be mentioned _Ecrits et discours_ (3 vols., Paris, 1863); _Le Libre Echange
et l'impot_ (Paris, 1879); _Vues sur le gouvernement de la France_ (Paris,
1861). This last was confiscated before publication by the imperial
government. See Guizot, _Le Duc de Broglie_ (Paris, 1870), and _Memoires_
(Paris, 1858-1867); and the histories of Thureau-Dangin and Duvergier de
Hauranne.

JACQUES VICTOR ALBERT, DUC DE BROGLIE (1821-1901), his eldest son, was born
at Paris on the 13th of June 1821. After a brief diplomatic career at
Madrid and Rome, the revolution of 1848 caused him to withdraw from public
life and devote himself to literature. He had already published a
translation of the religious system of Leibnitz (1846). He now at once made
his mark by his contributions to the _Revue des deux Mondes_ and the
Orleanist and clerical organ _Le Correspondant_, which were afterwards
collected under the titles of _Etudes morales et litteraires_ (1853) and
_Questions de religion et d'histoire_ (1860). These were supplemented in
1869 by a volume of _Nouvelles etudes de litterature et de morale_. His
_L'Eglise et l'empire romain au IVe siecle_ (1856-1866) brought him the
succession to Lacordaire's seat in the Academy in 1862. In 1870 he
succeeded his father in the dukedom, having previously been known as the
prince de Broglie. In the following year he was elected to the National
[v.04 p.0628] Assembly for the department of the Eure, and a few days later
(on the 19th of February) was appointed ambassador in London; but in March
1872, in consequence of criticisms upon his negotiations concerning the
commercial treaties between England and France, he resigned his post and
took his seat in the National Assembly, where he became the leading spirit
of the monarchical campaign against Thiers. On the replacement of the
latter by Marshal MacMahon, the duc de Broglie became president of the
council and minister for foreign affairs (May 1873), but in the
reconstruction of the ministry on the 26th of November, after the passing
of the septennate, transferred himself to the ministry of the interior. His
tenure of office was marked by an extreme conservatism, which roused the
bitter hatred of the Republicans, while he alienated the Legitimist party
by his friendly relations with the Bonapartists, and the Bonapartists by an
attempt to effect a compromise between the rival claimants to the monarchy.
The result was the fall of the cabinet on the 16th of May 1874. Three years
later (on the 16th of May 1877) he was entrusted with the formation of a
new cabinet, with the object of appealing to the country and securing a new
chamber more favourable to the reactionaries than its predecessor had been.
The result, however, was a decisive Republican majority. The duc de Broglie
was defeated in his own district, and resigned office on the 20th of
November. Not being re-elected in 1885, he abandoned politics and reverted
to his historical work, publishing a series of historical studies and
biographies written in a most pleasing style, and especially valuable for
their extensive documentation. He died in Paris on the 19th of January
1901.

Besides editing the _Souvenirs_ of his father (1886, &c.), the _Memoires_
of Talleyrand (1891, &c.), and the _Letters_ of the Duchess Albertine de
Broglie (1896), he published _Le Secret du roi, Correspondance secrete de
Louis XV avec ses agents diplomatiques, 1752-1774_ (1878); _Frederic II et
Marie Therese_ (1883); _Frederic II et Louis XV_ (1885); _Marie Therese
Imperatrice_ (1888); _Le Pere Lacordaire_ (1889); _Maurice de Saxe et le
marquis d'Argenson_ (1891); _La Paix d'Aix-la-Chapelle_ (1892); _L'Alliance
autrichienne_ (1895); _La Mission de M. de Gontaut-Biron a Berlin_ (1896);
_Voltaire avant et pendant la Guerre de Sept Ans_ (1898); _Saint Ambroise_,
translated by Margaret Maitland in the series of "The Saints" (1899).

BROGUE, (1) A rough shoe of raw leather (from the Gael. _brog_, a shoe)
worn in the wilder parts of Ireland and the Scottish Highlands. (2) A
dialectical accent or pronunciation (of uncertain origin), especially used
of the Irish accent in speaking English.

BROHAN, AUGUSTINE SUSANNE (1807-1887), French actress, was born in Paris on
the 22nd of January 1807. She entered the Conservatoire at the age of
eleven, and took the second prize for comedy in 1820, and the first in
1821. She served her apprenticeship in the provinces, making her first
Paris appearance at the Odeon in 1832 as Dorine in _Tartuffe_. Her success
there and elsewhere brought her a summons to the Comedie Francaise, where
she made her _debut_ on the 15th of February 1834, as Madelon in _Les
Precieuses ridicules_, and Suzanne in _Le Mariage de Figaro_. She retired
in 1842, and died on the 16th of August 1887.

Her elder daughter, JOSEPHINE FELICITE AUGUSTINE BROHAN (1824-1893), was
admitted to the Conservatoire when very young, twice taking the second
prize for comedy. The soubrette part, entrusted for more than 150 years at
the Comedie Francaise to a succession of artists of the first rank, was at
the moment without a representative, and Mdlle Augustine Brohan made her
_debut_ there on the 19th of May 1841, as Dorine in _Tartuffe_, and Lise in
_Rivaux d'eux-memes_. She was immediately admitted _pensionnaire_, and at
the end of eighteen months unanimously elected _societaire_. She soon
became a great favourite, not only in the plays of Moliere and de Regnard,
but also in those of Marivaux. On her retirement from the stage in 1866,
she made an unhappy marriage with Edmond David de Gheest (d. 1885),
secretary to the Belgian legation in Paris.

Susanne Brohan's second daughter, EMILIE MADELEINE BROHAN (1833-1900), also
took first prize for comedy at the Conservatoire (1850). She was engaged at
once by the Comedie Francaise, but instead of making her _debut_ in some
play of the _repertoire_ of the theatre, the management put on for her
benefit a new comedy by Scribe and Legouve, _Les Contes de la reine de
Navarre_, in which she created the part of Marguerite on the 1st of
September 1850. Her talents and beauty made her a success from the first,
and in less than two years from her _debut_ she was elected _societaire_.
In 1853 she married Mario Uchard, from whom she was soon separated, and in
1858 she returned to the Comedie Francaise in leading parts, until her
retirement in 1886. Her name is associated with a great number of plays,
besides those in the classical _repertoire_, notably _Le Monde ou l'on
s'ennuie_, _Par droit de conquete_, _Les Deux Veuves_, and _Le Lion
amoureux_, in which, as the "marquise de Maupas", she had one of her
greatest successes.

BROKE, or BROOKE, ARTHUR (d. 1563), English author, wrote the first English
version of the story of Romeo and Juliet. _The Tragicall Historye of Romeus
and Julieit_ (1562) is a rhymed account of the story, taken, not directly
from Bandello's collection of novels (1554), but from the French
translation (_Histoires tragiques_) of Pierre Boaistuau or Boisteau,
surnamed Launay, and Francois de Belleforest. Broke adds some detail to the
story as told by Boisteau. As the poem contains many scenes which are not
known to exist elsewhere, but which were adopted by Shakespeare in _Romeo
and Juliet_, there is no reasonable doubt that it may be regarded as the
main source of the play. Broke perished by shipwreck in 1563, on his way
from Newhaven to join the English troops fighting on the Huguenot side in
France.

The genesis of the Juliet story, and a close comparison of Shakespeare's
play with Broke's version, are to be found in a reprint of the poem and of
William Paynter's prose translation from the _Palace of Pleasure_, edited
by Mr P. A. Daniel for the New Shakespere Society (1875).

BROKE, SIR PHILIP BOWES VERE, BART. (1776-1841), British rear-admiral, was
born at Broke Hall, near Ipswich, on the 9th of September 1776, a member of
an old Suffolk family. Entering the navy in June 1792, he saw active
service in the Mediterranean from 1793 to 1795, and was with the British
fleet at the battle of Cape St Vincent, 1797. In 1798 he was present at the
defeat and capture of the French squadron off the north coast of Ireland.
From 1799 to 1801 he served with the North Sea fleet, and in the latter
year was made captain. Unemployed for the next four years, he commanded in
1805 a frigate in the English and Irish Channels. In 1806 he was appointed
to the command of the "Shannon", 38-gun frigate, remaining afloat,
principally in the Bay of Biscay, till 1811. The "Shannon" was then ordered
to Halifax, Nova Scotia. For a year after the declaration of war between
Great Britain and the United States in 1812, the frigate saw no important
service, though she captured several prizes. Broke utilized this period of
comparative inactivity to train his men thoroughly. He paid particular
attention to gunnery, and the "Shannon" ere long gained a unique reputation
for excellence of shooting. Broke's opportunity came in 1813. In May of
that year the "Shannon" was cruising off Boston, watching the "Chesapeake",
an American frigate of the same nominal force but heavier armament. On the
1st of June Broke, finding his water supply getting low, wrote to Lawrence,
the commander of the "Chesapeake", asking for a meeting between the two
ships, stating the "Shannon's" force, and guaranteeing that no other
British ship should take part in the engagement. Before this letter could
be delivered, however, the "Chesapeake", under full sail, ran out of Boston
harbour, crowds of pleasure-boats accompanying her to witness the
engagement. Broke briefly addressed his men. "Don't cheer," he concluded,
"go quietly to your quarters. I feel sure you will all do your duty." As
the "Chesapeake" rounded to on the "Shannon's" weather quarter, at a
distance of about fifty yards, the British frigate received her with a
broadside. A hundred of the "Chesapeake's" crew were struck down at once,
Lawrence himself being mortally wounded. A second broadside, equally
well-aimed, increased the confusion, and, her tiller-ropes being shot away,
the American frigate drifted foul of the "Shannon". Broke sprang on board
with some sixty of his men following him. After a brief struggle [v.04
p.0629] the fight was over. Within fifteen minutes of the firing of the
first shot, the "Chesapeake" struck her flag, but Broke himself was
seriously wounded. For his services he was rewarded with a baronetcy, and
subsequently was made a K.C.B. His exploit captivated the public fancy, and
his popular title of "Brave Broke" gives the standard by which his action
was judged. Its true significance, however, lies deeper. Broke's victory
was due not so much to courage as to forethought. "The 'Shannon,'" said
Admiral Jurien de La Graviere, "captured the 'Chesapeake' on the 1st of
June 1813; but on the 14th of September 1806, when he took command of his
frigate, Captain Broke had begun to prepare the glorious termination to
this bloody affair." Broke's wound incapacitated him from further service,
and for the rest of his life caused him serious suffering. He died in
London on the 2nd of January 1841.

BROKEN HILL, a silver-mining town of Yancowinna county, New South Wales,
Australia, 925 m. directly W. by N. of Sydney, and connected with Adelaide
by rail. Pop. (1901) 27,518. One of the neighbouring mines, the
Proprietary, is the richest in the world; gold is associated with the
silver; large quantities of lead, good copper lodes, zinc and tin are also
found. The problem of the profitable treatment of the sulphide ores has
been practically solved here. In addition Broken Hill is the centre of one
of the largest pastoral districts in Australia. The town is the seat of the
Roman Catholic bishop of Wilcannia.

BROKER (according to the _New English Dictionary_, from Lat. _brocca_,
spit, spike, _broccare_, to "broach"--another Eng. form of the same word;
hence O. Fr. _vendre a broche_, to retail, e.g. wine, from the tap, and
thus the general sense of dealing; see also for a discussion of the
etymology and early history of the use of the word, J.R. Dos Passos, _Law
of Stockbrokers_, chap. i., New York, 1905). In the primary sense of the
word, a broker is a mercantile agent, of the class known as general agents,
whose office is to bring together intending buyers and sellers and make a
contract between them, for a remuneration called brokerage or commission;
e.g. cotton brokers, wool brokers or produce brokers. Originally the only
contracts negotiated by brokers were for the sale or purchase of
commodities; but the word in its present use includes other classes of
mercantile agents, such as stockbrokers, insurance-brokers, ship-brokers or
bill-brokers. Pawnbrokers are not brokers in any proper sense of the word;
they deal as principals and do not act as agents. In discussing the chief
questions of modern legal interest in connexion with brokers, we shall deal
with them, firstly, in the original sense of agents for the purchase and
sale of goods.

_Relations between Broker and Principal._--A broker has not, like a factor,
possession of his principal's goods, and, unless expressly authorized,
cannot buy or sell in his own name; his business is to bring into privity
of contract his principal and the third party. When the contract is made,
ordinarily he drops out altogether. Brokers very frequently act as factors
also, but, when they do so, their rights and duties as factors must be
distinguished from their rights and duties as brokers. It is a broker's
duty to carry out his principal's instructions with diligence, skill and
perfect good faith. He must see that the terms of the bargain accord with
his principal's orders from a commercial point of view, e.g. as to quality,
quantity and price; he must ensure that the contract of sale effected by
him be legally enforceable by his principal against the third party; and he
must not accept any commission from the third party, or put himself in any
position in which his own interest may become opposed to his principal's.
As soon as he has made the contract which he was employed to make, in most
respects his duty to, and his authority from, his principal alike cease;
and consequently the law of brokers relates principally to the formation of
contracts by them.

The most important formality in English law, in making contracts for the
sale of goods, with which a broker must comply, in order to make the
contract legally enforceable by his principal against the third party, is
contained in section 4 of the Sale of Goods Act 1893, which (in substance
re-enacting section 17 of the Statute of Frauds) provides as follows:--"A
contract for the sale of any goods of the value of ten pounds or upwards
shall not be enforceable by action unless the buyer shall accept part of
the goods as sold, and actually receive the same, or give something in
earnest to bind the contract, or in part payment, or _unless some note or
memorandum in writing of the contract be made and signed by the party to be
charged or his agent in that behalf_."

From the reign of James I. till 1884 brokers in London were admitted and
licensed by the corporation, and regulated by statute; and it was common to
employ one broker only, who acted as intermediary between, and was the
agent of both buyer and seller. When the Statute of Frauds was passed in
the reign of Charles II., it became the practice for the broker, acting for
both parties, to insert in a formal book, kept for the purpose, a
memorandum of each contract effected by him, and to sign such memorandum on
behalf of both parties, in order that there might be a written memorandum
of the contract of sale, signed by the agent of the parties as required by
the statute. He would then send to the buyer a copy of this memorandum,
called the "bought note", and to the seller a "sold note", which would run
as follows:--

 "I have this day bought for you from A B [or "my principal"] ..."
                                [signed] "M, _Broker_."

 "I have this day sold for you to A B [or "my principal"] ..."
                                [signed] "M, _Broker_."

There was in the earlier part of the 19th century considerable discussion
in the courts as to whether the entry in a broker's book, or the bought and
sold notes (singly or together), constituted the statutory memorandum; and
judicial opinion was not unanimous on the point. But at the present day
brokers are no longer regulated by statute, either in London or elsewhere,
and keep no formal book; and as an entry made in a private book kept by the
broker for another purpose, even if signed, would probably not be regarded
as a memorandum signed by the agent of the parties in that behalf, the old
discussion is now of little practical interest.

Under modern conditions of business the written memorandum of the contract
of sale effected by the broker is usually to be found in a "contract note";
but the question whether, in the particular circumstances of each case, the
contract note affords a sufficient memorandum in writing, depends upon a
variety of considerations--e.g. whether the transaction is effected through
one or through two brokers; whether the contract notes are rendered by one
broker only, or by both; and, if the latter, whether exchanged between the
brokers, or rendered by each broker to his own client; for under present
practice any one of these methods may obtain, according to the trade in
which the transaction is effected, and the nature of the particular
transaction.

Where one and the same broker is employed by both seller and buyer, bought
and sold notes rendered in the old form provide the necessary memorandum of
the contract. Where two brokers are employed, one by the seller and one by
the buyer, sometimes one drops out as soon as the terms are negotiated, and
the other makes out, signs and sends to the parties the bought and sold
notes. The latter then becomes the agent of both parties for the purpose of
signing the statutory memorandum, and the position is the same as if one
broker only had been employed. On the other hand, if one broker does not
drop out of the transaction, each broker remains to the end the agent of
his own principal only, and neither becomes the agent of the other party
for the purpose of signing the memorandum. In such a case it is the usual
practice for the buyer's broker to send to the seller's broker a note of
the contract,--"I, acting on account of A. B. [or, "of my principal,"],
have this day bought _from_ you, acting on account of C. D. [or, "of your
principal"],"--and to receive a corresponding note from the seller's
broker. Thus each of the parties receives through his own agent a
memorandum signed by the other party's agent. These contract notes are
usually known as, and serve the purpose of, "bought" and "sold" notes. In
all the above three cases the broker's duty of compliance with all
formalities necessary to make the contract of sale legally enforceable is
performed, [v.04 p.0630] and both parties obtain a written memorandum of
the contract upon which they can sue.

The broker, on performing his duty in accordance with the terms upon which
he is employed, is entitled to be paid his "brokerage." This usually takes
the form of a percentage, varying according to the nature and conditions of
the business, upon the total price of the goods bought or sold through him.
When he guarantees the solvency of the other party, he is said to be
employed upon _del credere_ terms, and is entitled to a higher rate of
remuneration. In some trades it is the custom for the selling broker to
receive payment from the buyer or his broker; and in such case it is his
duty to account to his principal for the purchase money. A broker who
properly expends money or incurs liability on his principal's behalf in the
course of his employment, is entitled to be reimbursed the money, and
indemnified against the liability. Not having, like a factor, possession of
the goods, a broker has no lien by which to enforce his rights against his
principal. If he fails to perform his duty, he loses his right to
remuneration, reimbursement and indemnity, and further becomes liable to an
action for damages for breach of his contract of employment, at the suit of
his principal.

_Relations between Broker and Third Party._--A broker who signs a contract
note _as broker_ on behalf of a principal, whether named or not, is not
personally liable on the contract to the third party. But if he makes the
contract in such a way as to make himself a party to it, the third party
may sue either the broker or his principal, subject to the limitation that
the third party, by his election to treat one as the party to the contract,
may preclude himself from suing the other. In this respect the ordinary
rules of the law of agency apply to a broker. Generally, a broker has not
authority to receive payment, but in trades in which it is customary for
him to do so, if the buyer pays the seller's broker, and is then sued by
the seller for the price by reason of the broker having become insolvent or
absconded, he may set up the payment to the broker as a defence to the
action by the broker's principal. Brokers may render themselves liable for
damages in tort for the conversion of the goods at the suit of the true
owner if they negotiate a sale of the goods for a selling principal who has
no title to the goods.

_The Influence of Exchanges._--The relations between brokers and their
principals, and also between brokers and third parties as above defined,
have been to some extent modified in practice by the institution since the
middle of the 19th century in important commercial centres of "Exchanges,"
where persons interested in a particular trade, whether as merchants or as
brokers, meet for the transaction of business. By the contract of
membership of the association in whose hands is vested the control of the
exchange, every person on becoming a member agrees to be bound by the rules
of the association, and to make his contracts on the market in accordance
with them. A governing body or committee elected by the members enforces
observance of the rules, and members who fail to meet their engagements on
the market, or to conform to the rules, are liable to suspension or
expulsion by the committee. All disputes between members on their contracts
are submitted to an arbitration tribunal composed of members; and the
arbitrators in deciding the questions submitted to them are guided by the
rules. A printed book of rules is available for reference; and various
printed forms of contract suited to the various requirements of the
business are specified by the rules and supplied by the association for the
use of members. In order to simplify the settlement of accounts between
members, particularly in respect of "futures," i.e. contracts for future
delivery, a weekly or other periodical settlement is effected by means of a
clearing-house; each member paying or receiving in respect of all his
contracts which are still open, the balance of his weekly "differences,"
i.e. the difference between the contract price and the market price fixed
for the settlement, or between the last and the present settlement prices.

As all contracts on the market are made subject to the rules, it follows
that so far as the rules alter the rights and liabilities attached by law,
the ordinary law is modified. The most important modification in the
position of brokers effected by membership of such an exchange is due to
the rule that as, between themselves, all members are principals, on the
market no agents are recognized; a broker employed by a non-member to buy
for him on the market is treated by the rules as buying for himself, and
is, therefore, personally liable on the contract. If it be a contract in
futures, he is required to conform to the weekly settlement rules. If his
principal fails to take delivery, the engagement is his and he is required
to make good to the member who sold to him any difference between the
contract and market price at the date of delivery. But whilst this practice
alters directly the relations of the broker to the third party, it also
affects or tends to affect indirectly the relations of the broker to his
own principal. The terms of the contract of employment being a matter of
negotiation and agreement between them, it is open to a broker, if he
chooses, to stipulate for particular terms; and it is the usual practice of
exchanges to supply printed contract forms for the use of members in their
dealings with non-members who employ them as brokers, containing a
stipulation that the contract is made subject to the rules of the exchange;
and frequently also a clause that the contract is made with the broker as
_principal_. In addition to these express terms, there is in the contract
of employment the term, implied by law in all trade contracts, that the
parties consent to be bound by such trade usages as are consistent with the
express terms of the contract, and reasonable. On executing an order the
broker sends to his client a contract-note either in the form of the old
bought and sold notes "I have this day [bought / sold] for you," or, when
the principal clause is inserted, "I have this day [sold to / bought] from
you." These are not bought and sold notes proper, for the broker is not the
agent of the third party for the purpose of signing them as statutory
memoranda of the sale. But they purport to record the terms of the contract
of employment, and the principal may treat himself as bound by their
provisions. Sometimes they are accompanied by a detachable form, known as
the "client's return contract note," to be filled in, signed and returned
by the client; but even the "client's return contract note" is retained by
the client's own broker, and is only a memorandum of the terms of
employment. The following is a form of contract note rendered by a broker
to his client for American cotton, bought on the Liverpool Cotton Exchange
for future delivery. The client's contract note is attached to it, and is
in precisely corresponding form.

    AMERICAN COTTON

    _Delivery Contract Note._

    Liverpool,................

    M................

    DEAR SIRS,

    We have this day.............. to/from you .............. lb American
    Cotton, net weight, to be contained in .............. American Bales,
    more or less, to be delivered in Liverpool, during .............. on
    the basis of .......... per lb for ............ on the terms of the
    rules, bye-laws, and Clearing House regulations of the Liverpool Cotton
    Association, Limited, whether endorsed hereon or not.

    The contract, of which this is a note, is made between ourselves and
    yourselves, and not by or with any person, whether disclosed or not, on
    whose instructions or for whose benefit the same may have been entered
    into. Yours faithfully,

    ...................

    The contract, of which the above is a note, was made on the date
    specified, within the business hours fixed by the Liverpool Cotton
    Association, Limited.

    ......... per cent to us.

    Please confirm by signing and returning the contract attached.

The above form of contract note illustrates the tendency of exchanges to
alter the relations between the broker and his principal. The object of
inserting in the printed form the provision that the contract is made
subject to the rules of the [v.04 p.0631] Liverpool Cotton Association is
to make those rules binding upon the principal, and if he employs his
broker upon the basis of the printed form, he does bind himself to any
modification of the relations between himself and his broker which those
rules may effect. The object of the principal clause in the above and
similar printed forms is apparently to entitle the broker to sell to or buy
from his principal on his own account and not as agent at all, thus
disregarding the duty incumbent upon him as broker of making for his
principal a contract with a third party.

It is not possible, except very generally, to state how far exchanges have
succeeded in imposing their own rules and usages on non-members, but it is
probably correct to say that in most cases if the question came before the
courts, the outside client would be held to have accepted the rules of the
exchange so far as they did not alter the fundamental duties to him of his
broker. On the other hand, provisions purporting to entitle the broker in
disregard of his duties as broker himself to act as principal, would be
rejected by the courts as radically inconsistent with the primary object of
the contract of brokerage and, therefore, meaningless. But it is
undoubtedly too often the practice of brokers who are members of exchanges
to consider themselves entitled to act as principals and sell on their own
account to their own clients, particularly in futures. The causes of this
opinion, erroneously, though quite honestly held, are probably to be looked
for partly in the habit of acting as principal on the market in accordance
with the rules, partly in the forms of contract notes containing "principal
clauses" which they send to their clients, and perhaps, also, in the
occasional difficulty of effecting actual contracts on the market at the
time when they are instructed so to do.

A _stockbroker_ is a broker who contracts for the sale of stocks and
shares. Stockbrokers differ from brokers proper chiefly in that stocks and
shares are not "goods," and the requirement of a memorandum in writing,
enacted by the Sale of Goods Act 1893, does not apply. Hence actions may be
brought by the principals to a contract for the sale of stocks and shares
although no memorandum in writing exists. For instance, the jobber, on
failing to recover from the buyer's broker the price of shares sold, by
reason of the broker having failed and been declared a defaulter, may sue
the buyer whose "name was passed" by the broker. The employment of a
stockbroker is subject to the rules and customs of the Stock Exchange, in
accordance with the principles discussed above, which apply to the
employment of brokers proper. A custom which is illegal, such as the Stock
Exchange practice of disregarding Leeman's Act (1867), which enacts that
contracts for the sale of joint-stock bank shares shall be void unless the
registered numbers of the shares are stated therein, is not binding on the
client to the extent of making the contract of sale valid. But if a client
choose to instruct his broker to buy bank shares in accordance with that
practice, the broker is entitled to be indemnified by his client for money
which he pays on his behalf, even though the contract of sale so made is
unenforceable. For further information the reader is referred to the
article STOCK EXCHANGE and to the treatises on stock exchange law.

An _insurance broker_ is an agent whose business is to effect policies of
marine insurance. He is employed by the person who has an interest to
insure, pays the premiums to the underwriter, takes up the policy, and
receives from the underwriter payment in the event of a loss under the
policy. By the custom of the trade the underwriter looks solely to the
broker for payment of premiums, and has no right of action against the
assured; and, on the other hand, the broker is paid his commission by the
underwriter, although he is employed by the assured. Usually the broker
keeps a current account with the underwriter, and premiums and losses are
dealt with in account. It is only in the event of the underwriter refusing
to pay on a loss, that the broker drops out and the assured sues the
underwriter direct. Agents who effect life, fire or other policies, are not
known as insurance brokers.

_Ship-brokers_ are, firstly, "commission agents," and, secondly, very often
also ships' managers. Their office is to act as agents for owners of ships
to procure purchasers for ships, or ships for intending purchasers, in
precisely the same manner as house-agents act in respect of houses. They
also act as agents for ship-owners in finding charterers for their ships,
or for charterers in finding ships available for charter, and in either
case they effect the charter-party (see AFFREIGHTMENT).

Chartering brokers are customarily paid by the ship-owner, when the
charter-party is effected, whether originally employed by him or by the
charterer. Charter-parties effected through brokers often contain a
provision--"_21/2% on estimated amount of freight to be paid to A B, broker,
on the signing of this charter-party, and the ship to be consigned to him
for ship's business at the port of X_ [inserting the name of the port where
A B carries on business]." The broker cannot sue on the charter-party
contract because he is not a party to it, but the insertion of the clause
practically prevents his right from being disputed by the ship-owner. When
the broker does the ship's business in port, it is his duty to clear her at
the customs and generally to act as "ship's husband."

A _bill-broker_ was originally an agent who, for a commission, procured for
country bankers the discounting of their bills in London. But the practice
arose of the broker guaranteeing the London banker or financier; and
finally the brokers ceased to deposit with the London bankers the bills
they received, and at the present day a bill-broker, as a rule, buys bills
on his own account at a discount, borrows money on his own account and upon
his own security at interest, and makes his profit out of the difference
between the discount and the interest. When acting thus the bill-broker is
not a broker at all, as he deals as principal and does not act as agent.

AUTHORITIES.--Story, _Commentaries on the Law of Agency_ (Boston, 1882);
Brodhurst, _Law and Practice of the Stock Exchange_ (London, 1897); Gow,
_Handbook of Marine Insurance_ (London, 1900); Arnould, _On Marine
Insurance_, edited by Messrs Hart & Simey (1901); J.R. Dos Passos, _Law of
Stock-Brokers and Stock Exchanges_ (New York, 1905).

(L. F. S.)

BROMBERG, a town of Germany, in the Prussian province of Posen, 32 m. by
rail W.N.W. from the fortress of Thorn, 7 m. W. from the bank of the
Vistula, and at the centre of an important network of railways, connecting
it with the strategical points on the Prusso-Russian frontier. Pop. (1900)
52,082; (1905) 54,229. Its public buildings comprise two Roman Catholic and
three Protestant churches, a Jewish synagogue, a seminary, high grade
schools and a theatre. The town also possesses a bronze statue of the
emperor William I., a monument of the war of 1870-71, and a statue of
Benkenhoff, the constructor of the Bromberg Canal. This engineering work,
constructed in 1773-1774, by command of Frederick II., connects the Brahe
with the Netze, and thus establishes communication between the Vistula, the
Oder and the Elbe. The principal industrial works are iron foundries and
machine shops, paper factories and flour mills; the town has, moreover, an
active trade in agricultural and other products. In view of its strategical
position, a large garrison is concentrated in and about the town. Bromberg
is mentioned as early as 1252. It fell soon afterwards into the hands of
the Poles, from whom it was taken in 1327 by the Teutonic Order, which held
it till 1343, when the Poles recaptured it. Destroyed in the course of
these struggles, it was restored by Casimir of Poland in 1346, and down to
the close of the 16th century it continued to be a flourishing commercial
city. It afterwards suffered so much from war and pestilence that about
1772, when the Prussians took possession, it contained only from five to
six hundred inhabitants. By the treaty of Tilsit it was transferred to the
duchy of Warsaw; in 1813 it was occupied by the Russians, and in 1815 was
restored to Prussia.

BROME, ALEXANDER (1620-1666), English poet, was by profession an attorney,
and was the author of many drinking songs and of satirical verses in favour
of the Royalists and against the Rump. He published in 1661 _Songs and
other Poems_, containing songs on various subjects, followed by a series of
political songs; ballads, epistles, elegies and epitaphs; epigrams and
translations. Izaak Walton wrote an introductory eclogue for this volume in
praise of the writer, and his gaiety and wit won for him the title of the
"English Anacreon" in Edward Phillips's _Theatrum Poetarum_. Brome
published in 1666 a translation of Horace by himself and others, and was
the author of a comedy entitled _The Cunning Lovers_ (1654). He also edited
two volumes of Richard Brome's plays.

BROME, RICHARD (d. 1652), English dramatist, was originally a servant of
Ben Jonson, and owed much to his master. The development of his plots, the
strongly marked characters and the amount of curious information to be
found in his work, all show Jonson's influence. The relation of master and
servant developed into friendship, and our knowledge of Brome's personal
character is chiefly drawn from Ben Jonson's lines to him, prefixed to _The
Northern Lasse_ (1632), the play which made Brome's reputation. Brome's
genius lay entirely in comedy. He has left fifteen pieces. _Five New
Playes_ (ed. by Alex. Brome, 1652?) contained _Madd Couple Well Matcht_
(acted 1639?); [v.04 p.0632] _Novella_ (acted 1632); _Court Begger_ (acted
1632); _City Witt; The Damoiselle or the New Ordinary. Five New Playes_
(1659) included _The English Moor, or The Mock Marriage; The Love-Sick
Court, or The Ambitious Politique; Covent Garden Weeded; The New Academy,
or The New Exchange_; and _The Queen and Concubine_. _The Antipodes_ (acted
1638, pr. 1640); _The Sparagus Garden_ (acted 1635, pr. 1640); _A Joviall
Crew, or the Merry Beggars_ (acted 1641, pr. 1652, revised in 1731 as an
"opera"), and _The Queenes Exchange_ (pr. 1657), were published separately.
He collaborated with Thomas Heywood in _The late Lancashire Witches_ (pr.
1634).

See A.W. Ward, _History of English Dramatic Literature_, vol. iii. pp.
125-131 (1899). _The Dramatic Works of Richard Brome ..._ were published in
1873.

[Illustration: FIG. 1.--Fruit of the pine-apple (_Ananas sativa_),
consisting of numerous flowers and bracts united together so as to form a
collective or anthocarpous fruit. The crown of the pine-apple, c, consists
of a series of empty bracts prolonged beyond the fruit.]

[Illustration: FIG. 2.--_Tillandsia usneoides_, Spanish moss, slightly
reduced. 1, Small branch with flower; 2, flower cut vertically; 3, section
of seed of _Bromelia_.

(From _The Botanical Magazine_, by permission of Lovell, Reeve & Co)]

BROMELIACEAE, in botany, a natural order of Monocotyledons, confined to
tropical and sub-tropical America. It includes the pine-apple (fig. 1) and
the so-called Spanish moss (fig. 2), a rootless plant, which hangs in long
grey lichen-like festoons from the branches of trees, a native of Mexico
and the southern United States; the water required for food is absorbed
from the moisture in the air by peculiar hairs which cover the surface of
the shoots. The plants are generally herbs with a much shortened stem
bearing a rosette of leaves and a spike or panicle of flowers. They are
eminently dry-country plants (xerophytes); the narrow leaves are protected
from loss of water by a thick cuticle, and have a well-developed sheath
which embraces the stem and forms, with the sheaths of the other leaves of
the rosette, a basin in which water collects, with fragments of rotting
leaves and the like. Peculiar hairs are developed on the inner surface of
the sheath by which the water and dissolved substances are absorbed, thus
helping to feed the plant. The leaf-margins are often spiny, and the
leaf-spines of _Puya chilensis_ are used by the natives as fish-hooks.
Several species are grown as hot-house plants for the bright colour of
their flowers or flower-bracts, e.g. species of _Tillandsia_, _Billbergia_,
_Aechmea_ and others.

BROMINE (symbol Br, atomic weight 79.96), a chemical element of the halogen
group, which takes its name from its pungent unpleasant smell ([Greek:
bromos], a stench). It was first isolated by A.J. Balard in 1826 from the
salts in the waters of the Mediterranean. He established its elementary
character, and his researches were amplified by K.J. Loewig (1803-1890) in
_Das Brom und seine chemischen Verhaltnisse_ (1829). Bromine does not occur
in nature in the uncombined condition, but in combination with various
metals is very widely but sparingly distributed. Potassium, sodium and
magnesium bromides are found in mineral waters, in river and sea-water, and
occasionally in marine plants and animals. Its chief commercial sources are
the salt deposits at Stassfurt in Prussian Saxony, in which magnesium
bromide is found associated with various chlorides, and the brines of
Michigan, Ohio, Pennsylvania and West Virginia, U.S.A.; small quantities
are obtained from the mother liquors of Chile saltpetre and kelp. In
combination with silver it is found as the mineral bromargyrite (bromite).

_Manufacture._--The chief centres of the bromine industry are Stassfurt and
the central district of Michigan. It is manufactured from the magnesium
bromide contained in "bittern" (the mother liquor of the salt industry), by
two processes, the continuous and the periodic. The continuous process
depends upon the decomposition of the bromide by chlorine, which is
generated in special stills. A regular current of chlorine mixed with steam
is led in at the bottom of a tall tower filled with broken bricks, and
there meets a descending stream of hot bittern: bromine is liberated and is
swept out of the tower together with some chlorine, by the current of
steam, and then condensed in a worm. Any uncondensed bromine vapour is
absorbed by moist iron borings, and the resulting iron bromide is used for
the manufacture of potassium bromide. The periodic process depends on the
interaction between manganese dioxide (pyrolusite), sulphuric acid, and a
bromide, and the operation is carried out in sandstone stills heated to 60 deg.
C., the product being condensed as in the continuous process. The
substitution of potassium chlorate for pyrolusite is recommended when
calcium chloride is present in the bittern. The crude bromine is purified
by repeated shaking with potassium, sodium or ferrous bromide and
subsequent redistillation. Commercial bromine is rarely pure, the chief
impurities present in it being chlorine, hydrobromic acid, and bromoform
(M. Hermann, _Annalen_, 1855, 95, p. 211). E. Gessner (_Berichte_, 1876, 9,
p. 1507) removes chlorine by repeated shaking with water, followed by
distillation over sulphuric acid; hydrobromic acid is removed by
distillation with pure manganese dioxide, or mercuric oxide, and the
product dried over sulphuric acid. J.S. Stas, in his stoichiometric
researches, prepared chemically pure bromine from potassium bromide, by
converting it into the bromate which was purified by repeated
crystallization. By heating the bromate it was partially converted into the
bromide, and the resulting mixture was distilled with sulphuric acid. The
distillate was further purified by digestion with milk of lime,
precipitation with water, and further digestion with calcium bromide and
barium oxide, and was finally redistilled.

_Characters._--Bromine at ordinary temperatures is a mobile liquid of fine
red colour, which appears almost black in thick layers. It boils at 59 deg. C.
According to Sir W. Ramsay and S. Young, bromine, when dried over sulphuric
acid, boils at 57.65 deg. C., and when dried over phosphorus pentoxide, boils
at 58.85 deg. C. (under a pressure of 755.8 mm.), forming a deep red vapour,
which exerts an irritating and directly poisonous action on the respiratory
organs. It solidifies at -21 deg. C. (Quincke) to a dark brown solid. Its
specific gravity is 3.18828 (0/4 deg.), latent heat of fusion 16.185 calories,
latent heat of vaporization 45.6 calories, specific heat 0.1071. The
specific heat of bromine vapour, at constant pressure, is 0.05504 and at
constant volume is 0.04251 (K. Strecker). Bromine is soluble in water, to
the extent of 3.226 grammes of bromine per 100 grammes of solution at 15 deg.
C., the solubility being slightly increased by the presence of potassium
bromide. The solution is of an orange-red colour, and is quite permanent in
the dark, but on exposure to light, gradually becomes colourless, owing to
decomposition into hydrobromic acid and oxygen. By cooling the aqueous
solution, hyacinth-red octahedra of a crystalline hydrate of composition
Br.4H_2O or Br_2.8H_2O are obtained (Bakhuis Roozeboom, _Zeits. phys.
Chem._, 1888, 2. p. 449). Bromine is readily soluble in chloroform, alcohol
and ether.

Its chemical properties are in general intermediate between those of
chlorine and iodine; thus it requires the presence of a catalytic agent, or
a fairly high temperature, to bring about its union with hydrogen. It does
not combine directly with oxygen, nitrogen or carbon. With the other
elements it unites to form bromides, often with explosive violence;
phosphorus detonates in liquid bromine and inflames in the vapour; iron is
occasionally used to absorb bromine vapour, potassium reacts energetically,
but sodium requires to be heated to 200 deg. C. The chief use of bromine in
analytical chemistry is based upon the oxidizing action of bromine water.
Bromine and bromine water both bleach organic colouring matters. [v.04
p.0633] The use of bromine in the extraction of gold (_q.v._) was proposed
by R. Wagner (_Dingler's Journal_, 218, p. 253) and others, but its cost
has restricted its general application. Bromine is used extensively in
organic chemistry as a substituting and oxidizing agent and also for the
preparation of addition compounds. Reactions in which it is used in the
liquid form, in vapour, in solution, and in the presence of the so-called
"bromine carriers," have been studied. Sunlight affects the action of
bromine vapour on organic compounds in various ways, sometimes retarding or
accelerating the reaction, while in some cases the products are different
(J. Schramm, _Monatshefte fur Chemie_, 1887, 8, p. 101). Some reactions,
which are only possible by the aid of nascent bromine, are carried out by
using solutions of sodium bromide and bromate, with the amount of sulphuric
acid calculated according to the equation 5NaBr + NaBrO_3 + 6H_2SO_4 =
6NaHSO_4 + 3H_2O + 6Br. (German Patent, 26642.) The diluents in which
bromine is employed are usually ether, chloroform, acetic acid,
hydrochloric acid, carbon bisulphide and water, and, less commonly,
alcohol, potassium bromide and hydrobromic acid; the excess of bromine
being removed by heating, by sulphurous acid or by shaking with mercury.
The choice of solvent is important, for the velocity of the reaction and
the nature of the product may vary according to the solvent used, thus A.
Baeyer and F. Blom found that on brominating orthoacetamido-acetophenone in
presence of water or acetic acid, the bromine goes into the benzene
nucleus, whilst in chloroform or sulphuric acid or by use of bromine vapour
it goes into the side chain as well. The action of bromine is sometimes
accelerated by the use of compounds which behave catalytically, the more
important of these substances being iodine, iron, ferric chloride, ferric
bromide, aluminium bromide and phosphorus. For oxidizing purposes bromine
is generally employed in aqueous and in alkaline solutions, one of its most
important applications being by Emil Fischer (_Berichte_, 1889, 22, p. 362)
in his researches on the sugars. The atomic weight of bromine has been
determined by J.S. Stas and C. Marignac from the analysis of potassium
bromide, and of silver bromide. G.P. Baxter (_Zeit. anorg. Chem._ 1906, 50,
p. 389) determined the ratios Ag: AgBr, and AgCl: Ag Br.

_Hydrobromic Acid._--This acid, HBr, the only compound of hydrogen and
bromine, is in many respects similar to hydrochloric acid, but is rather
less stable. It may be prepared by passing hydrogen gas and bromine vapour
through a tube containing a heated platinum spiral. It cannot be prepared
with any degree of purity by the action of concentrated sulphuric acid on
bromides, since secondary reactions take place, leading to the liberation
of free bromine and formation of sulphur dioxide. The usual method employed
for the preparation of the gas consists in dropping bromine on to a mixture
of amorphous phosphorus and water, when a violent reaction takes place and
the gas is rapidly liberated. It can be obtained also, although in a
somewhat impure condition, by the direct action of bromine on various
saturated hydrocarbons (e.g. paraffin-wax), while an aqueous solution may
be obtained by passing sulphuretted hydrogen through bromine water.
Alexander Scott (_Journal of Chem. Soc._, 1900, 77, p. 648) prepares pure
hydrobromic acid by covering bromine, which is contained in a large flask,
with a layer of water, and passing sulphur dioxide into the water above the
surface of the bromine, until the whole is of a pale yellow colour; the
resulting solution is then distilled in a slow current of air and finally
purified by distillation over barium bromide. At ordinary temperatures
hydrobromic acid is a colourless gas which fumes strongly in moist air, and
has an acid taste and reaction. It can be condensed to a liquid, which
boils at -64.9 deg. C. (under a pressure of 738.2 mm.), and, by still further
cooling, gives colourless crystals which melt at -88.5 deg. C. It is readily
soluble in water, forming the aqueous acid, which when saturated at 0 deg. C.
has a specific gravity of 1.78. When boiled, the aqueous acid loses either
acid or water until a solution of constant boiling point is obtained,
containing 48% of the acid and boiling at 126 deg. C. under atmospheric
pressure; should the pressure, however, vary, the strength of the solution
boiling at a constant temperature varies also. Hydrobromic acid is one of
the "strong" acids, being ionized to a very large extent even in
concentrated solution, as shown by the molecular conductivity increasing by
only a small amount over a wide range of dilution.

_Bromides._--Hydrobromic acid reacts with metallic oxides, hydroxides and
carbonates to form bromides, which can in many cases be obtained also by
the direct union of the metals with bromine. As a class, the metallic
bromides are solids at ordinary temperatures, which fuse readily and
volatilize on heating. The majority are soluble in water, the chief
exceptions being silver bromide, mercurous bromide, palladious bromide and
lead bromide; the last is, however, soluble in hot water. They are
decomposed by chlorine, with liberation of bromine and formation of
metallic chlorides; concentrated sulphuric acid also decomposes them, with
formation of a metallic sulphate and liberation of bromine and sulphur
dioxide. The non-metallic bromides are usually liquids, which are readily
decomposed by water. Hydrobromic acid and its salts can be readily detected
by the addition of chlorine water to their aqueous solutions, when bromine
is liberated; or by warming with concentrated sulphuric acid and manganese
dioxide, the same result being obtained. Silver nitrate in the presence of
nitric acid gives with bromides a pale yellow precipitate of silver
bromide, AgBr, which is sparingly soluble in ammonia. For their
quantitative determination they are precipitated in nitric acid solution by
means of silver nitrate, and the silver bromide well washed, dried and
weighed.

No oxides of bromine have as yet been isolated, but three oxy-acids are
known, namely hypobromous acid, HBrO, bromous acid, HBrO_2, and bromic
acid, HBrO_3. Hypobromous acid is obtained by shaking together bromine
water and precipitated mercuric oxide, followed by distillation of the
dilute solution _in vacuo_ at low temperature (about 40 deg. C.). It is a very
unstable compound, breaking up, on heating, into bromine and oxygen. The
aqueous solution is light yellow in colour, and possesses strong bleaching
properties. Bromous acid is formed by adding bromine to a saturated
solution of silver nitrate (A. H. Richards, _J. Soc Chem. Ind._, 1906, 25,
p. 4). Bromic acid is obtained by the addition of the calculated amount of
sulphuric acid (previously diluted with water) to the barium salt; by the
action of bromine on the silver salt, in the presence of water, 5AgBrO_3 +
3Br_2 + 3H_2O = 5AgBr + 6HBrO_3, or by passing chlorine through a solution
of bromine in water. The acid is only known in the form of its aqueous
solution; this is, however, very unstable, decomposing on being heated to
100 deg. C. into water, oxygen and bromine. By reducing agents such, for
example, as sulphuretted hydrogen and sulphur-dioxide, it is rapidly
converted into hydrobromic acid. Hydrobromic acid decomposes it according
to the equation HBrO_3 + 5HBr = 3H_2O + 3Br_2. Its salts are known as
bromates, and are as a general rule difficultly soluble in water, and
decomposed by heat, with evolution of oxygen.

_Applications._--The salts of bromine are widely used in photography,
especially bromide of silver. For antiseptic purposes it has been prepared
as "bromum solidificatum," which consists of kieselguhr or similar
substance impregnated with about 75% of its weight of bromine. In medicine
it is largely employed in the form of bromides of potassium, sodium and
ammonium, as well as in combination with alkaloids and other substances.

_Medicinal Use._--Bromide of potassium is the safest and most generally
applicable sedative of the nervous system. Whilst very weak, its action is
perfectly balanced throughout all nervous tissue, so much so that Sir
Thomas Lauder Brunton has suggested its action to be due to its replacement
of sodium chloride (common salt) in the fluids of the nervous system. Hence
bromide of potassium--or bromide of sodium, which is possibly somewhat
safer still though not quite so certain in its action--is used as a
hypnotic, as the standard anaphrodisiac, as a sedative in mania and all
forms of morbid mental excitement, and in hyperaesthesia of all kinds. Its
most striking success is in epilepsy, for which it is the specific remedy.
It may be given in doses of from ten to fifty grains or more, and may be
continued without ill effect for long periods in grave cases of epilepsy
(_grand mal_). Of the three bromides in common use the potassium salt is
the most rapid and certain in its action, but may depress the heart in
morbid states of that organ; in such cases the sodium salt--of which the
base is inert--may be employed. In whooping-cough, when a sedative is
required but a stimulant is also indicated, ammonium bromide is often
invaluable. The conditions in which bromides are most frequently used are
insomnia, epilepsy, whooping-cough, delirium tremens, asthma, migraine,
laryngismus stridulus, the symptoms often attendant upon the climacteric in
women, hysteria, neuralgia, certain nervous disorders of the heart,
strychnine poisoning, nymphomania and spermatorrhoea. Hydrobromic acid is
often used to relieve or prevent the headache and singing in the ears that
may follow the administration of quinine and of salicylic acid or
salicylates.

BROMLEY, SIR THOMAS (1530-1587), English lord chancellor, was born in
Staffordshire in 1530. He was educated at Oxford University and called to
the bar at the Middle Temple. Through family influence as well as the
patronage of Sir Nicholas Bacon, the lord keeper, he quickly made progress
in his profession. In 1566 he was appointed recorder of London, and in 1569
he became solicitor-general. He sat in parliament successively for
Bridgnorth, Wigan and Guildford. On the death of Sir Nicholas Bacon in 1579
he was appointed lord chancellor. As an equity judge he showed great and
profound knowledge, and his judgment in Shelley's case (_q.v._) is a
landmark in the history of English real property law. He presided over the
commission which tried Mary, queen of Scots, in 1586, but the strain of the
trial, coupled with the responsibility which her execution involved upon
him, proved too much for his strength, and he died on the 12th of April
1587. He was buried in Westminster Abbey.

See Foss, _Lives of the Judges_; Campbell, _Lives of the Lord Chancellors_.

BROMLEY, a municipal borough in the Sevenoaks parliamentary division of
Kent, England, 101/2 m. S.E. by S. of London by the South Eastern & Chatham
railway. Pop. (1901) 27,354. It lies on high ground north of the small
river Ravensbourne, in a well-wooded district, and has become a favourite
residential locality for those whose business lies in London. The former
palace of the bishops of Rochester was erected in 1777 in room [v.04
p.0634] of an older structure. The manor belonged to this see as early as
the reign of Ethelbert. In the gardens is a chalybeate spring known as St
Blaize's Well, which was in high repute before the Reformation. The church
of St Peter and St Paul, mainly Perpendicular, retains a Norman font and
other remains of an earlier building. Here is the gravestone of the wife of
Dr Johnson. Bromley College, founded by Bishop Warner in 1666 for "twenty
poor widows of loyal and orthodox clergymen," has been much enlarged, and
forty widows are in receipt of support. Sheppard College (1840) is an
affiliated foundation for unmarried daughters of these widows. In the
vicinity of Bromley, Bickley is a similar residential township, Hayes
Common is a favourite place of excursion, and at Holwood Hill near Keston
are remains of a large encampment known as Caesar's Camp. Bromley was
incorporated in 1903, and is governed by a mayor, 6 aldermen and 18
councillors. Area, 4703 acres.

[Illustration]

BROMLITE, a member of the aragonite group of minerals. It consists of an
isomorphous mixture of calcium and barium carbonates in various
proportions, (Ca, Ba) CO_3, and thus differs chemically from barytocalcite
(_q.v._) which is a double salt of these carbonates in equal molecular
proportions. Being isomorphous with aragonite, it crystallizes in the
orthorhombic system, but simple crystals are not known. The crystals are
invariably complex twins, and have the form of doubly terminated
pseudo-hexagonal pyramids, like those of witherite but more acute; the
faces are horizontally striated and are divided down their centre by a
twin-suture, as represented in the adjoining figure. The examination in
polarized light of a transverse section shows that each compound crystal is
built up of six differently orientated individuals arranged in twelve
segments. The crystals are translucent and white, sometimes with a shade of
pink. Sp. gr. 3.706; hardness 4-41/2. The mineral has been found at only two
localities, both of which are in the north of England. At the Fallowfield
lead mine, near Hexham in Northumberland, it is associated with witherite;
and at Bromley Hill, near Alston in Cumberland, it occurs in veins with
galena. The species was named bromlite by T. Thomson in 1837, and alstonite
by A. Breithaupt in 1841, both of which names, derived from the locality,
have been in common use.

(L. J. S.)

BROMPTON, a western district of London, England, in the south-east of the
metropolitan borough of Kensington. Brompton Road, leading south-west from
Knightsbridge, is continued as Old Brompton Road and Richmond Road, to join
Lillie Road, at which point are the District and West London railway
stations of West Brompton. The Oratory of St Philip Neri, commonly called
Brompton Oratory, close by the Victoria and Albert Museum, the Brompton
consumption hospital and the West London or Brompton cemetery are included
in this district, which is mainly occupied by residences of the better
class. (See KENSINGTON.)

BROMSGROVE, a market town in the Eastern parliamentary division of
Worcestershire, England, 12 m. N.N.E. of Worcester, with a station 1 m.
from the town on the Bristol-Birmingham line of the Midland railway. Pop.
of urban district (1901) 8418. It lies in a pleasant undulating district
near the foot of the Lickey Hills, to surmount which the railway towards
Birmingham here ascends for 2 m. one of the steepest gradients in England
over such a distance. There remain several picturesque half-timbered
houses, dating from 1572 and later. The church of St John is a fine
building, Perpendicular and earlier in date, picturesquely placed on an
elevation above the town, with a lofty tower and spire. There are a
well-known grammar-school, founded by Edward VI., with university
scholarships; a college school, a literary institute, and a school of art.
Birmingham Sanatorium stands in the parish. Cloth was formerly a staple of
trade, but manufactures of nails and buttons are now pre-eminent, while the
river Salwarpe works a number of mills in the neighbourhood, and near the
town are carriage works belonging to the Midland railway.

BRONCHIECTASIS (Gr. [Greek: bronchia], bronchial tubes, and [Greek:
ektasis], extension), dilatation of the bronchi, a condition occurring in
connexion with many diseases of the lungs. Bronchitis both acute and
chronic, chronic pneumonia and phthisis, acute pneumonia and
broncho-pneumonia, may all leave after them a bronchiectasis whose position
is determined by the primary lesion. Other causes, acting mechanically, are
tracheal and bronchial obstruction, as from the pressure of an aneurism,
new growth, &c. It used to be considered a disease of middle age, but of
late years Dr Walter Carr has shown that the condition is a fairly common
one among debilitated children after measles, whooping cough, &c. The
dilatation is commonly cylindrical, more rarely saccular, and it is the
medium and smaller sized tubes that are generally affected, except where
the cause is mechanical. The affection is usually of one lung only.
Emphysema is a very common accompaniment. Though at first the symptoms
somewhat resemble those of bronchitis, later they are quite distinctive.
Cough is very markedly paroxysmal in character, and though severe is
intermittent, the patient being entirely free for many hours at the time.
The effect of posture is very marked. If the patient lie on the affected
side, he may be free from cough the whole night, but if he turn to the
sound side, or if he rises and bends forward, he brings up large quantities
of bronchial secretion. The expectoration is characterized by its abundance
and manner of expulsion. Where the dilatation is of the saccular variety,
it may come up in such quantities and with so much suddenness as to gush
from the mouth. It is very commonly foetid, as it is retained and
decomposed _in situ_. Dyspnoea and haemoptysis occasionally occur, but are
by no means the rule. If pyrexia is present, it is a serious symptom, as it
is a sign of septic absorption in the bronchi, and may be the forerunner of
gangrene. If gangrene does set in, it will be accompanied by severe attacks
of shivering and sweating. Where the disease has lasted long, clubbing of
fingers and toes is very common. The diagnosis from putrid bronchitis is
usually fairly easily made, but at times it may be a matter of extreme
difficulty to distinguish between this condition and a tuberculous cavity
in the lung. Nothing can be done directly to cure this disease, but the
patient's condition can be greatly alleviated. Creosote vapour baths are
eminently satisfactory. A mechanical treatment much recommended by some of
the German physicians is that of forced expiration.

BRONCHITIS, the name given to inflammation of the mucous membrane of the
bronchial tubes (see RESPIRATORY SYSTEM: _Pathology_). Two main varieties
are described, specific and non-specific bronchitis. The bronchitis which
occurs in infectious or specific disorders, as diphtheria, influenza,
measles, pneumonia, &c., due to the micro-organisms observed in these
diseases, is known as specific; whereas that which results from extension
from above, or from chemical or mechanical irritation, is known as
non-specific. It is convenient to describe it, however, under the chemical
divisions of _acute_ and _chronic_ bronchitis.

_Acute bronchitis_, like other inflammatory affections of the chest,
generally arises as the result of exposure to cold, particularly if
accompanied with damp, or of sudden change from a heated to a cool
atmosphere. The symptoms vary according to the severity of the attack, and
more especially according to the extent to which the inflammatory action
spreads in the bronchial tubes. The disease usually manifests itself at
first in the form of a catarrh, or common cold; but the accompanying
feverishness and general constitutional disturbance proclaim the attack to
be something more severe, and symptoms denoting the onset of bronchitis
soon present themselves. A short, painful, dry cough, accompanied with
rapid and wheezing respiration, a feeling of rawness and pain in the throat
and behind the breast bone, and of oppression or tightness throughout the
chest, mark the early stages of the disease. In some cases, from the first,
symptoms of the form of asthma (_q.v._) known as the _bronchitic_ are
superadded, and greatly aggravate the patient's suffering.

[v.04 p.0635] After a few days expectoration begins to come with the cough,
at first scanty and viscid or frothy, but soon becoming copious and of
purulent character. In general, after free expectoration has been
established the more urgent and painful symptoms abate; and while the cough
may persist for a length of time, often extending to three or four weeks,
in the majority of instances convalescence advances, and the patient is
ultimately restored to health, although there is not unfrequently left a
tendency to a recurrence of the disease on exposure to its exciting causes.

When the ear or the stethoscope is applied to the chest of a person
suffering from such an attack as that now described, there are heard in the
earlier stages snoring or cooing sounds, mixed up with others of wheezing
or fine whistling quality, accompanying respiration. These are denominated
dry sounds, and they are occasionally so abundant and distinct, as to
convey their vibrations to the hand applied to the chest, as well as to be
audible to a bystander at some distance. As the disease progresses these
sounds become to a large extent replaced by others of crackling or bubbling
character, which are termed moist sounds or rales. Both these kinds of
abnormal sounds are readily explained by a reference to the pathological
condition of the parts. One of the first effects of inflammation upon the
bronchial mucous membrane is to cause some degree of swelling, which,
together with the presence of a tough secretion closely adhering to it,
tends to diminish the calibre of the tubes. The respired air as it passes
over this surface gives rise to the dry or sonorous breath sounds, the
coarser being generated in the large, and the finer or wheezing sounds in
the small divisions of the bronchi. Before long, however, the discharge
from the bronchial mucous membrane becomes more abundant and less
glutinous, and accumulates in the tubes till dislodged by coughing. The
respired air, as it passes through this fluid, causes the moist rales above
described. In most instances both moist and dry sounds are heard abundantly
in the same case, since different portions of the bronchial tubes are
affected at different times in the course of the disease.

Such are briefly the main characteristics presented by an ordinary attack
of acute bronchitis running a favourable course. The case is, however, very
different when the inflammation spreads into, or when it primarily affects,
the minute ramifications of the bronchial tubes which are in immediate
relation to the air-cells of the lungs, giving rise to that form of the
disease known as _capillary bronchitis_ or _broncho-pneumonia_ (see
RESPIRATORY SYSTEM: _Pathology_; and PNEUMONIA). When this takes place all
the symptoms already detailed become greatly intensified, and the patient's
life is placed in imminent peril in consequence of the interruption to the
entrance of air into the lungs, and thus to the due aeration of the blood.
The feverishness and restlessness increase, the cough becomes incessant,
the respiration extremely rapid and laboured, the nostrils dilating with
each effort, and evidence of impending suffocation appears. The surface of
the body is pale or dusky, the lips are livid, while breathing becomes
increasingly difficult, and is attended with suffocative paroxysms which
render the recumbent posture impossible. Unless speedy relief is obtained
by successful efforts to clear the chest by coughing and expectoration, the
patient's strength gives way, somnolence and delirium set in and death
ensues. All this may be brought about in the space of a few days, and such
cases, particularly among the very young, sometimes prove fatal within
forty-eight hours.

Acute bronchitis must at all times be looked upon as a severe and even
serious ailment, but there are certain circumstances under which its
occurrence is a matter of special anxiety to the physician. It is
pre-eminently dangerous at the extremes of life, and mortality statistics
show it to be one of the most fatal of the diseases of those periods. This
is to be explained not only by the well-recognized fact that all acute
diseases tell with great severity on the feeble frames alike of infants and
aged people, but more particularly by the tendency which bronchitis
undoubtedly has in attacking them to assume the capillary form, and when it
does so to prove quickly fatal. The importance, therefore, of early
attention to the slightest evidence of bronchitis among the very young or
the aged can scarcely be overrated.

Bronchitis is also apt to be very severe when it occurs in persons who are
addicted to intemperance. Again, in those who suffer from any disease
affecting directly or indirectly the respiratory functions, such as
consumption or heart disease, the supervention of an attack of acute
bronchitis is an alarming complication, increasing, as it necessarily does,
the embarrassment of breathing. The same remark is applicable to those
numerous instances of its occurrence in children who are or have been
suffering from such diseases as have always associated with them a certain
degree of bronchial irritation, such as measles and whooping-cough.

One other source of danger of a special character in bronchitis remains to
be mentioned, viz. collapse of the lung. Occasionally a branch of a
bronchial tube becomes plugged up with secretion, so that the area of the
lung to which this branch conducts ceases to be inflated on inspiration.
The small quantity of air imprisoned in the portion of lung gradually
escapes, but no fresh air enters, and the part collapses and becomes of
solid consistence. Increased difficulty of breathing is the result, and
where a large portion of lung is affected by the plugging up of a large
bronchus, a fatal result may rapidly follow, the danger being specially
great in the case of children. Fortunately, the obstruction may sometimes
be removed by vigorous coughing, and relief is then obtained.

With respect to the treatment of acute bronchitis, in those mild cases
which are more of the nature of a simple catarrh, little else will be found
necessary than confinement in a warm room, or in bed, for a few days, and
the use of light diet, together with warm diluent drinks. Additional
measures are however called for when the disease is more markedly
developed. Medicines to allay fever and promote perspiration are highly
serviceable in the earlier stages. Later, with the view of soothing the
pain of the cough, and favouring expectoration, mixtures of tolu, with the
addition of some opiate, such as the ordinary paregorics, may be
advantageously employed. The use of opium, however, in any form should not
be resorted to in the case of young children without medical advice, since
its action on them is much more potent and less under control than it is in
adults. Not a few of the so-called "soothing mixtures" have been found to
contain opium in quantity sufficient to prove dangerous when administered
to children, and caution is necessary in using them.

From the outset of the attack the employment of fomentations, or especially
a turpentine stupe, gives great relief, and occasionally in the
non-specific form this treatment, combined with a good dose of calomel and
salts, may render the attack abortive. Some relief is always obtained by
inhalations, and theoretically, an acute specific bronchitis should be
successfully treated by inhalation of antiseptic and soothing remedies. In
practice, however, it is found that the strength cannot be sufficiently
strong to destroy the bacteria in the bronchial tubes. However, much relief
is obtained from the use of steam atomizers filled with an aqueous solution
of compound tincture of benzoin, creosote or guaiacol. A still more
practicable means of introducing volatile antiseptic oils is the globe
nebulizer, which throws oleaginous solutions in the form of a fine fog,
that can be deeply inhaled. Menthol, eucalyptol and white pine extract are
some of the remedies that may be tried dissolved in benzoinol, to which
cocaine or opium may be added if the cough is troublesome.

When the bronchitis is of the capillary form, the great object is to
maintain the patient's strength, and to endeavour to secure the expulsion
of the morbid secretion from the fine bronchi. In addition to the remedies
already alluded to, stimulants are called for from the first; and should
the cough be ineffectual in relieving the bronchial tubes, the
administration of an emetic dose of sulphate of zinc may produce a good
effect.

During the whole course of any attack of bronchitis attention must be paid
to the due nourishment of the patient; and during the subsequent
convalescence, which, particularly in elderly persons, is apt to be slow,
tonics and stimulants may have to be prescribed.

[v.04 p.0636] _Chronic bronchitis_ may arise as the result of repeated
attacks of the acute form, or it may exist altogether independently. It
occurs more frequently among persons advanced in life than among the young,
although no age is exempt from it. The usual history of this form of
bronchitis is that of a cough recurring during the colder seasons of the
year, and in its earlier stages, departing entirely in summer, so that it
is frequently called "winter cough." In many persons subject to it,
however, attacks are apt to be excited at any time by very slight causes,
such as changes in the weather; and in advanced cases of the disease the
cough is seldom altogether absent. The symptoms and auscultatory signs of
chronic bronchitis are on the whole similar to those pertaining to the
acute form, except that the febrile disturbance and pain are much less
marked. The cough is usually more troublesome in the morning than during
the day. There is usually free and copious expectoration, and occasionally
this is so abundant as to constitute what is termed _bronchorrhoea_.

Chronic bronchitis leads to alterations of structure in the affected
bronchial tubes, their mucous membrane becoming thickened or even
ulcerated, while occasionally permanent dilatation of the bronchi takes
place, often accompanied with profuse foetid expectoration. In
long-standing cases of chronic bronchitis the nutrition of the lungs
becomes impaired, and dilatation of the air-tubes (_emphysema_) and other
complications result, giving rise to more or less constant breathlessness.

Chronic bronchitis may arise secondarily to some other ailment. This is
especially the case in Bright's disease of the kidneys and in heart
disease, of both of which maladies it often proves a serious complication,
also in gout and syphilis. The influence of occupation is seen in the
frequency in which persons following certain employments suffer from
chronic bronchitis. Hirt has shown that the inhalation of vegetable dust is
very liable to produce bronchitis through the irritation produced by the
dust particles and the growth of organisms carried in with the dust.
Consequently, millers and grain-shovellers are especially liable to it,
while next in order come weavers and workers in cotton factories.

The treatment to be adopted in chronic bronchitis depends upon the severity
of the case, the age of the patient and the presence or absence of
complications. Attention to the general health is a matter of prime
importance in all cases of the disease, more particularly among persons
whose avocations entail exposure, and tonics with cod-liver oil will be
found highly advantageous. The use of a respirator in very cold or damp
weather is a valuable means of protection. In those aggravated forms of
chronic bronchitis, where the slightest exposure to cold air brings on
fresh attacks, it may become necessary, where circumstances permit, to
enjoin confinement to a warm room or removal to a more genial climate
during the winter months.

BRONCHOTOMY (Gr. [Greek: bronchos], wind-pipe, and [Greek: temnein], to
cut), a medical term used to describe a surgical incision into the throat;
now largely superseded by the terms laryngotomy, thyrotomy and tracheotomy,
which indicate more accurately the place of incision.

BRONCO, usually incorrectly spelt BRONCHO (a Spanish word meaning rough,
rude), an unbroken or untamed horse, especially in the United States, a
mustang; the word entered America by way of Mexico.

BROeNDSTED, PETER OLUF (1780-1842), Danish archaeologist and traveller, was
born at Fruering in Jutland on the 17th of November 1780. After studying at
the university of Copenhagen he visited Paris in 1806 with his friend Georg
Koes. After remaining there two years, they went together to Italy. Both
were zealously attached to the study of antiquities; and congeniality of
tastes and pursuits induced them, in 1810, to join an expedition to Greece,
where they excavated the temples of Zeus in Aegina and of Apollo at Bassae
in Arcadia. After three years of active researches in Greece, Broendsted
returned to Copenhagen, where, as a reward for his labours, he was
appointed professor of Greek in the university. He then began to arrange
and prepare for publication the vast materials he had collected during his
travels; but finding that Copenhagen did not afford him the desired
facilities, he exchanged his professorship for the office of Danish envoy
at the papal court in 1818, and took up his abode at Rome. In 1820 and 1821
he visited Sicily and the Ionian Isles to collect additional materials for
his great work. In 1826 he went to London, chiefly with a view of studying
the Elgin marbles and other remains of antiquity in the British Museum, and
became acquainted with the principal archaeologists of England. From
1828-1832 he resided in Paris, to superintend the publication of his
_Travels_, and then returned to Copenhagen on being appointed director of
the museum of antiquities and the collection of coins and medals. In 1842
he became rector of the university; but a fall from his horse caused his
death on the 26th of June. His principal work was the _Travels and
Archaeological Researches in Greece_ (in German and French, 1826-1830), of
which only two volumes were published, dealing with the island of Ceos and
the metopes of the Parthenon.

BRONGNIART, ADOLPHE THEODORE (1801-1876), French botanist, son of the
geologist Alexandre Brongniart, was born in Paris on the 14th of January
1801. He soon showed an inclination towards the study of natural science,
devoting himself at first more particularly to geology, and later to
botany, thus equipping himself for what was to be the main occupation of
his life--the investigation of fossil plants. In 1826 he graduated as
doctor of medicine with a dissertation on the Rhamnaceae; but the career
which he adopted was botanical, not medical. In 1831 he became assistant to
R.L. Desfontaines at the Musee d'Histoire Naturelle, and two years later
succeeded him as professor, a position which he continued to hold until his
death in Paris on the 18th of February 1876.

Brongniart was an indefatigable investigator and a prolific writer, so that
he left behind him, as the fruit of his labours, a large number of books
and memoirs. As early as 1822 he published a paper on the classification
and distribution of fossil plants (_Mem. Mus. Hist. Nat._ viii.). This was
followed by several papers chiefly bearing upon the relation between
extinct and existing forms--a line of research which culminated in the
publication of the _Histoire des vegetaux fossiles_, which has earned for
him the title of "father of palaeobotany." This great work was heralded by
a small but most important "Prodrome" (contributed to the _Grand
Dictionnaire d'Hist. Nat._, 1828, t. lvii.) which brought order into chaos
by a classification in which the fossil plants were arranged, with
remarkably correct insight, along with their nearest living allies, and
which forms the basis of all subsequent progress in this direction. It is
of especial botanical interest, because, in accordance with Robert Brown's
discoveries, the Cycadeae and Coniferae were placed in the new group
_Phanerogames gymnospermes_. In this book attention was also directed to
the succession of forms in the various geological periods, with the
important result (stated in modern terms) that in the Palaeozoic period the
Pteridophyta are found to predominate; in the Mesozoic, the Gymnosperms; in
the Cainozoic, the Angiosperms, a result subsequently more fully stated in
his "Tableau des genres de vegetaux fossiles" (D'Orbigny, _Dict. Univ.
d'Hist. Nat._, 1849). But the great _Histoire_ itself was not destined to
be more than a colossal fragment; the publication of successive parts
proceeded regularly from 1828 to 1837, when the first volume was completed,
but after that only three parts of the second volume appeared. Brongniart,
no doubt, was overwhelmed with the continually increasing magnitude of the
task that he had undertaken. Apart from his more comprehensive works, his
most important palaeontological contributions are perhaps his observations
on the structure of _Sigillaria_ (_Arch. Mus. Hist. Nat._ i., 1839) and his
researches (almost the last he undertook) on fossil seeds, of which a full
account was published posthumously in 1880. His activity was by no means
confined to palaeobotany, but extended into all branches of botany, more
particularly anatomy and phanerogamic taxonomy. Among his achievements in
these directions the most notable is the memoir "Sur la generation et le
developpement de l'embryon des Phanerogames" (_Ann. Sci. Nat._ xii., 1827).
This is remarkable in that it contains the [v.04 p.0637] first account of
any value of the development of the pollen; as also a description of the
structure of the pollen-grain, the confirmation of G. B. Amici's (1823)
discovery of the pollen-tube, the confirmation of R. Brown's views as to
the structure of the unimpregnated ovule (with the introduction of the term
"sac embryonnaire"); and in that it shows how nearly Brongniart anticipated
Amici's subsequent (1846) discovery of the entrance of the pollen-tube into
the micropyle, fertilizing the female cell which then develops into the
embryo. Of his anatomical works, those of the greatest value are probably
the "_Recherches sur la structure et les fonctions des feuilles_" (_Ann.
Sci. Nat._ xxi., 1830), and the "Nouvelles Recherches sur l'Epiderme"
(_Ann. Sci. Nat._ i., 1834), in which, among other important observations,
the discovery of the cuticle is recorded; and, further, the "Recherches sur
l'organisation des tiges des Cycadees" (_Ann. Sci. Nat._ xvi., 1829),
giving the results of the first investigation of the anatomy of those
plants. His systematic work is represented by a large number of papers and
monographs, many of which relate to the flora of New Caledonia; and by his
_Enumeration des genres de plantes cultivees au Musee d'Histoire Naturelle
de Paris_ (1843), which is an interesting landmark in the history of
classification in that it forms the starting-point of the system, modified
successively by A. Braun, A.W. Eichler and A. Engler, which is now adopted
in Germany. In addition to his scientific and professorial labours,
Brongniart held various important official posts in connexion with the
department of education, and interested himself greatly in agricultural and
horticultural matters. With J.V. Audouin and J.B.A. Dumas, his future
brothers-in-law, he established the _Annales des Sciences Naturelles_ in
1824; he also founded the Societe Botanique de France in 1854, and was its
first president.

For accounts of his life and work see _Bull. de la Soc. Geol. de France_,
1876, and _La Nature_, 1876; the _Bulletin de la Soc. Bot. de France_ for
1876, vol. xxiii., contains a list of his works and the orations pronounced
at his funeral.

(S. H. V.*)

BRONGNIART, ALEXANDRE (1770-1847), French mineralogist and geologist, son
of the eminent architect who designed the Bourse and other public buildings
of Paris, was born in that city on the 5th of February 1770. At an early
age he studied chemistry, under Lavoisier, and after passing through the
Ecole des Mines he took honours at the Ecole de Medecine; subsequently he
joined the army of the Pyrenees as _pharmacien_; but having committed some
slight political offence, he was thrown into prison and detained there for
some time. Soon after his release he was appointed professor of natural
history in the College des Quatre Nations. In 1800 he was made director of
the Sevres porcelain factory, a post which he retained to his death, and in
which he achieved his greatest work. In his hands Sevres became the leading
porcelain factory in Europe, and the researches of an able band of
assistants enabled him to lay the foundations of ceramic chemistry. In
addition to his work at Sevres, quite enough to engross the entire energy
of any ordinary man, he continued his more purely scientific work. He
succeeded Hauey as professor of mineralogy in the Museum of Natural History;
but he did not confine himself to mineralogy, for it is to him that we owe
the division of Reptiles into the four orders of Saurians, Batrachians,
Chelonians and Ophidians. Fossil as well as living animals engaged his
attention, and in his studies of the strata around Paris he was
instrumental in establishing the Tertiary formations. In 1816 he was
elected to the Academy; and in the following year he visited the Alps of
Switzerland and Italy, and afterwards Sweden and Norway. The result of his
observations was published from time to time in the _Journal des Mines_ and
other scientific journals. Wide as was the range of his interests his most
famous work was accomplished at Sevres, and his most enduring monument is
his classic _Traite des arts ceramiques_ (1844). He died in Paris on the
7th of October 1847.

His other principal works are :--_Traite elementaire de mineralogie, avec
des applications aux arts_ (2 vols., Paris, 1807); _Histoire naturelle des
crustaces fossiles_ (Paris, 1822); _Classification et caracteres
mineralogiques des roches homogenes et heterogenes_ (Paris, 1827); the
_Tableau des terrains qui composent l'ecorce du globe, ou Essai sur la
structure de la partie connue de la terre_ (Paris, 1829); and the _Traite
des arts ceramiques_ (1844). Brongniart was also the coadjutor of Cuvier in
the admirable _Essai sur la geographie mineralogique des environs de Paris_
(Paris, 1811); originally published in _Ann. Mus. Hist. Nat._ (Paris, xi.
1808).

BRONN, HEINRICH GEORG (1800-1862), German geologist, was born on the 3rd of
March 1800 at Ziegelhausen near Heidelberg. Studying at the university at
Heidelberg he took his doctor's degree in the faculty of medicine in 1821,
and in the following year was appointed professor of natural history. He
now devoted himself to palaeontological studies, and to fieldwork in
various parts of Germany, Italy and France. From its commencement in 1830
to 1862 he assisted in editing the _Jahrbuch fuer Mineralogie_, &c.,
continued as _Neues Jahrbuch._ His principal work, _Lethaea Geognostica_ (2
vols., Stuttgart, 1834-1838; 3rd ed. with F. Roemer, 3 vols., 1851-1856),
has been regarded as one of the foundations of German stratigraphical
geology. His _Handbuch einer Geschichte der Natur_, of which the first part
was issued in 1841, gave a general account of the physical history of the
earth, while the second part dealt with the life-history, species being
regarded as direct acts of creation. The third part included his famous
_Index Palaeontologicus_, and was issued in 3 vols., 1848-1849, with the
assistance of H. von Meyer and H. R. Goeppert. This record of fossils has
proved of inestimable value to all palaeontologists. An important work on
recent and fossil zoology, _Die Klassen und Ordnungen des Thier-Reichs_,
was commenced by Bronn. He wrote the volumes dealing with Amorphozoa,
Actinozoa, and Malacozoa, published 1859-1862; the work was continued by
other naturalists. In 1861 Bronn was awarded the Wollaston medal by the
Geological Society of London. He died at Heidelberg on the 5th of July
1862.

BRONSART VON SCHELLENDORF, PAUL (1832-1891), Prussian general, was born at
Danzig in 1832. He entered the Prussian Guards in 1849, and was appointed
to the general staff in 1861 as a captain; after three years of staff
service he returned to regimental duty, but was soon reappointed to the
staff, and lectured at the war academy, becoming major in 1865 and
lieut.-colonel in 1869. During the war of 1870 he was chief of a section on
the Great General Staff, and conducted the preliminary negotiations for the
surrender of the French at Sedan. After the war Bronsart was made a colonel
and chief of staff of the Guard army corps, becoming major-general in 1876
and lieut.-general (with a division command) in 1881. Two years later he
became war minister, and during his tenure of the post (1883-1889) many
important reforms were carried out in the Prussian army, in particular the
introduction of the magazine rifle. He was appointed in 1889 to command the
I. army corps at Koenigsberg. He died on the 23rd of June 1891 at his estate
near Braunsberg. Bronsart's military writings include two works of great
importance--_Ein Rueckblick auf die taktischen Ruckblicke_ (2nd ed., Berlin,
1870), a pamphlet written in reply to Captain May's _Tactical Retrospect of
1866_; and _Der Dienst des Generalstabes_ (1st ed., Berlin, 1876; 3rd ed.
revised by General Meckel, 1893; new ed. by the author's son, Major
Bronsart von Schellendorf, Berlin, 1904), a comprehensive treatise on the
duties of the general staff. The third edition of this work was soon after
its publication translated into English and issued officially to the
British army as _The Duties of the General Staff_. Major Bronsart's new
edition of 1904 was reissued in English by the General Staff, under the
same title, in 1905.

BRONTE, CHARLOTTE (1816-1855), EMILY (1818-1848), and ANNE (1820-1849),
English novelists, were three of the six children of Patrick Bronte, a
clergyman of the Church of England, who for the last forty-one years of his
life was perpetual incumbent of the parish of Haworth in the West Riding of
Yorkshire. Patrick Bronte was born at Emsdale, Co. Down, Ireland, on the
17th of March 1777. His parents were of the peasant class, their original
name of Brunty apparently having been changed by their son on his entry at
St John's College, Cambridge, in 1802. In the intervening years he had been
successively a weaver and schoolmaster in his native country. From
Cambridge [v.04 p.0638] he became a curate, first at Wethersfield in Essex,
in 1806, then for a few months at Wellington, Salop, in 1809. At the end of
1809 he accepted a curacy at Dewsbury, Yorkshire, following up this by one
at Hartshead-cum-Clifton in the same county. At Hartshead Patrick Bronte
married in 1812 Maria Branwell, a Cornishwoman, and there two children were
born to him, Maria (1813-1825) and Elizabeth (1814-1825). Thence Patrick
Bronte removed to Thornton, some 3 m. from Bradford, and here his wife gave
birth to four children, Charlotte, Patrick Branwell (1817-1848), Emily
Jane, and Anne, three of whom were to attain literary distinction.

In April 1820, three months after the birth of Anne Bronte, her father
accepted the living of Haworth, a village near Keighley in Yorkshire, which
will always be associated with the romantic story of the Brontes. In
September of the following year his wife died. Maria Bronte lives for us in
her daughter's biography only as the writer of certain letters to her "dear
saucy Pat," as she calls her lover, and as the author of a recently
published manuscript, an essay entitled _The Advantages of Poverty in
Religious Concerns_, full of a sententiousness much affected at the time.

Upon the death of Mrs Bronte her husband invited his sister-in-law,
Elizabeth Branwell, to leave Penzance and to take up her residence with his
family at Haworth. Miss Branwell accepted the trust and would seem to have
watched over her nephew and five nieces with conscientious care. The two
eldest of those nieces were not long in following their mother. Maria and
Elizabeth, Charlotte and Emily, were all sent to the Clergy Daughters'
school at Cowan Bridge in 1824, and Maria and Elizabeth returned home in
the following year to die. How far the bad food and drastic discipline were
responsible cannot be accurately demonstrated. Charlotte gibbeted the
school long years afterwards in _Jane Eyre_, under the thin disguise of
"Lowood," and the principal, the Rev. William Carus Wilson (1792-1859), has
been universally accepted as the counterpart of Mr Naomi Brocklehurst in
the same novel. But congenital disease more probably accounts for the
tragedy from which happily Charlotte and Emily escaped, both returning in
1825 to a prolonged home life at Haworth. Here the four surviving children
amused themselves in intervals of study under their aunt's guidance with
precocious literary aspirations. The many tiny booklets upon which they
laboured in the succeeding years have been happily preserved. We find
stories, verses and essays, all in the minutest handwriting, none giving
any indication of the genius which in the case of two of the four children
was to add to the indisputably permanent in literature.

At sixteen years of age--in 1831--Charlotte Bronte became a pupil at the
school of Miss Margaret Wooler (1792-1885) at Roe Head, Dewsbury. She left
in the following year to assist in the education of the younger sisters,
bringing with her much additional proficiency in drawing, French and
composition; she took with her also the devoted friendship of two out of
her ten fellow-pupils--Mary Taylor (1817-1893) and Ellen Nussey
(1817-1897). With Miss Taylor and Miss Nussey she corresponded for the
remainder of her life, and her letters to the latter make up no small part
of what has been revealed to us of her life story. Her next three years at
Haworth were varied by occasional visits to one or other of these friends.
In 1835 she returned to Miss Wooler's school at Roe Head as a governess,
her sister Emily accompanying her as a pupil, but remaining only three
months, and Anne then taking her place. The year following the school was
removed to Dewsbury. In 1838 Charlotte went back to Haworth and soon
afterwards received her first offer of marriage--from a clergyman, Henry
Nussey, the brother of her friend Ellen. This was followed a little later
by a second offer from a curate named Bryce. She refused both and took a
situation as nursery governess, first with the Sidgwicks of Stonegappe,
Yorkshire, and later with the Whites at Rawdon in the same county. A few
months of this, however, filled her with an ambition to try and secure
greater independence as the possessor of a school of her own, and she
planned to acquire more proficiency in "languages" on the continent, as a
preliminary step. The aunt advanced some money, and accompanied by her
sister Emily she became in February 1842 a pupil at the Pensionnat Heger,
Brussels. Here both girls worked hard, and won the goodwill and indeed
admiration of the principal teacher, M. Heger, whose wife was at the head
of the establishment. But the two girls were hastily called back to England
before the year had expired by the announcement of the critical illness of
their aunt. Miss Branwell died on the 29th of October 1842. She bequeathed
sufficient money to her nieces to enable them to reconsider their plan of
life. Instead of a school at Bridlington which had been talked of, they
could now remain with their father, utilize their aunt's room as a
classroom, and take pupils. But Charlotte was not yet satisfied with what
the few months on Belgian soil had done for her, and determined to accept
M. Heger's offer that she should return to Brussels as a governess. Hence
the year 1843 was passed by her at the Pensionnat Heger in that capacity,
and in this period she undoubtedly widened her intellectual sphere by
reading the many books in French literature that her friend M. Heger lent
her. But life took on a very sombre shade in the lonely environment in
which she found herself. She became so depressed that on one occasion she
took refuge in the confessional precisely as did her heroine Lucy Snowe in
_Villette_. In 1844 she returned to her father's house at Haworth, and the
three sisters began immediately to discuss the possibilities of converting
the vicarage into a school. Prospectuses were issued, but no pupils were
forthcoming.

Matters were complicated by the fact that the only brother, Patrick
Branwell, had about this time become a confirmed drunkard. Branwell had
been the idol of his aunt and of his sisters. Educated under his father's
care, he had early shown artistic leanings, and the slender resources of
the family had been strained to provide him with the means of entering at
the Royal Academy as a pupil. This was in 1835. Branwell, it would seem,
indulged in a glorious month of extravagance in London and then returned
home. His art studies were continued for a time at Leeds, but it may be
assumed that no commissions came to him, and at last he became tutor to the
son of a Mr Postlethwaite at Barrow-in-Furness. Ten months later he was a
booking-clerk at Sowerby Bridge station on the Leeds & Manchester railway,
and later at Luddenden Foot. Then he became tutor in the family of a
clergyman named Robinson at Thorp Green, where his sister Anne was
governess. Finally he returned to Haworth to loaf at the village inn, shock
his sisters by his excesses, and to fritter his life away in painful
sottishness. He died in September 1848, having achieved nothing reputable,
and having disappointed all the hopes that had been centred in him. "My
poor father naturally thought more of his _only_ son than of his
daughters," is one of Charlotte's dreary comments on the tragedy. In early
years he had himself written both prose and verse; and a foolish story
invented long afterwards attributed to him some share in his sisters'
novels, particularly in Emily Bronte's _Wuthering Heights_. But Charlotte
distinctly tells us that her brother never knew that his sisters had
published a line. He was too much under the effects of drink, too besotted
and muddled in that last year or two of life, to have any share in their
intellectual enthusiasms.

The literary life had, however, opened bravely for the three girls during
those years. In 1846 a volume of verse appeared from the shop of Aylott &
Jones of Paternoster Row; "_Poems_, by Currer, Ellis and Acton Bell," was
on the title-page. These names disguised the identity of Charlotte, Emily
and Anne Bronte. The venture cost the sisters about L50 in all, but only
two copies were sold. There were nineteen poems by Charlotte, twenty-one by
Emily, and the same number by Anne. A consensus of criticism has accepted
the fact that Emily's verse alone revealed true poetic genius. This was
unrecognized then except by her sister Charlotte. It is obvious now to all.

The failure of the poems did not deter the authors from further effort.
They had each a novel to dispose of. Charlotte Bronte's was called _The
Master_, which before it was sent off to London was retitled _The
Professor_. Emily's story was entitled [v.04 p.0639] _Wuthering Heights_,
and Anne's _Agnes Gray_. All these stories travelled from publisher to
publisher. At last _The Professor_ reached the firm of Smith, Elder & Co.,
of Cornhill. The "reader" for that firm, R. Smith Williams (1800-1875), was
impressed, as were also his employers. Charlotte Bronte received in August
1847 a letter informing her that whatever the merits of _The
Professor_--and it was hinted that it lacked "varied interest"--it was too
short for the three-volume form then counted imperative. The author was
further told that a longer novel would be gladly considered. She replied in
the same month with this longer novel, and _Jane Eyre_ appeared in October
1847, to be wildly acclaimed on every hand, although enthusiasm was to
receive a counterblast when more than a year later, in December 1848, Miss
Rigby, afterwards Lady Eastlake (1809-1893), reviewed it in the
_Quarterly_.

Meanwhile the novels of Emily and Anne had been accepted by T. C. Newby.
They were published together in three volumes in December 1847, two months
later than _Jane Eyre_, although the proof sheets had been passed by the
authors before their sister's novel had been sent to the publishers. The
dilatoriness of Mr Newby was followed up by considerable energy when he saw
the possibility of the novels by Ellis and Acton Bell sailing on the wave
of Currer Bell's popularity, and he would seem very quickly to have
accepted another manuscript by Anne Bronte, for _The Tenant of Wildfell
Hall_ was published by Newby in three volumes in June 1848. It was Newby's
clever efforts to persuade the public that the books he published were by
the author of _Jane Eyre_ that led Charlotte and Anne to visit London this
summer and interview Charlotte's publishers in Cornhill with a view to
establishing their separate identity. Soon after their return home Branwell
died (the 24th of September 1848), and less than three months later Emily
died also at Haworth (the 19th December 1848). Then Anne became ill and on
the 24th of May 1849 Charlotte accompanied her to Scarborough in the hope
that the sea air would revive her. Anne died there on the 28th of May, and
was buried in Scarborough churchyard. Thus in exactly eight months
Charlotte Bronte lost all the three companions of her youth, and returned
to sustain her father, fast becoming blind, in the now desolate home at
Haworth.

In the interval between the death of Branwell and of Emily, Charlotte had
been engaged upon a new novel--_Shirley_. Two-thirds were written, but the
story was then laid aside while its author was nursing her sister Anne. She
completed the book after Anne's death, and it was published in October
1849. The following winter she visited London as the guest of her
publisher, Mr George Smith, and was introduced to Thackerary, to whom she
had dedicated _Jane Eyre_. The following year she repeated the visit, sat
for her portrait to George Richmond, and was considerably lionized by a
host of admirers. In August 1850 she visited the English lakes as the guest
of Sir James Kay-Shuttleworth, and met Mrs Gaskell, Miss Martineau, Matthew
Arnold and other interesting men and women. During this period her
publishers assiduously lent her books, and her criticisms of them contained
in many letters to Mr George Smith and Mr Smith Williams make very
interesting reading. In 1851 she received a third offer of marriage, this
time from Mr James Taylor, who was in the employment of her publishers. A
visit to Miss Martineau at Ambleside and also to London to the Great
Exhibition made up the events of this year. On her way home she visited
Manchester and spent two days with Mrs Gaskell. During the year 1852 she
worked hard with a new novel, _Villette_, which was published in January of
1853. In September of that year she received a visit from Mrs Gaskell at
Haworth; in May 1854 she returned it, remaining three days at Manchester,
and planning with her hostess the details of her marriage, for at this time
she had promised to unite herself with her father's curate, Arthur Bell
Nicholls (1817-1906), who had long been a pertinacious suitor for her hand
but had been discouraged by Mr Bronte. The marriage took place in Haworth
church on the 29th of June 1854, the ceremony being performed by the Rev.
Sutcliffe Sowden, Miss Wooler and Miss Nussey acting as witnesses. The
wedded pair spent their honeymoon in Ireland, returning to Haworth, where
they made their home with Mr Bronte, Mr Nicholls having pledged himself to
continue in his position as curate to his father-in-law. After less than a
year of married life, however, Charlotte Nicholls died of an illness
incidental to childbirth, on the 31st of March 1855. She was buried in
Haworth church by the side of her mother, Branwell and Emily. The father
followed in 1861, and then her husband returned to Ireland, where he
remained some years afterwards, dying in 1906.

The bare recital of the Bronte story can give no idea of its undying
interest, its exceeding pathos. Their life as told by their biographer Mrs
Gaskell is as interesting as any novel. Their achievement, however, will
stand on its own merits. Anne Bronte's two novels, it is true, though
constantly reprinted, survive principally through the exceeding vitality of
the Bronte tradition. As a hymn writer she still has a place in most
religious communities. Emily is great alike as a novelist and as a poet.
Her "Old Stoic" and "Last Lines" are probably the finest achievement of
poetry that any woman has given to English literature. Her novel _Wuthering
Heights_ stands alone as a monument of intensity owing nothing to
tradition, nothing to the achievement of earlier writers. It was a thing
apart, passionate, unforgettable, haunting in its grimness, its grey
melancholy. Among women writers Emily Bronte has a sure and certain place
for all time. As a poet or maker of verse Charlotte Bronte is
undistinguished, but there are passages of pure poetry of great
magnificence in her four novels, and particularly in _Villette_. The novels
_Jane Eyre_ and _Villette_ will always command attention whatever the
future of English fiction, by virtue of their intensity, their
independence, their rough individuality.

The _Life of Charlotte Bronte_, by Mrs Gaskell, was first published in
1857. Owing to the many controversial questions it aroused, as to the
identity of Lowood in _Jane Eyre_ with Cowan Bridge school, as to the
relations of Branwell Bronte with his employer's wife, as to the supposed
peculiarities of Mr Bronte, and certain other minor points, the third
edition was considerably changed. The _Life_ has been many times reprinted,
but may be read in its most satisfactory form in the Haworth edition
(1902), issued by the original publishers, Smith, Elder & Co. To this
edition are attached a great number of letters written by Miss Bronte to
her publisher, George Smith. The first new material supplied to supplement
Mrs Gaskell's _Life_ was contained in _Charlotte Bronte: a Monograph_, by
T. Wemyss Reid (1877). This book inspired Mr A.C. Swinburne to issue
separately a forcible essay on Charlotte and Emily Bronte, under the title
of _A Note on Charlotte Bronte_ (1877). A further collection of letters
written by Miss Bronte was contained in _Charlotte Bronte and her Circle_,
by Clement Shorter (1896), and interesting details can be gathered from the
_Life of Charlotte Bronte_, by Augustine Birrell (1887), _The Brontes in
Ireland_, by William Wright, D.D. (1893), _Charlotte Bronte and her
Sisters_, by Clement Shorter (1906), and the Bronte Society publications,
edited by Butler Wood (1895-1907). Miss A. Mary F. Robinson (Madame
Duclaux) wrote a separate biography of Emily Bronte in 1883, and an essay
in her _Grands Ecrivains d'outre-Manche_. _The Brontes: Life and Letters_,
by Clement Shorter (1907), contains the whole of C. Bronte's letters in
chronological order.

(C. K. S.)

BRONTE, a town of the province of Catania, Sicily, on the western slopes of
Mt. Etna, 24 m. N.N.W. of Catania direct, and 34 m. by rail. Pop. (1901)
20,366. It was founded by the emperor Charles V. The town, with an
extensive estate which originally belonged to the monastery of Maniacium
(Maniace), was granted, as a dukedom, to Nelson by Ferdinand IV. of Naples
in 1799.

BRONX, THE, formerly a district comprising several towns in Westchester
county, New York, U.S.A., now (since 1898) the northernmost of the five
boroughs of New York City (_q.v._). Several settlements in the Bronx were
made by the English and the Dutch between 1640 and 1650.

BRONZE, an alloy formed wholly or chiefly of copper and tin in variable
proportions. The word has been etymologically connected with the same root
as appears in "brown," but according to M.P.E. Berthelot (_La Chimie au
moyen age_) it is a place-name derived from _aes Brundusianum_ (cf. Pliny,
_Nat. Hist._ xxxiii. ch. ix. Sec.45, "specula optima apud majores fuerunt
Brundusiana, stanno et aere mixtis"). A Greek MS. of about the 11th century
in the library of St Mark's, Venice, contains [v.04 p.0640] the form
[Greek: brontesion], and gives the composition of the alloy as 1 lb of
copper with 2 oz. of tin. The product obtained by adding tin to copper is
more fusible than copper and thus better suited for casting; it is also
harder and less malleable. A soft bronze or _gun-metal_ is formed with 16
parts of copper to 1 of tin, and a harder gun-metal, such as was used for
bronze ordnance, when the proportion of tin is about doubled. The _steel
bronze_ of Colonel Franz Uchatius (1811-1881) consisted of copper alloyed
with 8% of tin, the tenacity and hardness being increased by cold-rolling.
Bronze containing about 7 parts of copper to 1 of tin is hard, brittle and
sonorous, and can be tempered to take a fine edge. _Bell-metal_ varies
considerably in composition, from about 3 to 5 parts of copper to 1 of tin.
In _speculum metal_ there are 2 to 21/2 parts of copper to 1 of tin. Statuary
bronze may contain from 80 to 90% of copper, the residue being tin, or tin
with zinc and lead in various proportions. The bronze used for the British
and French copper coinage consists of 95% copper, 4% tin and 1% zinc. Many
copper-tin alloys employed for machinery-bearings contain a small
proportion of zinc, which gives increased hardness. "Anti-friction metals,"
also used in bearings, are copper-tin alloys in which the amount of copper
is small and there is antimony in addition. Of this class an example is
"Babbitt's metal," invented by Isaac Babbitt (1799-1862); it originally
consisted of 24 parts of tin, 8 parts of antimony and 4 parts of copper,
but in later compositions for the same purpose the proportion of tin is
often considerably higher. Bronze is improved in quality and strength when
fluxed with phosphorus. Alloys prepared in this way, and known as _phosphor
bronze_, may contain only about 1% of phosphorus in the ingot, reduced to a
mere trace after casting, but their value is nevertheless enhanced for
purposes in which a hard strong metal is required, as for pump plungers,
valves, the bushes of bearings, &c. Bronze again is improved by the
presence of manganese in small quantity, and various grades of _manganese
bronze_, in some of which there is little or no tin but a considerable
percentage of zinc, are extensively used in mechanical engineering. Alloys
of copper with aluminium, though often nearly or completely destitute of
tin, are known as _aluminium bronze_, and are valuable for their strength
and the resistance they offer to corrosion. By the addition of a small
quantity of silicon the tensile strength of copper is much increased; a
sample of such _silicon bronze_, used for telegraph wires, on analysis was
found to consist of 99.94% of copper, 0.03% of tin, and traces of iron and
silicon.

The bronze (Gr. [Greek: chalkos], Lat. _aes_) of classical antiquity
consisted chiefly of copper, alloyed with one or more of the metals, zinc,
tin, lead and silver, in proportions that varied as times changed, or
according to the purposes for which the alloy was required. Among bronze
remains the copper is found to vary from 67 to 95%. From the analysis of
coins it appears that for their bronze coins the Greeks adhered to an alloy
of copper and tin till 400 B.C., after which time they used also lead with
increasing frequency. Silver is rare in their bronze coins. The Romans also
used lead as an alloy in their bronze coins, but gradually reduced the
quantity, and under Caligula, Nero, Vespasian and Domitian, coined pure
copper coins; afterwards they reverted to the mixture of lead. So far the
words [Greek: chalkos] and _aes_ may be translated as bronze. Originally,
no doubt, [Greek: chalkos] was the name for pure copper. It is so employed
by Homer, who calls it [Greek: eruthros] (red), [Greek: aithups]
(glittering), [Greek: phaennos] (shining), terms which apply only to
copper. But instead of its following from this that the process of alloying
copper with other metals was not practised in the time of the poet, or was
unknown to him, the contrary would seem to be the case from the passage
(_Iliad_ xviii. 474) where he describes Hephaestus as throwing into his
furnace copper, tin, silver and gold to make the shield of Achilles, so
that it is not always possible to know whether when he uses the word
[Greek: chalkos] he means copper pure or alloyed. Still more difficult is
it to make this distinction when we read of the mythical Dactyls of Ida in
Crete or the Telchines or Cyclopes being acquainted with the smelting of
[Greek: chalkos]. It is not, however, likely that later Greek writers, who
knew bronze in its true sense, and called it [Greek: chalkos], would have
employed this word without qualification for objects which they had seen
unless they had meant it to be taken as bronze. When Pausanias (iii. 17. 6)
speaks of a statue, one of the oldest figures he had seen of this material,
made of separate pieces fastened together with nails, we understand him to
mean literally bronze, the more readily since there exist very early
figures and utensils of bronze so made.

For the use of bronze in art, see METAL-WORK.

BRONZE AGE, the name given by archaeologists to that stage in human
culture, intermediate between the Stone and Iron Ages, when weapons,
utensils and implements were, as a general rule, made of bronze. The term
has no absolute chronological value, but marks a period of civilization
through which it is believed that most races passed at one time or another.
The "finds" of stone and bronze, of bronze and iron, and even of stone and
iron implements together in tumuli and sepulchral mounds, suggest that in
many countries the three stages in man's progress overlapped. From the
similarity of types of weapons and implements of the period found
throughout Europe a relatively synchronous commencement has been inferred
for the Bronze Age in Europe, fixed by most authorities at between 2000
B.C. to 1800 B.C. But it must have been earlier in some countries, and is
certainly known to have been later in others; while the Mexicans and
Peruvians were still in their bronze age in recent times. Not a few
archaeologists have denied that there ever was a distinct Bronze Age. They
have found their chief argument in the fact that weapons of these ages have
been found side by side in prehistoric burial-places. But when it is
admitted that the ages must have overlapped, it is fairly easy to undertand
the mixed "finds." The beginning, the prevalence and duration of the Bronze
Age in each country would have been ordered by the accessibility of the
metals which form the alloy. Thus in some lands bronze may have continued
to be a substance of extreme value until the Iron Age was reached, and in
tumuli in which more than one body was interred, as was frequently the
case, it would only be with the remains of the richer tenants of the tomb
that the more valuable objects would be placed. There is, moreover, much
reason to believe that sepulchral mounds were opened from age to age and
fresh interments made, and in such a practice would be found a simple
explanation of the mixing of implements. Another curious fact has been
seized on by those who argue against the existence of a Bronze Age. Among
all the "finds" examined in Europe there is a most remarkable absence of
copper implements. The sources of tin in Europe are practically restricted
to Cornwall and Saxony. How then are we to explain on the one hand the
apparent stride made by primitive man when from a Stone Age civilization he
passed to a comparatively advanced metallurgical skill? On the other, how
account for a comparatively synchronous commencement of bronze civilization
when one at least of the metals needed for the alloy would have been
naturally difficult of access, if not unknown to many races? The answer is
that there can be but little doubt that the knowledge of bronze came to the
races of Europe from outside. Either by the Phoenicians or by the Greeks
metallurgy was taught to men who no sooner recognized the nature and
malleable properties of copper than they learnt that by application of heat
a substance could be manufactured with tin far better suited to their
purposes. Copper would thus have been but seldom used unalloyed; and the
relatively synchronous appearance of bronze in Europe, and the scanty
"finds" of copper implements, are explained. We may conclude then that
there was a Bronze Age in most countries; that it was the direct result of
increasing intercommunication of races and the spread of commerce; and that
the discovery of metals was due to information brought to Stone-Age man in
Europe by races which were already skilful metallurgists.

The Bronze Age in Europe is characterized by weapons, utensils and
implements, distinct in design and size from those in use in the preceding
or succeeding stage of man's civilization. Moreover--and this has been
employed as an argument in favour of the foreign origin of the knowledge of
bronze--all the [v.04 p.0641] objects in one part of Europe are identical
in pattern and size with those found in another part. The implements of the
Bronze Age include swords, awls, knives, gouges, hammers, daggers and
arrow-heads. A remarkable confirmation of the theory that the Bronze Age
culture came from the East is to be found in the patterns of the arms,
which are distinctly oriental; while the handles of swords and daggers are
so narrow and short as to make it unlikely that they would be made for use
by the large-handed races of Europe. The Bronze Age is also characterized
by the fact that cremation was the mode of disposal of the dead, whereas in
the Stone Age burial was the rule. Barrows and sepulchral mounds strictly
of the Bronze Age are smaller and less imposing than those of the Stone
Age. Besides varied and beautiful weapons, frequently exhibiting high
workmanship, amulets, coronets, diadems of solid gold, and vases of elegant
form and ornamentation in gold and bronze are found in the barrows. These
latter appear to have been used as tribal or family cemeteries. In Denmark
as many as seventy deposits of burnt bones have been found in a single
mound, indicating its use through a long succession of years. The
ornamentation of the period is as a rule confined to spirals, bosses and
concentric circles. What is remarkable is that the swords not only show the
design of the cross in the shape of the handle, but also in tracery what is
believed to be an imitation of the Svastika, that ancient Aryan symbol
which was probably the first to be made with a definite intention and a
consecutive meaning. The pottery is all "hand-made," and the bulk of the
objects excavated are cinerary urns, usually found full of burnt bones.
These vary from 12 to 18 in. in height. Their decoration is confined to a
band round the upper part of the pot, or often only a projecting flange
lapped round the whole rim. A few have small handles, formed of pierced
knobs of clay and sometimes projecting rolls of clay, looped, as it were,
all round the urn. The ornamentation consists of dots, zigzags, chevrons or
crosses. The lines were frequently made by pressing a twisted thong of skin
against the moist clay; the patterns in all cases being stamped into the
pot before it was hardened by fire.

See ARCHAEOLOGY, &c. Also Lord Avebury, _Prehistoric Times_ (1900); Sir J.
Evans, _Ancient Bronze Implements of Great Britain_ (1881); Chartre's _Age
du bronze en France_.

BRONZING, a process by which a bronze-like surface is imparted to objects
of metal, plaster, wood, &c. On metals a green bronze colour is sometimes
produced by the action of such substances as vinegar, dilute nitric acid
and sal-ammoniac. An antique appearance may be given to new bronze articles
by brushing over the clean bright metal with a solution of sal-ammoniac and
salt of sorrel in vinegar, and rubbing the surface dry, the operation being
repeated as often as necessary. Another solution for the same purpose is
made with sal-ammoniac, cream of tartar, common salt and silver nitrate.
With a solution of platinic chloride almost any colour can be produced on
copper, iron, brass or new bronze, according to the dilution and the number
of applications. Articles of plaster and wood may be bronzed by coating
them with size and then covering them with a bronze powder, such as Dutch
metal, beaten into fine leaves and powdered. The bronzing of gun-barrels
may be effected by the use of a strong solution of antimony trichloride.

BRONZINO, IL, the name given to ANGELO ALLORI (1502-1572), the Florentine
painter. He became the favourite pupil of J. da Pontormo. He painted the
portraits of some of the most famous men of his day, such as Dante,
Petrarch and Boccaccio. Most of his best works are in Florence, but
examples are in the National Gallery, London, and elsewhere.

BRONZITE, a member of the pyroxene group of minerals, belonging with
enstatite and hypersthene to the orthorhombic series of the group. Rather
than a distinct species, it is really a ferriferous variety of enstatite,
which owing to partial alteration has acquired a bronze-like sub-metallic
lustre on the cleavage surfaces. Enstatite is magnesium metasilicate,
MgSiO_3, with the magnesia partly replaced by small amounts (up to about
5%) of ferrous oxide; in the bronzite variety, (Mg,Fe)SiO_3, the ferrous
oxide ranges from about 5 to 14%, and with still more iron there is a
passage to hypersthene. The ferriferous varieties are liable to a
particular kind of alteration, known as "schillerization," which results in
the separation of the iron as very fine films of oxide and hydroxides along
the cleavage cracks of the mineral. The cleavage surfaces therefore exhibit
a metallic sheen or "schiller," which is even more pronounced in
hypersthene than in bronzite. The colour of bronzite is green or brown; its
specific gravity is about 3.2-3.3, varying with the amount of iron present.
Like enstatite, bronzite is a constituent of many basic igneous rocks, such
as norites, gabbros, and especially peridotites, and of the serpentines
which have been derived from them. It also occurs in some crystalline
schists.

Bronzite is sometimes cut and polished, usually in convex forms, for small
ornamental objects, but its use for this purpose is less extensive than
that of hypersthene. It often has a more or less distinct fibrous
structure, and when this is pronounced the sheen has a certain resemblance
to that of cat's-eye. Masses sufficiently large for cutting are found in
the norite of the Kupferberg in the Fichtelgebirge, and in the serpentine
of Kraubat near Leoben in Styria. In this connexion mention may be made of
an altered form of enstatite or bronzite known as _bastite_ or
_schiller-spar_. Here, in addition to schillerization, the original
enstatite has been altered by hydration and the product has approximately
the composition of serpentine. In colour bastite is brown or green with the
same metallic sheen as bronzite. The typical locality is Baste in the
Radauthal, Harz, where patches of pale greyish-green bastite are embedded
in a darker-coloured serpentine. This rock when cut and polished makes an
effective decorative stone, although little used for that purpose.

(L. J. S.)

BROOCH, or BROACH (from the Fr. _broche_, originally an awl or bodkin; a
spit is sometimes called a broach, and hence the phrase "to broach a
barrel"; see BROKER), a term now used to denote a clasp or fastener for the
dress, provided with a pin, having a hinge or spring at one end, and a
catch or loop at the other.

Brooches of the safety-pin type (_fibulae_) were extensively used in
antiquity, but only within definite limits of time and place. They seem to
have been unknown to the Egyptians, and to the oriental nations untouched
by Greek influence. In lands adjacent to Greece, they do not occur in Crete
or at Hissarlik. The place of origin cannot as yet be exactly determined,
but it would seem to have been in central Europe, towards the close of the
Bronze Age, somewhat before 1000 B.C. The earliest form is little more than
a pin, bent round for security, with the point caught against the head. One
such actual pin has been found. In its next simplest form, very similar to
that of the modern safety-pin (in which the coiled spring forces the point
against the catch), it occurs in the lower city of Mycenae, and in late
deposits of the Mycenaean Age, such as at Enkomi in Cyprus. It occurs also
(though rarely) in the "terramare" deposits of the Po valley, in the Swiss
lake-dwellings of the later Bronze Age, in central Italy, in Hungary and in
Bosnia. (fig. 1).[1]

[Illustration: FIG. 1.--Early type from Peschiera.]

From the comparatively simple initial form, the fibula developed in
different lines of descent, into different shapes, varying according to the
structural feature which was emphasized. On account of the number of local
variations, the subject is extremely complex, but the main lines of
development were approximately as follows.

Towards the end of the Bronze Age the safety-pin was arched into a bow, so
as to include a greater amount of stuff in its compass.

In the older Iron Age or "Hallstatt period" the bow and its accessories are
thickened and modified in various directions, so as to give greater
rigidity, and prominences or surfaces for decoration. The chief types have
been conveniently classed by [v.04 p.0642] Montelius in four main groups,
according to the characteristic forms:--

I. The wire of the catch-plate is hammered into a flat disk, on which the
pin rests (fig. 2)

[Illustration: FIG. 2.--Type I. with disk for catch-plate.]

II. The bow is thickened towards the middle, so as to assume the "leech"
shape, or it is hollowed out underneath, into the "boat" form. The
catch-plate is only slightly turned up, but it becomes elongated, in order
to mask the end of a long pin (fig. 3).

III. The catch-plate is flattened out as in group I., but additional
convolutions are added to the bow (fig. 4).

IV. The bow is convoluted (but the convolutions are sometimes represented
by knobs); the catch-plate develops as in group II. (fig. 5). For further
examples of the four types, see _Antiquities of Early Iron Age in British
Museum_, p. 32.

Among the special variations of the early form, mention should be made of
the fibulae of the geometric age of Greece, with an exaggerated development
of the vertical portion of the catch-plate (fig. 6).

[Illustration: FIG. 3.--Type II. with turned-up and elongated catch-plate.
a, "Leech" fibula; b, "Boat" fibula; c. variation of "Boat" fibula.]

The example shown in fig. 7 is an ornate development of type II. above.

In the later Iron Age (or early La Tene period) the prolongation of the
catch-plate described in the second and fourth groups above has a terminal
knob ornament, which is reflexed upwards, at first slightly (fig. 8), and
then to a marked extent, turning back towards the bow.

A far-reaching change in the design was at the same time brought about by a
simple improvement in principle, apparently introduced within the area of
the La Tene culture. Instead of a unilateral spring--that is, of one coiled
on one side only of the bow as commonly in the modern safety-pin--the
brooch became bilateral. The spring was coiled on one side of the axis of
the bow, and thence the wire was taken to the other side of the axis, and
again coiled in a corresponding manner before starting in a straight line
to form the pin. Once invented, the bilateral spring became almost
universal, and its introduction serves to divide the whole mass of ancient
fibulae into an older and a younger group.

[Illustration: FIG. 4.--Type III with disk for catch-plate, and convoluted
bow.]

With the progress of the La Tene period (300-1 B.C.) the reflection of the
catch-plate terminal became yet more marked, until it became practically
merged in the bow (fig. 9). Meanwhile, the bilateral spring described above
was developing into two marked projections on each side of the axis. In
order to give the double spring strength and protection it was given a
metal core, and a containing tube. When the core had been provided the pin
was no longer necessarily a continuation of the bow, and it became in fact
a separate member, as in a modern brooch of a non-safety-pin type, and was
no longer actuated by its own spring.

The T-shaped or "cross-bow" fibula was thus developed. During the first
centuries of the Empire it attained great size and importance (figs.
10-12). The form is conveniently dated at its highest development by its
occurrence on the ivory diptych of Stilicho at Monza (c. A.D. 400).

In the tombs of the Frankish and kindred Teutonic tribes between the 5th
and 9th centuries the crossbar of the T becomes a yet more elaborately
decorated semicircle, often surrounded by radial knobs and a chased
surface. The base of the shaft is flattened out, and is no less ornate
(fig. 13). At the beginning of this period the fibula of King Childeric
(A.D. 481) has a singularly complicated pin-fastening.

[Illustration: FIG. 5.--Type IV. with turned-up catch-plate and convoluted
bow.]

[Illustration: FIG. 6.--Greek geometric fibula.]

[Illustration: FIG. 7.--Gold fibula from Naples.]

[Illustration: FIG. 8.--Early La Tene period. Reflexed terminal ornament.]

So far we have traced the history of the safety-pin form of brooch.
Concurrently with it, other forms of brooch were developed in which the
safety-pin principle is either absent or effectually disguised. One such
form is that of the circular medallion brooch. It is found in Etruscan
deposits of a fully developed style, and is commonly represented in Greek
and Roman sculptures as a stud to fasten the cloak on the shoulder. In the
Roman provinces the circular brooches are very numerous, and are frequently
decorated with inlaid stone, paste or enamel. Another kind of brooch, also
known from early times, is in the form of an animal. In the early types the
animal is a decorative appendage, but in later examples it forms the body
of the brooch, to which a pin like the modern brooch-pin is attached
underneath. Both of these shapes, namely the medallion and the animal form,
are found in Frankish cemeteries, together with the later variations of the
T-shaped brooch described above. Such brooches were made in gold, silver or
bronze, adorned with precious stones, filigree work, or enamel; but
whatever the richness of the material, the pin was nearly always of iron.
The Scandinavian or northern group of T-shaped brooches are in their early
forms indistinguishable from those of the Frankish tombs, but as time went
on they became more massive, and richly decorated with intricate devices
(perhaps brought in by Irish missionary influence), into which animal forms
were introduced. The period covered is from the 5th to the 8th centuries.

[Illustration: FIG. 9, a-d.--Fibula of the La Tene period, showing the
development of the reflexed terminal, and the bilateral spring.]

[Illustration: FIG. 10.--Military Fibula. 3rd century A.D.]

[Illustration: FIG. 11.--Fibula with niello work. 3rd century A.D.]

The T-form, the medallion-form, and (occasionally) the animal forms occur
in Anglo-Saxon graves in England. In Kent the medallion-form predominates.
The Anglo-Saxon brooches [v.04 p.0643] were exquisite works of art,
ingeniously and tastefully constructed. They are often of gold, with a
central boss, exquisitely decorated, the flat part of the brooch being a
mosaic of turquoises, garnets on gold foil, mother of pearl, &c. arranged
in geometric patterns, and the gold work enriched with filigree or
decorated with dragonesque engravings.

[Illustration: FIG. 12.--Gold Fibula. 4th century A.D.]

The Scandinavian brooches of the Viking period (A.D. 800-1050) were oval
and convex, somewhat in the form of a tortoise. In their earliest form they
occur in the form of a frog-like animal, itself developed from the previous
Teutonic T-shaped type. With the introduction of the intricate system of
ornament described above, the frog-like animal is gradually superseded by
purely decorative lines. The convex bowls are then worked _a jour_ with a
perforated upper shell of chased work over an under shell of impure bronze,
gilt on the convex side. These outer cases are at last decorated with open
crown-like ornament and massive projecting bosses. The geographical
distribution of these peculiar brooches indicates the extent of the
conquests of the Northmen. They occur in northern Scotland, England,
Ireland, Iceland, Normandy and Livonia.

[Illustration: FIG. 13.--Fibula of the Frankish period.]

The Celtic group is characterized by the penannular form of the ring of the
brooch and the greater length of the pin. The penannular ring, inserted
through a hole at the head of the long pin, could be partially turned when
the pin had been thrust through the material in such a way that the brooch
became in effect a buckle. These brooches are usually of bronze or silver,
chased or engraved with intricate designs of interlaced or dragonesque work
in the style of the illuminated Celtic manuscripts of the 7th, 8th and 9th
centuries. The Hunterston brooch, which was found at Hawking Craig in
Ayrshire, is a well-known example of this style. Silver brooches of immense
size, some having pins 15 in. in length, and the penannular ring of the
brooch terminating in large knobs resembling thistle heads, are
occasionally found in Viking hoards of this period, consisting of bullion,
brooches and Cufic and Anglo-Saxon coins buried on Scottish soil. In
medieval times the form of the brooch was usually a simple, flat circular
disk, with open centre, the pin being equal in length to the diameter of
the brooch. They were often inscribed with religious and talismanic
_formulae_. The Highland brooches were commonly of this form, but the disk
was broader, and the central opening smaller in proportion to the size of
the brooch. They were ornamented in the style so common on Highland
powder-horns, with engraved patterns of interlacing work and foliage,
arranged in geometrical spaces, and sometimes mingled with figures of
animals.

(A. H. SM.)

[1] The illustrations of this article are from Dr Robert Forrer's
_Reallexikon_, by permission of W. Spemann, Berlin and Stuttgart.

BROOKE, FRANCES (1724-1789), English novelist and dramatist, whose maiden
name was Moore, was born in 1724. Of her novels, some of which enjoyed
considerable popularity in their day, the most important were _The History
of Lady Julia Mandeville_ (1763), _Emily Montague_ (1769) and _The
Excursion_ (1777). Her dramatic pieces and translations from the French are
now forgotten. She died in January 1789.

BROOKE, FULKE GREVILLE, 1ST BARON (1554-1628), English poet, only son of
Sir Fulke Greville, was born at Beauchamp Court, Warwickshire. He was sent
in 1564, on the same day as his life-long friend, Philip Sidney, to
Shrewsbury school. He matriculated at Jesus College, Cambridge, in 1568.
Sir Henry Sidney, president of Wales, gave him in 1576 a post connected
with the court of the Marches, but he resigned it in 1577 to go to court
with Philip Sidney. Young Greville became a great favourite with Queen
Elizabeth, who treated him with less than her usual caprice, but he was
more than once disgraced for leaving the country against her wishes. Philip
Sidney, Sir Edward Dyer and Greville were members of the "Areopagus," the
literary clique which, under the leadership of Gabriel Harvey, supported
the introduction of classical metres into English verse. Sidney and
Greville arranged to sail with Sir Francis Drake in 1585 in his expedition
against the Spanish West Indies, but Elizabeth peremptorily forbade Drake
to take them with him, and also refused Greville's request to be allowed to
join Leicester's army in the Netherlands. Philip Sidney, who took part in
the campaign, was killed on the 17th of October 1586, and Greville shared
with Dyer the legacy of his books, while in his _Life of the Renowned Sir
Philip Sidney_ he raised an enduring monument to his friend's memory. About
1591 Greville served for a short time in Normandy under Henry of Navarre.
This was his last experience of war. In 1583 he became secretary to the
principality of Wales, and he represented Warwickshire in parliament in
1592-1593, 1597, 1601 and 1620. In 1598 he was made treasurer of the navy,
and he retained the office through the early years of the reign of James I.
In 1614 he became chancellor and under-treasurer of the exchequer, and
throughout the reign he was a valued supporter of the king's party,
although in 1615 he advocated the summoning of a parliament. In 1618 he
became commissioner of the treasury, and in 1621 he was raised to the
peerage with the title of Baron Brooke, a title which had belonged to the
family of his paternal grandmother, Elizabeth Willoughby. He received from
James I. the grant of Warwick Castle, in the restoration of which he is
said to have spent L20,000. He died on the 30th of September 1628 in
consequence of a wound inflicted by a servant who was disappointed at not
being named in his master's will. Brooke was buried in St Mary's church,
Warwick, and on his tomb was inscribed the epitaph he had composed for
himself: "Folk Grevill Servant to Queene Elizabeth Conceller to King James
Frend to Sir Philip Sidney. Trophaeum Peccati."

A rhyming elegy on Brooke, published in Huth's _Inedited Poetical
Miscellanies_, brings charges of extreme penuriousness against him, but of
his generous treatment of contemporary writers there is abundant testimony.
His only works published during his lifetime were four poems, one of which
is the elegy on Sidney which appeared in _The Phoenix Nest_ (1593), and the
_Tragedy of Mustapha_. A volume of his works appeared in 1633, another of
_Remains_ in 1670, and his biography of Sidney in 1652. He wrote two
tragedies on the Senecan model, _Alaham_ and _Mustapha_. The scene of
Alaham is laid in Ormuz. The development of the piece fully bears out the
gloom of the prologue, in which the ghost of a former king of Ormuz reveals
the magnitude of the curse about to descend on the doomed family. The theme
of _Mustapha_ is borrowed from Madeleine de Scudery's _Ibrahim ou
l'illustre Bassa_, and turns on the ambition of the sultana Rossa. The
choruses of these plays are really philosophical dissertations, and the
connexion with the rest of the drama is often very slight. In _Mustapha_,
for instance, the third chorus is a dialogue between Time and Eternity,
while the fifth consists of an invective against the evils of superstition,
followed by a chorus of priests that does nothing to dispel [v.04 p.0644]
the impression of scepticism contained in the first part. He tells us
himself that the tragedies were not intended for the stage. Charles Lamb
says they should rather be called political treatises. Of Brooke Lamb says,
"He is nine parts Machiavel and Tacitus, for one of Sophocles and
Seneca.... Whether we look into his plays or his most passionate
love-poems, we shall find all frozen and made rigid with intellect." He
goes on to speak of the obscurity of expression that runs through all
Brooke's poetry, an obscurity which is, however, due more to the intensity
and subtlety of the thought than to any lack of mere verbal lucidity.

It is by his biography of Sidney that Fulke Greville is best known. The
full title expresses the scope of the work. It runs: _The Life of the
Renowned Sr. Philip Sidney. With the true Interest of England as it then
stood in relation to all Forrain Princes: And particularly for suppressing
the power of Spain Stated by Him: His principall Actions, Counsels,
Designes, and Death. Together with a short account of the Maximes and
Policies used by Queen Elizabeth in her Government_. He includes some
autobiographical matter in what amounts to a treatise on government. He had
intended to write a history of England under the Tudors, but Robert Cecil
refused him access to the necessary state papers.

Brooke left no sons, and his barony passed to his cousin, Robert Greville
(c. 1608-1643), who thus became 2nd Lord Brooke. This nobleman was
imprisoned by Charles I. at York in 1639 for refusing to take the oath to
fight for the king, and soon became an active member of the parliamentary
party; taking part in the Civil War he defeated the Royalists in a skirmish
at Kineton in August 1642. He was soon given a command in the midland
counties, and having seized Lichfield he was killed there on the 2nd of
March 1643. Brooke, who is eulogized as a friend of toleration by Milton,
wrote on philosophical, theological and current political topics. In 1746
his descendant, Francis Greville, the 8th baron (1710-1773), was created
earl of Warwick, a title still in his family.

Dr A.B. Grosart edited the complete works of Fulke Greville for the _Fuller
Worthies Library_ in 1870, and made a small selection, published in the
_Elizabethan Library_ (1894). Besides the works above mentioned, the
volumes include _Poems of Monarchy, A Treatise of Religion, A Treatie of
Humane Learning, An Inquisition upon Fame and Honour, A Treatie of Warres,
Caelica in CX Sonnets_, a collection of lyrics in various forms, a letter
to an "Honourable Lady," a letter to Grevill Varney in France, and a short
speech delivered on behalf of Francis Bacon, some minor poems, and an
introduction including some of the author's letters. The life of Sidney was
reprinted by Sir S. Egerton Brydges in 1816; and with an introduction by N.
Smith in the "Tudor and Stuart Library" in 1907; _Caelica_ was reprinted in
M.F. Crow's "Elizabethan Sonnet Cycles" in 1898. See also an essay in Mrs.
C.C. Stopes's _Shakespeare's Warwickshire Contemporaries_ (1907).

BROOKE, HENRY (c. 1703-1783), Irish author, son of William Brooke, rector
of Killinkere, Co. Cavan, was born at Rantavan in the same county, about
1703. His mother was a daughter of Simon Digby, bishop of Elphin. Dr Thomas
Sheridan was one of his schoolmasters, and he was entered at Trinity
College, Dublin, in 1720; in 1724 he was sent to London to study law. He
married his cousin and ward, Catherine Meares, before she was fourteen.
Returning to London he published a philosophical poem in six books entitled
_Universal Beauty_ (1735). He attached himself to the party of the prince
of Wales, and took a small house at Twickenham near to Alexander Pope. In
1738 he translated the first and second books of Tasso's _Gerusalemme
liberata_, and in the next year he produced a tragedy, _Gustavas Vasa, the
Deliverer of his Country_. This play had been rehearsed for five weeks at
Drury Lane, but at the last moment the performance was forbidden. The
reason of this prohibition was a supposed portrait of Sir Robert Walpole in
the part of Trollio. In any case the spirit of fervent patriotism which
pervaded the play was probably disliked by the government. The piece was
printed and sold largely, being afterwards put on the Irish stage under the
title of _The Patriot_. This affair provoked a satirical pamphlet from
Samuel Johnson, entitled "A Complete Vindication of the Licensers of the
Stage from the malicious and scandalous Aspersions of Mr Brooke" (1739).
His wife feared that his connexion with the opposition was imprudent, and
induced him to return to Ireland. He interested himself in Irish history
and literature, but a projected collection of Irish stories and a history
of Ireland from the earliest times were abandoned in consequence of
disputes about the ownership of the materials. During the Jacobite
rebellion of 1745 Brooke issued his _Farmer's Six Letters to the
Protestants of Ireland_ (collected 1746) the form of which was suggested by
Swift's _Drapier's Letters_. For this service he received from the
government the post of barrack-master at Mullingar, which he held till his
death. He wrote other pamphlets on the Protestant side, and was secretary
to an association for promoting projects of national utility. About 1760 he
entered into negotiations with leading Roman Catholics, and in 1761 he
wrote a pamphlet advocating alleviation of the penal laws against them. He
is said to have been the first editor of the _Freeman's Journal_,
established at Dublin in 1763. Meanwhile he had been obliged to mortgage
his property in Cavan, and had removed to Co. Kildare. Subsequently a
bequest from Colonel Robert Brooke enabled him to purchase an estate near
his old home, and he spent large sums in attempting to reclaim the
waste-land. His best-known work is the novel entitled _The Fool of Quality;
or the History of Henry Earl of Moreland_, the first part of which was
published in 1765; and the fifth and last in 1770. The characters of this
book, which relates the education of an ideal nobleman by an ideal
merchant-prince, are gifted with a "passionate and tearful sensibility,"
and reflect the real humour and tenderness of the writer. Brooke's
religious and philanthropic temper recommended the book to John Wesley, who
edited (1780) an abridged edition, and to Charles Kingsley, who published
it with a eulogistic notice in 1859. Brooke had a large family, but only
two children survived him. His wife's death seriously affected him, and he
died at Dublin in a state of mental infirmity on the 10th of October 1783.

His daughter, Charlotte Brooke, published _The Poetical Works of Henry
Brooke_ in 1792, but was able to supply very little biographical material.
Other sources for Brooke's biography are C. H. Wilson, _Brookiana_ (2
vols., 1804), and a biographical preface by E. A. Baker prefixed to a new
edition (1906) of _The Fool of Quality_. Brooke's other works include
several tragedies, only some of which were actually staged. He also wrote:
_Jack the Giant Queller_ (1748), an operatic satire, the repetition of
which was forbidden on account of its political allusions; "Constantia, or
the Man of Lawe's Tale" (1741), contributed to George Ogle's _Canterbury
Tales modernized; Juliet Grenville; or the History of the Human Heart_
(1773), a novel; and some fables contributed to Edward Moore's _Fables for
the Female Sex_ (1744).

BROOKE, SIR JAMES (1803-1868), English soldier, traveller and raja of
Sarawak, was born at Coombe Grove near Bath, on the 29th of April 1803. His
father, a member of the civil service of the East India Company, had long
lived in Bengal. His mother was a woman of superior mind, and to her care
he owed his careful early training. He received the ordinary school
education, entered the service of the East India Company, and was sent out
to India about 1825. On the outbreak of the Burmese War he was despatched
with his regiment to the valley of the Brahmaputra; and, being dangerously
wounded in an engagement near Rungpore, was compelled to return home
(1826). After his recovery he travelled on the continent before going to
India, and circumstances led him soon after to leave the service of the
company. In 1830 he made a voyage to China, and during his passage among
the islands of the Indian Archipelago, so rich in natural beauty,
magnificence and fertility, but occupied by a population of savage tribes,
continually at war with each other, and carrying on a system of piracy on a
vast scale and with relentless ferocity, he conceived the great design of
rescuing them from barbarism and bringing them within the pale of
civilization. His purpose was confirmed by observations made during a
second visit to China, and on his return to England he applied himself in
earnest to making the necessary preparations. Having succeeded on the death
of his father to a large property, he bought and equipped a yacht, the
"Royalist," of 140 tons burden, and for three years tested its capacities
and trained his crew of [v.04 p.0645] twenty men, chiefly in the
Mediterranean. At length, on the 27th of October 1838, he sailed from the
Thames on his great adventure. On reaching Borneo, after various delays, he
found the raja Muda Hassim, uncle of the reigning sultan, engaged in war in
the province of Sarawak with several of the Dyak tribes, who had revolted
against the sultan. He offered his aid to the raja; and with his crew, and
some Javanese who had joined them, he took part in a battle with the
insurgents, and they were defeated. For his services the title of raja of
Sarawak was conferred on him by Muda Hassim, the former raja being deprived
in his favour. It was, however, some time before the sultan could be
induced to confirm his title (September 1841). During the next five years
Raja Brooke was engaged in establishing his power, in making just reforms
in administration, preparing a code of laws and introducing just and humane
modes of dealing with the degraded subjects of his rule. But this was not
all. He looked forward to the development of commerce as the most effective
means of putting an end to the worst evils that afflicted the archipelago;
and in order to make this possible, the way must first be cleared by the
suppression, or a considerable diminution, of the prevailing piracy, which
was not only a curse to the savage tribes engaged in it, but a standing
danger to European and American traders in those seas. Various expeditions
were therefore organized and sent out against the marauders, Dyaks and
Malays, and sometimes even Arabs. Captain (afterwards Admiral Sir Harry)
Keppel, and other commanders of British ships of war, received permission
to co-operate with Raja Brooke in these expeditions. The pirates were
attacked in their strongholds, they fought desperately, and the slaughter
was immense. Negotiations with the chiefs had been tried, and tried in
vain. The capital of the sultan of Borneo was bombarded and stormed, and
the sultan with his army routed. He was, however, soon after restored to
his dominion. So large was the number of natives, pirates and others, slain
in these expeditions, that the "head-money" awarded by the British
government to those who had taken part in them amounted to no less than
L20,000. In October 1847 Raja Brooke returned to England, where he was well
received by the government; and the corporation of London conferred on him
the freedom of the city. The island of Labuan, with its dependencies,
having been acquired by purchase from the sultan of Borneo, was erected
into a British colony, and Raja Brooke was appointed governor and
commander-in-chief. He was also named consul-general in Borneo. These
appointments had been made before his arrival in England. The university of
Oxford conferred on him the honorary degree of D.C.L., and in 1848 he was
created K.C.B. He soon after returned to Sarawak, and was carried thither
by a British man-of-war. In the summer of 1849 he led an expedition against
the Seribas and Sakuran Dyaks, who still persisted in their piratical
practices and refused to submit to British authority. Their defeat and
wholesale slaughter was a matter of course. At the time of this engagement
Sir James Brooke was lying ill with dysentery. He visited twice the capital
of the sultan of Sala, and concluded a treaty with him, which had for one
of its objects the expulsion of the sea-gypsies and other tribes from his
dominions. In 1851 grave charges with respect to the operations in Borneo
were brought against Sir James Brooke in the House of Commons by Joseph
Hume and other members, especially as to the "head-money" received. To meet
these accusations, and to vindicate his proceedings, he came to England.
The evidence adduced was so conflicting that the matter was at length
referred to a royal commission, to sit at Singapore. As the result of its
investigation the charges were declared to be "not proven." Sir James,
however, was soon after deprived of the governorship of Labuan, and the
head-money was abolished. In 1867 his house in Sarawak was attacked and
burnt by Chinese pirates, and he had to fly from the capital, Kuching. With
a small force he attacked the Chinese, recovered the town, made a great
slaughter of them, and drove away the rest. In the following year he came
to England, and remained there for three years. During this time he was
attacked by paralysis, a public subscription was raised, and an estate in
Devonshire was bought and presented to him. He made two more visits to
Sarawak, and on each occasion had a rebellion to suppress. He spent his
last days on his estate at Burrator in Devonshire, and died there, on the
11th of June 1868, being succeeded as raja of Sarawak by his nephew. Sir
James Brooke was a man of the highest personal character, and he displayed
rare courage both in his conflicts in the East and under the charges
advanced against him in England.

His _Private Letters_ (1838 to 1853) were published in 1853. Portions of
his _Journal_ were edited by Captains Munday and Keppel. (See also
SARAWAK.)

BROOKE, STOPFORD AUGUSTUS (1832- ), English divine and man of letters, born
at Letterkenny, Donegal, Ireland, in 1832, was educated at Trinity College,
Dublin. He was ordained in the Church of England in 1857, and held various
charges in London. From 1863 to 1865 he was chaplain to the empress
Frederick in Berlin, and in 1872 he became chaplain in ordinary to Queen
Victoria. But in 1880 he seceded from the Church, being no longer able to
accept its leading dogmas, and officiated as a Unitarian minister for some
years at Bedford chapel, Bloomsbury. Bedford chapel was pulled down about
1894, and from that time he had no church of his own, but his eloquence and
powerful religious personality continued to make themselves felt among a
wide circle. A man of independent means, he was always keenly interested in
literature and art, and a fine critic of both. He published in 1865 his
_Life and Letters of F. W. Robertson_ (of Brighton), and in 1876 wrote an
admirable primer of _English Literature_ (new and revised ed., 1900),
followed in 1892 by _The History of Early English Literature_ (2 vols.,
1892) down to the accession of Alfred, and _English Literature from the
Beginnings to the Norman Conquest_ (1898). His other works include various
volumes of sermons; _Poems_ (1888); _Dove Cottage_ (1890); _Theology in the
English Poets--Cowper, Coleridge, Wordsworth, Burns_ (1874); _Tennyson, his
Art and Relation to Modern Life_ (1894); _The Poetry of Robert Browning_
(1902); _On Ten Plays of Shakespeare_ (1905); and _The Life Superlative_
(1906).

BROOK FARM, the name applied to a tract of land in West Roxbury,
Massachusetts, on which in 1841-1847 a communistic experiment was
unsuccessfully tried. The experiment was one of the practical
manifestations of the spirit of "Transcendentalism," in New England, though
many of the more prominent transcendentalists took no direct part in it.
The project was originated by George Ripley, who also virtually directed it
throughout. In his words it was intended "to insure a more natural union
between intellectual and manual labour than now exists; to combine the
thinker and the worker, as far as possible, in the same individual; to
guarantee the highest mental freedom by providing all with labour adapted
to their tastes and talents, and securing to them the fruits of their
industry; to do away with the necessity of menial services by opening the
benefits of education and the profits of labour to all; and thus to prepare
a society of liberal, intelligent and cultivated persons whose relations
with each other would permit a more simple and wholesome life than can be
led amidst the pressure of our competitive institutions." In short, its aim
was to bring about the best conditions for an ideal civilization, reducing
to a minimum the labour necessary for mere existence, and by this and by
the simplicity of its social machinery saving the maximum of time for
mental and spiritual education and development. At a time when Ralph Waldo
Emerson could write to Thomas Carlyle, "We are all a little wild here with
numberless projects of social reform; not a reading man but has a draft of
a new community in his waistcoat pocket,"--the Brook Farm project certainly
did not appear as impossible a scheme as many others that were in the air.
At all events it enlisted the co-operation of men whose subsequent careers
show them to have been something more than visionaries. The association
bought a tract of land about 10 m. from Boston, and in the summer of 1841
began its enterprise with about twenty members. In September the "Brook
Farm Institute of Agriculture and Education" was formally organized, the
members [v.04 p.0646] signing the Articles of Association and forming an
unincorporated joint-stock company. The farm was assiduously, if not very
skilfully, cultivated, and other industries were established--most of the
members paying by labour for their board--but nearly all of the income, and
sometimes all of it, was derived from the school, which deservedly took
high rank and attracted many pupils. Among these were included George
William Curtis and his brother James Burrill Curtis, Father Isaac Thomas
Hecker (1819-1888), General Francis C. Barlow (1834-1896), who as
attorney-general of New York in 1871-1873 took a leading part in the
prosecution of the "Tweed Ring." For three years the undertaking went on
quietly and simply, subject to few outward troubles other than financial,
the number of associates increasing to seventy or eighty. It was during
this period that Nathaniel Hawthorne had his short experience of Brook
Farm, of which so many suggestions appear in the _Blithedale Romance_,
though his preface to later editions effectually disposed of the
idea--which gave him great pain--that he had either drawn his characters
from persons there, or had meant to give any actual description of the
colony. Emerson refused, in a kind and characteristic letter, to join the
undertaking, and though he afterwards wrote of Brook Farm with not
uncharitable humour as "a perpetual picnic, a French Revolution in small,
an age of reason in a patty-pan," among its founders were many of his near
friends. In 1844 the growing need of a more scientific organization, and
the influence which F.M.C. Fourier's doctrines, as modified by Albert
Brisbane (1809-1890), had gained in the minds of Ripley and many of his
associates, combined to change the whole plan of the community. It was
transformed, with the strong approval of all its chief members and the
consent of the rest, into a Fourierist "phalanx" in 1845. There was an
accession of new members, a momentary increase of prosperity, a brilliant
new undertaking in the publication of a weekly journal, the _Harbinger_, in
which Ripley, Charles A. Dana, Francis G. Shaw and John S. Dwight were the
chief writers, and to which James Russell Lowell, J.G. Whittier, George
William Curtis, Parke Godwin, T.W. Higginson, Horace Greeley and many more
now and then contributed. But the individuality of the old Brook Farm was
gone. The association was not rescued even from financial troubles by the
change. With increasing difficulty it kept on till the spring of 1846, when
a fire which destroyed its nearly completed "phalanstery" brought losses
which caused, or certainly gave the final ostensible reason for, its
dissolution. The experiment was abandoned in the autumn of 1847. Besides
Ripley and Hawthorne, the principal members of the community were Charles
A. Dana, John S. Dwight, Minot Pratt (c. 1805-1878), the head farmer, who,
like George Partridge Bradford (1808-1890), left in 1845, and Warren Burton
(1810-1866) a preacher and, later, a writer on educational subjects.
Indirectly connected with the experiment, also, as visitors for longer or
shorter periods but never as regular members, were Emerson, Amos Bronson
Alcott, Orestes A. Brownson, Theodore Parker and William Henry Channing,
Margaret Fuller and Elizabeth Palmer Peabody. The estate itself, after
passing through various hands, came in 1870 into the possession of the
"Association of the Evangelical Lutheran Church for Works of Mercy," which
established here an orphanage, known as the "Martin Luther Orphan Home."

The best account of Brook Farm is Lindsay Swift's _Brook Farm, Its Members,
Scholars and Visitors_ (New York, 1900). _Brook Farm: Historic and Personal
Memoirs_ (Boston, 1894), is by Dr J.T. Codman, one of the pupils in the
school. See also Morris Hillquit's _History of Socialism in the United
States_ (New York, 1903).

(E. L. B.)

[Illustration: FIG. 1.]

[Illustration: FIG. 2.]

[Illustration: FIG. 2.--_Pellia epiphylla_. Group of plants bearing mature
sporogonia.

From Cooke, _Handbook of British Hepaticae_.]

[Illustration: FIG. 3.--_Pellia epiphylla_.

A, Longitudinal section of thallus at the time of fertilization. an,
Antheridia; ar, archegonia; in, involucre.

B, Longitudinal section of almost mature sporogonium attached to the
thallus. in, Involucre; cal, calyptra; f, foot; s, seta; caps, capsule
(semi-diagrammatic).]

[Illustration: FIG. 2.--_Pellia epiphylla_. Group of plants bearing mature
sporogonia.

From Cooke, _Handbook of British Hepaticae_.]

_Pellia epiphylla_ (fig. 2) can be found at any season growing in large
patches on the damp soil of woods, banks, &c. The broad flat thallus is
green and may be a couple of inches long. It is sparingly branched, the
branching being apparently dichotomous; the growing point is situated in a
depression at the anterior end of each branch. The wing-like lateral
portions of the thallus gradually thin out from the midrib; from the
projecting lower surface of this numerous rhizoids spring. These are
elongated superficial cells, and serve to fix the thallus to the soil and
obtain water and salts from it. No leaf-like appendages are borne on the
thallus, but short glandular hairs occur behind the apex. The plant is
composed throughout of very similar living cells, the more superficial ones
containing numerous chlorophyll grains, while starch is stored in the
internal cells of the midrib. The cells contain a number of oil-bodies the
function of which is imperfectly understood. The growth of the thallus
proceeds by the regular segmentation of a single apical cell. The sexual
organs are borne on the upper surface, and both antheridia and archegonia
occur on the same branch (fig. 3, A). The antheridia (an) are scattered
over the middle region of the thallus, and each is surrounded by a tubular
upgrowth from the surface. The archegonia (ar) are developed in a group
behind the apex, and the latter continues to grow for a time after their
formation, so that they come to be seated in a depression of the upper
surface. They are further protected by the growth of the hinder margin of
the depression to form a scale-like involucre (in). Fertilization takes
place about June, and the sporogonium is fully developed by the winter. The
embryo developed from the fertilized ovum consists at first of a number of
tiers of cells. Its terminal tier gives rise to the capsule, the first
divisions in the four cells of the tier marking off the wall of the capsule
from the cells destined to produce the spores. In fig. 4, C, which
represents a longitudinal section of a young embryo of _Pellia_, these
archesporial cells are shaded. The tiers below give rise to the seta and
foot. The mature sporogonium (fig. 3, B) consists of the foot embedded in
the tissue of the thallus, the seta, which remains short until just before
the shedding of the spores, and the spherical capsule. It remains for long
enclosed within the calyptra formed by the further development of the
archegonial wall and surmounted by the neck of the archegonium. The
calyptra is ultimately burst through, and in early spring the seta
elongates rapidly, raising the dark-coloured capsule (fig. 2). In the young
condition the wall of the capsule, which consists of two layers of cells,
encloses a mass of similar cells developed from the archesporium. Some of
these become spore-mother-cells and give rise by cell division to four
spores, while others remain undivided and become the elaters. The latter
are elongated spindle-shaped cells with thick brown spiral bands on the
inside of their thin walls. They radiate out from a small plug of sterile
cells projecting into the base of the capsule, and some are attached to
this, while others lie free among the spores. The latter are large, and at
first are unicellular; but in _Pellia_, which in this respect is
exceptional, they commence their further development within the capsule,
and thus consist of several cells when shed. [v.04 p.0647] The cells of the
capsule wall have incomplete, brown, thickened rings on their walls, and
the capsule opens by splitting into four valves, which bend away from one
another, allowing the loose spores to be readily dispersed by the wind,
assisted by the hygroscopic movements of the elaters. On falling upon damp
soil the spores germinate, growing into a thallus, which gradually attains
its full size and bears sexual organs.

[Illustration: FIG. 4.--Semi-diagrammatic figures of young embryos of
Liverworts in longitudinal section. The cells which will produce the
sporogenous tissue are shaded. (After Kienitz-Gerloff and Leitgeb.)

A, _Riccia_.

B, _Marchantia polymorpha_.

C, _Pellia epiphylla_.

D, _Anthoceros laevis_.

E, _Cephalozia bicuspidata_.

F, _Radula complanata_.]

While the general course of the life-history of all liverworts resembles
that of _Pellia_, the three great groups into which they are divided differ
from one another in the characters of both generations. Each group exhibits
a series leading from more simple to more highly organized forms, and the
differentiation has proceeded on distinct and to some extent divergent
lines in the three groups. The Marchantiales are a series of thalloid
forms, in which the structure of the thallus is specialized to enable them
to live in more exposed situations. The lowest members of the series
(_Riccia_) possess the simplest sporogonia known, consisting of a wall of
one layer of cells enclosing the spores. In the higher forms a sterile foot
and seta is present, and sterile cells or elaters occur with the spores.
The lower members of the Jungermanniales are also thalloid, but the thallus
never has the complicated structure characteristic of the Marchantiales,
and progress is in the direction of the differentiation of the plant into
stem and leaf. Indications of how this may have come about are afforded by
the lower group of the Anacrogynous Jungermanniaceae, and throughout the
Acrogynous Jungermanniacae the plant has well-marked stem and leaves. The
sporogonium even in the simplest forms has a sterile foot, but in this
series also the origin of elaters from sterile cells can be traced. The
Anthocerotales are a small and very distinct group, in which the
gametophyte is a thallus, while the sporogonium possesses a sterile
columella and is capable of long-continued growth and spore production. The
mode of development of the sporogonium presents important differences in
the three series that may be briefly referred to here. In fig. 4 young
sporogonia of a number of liverworts are shown in longitudinal section, and
the archesporial cells from which the spores and elaters will arise are
shaded. In _Riccia_ (fig. 4, A) the whole mass of cells derived from the
ovum forms a spherical capsule, the only sterile tissue being the single
layer of peripheral cells forming the wall. In other Marchantiales (fig. 4,
B) the lower half of the embryo separated by the first transverse wall (1,
I) forms the sterile foot and seta, while in the upper half (ka) the
peripheral layer forms the wall of the capsule, enclosing the archesporial
cells from which spores and elaters arise. In the Jungermanniales (fig. 4,
C, E, F) the embryo is formed of a number of tiers of cells, and the
archesporium is defined by the first divisions parallel to the surface in
the cells of one or more of the upper tiers; a number of tiers go to form
the seta and foot, while the lowest segment (a) usually forms a small
appendage of the latter. In the Anthocerotales (fig. 4, D) the lowest tiers
form the foot, and the terminal tier the capsule. The first periclinal
divisions in the cells of the terminal tier separate a central group of
cells which form the sterile columella (col). The archesporium arises by
the next divisions in the outer layer of cells, and thus extends over the
summit of the columella. In none of the liverworts does the sporogonium
develop by means of an apical cell, as is the rule in mosses.

Leaving details of form and structure to be considered under the several
groups, some general features of the Hepaticae may be looked at here in
relation to the conditions under which the plants live. The organization of
the gametophyte stands in the closest relation to the factors of light and
moisture in the environment. With hardly an exception the liverworts are
dorsiventral, and usually one side is turned to the substratum and the
other exposed to the light. In thalloid forms a thinner marginal expansion
or a definite wing increasing the surface exposed to the light can be
distinguished from a thicker midrib serving for storage and conduction. The
leaves and stem of the foliose forms effect the same division of labour in
another way. The relation of the plant to its water supply varies within
the group. In the Marchantiales the chief supply is obtained from the soil
by the rhizoids, and its loss in transpiration is regulated and controlled.
In most liverworts, on the other hand, water is absorbed directly by the
whole general surface, and the rhizoids are of subordinate importance. Many
forms only succeed in a constantly humid atmosphere, while others sustain
drying for a period, though their powers of assimilation and growth are
suspended in the dry state. The cell-walls are capable of imbibing water
rapidly, and their thickness stands in relation to this rather than to the
prevention of loss of water from the plant. The large surface presented by
the leafy forms facilitates the retention and absorption of water. The
importance of prolonging the moistened condition as long as possible is
further shown by special adaptations to retain water either between the
appressed lobes of the leaves or in special pitcher-like sacs. In thalloid
forms fimbriate or lobed margins or outgrowths from the surface lead to the
same result. Sometimes adaptations to protect the plant during seasons of
drought, such as the rolling up of the thallus in many xerophytic
Marchantiales, can be recognized, but more often a prolonged dry season is
survived in some resting state. The formation of subterranean tubers, which
persist when the rest of the plant is killed by drought, is an interesting
adaptation to this end, and is found in all three groups (_e.g._ in species
of _Riccia_, _Fossombronia_ and _Anthoceros_). No examples of total
saprophytism or of parasitism are known, but two interesting cases of a
symbiosis with other organisms which is probably a mutually beneficial one,
though the nature of the physiological relation between the organisms is
not clearly established, may be mentioned. Fungal hyphae occur in the
rhizoids and in the cells of the lower region of the thallus of many
liverworts, as in the endotrophic mycorhiza of higher plants. Colonies of
_Nostoc_ are constantly found in the Anthocerotaceae and in _Blasia_. In
the latter they are protected by special concave scales, while in the
Anthocerotaceae they occupy some of the mucilage slits between the cells of
the lower surface of the thallus.

Other adaptations concern the protection of the sexual organs and
sporogonia, and the retention of water in the neighbourhood of the
archegonia to enable the spermatozoid to reach the ovum. In thalloid forms
the sexual organs are often sunk in depressions, while in the foliose forms
protection is afforded by the surrounding leaves. In addition special
involucres around the archegonia have arisen independently in several
series. The characters of the sporogonium have as their object the
nutrition and effective distribution of the spores, and only exceptionally,
as in the Anthocerotaceae, are concerned with independent assimilation. In
most forms the capsule is raised above the general surface at the time of
opening, usually by the rapid growth of the seta, but in the Marchantiaceae
by the sporogonia being raised on a special archegoniophore. The elaters
serve as lines of conduction of plastic material to the developing spores,
and later usually assist in their dispersal. The spores, with few
exceptions, are unicellular when shed, and may develop at once or after a
resting period. In their germination a short filament of a few cells is
usually developed, and the apical cell of the plant is established in the
terminal cell. In other cases a small plate or mass of cells is formed.
With one or two exceptions, however, this preliminary [v.04 p.0648] phase,
which may be compared with the protonema of mosses, is of short duration.

The power of vegetative propagation is widely spread. When artificially
divided small fragments of the gametophyte are found to be capable of
growing into new individuals. Apart from the separation of branches by the
decay of older portions, special gemmae are found in many species. In
_Aneura_ the contents of superficial cells, after becoming surrounded by a
new wall and dividing, escape as bi-cellular gemmae. Usually the gemmae
arise by the outgrowth of superficial cells, and become free by breaking
away from their stalk. When separated they may be single cells or consist
of two or numerous cells. In _Blasia_ and _Marchantia_ the gemmae are
formed within tubular or cup-shaped receptacles, out of which they are
forced by the swelling of mucilage secreted by special hairs.

[Illustration: FIG. 5.--_Marchantia polymorpha_. (After Sachs.)

A. Portion of thallus (t) bearing two stalked antheridiophores (hu).

B. Longitudinal section through a young antheridiophore. The antheridia (a)
are seated in depressions of the upper surface (o); b, scales; h, rhizoids.

C. Longitudinal section of antheridium; st, stalk; w, wall.

D. Two spermatozoids.]

_Marchantiales._--The plants of this group are most abundant in warm sunny
localities, and grow for the most part on soil or rocks often in exposed
situations. Nine genera are represented in Britain. _Targionia_ is found on
exposed rocks, but the other forms are less strikingly xerophytic;
_Marchantia polymorpha_ and _Lunularia_ spread largely by the gemmae formed
in the special gemma-cups on the thallus, and occur commonly in
greenhouses. The large thallus of _Conocephalus_ covers stones by the
waterside, while _Dumortiera_ is a hygrophyte confined to damp and shady
situations. Among the Ricciaceae, most of which grow on soil,
_Ricciocarpus_ and _Riccia natans_ occur floating on still water. The
dorsiventral thallus is constructed on the same plan throughout the group,
and shows a lower region composed of cells containing little chlorophyll
and an upper stratum specialized for assimilation and transpiration. The
lower region usually forms a more or less clearly marked midrib, and
consists of parenchymatous cells, some of which may contain oil-bodies or
be differentiated as mucilage cells or sclerenchyma fibres. Behind the
apex, which has a number of initial cells, a series of amphigastria or
ventral scales is formed. These consist of a single layer of cells, and
their terminal appendages often fold over the apex and protect it. Usually
they stand in two rows, but sometimes accessory rows occur, and in _Riccia_
only a single median row is present. The thallus bears two sorts of
rhizoids, wider ones with smooth walls which grow directly down into the
soil, and longer, narrower ones, with peg-like thickenings of the wall
projecting into the cell-cavity. The peg-rhizoids, which are peculiar to
the group, converge under shelter of the amphigastria to the midrib,
beneath which they form a wick-like strand. Through this water is conducted
by capillarity as well as in the cell cavities. The upper stratum of the
thallus is constructed to regulate the giving off of the water thus
absorbed. It consists of a series of air-chambers (fig. 6, B) formed by
certain lines of the superficial cells growing up from the surface, and as
the thallus increases in area continuing to divide so as to roof in the
chamber. The layer forming the roof is called the "epidermis," and the
small opening left leading into the chamber is bounded by a special ring of
cells and forms the "stoma" or air-pore. In most species of _Riccia_ the
air-chambers are only narrow passages, but in the other Marchantiales they
are more extended. In the simplest cases the sides and base of the chambers
perform the work of assimilation (_e.g._ _Corsinia_). Usually the surface
is extended by the development of partitions in the chambers (_Reboulia_),
or by the growth from the floor of the chamber of short filaments of
chlorophyllous cells (_Targionia_. _Marchantia_, fig. 6). The stomata may
be simply surrounded by one or more series of narrower cells, or, as in the
thallus of _Marchantia_ and on the archegoniophores of other forms, may
become barrel-shaped structures by the division of the ring of cells
bounding the pore. In some cases the lowermost circle of cells can be
approximated so as to close the pore. In _Dumortiera_ the air-chambers are
absent, their formation being only indicated at the apex.

[Illustration: FIG. 6.--_Marchantia polymorpha._ A, Stoma in surface view.
B, Air-chamber with the filaments of assimilating cells and stoma in
vertical section.

From Strasburger's _Text-book of Botany_.]

The sexual organs are always situated on the morphologically upper surface
of the thallus. In _Riccia_ they are scattered singly and protected by the
air-chamber layer. The scattered position of the antheridia is also found
in some of the higher forms, but usually they are grouped on special
antheridiophores which in _Marchantia_ are stalked, disk-shaped
branch-systems (fig. 5). The individual antheridia are sunk in depressions
from which the spermatozoids are in some cases forcibly ejected. The
archegonial groups in _Corsinia_ are sunk in a depression of the upper
surface, while in _Targionia_ they are displaced to the lower side of the
anterior end of a branch. In all the other forms they are borne on special
archegoniophores which have the form of a disk-shaped head borne on a
stalk. The archegoniophore may be an upgrowth from the dorsal surface of
the thallus (_e.g._ _Plagiochasma_), or the apex of the branch may take
part in its formation. When the disk, around which archegonia are developed
at intervals, is simply raised on a stalk-like continuation of the branch,
a single groove protecting a strand of peg-rhizoids is found on the ventral
face of the stalk (_Reboulia_). In the highest forms (_e.g._ _Marchantia_)
the archegoniophore corresponds to the repeatedly branched continuation of
the thallus, and the archegonia arise in relation to the growing points
which are displaced to the lower surface of the disk. In this case two
grooves are found in the stalk. The archegonia are protected by being sunk
in depressions of the disk or by a special two-lipped involucre. In
_Marchantia_ and _Fimbriaria_ an additional investment termed in
descriptive works the perianth, grows up around each fertilized archegonium
(fig. 1, 3, d). The simple sporogonium found in the Ricciaceae (fig. 4, A)
has been described above; as the spores develop, the wall of the spherical
capsule is absorbed and the spores lie free in the calyptra, by the decay
of which they are set free. In _Corsinia_ the capsule has a well-developed
foot, but the sterile cells found among the spore-mother-cells do not
become elaters, but remain thin-walled and simply contribute to the
nutrition of the spores. In all other forms elaters with spirally thickened
walls are found. The seta is short, the capsule being usually raised upon
the archegoniophore. Dehiscence takes place either by the upper portion of
the capsule splitting into short teeth or falling away as a whole or in
fragments as a sort of operculum. The spores on germination form a short
germ-tube, in the terminal cell of which the apical cell is established,
but the direction of growth of the young thallus is usually not in the same
straight line as the germ-tube. The Marchantiales are divided into a number
of groups which represent distinct lines of advance from forms like the
Ricciaceae, but the details of their classification cannot be entered upon
here. The general nature of the progression exhibited by the group as a
whole will, however, be evident from the above account.

_Jungermanniales._--This large series of liverworts, which presents great
variety in the organization of the sexual generation, is divided into two
main groups according to whether the formation of archegonia terminates the
growth of the branch or does not utilize the apex. The latter condition is
characteristic of the more primitive group of the Anacrogynous
Jungermanniaceae, in which the branch continues its growth after the
formation of archegonia so that they (and later the sporogonia) stand on
the dorsal surface of the thallus or leafy plant. In the Acrogynous
Jungermanniaceae the plant is throughout foliose, and the archegonia occupy
the ends of the main shoot or of its branches. The antheridia are usually
globular and long-stalked. The capsule opens by splitting into four halves.

[Illustration: FIG. 7.--_Blasia pusilla._ The margin of the thallus bears
leaf-life lobes. r, Rhizoids; s, sporogonium.

From Strasburger's _Text-book of Botany_.]

_Jungermanniaceae Anacrogynae._--The great range of form in the sexual
plant is well illustrated by the nine genera of this group [v.04 p.0649]
which occur in Britain. One thalloid form has already been described in
_Pellia_ (fig. 2). _Sphaerocarpus_, which occurs rarely in stubble fields,
is in many respects one of the simplest of the liverworts. The small
thallus bears the antheridia and archegonia, each of which is surrounded by
a tubular involucre, on the upper surface of distinct individuals. The
sporogonium has a small foot, but the sterile cells among the spores do not
develop into elaters. The same is true of the capsule of _Riella_. The
plants of this genus, none of the species of which are British, grow in
shallow water rooted in the mud, and are unlike all other liverworts in
appearance. The usually erect thallus has a broad wing-like outgrowth from
the dorsal surface and two rows of rather large scales below. No provision
for the opening of the capsule exists in either of these genera. In
_Aneura_ the form of the plant may be complicated by a division of labour
between root-like, stem-like and assimilating branches of the thallus. The
sexual organs are borne on short lateral branches, while in the related
genus _Metzgeria_, which occurs on rocks and tree trunks, the small sexual
branches spring from the lower surface of the midrib of the narrow thallus.
In these two genera the elaters are attached to a sterile group of cells
projecting into the upper end of the capsule, and on dehiscence remain
connected with the tips of the valves. _Pallavicinia_ and some related
genera have a definite midrib and broad wings formed of one layer of cells,
and are of interest owing to the presence of a special water-conducting
strand in the midrib. This consists of elongated lignified cells with
pitted walls. _Blasia pusilla_, which occurs commonly by ditches and
streams, affords a transition to the foliose types. Its thallus (fig. 7)
has thin marginal lobes of limited growth, which are comparable to the more
definite leaves of other anacrogynous forms. The ventral surface bears flat
scales in addition to the concave scales which, as mentioned above, are
inhabited by _Nostoc_. This interesting liverwort produces two kinds of
gemmae, and in the localities in which it grows is largely reproduced by
their means. In _Fossombronia_, of which there are a number of British
species, the plant consists of a flattened stem creeping on muddy soil and
bearing two rows of large obliquely-placed leaves. The sexual organs are
borne on the upper surface of the midrib, and the sporogonium is surrounded
by a bell-shaped involucre which grows up after fertilization. _Treubia_,
which grows on rotting wood in the mountain forests of Java, is similarly
differentiated into stem and leaf, and is the largest liverwort known,
reaching a length of thirty centimetres. Lastly _Haplomitrium_, a rare
British genus, forms with the exotic _Calobryum_, an isolated group which
is most naturally placed among the anacrogynous forms although the
archegonia are in terminal groups. The erect branches bear three rows of
leaves, and spring from a creeping axis from which root-like branches
destitute of rhizoids extend into the substratum.

[Illustration: FIG. 8.--_Chiloscyphus polyanthos._ The plant bears three
mature sporogonia which show the elongation of the seta. One of the
sporogonia has opened. B, The "perianth" with the small perichaetial leaves
below it. (After Goebel.)]

_Jungermanniaceae Acrogynae._--The plant consists of leafy shoots, the
origin of which can be understood in the light of the foliose forms
described above. The great majority of existing liverworts belong to this
group, the general plan of construction of which is throughout very
similar. In Britain thirty-nine genera with numerous species are found.
With few exceptions the stem grows by means of a pyramidal apical cell
cutting off three rows of segments. Each segment gives rise to a leaf, but
usually the leaves of the ventral row (amphigastria) are smaller and
differently shaped from those of the two lateral rows; in a number of
genera they are wanting altogether. Sometimes the leaves retain their
transverse insertion on the stem, and the two lobes of which they consist
are developed equally. More often they come to be obliquely inserted, the
anterior edge of each leaf lying under or over the edge of the leaf in
front. The two lobes are often unequally developed. In _Scapania_ the upper
lobe is the smaller, while in _Radula_, _Poretta_ and the _Lejeuneae_ this
is the case with the lower lobe. The folding of one lobe against another
assists in the retention of water. Pitcher-like structures have arisen in
different ways in a number of genera, and are especially common in
epiphytic forms (_Frullania_, _Lepidolaena_, _Pleurozia_). In some forms
the leaves are finely divided, and along with the hair-like paraphyllia
form a loose weft around the stem (_Trichocolea_). The rhizoids spring from
the lower surface of the stem, and sometimes from the bases of the leaves.
The branches arise below and by the side of the leaves.

[Illustration: FIG. 9.--_Cephalozia bicuspidata._ Longitudinal section of
the summit of a shoot bearing a nearly mature sporogonium, sg, still
enclosed in the calyptra; ar', archegonia which have remained unfertilized;
st, stem; b, leaf; p, perianth. (After Hofmeister.)]

The sexual organs may occur on the same or on distinct individuals. The
antheridia are protected by leaves which are often modified in shape. The
archegonia are borne at the apex of the main stem or of a lateral branch. A
single archegonium may arise from the apical cell (_Lejeunea_); more
commonly a number of others are formed from the surrounding segments. The
leaves below the archegonial group are frequently modified in size and
shape, but the chief protection is afforded by a tubular perianth, which
corresponds to a coherent whorl of leaves and grows up independently of
fertilization. The perianth serves also to enclose and protect the
sporogonium during its development. In a number of forms belonging to
different groups the end of the stem on which the sporogonium is borne
grows downwards so as to form a hollow tubular sac enclosing the
sporogonium; in other cases this marsupial sac is formed by the base of the
sporogonium boring into the thickened end of the stem. The sac usually
penetrates into the soil and bears rhizoids on its outer surface. _Kantia_,
_Calypogeia_ and _Saccogyna_ are British forms, which have their sporogonia
protected in this way. The sporogonium is very similar throughout the group
(figs. 8, 9). At maturity the seta elongates rapidly, and the wall of the
capsule splits more or less completely into four valves, allowing the
elaters and spores to escape. In the Jubuloideae, which in other respects
form a well-marked group, the seta is short and the elaters extend from the
upper part of the capsule to the base; at dehiscence they remain fixed to
the valves into which the capsule splits. The germinating spore usually
forms a short filament, but in other cases a flat plate of cells growing by
a two-sided apical cell is first formed (_Radula_, _Lejeunea_). In one or
two tropical forms the pro-embryonic stage is prolonged, and leafy shoots
only arise in connexion with the sexual organs. In _Protocephalozia_, which
grows on bare earth in South America, this pro-embryo is filamentous, while
in _Lejeunea Metzgeriopsis_, which grows on the leaves of living plants, it
is a flat branched thallus closely applied to the substratum. Other cases
of the plant being, with the exception of the sexual branches, apparently
thalloid, are on the other hand to be explained as due to the reduction of
the leaves and flattening of the stem of a shoot (_Pteropsiella_,
_Zoopsis_).

The Acrogynous Jungermanniaceae fall into a number of natural groups, which
cannot, however, be followed out here. They occur in very various
situations, on the ground, on rocks and stones, on tree trunks, and, in the
damp tropics, on leaves. Usually they form larger or smaller tufts of a
green colour, but some forms have a reddish tint.

[Illustration: FIG. 10.--_Anthoceros laevis._ sp, Sporogonium; c,
columella.

From Strasburger's _Text-book of Botany_.]

_Anthocerotales._--This small and very natural group includes the three
genera _Anthoceros_, _Dendroceros_ and _Notothylas_, and stands in [v.04
p.0650] many respects in an isolated position among the Bryophyta. Three
species of _Anthoceros_ occur in Britain, growing on the damp soil of
fields, ditches, &c. The dark green thallus has an ill-defined midrib, and
is composed of parenchymatous cells. In each assimilating cell there is
usually a single large chloroplast. The apical region, which has a single
initial cell, is protected by mucilage secreted by the mucilage slits,
which are small pit-like depressions between superficial cells of the lower
surface. Mucilage is also often formed in intercellular spaces within the
thallus. Colonies of _Nostoc_ are constantly found living in some of the
mucilage slits which then become enlarged. The sexual organs are scattered
over the upper surface. The stalked globular antheridia are exceptional in
being formed endogenously, and are situated in groups in special
intercellular spaces. The superficial layer of cells bounding the cavity
does not break down until the antheridia are nearly mature. Occasionally
antheridia develop on the surface of shaded portions of the thallus. The
necks of the archegonia hardly project above the general surface of the
thallus. In structure and development they agree with other Hepaticae,
though differences of detail exist. The young sporogonium is protected by a
thick calyptra derived from the tissue of the thallus around the
archegonium. The sporogonium consists of a large bulbous foot, the
superficial cells of which grow out into processes, and a long capsule,
which continues to grow for months by the activity of a zone of cells
between it and the foot, and may attain the length of an inch and a half.
The wall of the capsule is several layers of cells thick, and since the
epidermis contains functional stomata and the underlying cells possess
chlorophyll it is capable of assimilation. In the centre of the capsule is
a strand of narrow elongated cells forming the columella, and between this
and the wall spores mixed with elaters are formed from the dome-shaped
archesporium, the origin of which has already been described (fig. 4, D).
The capsule opens by splitting into two valves from the apex downwards, and
the mature spores escape while others are developing in succession below.
In _Dendroceros_, which grows as an epiphyte in the tropics, the thallus
has a well-defined midrib and broad wings composed of a single layer of
cells. The capsule is similar to that of _Anthoceros_, but has no stomata,
and the elaters have spirally thickened walls. Some species of _Anthoceros_
agree with it in these respects. _Notothylas_ resembles _Anthoceros_ in its
thallus, but the sporogonium is much smaller. In some species, although the
columella and archesporium arise in the usual way, both give rise to
mingled spores and elaters, and no sterile columella is developed.

_Musci_ (Mosses).

Though the number of species of mosses is far greater than of liverworts,
the group offers much less diversity of form. The sexual generation is
always a leafy plant, which is not developed directly from the spore but is
borne on a well-marked and usually filamentous protonema. The general
course of the life-history and the main features of form and structure will
be best understood by a brief account of a particular example.

[Illustration: FIG. 11.--_Funaria hygrometrica._

A, Leafy shoot (g) bearing a young sporogonium enclosed in the calyptra
(c).

B, Similar plant with an almost mature sporogonium; s, seta; f, capsule; c,
calyptra.

C, Median longitudinal section of a capsule, with the seta gradually
widening into the apophysis at its base; d, operculum; p, peristome; a,
annulus; c, columella; s, archesporium; h, air-space between the spore-sac
and the wall of the capsule.

(From Goebel's _Pflanzenmorphologie_, by permission of W Engelmann)]

_Funaria hygrometrica_ is a moss of very common occurrence even in towns on
the soil of paths, at the foot of walls and in similar places. The small
plants grow closely crowded in tufts, and consist of short leafy shoots
attached to the soil by numerous fine rhizoids. The latter, in contrast to
the rhizoids of liverworts, are composed of rows of elongated cells and are
branched. The leaves are simple, and except for the midrib are only one
layer of cells thick. The structure of the stem though simple is more
complicated than in any liverwort. The superficial cells are thick-walled,
and there is a central strand of narrow cells forming a water-conducting
tissue. The small strand of elongated cells in the midrib of the leaf runs
down into the stem, but is not usually connected with the central strand.
The sexual organs are developed in groups at the apices, the antheridial
group usually terminating the main axis while the archegonia are borne on a
lateral branch. The brown tint of the hair-like paraphyses mixed with
antheridia (fig. 15) makes the male branch conspicuous, while the
archegonia have to be carefully looked for enclosed by the surrounding
leaves (fig. 16, B). The sporogonium developed from the fertilized ovum
grows by means of a two-sided apical cell (fig. 16 A), and is at first of
uniform thickness. After a time the upper region increases in diameter and
forms the capsule, while the lower portion forms the long seta and the foot
which is embedded in the end of the stem. With the growth of the
sporogonium the archegonial wall, which for a time kept pace with it, is
broken through, the larger upper part terminated by the neck being carried
up on the capsule as the calyptra, while the basal portion remains as a
tubular sheath round the lower end of the seta (cf. figs. 16, C, and fig.
11, A, B). The seta widens out at the base of the capsule into a region
known as the apophysis. The peripheral cells of the seta are thick-walled,
and it has a central strand of elongated conducting cells. In the epidermis
of the apophysis functional stomata, similar to those of the higher plants,
are present and, since cells containing chlorophyll are present below the
superficial layers of the apophysis and capsule, the sporogonium is capable
of independent assimilation. The construction of the capsule will be best
understood from the median longitudinal section (fig. 11, C). The central
region extending between the apophysis and the operculum is composed of
sterile tissue and forms the columella (c). Immediately around this is the
layer of cells from which the spores will be developed (s), and the layers
of cells on either side of this form the walls of the spore-sac, which will
contain the spores. Between the wall of the capsule, which is composed of
several layers of cells, and the spore-sac is a wide intercellular space
(h) bridged across by trabeculae consisting of rows of
chlorophyll-containing cells. At the junction of the operculum (d) with the
rest of the capsule is a circle of cells forming the annulus (a), by help
of which the operculum is detached at maturity as a small lid. Its removal
does not, however, leave the mouth of the capsule wide open, for around the
margin are two circles of pointed teeth forming the peristome. These are
the thickened cell-walls of a definite layer of cells (p), and appear [v.04
p.0651] as separate teeth owing to the breaking down of the unthickened
cell-walls. The numerous spores which have been developed in the spore sac
can thus only escape from the pendulous capsule through narrow slits
between the teeth, and these are closed in damp air. The unicellular spores
when supplied with moisture germinate (fig. 12) and give rise to the sexual
generation. A filamentous protonema is first developed, some of the
branches of which are exposed to the light and contain abundant
chlorophyll, while others penetrate the substratum as brown or colourless
rhizoids. The moss-plants arise from single projecting cells, and numerous
plants may spring from the protonema developed from a single spore.

[Illustration: FIG. 12.--_Funaria hygrometrica._ (After Goebel.)

A, Germinating spores. s, Wall of spore; v, vacuole; w, rhizoid.

B, Part of a developed protonema. h, Creeping filament with brown walls
from which the filaments of chlorophyll-containing cells (b) arise; k,
young moss-plant; w, its first rhizoid.]

The majority of the mosses belong to the same great group as _Funaria_, the
Bryales. The other two subdivisions of the Musci are each represented by a
single genus. In the Andreaeales the columella does not extend to the upper
end of the capsule, and the latter opens by a number of lateral slits. The
Sphagnales also have a dome-shaped spore-sac continued over the columella,
and, though their capsule opens by an operculum, they differ widely from
other mosses in the development of the sporogonium as well as in the
characters of the sexual generation. The three groups are described
separately below, but some more general features of the mosses may be
considered here.

On the whole mosses grow in drier situations than the liverworts, and the
arrangements they present for the conduction of water in the plant are also
more complete and suggest in some cases comparisons with the higher plants.
In spite of this, however, they are in great part dependent on the
absorption of water through the general surface of the shoot, and the power
of rapid imbibition possessed by their cell-walls, the crowded position of
the small leaves on the stem, and special adaptations for the retention of
water on the surface, have the same significance as in the foliose
liverworts. The different appearance of exposed mosses in dry weather and
after a shower illustrates this relation to the water supply. The protonema
is always a well-marked stage in the life-history. Not only does a
moss-plant never arise directly from the spore, but in all cases of
vegetative reproduction, apart from the separation of branches by decay of
older regions of the plant, a protonema is found. Usually the protonema is
filamentous and ceases to be evident after the plants have developed. But
in some small mosses (e.g. _Ephemerum_) it plays the chief part in
assimilation and lives on from year to year. In _Sphagnum_, _Andreaea_ and
some genera of the Bryales the protonema or some of its branches have the
form of flat plates or masses of cells. The formation of the moss-plant on
the protonema is always from a single cell and is similar in all mosses.
The first three walls in this cell intersect one another, and define the
three-sided pyramidal apical cell by means of which the shoot continues to
grow. In _Fissidens_ and a few other mosses the apical cell is two-sided.
The leaves formed by the successive segments gradually attain their normal
size and structure. Each segment of the initial cell gives rise to a leaf
and a portion of the stem; the branches arise from the lower portion of a
segment and stand immediately below a leaf. The leaves may form three
vertical rows, but usually their arrangement, owing to the direction of the
segment walls at the apex, becomes more complicated. Their growth proceeds
by means of a two-sided apical cell, and the midrib does not become more
than one cell thick until later. In addition to the leaves the stem often
bears hair-like structures of different kinds, some of which correspond to
modified branches of protonema. The branched filamentous rhizoids which
spring from the lower region of the stem also correspond to protonemal
branches. The structure of both stem and leaf reaches a high grade of
organization in some mosses. Not only are thick-walled sclerenchymatous
cells developed to give rigidity to the periphery of the stem and the
midrib of the leaf, but in many cases a special water-conducting tissue,
consisting of elongated cells, the end walls of which are thin and oblique,
forms a definite central strand in the stem. In the forms in which it is
most highly developed (Polytrichaceae) this tissue, which is comparable
with the xylem of higher plants, is surrounded by a zone of tissue
physiologically comparable to phloem, and in the rhizome may be limited by
an endodermis. The conducting strands in the leaves show the same tissues
as in the central strand of the stem, and in the Polytrichaceae and some
other mosses are in continuity with it. The independent origin of this
conducting system is of great interest for comparison with the vascular
system of the sporophyte of the higher plants.

The sexual organs, with the exception of the antheridia of _Sphagnum_, are
borne at the apices of the main shoot or of branches. Their general
similarity to the mature antheridia and archegonia of liverworts and the
main difference in their development have been referred to. The antheridia
open by means of a cap cell or groups of cells with mucilaginous contents.
The details of construction of the sporogonium are referred to below. In
all cases (except _Archidium_) a columella is present, and all the cells
derived from the archesporium produce spores, no elaters being formed. In a
few cases the germination of the spore commences within the capsule. The
development of the sporogonium proceeds in all cases (except in _Sphagnum_)
by means of an apical cell cutting off two rows of segments. The first
periclinal division in the region forming the capsule separates an inner
group of cells (the endothecium) form the peripheral layer (amphithecium).
In _Sphagnum_, as in _Anthoceros_, the archesporium is derived from the
amphithecium; in all other mosses it is the outermost layer of the
endothecium.

Vegetative propagation is widely spread in the mosses, and, as mentioned
above, a protonema is always formed in the development of the new plant.
The social growth of the plants characteristic of many mosses is a result
of the formation of numerous plants on the original protonema and on
developments from the rhizoids. Besides this, gemmae may be formed on the
protonema, on the leaves or at the apex, and some mosses have specialized
shoots for their better protection or distribution. Thus in _Georgia_ the
stalked, multicellular gemmae are borne at the ends of shoots surrounded by
a rosette of larger leaves, and in _Aulacomnium androgynum_ they are raised
on an elongated leafless region of the shoot. In other cases detached
leaves or shoots may give rise to new plants, and when a moss is
artificially divided almost any fragment may serve for reproduction.

Even in those rare cases in which the sexual generation can be developed
without the intervention of spore production from the tissues of the
sporogonium, a protonema is formed from cut pieces of the seta or in some
cases from intact sporogonia still attached to the plant. This phenomenon
of _apospory_ was first discovered in mosses, but is now also known in a
number of ferns (see PTERIDOPHYTA).

[Illustration: FIG. 13.--_Sphagnum acutifolium._ (After Schimper.)

A. Longitudinal section of apex of a bud bearing archegonia (ar), enclosed
by the large leaves (y); ch, small perichaetial leaves.

B. Longitudinal section of the sporogonium borne on the pseudopodium (ps);
c, calyptra; ar, neck of archegonium; sg', foot; sg, capsule.

C. _S. squarrosum._ Ripe sporogonium raised on the pseudopodium (qs) above
the enclosing leaves (ch); c, the ruptured calyptra; sg, capsule; d,
operculum.]

_Sphagnales._--The single genus _Sphagnum_ occupies a very distinct and
isolated position among mosses. The numerous species, which are familiar as
the bog-mosses, are so similar that minute structural characters have to be
relied on in their identification. The plants occur in large patches of a
pale green or reddish colour on moors, and, when filling up small lakes or
pools, may attain a length of some feet. Their growth has played a large
part in the formation of peat. The species are distributed in temperate and
arctic climates, but in the tropics only occur at high levels. The
protonema forms a flat, lobed, thalloid structure attached to the soil by
rhizoids, and the plants arise from marginal cells. The main shoot bears
numerous branches which appear to stand in whorls; some of them bend down
and become applied to the surface of the main axis. The structure of the
stem and leaves is peculiar. The former shows on cross-section a
thin-walled central tissue surrounded by a zone of thick-walled cells.
Outside this come one to five layers of large clear cells, which when
mature are dead and empty; their walls are strengthened with a spiral
thickening and perforated with round pores. They serve to absorb and
conduct water by capillarity. The leaves have no midrib and similar empty
cells occur regularly among the narrow chlorophyll-containing cells, which
thus appear as a green network. The antheridia are globular and have long
stalks. They stand by the side of leaves of special club-shaped branches.
The archegonial groups occupy the apices of short branches (fig. 13, A.).
The mature sporogonium consists of a wide foot separated by a constriction
from the globular capsule (B). There is no distinct seta, but the capsule
is raised on a leafless outgrowth of the end of the branch called a
pseudopodium (C, qs). The capsule, the wall of which bears rudimentary
stomata, has a small operculum but no peristome. There is a short, wide
columella, over which the dome-shaped spore-sac extends, and no air-space
is present between the spore-sac and the wall. In the embryo a number of
tiers of cells are first formed. The lower tiers [v.04 p.0652] form the
foot, while in the upper part the first divisions mark off the columella,
around which the archesporium, derived from the amphithecium, extends. The
sporogonium when nearly mature bursts the calyptra irregularly. The capsule
opens explosively in dry weather, the operculum and spores being thrown to
a distance. The spore on germination forms a short filament which soon
broadens out into the thalloid protonema. Some twelve species of _Sphagnum_
are found in Britain.

[Illustration: FIG. 14.--_Andreaea petrophila_. Plant bearing opened
capsule.

(k) ps, Pseudopodium.

c, Calyptra.

spf, Foot of sporogonium.

From Strasburger's _Textbook of Botany_]

_Andreaeales._--The species of the single genus _Andreaea_ (fig. 14) are
small, dark-coloured mosses growing for the most part in tufts on bare
rocks in alpine and arctic regions. Four species occur on alpine rocks in
Britain. The spore on germination gives rise to a small mass of cells from
which one or more short filaments grow. The filament soon broadens into a
ribbon-shaped thallus, several cells thick, which is closely applied to the
rock. Erect branches may arise from the protonema, and gemmae may be
developed on it. The stem of the plant, which arises in the usual way, has
no conducting strand and the leaves may or may not have midribs. The leaf
grows by a dome-shaped instead of by the usual two-sided initial cell. The
antheridia are long-stalked. The upper portion of the archegonial wall is
carried up as a calyptra on the sporogonium, which, as in _Sphagnum_, has
no seta and is raised on a pseudopodium. The development of the sporogonium
proceeds as in the Bryales, but the dome-shaped archesporium extends over
the summit of the columella and an air-space is wanting. The capsule does
not open by an operculum but by four or six longitudinal slits, which do
not reach either the base or apex. In one exotic species the splits occur
only at the upper part of the capsule, and the terminal cap breaks away.
This isolated example thus appears to approach the Bryales in its mode of
dehiscence.

_Bryales._--In contrast to the preceding two this group includes a very
large number of genera and species. Thus even in Britain between five and
six hundred species belonging to more than one hundred genera are found.
They occur in the most varied situations, on soil, on rocks and trees, and,
in a few instances (_Fontinalis_), in water. Although exhibiting a wide
range in size and in the structural complexity of both generations, they
all conform to a general type, so that _Funaria_, described above, will
serve as a fair example of the group. The protonema is usually filamentous,
and in some of the simplest forms is long-lived, while the small plants
borne on it serve mainly to protect the sexual organs and sporogonia. This
is the case in _Ephemerum_, which grows on the damp soil of clayey fields,
and the plants are even more simply constructed in _Buxbaumia_, which
occurs on soil rich in humus and is possibly partially saprophytic. In this
moss the filamentous protonema is capable of assimilation, but the leaves
of the small plants are destitute of chlorophyll, so that they are
dependent on the protonema. The male plant has no definite stem, and
consists of a single concave leaf protecting the antheridium. The female
plant is rather more highly organized, consisting of a short stem bearing a
few leaves around the group of archegonia. The sporogonium is of large size
and highly organized, though it presents peculiar features in the
peristome. _Buxbaumia_ has been regarded by Goebel as representing a stage
which other mosses have passed, and has been described by him as the
simplest type of moss. In _Ephemerum_ also we may probably regard the
relation of the small plants to the protonema as a primitive one. On the
other hand, in the case of _Ephemeropsis_, which grows on the leaves of
living plants in Java, the high organization of the sporogonium makes it
probable that the persistent protonema is an adaptation to the peculiar
conditions of life. A highly developed protonema provided with leaf-like
assimilating organs is found in _Georgia_, _Diphyscium_ and _Oedipodium_,
all of which show peculiarities in the sporogonium as well. The cells of
the protonema of _Schistostega_, which lives in the shade of caves, are so
constructed as to concentrate the feeble available light on the
chloroplasts.

We may perhaps regard the persistent protonema bearing small leafy plants
as a primitive condition, and look upon those larger plants which remain
unbranched and bear the sexual organs at the apex (e.g. _Schistostega_) as
representing the next stage. From this condition different lines of
specialization in the form and structure of the plant can be recognized. A
large number of mosses stand at about the same grade as _Funaria_, in that
the plants are small, sparingly branched, usually radial, and do not show a
very highly differentiated internal structure. In others the form of the
plant becomes more complex by copious branching and the differentiation of
shoots of different orders. In these cases the shoot system is often more
or less dorsiventral, and the sexual organs are borne on short lateral
branches (e.g. _Thuidium tamariscinum_). The Polytrichaceae, on the other
hand, show a specialization in structure rather than in form. The high
organization of their conducting system has been referred to above, but
though many species are able to exist in relatively dry situations, the
plants are still dependent on the absorption of water by the general
surface. The parallel lamellae of assimilating cells which grow from the
upper surface of the leaf in these and some other mosses probably serve to
retain water in the neighbourhood of the assimilating cells and so prolong
their activity. As common adaptive features in the leaves the occurrence of
papillae or outgrowths of the cell-walls to retain water, and the white
hairlike leaf tips, which assist in protecting the young parts at the apex
of many xerophytic mosses, may be mentioned. The leaves of _Leucobryum_,
which occurs in pale green tufts in shaded woods, show a parallel
adaptation to that found in _Sphagnum_. They are several cells thick, and
the small assimilating cells lie between two layers of empty water-storage
cells, the walls of which are perforated by pores.

With the possible exception of _Archidium_, the sporogonium is throughout
the Bryales constructed on one plan. _Archidium_ is a small moss occurring
occasionally on the soil of wet fields. The protonema is not persistent,
and the plants are well developed, resembling those of _Pleuridium_. The
sporogonium has a small foot and practically no seta, and differs in the
development and structure of its capsule from all other mosses. The spores
are derived from the endothecium, but no distinction of a sterile columella
and an archesporium is established in this, a variable number of its cells
becoming spore-mother-cells while the rest serve to nourish the spores. The
layer of cells immediately around the endothecium becomes the spore-sac,
and an air-space forms between this and the wall of the capsule. The very
large, thin-walled spores escape on the decay of the capsule, which
ruptures the archegonial wall irregularly. On account of the absence of a
columella _Archidium_ is sometimes placed in a distinct group, but since
its peculiarities have possibly arisen by reduction it seems at present
best retained among the Bryales. In all other Bryales there is a definite
columella extending from the base to the apex of the capsule, the
archesporium is derived from the outermost layer of cells of the
endothecium, and an air space is formed between the spore-sac and the wall.
In the Polytrichaceae another air space separates the spore-sac from the
columella. There is great variety in the length of the seta, which is
sometimes practically absent. The apophysis, which may be a more or less
distinct region, usually bears stomata and is the main organ of
assimilation. In the Splachnaceae it is expanded for this purpose, while in
_Oedipodium_ it constitutes most of the long pale stalk which supports the
capsule. A distinct operculum is usually detached by the help of the
annulus, and its removal may leave the mouth of the capsule widely open.
More usually there is a peristome, consisting of one or two series of
teeth, which serves to narrow the opening and in various ways to ensure the
gradual shedding of the spores in dry weather. In most mosses the teeth are
portions of thickened cell-walls but in the Polytrichaceae they are formed
of a number of sclerenchymatous cells. In _Polytrichum_ a membranous
epiphragm stretches across the wide mouth of the capsule between the tips
of the short peristome teeth, and closes the opening except for the
interspaces of the peristome.

In a number of forms, which were formerly grouped together, the capsule
does not open to liberate the spores. These cleistocarpous forms are now
recognized as related to various natural groups, in which the majority of
the species possess an operculum. In such forms as _Phascum_ the columella
persists, and the only peculiarity is in the absence of arrangements for
dehiscence. In _Ephemerum_ [v.04 p.0653] (and the closely related
_Nanomitrium_ which has a small operculum) the columella becomes absorbed
during the development of the spores. Stomata are present on the wall of
the small capsule. Such facts as these suggest that in many cases the
cleistocarpous condition is the result of reduction rather than primitive,
and that possibly the same holds for _Archidium_.

The former subdivision of the Bryales into Musci Cleistocarpi and Musci
Stegocarpi according to the absence or presence of an operculum is thus
clearly artificial. The same holds even more obviously for the grouping of
the stegocarpous forms into those in which the archegonial group terminates
a main axis (acrocarpi) and those in which it is borne on a more or less
developed lateral branch (pleurocarpi). Modern classifications of the
Bryales depend mainly on the construction of the peristome.

[Illustration: FIG. 15.--_Funaria hygrometrica._ Longitudinal section
through the summit of a male branch. (After Sachs.)

e, Leaves.

d, Leaves cut through the mid-ribs.

c, Paraphyses.

b, Antheridia.]

It remains to be considered to what extent the several natural groups of
plants classed together in the Bryophyta can be placed in a phylogenetic
relation to one another. Practically no help is afforded by palaeobotany,
and only the comparison of existing forms can be depended on. The
indications of probable lines of evolution are clearest in the Hepaticae.
The Marchantiales form an obviously natural evolutionary group, and the
same is probably true of the Jungermanniales, although in neither case can
the partial lines of progression within the main groups be said to be quite
clear. Such a form as _Sphaerocarpus_, which has features in common with
the lower Marchantiales, enables us to form an idea of the divergence of
the two groups from a common ancestry. The Anthocerotales, on the other
hand, stand in an isolated position, and recent researches have served to
emphasize this rather than to confirm the relationship with the
Jungermanniales suggested by Leitgeb. The indications of a serial
progression are not so clear in the mosses, but the majority of the forms
may be regarded as forming a great phylogenetic group in the evolution of
which the elaboration of the moss-plant has proceeded until the protonema
appears as a mere preliminary stage to the formation of the plants.
Parallel with the evolution of the gametophyte in form and structure, a
progression can be traced in the sporogonium, although the simplest
sporogonia available for study may owe much of their simplicity to
reduction. The Andreaeales may perhaps be looked on as a divergent
primitive branch of the same stock. On the other hand, the Sphagnales show
such considerable and important differences from the rest of the mosses,
that like the Anthocerotales among the liverworts, they may be regarded as
a group, the relationship of which to the main stem is at least
problematical. Between the Hepaticae, Anthocerotales, Sphagnales and Musci,
there are no connecting forms known, and it must be left as an open
question whether the Bryophyta are a monophyletic or polyphyletic group.

The question of the relationship of the Bryophyta on the one hand to the
Thallophyta and on the other to the Pteridophyta lies even more in the
region of speculation, on slender grounds without much hope of decisive
evidence. In a general sense we may regard the Bryophyta as derived from an
algal ancestry, without being able to suggest the nature of the ancestral
forms or the geological period at which they arose. Recent researches on
those Algae such as _Coleochaete_ which appeared to afford a close
comparison in their alternation of generations with _Riccia_, have shown
that the body resulting from the segmentation of the fertilized ovum is not
so strictly comparable in the two cases as had been supposed. The series of
increasingly complex sporogonia among Bryophytes appears to be most
naturally explained on an hypothesis of progressive sterilization of
sporogenous tissue, such as has been advanced by Bower. On the other hand
there are not wanting indications of reduction in the Bryophyte sporogonium
which make an alternative view of its origin at least possible. With regard
to the relationship of the Bryophyta and Pteridophyta the article on the
latter group should be consulted. It will be sufficient to say in
conclusion that while the alternating generations in the two groups are
strictly comparable, no evidence of actual relationship is yet forthcoming.

[Illustration: FIG. 16.--_Funaria hygrometrica._ (After Goebel.)

A. Longitudinal section of the very young sporogonium (f, f') enclosed in
the archegonial wall (b, h).

B, C. Further stages of the development of the sporogonium (f) enclosed in
the calyptra formed from the archegonial wall (c) and still bearing the
neck (h). The foot of the sporogonium has penetrated into the underlying
tissue of the stem of the moss-plant.]

For further information consult: Campbell, _Mosses and Ferns_ (London,
1906); Engler and Prantl, _Die naturlichen Pflanzenfamilien_, Teil i. Abt.
3 (Leipzig, 1893-1907); Goebel, _Organography of Plants_ (Oxford, 1905).
Full references to the literature of the subject will be found in these
works. For the identification of the British species of liverworts and
mosses the following recent works will be of use: Pearson, _The Hepaticae
of the British Isles_ (London, 1902); Dixon and Jameson, _The Student's
Handbook of British Mosses_ (London, 1896); Braithwaite, _British Moss
Flora_ (London, 1887-1905).

(W. H. L.)

BRZOZOWSKI, THADDEUS (d. 1820), nineteenth general of the Jesuits, was
appointed in succession to Gabriel Gruber on the 2nd of September 1805. In
1801 Pius VII. had given the Jesuits liberty to reconstitute themselves in
north Russia (see JESUITS: _History_), and in 1812 Brzozowski secured the
recognition of the Jesuit college of Polotsk as a university, though he
could not obtain permission to go to Spain to agitate for the recognition
[v.04 p.0654] of the Spanish Jesuits. In 1814 Pius VII., in accordance with
the bull _Sollicitudo omnium ecclesiarum_, gave to Brzozowski among others
full authority to receive those who desired to enter the society. The
Russian government, however, soon began to be alarmed at the growth of the
Jesuits, and on the 20th of December 1815 published an edict expelling them
from St Petersburg. Brzozowski, having vainly requested to be allowed to
retire to Rome, died on the 5th of February 1820. He is interesting mainly
from the fact that he was general of the Society at the time of its
restoration throughout Europe.

BUBASTIS, the Graecized name of the Egyptian goddess Ubasti, meaning "she
of [the city] Bast" (B;s-t), a city better known by its later name,
P-ubasti, "place of Ubasti"; thus the goddess derived her name Ubasti from
her city (Bast), and in turn the city derived its name P-ubasti from that
of the goddess; the Greeks, confusing the name of the city with that of the
goddess, called the latter Bubastis, and the former also Bubastis (later
Bubastos). Bubastis, capital of the 19th nome of Lower Egypt, is now
represented by a great mound of ruins called Tell Basta, near Zagazig,
including the site of a large temple (described by Herodotus) strewn with
blocks of granite. The monuments discovered there, although only those in
hard stone have survived, are more important than at any other site in the
Delta except Tanis and cover a wider range, commencing with Khufu (Cheops)
and continuing to the thirtieth dynasty.

Ubasti was one of many feline goddesses, figured with the head of a
lioness. In the great development of reverence for sacred animals which
took place after the New Kingdom, the domestic cat was especially the
animal of Bubastis, although it had also to serve for all the other feline
goddesses, owing no doubt to the scarcity and intractability of its
congeners. Her hieratic and most general form was still lioness-headed, but
a popular form, especially in bronze, was a cat-headed women, often holding
in her right hand a lion aegis, i.e. a broad semicircular pectoral
surmounted by the head of a lioness, and on the left arm a basket. The cat
cemetery on the west side of the town consisted of numbers of large brick
chambers, crammed with burnt and decayed mummies, many of which had been
enclosed in cat-shaped cases of wood and bronze. Herodotus describes the
festival of Bubastis, which was attended by thousands from all parts of
Egypt and was a very riotous affair; it has its modern equivalent in the
Moslem festival of the sheikh Said el Badawi at Tanta. The tablet of
Canopus shows that there were two festivals of Bubastis, the great and the
lesser: perhaps the lesser festival was held at Memphis, where the quarter
called Ankhto contained a temple to this goddess. Her name is found on
monuments from the third dynasty onwards, but a great stimulus was given to
her worship by the twenty-second (Bubastite) dynasty and generally by the
increased importance of Lower Egypt in later times. Her character seems to
have been essentially mild and playful, in contrast to Sokhmi and other
feline goddesses. The Greeks equated Ubasti with their Artemis, confusing
her with the leonine Tafne, sister of Shoeou (Apollo). The Egyptians
themselves delighted in identifying together goddesses of the most diverse
forms and attributes; but Ubasti was almost indistinguishable in form from
Tafne. The name of her son Iphthimis (Nfr-tm), pronounced Eftem, may mean
"All-good," and, in the absence of other information about him, suggests a
reason why he was identified with Prometheus.

See K. Sethe in Pauly-Wissowa's _Realencyclopaedie_; E. Naville, _Bubastis_,
and _Festival Hall of Osorkon II._; Herodotus ii. 67, 137-156; Grenfell and
Hunt, _Hibeh Papyri_, i.

(F. LL. G.)

BUCARAMANGA, a city of Colombia, capital of the department of Santander,
about 185 m. N.N.E. of Bogota. Pop. (estimate, 1902) 25,000. It is situated
on the Lebrija river, 3248 ft. above sea-level, in a mountainous country
rich in gold, silver and iron mines, and having superior coffee-producing
lands in the valleys and on the lower slopes. The city is laid out with
wide, straight streets, is well built, and has many public buildings of a
substantial character.

BUCCANEERS, the name given to piratical adventurers of different
nationalities united in their opposition to Spain, who maintained
themselves chiefly in the Caribbean Sea during the 17th century.

The island of Santo Domingo was one of several in the West Indies which had
early in the 16th century been almost depopulated by the oppressive
colonial policy of Spain. Along its coast there were several isolated
establishments presided over by Spaniards, who were deprived of a
convenient market for the produce of the soil by the monopolies imposed by
the mother country. Accordingly English, Dutch and French vessels were
welcomed and their cargoes readily bought. The island, thinned of its
former inhabitants, had become the home of immense herds of wild cattle;
and it became the habit of smugglers to provision at Santo Domingo. The
natives still left were skilled in preserving flesh at their little
establishments called _boucans_. The adventurers learned "boucanning" from
the natives; and gradually Hispaniola became the scene of an extensive and
illicit butcher trade. Spanish monopolies filled the seamen who sailed the
Caribbean with a natural hate of everything Spanish. The pleasures of a
roving life, enlivened by occasional skirmishes with forces organized and
led by Spanish officials, gained upon them. Out of such conditions arose
the buccaneer, alternately sailor and hunter, even occasionally a
planter--roving, bold, unscrupulous, often savage, with an intense
detestation of Spain. As the Spaniards would not recognize the right of
other races to make settlements, or even to trade in the West Indies, the
governments of France, England and Holland would do nothing to control
their subjects who invaded the islands. They left them free to make
settlements at their own risk. Each nation contributed a band of colonists,
who selected the island of St Kitts or St Christopher, in the West Indies,
where the settlers of both nations were simultaneously planted. The English
and French were, however, not very friendly; and in 1629, after the
retirement of several of the former to an adjoining island, the remaining
colonists were surprised and partly dispersed by the arrival of a Spanish
fleet of thirty-nine sail. But on the departure of the fleet the scattered
bands returned, and encouragement was given to their countrymen in Santo
Domingo. For buccaneering had now become a most profitable employment,
operations were extended, and a storehouse secure from the attacks of the
Spaniards was required. The small island of Tortuga (north-west of
Hispaniola) was seized for this purpose in 1630, converted into a magazine
for the goods of the rivals, and made their headquarters, Santo Domingo
itself still continuing their hunting ground. A purely English settlement
directed by a company in London was made at Old Providence, an island in
the Caribbean Sea, now belonging to Colombia. It began a little before
1630, and was suppressed by the Spaniards in 1641.

Spain was unable to take immediate action. Eight years later, however,
watching their opportunity when many buccaneers were absent in the larger
island, the Spaniards attacked Tortuga, and massacred every settler they
could seize. But the others returned; and the buccaneers, now in open
hostility to the Spanish arms, began to receive recruits from every
European trading nation, and for three-quarters of a century became the
scourge of the Spanish-American trade and dominions.

France, throughout all this, had not been idle. She had named the governor
of St Kitts "Governor-General for the French West India Islands," and in
1641 he took possession of Tortuga, expelled all English from the island,
and attempted the same with less success in Santo Domingo. England was
absorbed in the Civil War, and the buccaneers had to maintain themselves as
best they could,--now mainly on the sea.

In 1654 the Spaniards regained Tortuga from the French, into whose hands it
again, however, fell after six years. But this state of affairs was too
insecure even for these rovers, and they would speedily have succumbed had
not a refuge been found for them by the fortunate conquest of Jamaica in
1655 by the navy of the English Commonwealth. These conquests were not made
without the aid of the buccaneers themselves. The taking and re-taking of
Tortuga by the French was always with the assistance of the roving
community; and at the conquest of Jamaica the English navy had the same
influence in its favour. The [v.04 p.0655] buccaneers, in fact, constituted
a mercenary navy, ready for employment against the power of Spain by any
other nation, on condition of sharing the plunder; and they were noted for
their daring, their cruelty and their extraordinary skill in seamanship.

Their history now divides itself into three epochs. The first of these
extends from the period of their rise to the capture of Panama by Morgan in
1671, during which time they were hampered neither by government aid nor,
till near its close, by government restriction. The second, from 1671 to
the time of their greatest power, 1685, when the scene of their operations
was no longer merely the Caribbean, but principally the whole range of the
Pacific from California to Chile. The third and last period extends from
that year onwards; it was a time of disunion and disintegration, when the
independence and rude honour of the previous periods had degenerated into
unmitigated vice and brutality.

It is chiefly during the first period that those leaders flourished whose
names and doings have been associated with all that was really influential
in the exploits of the buccaneers--the most prominent being Mansfield and
Morgan. The floating commerce of Spain had by the middle of the 17th
century become utterly insignificant. But Spanish settlements remained; and
in 1654 the first great expedition on land made by the buccaneers, though
attended by considerable difficulties, was completed by the capture and
sack of New Segovia, on the mainland of America. The Gulf of Venezuela,
with its towns of Maracaibo and Gibraltar, were attacked and plundered
under the command of a Frenchman named L'Ollonois, who performed, it is
said, the office of executioner upon the whole crew of a Spanish vessel
manned with ninety seamen. Such successes removed the buccaneers further
and further from the pale of civilized society, fed their revenge, and
inspired them with an avarice almost equal to that of the original settlers
from Spain. Mansfield indeed, in 1664, conceived the idea of a permanent
settlement upon a small island of the Bahamas, named New Providence, and
Henry Morgan, a Welshman, intrepid and unscrupulous, joined him. But the
untimely death of Mansfield nipped in the bud the only rational scheme of
settlement which seems at any time to have animated this wild community;
and Morgan, now elected commander, swept the whole Caribbean, and from his
headquarters in Jamaica led triumphant expeditions to Cuba and the
mainland. He was leader of the expedition wherein Porto Bello, one of the
best-fortified ports in the West Indies, was surprised and plundered.

This was too much for even the adverse European powers; and in 1670 a
treaty was concluded between England and Spain, proclaiming peace and
friendship among the subjects of the two sovereigns in the New World,
formally renouncing hostilities of every kind. Great Britain was to hold
all her possessions in the New World as her own property (a remarkable
concession on the part of Spain), and consented, on behalf of her subjects,
to forbear trading with any Spanish port without licence obtained.

The treaty was very ill observed in Jamaica, where the governor, Thomas
Modyford (1620-1679), was in close alliance with the "privateers," which
was the official title of the buccaneers. He had already granted
commissions to Morgan and others for a great attack on the Isthmus of
Panama, the route by which the bullion of the South American mines was
carried to Porto Bello, to be shipped to Spain. The buccaneers to the
number of 2000 began by seizing Chagres, and then marched to Panama in
1671. After a difficult journey on foot and in canoes, they found
themselves nearing the shores of the South Sea and in view of the city. On
the morning of the tenth day they commenced an engagement which ended in
the rout of the defenders of the town. It was taken, and, accidentally or
not, it was burnt. The sack of Panama was accompanied by great barbarities.
The Spaniards had, however, removed the treasure before the city was taken.
When the booty was divided, Morgan is accused of having defrauded his
followers. It is certain that the share per man was small, and that many of
the buccaneers died of starvation while trying to return to Jamaica.
Modyford was recalled, and in 1672 Morgan was called home and imprisoned in
the Tower. In 1674 he was allowed to come back to the island as
lieutenant-governor with Lord Vaughan. He had become so unpopular after the
expedition of 1671 that he was followed in the streets and threatened by
the relations of those who had perished. During his later years he was
active in suppressing the buccaneers who had now inconvenient claims on
him.

From 1671 to 1685 is the time of the greatest daring, prosperity and power
of the buccaneers. The expedition against Panama had not been without its
influence. Notwithstanding their many successes in the Caribbean and on
land, including a second plunder of Porto Bello, their thoughts ran
frequently on the great expedition across the isthmus, and they pictured
the South Sea as a far wider and more lucrative field for the display of
their united power.

In 1680 a body of marauders over 300 strong, well armed and provisioned,
landed on the shore of Darien and struck across the country; and the
cruelty and mismanagement displayed in the policy of the Spaniards towards
the Indians were now revenged by the assistance which the natives eagerly
rendered to the adventurers. They acted as guides during a difficult
journey of nine days, kept the invaders well supplied with food, provided
them with canoes, and only left them after the taking of the fort of Santa
Maria, when the buccaneers were fairly embarked on a broad and safe river
which emptied itself into the South Sea. With John Coxon as commander they
entered the Bay of Panama, where rumour had been before them, and where the
Spaniards had hastily prepared a small fleet to meet them. But the valour
of the buccaneers won for them another victory; within a week they took
possession of four Spanish ships, and now successes flowed upon them. The
Pacific, hitherto free from their intrusion, showed many sail of merchant
vessels, while on land opposition south of the Bay of Panama was of little
avail, since few were acquainted with the use of fire-arms. Coxon and
seventy men returned as they had gone, but the others, under Sawkins, Sharp
and Watling, roamed north and south on islands and mainland, and remained
for long ravaging the coast of Peru. Never short of silver and gold, but
often in want of the necessaries of life, they continued their practices
for a little longer; then, evading the risk of recrossing the isthmus, they
boldly cleared Cape Horn, and arrived in the Indies. Again, in 1683,
numbers of them under John Cook departed for the South Sea by way of Cape
Horn. On Cook's death his successor, Edward Davis, undoubtedly the greatest
and most prudent commander who ever led the forces of the buccaneers at
sea, met with a certain Captain Swan from England, and the two captains
began a cruise which was disastrous to the Spanish trade in the Pacific.

In 1685 they were joined in the Bay of Panama by large numbers of
buccaneers who had crossed the isthmus under Townley and others. This
increased body of men required an enlarged measure of adventure, and this
in a few months was supplied by the viceroy of Peru. That officer, seeing
the trade of the colony cut off, supplies stopped, towns burned and raided,
and property harassed by continual raids, resolved by vigorous means to put
an end to it. But his aim was not easily accomplished. In this same year a
Spanish fleet of fourteen sail met, but did not engage, ten buccaneer
vessels which were found in the Bay of Panama.

At this period the power of the buccaneers was at its height. But the
combination was too extensive for its work, and the different nationality
of those who composed it was a source of growing discord. Nor was the dream
of equality ever realized for any length of time. The immense spoil
obtained on the capture of wealthy cities was indeed divided equally. But
in the gambling and debauchery which followed, nothing was more common than
that one-half of the conquerors should find themselves on the morrow in
most pressing want; and while those who had retained or increased their
share would willingly have gone home, the others clamoured for renewed
attacks. The separation of the English and French buccaneers, who together
presented a united front to the Spanish fleet in 1685, marks the beginning
of the third and last epoch in their history.

The brilliant exploits begun by the sack of Leon and Realejo [v.04 p.0656]
by the English under Davis have, even in their variety and daring, a
sameness which deprives them of interest, and the wonderful confederacy is
now seen to be falling gradually to pieces. The skill of Davis at sea was
on one occasion displayed in a seven days' engagement with two large
Spanish vessels, and the interest undoubtedly centres in him. Townley and
Swan had, however, by this time left him, and after cruising together for
some time, they, too, parted. In 1688 Davis cleared Cape Horn and arrived
in the West Indies, while Swan's ship, the "Cygnet," was abandoned as
unseaworthy, after sailing as far as Madagascar. Townley had hardly joined
the French buccaneers remaining in the South Sea ere he died, and the
Frenchmen with their companions crossed New Spain to the West Indies. And
thus the Pacific, ravaged so long by this powerful and mysterious band of
corsairs, was at length at peace.

The West Indies had by this time become hot enough even for the banded
pirates. They hung doggedly along the coasts of Jamaica and Santo Domingo,
but their day was nearly over. Only once again--at the siege of
Carthagena--did they appear great; but even then the expedition was not of
their making, and they were mere auxiliaries of the French regular forces.
After the treachery of the French commander of this expedition a spirit of
unity and despairing energy seemed reawakened in them; but this could not
avert and scarcely delayed the rapidly approaching extinction of the
community.

The French and English buccaneers could not but take sides in the war which
had arisen between their respective countries in 1689. Thus was broken the
bond of unity which had for three-quarters of a century kept the subjects
of the two nations together in schemes of aggression upon a common foe. In
the short peace of 1697-1700 England and France were using all their
influence, both in the Old World and in the New, to ingratiate themselves
into the favour of the king of Spain. With the resumption of hostilities in
1700 and the rise of Spain consequent upon the accession of the French
claimant to the throne the career of the buccaneers was effectually closed.

But the fall of the buccaneers is no more accounted for fully by these
circumstances than is their rise by the massacre of the islanders of Santo
Domingo. There was that in the very nature of the community which, from its
birth, marked it as liable to speedy decline.

The principles which bound the buccaneers together were, first the desire
for adventure and gain, and, in the second place, hatred of the Spaniard.
The first was hardly a sufficient bond of union, among men of different
nationalities, when booty could be had nearly always by private venture
under the colours of the separate European powers. Of greater validity was
their second and great principle of union, namely, that they warred not
with one another, nor with every one, but with a single and a common foe.
For while the buccaneer forces included English, French and Dutch sailors,
and were complemented occasionally by bands of native Indians, there are
few instances during the time of their prosperity and growth of their
falling upon one another, and treating their fellows with the savagery
which they exulted in displaying against the subjects of Spain. The
exigencies, moreover, of their perilous career readily wasted their
suddenly acquired gains.

Settled labour, the warrant of real wealth, was unacceptable to those who
lived by promoting its insecurity. Regular trade--though rendered
attractive by smuggling--and pearl gathering and similar operations which
were spiced with risk, were open in vain to them, and in the absence of any
domestic life, a hand-to-mouth system of supply and demand rooted out
gradually the prudence which accompanies any mode of settled existence. In
everything the policy of the buccaneers, from the beginning to the end of
their career, was one of pure destruction, and was, therefore, ultimately
suicidal.

Their great importance in history lies in the fact that they opened the
eyes of the world, and specially of the nations from whom these buccaneers
had sprung, to the whole system of Spanish-American government and
commerce--the former in its rottenness, and the latter in its possibilities
in other hands. From this, then, along with other causes, dating primarily
from the helplessness and presumption of Spain, there arose the West Indian
possessions of Holland, England and France.

A work published at Amsterdam in 1678, entitled _De Americaensche Zee
Roovers_, from the pen of a buccaneer named Exquemelin, was translated into
several European languages, receiving additions at the hands of the
different translators. The French translation by Frontignieres is named
_Histoire des avanturiers qui se sont signalez dans les Indes_; the English
edition is entitled _The Bucaniers of America._ Other works are Raynal's
_History of the Settlements and Trade of the Europeans in the East and West
Indies_, book x., English translation 1782; Dampier's _Voyages_; Geo. W.
Thornbury's _Monarchs of the Main, &c._ (1855); Lionel Wafer's _Voyage and
Description of the Isthmus of America_ (1699); and the _Histoire de l'isle
Espagnole, &c._, and _Histoire et description generale de la Nouvelle
France_ of Pere Charlevoix. The statements in these works are to be
received with caution. A really authentic narrative, however, is Captain
James Burney's _History of the Buccaneers of America_ (London, 1816). The
_Calendar of State Papers_, Colonial Series (London, 1860 et seq.),
contains much evidence for the history of the buccaneers in the West
Indies.

(D. H.)

BUCCARI (Serbo-Croatian _Bakar_), a royal free town of Croatia-Slavonia,
Hungary; situated in the county of Modru[vs]-Fiume, 7 m. S.E. of Fiume, on
a small bay of the Adriatic Sea. Pop. (1900) 1870. The Hungarian state
railway from Zakany and Agram terminates 21/2 m. from Buccari. The harbour,
though sometimes dangerous to approach, affords good anchorage to small
vessels. Owing to competition from Fiume, Buccari lost the greater part of
its trade during the 19th century. The staple industry is boatbuilding, and
there is an active coasting trade in fish, wine, wood and coal. The
tunny-fishery is of some importance. In the neighbourhood of the town is
the old castle of Buccarica, and farther south the flourishing little port
of Porto Re or Kraljevica.

[Illustration: FIG. 1.--Buccina in the National Museum, Naples.

From a photo by Brogi.]

BUCCINA (more correctly _B[=u]c[)i]na_, Gr. [Greek: Bukane], connected with
_bucca_, cheek, and Gr. [Greek: Buzo], a brass wind instrument extensively
used in the ancient Roman army. The Roman instrument consisted of a brass
tube measuring some 11 to 12 ft. in length, of narrow cylindrical bore, and
played by means of a cup-shaped mouthpiece. The tube is bent round upon
itself from the mouthpiece to the bell in the shape of a broad C and is
strengthened by means of a bar across the curve, which the performer grasps
while playing, in order to steady the instrument; the bell curves over his
head or shoulder as in the modern helicon. Three Roman buccinas were found
among the ruins of Pompeii and are now deposited in the museum at Naples.
V. C. Mahillon, of Brussels[1] has made a facsimile of one of these
instruments; it is in G and has almost the same harmonic series as the
French horn and the trumpet. The buccina, the cornu (see HORN), and the
tuba were used as signal instruments in the Roman army and camp to sound
the four night watches (hence known as _buccina prima, secunda, &c._), to
summon them by means of the special signal known as _classicum_, and to
give orders.[2] Frontinus relates[3] that a Roman general, who had been
surrounded by the enemy, escaped during the night by means of the stratagem
of leaving behind him a _buccinator_ (trumpeter), who sounded [v.04 p.0657]
the watches throughout the night.[4] Vegetius gives brief descriptions of
the three instruments, which suffice to establish their identity; the tuba,
he says, is straight; the buccina is of bronze bent in the form of a
circle.[5]

[Illustration: FIG. 2.--Busine, 14th century. (From MS. R. 10 E. IV. Brit.
Mus.)]

[Illustration: FIG. 3.--Busine, 14th century. (From MS. R. 10 E. IV. Brit.
Mus.)]

The buccina, in respect of its technical construction and acoustic
properties, was the ancestor of both trumpet and trombone; the connexion is
further established by the derivation of the words Sackbut and _Posaune_
(the German for trombone) from buccina. The relation was fully recognized
in Germany during the 15th and 16th centuries, as two translations of
Vegetius, published at Ulm in 1470, and at Augsburg in 1534, clearly
demonstrate: "Bucina das ist die trumet oder pusan"[6] ("the bucina is the
trumpet or trombone") and ("Bucina ist die trummet die wirt ausz und
eingezogen"[7] ("the bucina is the trumpet which is drawn out and in"). A
French translation by Jean de Meung (Paris, 1488),[8] renders the passage
(chap. iii. 5) thus: "Trompe est longue et droite; buisine est courte et
reflechist en li meisme si comme partie de cercle." On Trajan's column[9]
the tuba, the cornu and the buccina are distinguishable. Other
illustrations of the buccina may be seen in Francois Mazois' _Les Ruines de
Pompei_ (Paris, 1824-1838), pt. iv, pl. xlviii. fig. 1, and in J.N. von
Wilmowsky's _Eine roemische Villa zu Nennig_ (Bonn, 1865), pl. xii.
(mosaics), where the buccinator is accompanied on the hydraulus. The
military buccina described is a much more advanced instrument than its
prototype the _buccina marina_, a primitive trumpet in the shape of a
conical shell, often having a spiral twist, which in poetry is often called
_concha_. The buccina marina is frequently depicted in the hands of Tritons
(Macrobius i. 8), or of sailors, as for instance on terra-cotta lamp shown
by G.P. Bellori (_Lucernae veterum sepulcrales iconicae_, 1702, iii. 12).
The highly imaginative writer of the apocryphal letter of St Jerome to
Dardanus also has a word to say concerning the buccina among the Semitic
races: "Bucca vocatur tuba apud Hebreos: deinde per diminutionem buccina
dicitur." After the fall of the Roman empire the art of bending metal tubes
was gradually lost, and although the buccina survived in Europe both in
name and in principle of construction during the middle ages, it lost for
ever the characteristic curve like a "C" which it possessed in common with
the cornu, an instrument having a conical bore of wider calibre. Although
we regard the buccina as essentially Roman, an instrument of the same type,
but probably straight and of kindred name, was widely known and used in the
East, in Persia, Arabia and among the Semitic races. After a lapse of years
during which records are almost wanting, the buccina reappeared all over
Europe as the busine, buisine, pusin, busaun, pusun, posaun, busna (Slav),
&c.; whether it was a Roman survival or a re-introduction through the Moors
of Spain in the West and the Byzantine empire in the East, we have no
records to show. An 11th-century mural painting representing the Last
Judgment in the cathedral of S. Angelo in Formis (near Capua), shows the
angels blowing the last trump on busines.[10]

There are two distinct forms of the busine which may be traced during the
middle ages:--(i) a long straight tube (fig. 2) consisting of 3 to 5 joints
of narrow cylindrical bore, the last joint alone being conical and ending
in a pommel-shaped bell, precisely as in the curved buccina (fig. 1); (2) a
long straight cylindrical tube of somewhat wider bore than the busine,
ending in a wide bell curving out abruptly from the cylindrical tube (fig.
3).

The history of the development of the trumpet, the sackbut and the trombone
from the buccina will be found more fully treated under those headings; for
the part played by the buccina in the evolution of the French horn see
HORN.

(K. S.)

[1] See _Catalogue descriptif_ (Ghent, 1880), p. 330, and illustration,
vol. ii. (1896), p. 30.

[2] Livy vii. 35, xxvi. 15; Prop. v. 4, 63; Tac. _Ann._ xv. 30; Vegetius,
_De re militari_, ii. 22, iii. 5; Polyb. vi. 365, xiv. 3, 7.

[3] _Stratagematicon_, i. 5, Sec. 17.

[4] For another instance see Caesar, _Comm. Bell. Civ._ ii. 35.

[5] Vegetius, op. cit. iii. 5.

[6] Idem, ii. 7.

[7] Idem, iii. 5.

[8] A reprint edited by Ulysse Robert has been published by the Soc. des
Anciens Textes Francais (Paris, 1897).

[9] See Conrad Cichorius, _Die Reliefs der Traiansaule_, 3 vols. of text
and 2 portfolios of heliogravures (Berlin, 1896, &c.), Bd. i. pl. x.
buccina and tubae; pl. viii. buccina; pl. lxxvi. buccina and two cornua;
pl. xx. cornu, &c.; or W. Froehner, _La Colonne de Trajan_ (Paris, 1872),
vol. i. pl. xxxii., xxxvi., li., tome ii. pl. lxvi., tome iii. pl. cxxxiv.,
&c.

[10] See F.X. Kraus, "Die Wandgemaelde von San Angelo in Formis," in
_Jahrbuch der kgl. preuss. Kunstsamml._ (1893), pl. i.

BUCCLEUCH, DUKES OF. The substantial origin of the ducal house of the
Scotts of Buccleuch dates back to the large grants of lands in Scotland to
Sir Walter Scott of Kirkurd and Buccleuch, a border chief, by James II., in
consequence of the fall of the 8th earl of Douglas (1452); but the family
traced their descent back to a Sir Richard le Scott (1240-1285). The estate
of Buccleuch is in Selkirkshire. Sir Walter Scott of Branxholm and
Buccleuch (d. 1552) distinguished himself at the battle of Pinkie (1547),
and furnished material for his later namesake's famous poem, _The Lay of
the Last Minstrel_; and his great-grandson Sir Walter (1565-1611) was
created Lord Scott of Buccleuch in 1606. An earldom followed in 1619. The
second earl's daughter Anne (1651-1732), who succeeded him as a countess in
her own right, married in 1663 the famous duke of Monmouth (_q.v._), who
was then created 1st duke of Buccleuch; and her grandson Francis became 2nd
duke. The latter's son Henry (1746-1812) became 3rd duke, and in 1810
succeeded also, on the death of William Douglas, 4th duke of Queensberry,
to that dukedom as well as its estates and other honours, according to the
entail executed by his own great-grandfather, the 2nd duke of Queensberry,
in 1706; he married the duke of Montagu's daughter, and was famous for his
generosity and benefactions. His son Charles William Henry (d. 1819),
grandson Walter Francis Scott (1806-1884), and great-grandson William Henry
Walter Montagu Douglas Scott (b. 1831), succeeded in turn as 4th, 5th and
6th dukes of Buccleuch and 6th, 7th, and 8th dukes of Queensberry. The 5th
duke was lord privy seal 1842-1846, and president of the council 1846. It
was he who at a cost of over L500,000 made the harbour at Granton, near
Edinburgh. He was president of the Highland and Agricultural Society, the
Society of Antiquaries and of the British Association. The 6th duke sat in
the House of Commons as Conservative M.P. for Midlothian, 1853-1868 and
1874-1880; his wife, a daughter of the 1st duke of Abercorn, held the
office of mistress of the robes.

See Sir W. Fraser, _The Scotts of Buccleuch_ (1878).

BUCENTAUR (Ital. _bucintoro_), the state gallery of the doges of Venice, on
which, every year on Ascension day up to 1789, they put into the Adriatic
in order to perform the ceremony of "wedding the sea." The name _bucintoro_
is derived from the Ital. _buzino d' oro_, "golden bark," latinized in the
middle ages as _bucentaurus_ on the analogy of a supposed Gr. [Greek:
boukentauros], ox-centaur (from [Greek: bous] and [Greek: Kentauros]). This
led to the explanation of the name as derived from the head of an ox having
served as the galley's figurehead. This derivation is, however, fanciful;
the name _bucentaurus_ is unknown in ancient mythology, and the figurehead
of the bucentaurs, of which representations have come down to us, is the
lion of St Mark. [v.04 p.0658] The name bucentaur seems, indeed, to have
been given to any great and sumptuous Venetian galley. Du Cange (_Gloss._,
_s.v._ "Bucentaurus") quotes from the chronicle of the doge Andrea Dandolo
(d. 1354): _cum uno artificioso et solemni Bucentauro, super quo venit
usque ad S. Clementem, quo jam pervenerat principalior et solemnior
Bucentaurus cum consiliariis_, &c. The last and most magnificent of the
bucentaurs, built in 1729, was destroyed by the French in 1798 for the sake
of its golden decorations. Remains of it are preserved at Venice in the
Museo Civico Correr and in the Arsenal; in the latter there is also a fine
model of it.

The "Marriage of the Adriatic," or more correctly "of the sea" (_Sposalizio
del Mar_) was a ceremony symbolizing the maritime dominion of Venice. The
ceremony, established about A.D. 1000 to commemorate the doge Orseolo II.'s
conquest of Dalmatia, was originally one of supplication and placation,
Ascension day being chosen as that on which the doge had set out on his
expedition. The form it took was a solemn procession of boats, headed by
the doge's _maesta nave_, afterwards the Bucentaur (from 1311) out to sea
by the Lido port. A prayer was offered that "for us and all who sail
thereon the sea may be calm and quiet," whereupon the doge and the others
were solemnly aspersed with holy water, the rest of which was thrown into
the sea while the priests chanted "Purge me with hyssop and I shall be
clean." To this ancient ceremony a sacramental character was given by Pope
Alexander III in 1177, in return for the services rendered by Venice in the
struggle against the emperor Frederick I. The pope drew a ring from his
finger and, giving it to the doge, bade him cast such a one into the sea
each year on Ascension day, and so wed the sea. Henceforth the ceremonial,
instead of placatory and expiatory, became nuptial. Every year the doge
dropped a consecrated ring into the sea, and with the words _Desponsamus
te, mare_ (We wed thee, sea) declared Venice and the sea to be indissolubly
one (see H. F. Brown, _Venice_, London, 1893, pp. 69, 110).

BUCEPHALUS (Gr. [Greek: boukephalos]), the favourite Thracian horse of
Alexander the Great, which died in 326 B.C., either of wounds received in
the battle on the Hydaspes, or of old age. In commemoration Alexander built
the city of Bucephala (Boukephala), the site of which is almost certainly
to be identified with a mound on the bank of the river opposite the modern
Jhelum.

See especially Arrian v. 20; other stories in Plutarch, _Alex._ 6; Curtius
vi. 8. For the identification of Bucephala, Vincent A. Smith, _Early Hist.
of India_ (2nd ed., 1908), pp. 65, 66 note.

BUCER (or BUTZER), MARTIN (1491-1551), German Protestant reformer, was born
in 1491 at Schlettstadt in Alsace. In 1506 he entered the Dominican order,
and was sent to study at Heidelberg. There he became acquainted with the
works of Erasmus and Luther, and was present at a disputation of the latter
with some of the Romanist doctors. He became a convert to the reformed
opinions, abandoned his order by papal dispensation in 1521, and soon
afterwards married a nun. In 1522 he was pastor at Landstuhl in the
palatinate, and travelled hither and thither propagating the reformed
doctrine. After his excommunication in 1523 he made his headquarters at
Strassburg, where he succeeded Matthew Zell. Henry VIII of England asked
his advice in connexion with the divorce from Catherine of Aragon. On the
question of the sacrament of the Lord's Supper, Bucer's opinions were
decidedly Zwinglian, but he was anxious to maintain church unity with the
Lutheran party, and constantly endeavoured, especially after Zwingli's
death, to formulate a statement of belief that would unite Lutheran, south
German and Swiss reformers. Hence the charge of ambiguity and obscurity
which has been laid against him. In 1548 he was sent for to Augsburg to
sign the agreement, called the _Interim_, between the Catholics and
Protestants. His stout opposition to this project exposed him to many
difficulties, and he was glad to accept Cranmer's invitation to make his
home in England. On his arrival in 1549 he was appointed regius professor
of divinity at Cambridge. Edward VI. and the protector Somerset showed him
much favour and he was consulted as to the revision of the Book of Common
Prayer. But on the 27th of February 1551 he died, and was buried in the
university church, with great state. In 1557, by Mary's commissioners, his
body was dug up and burnt, and his tomb demolished; it was subsequently
reconstructed by order of Elizabeth. Bucer is said to have written
ninety-six treatises, among them a translation and exposition of the Psalms
and a work _Deregno Christi_. His name is familiar in English literature
from the use made of his doctrines by Milton in his divorce treatises.

A collected edition of his writings has never been published. A volume
known as the _Tomus Anglicanus_ (Basel, 1577) contains those written in
England. See J.W. Baum, _Capito and Butzer_ (Strassburg, 1860); A.
Erichson, _Martin Butzer_ (1891); and the articles in the _Dict. Nat.
Biog._ (by A.W. Ward), and in Herzog-Hauck's _Realencyklopaedie_ (by Paul
Gruenberg).

BUCH, CHRISTIAN LEOPOLD VON, BARON (1774-1853), German geologist and
geographer, a member of an ancient and noble Prussian family, was born at
Stolpe in Pomerania on the 26th of April 1774. In 1790-1793 he studied at
the mining school of Freiberg under Werner, one of his fellow-students
there being Alexander von Humboldt. He afterwards completed his education
at the universities of Halle and Goettingen. His _Versuch einer
mineralogischen Beschreibung von Landeck_ (Breslau, 1797) was translated
into French (Paris, 1805), and into English as _Attempt at a Mineralogical
Description of Landeck_ (Edinburgh, 1810); he also published in 1802
_Entwurf einer geognostischen Beschreibung von Schlesien (Geognostische
Beobachtungen auf Reisen durch Deutschland und Italien_, Band i.). He was
at this time a zealous upholder of the Neptunian theory of his illustrious
master. In 1797 he met Humboldt at Salzburg, and with him explored the
geological formations of Styria, and the adjoining Alps. In the spring of
the following year, von Buch extended his excursions into Italy, where his
faith in the Neptunian theory was shaken. In his previous works he had
advocated the aqueous origin of basaltic and other formations. In 1799 he
paid his first visit to Vesuvius, and again in 1805 he returned to study
the volcano, accompanied by Humboldt and Gay Lussac. They had the good
fortune to witness a remarkable eruption, which supplied von Buch with data
for refuting many erroneous ideas then entertained regarding volcanoes. In
1802 he had explored the extinct volcanoes of Auvergne. The aspect of the
Puy de Dome, with its cone of trachyte and its strata of basaltic lava,
induced him to abandon as untenable the doctrines of Werner on the
formation of these rocks. The scientific results of his investigations he
embodied in his _Geognostische Beobachtungen auf Reisen durch Deutschland
und Italien_ (Berlin, 1802-1809). From the south of Europe von Buch
repaired to the north, and spent two years among the Scandinavian islands,
making many important observations on the geography of plants, on
climatology and on geology. He showed that many of the erratic blocks on
the North German plains must have come from Scandinavia. He also
established the fact that the whole of Sweden is slowly but continuously
rising above the level of the sea from Frederikshald to Abo. The details of
these discoveries are given in his _Reise durch Norwegen und Lappland_
(Berlin, 1810). In 1815 he visited the Canary Islands in company with
Christian Smith, the Norwegian botanist. His observations here convinced
him that these and other islands of the Atlantic owed their existence to
volcanic action of the most intense kind, and that the groups of islands in
the South Sea are the remains of a pre-existing continent. The physical
description of the Canary Islands was published at Berlin in 1825, and this
work alone is regarded as an enduring monument of his labours. After
leaving the Canaries von Buch proceeded to the Hebrides and the coasts of
Scotland and Ireland. Palaeontology also claimed his attention, and he
described in 1831 and later years a number of Cephalopods, Brachiopods and
Cystidea, and pointed out their stratigraphical importance. In addition to
the works already mentioned von Buch published in 1832 the magnificent
_Geological Map of Germany_ (42 sheets, Berlin). His geological excursions
were continued without interruption till his 78th year. Eight months before
his death he visited [v.04 p.0659] the mountains of Auvergne; and on
returning home he read a paper on the Jurassic formation before the Academy
of Berlin. He died at Berlin on the 4th of March 1853. Von Buch had
inherited from his father a fortune more than sufficient for his wants. He
was never married, and was unembarrassed by family ties. His excursions
were always taken on foot, with a staff in his hand, and the large pockets
of his overcoat filled with papers and geological instruments. Under this
guise, the passer-by would not easily have recognized the man whom Humboldt
pronounced the greatest geologist of his time.

A complete edition of his works was published at Berlin (1867-1885).

BUCHAN, EARLS OF. The earldom of Mar and Buchan was one of the seven
original Scottish earldoms; later, Buchan was separated from Mar, and among
the early earls of Buchan were Alexander Comyn (d. 1289), John Comyn (d. c.
1313), both constables of Scotland, and Henry Beaumont (d. 1340), who had
married a Comyn. John Comyn's wife, Isabel, was the countess of Buchan who
crowned Robert the Bruce king at Scone in 1306, and was afterwards
imprisoned at Berwick; not, however, in a cage hung on the wall of the
castle. About 1382 Sir Alexander Stewart (d. c. 1404), the "wolf of
Badenoch," a son of King Robert II., became earl of Buchan, and the
Stewarts appear to have held the earldom for about a century and a half,
although not in a direct line from Sir Alexander.[1] Among the most
celebrated of the Stewart earls were the Scottish regent, Robert, duke of
Albany, and his son John, who was made constable of France and was killed
at the battle of Verneuil in 1424. In 1617 the earldom came to James
Erskine (d. 1640), a son of John Erskine, 2nd (or 7th) earl of Mar, whose
wife Mary had inherited it from her father, James Douglas (d. 1601), and
from that time it has been retained by the Erskines.

Perhaps the most celebrated of the later earls of Buchan was the eccentric
David Steuart Erskine, 11th earl (1742-1829), a son of Henry David, 10th
earl (d. 1767), and brother of Henry Erskine (_q.v._), and of Thomas, Lord
Erskine (_q.v._). His pertinacity was instrumental in effecting a change in
the method of electing Scottish representative peers, and in 1780 he
succeeded in founding the Scottish Society of Antiquaries. Among his
correspondents was Horace Walpole, and he wrote an _Essay on the Lives of
Fletcher of Saltoun and the Poet Thomson_ (1792), and other writings. He
died at his residence at Dryburgh in April 1829, leaving no legitimate
children, and was followed as 12th earl by his nephew Henry David
(1783-1857), the ancestor of the present peer. The 11th earl's natural son,
Sir David Erskine (1772-1837), who inherited his father's unentailed
estates, was an antiquary and a dramatist.

[1] In August 1908, during some excavations at Dunkeld, remains were found
which are supposed to be those of Alexander Stewart, the "wolf of
Badenoch."

BUCHAN, ELSPETH (1738-1791), founder of a Scottish religious sect known as
the Buchanites, was the daughter of John Simpson, proprietor of an inn near
Banff. Having quarrelled with her husband, Robert Buchan, a potter of
Greenock, she settled with her children in Glasgow, where she was deeply
impressed by a sermon preached by Hugh White, minister of the Relief church
at Irvine. She persuaded White and others that she was a saint with a
special mission, that in fact she was the woman, and White the man-child,
described in Revelation xii. White was condemned by the presbytery, and the
sect, which ultimately numbered forty-six adherents, was expelled by the
magistrates in 1784 and settled in a farm, consisting of one room and a
loft, known as New Cample in Dumfriesshire. Mrs Buchan claimed prophetic
inspiration and pretended to confer the Holy Ghost upon her followers by
breathing upon them; they believed that the millennium was near, and that
they would not die, but be translated. It appears that they had community
of wives and lived on funds provided by the richer members. Robert Burns,
the poet, in a letter dated August 1784, describes the sect as idle and
immoral. In 1785 White and Mrs Buchan published a _Divine Dictionary_, but
the sect broke up on the death of its founder in spite of White's attempts
to prove that she was only in a trance. Even White was eventually
undeceived. Andrew Innes, the last survivor, died in 1848. See J. Train,
_The Buchanites from First to Last_ (Edinburgh, 1846).

BUCHAN, PETER (1790-1854), Scottish editor, was born at Peterhead,
Aberdeenshire, in 1790. In 1816 he started in business as a printer at
Peterhead, and was successful enough to be able eventually to retire and
devote himself to the collection and editing of Scottish ballads. His
_Ancient Ballads and Songs of the North of Scotland_ (1828) contained a
large number of hitherto unpublished ballads, and newly discovered versions
of existing ones. Another collection made by him was published by the Percy
Society, under the title _Scottish Traditional Versions of Ancient Ballads_
(1845). Two unpublished volumes of Buchan's ballad collections are in the
British Museum. He died on the 19th of September 1854.

BUCHANAN, CLAUDIUS (1766-1815), English divine, was born at Cambuslang,
near Glasgow, and educated at the universities of Glasgow and Cambridge. He
was ordained in 1795, and after holding a chaplaincy in India at Barrackpur
(1797-1799) was appointed Calcutta chaplain and vice-principal of the
college of Fort William. In this capacity he did much to advance
Christianity and native education in India, especially by organizing
systematic translations of the Scriptures. An account of his travels in the
south and west of India, which added considerably to our knowledge of
nature life, is given in his _Christian Researches in Asia_ (Cambridge,
1811). After his return to England in 1808, he still took an active part in
matters connected with India, and by his book entitled _Colonial
Ecclesiastical Establishment_ (London, 1813), he assisted in settling the
controversy of 1813, which ended in the establishment of the Indian
episcopate.

BUCHANAN, GEORGE (1506-1582), Scottish humanist, was born in February 1506.
His father, a younger son of an old family, was the possessor of the farm
of Moss, in the parish of Killearn, Stirlingshire, but he died at an early
age, leaving his widow and children in poverty. His mother, Agnes Heriot,
was of the family of the Heriots of Trabroun, Haddingtonshire, of which
George Heriot, founder of Heriot's hospital, was also a member. Buchanan is
said to have attended Killearn school, but not much is known of his early
education. In 1520 he was sent by his uncle, James Heriot, to the
university of Paris, where, as he tells us in an autobiographical sketch,
he devoted himself to the writing of verses "partly by liking, partly by
compulsion (that being then the one task prescribed to youth)." In 1522 his
uncle died, and Buchanan being thus unable to continue longer in Paris,
returned to Scotland. After recovering from a severe illness, he joined the
French auxiliaries who had been brought over by John Stewart, duke of
Albany, and took part in an unsuccessful inroad into England (see the
account in his _Hist. of Scotland_). In the following year he entered the
university of St Andrews, where he graduated B.A. in 1525. He had gone
there chiefly for the purpose of attending the celebrated John Major's
lectures on logic; and when that teacher removed to Paris, Buchanan
followed him in 1526. In 1527 he graduated B.A., and in 1528 M.A. at Paris.
Next year he was appointed regent, or professor, in the college of
Sainte-Barbe, and taught there for upwards of three years. In 1529 he was
elected Procurator of the "German Nation" in the university of Paris, and
was re-elected four times in four successive months. He resigned his
regentship in 1531, and in 1532 became tutor to Gilbert Kennedy, 3rd earl
of Cassilis, with whom he returned to Scotland about the beginning of 1537.

At this period Buchanan was content to assume the same attitude towards the
Church of Rome that Erasmus maintained. He did not repudiate its doctrines,
but considered himself free to criticize its practice. Though he listened
with interest to the arguments of the Reformers, he did not join their
ranks before 1553. His first production in Scotland, when he was in Lord
Cassilis's household in the west country, was the poem _Somnium_, a
satirical attack upon the Franciscan friars and monastic life generally.
This assault on the monks was not displeasing to James V., who engaged
Buchanan as tutor to one of his natural [v.04 p.0660] sons, Lord James
Stewart (not the son who was afterwards the regent Murray), and encouraged
him to a still more daring effort. In these circumstances the poems
_Palinodia_ and _Franciscanus & Fratres_ were written, and, although they
remained unpublished for many years, it is not surprising that the author
became an object of bitterest hatred to the order and their friends. Nor
was it yet a safe matter to assail the church. In 1539 there was a bitter
persecution of the Lutherans, and Buchanan among others was arrested. He
managed to effect his escape and with considerable difficulty made his way
to London and thence to Paris. In Paris, however, he found his enemy,
Cardinal David Beaton, who was there as an ambassador, and on the
invitation of Andre de Gouvea, proceeded to Bordeaux. Gouvea was then
principal of the newly founded college of Guienne at Bordeaux, and by his
exertions Buchanan was appointed professor of Latin. During his residence
here several of his best works, the translations of _Medea_ and _Alcestis_,
and the two dramas, _Jephthes (sive Votum)_ and _Baptistes (sive
Calumnia)_, were completed. Montaigne was Buchanan's pupil at Bordeaux and
acted in his tragedies. In the essay _Of Presumption_ he classes Buchanan
with Aurat, Beza, de L'Hopital, Montdore and Turnebus, as one of the
foremost Latin poets of his time. Here also Buchanan formed a lasting
friendship with Julius Caesar Scaliger; in later life he won the admiration
of Joseph Scaliger, who wrote an epigram on Buchanan which contains the
couplet, famous in its day:--

 "Imperii fuerat Romani Scotia limes;
  Romani eloquii Scotia limes erit?"

In 1542 or 1543 he returned to Paris, and in 1544 was appointed regent in
the college of Cardinal le Moine. Among his colleagues were the renowned
Muretus and Turnebus.

In 1547 Buchanan joined the band of French and Portuguese humanists who had
been invited by Andre de Gouvea to lecture in the Portuguese university of
Coimbra. The French mathematician Elie Vinet, and the Portuguese historian,
Jeronimo de Osorio, were among his colleagues; Gouvea, called by Montaigne
_le plus grand principal de France_, was rector of the university, which
had reached the summit of its prosperity under the patronage of King John
III. But the rectorship had been coveted by Diogo de Gouvea, uncle of Andre
and formerly head of Sainte-Barbe. It is probable that before Andre's death
at the end of 1547 Diogo had urged the Inquisition to attack him and his
staff; up to 1906, when the records of the trial were first published in
full, Buchanan's biographers generally attributed the attack to the
influence of Cardinal Beaton, the Franciscans, or the Jesuits, and the
whole history of Buchanan's residence in Portugal was extremely obscure.

A commission of inquiry was appointed in October 1549 and reported in June
1550. Buchanan and two Portuguese, Diogo de Teive and Jo[=a]o da Costa (who
had succeeded to the rectorship), were committed for trial. Teive and Costa
were found guilty of various offences against public order, and the
evidence shows that there was ample reason for a judicial inquiry. Buchanan
was accused of Lutheran and Judaistic practices. He defended himself with
conspicuous ability, courage and frankness, admitting that some of the
charges were true. About June 1551 he was sentenced to abjure his errors,
and to be imprisoned in the monastery of S[=a]o Bento in Lisbon. Here he
was compelled to listen to edifying discourses from the monks, whom he
found "not unkind but ignorant." In his leisure he began to translate the
Psalms into Latin verse. After seven months he was released, on condition
that he remained in Lisbon; and on the 28th of February 1552 this
restriction was annulled. Buchanan at once sailed for England, but soon
made his way to Paris, where in 1553 he was appointed regent in the college
of Boncourt. He remained in that post for two years, and then accepted the
office of tutor to the son of the Marechal de Brissac. It was almost
certainly during this last stay in France, where Protestantism was being
repressed with great severity by Francis I., that Buchanan ranged himself
on the side of the Calvinists.

In 1560 or 1561 he returned to Scotland, and in April 1562 we find him
installed as tutor to the young queen Mary, who was accustomed to read Livy
with him daily. Buchanan now openly joined the Protestant, or Reformed
Church, and in 1566 was appointed by the earl of Murray principal of St
Leonard's College, St Andrews. Two years before he had received from the
queen the valuable gift of the revenues of Crossraguel Abbey. He was thus
in good circumstances, and his fame was steadily increasing. So great,
indeed, was his reputation for learning and administrative capacity that,
though a layman, he was made moderator of the general assembly in 1567. He
had sat in the assemblies from 1563.

Buchanan accompanied the regent Murray into England, and his _Detectio_
(published in 1572) was produced to the commissioners at Westminster. In
1570, after the assassination of Murray, he was appointed one of the
preceptors of the young king, and it was through his tuition that James VI.
acquired his scholarship. While discharging the functions of royal tutor he
also held other important offices. He was for a short time director of
chancery, and then became lord privy seal, a post which entitled him to a
seat in the parliament. He appears to have continued in this office for
some years, at least till 1579. He died on the 28th of September 1582.

His last years had been occupied with two of his most important works. The
first was the treatise _De Jure Regni apud Scotos_, published in 1579. In
this famous work, composed in the form of a dialogue, and evidently
intended to instil sound political principles into the mind of his pupil,
Buchanan lays down the doctrine that the source of all political power is
the people, that the king is bound by those conditions under which the
supreme power was first committed to his hands, and that it is lawful to
resist, even to punish, tyrants. The importance of the work is proved by
the persistent efforts of the legislature to suppress it during the century
following its publication. It was condemned by act of parliament in 1584,
and again in 1664; and in 1683 it was burned by the university of Oxford.
The second of his larger works is the history of Scotland, _Rerum
Scoticarum Historia_, completed shortly before his death (1579), and
published in 1582. It is of great value for the period personally known to
the author, which occupies the greater portion of the book. The earlier
part is based, to a considerable extent, on the legendary history of Boece.
Buchanan's purpose was to "purge" the national history "of sum Inglis lyis
and Scottis vanite" (_Letter to Randolph_), but he exaggerated his freedom
from partisanship and unconsciously criticized his work when he said that
it would "content few and displease many."

Buchanan is one of Scotland's greatest scholars. For mastery over the Latin
language he has seldom been surpassed by any modern writer. His style is
not rigidly modelled upon that of any classical author, but has a certain
freshness and elasticity of its own. He wrote Latin as if it had been his
mother tongue. But in addition to this perfect command over the language,
Buchanan had a rich vein of poetical feeling, and much originality of
thought. His translations of the Psalms and of the Greek plays are more
than mere versions; the smaller satirical poems abound in wit and in happy
phrase; his two tragedies, _Baptistes_ and _Jephthes_, have enjoyed from
the first an undiminished European reputation for academic excellence. In
addition to the works already named, Buchanan wrote in prose _Chamaeleon_,
a satire in the vernacular against Maitland of Lethington, first printed in
1711; a Latin translation of Linacre's Grammar (Paris, 1533); _Libettus de
Prosodia_ (Edinburgh, 1640); and _Vita ab ipso scripta biennio ante mortem_
(1608), edited by R. Sibbald (1702). His other poems are _Fratres
Fraterrimi_, _Elegiae_, _Silvae_, two sets of verses entitled
_Hendecasyllabon Liber_ and _Iambon Liber_; three books of _Epigrammata_; a
book of miscellaneous verse; _De Sphaera_ (in five books), suggested by the
poem of Joannes de Sacrobosco, and intended as a defence of the Ptolemaic
theory against the new Copernican view.

There are two editions of Buchanan's works:--(a) _Georgii Buchanani Scoti,
Poetarum sui seculi facile principis, Opera Omnia_, in two vols. fol.,
edited by Ruddiman (Edinburgh, Freebairn, 1715); (b) edited by Burman, 4to,
1725. The _Vernacular Writings_, [v.04 p.0661] consisting of the
_Chamaeleon_ (_u.s._), a tract on the Reformation of St Andrews University,
_Ane Admonitioun to the Trew Lordis_, and two letters, were edited for the
Scottish Text Society by P. Hume Brown. The principal biographies
are:--David Irving, _Memoirs of the Life and Writings of George Buchanan_
(Edinburgh,1807 and 1817); P. Hume Brown, _George Buchanan, Humanist and
Reformer_ (Edinburgh, 1890), _George Buchanan and his Times_ (Edinburgh,
1906); Rev. D. Macmillan, _George Buchanan, a Biography_ (Edinburgh, 1906).
Buchanan's quatercentenary was celebrated at different centres in Scotland
in 1906, and was the occasion of several encomia and studies. The most
important of these are: _George Buchanan: Glasgow Quatercentenary Studies_
(Glasgow, 1906), and _George Buchanan, a Memoir_, edited by D.A. Millar (St
Andrews, 1907). A verse translation of the _Baptistes_, entitled
_Tyrannicall-Government Anatomized_ (1642), has been attributed to Milton;
its authorship is discussed in the _Glasgow Quatercentenary Studies_. The
records of Buchanan's trial, discovered by the Portuguese historian, G.J.C.
Henriques, were published by him under the title _George Buchanan in the
Lisbon Inquisition. The Records of his Trial, with a Translation thereof
into English, Facsimiles of some of the Papers, and an Introduction_
(Lisbon, 1906).

BUCHANAN, JAMES (1791-1868), fifteenth president of the United States, was
born near Foltz, Franklin county, Pennsylvania, on the 23rd of April 1791.
Both parents were of Scottish-Irish Presbyterian descent. He graduated at
Dickinson College, Carlisle, Pennsylvania, in 1809, studied law at
Lancaster in 1809-1812, and was admitted to the bar in 1812. He served in
the lower house of the state legislature in 1814-1816, and as a
representative in Congress from 1821 to 1831. As chairman of the judiciary
committee he conducted the impeachment trial (1830) of Judge James H. Peck,
led an unsuccessful movement to increase the number of Supreme Court judges
and to relieve them of their circuit duties, and succeeded in defeating an
attempt to repeal the twenty-fifth section of the Judiciary Act of 1789,
which gave the Supreme Court appellate jurisdiction by writ of error to the
state courts in cases where federal laws and treaties are in question.
After the dissolution of the Federalist party, of which he had been a
member, he supported the Jackson-Van Buren faction, and soon came to be
definitely associated with the Democrats. He represented the United States
at the court of St Petersburg in 1832-1833, and there negotiated an
important commercial treaty. He was a Democratic member of the United
States Senate from December 1834 until March 1845, ardently supporting
President Jackson, and was secretary of state in the cabinet of President
Polk from 1845 to 1849--a period marked by the annexation of Texas, the
Mexican War, and negotiations with Great Britain relative to the Oregon
question. After four years of retirement spent in the practice of his
profession, he was appointed by President Pierce minister to Great Britain
in 1853.

Up to this time Buchanan's attitude on the slavery question had been that
held by the conservative element among Northern Democrats. He felt that the
institution was morally wrong, but held that Congress could not interfere
with it in the states in which it existed, and ought not to hinder the
natural tendency toward territorial expansion through a fear that the evil
would spread. He voted for the bill to exclude anti-slavery literature from
the mails, approved of the annexation of Texas, the war with Mexico, and
the Compromise of 1850, and disapproved of the Wilmot Proviso. Fortunately
for his career he was abroad during the Kansas-Nebraska debates, and hence
did not share in the unpopularity which attached to Stephen A. Douglas as
the author of the bill, and to President Pierce as the executive who was
called upon to enforce it. At the same time, by joining with J.Y. Mason and
Pierre Soule in issuing the Ostend Manifesto in 1854, he retained the
good-will of the South.[1] Accordingly on his return from England in 1856
he was nominated by the Democrats as a compromise candidate for president,
and was elected, receiving 174 electoral votes to 114 for John C. Fremont,
Republican, and 8 for Millard Fillmore, American or "Know-Nothing."

His high moral character, the breadth of his legal knowledge, and his
experience as congressman, cabinet member and diplomat, would have made
Buchanan an excellent president in ordinary times; but he lacked the
soundness of judgment, the self-reliance and the moral courage needed to
face a crisis. At the beginning of his administration he appointed Robert
J. Walker of Mississippi, territorial governor of Kansas, and Frederick P.
Stanton of Tennessee, secretary, and assured them of his determination to
adhere to the popular sovereignty principle. He soon began to use his
influence, however, to force the admission of Kansas into the Union under
the pro-slavery Lecompton Constitution, contrary to the wishes of the
majority of the settlers. Stanton was removed from office for opposing the
scheme, and Walker resigned in disgust. This change of policy was doubtless
the result of timidity rather than of a desire to secure re-election by
gaining the favour of the Southern Democracy. Under the influence of Howell
Cobb of Georgia, secretary of the treasury, and Jacob Thompson of
Mississippi, secretary of the interior, the president was convinced that it
was the only way to avoid civil war. Federal patronage was freely used to
advance the Lecompton measure and the compromise English Bill, and to
prevent Douglas's election to the Senate in 1858. Some of these facts were
brought out in the famous Covode Investigation conducted by a committee of
the House of Representatives in 1860. The investigations, however, were
very partisan in character, and there is reason to doubt the constitutional
power of the House to make it, except as the basis for an impeachment
trial.

The call issued by the South Carolina legislature just after the election
of Lincoln for a state convention to decide upon the advisability of
secession brought forward the most serious question of Buchanan's
administration. The part of his annual message of the 4th of December 1860
dealing with it is based upon a report prepared by Attorney-General
Jeremiah S. Black of Pennsylvania. He argued that a state had no legal
right to secede, but denied that the federal government had any power
forcibly to prevent it. At the same time it was the duty of the president
to call out the army and navy of the United States to protect federal
property or to enforce federal laws. Soon after the secession movement
began the Southern members of the cabinet resigned, and the president
gradually came under the influence of Black, Stanton, Dix, and other
Northern leaders. He continued, however, to work for a peaceful settlement,
supporting the Crittenden Compromise and the work of the Peace Congress. He
disapproved of Major Anderson's removal of his troops from Fort Moultrie to
Fort Sumter in December 1860; but there is probably no basis for the charge
made by Southern writers that the removal itself was in violation of a
pledge given by the president to preserve the _status quo_ in Charleston
harbour until the arrival of the South Carolina commissioners in
Washington. Equally unfounded is the assertion first made by Thurlow Weed
in the London _Observer_ (9th of February 1862) that the president was
prevented from ordering Anderson back to Fort Moultrie only by the threat
of four members of the cabinet to resign.

[v.04 p.0662]

On the expiration of his term of office (March 4, 1861) Buchanan retired to
his home at Wheatland, near Lancaster, Pennsylvania, where he died on the
1st of June 1868. His mistakes as president have been so emphasized as to
obscure the fact that he was a man of unimpeachable honesty, of the highest
patriotism, and of considerable ability. He never married.

See George Ticknor Curtis, _The Life of James Buchanan_ (2 vols., New York,
1883), the standard biography; Curtis, however, was a close personal and
political friend, and his work is too eulogistic. More trustworthy, but at
times unduly severe, is the account given by James Ford Rhodes in the first
two volumes of his _History of the United States since the Compromise of
1850_ (New York, new edition, 1902-1907). John Bassett Moore has edited
_The Works of James Buchanan, comprising his Speeches, State Papers, and
Private Correspondence_ (Philadelphia, 1908-1910).

[1] This "manifesto," which was bitterly attacked in the North, was agreed
upon (October 18, 1854) by the three ministers after several meetings at
Ostend and at Aix-la-Chapelle, arranged in pursuance of instructions to
them from President Pierce to "compare opinions, and to adopt measures for
perfect concert of action in aid of the negotiations at Madrid" on the
subject of reparations demanded from Spain by the United States for alleged
injuries to American commerce with Cuba. In the manifesto the three
ministers asserted that "from the peculiarity of its geographical position,
and the considerations attendant upon it, Cuba is as necessary to the North
American republic as any of its present members"; spoke of the danger to
the United States of an insurrection in Cuba; asserted that "we should be
recreant to our duty, be unworthy of our gallant forefathers, and commit
base treason against our posterity, should we permit Cuba to be Africanized
and become a second Santo Domingo, with all its attendant horrors to the
white race, and suffer the flames to extend to our own neighboring shores,
seriously to endanger or actually destroy the fair fabric of our Union";
and recommended that "the United States ought, if practicable, to purchase
Cuba as soon as possible." To Spain, they argued, the sale of the island
would be a great advantage. The most startling declaration of the manifesto
was that if Spain should refuse to sell "after we shall have offered a
price for Cuba far beyond its present value," and if Cuba, in the
possession of Spain, should seriously endanger "our internal peace and the
existence of our cherished Union," then "by every law, human and divine, we
shall be justified in wresting it from Spain if we have the power."

BUCHANAN, ROBERT WILLIAMS (1841-1901), British poet, novelist and
dramatist, son of Robert Buchanan (1813-1866), Owenite lecturer and
journalist, was born at Caverswall, Staffordshire, on the 18th of August
1841. His father, a native of Ayr, after living for some years in
Manchester, removed to Glasgow, where Buchanan was educated, at the high
school and the university, one of his fellow-students being the poet David
Gray. His essay on Gray, originally contributed to the _Cornhill Magazine_,
tells the story of their close friendship, and of their journey to London
in 1860 in search of fame. After a period of struggle and disappointment
Buchanan published _Undertones_ in 1863. This "tentative" volume was
followed by _Idyls and Legends of Inverburn_ (1865), _London Poems_ (1866),
and _North Coast and other Poems_ (1868), wherein he displayed a faculty
for poetic narrative, and a sympathetic insight into the humbler conditions
of life. On the whole, Buchanan is at his best in these narrative poems,
though he essayed a more ambitious flight in _The Book of Orm: A Prelude to
the Epic_, a study in mysticism, which appeared in 1870. He was a frequent
contributor to periodical literature, and obtained notoriety by an article
which, under the _nom de plume_ of Thomas Maitland, he contributed to the
_Contemporary Review_ for October 1871, entitled "The Fleshly School of
Poetry." This article was expanded into a pamphlet (1872), but he
subsequently withdrew from the criticisms it contained, and it is chiefly
remembered by the replies it evoked from D.G. Rossetti in a letter to the
_Athenaeum_ (16th December 1871), entitled "The Stealthy School of
Criticism," and from Mr Swinburne in _Under the Microscope_ (1872).
Buchanan himself afterwards regretted the violence of his attack, and the
"old enemy" to whom _God and the Man_ is dedicated was Rossetti. In 1876
appeared _The Shadow of the Sword_, the first and one of the best of a long
series of novels. Buchanan was also the author of many successful plays,
among which may be mentioned _Lady Clare_, produced in 1883; _Sophia_
(1886), an adaptation of _Tom Jones; A Man's Shadow_ (1890); and _The
Charlatan_ (1894). He also wrote, in collaboration with Harriett Jay, the
melodrama _Alone in London_. In 1896 he became, so far as some of his work
was concerned, his own publisher. In the autumn of 1900 he had a paralytic
seizure, from which he never recovered. He died at Streatham on the 10th of
June 1901.

Buchanan's poems were collected into three volumes in 1874, into one volume
in 1884; and as _Complete Poetical Works_ (2 vols., 1901). Among his poems
should also be mentioned: "The Drama of Kings" (1871); "St Abe and his
Seven Wives," a lively tale of Salt Lake City, published anonymously in
1872; and "Balder the Beautiful" (1877); "The City of Dream" (1888); "The
Outcast: a Rhyme for the Time" (1891); and "The Wandering Jew" (1893). His
earlier novels, _The Shadow of the Sword_, and _God and the Man_ (1881), a
striking tale of a family feud, are distinguished by a certain breadth and
simplicity of treatment which is not so noticeable in their successors,
among which may be mentioned _The Martyrdom of Madeline_ (1882); _Foxglove
Manor_ (1885); _Effie Hetherington_ (1896); and _Father Anthony_ (1898).
_David Gray and other Essays, chiefly on Poetry_ (1868); _Master Spirits_
(1873); _A Poet's Sketch Book_ (1883), in which the interesting essay on
Gray is reprinted; and _A Look round Literature_ (1887), contain Buchanan's
chief contributions to periodical literature. More valuable is _The Land of
Lorne_ (2 vols., 1871), a vivid record of yachting experiences on the west
coast of Scotland.

See also Harriett Jay, _Robert Buchanan; some Account of his Life_ (1903).

BUCHAREST (_Bucuresci_), also written Bucarest, Bukarest, Bukharest,
Bukorest and Bukhorest, the capital of Rumania, and chief town of the
department of Ilfov. Although _Bucharest_ is the conventional English
spelling, the forms _Bucarest_ and _Bukarest_ more nearly represent the
correct pronunciation. The population in 1900 was 282,071, including 43,274
Jews, and 53,056 aliens, mostly Austro-Hungarian subjects. With its
outlying parts, Bucharest covers more than 20 sq. m. It lies in a hollow,
traversed from north-west to south-east by the river Dimbovitza
(_Dambovita_ or _Dimbovita_), and is built mainly on the left bank. A range
of low hills affords shelter on the west and south-west; but on every other
side there are drained, though still unhealthy, marshes, stretching away to
meet the central Walachian plains. From a distance, the multitude of its
gardens, and the turrets and metal-plated or gilded cupolas of its many
churches give Bucharest a certain picturesqueness. In a few of the older
districts, too, where land is least valuable, there are antique
one-storeyed houses, surrounded by poplars and acacias; while the gipsies
and Rumans, wearing their brightly coloured native costumes, the Russian
coachmen, or sleigh-drivers, of the banished Lipovan sect, and the pedlars,
with their doleful street cries, render Bucharest unlike any western
capital. Nevertheless, the city is modern. Until about 1860, indeed, the
dimly lit lanes were paved with rough stone blocks, imbedded in the clay
soil, which often subsided, so as to leave the surface undulating like a
sea. Drains were rare, epidemics common. Owing to the frequency of
earthquakes, many houses were built of wood, and in 1847 fully a quarter of
the city was laid waste by fire. The plague visited Bucharest in 1718,
1738, 1793, when an earthquake destroyed a number of old buildings, and in
1813, when 70,000 of the inhabitants died in six weeks. From the accession
of Prince Charles, in 1866, a gradual reform began. The river was enclosed
between stone embankments; sewerage and pure water were supplied, gas and
electric light installed; and horse or electric tramways laid down in the
principal thoroughfares, which were paved with granite or wood. The older
houses are of brick, overlaid with white or tinted plaster, and ornamented
with figures or foliage in terra-cotta; but owing to the great changes of
temperature in Rumania, the plaster soon cracks and peels off, giving a
dilapidated appearance to many streets. The chief modern buildings, such as
the Athenaeum, with its Ionic facade and Byzantine dome, are principally on
the quays and boulevards, and are constructed of stone.

Bucharest is often called "The Paris of the East," partly from a supposed
social resemblance, partly from the number of its boulevards and avenues.
Three main thoroughfares, the Plevna, Lipscani, and Vacaresci, skirt the
left bank of the river; the Elizabeth Boulevard, and the Calea Victoriei,
or "Avenue of Victory," which commemorates the Rumanian success at Plevna,
in 1877, radiate east and north, respectively, from the Lipscani, and meet
a broad road which surrounds all sides of Bucharest, except the north-west.
The Lipscani was originally the street of merchants who obtained their
wares from the annual fair at Leipzig; for almost all crafts or gilds,
other than the bakers and tavern-keepers, were long confined to separate
quarters; and the old names have survived, as in the musicians', furriers',
and money-changers' quarters. Continuous with the Calea Victoriei, on the
north, is the Kisilev Park, traversed by the Chausee, a favourite drive,
leading to the pretty Baneasa race-course, where spring and autumn meetings
are held. The Cismegiu or Cismigiu Park, which has a circumference of about
1 m., is laid out between the Plevna road and the Calea Victoriei; and
there are botanical and zoological gardens.

The Orthodox Greek churches are generally small, with very narrow windows,
and are built of brick in a modified Byzantine style. They are usually
surmounted by two or three towers, but the bells are hung in a kind of
wooden porch, resembling a [v.04 p.0663] lych-gate, and standing about
twenty paces from the church. The cathedral, or metropolitan church, where
the metropolitan primate of Rumania officiates, was built between 1656 and
1665. It has the shape of a Greek cross, surrounded by a broad cloister,
with four main entrances, each surmounted by a turret. The whole culminates
in three brick towers. Standing on high ground, the cathedral overlooks all
Bucharest, and commands a view of the Carpathians. Other interesting
churches are St Spiridion the New (1768), the loftiest and most beautiful
of all; the Doamna Balasa (1751), noteworthy for its rich carved work
without, and frescoes within; and the ancient Biserica Bucur, said, in
local traditions, to derive its name from Bucur, a shepherd whom legend
makes the founder of Bucharest. The real founder and date of this church,
and of many others, are unknown, thanks to the frequent obliteration of
Slavonic inscriptions by the Greek clergy. The Protestants, Armenians and
Lipovans worship in their own churches, and the Jews have several
synagogues. Bucharest is also the seat of a Roman Catholic archbishop; but
the Roman Catholics, though numbering nearly 37,000 in 1899, possess only
three churches, including the cathedral of St Joseph.

Bucharest is a great educational centre. Besides the ordinary
ecclesiastical seminaries, lyceums, gymnasia and elementary schools, it
possesses schools of commerce, science and art institutes, and training
colleges, for engineers and veterinary surgeons; while the university,
founded in 1864, has faculties of theology, philosophy, literature, law,
science, medicine and pharmacy. Students pay no fees except for board. The
national library, containing many precious Oriental documents, and the
meeting-hall of the Rumanian senate, are both included in the university
buildings, which, with the Athenaeum (used for literary conferences and for
music), and the central girls' school, are regarded as the best example of
modern Rumanian architecture. Other libraries are those of the Nifon
seminary, of the Charles University Foundation (_Fundatiunea universitara
Carol_), which endows research, and rewards literary or scientific merit;
the central library, and the library of the Academy, which also contains a
museum of natural history and antiquities. Among philanthropic institutions
may be mentioned the Coltei, Brancovan, Maternitate, Philantropia and
Pantelimon hospitals; the Marcutza lunatic asylum; and the Princess Elena
refuge (_Asilul Elena Doamna_), founded by Princess Elena Couza in 1862, to
provide for 230 orphan girls. The summer home of these girls is a convent
in the Transylvanian Alps. Hotels and restaurants are numerous. There are
two theatres, the National and the Lyric, which is mainly patronized by
foreign players; but minor places of amusement abound; as also do
clubs--political, social and sporting. Socially, indeed, the progress of
Bucharest is remarkable, its political, literary and scientific circles
being on a level with those of most European capitals.

Bucharest is the winter residence of the royal family, the meeting-place of
parliament, and the seat of an appeal court (_Curtea de Apel_), of the
supreme court (_Curtea de Casatie_), of the ministries, the national bank,
the bank of Rumania, many lesser credit establishments, and a chamber of
commerce. The railway lines which meet on the western limit of the city
give access to all parts, and the telephone system, besides being
internally complete, communicates with Braila, Galatz, Jassy and Sinaia.
Bucharest has a very large transit trade in petroleum, timber and
agricultural produce; above all, in wheat and maize. Its industries include
petroleum-refining, extraction of vegetable oils, cabinet-making,
brandy-distilling, tanning, and the manufacture of machinery, wire, nails,
metal-ware, cement, soap, candles, paste, starch, paper, cardboard, pearl
buttons, textiles, leather goods, ropes, glucose, army supplies, preserved
meat and vegetables, and confectionery. An important fair is held for seven
days in each year. The mercantile community is largely composed of
Austrians, Frenchmen, Germans, Greeks and Swiss, who form exclusive
colonies. Bucharest is the headquarters of the II. army corps, and a
fortress of the first rank. The fortifications were constructed in
1885-1896 on a project drafted by the Belgian engineer, General Brialmont,
in 1883. The mean distance of the forts from the city is 4 m., and the
perimeter of the defences (which are technically of special importance as
embodying the system of Brialmont) is about 48 m., this perimeter being
defended by 36 armoured forts and batteries. There are barracks for over
30,000 cavalry and infantry, an arsenal, a military hospital and three
military academies.

The legend of Bucur is plainly unhistorical, and the meaning of _Bucharest_
has been much disputed. One account derives it from an Albanian word
_Bukur_, meaning joy, in memory of a victory won by Prince Mircea of
Walachia (c. 1383-1419) over the Turks. For this reason Bucharest is often
called "The City of Joy". Like most ancient cities of Rumania, its
foundation has also been ascribed to the first Walachian prince, the
half-mythical Radu Negru (c. 1290-1314). More modern historians declare
that it was originally a fortress, erected on the site of the Daco-Roman
Thyanus, to command the approaches to Tirgovishtea, formerly the capital of
Walachia. It soon became the summer residence of the court. In 1595 it was
burned by the Turks; but, after its restoration, continued to grow in size
and prosperity, until, in 1698, Prince Constantine Brancovan chose it for
his capital. During the 18th century the possession of Bucharest was
frequently disputed by the Turks, Austrians and Russians. In 1812 it gave
its name to the treaty by which Bessarabia and a third of Moldavia were
ceded to Russia. In the war of 1828 it was occupied by the Russians, who
made it over to the prince of Walachia in the following year. A rebellion
against Prince Bibescu in 1848 brought both Turkish and Russian
interference, and the city was again held by Russian troops in 1853-1854.
On their departure an Austrian garrison took possession and remained till
March 1857. In 1858 the international congress for the organization of the
Danubian principalities was held in the city; and when, in 1861, the union
of Walachia and Moldavia was proclaimed, Bucharest became the Rumanian
capital. Prince Cuza, the first ruler of the united provinces, was driven
from his throne by an insurrection in Bucharest in 1866. For the subsequent
history of the city see RUMANIA: _History_.

BUeCHELER, FRANZ (1837-1908), German classical scholar, was born in
Rheinberg on the 3rd of June 1837, and educated at Bonn. He held
professorships successively at Freiburg (1858), Greifswald (1866), and Bonn
(1870), and in 1878 became joint-editor of the _Rheinisches Museum fuer
Philologie_. Both as a teacher and as a commentator he was extremely
successful. Among his editions are: _Frontini de aquis urbis Romae_
(Leipzig, 1858); _Pervigilium Veneris_ (Leipzig, 1859); _Petronii satirarum
reliquiae_ (Berlin, 1862; 3rd ed., 1882); _Hymnus Cereris Homericus_
(Leipzig, 1869); _Q. Ciceronis reliquiae_ (1869); _Herondae mimiambi_
(Bonn, 1892). He wrote also _Grundriss der lateinischen Deklination_
(1866); _Das Recht von Gortyn_ (Frankfort, 1885, with Zitelmann); and
supervised the third edition (1893) of O. Jahn's _Persii, Juvenalis,
Sulpiciae saturae_.

BUCHER, LOTHAR (1817-1892), German publicist, was born on the 25th of
October 1817 at Neu Stettin, in Pomerania, his father being master at a
gymnasium. After studying at the university of Berlin he adopted the legal
profession. Elected a member of the National Assembly in Berlin in 1848, he
was an active leader of the extreme democratic party. With others of his
colleagues he was in 1850 brought to trial for having taken part in
organizing a movement for refusal to pay taxes; he was condemned to fifteen
months' imprisonment in a fortress, but left the country before the
sentence was executed. For ten years he lived in exile, chiefly in London;
he acted as special correspondent of the _National Zeitung_, and gained a
great knowledge of English life; and he published a work, _Der
Parliamentarismus wie er ist_, a criticism of parliamentary government,
which shows a marked change in his political opinions. In 1860 he returned
to Germany, and became intimate with Lassalle, who made him his literary
executor. In 1864 he was offered by Bismarck, and accepted, a high position
in the Prussian foreign office. The reasons that led him to a step which
involved so complete a break with his earlier friends and associations are
not clearly known. From this time till his death he acted as Bismarck's
secretary, and was the man who probably enjoyed the greatest [v.04 p.0664]
amount of his confidence. It was he who drew up the text of the
constitution of the North German Confederation; in 1870 he was sent on a
very confidential mission to Spain in connexion with the Hohenzollern
candidature for the Spanish crown; he assisted Bismarck at the final
negotiations for the treaty of Frankfort, and was one of the secretaries to
the congress of Berlin; he also assisted Bismarck in the composition of his
memoirs. Bucher, who was a man of great ability, had considerable
influence, which was especially directed against the economic doctrines of
the Liberals; in 1881 he published a pamphlet criticizing the influence and
principles of the Cobden Club. He identified himself completely with
Bismarck's later commercial and colonial policy, and probably had much to
do with introducing it, and he did much to encourage anti-British feeling
in Germany. He died at Glion, in Switzerland, on the 12th of October 1892.

See Heinrich v. Poschinger, _Ein 48er: Lothar Buchers Leben und Werke_ (3
vols., Berlin, 1890); Busch, _Bismarck: Some Secret Pages of his History_
(London, 1898).

(J. W. HE.)

BUCHEZ, PHILIPPE JOSEPH BENJAMIN (1796-1865), French author and politician,
was born on the 31st of March 1796 at Matagne-la-Petite, now in Belgium,
then in the French department of the Ardennes. He finished his general
education in Paris, and afterwards applied himself to the study of natural
science and medicine. In 1821 he co-operated with Saint-Amand Bazard and
others in founding a secret association, modelled on that of the Italian
Carbonari, with the object of organizing a general armed rising against the
government. The organization spread rapidly and widely, and displayed
itself in repeated attempts at revolution. In one of these attempts, the
affair at Belfort, Buchez was gravely compromised, although the jury which
tried him did not find the evidence sufficient to warrant his condemnation.
In 1825 he graduated in medicine, and soon after he published with Ulisse
Trelat a _Precis elementaire d'hygiene_. About the same time he became a
member of the Saint-Simonian Society, presided over by Bazard, Barthelemy
Prosper Enfantin, and Olinde Rodrigues, and contributed to its organ, the
_Producteur_. He left it in consequence of aversion to the strange
religious ideas developed by its "Supreme Father," Enfantin, and began to
elaborate what he regarded as a Christian socialism. For the exposition and
advocacy of his principles he founded a periodical called _L'Europeen_. In
1833 he published an _Introduction a la science de l'histoire_, which was
received with considerable favour (2nd ed., improved and enlarged, 2 vols.,
1842). Notwithstanding its prolixity, this is an interesting work. The part
which treats of the aim, foundation and methods of the science of history
is valuable; but what is most distinctive in Buchez's theory--the division
of historical development into four great epochs originated by four
universal revelations, of each epoch into three periods corresponding to
desire, reasoning and performance, and of each of these periods into a
theoretical and practical age--is merely ingenious (see Flint's _Philosophy
of History in Europe_, i. 242-252). Buchez next edited, along with M.
Roux-Lavergne (1802-1874), the _Histoire parlementaire de la Revolution
francaise_ (1833-1838; 40 vols.). This vast and conscientious publication
is a valuable store of material for the early periods of the first French
Revolution. There is a review of it by Carlyle (_Miscellanies_), the first
two parts of whose own history of the French Revolution are mainly drawn
from it. The editors worked under the inspiration of a strong admiration of
the principles of Robespierre and the Jacobins, and in the belief that the
French Revolution was an attempt to realize Christianity. In the _Essai
d'un traite complet de philosophie au point de vue du Catholicisme et du
progres_ (1839-1840) Buchez endeavoured to co-ordinate in a single system
the political, moral, religious and natural phenomena of existence. Denying
the possibility of innate ideas, he asserted that morality comes by
revelation, and is therefore not only certain, but the only real certainty.

It was partly owing to the reputation which he had acquired by these
publications, but still more owing to his connexion with the _National_
newspaper, and with the secret societies hostile to the government of Louis
Philippe, that he was raised, by the Revolution of 1848, to the presidency
of the Constituent Assembly. He speedily showed that he was not possessed
of the qualities needed in a situation so difficult and in days so
tempestuous. He retained the position only for a very short time. After the
dissolution of the assembly he was not re-elected. Thrown back into private
life, he resumed his studies, and added several works to those which have
been already mentioned. A _Traite de politique_ (published 1866), which may
be considered as the completion of his _Traite de philosophie_, was the
most important of the productions of the last period of his life. His
brochures are very numerous and on a great variety of subjects, medical,
historical, political, philosophical, &c. He died on the 12th of August
1865. He found a disciple of considerable ability in M.A. Ott, who
advocated and applied his principles in various writings.

See also A. Ott, "P.B.J. Buchez," in _Journal des economistes_ for 1865.

BUCHHOLZ, a town of Germany, in the kingdom of Saxony, 1700 ft. above the
sea, on the Sehma, 18 m. S. by E. of Chemnitz by rail. Pop. (1905) 9307. It
has a Gothic Evangelical church and monuments of Frederick the Wise of
Saxony, and Bismarck. There is a school for instruction in lace-making, an
industry dating from 1589, which still forms the chief employment of the
inhabitants.

BUeCHNER, FRIEDRICH KARL CHRISTIAN LUDWIG (1824-1899), German philosopher
and physician, was born at Darmstadt. He studied at Giessen, Strassburg,
Wuerzburg and Vienna. In 1852 he became lecturer in medicine at the
university of Tuebingen, where he published his great work _Kraft und Stoff_
(1855). In this work, the product, according to Lange, of a fanatical
enthusiasm for humanity, he sought to demonstrate the indestructibility of
matter and force, and the finality of physical force. The extreme
materialism of this work excited so much opposition that he was compelled
to give up his post at Tuebingen. He retired to Darmstadt, where he
practised as a physician and contributed regularly to pathological and
physiological magazines. He continued his philosophical work in defence of
materialism, and published _Natur und Geist_ (1857), _Aus Natur und
Wissenschaft_ (vol. i., 1862; vol. ii., 1884), _Fremdes und Eigenes aus dem
geistigen Leben der Gegenwart_ (1890), _Darwinismus und Socialismus_
(1894), _Im Dienste der Wahrheit_ (1899). He died at Darmstadt on the 1st
of May 1899. In estimating Buechner's philosophy it must be remembered that
he was primarily a physiologist, not a metaphysician. Matter and force (or
energy) are infinite; the conservation of force follows from the
imperishability of matter, the ultimate basis of all science. Buechner is
not always clear in his theory of the relation between matter and force. At
one time he refuses to explain it, but generally he assumes that all
natural and spiritual forces are indwelling in matter. "Just as a
steam-engine," he says in _Kraft und Stoff_ (7th ed., p. 130), "produces
motion, so the intricate organic complex of force-bearing substance in an
animal organism produces a total sum of certain effects, which, when bound
together in a unity, are called by us mind, soul, thought." Here he
postulates force and mind as emanating from original matter--a
materialistic monism. But in other parts of his works he suggests that mind
and matter are two different aspects of that which is the basis of all
things--a monism which is not necessarily materialistic, and which, in the
absence of further explanation, constitutes a confession of failure.
Buechner was much less concerned to establish a scientific metaphysic than
to protest against the romantic idealism of his predecessors and the
theological interpretations of the universe. Nature according to him is
purely physical; it has no purpose, no will, no laws imposed by extraneous
authority, no supernatural ethical sanction.

See Frauenstaedt, _Der Materialismus_ (Leipzig, 1856); Janet, _The
Materialism of the Present Day: A Criticism of Dr Buechner's System_, trans.
Masson (London, 1867).

BUCHON, JEAN ALEXANDRE (1791-1849), French scholar, was born on the 21st of
May 1791 at Menetou-Salon (Cher), and died on the 29th of August 1849. An
ardent Liberal, he took an active part in party struggles under the
Restoration, while [v.04 p.0665] throwing himself with equal vigour into
the great work of historical regeneration which was going on at that
period. During 1822 and the succeeding years he travelled about Europe on
the search for materials for his _Collection des chroniques nationales
francaises ecrites en langue vulgaire du XIII^e au XVI^e siecle_ (47 vols.,
1824-1829). After the revolution of 1830 he founded the _Pantheon
litteraire_, in which he published a _Choix d'ouvrages mystiques_ (1843), a
_Choix de monuments primitifs de l'eglise chretienne_ (1837), a _Choix des
historiens grecs_ (1837), a collection of _Chroniques etrangeres relatives
aux expeditions francaises pendant le XIII^e siecle_ (1840), and, most
important of all, a _Choix de chroniques et memoires sur l'histoire de
France_ (1836-1841). His travels in southern Italy and in the East had put
him upon the track of the medieval French settlements in those regions, and
to this subject he devoted several important works: _Recherches et
materiaux pour servir a une histoire de la domination francaise dans les
provinces demembrees de l'empire grec_ (1840); _Nouvelles recherches
historiques sur la principaute francaise de Moree et ses hautes baronnies_
(2 vols., 1843-1844); _Histoire des conquetes et de l'etablissement des
Francais dans les etats de l'ancienne Grece sous es Villehardouin_ (1846,
unfinished). None of the numerous publications which we owe to Buchon can
be described as thoroughly scholarly; but they have been of great service
to history, and those concerning the East have in especial the value of
original research.

BUCHU, or BUKA LEAVES, the produce of several shrubby plants belonging to
the genus Barosma (nat. order Rutaceae), natives of the Cape of Good Hope.
The principal species, _B. crenulata_, has leaves of a smooth leathery
texture, oblong-ovate in shape, from an inch to an inch and a half in
length, with serrulate or crenulate margins, on which as well as on the
under side are conspicuous oil-glands. The other species which yield buchu
are _B. serratifolia_, having linear-lanceolate sharply serrulate leaves,
and _B. betulina_, the leaves of which are cuneate-obovate, with
denticulate margins. They are all, as found in commerce, of a pale
yellow-green colour; they emit a peculiar aromatic odour, and have a
slightly astringent bitter taste. Buchu leaves contain a volatile oil,
which is of a dark yellow colour, and deposits a form of camphor on
exposure to air, a liquid hydro-carbon being the solvent of the camphor
within the oil-glands. There is also present a minute quantity of a bitter
principle. The leaves of a closely allied plant, _Empleurum serratulum_,
are employed as a substitute or adulterant for buchu. As these possess no
glands they are a worthless substitute. The British Pharmacopoeia contains
an infusion and tincture of buchu. The former may be given in doses of an
ounce and the latter in doses of a drachm. The drug has the properties
common to all substances that contain a volatile oil. The infusion contains
very little of the oil and is of very slight value. Until the advent of the
modern synthetic products buchu was valued in diseases of the urinary
tract, but its use is now practically obsolete.

BUCK, CARL DARLING (1866- ), American philologist, was born on the 2nd of
October 1866, at Bucksport, Maine. He graduated at Yale in 1886, was a
graduate student there for three years, and studied at the American School
of Classical Studies in Athens (1887-1889) and in Leipzig (1889-1892). In
1892 he became professor of Sanskrit and Indo-European comparative
philology in the University of Chicago; but it is in the narrower field of
the Italic dialects that his important work lies, including _Der Vocalismus
der oskischen Sprache_ (1892), _The Oscan-Umbrian Verb-System_ (1895), and
_Grammar of Oscan and Umbrian_ (1904), as well as an excellent _precis_ of
the Italic languages in _Johnson's Universal Cyclopaedia_. He collaborated
with W.G. Hale (_q.v._) in the preparation of _A Latin Grammar_ (1903). Of
his contributions to reviews on phonological topics, perhaps the most
important is his discussion of "Brugmann's Law."

BUCK, DUDLEY (1839-1909), American musical composer, was born in Hartford,
Connecticut, on the 10th of March 1839, the son of a merchant who gave him
every opportunity for cultivating his musical talents; and for four years
(1858-1862) he studied at Leipzig, Dresden and Paris. On returning to
America he held the position of organist at Hartford, Chicago (1869), and
Boston (1871). In 1875 he went to New York to assist Theodore Thomas as
conductor of the orchestral concerts, and from 1877 to 1903 was organist at
Holy Trinity church. Meanwhile he had become well known as a composer of
church music, a number of cantatas (_Columbus_, 1876; _Golden Legend_,
1880; _Light of Asia_, 1885, &c), a grand opera, _Serapis_, a comic opera,
_Deseret_ (1880), a symphonic overture, _Marmion_, a symphony in E flat,
and other orchestral and vocal works. He died on the 6th of October 1909.

BUCK, (1) (From the O. Eng. _buc_, a he-goat, and _bucca_, a male deer),
the male of several animals, of goats, hares and rabbits, and particularly
of the fallow-deer. During the 18th century the word was used of a
spirited, reckless young man of fashion, and later, with particular
reference to extravagance in dress, of a dandy. (2) (From a root common to
Teutonic and Romance languages, cf. the Ger. _Bauch_, Fr. _buee_, and Ital.
_bucata_), the bleaching of clothes in lye, also the lye itself, and the
clothes to be bleached, so a "buck-basket" means a basket of clothes ready
for the wash. (3) Either from an obsolete word meaning "body," or from the
sense of bouncing or jumping, derived from (1), a word now only found in
compound words, as "buck-board," a light four-wheeled vehicle, the
primitive form of which has one or more seats on a springy board, joining
the front and rear axles and serving both as springs and body; a
"buck-wagon" (Dutch, _bok-wagen_) is a South African cart with a frame
projecting over the wheels, used for the transport of heavy loads. (4)
(Either from "buck" a he-goat, or from a common Teutonic root, to bend, as
seen in the Ger. _buecken_, and Eng. "bow"), a verb meaning "to leap"; seen
especially in the compound "buck-jumper," a horse which leaps clear off the
ground, with feet tucked together and arched back, descending with
fore-feet rigid and head down and drawn inwards.

BUCK-BEAN, or BOG-BEAN (_Menyanthes trifoliata_, a member of the Gentian
family), a bog-plant with a creeping stem, alternately arranged large
leaves each with three leaflets, and spikes of white or pink flowers. The
stout stem is bitter and has tonic and febrifuge properties. The plant is
widely distributed through the north temperate zone.

BUeCKEBURG, a town of Germany, capital of the principality of
Schaumburg-Lippe, pleasantly situated at the foot of the Harrelberg on the
river Aue, 6 m. from Minden, on the main railway from Cologne to Berlin.
Pop. 6000. It has a palace standing in extensive grounds, a gymnasium, a
normal seminary, a library, a synagogue, and three churches, one of which
has the appropriate inscription, _Religionis non structurae exemplum_. The
first houses of Bueckeburg began to gather round the castle about 1365; and
it was not till the 17th century that the town was surrounded with walls,
which have given place to a ring of pretty promenades. The poet J.G. von
Herder was court preacher here from 1771 to 1776.

BUCKERIDGE, JOHN (c. 1562-1631), English divine, was a son of William
Buckeridge, and was educated at the Merchant Taylors school and at St
John's College, Oxford. He became a fellow of his college, and acted as
tutor to William Laud, whose opinions were perhaps shaped by him. Leaving
Oxford, Buckeridge held several livings, and was highly esteemed by King
James I., whose chaplain he became. In 1605 he was elected president of St
John's College, a position which he vacated on being made bishop of
Rochester in 1611. He was transferred to the bishopric of Ely in 1628, and
died on the 23rd of May 1631. The bishop won some fame as a theologian and
a controversialist. Among his intimate friends was Bishop Lancelot
Andrewes, whose "Ninety-one Sermons" were published by Laud and Buckeridge
in 1629.

BUCKETSHOP, a slang financial term for the office or business of an
inferior class of stockbroker, who is not a member of an official exchange
and conducts speculative operations for his clients, who deposit a margin
or cover. The operations consist, as a rule, of a simple bet or wager
between the broker and client, no pretence of an actual purchase or sale
being attempted. The term is sometimes, though loosely and wrongfully,
applied to [v.04 p.0666] all stockbrokers who are not members of the
recognized local exchange. The origin of the word is American. According to
the _New English Dictionary_ it is supposed to have arisen in Chicago. The
Board of Trade there forbade dealings in "options" in grain of less than
5000 bushels. An "Open Board of Trade" or unauthorized exchange was opened,
for the purpose of small gamblers, in a neighbouring street below the rooms
of the Board of Trade. The lift used by members of the Board of Trade would
be sent down to bring up from the open Board what was known as a
"bucketful" of the smaller speculators, when business was slack.

BUCKHOLDT [properly BEUKELSZ, or BOCKELSZOON], JOHANN (c. 1508-1535), Dutch
Anabaptist fanatic, better known as JOHN OF LEIDEN, from his place of
birth, was the illegitimate son of Bockel, burgomaster of Soevenhagen, who
afterwards married his mother. He was born about 1508, apprenticed to a
tailor, became infected with the opinions of Thomas Muenzer, travelled in
pursuit of his trade (being four years in London), married a widow, became
bankrupt, and in September 1533 joined the Anabaptist movement under Johann
Matthysz (Matthyszoon), baker of Haarlem. He had little education, but some
literary faculty, and had written plays. On the 13th of January 1534 he
appeared in Muenster as an apostle of Matthysz. Good-looking and fluent, he
fascinated women, and won the confidence of Bernard Knipperdollinck, a
revolutionary cloth merchant, who gave him his daughter in marriage. The
Muenster Anabaptists took up arms on the 9th of February 1534 (see
ANABAPTISTS). On the death of Matthysz (1534), Buckholdt succeeded him as
prophet, added his widow to the number of his wives, and organized a new
constitution for Muenster, with twelve elders (suggested by the tribes of
Israel) and other officers of a theocracy, but soon superseded these,
making himself king of the new Zion. His arbitrary rule was marked by pomp
and severity. Muenster was retaken (June 25, 1535) by its prince-bishop,
Franz von Waldeck. Buckholdt, after many indignities, was cruelly executed
on the 22nd of January 1536; his body, and those of his companions, were
hung in cages to the tower of the Lamberti church. His portrait is in
_Grouwelen der Hooftketteren_ (Leiden, 1607; an English edition is appended
to Alexander Ross's _Pansebeia_, 2nd ed., 1655); a better example of the
same is given by Arend.

See Arend, _Algemeene Geschiedenis des Vaderlands_ (1846), ii., iii., 629;
Van der Aa, _Biographisch Woordenboek der Nederlanden_ (1853); E. Belfort
Bax, _Rise and Fail of the Anabaptists_ (1903).

(A. GO.*)

BUCKIE, a fishing town and police burgh of Banffshire, Scotland, on the
Moray Firth, at the mouth of Buckie burn, about 17 m. W. of Banff, with a
station on the Great North of Scotland railway. Pop. (1891) 5849; (1901)
6549. Its public buildings include a hall and literary institute with
library and recreation rooms. It attracts one of the largest Scottish
fleets in the herring season, and is also the chief seat of line fishing in
Scotland. The harbour, with an outer and an inner basin, covers an area of
9 acres and has half a mile of quayage. Besides the fisheries, there are
engineering works, distilleries, and works for the making of ropes, sails
and oil. The burn, which divides the town into Nether Buckie and Eastern
Buckie, rises near the Hill of Clashmadin, about 5 m. to the south-west.
Portgordon, 11/2 m. west of Buckie, is a thriving fishing village, and
Rathven, some 2 m. east, lies in a fertile district, where there are
several interesting Danish cairns and other relics of the remote past.

BUCKINGHAM, EARLS, MARQUESSES AND DUKES OF. The origin of the earldom of
Buckingham (to be distinguished from that of Buckinghamshire, _q.v._) is
obscure. According to Mr J.H. Round (in G.E.C.'s _Peerage_, _s.v._) there
is some charter evidence for its existence under William Rufus; but the
main evidence for reckoning Walter Giffard, lord of Longueville in
Normandy, who held forty-eight lordships in the county, as the first earl,
is that of Odericus Vitalis, who twice describes Walter as "Comes
Bucchingehamensis," once in 1097, and again at his death in 1102. After the
death of Walter Giffard, 2nd earl in 1164, the title was assumed by Richard
de Clare, earl of Pembroke ("Strongbow"), in right of his wife, Rohais,
sister of Walter Giffard I.; and it died with him in 1176. In 1377 Thomas
of "Woodstock" (duke of Gloucester) was created earl of Buckingham at the
coronation of Richard II. (15th of July), and the title of Gloucester
having after his death been given to Thomas le Despenser, his son Humphrey
bore that of earl of Buckingham only. On Humphrey's death, his sister Anne
became countess of Buckingham in her own right. She married Edmund
Stafford, earl of Stafford, and on her death (1438) the title of Buckingham
passed to her son Humphrey Stafford, earl of Stafford, who in 1444 was
created duke of Buckingham. This title remained in the Stafford family
until the attainder and execution of Edward, 3rd duke, in 1521 (see
BUCKINGHAM, HENRY STAFFORD, 2nd duke of).

In 1617 King James I. created George Villiers earl, in 1618 marquess, and
in 1623 duke of Buckingham (see BUCKINGHAM, GEORGE VILLIERS, 1st duke of).
The marquessate and dukedom became extinct with the death of the 2nd
(Villiers) duke (_q.v._) in 1687; but the earldom was claimed, under the
special remainder in the patent of 1617, by a collateral line of doubtful
legitimacy claiming descent from John Villiers, 1st Viscount Purbeck. The
title was not actually borne after the death of John Villiers, styling
himself earl of Buckingham, in 1723. The claim was extinguished by the
death of George Villiers, a clergyman, in 1774.

In 1703 John Sheffield, marquess of Normanby, was created "duke of the
county of Buckingham and of Normanby" (see below). He was succeeded by his
son Edmund who died in October 1735 when the titles became extinct.

The title of marquess and duke of Buckingham in the Grenville family (to
the holders of which the remainder of this article applies) was derived,
not from the county, but from the town of Buckingham. It originated in
1784, when the 2nd Earl Temple was created marquess of Buckingham "in the
county of Buckingham," this title being elevated into the dukedom of
Buckingham and Chandos for his son in 1822.

GEORGE NUGENT TEMPLE GRENVILLE, 1st marquess of Buckingham (1753-1813), was
the second son of George Grenville, and was born on the 17th of June 1753.
Educated at Eton and Christ Church, Oxford, he was appointed a teller of
the exchequer in 1764, and ten years later was returned to parliament as
one of the members for Buckinghamshire. In the House of Commons he was a
sharp critic of the American policy of Lord North. In September 1779 he
succeeded his uncle as 2nd Earl Temple; in 1782 was appointed
lord-lieutenant of Buckinghamshire; and in July of the same year became a
member of the privy council and lord-lieutenant of Ireland in the ministry
of the earl of Shelburne. On his advice the Renunciation Act of 1783 was
passed, which supplemented the legislative independence granted to Ireland
in 1782. By royal warrant he created the order of St Patrick in February
1783, with himself as the first grand master. Temple left Ireland in 1783,
and again turned his attention to English politics. He enjoyed the
confidence of George III., and having opposed Fox's East India Bill, he was
authorized by the king to say that "whoever voted for the India Bill was
not only not his friend, but would be considered by him as an enemy," a
message which ensured the defeat of the bill. He was appointed a secretary
of state when the younger Pitt formed his ministry in December 1783, but
resigned two days later. In December 1784 he was created marquess of
Buckingham "in the county of Buckingham." In November 1787 he was appointed
lord-lieutenant of Ireland under Pitt, but his second tenure of this office
was hardly as successful as the first. He was denounced by Grattan for
extravagance; was censured by the Irish Houses of parliament for refusing
to transmit to England in address calling upon the prince of Wales to
assume the regency; and he could only maintain his position by resorting to
bribery on a large scale. Having become very unpopular he resigned his
office in September 1789, and subsequently took very little part in
politics, although he spoke in favour of the union with Ireland. He died at
his residence, Stowe House, [v.04 p.0667] Buckingham, on the 11th of
February 1813, and was buried at Wotton. In 1775 he had married Mary
Elizabeth (d. 1812), daughter of Robert, Earl Nugent.

His elder son, RICHARD GRENVILLE, 1st duke of Buckingham and Chandos
(1776-1839), was one of the members of parliament for Buckinghamshire from
1797 to 1813, and, as Earl Temple, took an active part in politics. In
February 1813 he succeeded his father as marquess of Buckingham; and having
married the only child of the 3rd duke of Chandos, he was created duke of
Buckingham and Chandos in 1822. He died in 1839. Owing to financial
embarrassments, the duke lived out of England for some time, and in 1862 an
account of his travels was published, as _The Private Diary of Richard,
Duke of Buckingham and Chandos_.

He was succeeded by his only child, RICHARD GRENVILLE, 2nd duke of
Buckingham and Chandos (1797-1861). Educated at Eton and Oriel College,
Oxford, he was known as Earl Temple and subsequently as marquess of
Chandos. He was member of parliament for Buckinghamshire from 1818 to 1839,
and was responsible for the "Chandos clause" in the Reform Bill of 1832. He
was lord privy seal from September 1841 to January 1842, and partly owing
to his opposition to the repeal of the corn laws was known as the "Farmers'
Friend." He found the estates heavily encumbered when he succeeded to the
dukedom in 1839, and his own generous and luxurious tastes brought matters
to a climax. In 1847 his residences were seized by his creditors, and the
duke left England. His personal property and many of his landed estates
were sold, and returning to England he devoted himself to literature. He
died in London, on the 29th of July 1861. His wife, whom he married in
1819, was Mary (d. 1862), daughter of John, 1st marquess of Breadalbane,
and she obtained a divorce from him in 1850. Buckingham's chief
publications are, _Memoirs of the Court and Cabinets of George III._
(London, 1853-1855); _Memoirs of the Court of England_, 1811-1820 (London,
1856); _Memoirs of the Court of George IV._ (London, 1859); and _Memoirs of
the Court and Cabinets of William IV. and Victoria_ (London, 1861).

RICHARD GRENVILLE, 3rd duke of Buckingham and Chandos (1823-1889), the only
son of the 2nd duke, was educated at Eton and Christ Church, Oxford, and,
as marquess of Chandos, represented the borough of Buckingham in parliament
from 1846 to 1857. He was chairman of the London & North-Western railway
from 1853 to 1861. After succeeding to the dukedom he became lord president
of the council, and subsequently secretary for the colonies in the
Conservative government of 1866-1868. From 1875 to 1880 he was governor of
Madras, and in 1886 was chosen chairman of committees in the House of
Lords. He was twice married and left three daughters. As he left no son the
dukedom became extinct on his death; but the Scottish barony of Kinloss (to
which he established his title in 1868) passed to his eldest daughter,
Mary, the wife of Captain L. F. H. C. Morgan; the earldom of Temple to his
nephew, William Stephen Gore-Langton; and the viscounty of Cobham to his
kinsman, Charles George, 5th Baron Lyttelton. His widow married the 1st
Earl Egerton of Tatton in 1894.

BUCKINGHAM, GEORGE VILLIERS, 1ST DUKE OF[1] (1592-1628), English statesman,
born in August 1592,[2] was a younger son of Sir George Villiers of
Brooksby. His mother, Mary, daughter of Anthony Beaumont of Glenfield,
Leicestershire, who was left a widow early, educated him for a courtier's
life, sending him to France with Sir John Eliot; and the lad, being "by
nature contemplative," took kindly to the training. He could dance well,
fence well, and talk a little French, when in August 1614 he was brought
before the king's notice, in the hope that he would take a fancy to him.

The moment was favourable. Since Salisbury's death James had taken the
business of government upon himself. But he wanted some one who would chat
with him, and amuse him, and would also fill the office of private
secretary, and save him from the trouble of saying no to importunate
suitors. It would be an additional satisfaction if he could train the youth
whom he might select in those arts of statesmanship of which he believed
himself to be a perfect master. His first choice had not proved a happy
one. Robert Carr, who had lately become earl of Somerset, had had his head
turned by his elevation. He had grown peevish toward his master, and had
placed himself at the head of the party which was working for a close
alliance with Spain.

The appearance of Villiers, beaming with animal spirits and good humour,
was therefore welcomed by all who had an interest in opposing the designs
of Spain, and he was appointed cupbearer the same year. For some little
time still Somerset's pre-eminence was maintained. But on the 23rd of April
1615, Villiers, in spite of Somerset, was promoted to be gentleman of the
bedchamber, and was knighted on the 24th; the charge of murdering Overbury,
brought against Somerset in September, completed his downfall, and Villiers
at once stepped into the place which he had vacated. On the 3rd of January
1616 he became master of the horse, on the 24th of April he received the
order of the Garter, and on the 27th of August 1616 was created Viscount
Villiers and Baron Waddon, receiving a grant of land valued at L80,000,
while on the 5th of January 1617 he was made earl, and on the 1st of
January 1618 marquess of Buckingham. With the exception of the earl of
Pembroke he was the richest nobleman in England.

Those who expected him to give his support to the anti-Spanish party were
at first doomed to disappointment. As yet he was no politician, and he
contented himself with carrying out his master's orders, whatever they
were. In his personal relations he was kindly and jovial towards all who
did not thwart his wishes. But James had taught him to consider that the
patronage of England was in his hands, and he took good care that no man
should receive promotion of any kind who did not in one way or another pay
court to him. As far as can be ascertained, he cared less for money than
for the gratification of his vanity. But he had not merely himself to
consider. His numerous kinsfolk were to be enriched by marriage, if in no
other way, and Bacon, the great philosopher and statesman, was all but
thrust from office because he had opposed a marriage suggested for one of
Buckingham's brothers, while Cranfield, the first financier of the day, was
kept from the treasury till he would forsake the woman whom he loved, to
marry a penniless cousin of the favourite. On the 19th of January 1619
James made him lord high admiral of England, hoping that the ardent,
energetic youth would impart something of his own fire to those who were
entrusted with the oversight of that fleet which had been almost ruined by
the peculation and carelessness of the officials. Something of this, no
doubt, was realized under Buckingham's eye. But he himself never pretended
to the virtues of an administrator, and he was too ready to fill up
appointments with men who flattered him, and too reluctant to dismiss them,
if they served their country ill, to effect any permanent change for the
better.

It was about this time that he first took an independent part in politics.
All England was talking of the revolution in Bohemia in the year before,
and men's sympathy with the continental Protestants was increased when it
was known that James's son-in-law had accepted the crown of Bohemia, and
that in the summer of 1620 a Spanish force was preparing to invade the
Palatinate. Buckingham at first had thrown himself into the popular
movement. Before the summer of 1620 was at end, incensed by injuries
inflicted on English sailors by the Dutch in the East Indies, he had swung
round, and was in close agreement with Gondomar, the Spanish ambassador. He
had now married Lady Katherine Manners, the daughter of the earl of
Rutland, who was at heart a Roman Catholic, though she outwardly conformed
to the English Church, and this alliance may have had something to do with
the change.

Buckingham's mistakes were owing mainly to his levity. If he passed briskly
from one camp to the other, an impartial [v.04 p.0668] observer might
usually detect some personal motive at the bottom. But it is hardly
probable that he was himself conscious of anything of the sort. When he was
in reality acting under the influence of vanity or passion it was easy for
him to persuade himself that he was doing his duty to his country.

The parliament which met in 1621, angry at discovering that no help was to
be sent to the Palatinate, broke out into a loud outcry against the system
of monopolies, from which Buckingham's brothers and dependants had drawn a
profit, which was believed to be greater than it really was. At first he
pleaded for a dissolution. But he was persuaded by Bishop Williams that it
would be a wiser course to put himself at the head of the movement, and at
a conference of the Commons with the Lords acknowledged that his two
brothers had been implicated, but declared that his father had begotten a
third who would aid in punishing them. In the impeachment of Bacon which
soon followed, Buckingham, who owed much to his wise counsels, gave him
that assistance which was possible without imperilling his own position and
influence. He at first demanded the immediate dissolution of parliament,
but afterwards, when the cry rose louder against the chancellor, joined in
the attack, making however some attempt to mitigate the severity of the
charges against him during the hearing of his case before the House of
Lords. Notwithstanding, he took advantage of Bacon's need of assistance to
wring from him the possession of York House.

In the winter of 1621, and the succeeding year, Buckingham was entirely in
Gondomar's hands; and it was only with some difficulty that in May 1622
Laud argued him out of a resolution to declare himself a Roman Catholic. In
December 1621 he actively supported the dissolution of parliament, and
there can be little doubt that when the Spanish ambassador left England the
following May, he had come to an understanding with Buckingham that the
prince of Wales should visit Madrid the next year, on which occasion the
Spanish court hoped to effect his conversion to the Roman Catholic Church
before giving him the hand of the infanta Maria. They set out on their
adventurous expedition on the 17th of February 1623, arriving at Madrid,
after passing through Paris on the 7th of March. Each party had been the
dupe of the other. Charles and Buckingham were sanguine in hoping for the
restitution of the Palatinate to James's son-in-law, as a marriage gift to
Charles; while the Spaniards counted on the conversion of Charles to Roman
Catholicism and other extreme concessions (see CHARLES I.). The political
differences were soon accentuated by personal disputes between Buckingham
and Olivares and the grandees, and when the two young men sailed together
from Santander in September, it was with the final resolution to break
entirely with Spain.

James had gratified his favourite in his absence by raising him to a
dukedom. But the splendour which now gathered round Buckingham was owing to
another source than James's favour. He had put himself at the head of the
popular movement against Spain, and when James, acknowledging sorely
against his will that the Palatinate could only be recovered by force,
summoned the parliament which met in February 1624, Buckingham, with the
help of the heir apparent, took up an independent political position. James
was half driven, half persuaded to declare all negotiations with Spain at
an end. For the moment Buckingham was the most popular man in England.

It was easier to overthrow one policy than to construct another. The
Commons would have been content with sending some assistance to the Dutch,
and with entering upon a privateering war with Spain. James, whose object
was to regain the Palatinate, believed this could only be accomplished by a
continental alliance, in which France took part. As soon as parliament was
prorogued, negotiations were opened for a marriage between Charles and the
sister of Louis XIII., Henrietta Maria. But a difficulty arose. James and
Charles had engaged to the Commons that there should be no concessions to
the English Roman Catholics, and Louis would not hear of the marriage
unless very large concessions were made. Buckingham, impatient to begin the
war as soon as possible, persuaded Charles, and the two together persuaded
James to throw over the promises to the Commons, and to accept the French
terms. It was no longer possible to summon parliament to vote supplies for
the war till the marriage had been completed, when remonstrances to its
conditions would be useless.

Buckingham, for Buckingham was now virtually the ruler of England, had thus
to commence war without money. He prepared to throw 12,000 Englishmen,
under a German adventurer, Count Mansfeld, through France into the
Palatinate. The French insisted that he should maroh through Holland. It
mattered little which way he took. Without provisions, and without money to
buy them, the wretched troops sickened and died in the winter frosts.
Buckingham's first military enterprise ended in disastrous failure.

Buckingham had many other schemes in his teeming brain. He had offered to
send aid to Christian IV., king of Denmark, who was proposing to make war
in Germany, and had also a plan for sending an English fleet to attack
Genoa, the ally of Spain, and a plan for sending an English fleet to attack
Spain itself.

Before these schemes could be carried into operation James died on the 27th
of March 1625. The new king and Buckingham were at one in their aims and
objects. Both were anxious to distinguish themselves by the chastisement of
Spain, and the recovery of the Palatinate. Both were young and
inexperienced. But Charles, obstinate when his mind was made up, was
sluggish in action and without fertility in ideas, and he had long
submitted his mind to the versatile and brilliant favourite, who was never
at a loss what to do next, and who unrolled before his eyes visions of
endless possibilities in the future. Buckingham was sent over to Paris to
urge upon the French court the importance of converting its alliance into
active co-operation.

There was a difficulty in the way. The Huguenots of La Rochelle were in
rebellion, and James had promised the aid of English ships to suppress that
rebellion. Buckingham, who seems at first to have consented to the scheme,
was anxious to mediate peace between the king of France and his subjects,
and to save Charles from compromising himself with his parliament by the
appearance of English ships in an attack upon Protestants. When he returned
his main demands were refused, but hopes were given him that peace would be
made with the Huguenots. On his way through France he had the insolence to
make love to the queen of France.

Soon after his return parliament was opened. It would have been hard for
Charles to pass through the session with credit. Under Buckingham's
guidance he had entered into engagements involving an enormous expenditure,
and these engagements involved a war on the continent, which had never been
popular in the House of Commons. The Commons, too, suspected the marriage
treaty contained engagements of which they disapproved. They asked for the
full execution of the laws against the Roman Catholics, and voted but
little money in return. Before they reassembled at Oxford on the 1st of
August, the English ships had found their way into the hands of the French,
to be used against La Rochelle. The Commons met in an ill-humour. They had
no confidence in Buckingham, and they asked that persons whom they could
trust should be admitted to the king's council before they would vote a
penny. Charles stood by his minister, and on the 12th of August he
dissolved his first parliament.

Buckingham and his master set themselves to work to conquer public opinion.
On the one hand, they threw over their engagements to France on behalf of
the English Roman Catholics. On the other hand they sent out a large fleet
to attack Cadiz, and to seize the Spanish treasure-ships. Buckingham went
to the Hague to raise an immediate supply by pawning the crown jewels, to
place England at the head of a great Protestant alliance, and to enter into
fresh obligations to furnish money to the king of Denmark. It all ended in
failure. The fleet returned from Cadiz, having effected nothing. The crown
jewels produced but a small sum, and the money for the king of Denmark
could only be raised by an appeal to parliament. In the meanwhile the king
of France was deeply offended by the treatment of [v.04 p.0669] the Roman
Catholics, and by the seizure of French vessels on the ground that they
were engaged in carrying goods for Spain.

When Charles's second parliament met on the 6th of February 1626, it was
not long before, under Eliot's guidance, it asked for Buckingham's
punishment. He was impeached before the House of Lords on a long string of
charges. Many of these charges were exaggerated, and some were untrue. His
real crime was his complete failure as the leader of the administration.
But as long as Charles refused to listen to the complaints of his
minister's incompetency, the only way in which the Commons could reach him
was by bringing criminal charges against him. Charles dissolved his second
parliament as he had dissolved his first. Subsequently the Star Chamber
declared the duke innocent of the charges, and on the 1st of June
Buckingham was elected chancellor of Cambridge University.

To find money was the great difficulty. Recourse was had to a forced loan,
and men were thrown into prison for refusing to pay it. Disasters had
occurred to Charles's allies in Germany. The fleet sent out under Lord
Willoughby (earl of Lindsey) against the Spaniards returned home shattered
by a storm, and a French war was impending in addition to the Spanish one.
The French were roused to reprisals by Charles's persistence in seizing
French vessels. Unwilling to leave La Rochelle open to the entrance of an
English fleet, Richelieu laid siege to that stronghold of the French
Huguenots. On the 27th of June 1627 Buckingham sailed from Portsmouth at
the head of a numerous fleet, and a considerable land force, to relieve the
besieged city.

His first enterprise was the siege of the fort of St Martin's, on the Isle
of Re. The ground was hard, and the siege operations were converted into a
blockade. On the 27th of September the defenders of the fort announced
their readiness to surrender the next morning. In the night a fresh gale
brought over a flotilla of French provision boats, which dashed through the
English blockading squadron. The fort was provisioned for two months more.
Buckingham resolved to struggle on, and sent for reinforcements from
England. Charles would gladly have answered to his call. But England had
long since ceased to care for the war. There was no money in the exchequer,
no enthusiasm in the nation to supply the want. Before the reinforcements
could arrive the French had thrown a superior force upon the island, and
Buckingham was driven to retreat on the 29th of October with heavy loss,
only 2989 troops out of nearly 7000 returning to England.

His spirits were as buoyant as ever. Ill luck, or the misconduct of others,
was the cause of his failure. He had new plans for carrying on the war. But
the parliament which met on the 17th of March 1628 was resolved to exact
from the king an obligation to refrain from encroaching for the future on
the liberties of his subjects.

In the parliamentary battle, which ended in the concession of the Petition
of Right, Buckingham took an active share as a member of the House of
Lords. He resisted as long as it was possible to resist the demand of the
Commons, that the king should abandon his claim to imprison without showing
cause. When the first unsatisfactory answer to the petition was made by the
king on the 2nd of June, the Commons suspected, probably with truth, that
it had been dictated by Buckingham. They prepared a remonstrance on the
state of the nation, and Coke at last named the duke as the cause of all
the misfortunes that had occurred. "The duke of Bucks is the cause of all
our miseries ... that man is the grievance of grievances." Though on the
7th of June the king granted a satisfactory answer to the petition, the
Commons proceeded with their remonstrance, and on the 11th demanded that he
might no longer continue in office.

Once more Charles refused to surrender Buckingham, and a few days later he
prorogued parliament in anger. The popular feeling was greatly excited.
Lampoons circulated freely from hand to hand, and Dr Lambe, a quack doctor,
who dabbled in astrology, and was believed to exercise influence over
Buckingham, was murdered in the streets of London. Rude doggerel lines
announced that the duke should share the doctor's fate.

With the clouds gathering round him, Buckingham went down to Portsmouth to
take the command of one final expedition for the relief of La Rochelle. For
the first time even he was beginning to acknowledge that he had undertaken
a task beyond his powers. There was a force of inertia in the officials
which resisted his efforts to spur them on to an enterprise which they
believed to be doomed to failure. He entered gladly into a scheme of
pacification proposed by the Venetian ambassador. But before he could know
whether there was to be peace or war, the knife of an assassin put an end
to his career. John Felton, who had served at Re, had been disappointed of
promotion, and had not been paid that which was due to him for his
services, read the declaration of the Commons that Buckingham was a public
enemy, and eagerly caught at the excuse for revenging his private wrongs
under cover of those of his country. Waiting, on the morning of the 23rd of
August, beside the door of the room in which Buckingham was breakfasting,
he stabbed him to the heart as he came out.

Buckingham married Lady Katherine Manners, daughter of Francis, 6th earl of
Rutland, by whom he left three sons and one daughter, of whom George, the
second son (1628-1687), succeeded to the dukedom.

BIBLIOGRAPHY.--Article in the _Dict. of Nat. Biography_, by S.R. Gardiner;
_Life of Buckingham_, by Sir Henry Wotton (1642), reprinted in _Harleian
Miscellany_, viii. 613; _A Parallel between Robert Earl of Essex and George
late Duke of Buckingham_, by the same writer (1641), in the _Thomason
Tracts_, 164 (20); _Characters_ of the same by Edward, Earl of Clarendon
(1706); _Life of George Villiers, Duke of Buckingham, &c._ (London, 1740);
_Historical and Biographical Memoirs of George Villiers, Duke of
Buckingham_ (London, 1819); _Letters of the Duke and Duchess of Buckingham_
(Edinburgh, 1834); _Historia Vitae ... Ricardi II., &c._, by Thos. Hearne
(1729); _Documents illustrating the Impeachment of Buckingham_, published
by the Camden Society and edited by S.R. Gardiner (1889); _Epistolae
Hoelianae_ (James Howell), 187, 189, 203; _Poems and Songs relating to
George Villiers, Duke of Buckingham_, ed. by R. W. Fairholt for the Percy
Society (1850); Rous's _Diary_ (Camden Soc., 1856), p. 27; _Gent. Mag._
(1845), ii. 137-144 (portrait of Buckingham dead); _Cal. of State Papers_,
and MSS. in the British Museum (various collections). Hist. MSS. Comm.
Series. See also P. Gibbs, _The Romance of George Villiers, 1st Duke of
Buckingham_ (1908).

(S. R. G.; P. C. Y.)

[1] _i.e._ in the Villiers line; see above.

[2] The _Life_, by Sir Henry Wotton, gives August 28th as the date of his
birth, but, when relating his death on August 23rd, adds, "thus died the
great peer in the 36th year of his age compleat and three days over."
August 28th was therefore probably a misprint for August 20th.

BUCKINGHAM, GEORGE VILLIERS, 2ND DUKE OF[1] (1628-1687), English statesman,
son of the 1st duke, was born on the 30th of January 1628. He was brought
up, together with his younger brother Francis, by King Charles I. with his
own children, and was educated at Trinity College, Cambridge, where he
obtained the degree of M.A. in 1642. He fought for the king in the Civil
War, and took part in the attack on Lichfield Close in April 1643.
Subsequently, under the care of the earl of Northumberland, the two
brothers travelled abroad and lived at Florence and Rome. When the Second
Civil War broke out they joined the earl of Holland in Surrey, in July
1648. Lord Francis was killed near Kingston, and Buckingham and Holland
were surprised at St Neots on the 10th, the duke succeeding in escaping to
Holland. In consequence of his participation in the rebellion, his lands,
which had been restored to him in 1647 on account of his youth, were now
again confiscated, a considerable portion passing into the possession of
Fairfax; and he refused to compound. Charles II. conferred on him the
Garter on the 19th of September 1649, and admitted him to the privy council
on the 6th of April 1650. In opposition to Hyde he supported the alliance
with the Scottish presbyterians, accompanied Charles to Scotland in June,
and allied himself with Argyll, dissuading Charles from joining the
royalist plot of October 1650, and being suspected of betraying the plan to
the convenanting leaders. In May he had been appointed general of the
eastern association in England, and was commissioned to raise forces
abroad; and in the following year he was chosen to lead the projected
movement in Lancashire and to command the Scottish royalists. He was
present with Charles at the battle of Worcester on the 3rd of September
1651, and escaped safely [v.04 p.0670] alone to Rotterdam in October. His
subsequent negotiations with Cromwell's government, and his readiness to
sacrifice the interests of the church, separated him from the rest of
Charles's advisers and diminished his influence; while his estrangement
from the royal family was completed by his audacious courtship of the
king's sister, the widowed princess of Orange, and by a money dispute with
Charles. In 1657 he returned to England, and on the 15th of September
married Mary, daughter of Lord Fairfax, who had fallen in love with him
although the banns of her intended marriage with the earl of Chesterfield
had been twice called in church. Buckingham was soon suspected of
organizing a presbyterian plot against the government, and in spite of
Fairfax's interest with Cromwell an order was issued for his arrest on the
9th of October. He was confined at York House about April 1658, and having
broken bounds was rearrested on the 18th of August and imprisoned in the
Tower, where he remained till the 23rd of February 1659, being then
liberated on his promise not to abet the enemies of the government, and on
Fairfax's security of L20,000. He joined the latter in his march against
Lambert in January 1660, and afterwards claimed to have gained Fairfax to
the cause of the Restoration.

On the king's return Buckingham, who met him at his landing at Dover, was
at first received coldly; but he was soon again in favour, was appointed a
gentleman of the bedchamber, carried the orb at the coronation on the 23rd
of April 1661, and was made lord-lieutenant of the West Riding of Yorkshire
on the 21st of September. The same year he accompanied the princess
Henrietta to Paris on her marriage with the duke of Orleans, but made love
to her himself with such imprudence that he was recalled. On the 28th of
April 1662 he was admitted to the privy council. His confiscated estates
amounting to L26,000 a year were restored to him, and he was reputed the
king's richest subject. He took part in the suppression of the projected
insurrection in Yorkshire in 1663, went to sea in the first Dutch war in
1665, and was employed in taking measures to resist the Dutch or French
invasion in June 1666.

He was, however, debarred from high office by Clarendon's influence.
Accordingly Buckingham's intrigues were now directed to effect the
chancellor's ruin. He organized parties in both houses of parliament in
support of the bill of 1666 prohibiting the import of Irish cattle, partly
to oppose Clarendon and partly to thwart the duke of Ormonde. Having
asserted during the debates that "whoever was against the bill had either
an Irish interest or an Irish understanding," he was challenged by Lord
Ossory. Buckingham avoided the encounter, and Ossory was sent to the Tower.
A short time afterwards, during a conference between the two houses on the
19th of December, he came to blows with the marquess of Dorchester, pulling
off the latter's periwig, while Dorchester at the close of the scuffle "had
much of the duke's hair in his hand."[2] According to Clarendon no
misdemeanour so flagrant had ever before offended the dignity of the House
of Lords. The offending peers were both sent to the Tower, but were
released after apologizing; and Buckingham vented his spite by raising a
claim to the title of Lord Roos held by Dorchester's son-in-law. His
opposition to the government had forfeited the king's favour, and he was
now accused of treasonable intrigues, and of having cast the king's
horoscope. His arrest was ordered on the 25th of February 1667, and he was
dismissed from all his offices. He avoided capture till the 27th of June,
when he gave himself up and was imprisoned in the Tower. He was released,
however, by July 17th, was restored to favour and to his appointments on
the 15 of September, and took an active part in the prosecution of
Clarendon. On the latter's fall he became the chief minister, though
holding no high office except that of master of the horse, bought from the
duke of Albermarle in 1668. In 1671 he was elected chancellor of Cambridge,
and in 1672 high steward of Oxford university. He favoured religious
toleration, and earned the praise of Richard Baxter; he supported a scheme
of comprehension in 1668, and advised the declaration of indulgence in
1672. He upheld the original jurisdiction of the Lords in Skinner's case.
With these exceptions Buckingham's tenure of office was chiefly marked by
scandals and intrigues. His illicit connexion with the countess of
Shrewsbury led to a duel with her husband at Barn Elms on the 16th of
January 1668, in which Shrewsbury was fatally wounded. The tale that the
countess, disguised as a page, witnessed the encounter, appears to have no
foundation; but Buckingham, by installing the "widow of his own creation"
in his own and his wife's house, outraged even the lax opinion of that day.
He was thought to have originated the project of obtaining the divorce of
the childless queen. He intrigued against James, against Sir William
Coventry--one of the ablest statesmen of the time, whose fall he procured
by provoking him to send him a challenge--and against the great duke of
Ormonde, who was dismissed in 1669. He was even suspected of having
instigated Thomas Blood's attempt to kidnap and murder Ormonde, and was
charged with the crime in the king's presence by Ormonde's son, Lord
Ossory, who threatened to shoot him dead in the event of his father's
meeting with a violent end. Arlington, next to Buckingham himself the most
powerful member of the cabal and a favourite of the king, was a rival less
easy to overcome; and he derived considerable influence from the control of
foreign affairs entrusted to him. Buckingham had from the first been an
adherent of the French alliance, while Arlington concluded through Sir
William Temple in 1668 the Triple Alliance. But on the complete
_volte-face_ and surrender made by Charles to France in 1670, Arlington as
a Roman Catholic was entrusted with the first treaty of Dover of the 20th
of May--which besides providing for the united attack on Holland, included
Charles's undertaking to proclaim himself a Romanist and to reintroduce the
Roman Catholic faith into England,--While Buckingham was sent to France to
carry on the sham negotiations which led to the public treaties of the 31st
of December 1670 and the 2nd of February 1672. He was much pleased with his
reception by Louis XIV., declared that he had "more honours done him than
ever were given to any subject," and was presented with a pension of 10,000
livres a year for Lady Shrewsbury. In June 1672 he accompanied Arlington to
the Hague to impose terms on the prince of Orange, and with Arlington
arranged the new treaty with Louis. After all this activity he suffered a
keen disappointment in being passed over for the command of the English
forces in favour of Schomberg. He now knew of the secret treaty of Dover,
and towards the end of 1673 his jealousy of Arlington became open
hostility. He threatened to impeach him, and endeavoured with the help of
Louis to stir up a faction against him in parliament. This, however, was
unsuccessful, and in January 1674 an attack was made upon Buckingham
himself simultaneously in both houses. In the Lords the trustees of the
young earl of Shrewsbury complained that Buckingham continued publicly his
intimacy with the countess, and that a son of theirs had been buried in
Westminster Abbey with the title of earl of Coventry; and Buckingham, after
presenting an apology, was required, as was the countess, to give security
for L10,000 not to cohabit together again. In the Commons he was attacked
as the promoter of the French alliance, of "popery" and arbitrary
government. He defended himself chiefly by endeavouring to throw the blame
upon Arlington; but an address was voted petitioning the king to remove him
from his councils, presence and from employment for ever. Charles, who had
only been waiting for a favourable opportunity, and who was enraged at
Buckingham's disclosures, consented with alacrity. Buckingham retired into
private life, reformed his ways, attended church with his wife, began to
pay his debts, became a "patriot," and was claimed by the country or
opposition party as one of their leaders. In the spring of 1675 he was
conspicuous for his opposition to the Test oath and for his abuse of the
bishops, and on the 16th of November he introduced a bill for the relief of
the nonconformists. On the 15th of February 1677 he was one of the four
lords who endeavoured to embarrass the government by raising the question
whether the parliament, not having assembled according to the act of Edward
III. once in the year, had not been dissolved by [v.04 p.0671] the recent
prorogation. The motion was rejected and the four lords were ordered to
apologize. On their refusing, they were sent to the Tower, Buckingham in
particular exasperating the House by ridiculing its censure. He was
released in July, and immediately entered into intrigues with Barillon, the
French ambassador, with the object of hindering the grant of supplies to
the king; and in 1678 he visited Paris to get the assistance of Louis XIV.
for the cause of the opposition. He took an active part in the prosecution
of those implicated in the supposed Popish Plot, and accused the lord chief
justice (Sir William Scroggs) in his own court while on circuit of
favouring the Roman Catholics. In consequence of his conduct a writ was
issued for his apprehension, but it was never served. He promoted the
return of Whig candidates to parliament, constituted himself the champion
of the dissenters, and was admitted a freeman of the city of London. He,
however, separated himself from the Whigs on the exclusion question,
probably on account of his dislike of Monmouth and Shaftesbury, was absent
from the great debate in the Lords on the 15th of November 1680, and was
restored to the king's favour in 1684.

He took no part in public life after James's accession, but returned to his
manor of Helmsley in Yorkshire, the cause of his withdrawal being probably
exhausted health and exhausted finances. In 1685 he published a pamphlet,
entitled _A short Discourse on the Reasonableness of Man's having a
Religion_ (reprinted in _Somers Tracts_ (1813, ix. 13), in which after
discussing the main subject he returned to his favourite topic, religious
toleration. The tract provoked some rejoinders and was defended, amongst
others, by William Penn, and by the author himself in _The Duke of
Buckingham's Letter to the unknown author of a short answer to the Duke of
Buckingham's Paper_ (1685). In hopes of converting him to Roman Catholicism
James sent him a priest, but Buckingham turned his arguments into ridicule.
He died on the 16th of April 1687, from a chill caught while hunting, in
the house of a tenant at Kirkby Moorside in Yorkshire, expressing great
repentance and feeling himself "despised by my country and I fear forsaken
by my God."[3] The miserable picture of his end drawn by Pope, however, is
greatly exaggerated. He was buried on the 7th of June 1687 in Henry VII.'s
chapel in Westminster Abbey, in greater state, it was said, than the late
king, and with greater splendour. With his death the family founded by the
extraordinary rise to power and influence of the first duke ended. As he
left no legitimate children the title became extinct, and his great estate
had been completely dissipated; of the enormous mansion constructed by him
at Cliveden in Buckinghamshire not a stone remains.

The ostentatious licence and the unscrupulous conduct of the Alcibiades of
the 17th century have been deservedly censured. But even his critics agree
that he was good-humoured, good-natured, generous, an unsurpassed mimic and
the leader of fashion; and with his good looks, in spite of his moral
faults and even crimes, he was irresistible to his contemporaries. Many
examples of his amusing wit have survived. His portrait has been drawn by
Burnet, Count Hamilton in the _Memoires de Grammont_, Dryden, Pope in the
_Epistle to Lord Bathurst_, and Sir Walter Scott in _Peveril of the Peak_.
He is described by Reresby as "the first gentleman of person and wit I
think I ever saw," and Burnet bears the same testimony. Dean Lockier, after
alluding to his unrivalled skill in riding, dancing and fencing, adds,
"When he came into the presence-chamber it was impossible for you not to
follow him with your eye as he went along, he moved so gracefully." Racing
and hunting were his favourite sports, and his name long survived in the
hunting songs of Yorkshire. He was the patron of Cowley, Sprat, Matthew
Clifford and Wycherley. He dabbled in chemistry, and for some years,
according to Burnet, "he thought he was very near the finding of the
philosopher's stone." He set up glass works at Lambeth the productions of
which were praised by Evelyn; and he spent much money, according to his
biographer Brian Fairfax, in building _insanae substructions_. Dryden
described him under the character of Zimri in the celebrated lines in
_Absalom and Achitophel_ (to which Buckingham replied in _Poetical
Reflections on a late Poem ... by a Person of Honour, 1682_):--

 "A man so various, that he seemed to be
  Not one, but all mankind's epitome;
  Stiff in opinions, always in the wrong,
  Was everything by starts and nothing long;
  But in the course of one revolving moon,
  Was chymist, fiddler, statesman and buffoon....
  Beggar'd by fools, whom still he found too late,
  He had his jest, but they had his estate."

Buckingham, however, cannot with any truth be called the "epitome of
mankind." On the contrary, the distinguishing features of his life are its
incompleteness, aimlessness, imperfection, insignificance, neglect of
talents and waste of opportunities. "He saw and approved the best," says
Brian Fairfax, "but did too often _deteriora sequi_." He is more severely
but more justly judged by himself. In gay moments indeed he had written--

 "Methinks, I see the wanton houres flee,
  And as they passe, turne back and laugh at me,"[4]--

but his last recorded words on the approach of death, "O! what a prodigal
have I been of that most valuable of all possessions--Time!" express with
exact truth the fundamental flaw of his character and career, of which he
had at last become conscious.

Buckingham wrote occasional verses and satires showing undoubted but
undeveloped poetical gifts, a collection of which, containing however many
pieces not from his pen, was first published by Tom Brown in 1704; while a
few extracts from a commonplace book of Buckingham of some interest are
given in an article in the _Quarterly Review_ of January 1898. He was the
author of _The Rehearsal_, an amusing and clever satire on the heroic drama
and especially on Dryden (first performed on the 7th of December 1671, at
the Theatre Royal, and first published in 1672), a deservedly popular play
which was imitated by Fielding in _Tom Thumb the Great_, and by Sheridan in
the _Critic_. Buckingham also published two adapted plays, _The Chances_,
altered from Fletcher's play of the same name (1682) and _The Restoration
or Right will take place_, from Beaumont and Fletcher's _Philaster_ (publ.
1714); and also _The Battle of Sedgmoor_ and _The Militant Couple_ (publ.
1704). The latest edition of his works is that by T. Evans (2 vols. 8vo,
1775). Another work is named by Wood _A Demonstration of the Deity_, of
which there is now no trace.

BIBLIOGRAPHY.--The life of Buckingham has been well and accurately traced
and the chief authorities collected in the article in the _Dict, of Nat.
Biography_ (1899) by C.H. Firth, and in _George Villiers, 2nd Duke of
Buckingham_, by Lady Burghclere (1903). Other biographies are in Wood's
_Athenae Oxon_ (Bliss), iv. 207; in _Biographia Britannica_; by Brian
Fairfax, printed in H. Walpole's _Catalogue of Pictures of George Duke of
Buckingham_ (1758); in Arber's edition of the _Rehearsal_ (1868); and by
the author of _Hudibras_ in _The Genuine Remains of Mr Samuel Butler_, by
R. Thyer (1759), ii. 72. The following may also be mentioned:--_Quarterly
Review, Jan. 1898_ (commonplace book); _A Conference on the Doctrine of
Transubstantiation between ... the Duke of Buckingham and Father
FitzGerald_ (1714); _A Narrative of the Cause and Manner of the
Imprisonment of the Lords_ (1677); _The Declaration of the ... Duke of
Buckingham and the Earls of Holland and Peterborough ... associated for the
King_ (1648); S.R. Gardiner's _Hist. of the Commonwealth_ (1894-1901);
_Hist. of Eng. Poetry_, by W.J. Courthope (1903), iii. 460; Horace
Walpole's _Royal and Noble Authors_, iii. 304; _Miscellania Aulica_, by T.
Brown (1702); and the _Fairfax Correspondence_ (1848-1849). For the
correspondence see _Charles II. and Scotland in 1650_ (Scottish History
Soc., vol. xvii., 1894); _Calendars of St. Pap. Dom.; Hist. MSS. Comm.
Series, MSS. of Duke of Buccleuch at Montagu House, of Mrs
Frankland-Russell-Astley_, of _Marq. of Ormonde_, and _Various
Collections_; and _English Hist. Rev._ (April 1905), xx. 373.

(P. C. Y.)

[1] i.e. in the Villiers line; see above.

[2] Clarendon, _Life and Continuation_, 979.

[3] _Quarterly Review_, January 1898, p. 110.

[4] From his Common place Book (_Quarterly Rev._ vol. 187, p. 87).

BUCKINGHAM, HENRY STAFFORD, 2ND DUKE OF[1] (1454-1483), was the son of
Humphrey Stafford, killed at the first battle of St Albans in 1455, and
grandson of Humphrey the 1st duke (cr. 1444), killed at Northampton in
1460, both fighting for Lancaster. The 1st duke, who bore the title of earl
of Buckingham in right of his mother, was the son of Edmund, 5th earl of
Stafford, and of Anne, daughter of Thomas, duke [v.04 p.0672] of
Gloucester, youngest son of Edward III.; Henry's mother was Margaret,
daughter of Edmund Beaufort, 2nd duke of Somerset, grandson of John of
Gaunt. Thus he came on both sides of the blood royal, and this, coupled
with the vastness of his inheritance, made the young duke's future of
importance to Edward IV. He was recognized as duke in 1465, and next year
was married to Catherine Woodville, the queen's sister. On reaching manhood
he was made a knight of the Garter in 1474, and in 1478 was high steward at
the trial of George, duke of Clarence. He had not otherwise filled any
position of importance, but his fidelity might seem to have been secured by
his marriage. However, after Edward's death, Buckingham was one of the
first persons worked upon by Richard, duke of Gloucester. It was through
his help that Richard obtained possession of the young king, and he was at
once rewarded with the offices of justiciar and chamberlain of North and
South Wales, and constable of all the royal castles in the principality and
Welsh Marches. In the proceedings which led to the deposition of Edward V.
he took a prominent part, and on the 24th of June 1483 he urged the
citizens at the Guildhall to take Richard as king, in a speech of much
eloquence, "for he was neither unlearned and of nature marvellously well
spoken." (More). At Richard's coronation he served as chamberlain, and
immediately afterwards was made constable of England and confirmed in his
powers in Wales. Richard might well have believed that the duke's support
was secured. But early in August Buckingham withdrew from the court to
Brecon. He may have thought that he deserved an even greater reward, or
possibly had dreams of establishing his own claims to the crown. At all
events, at Brecon he fell somewhat easily under the influence of his
prisoner, John Morton (_q.v._), who induced him to give his support to his
cousin Henry Tudor, earl of Richmond. A widespread plot was soon formed,
but Richard had early warning, and on the 15th of October, issued a
proclamation against Buckingham. Buckingham, as arranged, prepared to enter
England with a large force of Welshmen. His advance was stopped by an
extraordinary flood on the Severn, his army melted away without striking a
blow, and he himself took refuge with a follower, Ralph Bannister, at Lacon
Hall, near Wem. The man betrayed him for a large reward, and on the 1st of
November, Buckingham was brought to the king at Salisbury. Richard refused
to see him, and after a summary trial had him executed next day (2nd of
November 1483), though it was a Sunday.

Buckingham's eldest son, Edward (1478-1521), eventually succeeded him as
3rd duke, the attainder being removed in 1485; the second son, Henry, was
afterwards earl of Wiltshire. The 3rd duke played an important part as lord
high constable at the opening of the reign of Henry VIII., and is
introduced into Shakespeare's play of that king, but he fell through his
opposition to Wolsey, and in 1521 was condemned for treason and executed
(17th of May); the title was then forfeited with his attainder, his only
son Henry (1501-1563), who in his father's lifetime was styled earl of
Stafford, being, however, given back his estates in 1522, and in 1547
restored in blood by parliament with the title of Baron Stafford, which
became extinct in this line with Roger, 5th Baron in 1640. In that year the
barony of Stafford was granted to William Howard (1614-1680), who after two
months was created Viscount Stafford; he was beheaded in 1680, and his son
was created earl of Stafford in 1688, a title which became extinct in 1762;
but in 1825 the descent to the barony of 1640 was established, to the
satisfaction of the House of Lords, in the person of Sir G.W. Jerningham,
in whose family it then continued.

The chief original authorities for the life of the 2nd duke of Buckingham
are the _Continuation of the Croyland Chronicle_; Sir Thomas More's
_Richard III._; and Fabyan's _Chronicle_. Amongst modern authorities
consult J. Gairdner's _Richard III._; and Sir. J. Ramsay's _Lancaster and
York_.

(C. L. K.)

[1] i.e. in the Stafford line; see above.

BUCKINGHAM, JAMES SILK (1786-1855), English author and traveller, was born
near Falmouth on the 25th of August 1786, the son of a farmer. His youth
was spent at sea. After years of wandering he established in 1818 the
_Calcutta Journal_. This venture at first proved highly successful, but in
1823 the paper's outspoken criticisms of the East India Company led to the
expulsion of Buckingham from India and to the suppression of the paper by
John Adam, the acting governor-general. His case was brought before
parliament, and a pension of L200 a year was subsequently awarded him by
the East India Company as compensation. Buckingham continued his
journalistic ventures on his return to England, and started the _Oriental
Herald_ (1824) and the _Athenaeum_ (1828) which was not a success in his
hands. In parliament, where he sat as member for Sheffield from 1832-1837,
he was a strong advocate of social reform. He was a most voluminous writer.
He had travelled much in Europe, America and the East, and wrote a great
number of useful books of travel. In 1851 the value of these and of his
other literary work was recognized by the grant of a civil list pension of
L200 a year. At the time of his death in London, on the 30th of June 1855,
Buckingham was at work on his autobiography, two volumes of the intended
four being completed and published (1855).

His youngest son, Leicester Silk Buckingham (1825-1867), achieved no little
popularity as a playwright, several of his free adaptations of French
comedies being produced in London between 1860 and 1867.

BUCKINGHAM, a market town and municipal borough and the county town of
Buckinghamshire, England, in the Buckingham parliamentary division, 61 m.
N.W. of London by a branch of the London & North-Western railway. Pop.
(1901) 3152. It lies in an open valley on the upper part of the river Ouse,
which encircles the main portion of the town on three sides. The church of
St Peter and St Paul, which was extensively restored by Sir Gilbert Scott,
a native of this neighbourhood, is of the 18th century, and stands on the
site of the old castle; the town hall dates from the close of the previous
century; and the grammar school was founded by Edward VI., in part
occupying buildings of earlier date, which retain Perpendicular and
Decorated windows, and a Norman door. A chantry, founded in 1268 by Matthew
Stratton, archdeacon of Buckingham, previously occupied the site; the
Norman work may be a remnant of the chapel of a gild of the Holy Trinity.
The manor house is of the early part of the 17th century, and other old
houses remain. The adjacent mansion of Stowe, approached from the town by a
magnificent avenue of elms, and surrounded by gardens very beautifully laid
out, was the seat of the dukes of Buckingham until the extinction of the
title in 1889. Buckingham is served by a branch of the Grand Junction
Canal, and has agricultural trade, manufactures of condensed milk and
artificial manure, maltings and flour-mills; while an old industry survives
to a modified extent in the manufacture of pillow-lace. The borough is
under a mayor, 4 aldermen and 12 councillors. Area, 5006 acres.

Buckingham (Bochingeham, Bukyngham) was an important stronghold in
pre-Conquest times, and in 918 Edward the Elder encamped there with his
army for four weeks, and threw up two forts on either side of the water. At
the time of the Domesday survey there were twenty-six burgesses in
Buckingham, which, together with the hamlet of Bourton, was assessed at one
hide. Although it appears as a borough thus early, the town received no
charter until 1554, when Queen Mary created it a free borough corporate
with a bailiff, twelve principal burgesses and a steward, and defined the
boundaries as extending in width from Dudley bridge to Thornborowe bridge
and in length from Chackmore bridge to Padbury Mill bridge. A charter from
Charles II. in 1684 was very shortly abandoned in favour of the original
grant, which held force until the Municipal Corporations Act of 1835. In
1529 and from 1545 onwards Buckingham returned two members to parliament,
until deprived by the Representation of the People Act of 1867 of one
member, and by the Redistribution of Seats Act of 1885 of the other. Early
mentions occur of markets and fairs, and from 1522, when Henry VIII.
granted to Sir Henry Marney the borough of Buckingham with a Saturday
market and two annual fairs, grants of fairs by various sovereigns were
numerous. Buckingham was formerly an important agricultural centre, and
Edward III. fixed here one of the staples for wool, but after the removal
of these to Calais the trade suffered such decay that in an act of 32 Henry
VIII. Buckingham is mentioned among thirty-six impoverished towns.

BUCKINGHAM AND NORMANBY, JOHN SHEFFIELD, 1ST DUKE OF (1648-1721), English
statesman and poet, was born on [v.04 p.0673] the 7th of April 1648. He was
the son of Edmund, 2nd earl of Mulgrave, and succeeded to that title on his
father's death in 1658. At the age of eighteen he joined the fleet, to
serve in the first Dutch war; on the renewal of hostilities in 1672 he was
present at the battle of Southwold Bay, and in the next year received the
command of a ship. He was also made a colonel of infantry, and served for
some time under Turenne. In 1680 he was put in charge of an expedition sent
to relieve the town of Tangier. It was said that he was provided with a
rotten ship in the hope that he would not return, but the reason of this
abortive plot, if plot there was, is not exactly ascertained. At court he
took the side of the duke of York, and helped to bring about Monmouth's
disgrace. In 1682 he was dismissed from the court, apparently for putting
himself forward as a suitor for the princess Anne, but on the accession of
King James he received a seat in the privy council, and was made lord
chamberlain. He supported James in his most unpopular measures, and stayed
with him in London during the time of his flight. He also protected the
Spanish ambassador from the dangerous anger of the mob. He acquiesced,
however, in the Revolution, and in 1694 was made marquess of Normanby. In
1696 he refused in company with other Tory peers to sign an agreement to
support William as their "rightful and lawful king" against Jacobite
attempts, and was consequently dismissed from the privy council. On the
accession of Anne, with whom he was a personal favourite, he became lord
privy seal and lord-lieutenant of the North Riding of Yorkshire, and in
1703 duke of Buckingham and Normanby. During the predominance of the Whigs
between 1705 and 1710, Buckingham was deprived of his office as lord privy
seal, but in 1710 he was made lord steward, and in 1711 lord president of
the council. After the death of Anne he held no state appointment. He died
on the 24th of February 1721 at his house in St James's Park, which stood
on the site of the present Buckingham Palace. Buckingham was succeeded by
his son, Edmund (1716-1735) on whose death the titles became extinct.

Buckingham, who is better known by his inherited titles as Lord Mulgrave,
was the author of "An Account of the Revolution" and some other essays, and
of numerous poems, among them the _Essay on Poetry_ and the _Essay on
Satire_. It is probable that the _Essay on Satire_, which attacked many
notable persons, "sauntering Charles" amongst others, was circulated in MS.
It was often attributed at the time to Dryden, who accordingly suffered a
thrashing at the hands of Rochester's bravoes for the reflections it
contained upon the earl. Mulgrave was a patron of Dryden, who may possibly
have revised it, but was certainly not responsible, although it is commonly
printed with his works. Mulgrave adapted Shakespeare's _Julius Caesar_,
breaking it up into two plays, _Julius Caesar_ and _Marcus Brutus_. He
introduced choruses between the acts, two of these being written by Pope,
and an incongruous love scene between Brutus and Portia. He was a constant
friend and patron of Pope, who expressed a flattering opinion of his _Essay
on Poetry_. This, although smoothly enough written, deals chiefly with
commonplaces.

In 1721 Edmund Curll published a pirated edition of his works, and was
brought before the bar of the House of Lords for breach of privilege
accordingly. An authorized edition under the superintendence of Pope
appeared in 1723, but the authorities cut out the "Account of the
Revolution" and "The Feast of the Gods" on account of their alleged
Jacobite tendencies. These were printed at the Hague in 1727. Pope
disingenuously repudiated any knowledge of the contents. Other editions
reappeared in 1723, 1726, 1729, 1740 and 1753. His _Poems_ were included in
Johnson's and other editions of the British poets.

BUCKINGHAMSHIRE, EARLS OF. The first earl of Buckinghamshire (to be
distinguished from the earls of Buckingham, _q.v._) was John Hobart (c.
1694-1756), a descendant of Sir Henry Hobart (d. 1625), attorney-general
and chief justice of the common pleas under James I., who was made a
baronet in 1611, and who was the great-grandson of Sir James Hobart (d.
1507), attorney-general to Henry VII. The Hobarts had been settled in
Norfolk and Suffolk for many years, when in 1728 John Hobart, who was a son
of Sir Henry Hobart, the 4th baronet (d. 1698), was created Baron Hobart of
Blickling. In 1740 Hobart became lord-lieutenant of Norfolk and in 1746
earl of Buckinghamshire, his sister, Henrietta Howard, countess of Suffolk,
being the mistress of George II. He died on the 22nd of September 1756, and
was succeeded as 2nd earl[1] by his eldest son John (1723-1793), who was
member of parliament for Norwich and comptroller of the royal household
before his accession to the title. From 1762 to 1766 he was ambassador to
Russia, and from 1776 to 1780 lord-lieutenant of Ireland, but he was hardly
equal to the exceptional difficulties with which he had to deal in the
latter position. He died without sons at Blickling Hall, Norfolk, on the
3rd of August 1793, when his half-brother George (c. 1730-1804), became 3rd
earl. Blickling Hall and his Norfolk estates, however, passed to his
daughter, Henrietta (1762-1805), the wife of William Kerr, afterwards 6th
marquess of Lothian.

Robert Hobart, 4th earl of Buckinghamshire (1760-1816), the eldest son of
the 3rd earl, was born on the 6th of May 1760. He was a soldier, and then a
member of both the English and the Irish Houses of Commons; from 1789 to
1793 he was chief secretary to the lord-lieutenant of Ireland, exerting his
influence in this country to prevent any concessions to the Roman
Catholics. In 1793, being known by the courtesy title of Lord Hobart, he
was sent to Madras as governor, but in 1798, after serious differences
between himself and the governor-general of India, Sir John Shore,
afterwards Lord Teignmouth, he was recalled. Returning to British politics,
Hobart was called up to the House of Lords in 1798 (succeeding to the
earldom of Buckinghamshire in 1804); he favoured the union between England
and Ireland; from March 1801 to May 1804 he was secretary for war and the
colonies (his family name being taken for Hobart Town in Tasmania), and in
1805 he became chancellor of the duchy of Lancaster under Pitt. For a short
time he was joint postmaster-general, and from 1812 until his death on the
4th of February 1816 he was president of the Board of Control, a post for
which his Indian experience had fitted him.

The 4th earl left no sons, and his titles passed to his nephew, George
Robert Hobart (1789-1849), a son of George Vere Hobart (1761-1802),
lieutenant-governor of Grenada. In 1824 the 5th earl inherited the
Buckinghamshire estates of the Hampden family and took the name of Hampden,
his ancestor, Sir John Hobart, 3rd baronet, having married Mary Hampden
about 1655. On his death in February 1849 his brother, Augustus Edward
Hobart (1793-1884), who took the name of Hobart-Hampden in 1878, became 6th
earl. His two sons, Vere Henry, Lord Hobart (1818-1875), governor of Madras
from 1872, and Frederick John Hobart (1821-1875), predeceased him, and when
the 6th earl died he was succeeded by his grandson, Sidney Carr
Hobart-Hampden (b. 1860), who became 7th earl of Buckinghamshire, and who
added to his name that of Mercer-Henderson. Another of the 6th earl's sons
was Augustus Charles Hobart-Hampden, generally known as Hobart Pasha
(_q.v._).

See Lord Hobart's _Essays and Miscellaneous Writings_, edited with
biography by Lady Hobart (1885).

[1] Until 1784, when George Grenville, Earl Temple, was created marquess of
Buckingham, the 2nd earl of Buckinghamshire always signed himself
"Buckingham"; his contemporaries knew him by this name, and hence a certain
amount of confusion has arisen.

BUCKINGHAMSHIRE (abbreviated _Bucks_) a south midland county of England,
bounded N. by Northamptonshire, E. by Bedfordshire, Hertfordshire and
Middlesex, S. for a short distance by Surrey, and by Berkshire, and W. by
Oxfordshire. Its area is 743.2 sq. m. The county is divided between the
basins of the rivers Ouse and Thames. The first in its uppermost course
forms part of the north-western boundary, passes the towns of Buckingham,
Stony Stratford, Wolverton, Newport Pagnell and Olney, and before quitting
the county forms a short stretch of the north-eastern boundary. The
principal tributary it receives within the county is the Ouzel. The Thames
forms the entire southern boundary; and of its tributaries Buckinghamshire
includes the upper part of the Thames. To the north-west of Buckingham, and
both east and west of the Ouzel, the land rises in gentle undulations to a
height of nearly 500 ft., and north of the Thames valley a few nearly
isolated hills stand boldly, such as Brill Hill and Muswell Hill, each over
600 ft., but the hilliest [v.04 p.0674] part of the county is the south,
which is occupied by part of the Chiltern system, the general direction of
which is from south-west to north-east. The crest-line of these hills
crosses the county at its narrowest point, along a line, above the towns of
Prince's Risborough and Wendover, not exceeding 11 m. in length. This line
divides the county into two parts of quite different physical character;
for to the south almost the whole land is hilly (the longer slope of the
Chiltern system lying in this direction), well wooded, and pleasantly
diversified with narrow vales. The chief of these are watered by the Wye,
Misbourne and Chess streams. The beech tree is predominant in the woods, in
so much that William Camden, writing c. 1585, supposed the county to take
name from this feature (A.S. _boc_, beech). In the south a remnant of
ancient forest is preserved as public ground under the name of Burnham
Beeches. The Chilterns reach a height of nearly 900 ft. within the county.

_Geology._--The northern half of the county is occupied by Jurassic strata,
in the southern half Cretaceous rocks predominate except in the
south-eastern corner, where they are covered by Tertiary beds. Thus the
oldest rocks are in the north, succeeded continuously by younger strata to
the south; the general dip of all the rocks is south-easterly. A few
patches of Upper Lias Clay appear near the northern boundary near Grafton
Regis and Castle Thorpe, and again in the valley of the Ouse near Stoke
Goldington and Weston Underwood. The Oolitic series is represented by the
Great Oolite, with limestones in the upper part, much quarried for building
stones at Westbury, Thornborough, Brock, Whittlewood Forest, &c.; the lower
portions are more argillaceous. The Forest Marble is seen about Thornton as
a thin bed of clay with an oyster-bearing limestone at the base. Next above
is the Cornbrash, a series of rubbly and occasionally hard limestones and
thin clays. The outcrop runs by Tingwick, Buckingham, Berehampton and
Newport Pagnell, it is quarried at Wolverton and elsewhere for road metal.
Inliers of these rocks occur at Marsh Gibbon and Stan Hill. The Oxford Clay
and Kimmeridge Clay, with the Gault, lie in the vale of Aylesbury. The clay
is covered by numerous outliers of Portland, Purbeck and Lower Greensand
beds. The Portland beds are sandy below, calcareous above; the outcrop
follows the normal direction in the county, from south-west to north-east,
from Thame through Aylesbury; they are quarried at several places for
building stone and fossils are abundant. The Hartwell Clay is in the Lower
Portland. Freshwater Purbeck beds lie below the Portland and Lower
Greensand beds; they cap the ridge between Oving and Whitchurch.
Glass-making sands have been worked from the Lower Greensand at Hartwell,
and phosphatic nodules from the same beds at Brickhill as well as from the
Gault at Towersey. A broad band of Gault, a bluish clay, extends from
Towersey across the county in a north-easterly direction. Resting upon the
Gault is the Upper Greensand; at the junction of the two formations
numerous springs arise, a circumstance which has no doubt determined the
site of several villages. The Chalk rises abruptly from the low lying
argillaceous plain to form the Chiltern Hills. The form of the whole of the
hilly district round Chesham, High Wycombe and the Chalfonts is determined
by the Chalk. Reading beds, mottled clays and sands, repose upon the Chalk
at Woburn, Barnham, Fulmer and Denham, and these are in turn covered by the
London Clay, which is exposed on the slopes about Stoke Common and Iver.
Between the Tertiary-capped Chalk plateau and the Thames, a gentler slope,
covered with alluvial gravel and brick earth, reaches down to the river.
Thick deposits of plateau gravel cover most of the high ground in the
southern corner of the county, while much of the northern part is obscured
by glacial clays and gravels.

_Industries._--The agricultural capacities of the soil vary greatly in
different localities. On the lower lands, especially in the Vale of
Aylesbury, about the headwaters of the Thame, it is extremely fertile;
while on the hills it is usually poor and thin. The proportion of
cultivated land is high, being about 83% of the whole. Of this a large and
growing portion is in permanent pasture; cattle and sheep being reared in
great numbers for the London markets, to which also are sent quantities of
ducks, for which the district round Aylesbury is famous. Wheat and oats are
the principal grain crops, though both decrease in importance. Turnips and
swedes for the cattle are the chief green crops; and dairy-farming is
largely practised. There is no general manufacturing industry, but a
considerable amount of lace-making and straw-plaiting is carried on
locally; and at High Wycombe and in its neighbourhood there is a thriving
trade in various articles of turnery, such as chairs and bowls, from beech
and other hard woods. The introduction of lace-making in this and
neighbouring counties is attributed to Flemish, and later to French
immigrants, but also to Catharine of Aragon during her residence (c. 1532)
at Ampthill. Down to the later part of the 19th century a general holiday
celebrated by lace-makers on the 25th of November was known as "Cattarn's
Day."

_Communications._--The main line of the London & North-Western railway
crosses the north-east part of the county. Bletchley is an important
junction on this system, branches diverging east to Fenny Stratford,
Bedford and Cambridge, and west to Oxford and Banbury, Buckingham being
served by the western branch. There is also a branch from Cheddington to
Aylesbury. The Metropolitan-Great Central joint line serves Amersham,
Chesham (by a branch), and Aylesbury, joining the North-Western Oxford
branch at Verney Junction; this line is used by the Great Central railway,
the main line of which continues north-westward from Quainton Road. A light
railway connects this station with the large village of Brill to the
south-west. The Great Central and the Great Western companies jointly own a
line passing through Beaconsfield, High Wycombe, and Prince's Risborough,
which is connected northward with the Great Central system. Before the
opening of this line in 1906 the Great Western branch from Maidenhead to
Oxford was the only line serving High Wycombe and Prince's Risborough, from
which there are branches to Watlington and Aylesbury. The main line of this
company crosses the extreme south of the county by Slough and Taplow. The
Grand Junction Canal, reaching the valley of the Ouse by way of the Ouzel
valley from the south, has branches to Aylesbury and to Buckingham. Except
the Thames none of the rivers in the county is continuously navigable.

Bletchley is an important junction on this system, branches diverging east
to Fenny Stratford, Bedford and Cambridge, and west to Oxford and Banbury,
Buckingham being served by the western branch. There is also a branch from
Cheddington to Aylesbury. The Metropolitan-Great Central joint line serves
Amersham, Chesham (by a branch), and Aylesbury, joining the North-Western
Oxford branch at Verney Junction; this line is used by the Great Central
railway, the main line of which continues north-westward from Quainton
Road. A light railway connects this station with the large village of Brill
to the south-west. The Great Central and the Great Western companies
jointly own a line passing through Beaconsfield, High Wycombe. and Prince's
Risborough, which is connected northward with the Great Central system.
Before the opening of this line in 1906 the Great Western branch from
Maidenhead to Oxford was the only line serving High Wycombe and Prince's
Risborough, from which there are branches to Watlington and Aylesbury. The
main line of this company crosses the extreme south of the county by Slough
and Taplow. The Grand Junction Canal, reaching the valley of the Ouse by
way of the Ouzel valley from the south, has branches to Aylesbury and to
Buckingham. Except the Thames none of the rivers in the county is
continuously navigable.

_Population and Administration._--The area of the ancient county is 475,682
acres, with a population in 1891 of 185,284, and in 1901 of 195,764. The
area of the administrative county is 479,358 acres. The county contains
eight hundreds, of which three, namely Stoke, Burnham and Desborough, form
the "Chiltern Hundreds" (_q.v._). The hundred of Aylesbury retains its
ancient designation of the "three hundreds of Aylesbury." The municipal
boroughs are Buckingham, the county town (pop. 3152), and Wycombe,
officially Chepping Wycombe, also Chipping or High Wycombe (15,542). The
other urban districts are Aylesbury (9243), Beaconsfield (1570), Chesham
(7245), Eton (3301), Fenny Stratford (4799), Linslade, on the Ouzel
opposite to Leighton Buzzard in Bedfordshire (2157), Marlow (4526), Newport
Pagnell (4028), Slough (11,453). Among the lesser market towns may be
mentioned Amersham (2674), Ivinghoe (808), Olney (2684), Prince's
Risborough (2189), Stony Stratford (2353), Wendover (2009) and Winslow
(1703). At Wolverton (5323) are the carriage works of the London &
North-Western railway. Several of the villages on and near the banks of the
Thames have become centres of residence, such as Taplow, Cookham and Bourne
End, Burnham and Wooburn. Buckinghamshire is in the midland circuit, and
assizes are held at Aylesbury. It has one court of quarter sessions, and is
divided into thirteen petty sessional divisions. The boroughs of Buckingham
and Wycombe have separate commissions of the peace. The administrative
county contains 230 civil parishes. Buckinghamshire is almost entirely
within the diocese of Oxford, and 215 ecclesiastical parishes are situated
wholly or in part within it. There are three parliamentary divisions,
Northern or Buckingham, Mid or Aylesbury, and Southern or Wycombe, each
returning one member; and the county contains a small part of the
parliamentary borough of Windsor (chiefly in Berkshire). The most notable
institution within the county is Eton College, the famous public school
founded by Henry VI.

_History._--The district which was to become Buckinghamshire was reached by
the West Saxons in 571, as by a series of victories they pushed their way
north along the Thames valley. With the grouping of the settlements into
kingdoms and the consolidation of Mercia under Offa, Buckinghamshire was
included in Mercia until, with the submission of that kingdom to the
Northmen, it became part of the Danelaw. In the 10th century
Buckinghamshire suffered frequently from the ravages of the Danes, and
numerous barrows and earthworks mark the scenes [v.04 p.0675] of struggles
against the invaders. These relics are especially abundant in the vale of
Aylesbury, probably at this time one of the richest and best protected of
the Saxon settlements. The Chiltern district, on the other hand, is said to
have been an impassable forest infested by hordes of robbers and wild
beasts. In the reign of Edward the Confessor, Leofstan, 12th abbot of St
Albans, cut down large tracts of wood in this district and granted the
manor of Hamstead (Herts) to a valiant knight and two fellow-soldiers on
condition that they should check the depredations of the robbers. The same
reason led at an early period to the appointment of a steward of the
Chiltern Hundreds, and this office being continued long after the necessity
for it had ceased to exist, gradually became the sinecure it is to-day. The
district was not finally disforested until the reign of James I.

At the time of the Norman invasion Buckinghamshire was probably included in
the earldom of Leofwine, son of Godwin, and the support which it lent him
at the battle of Hastings was punished by sweeping confiscations after the
Conquest. The proximity of Buckinghamshire to London caused it to be
involved in most of the great national events of the ensuing centuries.
During the war between King John and his barons William Mauduit held
Hanslape Castle against the king, until in 1216 it was captured and
demolished by Falkes de Breaute. The county was visited severely by the
Black Death, and Winslow was one of many districts which were almost
entirely depopulated. In the civil war Buckinghamshire was one of the first
counties to join in an association for mutual defence on the side of the
parliament, which had important garrisons at Aylesbury, Brill and
elsewhere. Newport Pagnell was for a short time garrisoned by the royalist
troops, and in 1644 the king fixed his headquarters at Buckingham.

The shire of Buckingham originated with the division of Mercia in the reign
of Edward the Elder, and was probably formed by the aggregation of
pre-existing hundreds round the county town, a fact which explains the
curious irregularities of the boundary line. The eighteen hundreds of the
Domesday survey have now been reduced to eight, of which the three Chiltern
hundreds, Desborough, Burnham and Stoke, are unaltered in extent as well as
in name. The remainder have been formed each by the union of three of the
ancient hundreds, and Aylesbury is still designated "the three hundreds of
Aylesbury." All, except Newport and Buckingham, retain the names of
Domesday hundreds, and the shire has altered little on its outer lines
since the survey. Until the time of Queen Elizabeth Buckinghamshire and
Bedfordshire had a common sheriff. The shire court of the former county was
held at Aylesbury.

The ecclesiastical history of Buckinghamshire is not easy to trace, as
there is no local chronicler, but the earliest churches were probably
subject to the West Saxon see of Dorchester, and when after the Conquest
the bishop's stool was transferred to Lincoln no change of jurisdiction
ensued. After the dissolution of the monasteries it was proposed to form a
new diocese to include Bedfordshire and Buckinghamshire, but the project
was abandoned, and both remained in the Lincoln diocese until 1837, when
the latter was transferred to Oxford. The arch-deaconry was probably
founded towards the close of the 11th century by Bishop Remy, and the
subdivision into rural deaneries followed shortly after. A dean of
Thornborough is mentioned in the 12th century, and in the taxation of
Nicholas IV. eight deaneries are given, comprising 186 parishes. In 1855
the deaneries were reconstructed and made eighteen in number.

On the redistribution of estates after the Conquest only two Englishmen
continued to retain estates of any importance, and the chief landowners at
this date were Walter Giffard, first earl of Buckingham, and Odo, bishop of
Bayeux. Few of the great Buckinghamshire estates, however, remained with
the same proprietors for any length of time. Many became annexed by
religious establishments, while others reverted to the crown and were
disposed of by various grants. The family of Hampden alone claim to have
held the estate from which the name is derived in an unbroken line from
Saxon times.

Buckinghamshire has always ranked as an agricultural rather than a
manufacturing county, and has long been famed for its corn and cattle.
Fuller mentions the vale of Aylesbury as producing the biggest bodied sheep
in England, and "Buckinghamshire bread and beef" is an old proverb.
Lace-making, first introduced into this county by the Fleming refugees from
the Alva persecution, became a very profitable industry. The monopolies of
James I. considerably injured this trade, and in 1623 a petition was
addressed to the high sheriff of Buckinghamshire representing the distress
of the people owing to the decay of bone lace-making. Newport Pagnell and
Olney were especially famous for their lace, and the parish of Hanslape is
said to have made an annual profit of L8000 to L9000 from lace manufacture.
The straw-plait industry was introduced in the reign of George I., and
formerly gave employment to a large number of the population.

The county was first represented in parliament by two members in 1290. The
representation increased as the towns acquired representative rights, until
in 1603 the county with its boroughs made a total return of fourteen
members. By the Reform Act of 1832 this was reduced to eleven, and by the
Redistribution of Seats Act of 1885 the boroughs were deprived of
representation and the county returned three members for three divisions.

_Antiquities._--Buckinghamshire contains no ecclesiastical buildings of the
first rank. Monastic remains are scanty, but two former abbeys may be
noted. At Medmenham, on the Thames above Marlow, there are fragments,
incorporated into a residence, of a Cistercian abbey founded in 1201; which
became notorious in the middle of the 18th century as the meeting-place of
a convivial club called the "Franciscans" after its founder, Sir Francis
Dashwood, afterwards Lord le Despencer (1708-1781), and also known as the
"Hell-Fire Club," of which John Wilkes, Bubb Dodington and other political
notorieties were members. The motto of the club, _fay ce que voudras_ (do
what you will), inscribed on a doorway at the abbey, was borrowed from
Rabelais' description of the abbey of Thelema in _Gargantua_. The remains
of the Augustinian Notley Abbey (1162), incorporated with a farm-house,
deserve mention rather for their picturesque situation by the river Thame
than for their architectural value. Turning to churches, there is
workmanship considered to be of pre-Norman date in Wing church, in the
neighbourhood of Leighton Buzzard, including a polygonal apse and crypt.
Stewkley church, in the same locality, shows the finest Norman work in the
county; the building is almost wholly of the later part of this period, and
the ornamentation is very rich. The Early English work of Chetwode and
Haddenham churches, both in the west of the county, is noteworthy;
especially in the first, which, as it stands, is the eastern part of a
priory church of Augustinians (1244). Good specimens of the Decorated style
are not wanting, though none is of special note; but the county contains
three fine examples of Perpendicular architecture in Eton College chapel
and the churches of Maids Moreton to the north, and Hillesden to the south,
of Buckingham. Ancient domestic architecture is chiefly confined to a few
country houses, of which Chequers Court, dating from the close of the 16th
century, is of interest not only from the architectural standpoint but from
its beautiful situation high among the Chiltern Hills between Prince's
Risborough and Wendover, and from a remarkable collection of relics of
Oliver Cromwell, preserved here as a consequence of the marriage, in 1664,
of John Russell, a grandson of the Protector, into the family to which the
house then belonged. The manor-house of Hampden, among the hills east of
Prince's Risborough, was for many generations the abode of the family of
that name, and is still in the possession of descendants of John Hampden,
who fell at the battle of Chalgrove in 1643, and is buried in Hampden
church. Fine county seats are numerous--there may be mentioned Stowe
(Buckingham), formerly the seat of the dukes of Buckingham; Cliveden and
Hedsor, two among the many beautifully situated mansions by the bank of the
Thames; and Claydon House in the west of the county. Among the Chiltern
Hills, also, there are several [v.04 p.0676] splendid domains. Associations
with eminent men have given a high fame to several towns or villages of
Buckinghamshire. Such are the connexion of Beaconsfield with Edmund Waller
and Edmund Burke, that of Hughenden near Wycombe with Benjamin Disraeli,
Lord Beaconsfield, whose father's residence was at Bradenham; of Olney and
Stoke Pogis with the poets Cowper and Gray respectively. At Chalfont St
Giles a cottage still stands in which Milton completed _Paradise Lost_ and
began _Paradise Regained_. In earlier life he had lived and worked at
Horton, near the Thames below Windsor.

AUTHORITIES.--The original standard history is the laborious work of G.
Lipscomb, _History and Antiquities of the County of Buckingham_ (London,
1831-1847). Other works are: Browne Willis, _History and Antiquities of the
Town, Hundred, and Deanery of Buckingham_ (London, 1755); D. and S. Lysons,
_Magna Britannia_, vol. i.; R. Gibbs, _Buckingham_ (Aylesbury, 1878-1882);
_Worthies of Buckingham_ (Aylesbury, 1886); and _Buckingham Miscellany_
(Aylesbury, 1891); G.S. Roscoe, _Buckingham Sketches_ (London, 1891); P.H.
Ditchfield, _Memorials of Old Buckinghamshire_ (London, 1901); _Victoria
County History_, "Buckinghamshire."

BUCKLAND, FRANCIS TREVELYAN (1826-1880), English zoologist, son of Dean
William Buckland the geologist, was born at Oxford on the 17th of December
1826. He was educated at Winchester and Christ Church, taking his degree in
1848, and then adopted the medical profession, studying at St George's
hospital, London, where he became house-surgeon in 1852. The pursuit of
anatomy led him to a good deal of out-of-the-way research in zoology, and
in 1856 he became a regular writer on natural history for the newly
established _Field_, particularly on the subject of fish. In 1866 he
started _Land and Water_ on similar lines. In 1867 he was appointed
government inspector of fisheries, and in the course of his work travelled
constantly about the country, being largely responsible for the increased
attention paid to the scientific side of pisciculture. Among his
publications, besides articles and official reports, were _Fish Hatching_
(1863), _Curiosities of Natural History_ (4 vols., 1857-1872), _Logbook of
a Fisherman_ (1875), _Natural History of British Fishes_ (1881). He died on
the 19th of December 1880.

See _Life_ by G.C. Bompas (1885).

BUCKLAND, WILLIAM (1784-1856), English divine and geologist, eldest son of
the Rev. Charles Buckland, rector of Templeton and Trusham, in Devon, was
born at Axminster on the 12th of March 1784. He was educated at the grammar
school of Tiverton, and at Winchester, and in 1801 was elected a scholar of
Corpus Christi College, Oxford, becoming B.A. in 1804. In 1809 he was
elected a fellow of his college, and was admitted into holy orders. From
early boyhood he had exhibited a strong taste for natural science, which
was subsequently stimulated by the lectures of Dr John Kidd on mineralogy
and chemistry; and his attention was especially drawn to the then infant
science of geology. He also attended the lectures of Sir Christopher Pegge
(1765-1822) on anatomy. He now devoted himself systematically to an
examination of the geological structure of Great Britain, making
excursions, and investigating the order of superposition of the strata and
the characters of the organic remains which they contained. In 1813, on the
resignation of Dr Kidd, he was appointed reader in mineralogy in Oxford;
and the interest excited by his lectures was so great that in 1819 a
readership in geology was founded and especially endowed by the treasury,
Dr Buckland being the first holder of the new appointment. In 1818 Dr
Buckland was elected a fellow of the Royal Society, and in 1824 and again
in 1840 he was chosen president of the Geological Society of London. In
1825 he was presented by his college to the living of Stoke Charity, near
Whitchurch, Hants, and in the same year he was appointed by Lord Liverpool
to a canonry of the cathedral of Christ Church, Oxford, when the degree of
D.D. was conferred upon him. In 1825, also, he married Mary, the eldest
daughter of Mr Benjamin Morland of Sheepstead House, near Abingdon, Berks,
by whose abilities and excellent judgment he was materially assisted in his
literary labours. In 1832 he presided over the second meeting of the
British Association, which was then held at Oxford. In 1845 he was
appointed by Sir Robert Peel to the vacant deanery of Westminster, and was
soon after inducted to the living of Islip, near Oxford, a preferment
attached to the deanery. In 1847 he was appointed a trustee in the British
Museum; and in 1848 he was awarded the Wollaston medal by the Geological
Society of London. In 1849 his health began to give way under the
increasing pressure of his multifarious duties; and the later years of his
life were overshadowed by a serious illness, which compelled him to live in
retirement. He died on the 24th of August 1856, and was buried in a spot
which he had himself chosen, in Islip churchyard.

Buckland was a man many-sided in his abilities, and of a singularly wide
range of attainments. Apart from his published works and memoirs in
connexion with the special department of geology, and in addition to the
work entailed upon him by the positions which he at different times held in
the Church of England, he entered with great enthusiasm into many practical
questions connected with agricultural and sanitary science, and various
social and even medical problems. As a teacher he possessed powers of the
highest order; and the university of Oxford is enriched by the large and
valuable private collections, illustrative of geology and mineralogy, which
he amassed in the course of his active life. It is, however, upon his
published scientific works that Dr Buckland's great reputation is mainly
based. His first great work was the well-known _Reliquiae Diluvianae, or
Observations on the Organic Remains contained in caves, fissures, and
diluvial gravel attesting the Action of a Universal Deluge_, published in
1823 (2nd ed. 1824), in which he supplemented his former observations on
the remains of extinct animals discovered in the cavern of Kirkdale in
Yorkshire, and expounded his views as to the bearing of these and similar
cases on the Biblical account of the Deluge. Thirteen years after the
publication of the _Reliquiae_, Dr Buckland w as called upon, in accordance
with the will of the earl of Bridgewater, to write one of the series of
works known as the _Bridgewater Treatises_. The design of these treatises
was to exhibit the "power, wisdom, and goodness of God, as manifested in
the Creation," and none of them was of greater value, as evinced by its
vitality, than that on "Geology and Mineralogy." Originally published in
1836, it has gone through three editions, and though not a "manual" of
geological science, it still possesses high value as a storehouse of
geological and palaeontological facts bearing upon the particular argument
which it was designed to illustrate. The third edition, issued in 1858, was
edited by his son Francis T. Buckland, and is accompanied by a memoir of
the author and a list of his publications.

Of Dr Buckland's numerous original contributions to the sciences of Geology
and Palaeontology, the following may be mentioned:--(1) "On the Structure
of the Alps and adjoining parts of the Continent, and their relation to the
Secondary and Transition Rocks of England" (_Annals of Phil._, 1821); (2)
"Account of an Assemblage of Fossil Teeth and Bones of Elephant,
Rhinoceros, Hippopotamus, &c., discovered in a cave at Kirkdale in
Yorkshire in the year 1821" (_Phil. Trans._); (3) "On the Quartz Rock of
the Lickey Hill in Worcestershire" (_Trans. Geol. Soc._); (4) "On the
Megalosaurus or Great Fossil Lizard of Stonesfield" (Ibid.); (5) "On the
Cycadeoideae, a Family of Plants found in the Oolite Quarries of the Isle
of Portland" (Ibid.); (6) "On the Discovery of a New Species of
Pterodactyle in the Lias of Lyme Regis" (Ibid.); (7) "On the Discovery of
Coprolites or Fossil Faeces in the Lias of Lyme Regis, and in other
Formations" (Ibid.); (8) "On the Evidences of Glaciers in Scotland and the
North of England" (_Proc. Geol. Soc. Lond._); (9) "On the South-Western
Coal District of England" (joint paper with the Rev. W.D. Conybeare,
_Trans. Geol. Soc. Lond._); (10) "On the Geology of the neighbourhood of
Weymouth, and the adjacent parts of the Coast of Dorset" (joint paper with
Sir H. De la Beche, _Trans. Geol. Soc. Lond._).

With regard to the Glacial theory propounded by Agassiz, no one welcomed it
with greater ardour than Buckland, and he zealously sought to trace out
evidences of former glaciation in Britain. A record of the interesting
discussion which took place at the Geological Society's meeting in London
in November 1840, [v.04 p.0677] after the reading of a paper by Buckland,
was printed in the _Midland Naturalist_, October 1883.

BUCKLE, HENRY THOMAS (1821-1862), English historian, author of the _History
of Civilization_, the son of Thomas Henry Buckle, a wealthy London
merchant, was born at Lee, in Kent, on the 24th of November 1821. Owing to
his delicate health he was only a very short time at school, and never at
college, but the love of reading having been early awakened in him, he was
allowed ample means of gratifying it. He gained his first distinctions not
in literature but in chess, being reputed, before he was twenty, one of the
first players in the world. After his father's death in January 1840 he
spent some time with his mother on the continent (1840-1844). He had by
that time formed the resolution to direct all his reading and to devote all
his energies to the preparation of some great historical work, and during
the next seventeen years he bestowed ten hours each day in working out his
purpose. At first he contemplated a history of the middle ages, but by 1851
he had decided in favour of a history of civilization. The six years which
followed were occupied in writing and rewriting, altering and revising the
first volume, which appeared in June 1857. It at once made its author a
literary and even social celebrity,--the lion of a London season. On the
1st of March 1858 he delivered at the Royal Institution a public lecture
(the only one he ever gave) on the _Influence of Women on the Progress of
Knowledge_, which was published in _Fraser's Magazine_ for April 1858, and
reprinted in the first volume of the _Miscellaneous and Posthumous Works_.
On the 1st of April 1859 a crushing and desolating affliction fell upon him
in the death of his mother. It was under the immediate impression of his
loss that he concluded a review he was writing of J.S. Mill's _Essay on
Liberty_ with an argument for immortality, based on the yearning of the
affections to regain communion with the beloved dead,--on the impossibility
of standing up and living, if we believed the separation were final. The
argument is a strange one to have been used by a man who had maintained so
strongly that "we have the testimony of all history to prove the extreme
fallibility of consciousness." The review appeared in _Fraser's Magazine_,
May 1859, and is to be found also in the _Miscellaneous and Posthumous
Works_ (1872). The second volume of his history was published in May 1861.
Soon after he left England for the East, in order to recruit his spirits
and restore his health. From the end of October 1861 to the beginning of
March 1862 was spent by him in Egypt, from which he went over the desert of
Sinai and of Edom to Syria, reaching Jerusalem on the 19th of April 1862.
After staying there eleven days, he set out for Europe by Beyrout, but at
Nazareth he was attacked by fever; and he died at Damascus on the 29th of
May 1862.

Buckle's fame, which must rest wholly on his _History of Civilization in
England_, is no longer what it was in the decade following his death. His
_History_ is a gigantic unfinished introduction, of which the plan was,
first to state the general principles of the author's method and the
general laws which govern the course of human progress; and secondly, to
exemplify these principles and laws through the histories of certain
nations characterized by prominent and peculiar features,--Spain and
Scotland, the United States and Germany. Its chief ideas are--(1) That,
owing partly to the want of ability in historians, and partly to the
complexity of social phenomena, extremely little had as yet been done
towards discovering the principles which govern the character and destiny
of nations, or, in other words, towards establishing a science of history;
(2) That, while the theological dogma of predestination is a barren
hypothesis beyond the province of knowledge, and the metaphysical dogma of
free will rests on an erroneous belief in the infallibility of
consciousness, it is proved by science, and especially by statistics, that
human actions are governed by laws as fixed and regular as those which rule
in the physical world; (3) That climate, soil, food, and the aspects of
nature are the primary causes of intellectual progress,--the first three
indirectly, through determining the accumulation and distribution of
wealth, and the last by directly influencing the accumulation and
distribution of thought, the imagination being stimulated and the
understanding subdued when the phenomena of the external world are sublime
and terrible, the understanding being emboldened and the imagination curbed
when they are small and feeble; (4) That the great division between
European and non-European civilization turns on the fact that in Europe man
is stronger than nature, and that elsewhere nature is stronger than man,
the consequence of which is that in Europe alone has man subdued nature to
his service; (5) That the advance of European civilization is characterized
by a continually diminishing influence of physical laws, and a continually
increasing influence of mental laws; (6) That the mental laws which
regulate the progress of society cannot be discovered by the metaphysical
method, that is, by the introspective study of the individual mind, but
only by such a comprehensive survey of facts as will enable us to eliminate
disturbances, that is, by the method of averages; (7) That human progress
has been due, not to moral agencies, which are stationary, and which
balance one another in such a manner that their influence is unfelt over
any long period, but to intellectual activity, which has been constantly
varying and advancing:--"The actions of individuals are greatly affected by
their moral feelings and passions; but these being antagonistic to the
passions and feelings of other individuals, are balanced by them, so that
their effect is, in the great average of human affairs, nowhere to be seen,
and the total actions of mankind, considered as a whole, are left to be
regulated by the total knowledge of which mankind is possessed"; (8) That
individual efforts are insignificant in the great mass of human affairs,
and that great men, although they exist, and must "at present" be looked
upon as disturbing forces, are merely the creatures of the age to which
they belong; (9) That religion, literature and government are, at the best,
the products and not the causes of civilization; (10) That the progress of
civilization varies directly as "scepticism," the disposition to doubt and
to investigate, and inversely as "credulity" or "the protective spirit," a
disposition to maintain, without examination, established beliefs and
practices.

Unfortunately Buckle either could not define, or cared not to define, the
general conceptions with which he worked, such as those denoted by the
terms "civilization," "history," "science," "law," "scepticism," and
"protective spirit"; the consequence is that his arguments are often
fallacies. Moreover, the looseness of his statements and the rashness of
his inferences regarding statistical averages make him, as a great
authority has remarked, the _enfant terrible_ of moral statisticians. He
brought a vast amount of information from the most varied and distant
sources to confirm his opinions, and the abundance of his materials never
perplexed or burdened him in his argumentation, but examples of
well-conducted historical argument are rare in his pages. He sometimes
altered and contorted the facts; he very often unduly simplified his
problems; he was very apt when he had proved a favourite opinion true to
infer it to be the whole truth. On the other hand, many of his ideas have
passed into the common literary stock, and have been more precisely
elaborated by later writers on sociology and history; and though his own
work is now somewhat neglected, its influence was immensely valuable in
provoking further research and speculation.

See his _Life_ by A.W. Huth (1880).

BUCKNER, SIMON BOLIVAR (1823- ), American soldier and political leader, was
born in Hart county, Kentucky, on the 1st of April 1823. He graduated at
West Point in 1844, and was assistant professor of geography, history and
ethics there in 1845-1846. He fought in several battles of the Mexican War,
received the brevet of first lieutenant for gallantry at Churubusco, where
he was wounded, and later, after the storming of Chapultepec, received the
brevet of captain. In 1848-1850 he was assistant instructor of infantry
tactics at West Point. During the succeeding five years he was in the
recruiting service, on frontier duty, and finally in the subsistence
department. He resigned from the army in March 1855. During the futile
attempt of Governor Beriah Magoffin to maintain Kentucky in a position of
neutrality, he was commander of the state [v.04 p.0678] guard; but in
September 1861, after the entry of Union forces into the state, he openly
espoused the Confederate cause and was commissioned brigadier-general,
later becoming lieutenant-general. He was third in command of Fort Donelson
at the time of General Grant's attack (February 1862), and it fell to him,
after the escape of Generals Floyd and Pillow, to surrender the post with
its large garrison and valuable supplies. General Buckner was exchanged in
August of the same year, and subsequently served under General Bragg in the
invasion of Kentucky and the campaign of Chickamauga. He was governor of
Kentucky in 1887-1891, was a member of the Kentucky constitutional
convention of 1890, and in 1896 was the candidate of the National or "Gold"
Democrats for vice-president of the United States.

BUCKRAM (a word common, in various early forms, to many European languages,
as in the Fr. _bouqueran_ or Ital. _bucherame_, the derivation of which is
unknown), in early usage the name of a fine linen or cotton cloth, but now
only of a coarse fabric of linen or cotton stiffened with glue or other
substances, used for linings of clothes and in bookbinding. Falstaff's "men
in buckram" (Shakespeare, _Henry IV._, pt. i. II. 4) has become a
proverbial phrase for any imaginary persons.

BUCKSTONE, JOHN BALDWIN (1802-1879), English actor and dramatic writer, was
born at Hoxton on the 14th of September 1802. He was articled to a
solicitor, but soon exchanged the law for the stage. After some years as a
provincial actor he made his first London appearance, on the 30th of
January 1823, at the Surrey theatre, as Ramsay in the _Fortunes of Nigel_.
His success led to his engagement in 1827 at the Adelphi, where he remained
as leading low comedian until 1833. At the Haymarket, which he joined for
summer seasons in 1833, and of which he was lessee from 1853 to 1878, he
appeared as Bobby Trot in his own _Luke the Labourer_; and here were
produced a number of his plays and farces, _Ellen Wareham, Uncle Tom_ and
others. After his return from a visit to the United States in 1840 he
played at several London theatres, among them the Lyceum, where he was Box
at the first representation of _Box and Cox_. As manager of the Haymarket
he surrounded himself with an admirable company, including Sothern and the
Kendals. He produced the plays of Gilbert, Planche, Tom Taylor and
Robertson, as well as his own, and in most of these he acted. He died on
the 31st of October 1879. He was the author of 150 plays, some of which
have been very popular. His daughter, Lucy Isabella Buckstone (1858-1893),
was an actress, who made her first London appearance at the Haymarket
theatre as Ada Ingot in _David Garrick_ in 1875.

BUCKTHORN, known botanically as _Rhamnus cathartica_ (natural order
Rhamnaceae), a much-branched shrub reaching 10 ft. in height, with a
blackish bark, spinous branchlets, and ovate, sharply-serrated leaves, 1 to
2 in. long, arranged several together at the ends of the shoots. The small
green flowers are regular and have the parts in fours; male and female
flowers are borne on different plants. The fruit is succulent, black and
globose, and contains four stones. The plant is a native of England,
occurring in woods and thickets chiefly on the chalk; it is rare in Ireland
and not wild in Scotland. It is native in Europe, north Africa and north
Asia, and naturalized in some parts of eastern North America. The fruit has
strong purgative properties, and the bark yields a yellow dye.

An allied species, _Rhamnus Frangula_, is also common in England, and is
known as berry-bearing or black alder. It is distinguished from buckthorn
by the absence of spiny branchlets, its non-serrated leaves, and bisexual
flowers with parts in fives. The fruits are purgative and yield a green dye
when unripe. The soft porous wood, called black dogwood, is used for
gunpowder. Dyes are obtained from fruits and bark of other species of
_Rhamnus_, such as _R. infectoria_, _R. tinctoria_ and _R. davurica_--the
two latter yielding the China green of commerce. Several varieties of _R.
Alaternus_, a Mediterranean species, are grown in shrubberies.

Sea-buckthorn is _Hippophae rhamnoides_, a willow-like shrub, 1 to 8 ft. in
height, with narrow leaves silvery on the underside, and globose
orange-yellow fruits one-third of an inch in diameter. It occurs on sandy
seashores from York to Kent and Sussex, but is not common.

American buckthorns are: _Rhamnus purshiana_ or _Cascara sagrada_, of the
Pacific coast, producing cascara bark, and _R. Caroliniana_, the
alder-buckthorn. _Bumelia lycioides_ (or _lanuginosa_) is popularly called
"southern buckthorn."

BUCKWHEAT, the fruit (so-called seeds) of _Fagopyrum esculentum_ (natural
order Polygonaceae), a herbaceous plant, native of central Asia, but
cultivated in Europe and North America; also extensively cultivated in the
Himalaya, as well as an allied species _F. tataricum_. The fruit has a dark
brown tough rind enclosing the kernel or seed, and is three-sided in form,
with sharp angles, similar in shape to beech-mast, whence the name from the
Ger. _Buchweizen_, beechwheat. Buckwheat is grown in Great Britain only to
supply food for pheasants and to feed poultry, which devour the seeds with
avidity. In the northern countries of Europe, however, the seeds are
employed as human food, chiefly in the form of cakes, which when baked thin
have an agreeable taste, with a darkish somewhat violet colour. The meal of
buckwheat is also baked into crumpets, as a favourite dainty among Dutch
children, and in the Russian army buckwheat groats are served out as part
of the soldiers' rations, which they cook with butter, tallow or hemp-seed
oil. Buckwheat is also used as food in the United States, where "buckwheat
cakes" are a national dish; and by the Hindus it is eaten on "bart" or fast
days, being one of the phalahas, or lawful foods for such occasions. When
it is used as food for cattle the hard sharp angular rind must first be
removed. As compared with the principal cereal grains, buckwheat is poor in
nitrogenous substances and fat; but the rapidity and ease with which it can
be grown render it a fit crop for very poor, badly tilled land. An immense
quantity of buckwheat honey is collected in Russia, bees showing a marked
preference for the flowers of the plant. The plant is also used as a green
fodder.

In the United States buckwheat is sown at the end of June or beginning of
July, the amount of seed varying from 3 to 5 pecks to the acre. The crop
matures rapidly and continues blooming till frosts set in, so that at
harvest, which is usually set to occur just before this period, the grain
is in various stages of ripeness. It is cut by hand or with the
self-delivery reaper, and allowed to lie in the swath for a few days and
then set up in shocks. The stalks are not tied into bundles as in the case
of other grain crops, the tops of the shocks being bound round and held
together by twisting stems round them. The threshing is done on the field
in most cases.

BUCOLICS (from the Gr. [Greek: boukolikos], "pertaining to a herdsman"), a
term occasionally used for rural or pastoral poetry. The expression has
been traced back in English to the beginning of the 14th century, being
used to describe the "Eclogues" of Virgil. The most celebrated collection
of bucolics in antiquity is that of Theocritus, of which about thirty, in
the Doric dialect, and mainly written in hexameter verse, have been
preserved. This was the name, as is believed, originally given by Virgil to
his pastoral poems, with the direct object of challenging comparison with
the writings of Theocritus. In modern times the term "bucolics" has not
often been specifically given by the poets to their pastorals; the main
exception being that of Ronsard, who collected his eclogues under the title
of "Les Bucoliques." In general practice the word is almost a synonym for
pastoral poetry, but has come to bear a slightly more agricultural than
shepherd signification, so that the "Georgics" of Virgil has grown to seem
almost more "bucolic" than his "Eclogues." (See also PASTORAL.)

(E. G.)

BUCYRUS, a city and the county-seat of Crawford county, Ohio, U.S.A., on
the Sandusky river, 62 m. N. of Columbus. Pop. (1890) 5974; (1900) 6560
(756 foreign-born); (1910) 8122. It is served by the Pennsylvania, the
Toledo, Walhonding Valley & Ohio (Pennsylvania system), and the Ohio
Central railways, and by interurban electric lines. The Ohio Central, of
which Bucyrus is a division terminal, has shops here. The city lies at an
elevation of about 1000 ft. above sea-level, and is surrounded [v.04
p.0679] by a country well adapted to agriculture and stock-raising. Among
its manufactures are machinery, structural steel, ventilating and heating
apparatus, furniture, interior woodwork, ploughs, wagons, carriages, copper
products and clay-working machines. Bucyrus was first settled in 1817; it
was laid out as a town in 1822, was incorporated as a village in 1830, and
became a city in 1885. The county-seat was permanently established here in
1830.

BUDAPEST, the capital and largest town of the kingdom of Hungary, and the
second town of the Austro-Hungarian monarchy, 163 m. S.E. of Vienna by
rail. Budapest is situated on both banks of the Danube, and is formed of
the former towns of Buda (Ger. _Ofen_) together with O-Buda (Ger.
_Alt-Ofen_) on the right bank, and of Pest together with Koebanya (Ger.
_Steinbruch_) on the left bank, which were all incorporated into one
municipality in 1872. It lies at a point where the Danube has definitely
taken its southward course, and just where the outlying spurs of the outer
ramifications of the Alps, namely, the Bakony Mountains, meet the
Carpathians. Budapest is situated nearly in the centre of Hungary, and
dominates by its strategical position the approach from the west to the
great Hungarian plain. The imposing size of the Danube, 300 to 650 yds.
broad, and the sharp contrast of the two banks, place Budapest among the
most finely situated of the larger towns of Europe. On the one side is a
flat sandy plain, in which lies Pest, modern of aspect regularly laid out,
and presenting a long frontage of handsome buildings to the river. On the
other the ancient town of Buda straggles capriciously over a series of
small and steep hills, commanded by the fortress and the Blocksberg (770
ft. high, 390 ft. above the Danube), and backed beyond by spurs of
mountains, which rise in the form of terraces one above the other. The
hills are generally devoid of forests, while those near the towns were
formerly covered with vineyards, which produced a good red wine. The
vineyards have been almost completely destroyed by the phylloxera.

Budapest covers an area of 78 sq. m., and is divided into ten municipal
districts, namely Var (Festung), Vizivaros (Wasserstadt), O-Buda
(Alt-Ofen), all on the right bank, belonging to Buda, and Belvaros (Inner
City), Lipotvaros (Leopoldstadt), Terezvaros (Theresienstadt),
Erzsebetvaros (Elisabethstadt), Jozsefvaros (Josephstadt), Ferenczvaros
(Franzstadt), and Koebanya (Steinbruch), all on the left bank, belonging to
Pest. Buda, with its royal palace, the various ministries, and other
government offices, is the official centre, while Pest is the commercial
and industrial part, as well as the centre of the nationalistic and
intellectual life of the town. The two banks of the Danube are united by
six bridges, including two fine suspension bridges; the first of them,
generally known as the Ketten-Bruecke, constructed by the brothers Tiernay
and Adam Clark in 1842-1849, is one of the largest in Europe. It is 410
yds. long, 39 ft. broad, 36 ft. high above the mean level of the water, and
its chains rest on two pillars 160 ft. high; its ends are ornamented with
four colossal stone lions. At one end is a tunnel, 383 yds. long,
constructed by Adam Clark in 1854, which pierces the castle hill and
connects the quarter known as the Christinenstadt with the Danube. The
other suspension bridge is the Schwurplatz bridge, completed in 1903, 56
ft. broad, with a span of 317 yds. The other bridges are the Margaret
bridge, with a junction bridge towards the Margaret island, the Franz
Joseph bridge, and two railway bridges.

Perhaps the most attractive part of Budapest is the line of broad quays on
the left bank of the Danube, which extend for a distance of 21/2 m. from the
Margaret bridge to the custom-house, and are lined with imposing buildings.
The most important of these is the Franz Joseph Quai, 1 m. long, which
contains the most fashionable cafes and hotels, and is the favourite
promenade. The inner town is surrounded by the Innere Ring-Strasse, a
circle of wide boulevards on the site of the old wall. Wide tree-shaded
streets, like the Kiraly Utcza, the Kerrepesi Ut, and the Uelloei Ut, also
form the lines of demarcation between the different districts. The inner
ring is connected by the Vaczi Koerut (Waitzner-Ring) with the Grosse
Ring-Strasse, a succession of boulevards, describing a semicircle beginning
at the Margaret bridge and ending at the Boraros Platz, near the
custom-house quay, through about the middle of the town. One of the most
beautiful streets in the town is the Andrassy Ut, 11/2 m. long, connecting
Vaczi Koerut with Varosliget (_Stadtwaeldchen_), the favourite public park of
Budapest. It is a busy thoroughfare, lined in its first half with
magnificent new buildings, and in its second half, where it attains a width
of 150 ft., with handsome villas standing in their own gardens, which give
the impression rather of a fashionable summer resort than the centre of a
great city. Budapest possesses numerous squares, generally ornamented with
monuments of prominent Hungarians, usually the work of Hungarian artists.

_Buildings._--Though of ancient origin, neither Buda nor Pest has much to
show in the way of venerable buildings. The oldest church is the Matthias
church in Buda, begun by King Bela IV. in the 13th century, completed in
the 15th century, and restored in 1890-1896. It was used as a mosque during
the Turkish occupation, and here took place the coronation of Franz Joseph
as king of Hungary in 1867. The garrison church, a Gothic building of the
13th century, and the Reformed church, finished in 1898, are the other
ecclesiastical buildings in Buda worth mentioning. The oldest church in
Pest is the parish church situated in the Eskue-Ter (Schwur-Platz) in the
inner town; it was built in 1500, in the Gothic style, and restored in
1890. The most magnificent church in Pest is the Leopoldstadt Basilica, a
Romanesque building with a dome 315 ft. in height, begun in 1851; next
comes the Franzstadt church, also a Romanesque building, erected in 1874.
Besides several modern churches, Budapest possesses a beautiful synagogue,
in the Moorish style, erected in 1861, and another, in the
Moorish-Byzantine style, built in 1872, while in 1901 the construction of a
much larger synagogue was begun. In Buda, near the Kaiserbad, and not far
from the Margaret bridge, is a small octagonal Turkish mosque, with a dome
25 ft. high, beneath which is the grave of a Turkish monk. By a special
article in the treaty of Karlowitz of 1699 the emperor of Austria undertook
to preserve this monument.

Among the secular buildings the first place is taken by the royal palace in
Buda, which, together with the old fortress, crowns the summit of a hill,
and forms the nucleus of the town. The palace erected by Maria Theresa in
1748-1771 was partly burned in 1849, but has been restored and largely
extended since 1894. In the court chapel are preserved the regalia of
Hungary, namely, the crown of St Stephen, the sceptre, orb, sword and the
coronation robes. It is surrounded by a magnificent garden, which descends
in steep terraces to the Danube, and which offers a splendid view of the
town lying on the opposite bank. New and palatial buildings of the various
ministries, several high and middle schools, a few big hospitals, and the
residences of several Hungarian magnates, are among the principal edifices
in this part of the town.

The long range of substantial buildings fronting the left bank of the
Danube includes the Houses of Parliament (see ARCHITECTURE, Plate IX. fig.
115), a huge limestone edifice in the late Gothic style, covering an area
of 33/4 acres, erected in 1883-1902; the Academy, in Renaissance style,
erected in 1862-1864, containing a lofty reception room, a library, a
historic picture gallery, and a botanic collection; the Redoute buildings,
a large structure in a mixed Romanesque and Moorish style, erected for
balls and other social purposes; the extensive custom-house at the lower
end of the quays, and several fine hotels and insurance offices. In the
beautiful Andrassy Ut are the opera-house (1875-1884), in the Italian
Renaissance style; the academy of music; the old and new exhibition
building; the national drawing school; and the museum of fine arts
(1900-1905), in which was installed in 1905 the national gallery, formed by
Prince Esterhazy, bought by the government in 1865 for L130,000, and
formerly housed in the academy, and the collection of modern pictures from
the national museum. At the end of the street is one of the numerous
monuments erected in various parts of the country to commemorate the
thousandth anniversary of the foundation of the kingdom of Hungary. Other
buildings remarkable for their [v.04 p.0680] size and interest are: the
national museum (1836-1844); the town-hall (1869-1875), in the early
Renaissance style; the university, with a baroque facade (rebuilt 1900),
and the university library (opened in 1875), a handsome Renaissance
building; the palace of justice (1896), a magnificent edifice situated not
far from the Houses of Parliament. In its neighbourhood also are the
palatial buildings of the ministries of justice and of agriculture. There
are also the exchange (1905); the Austro-Hungarian bank (1904); the central
post and telegraph office; the art-industrial museum (1893-1897), in
oriental style, with some characteristically Hungarian ornamentations;
several handsome theatres; large barracks; technical and secondary schools;
two great railway termini and a central market (1897) to be mentioned. To
the south-east of the town lies the vast slaughter-house (1870-1872),
which, with the adjacent cattle-market, covers nearly 30 acres of ground.
The building activity of Budapest since 1867 has been extraordinary, and
the town has undergone a thorough transformation. The removal of slums and
the regulation of the older parts of the town, in connexion with the
construction of the two new bridges across the Danube and of the railway
termini, went hand-in-hand with the extension of the town, new quarters
springing up on both banks of the Danube. This process is still going on,
and Budapest has become one of the handsomest capitals of Europe.

_Education._--Budapest is the intellectual capital of Hungary. At the head
of its educational institutions stands the university, which was attended
in 1900 by 4983 students--only about 2000 in 1880--and has a staff of
nearly 200 professors and lecturers. It has been completely transformed
into a national Hungarian seat of learning since 1867, and great efforts
have been made to keep at home the Hungarian students, who before then
frequented other universities and specially that of Vienna. It is well
provided with scientific laboratories, botanic garden, and various
collections, and possesses a library with nearly a quarter of a million
volumes. The university of Budapest, the only one in Hungary proper, was
established at Tyrnau in 1635, removed to Buda in 1777, and transferred to
Pest in 1783. Next to it comes the polytechnic, attended by 1816 students
in 1900, which is also thoroughly equipped for a scientific training. Other
high schools are a veterinary academy, a Roman Catholic seminary, a
Protestant theological college, a rabbinical institute, a commercial
academy, to which has been added in 1899 an academy for the study of
oriental languages, and military academies for the training of Hungarian
officers. Budapest possesses an adequate number of elementary and secondary
schools, as well as a great number of special and technical schools. At the
head of the scientific societies stands the academy of sciences, founded in
1825, for the encouragement of the study of the Hungarian language and the
various sciences except theology. Next to it comes the national museum,
founded in 1807 through the donations of Count Stephan Szechenyi, which
contains extensive collections of antiquities, natural history and
ethnology, and a rich library which, in its manuscript department of over
20,000 MSS., contains the oldest specimens of the Hungarian language.
Another society which has done great service for the cultivation of the
Hungarian language is the Kisfaludy society, founded in 1836. It began by
distributing prizes for the best literary productions of the year, then it
started the collection and publication of the Hungarian folklore, and
lastly undertook the translation into the Hungarian language of the
masterpieces of foreign literatures. The influence exercised by this
society is very great, and it has attracted within its circle the best
writers of Hungary. Another society similar in aim with this one is the
Petoefi society, founded in 1875. Amongst the numerous scientific
associations are the central statistical department, and the Budapest
communal bureau of statistics, which under the directorship of Dr Joseph de
Koeroesy has gained a European reputation.

The artistic life in Budapest is fostered by the academy of music, which
once had Franz Liszt as its director, a _conservatoire_ of music, a
dramatic school, and a school for painting and for drawing, all maintained
by the government. Budapest possesses, besides an opera house, eight
theatres, of which two are subsidized by the government and one by the
municipality. The performances are almost exclusively in Hungarian, the
exceptions being the occasional appearance of French, Italian and other
foreign artists. Performances in German are under a popular taboo, and they
are never given in a theatre at Budapest.

_Trade._---In commerce and industry Budapest is by far the most important
town in Hungary, and in the former, if not also in the latter, it is second
to Vienna alone in the Austro-Hungarian monarchy. The principal industries
are steam flour-milling, distilling, and the manufacture of machinery,
railway plant, carriages, cutlery, gold and silver wares, chemicals,
bricks, jute, and the usual articles produced in large towns for home
consumption. The trade of Budapest is mainly in corn, flour, cattle,
horses, pigs, wines, spirits, wool, wood, hides, and in the articles
manufactured in the town. The efforts of the Hungarian government to
establish a great home industry, and the measures taken to that effect,
have benefited Budapest to a greater degree than any other Hungarian town,
and the progress made is remarkable. The increase in the number of
joint-stock companies, and the capital thus invested in industrial
undertakings, furnish a valuable indication. In 1873 there were 28 such
companies with a total capital of L2,224,900; in 1890, 75 with a capital of
L9,352,000; and in 1899 no fewer than 242 with a total capital of
L31,378,655. Budapest owes its great commercial importance to its situation
on the Danube, on which the greater part of its trade is carried. The
introduction of steamboats on the Danube in 1830 was one of the earliest
material causes of the progress of Budapest, and gave a great stimulus to
its corn trade. This still continues to operate, having been promoted by
the flour-milling industry, which was revolutionized by certain local
inventions. Budapest is actually one of the greatest milling centres in the
world, possessing a number of magnificent establishments, fitted with
machinery invented and manufactured in the city. Budapest is, besides,
connected with all the principal places in Austria and Hungary by a
well-developed net of railways, which all radiate from here.

_Population._--Few European towns grew so rapidly as Budapest generally,
and Pest particularly, during the 19th century, and probably none has
witnessed such a thorough transformation since 1867. In 1799 the joint
population of Buda and Pest was 54,179, of which 24,306 belonged to Buda,
and 29,870 belonged to Pest, being the first time that the population of
Pest exceeded that of Buda. By 1840, however, Buda had added but 14,000 to
its population while that of Pest had more than doubled; and of the joint
population of 270,685 in 1869, fully 200,000 fell to the share of Pest. In
1880 the civil population of Budapest was 360,551, an increase since 1869
of 32%; and in 1890 it was 491,938, and increase of 36.57% in the decade.
In the matter of the increase of its population alone, Budapest has only
been slightly surpassed by one European town, namely, Berlin. Both capitals
multiplied their population by nine in the first nine decades of the
century. According to an interesting and instructive comparison of the
growth of twenty-eight European cities made by Dr Joseph de Koeroesy, Berlin
in 1890 showed an increase, as compared with the beginning of the century,
of 818% and Budapest of 809%. Within the same period the increase of Paris
was 343%, and of London 340%. In 1900 the civil population of Budapest was
716,476 inhabitants, showing an increase of 44.82% in the decade. To this
must be added a garrison of 15,846 men, making a total population 732,322.
Of the total population, civil and military, 578,458 were Magyars, 104,520
were Germans, 25,168 were Slovaks, and the remainder was composed of
Croatians, Servians, Rumanians, Russians, Greeks, Armenians, Gypsies, &c.
According to religion, there were 445,023 Roman Catholics, 5806 Greek
Catholics, 4422 Greek Orthodox; 67,319 were Protestants of the Helvetic,
and 38,811 were Protestants of the Augsburg Confessions; 168,985 were Jews,
and the remainder belonged to various other creeds. A striking feature in
the progress of Budapest is the decline in the death-rate, which sank from
43.4 per thousand in 1874 to 20.6 per thousand in 1900. In addition to the
increased influx of [v.04 p.0681] persons in the prime of life, this is due
largely to the improved water-supply and better sanitary conditions
generally, including increased hospital accommodation.

_Social Position._--Budapest is the seat of the government of Hungary, of
the parliament, and of all the highest official authorities--civil,
military, judicial and financial. It is the meeting-place, alternately with
Vienna, of the Austro-Hungarian delegations, and it was elected to an
equality with Vienna as a royal residence in 1892. It is the see of a Roman
Catholic archbishop. The town is administered by an elected municipal
council, which consists of 400 members. As Paris is sometimes said to be
France, so may Budapest with almost greater truth be said to be Hungary.
Its composite population is a faithful reflection of the heterogeneous
elements in the dominions of the Habsburgs, while the trade and industry of
Hungary are centralized at Budapest in a way that can scarcely be affirmed
of any other European capital. In virtue of its cultural institutions, it
is also the intellectual and artistic centre of Hungary. The movement in
favour of Magyarizing all institutions has found its strongest development
in Budapest, where the German names have all been removed from the
buildings and streets. The wonderful progress of Budapest is undoubtedly
due to the revival of the Hungarian national spirit in the first half of
the 19th century, and to the energetic and systematic efforts of the
government and people of Hungary since the restoration of the constitution.
So far as Hungary was concerned, Budapest in 1867 at once became the
favoured rival of Vienna, with the important additional advantage that it
had no such competitors within its own sphere as Vienna had in the Austrian
provincial capitals. The political, intellectual, and social life of
Hungary was centred in Budapest, and had largely been so since 1848, when
it became the seat of the legislature, as it was that of the Austrian
central administration which followed the revolution. The ideal of a
prosperous, brilliant and attractive Magyar capital, which would keep the
nobles and the intellectual flower of the country at home, uniting them in
the service of the Fatherland, had received a powerful impetus from Count
Stephan Szechenyi, the great Hungarian reformer of the pre-Revolutionary
period. His work, continued by patriotic and able successors, was now taken
up as the common task of the government and the nation. Thus the promotion
of the interests of the capital and the centralization of the public and
commercial life of the country have formed an integral part of the policy
of the state since the restoration of the constitution. Budapest has
profited largely by the encouragement of agriculture, trade and industry,
by the nationalization of the railways, by the development of inland
navigation, and also by the neglect of similar measures in favour of
Vienna.

From that time to the present day the record of the Hungarian capital has
been one of uninterrupted advance, not merely in externals, such as the
removal of slums, the reconstruction of the town, the development of
communications, industry and trade, and the erection of important public
buildings, but also in the mental, moral and physical elevation of the
inhabitants; besides another important gain from the point of view of the
Hungarian statesman, namely, the progressive increase and improvement of
status of the Magyar element of the population. When it is remembered that
the ideal of both the authorities and the people is the ultimate monopoly
of the home market by Hungarian industry and trade, and the strengthening
of the Magyar influence by centralization, it is easy to understand the
progress of Budapest.

Politically, this ambitious and progressive capital is the creation of the
Magyar upper classes. Commercially and industrially, it may be said to be
the work of the Jews. The sound judgment of the former led them to welcome
and appreciate the co-operation of the latter. Indeed, a readiness to
assimilate foreign elements is characteristic of Magyar patriotism, which
has, particularly within the last generation, made numerous converts among
the other nationalities of Hungary, and--for national purposes--may be
considered to have quite absorbed the Hungarian Jews. It has thus come to
pass that there is no anti-Semitism in Budapest, although the Hebrew
element is proportionately much larger (21% as compared with 9%) than it is
in Vienna, the Mecca of the Jew-baiter.

Budapest has long been celebrated for its mineral springs and baths, some
of them having been already used during the Roman period. They rise at the
foot of the Blocksberg, and are powerful chalybeate and sulphureous hot
springs, with a temperature of 80 deg.-150 deg. Fahr. The principal baths are the
Bruckbad and the Kaiserbad, both dating from the Turkish period; the St
Lucasbad; and the Raitzenbad, rebuilt in 1860, one of the most magnificent
establishments of its kind, which was connected through a gallery with the
royal palace in the time of Matthias Corvin. There is an artesian well of
sulphureous water with a temperature of 153 deg. Fahr. in the Stadtwaeldchen;
and another, yielding sulphureous water with a temperature of 110 deg. Fahr.,
which is used for both drinking and bathing, in the Margaret island. The
mineral springs, which yield bitter alkaline waters, are situated in the
plain south of the Blocksberg, and are over 40 in number. The principal are
the Hunyadi-Janos spring, of which about 1,000,000 bottles are exported
annually, the Arpad spring, and the Apenta spring.

The largest and most popular of the parks in Budapest is the Varosliget, on
the north-east side of the town. It has an area of 286 acres, and contains
the zoological garden. On an island in its large pond are situated the
agricultural (1902-1904) and the ethnographical museums. It was in this
park that the millennium exhibition of 1896 took place. A still more
delightful resort is the Margaret island, a long narrow island in the
Danube, the property of the archduke Joseph, which has been laid out in the
style of an English park, with fine trees, velvety turf and a group of
villas and bath-houses. The name of the island is derived from St Margaret,
the daughter of King Bela IV. (13th century), who built here a convent, the
ruins of which are still in existence. To the west of Buda extends the hill
(1463 ft.) of Svab-Hegy (_Schwabenberg_), with extensive view and numerous
villas; it is ascended by a rack-and-pinion railway. A favourite spot is
the Zugliget (_Auwinkel_), a wooded dale on the northern slope of the hill.
To the north of O-Buda, about 4 m. from the Margaret island, on the right
bank of the Danube, are the remains of the Roman colony of Aquincum. They
include the foundations of an amphitheatre, of a temple, of an aqueduct, of
baths and of a castrum. The objects found here are preserved in a small
museum. To the north of Pest lies the historic Rakos field, where the
Hungarian diets were held in the open air from the 10th to the 14th
century; and 23 m. to the north lies the royal castle of Goedoelloe, with its
beautiful park.

_History._--The history of Budapest consists of the separate history of the
two sister towns, Buda and Pest. The Romans founded, in the 2nd century
A.D., on the right bank of the Danube, on the site of the actual O-Buda, a
colony, on the place of a former Celtic settlement. This colony was named
Aquincum, a transformation from the former Celtic name of _Ak-ink_, meaning
"rich waters." The Roman occupation lasted till A.D. 376, and then the
place was invaded by Huns, Ostrogoths, and later by Avars and Slavs. When
the Magyars came into the country, at the end of the 10th century, they
preserved the names of Buda and Pest, which they found for these two
places. The origin of Pest proper is obscure, but the name, apparently
derived from the old Slavonic _pestj_, a stove (like Ofen, the German name
of Buda), seems to point to an early Slavonic settlement. The Romans never
gained a foothold on this side of the river.

When it first appears in history Pest was essentially a German settlement,
and a chronicler of the 13th century describes it as "Villa Teutonica
ditissima." Christianity was introduced early in the 11th century. In 1241
Pest was destroyed by the Tatars, after whose departure in 1244 it was
created a royal free city by Bela IV., and repeopled with colonists of
various nationalities. The succeeding period seems to have been one of
considerable prosperity, though Pest was completely eclipsed by the sister
town of Buda with its fortress and palace. This fortress and palace were
built by King Bela IV. in 1247, and were the nucleus round which the town
of Buda was built, which soon gained [v.04 p.0682] great importance, and
became in 1361 the capital of Hungary. In 1526 Pest was taken and pillaged
by the Turks, and from 1541 to 1686 Buda was the seat of a Turkish pasha.
Pest in the meantime entirely lost its importance, and on the departure of
the Turks was left little more than a heap of ruins. Its favourable
situation and the renewal of former privileges helped it to revive, and in
1723 it became the seat of the highest Hungarian officials. Maria Theresa
and Joseph II. did much to increase its importance, but the rapid growth
which enabled it completely to outstrip Buda belongs entirely to the 19th
century. A signal proof of its vitality was given in 1838 by the speed and
ease with which it recovered from a disastrous inundation that destroyed
3000 houses. In 1848 Pest became the seat of the revolutionary diet, but in
the following year the insurgents had to retire before the Austrians under
Windischgraetz. A little later the Austrians had to retire in their turn,
leaving a garrison in the fortress of Buda, and, while the Hungarians
endeavoured to capture this position, General Hentzi retaliated by
bombarding Pest, doing great damage to the town. In 1872 both towns were
united into one municipality. In 1896 took place here the millennium
exhibition, in celebration of the thousandth anniversary of the foundation
of the kingdom of Hungary.

BIBLIOGRAPHY.--The official publications of the Budapest Communal Bureau of
Statistics have acquired a European repute for their completeness, and
their fearless exposure of shortcomings has been an element in the progress
of the town. Reference should also be made to separate works of the
director of that institution, Dr Joseph de Koeroesy, known in England for his
discovery of the law of marital fertility, published by the Royal Society,
and by his labours in the development of comparative international
statistics. His _Statistique Internationale des grandes villes_ and
_Bulletin annuel des finances des grandes villes_ give valuable comparative
data. See also _Die Oesterreichisch-Ungarische Monarchie in Wort und Bild_
(Wien, 1886-1902, 24 vols.); volume xii., published in 1893, is devoted to
Budapest.

(O. BR.)

BUDAUN, a town and district of British India, in the Rohilkhand division of
the United Provinces. The town is near the left bank of the river Sot. Pop.
(1901) 39,031. There are ruins of an immense fort and a very handsome
mosque of imposing size, crowned with a dome, and built in 1223 in great
part from the materials of an ancient Hindu temple. The American Methodist
mission maintains several girls' schools, and there is a high school for
boys. According to tradition Budaun was founded about A.D. 905, and an
inscription, probably of the 12th century, gives a list of twelve Rathor
kings reigning at Budaun (called Vodamayuta). The first authentic
historical event connected with it, however, is its capture by Kutb-ud-din
in 1196, after which it became a very important post on the northern
frontier of the Delhi empire. In the 13th century two of its governors,
Shams-ud-din Altamsh, the builder of the great mosque referred to above,
and his son Rukn-ud-din Firoz, attained the imperial throne. In 1571 the
town was burnt, and about a hundred years later, under Shah Jahan, the seat
of the governorship was transferred to Bareilly; after which the importance
of Budaun declined. It ultimately came into the power of the Rohillas, and
in 1838 was made the headquarters of a British district. In 1857 the people
of Budaun sided with the mutineers, and a native government was set up,
which lasted until General Penny's victory at Kakrala (April 1858) led to
the restoration of British authority.

The DISTRICT OF BUDAUN has an area of 1987 sq. m. Pop. (1901) 1,025,753.
The country is low, level, and is generally fertile, and watered by the
Ganges, the Ramganga, the Sot or Yarwafadar, and the Mahawa. Budaun
district was ceded to the British government in 1801 by the nawab of Oudh.
There are several indigo factories. The district is crossed by two lines of
the Oudh & Rohilkhand railway, and by a narrow-gauge line from Bareilly.
The chief centre of trade is Bilsi.

BUDDEUS, JOHANN FRANZ (1667-1729), German Lutheran divine, was born at
Anklam, a town of Pomerania, where his father was pastor. He studied with
great distinction at Greifswald and at Wittenberg, and having made a
special study of languages, theology and history, was appointed professor
of Greek and Latin at Coburg in 1692, professor of moral philosophy in the
university of Halle in 1693, and in 1705 professor of theology at Jena.
Here he was held in high esteem, and in 1715 became Primarius of his
faculty and member of the Consistory. His principal works are: _Leipzig,
allgemeines historisches Lexikon_ (Leipzig, 1709 ff.); _Historia,
Ecclesiastica Veteris Testamenti_ (4 vols., Halle, 1709); _Elementa
Philosophiae Practicae, Instrumentalis, et Theoreticae_ (3 vols., 1697);
_Selecta Juris Naturae et Gentium_ (Halle, 1704); _Miscellanea Sacra_ (3
vols., Jena, 1727); and _Isagoge Historico-Theologica ad Theologiam
Universam, singulasque ejus partes_ (2 vols., 1727).

BUDDHA. According to the Buddhist theory (see BUDDHISM), a "Buddha" appears
from time to time in the world and preaches the true doctrine. After a
certain lapse of time this teaching is corrupted and lost, and is not
restored till a new Buddha appears. In Europe, Buddha is used to designate
the last historical Buddha, whose family name was Gotama, and who was the
son of Suddh[=o]dana, one of the chiefs of the tribe of the S[=a]kiyas, one
of the republican clans then still existent in India.

We are accustomed to find the legendary and the miraculous gathering, like
a halo, around the early history of religious leaders, until the sober
truth runs the risk of being altogether neglected for the glittering and
edifying falsehood. The Buddha has not escaped the fate which has befallen
the founders of other religions; and as late as the year 1854 Professor
Wilson of Oxford read a paper before the Royal Asiatic Society of London in
which he maintained that the supposed life of Buddha was a myth, and
"Buddha himself merely an imaginary being." No one, however, would now
support this view; and it is admitted that, under the mass of miraculous
tales which have been handed down regarding him, there is a basis of truth
already sufficiently clear to render possible an intelligent history.

The circumstances under which the future Buddha was born were somewhat as
follows.[1] In the 6th century B.C. the [=A]ryan tribes had long been
settled far down the valley of the Ganges. The old child-like joy in life
so manifest in the Vedas had died away; the worship of nature had developed
or degenerated into the worship of new and less pure divinities; and the
Vedic songs themselves, whose freedom was little compatible with the spirit
of the age, had faded into an obscurity which did not lessen their value to
the priests. The country was politically split up into little
principalities, most of them governed by some petty despot, whose interests
were not often the same as those of the community. There were still,
however, about a dozen free republics, most of them with aristocratic
government, and it was in these that reforming movements met with most
approval and support. A convenient belief in the doctrine of the
transmigration of souls satisfied the unfortunate that their woes were the
natural result of their own deeds in a former birth, and, though
unavoidable now, might be escaped in a future state of existence by present
good conduct. While hoping for a better fate in their next birth, the poor
turned for succour and advice in this to the aid of astrology, witchcraft
and animism--a belief in which seems to underlie all [v.04 p.0683]
religions, and still survives even in England.[2] The inspiriting wars
against the enemies of the [=A]ryan people, the infidel deniers of the
[=A]ryan gods, had given place to a succession of internecine feuds between
the chiefs of neighbouring clans. In literature an age of poets had long
since made way for an age of commentators and grammarians, who thought that
the old poems must have been the work of gods. But the darkest period was
succeeded by the dawn of a reformation; travelling logicians were willing
to maintain these against all the world; whilst here and there ascetics
strove to raise themselves above the gods, and hermits earnestly sought for
some satisfactory solution of the mysteries of life. These were the
teachers whom the people chiefly delighted to honour. Though the ranks of
the priesthood were for ever firmly closed against intruders, a man of lay
birth, a Kshatriya or Vaisya, whose mind revolted against the orthodox
creed, and whose heart was stirred by mingled zeal and ambition, might find
through these irregular orders an entrance to the career of a religious
teacher and reformer.

The S[=a]kiya clan was then seated in a tract of country probably two or
three thousand square miles in extent, the chief town of which was
Kapilavastu, situate about 27 deg. 37' N. by 83 deg. 11' E., some days' journey
north of Benares. Their territory stretched up into the lower slopes of the
mountains, and was mostly in what is now Nepal, but it included territory
now on the British side of the frontier. It is in this part of the
S[=a]kiya country that the interesting discovery was made of the monument
they erected to their famous clansman. From their well-watered rice-fields,
the main source of their wealth, they could see the giant Him[=a]layas
looming up against the clear blue of the Indian sky. Their supplies of
water were drawn from the river Rohini, the modern Koh[=a]na; and though
the use of the river was in times of drought the cause of disputes between
the S[=a]kiyas and the neighbouring Koliyans, the two clans were then at
peace; and two daughters of a chieftain of Koli, which was only 11 m. east
of Kapilavastu, were the principal wives of Suddh[=o]dana. Both were
childless, and great was the rejoicing when, in about the forty-fifth year
of her age, the elder sister, Mah[=a] M[=a]y[=a], promised her husband a
son. In due time she started with the intention of being confined at her
parents' home, but the party halting on the way under the shade of some
lofty satin-trees, in a pleasant garden called Lumbini on the river-side,
her son, the future Buddha, was there unexpectedly born. The exact site of
this garden has been recently rediscovered, marked by an inscribed pillar
put up by Asoka (see _J.R.A.S._, 1898).

He was in after years more generally known by his family name of Gotama,
but his individual name was Siddhattha. When he was nineteen years old he
was married to his cousin Yasodhar[=a], daughter of a Koliyan chief, and
gave himself up to a life of luxury. This is the solitary record of his
youth; we hear nothing more till, in his twenty-ninth year, it is related
that, driving to his pleasure-grounds one day, he was struck by the sight
of a man utterly broken down by age, on another occasion by the sight of a
man suffering from a loathsome disease, and some months after by the
horrible sight of a decomposing corpse. Each time his charioteer, whose
name was Channa, told him that such was the fate of all living beings. Soon
after he saw an ascetic walking in a calm and dignified manner, and asking
who that was, was told by his charioteer the character and aims of the
Wanderers, the travelling teachers, who played so great a part in the
intellectual life of the time. The different accounts of these visions vary
so much as to cast great doubts on their accuracy; and the oldest one of
all (_Anguttara_, i. 145) speaks of ideas only, not of actual visions. It
is, however, clear from what follows, that about this time the mind of the
young Raejput must, from some cause or other, have been deeply stirred. Many
an earnest heart full of disappointment or enthusiasm has gone through a
similar struggle, has learnt to look upon all earthly gains and hopes as
worse than vanity, has envied the calm life of the cloister, troubled by
none of these things, and has longed for an opportunity of entire
self-surrender to abstinence and meditation.

Subjectively, though not objectively, these visions may be supposed to have
appeared to Gotama. After seeing the last of them, he is said, in the later
accounts, to have spent the afternoon in his pleasure-grounds by the
river-side; and having bathed, to have entered his chariot in order to
return home. Just then a messenger arrived with the news that his wife
Yasodhara had given birth to a son, his only child. "This," said Gotama
quietly, "is a new and strong tie I shall have to break." But the people of
Kapilavastu were greatly delighted at the birth of the young heir, the
raja's only grandson. Gotama's return became an ovation; musicians preceded
and followed his chariot, while shouts of joy and triumph fell on his ear.
Among these sounds one especially attracted his attention. It was the voice
of a young girl, his cousin, who sang a stanza, saying, "Happy the father,
happy the mother, happy the wife of such a son and husband." In the word
"happy" lay a double meaning; it meant also freed from the chains of
rebirth, delivered, _saved_. Grateful to one who, at such a time, reminded
him of his highest hopes, Gotama, to whom such things had no longer any
value, took off his collar of pearls and sent it to her. She imagined that
this was the beginning of a courtship, and began to build daydreams about
becoming his principal wife, but he took no further notice of her and
passed on. That evening the dancing-girls came to go through the Natch
dances, then as now so common on festive occasions in many parts of India;
but he paid them no attention, and gradually fell into an uneasy slumber.
At midnight he awoke; the dancing-girls were lying in the ante-room; an
overpowering loathing filled his soul. He arose instantly with a mind fully
made up--"roused into activity," says the Sinhalese chronicle, "like a man
who is told that his house is on fire." He called out to know who was on
guard, and finding it was his charioteer Channa, he told him to saddle his
horse. While Channa was gone Siddhattha gently opened the door of the room
where Yasodhara was sleeping, surrounded by flowers, with one hand on the
head of their child. He had hoped to take the babe in his arms for the last
time before he went, but now he stood for a few moments irresolute on the
threshold looking at them. At last the fear of awakening Yasodhara
prevailed; he tore himself away, promising himself to return to them as
soon as his mind had become clear, as soon as he had become a
Buddha,--_i.e._ Enlightened,--and then he could return to them not only as
husband and father, but as teacher and saviour. It is said to have been
broad moonlight on the full moon of the month of July, when the young
chief, with Channa as his sole companion, leaving his father's home, his
wealth and social position, his wife and child behind him, went out into
the wilderness to become a penniless and despised student, and a homeless
wanderer. This is the circumstance which has given its name to a Sanskrit
work, the Mahabhinishkramana Sutra, or Sutra of the Great Renunciation.

Next is related an event in which we may again see a subjective experience
given under the form of an objective reality. Mara, the great tempter,
appears in the sky, and urges Gotama to stop, promising him, in seven days,
a universal kingdom over the four great continents if he will but give up
his enterprise.[3] When his words fail to have any effect, the tempter
consoles himself by the confident hope that he will still overcome his
enemy, saying, "Sooner or later some lustful or malicious or angry thought
must arise in his mind; in that moment I shall be his master"; and from
that hour, adds the legend, "as a shadow always follows the body, so he too
from that day always followed the Blessed One, striving to throw every
obstacle in his way towards the Buddhahood." Gotama rides a long distance
that night, only stopping at the banks of the Anoma beyond the Koliyan
territory. There, on the sandy bank of the river, at a spot where later
piety erected a dagaba (a solid dome-shaped relic shrine), he cuts off with
his sword his long flowing locks, and, taking off his ornaments, sends them
and the horse back in charge of the unwilling Channa to Kapilavastu. The
next seven days were spent alone in a grove of mango trees [v.04 p.0684]
near by, whence the recluse walks on to Rajagriha, the capital of Magadha,
and residence of Bimbisara, one of the then most powerful rulers in the
valley of the Ganges. He was favourably received by the raja; but though
asked to do so, he would not as yet assume the responsibilities of a
teacher. He attached himself first to a brahmin sophist named Alara, and
afterwards to another named Udraka, from whom he learnt all that Indian
philosophy had then to teach. Still unsatisfied, he next retired to the
jungle of Uruvela, on the most northerly spur of the Vindhya range of
mountains, and there for six years, attended by five faithful disciples, he
gave himself up to the severest penance and self-torture, till his fame as
an ascetic spread in all the country round about "like the sound," says the
Burmese chronicle, "of a great bell hung in the canopy of the skies."[4] At
last one day, when he was walking in a much enfeebled state, he felt on a
sudden an extreme weakness, like that caused by dire starvation, and unable
to stand any longer he fell to the ground. Some thought he was dead, but he
recovered, and from that time took regular food and gave up his severe
penance, so much so that his five disciples soon ceased to respect him, and
leaving him went to Benares.

There now ensued a second struggle in Gotama's mind, described with all the
wealth of poetry and imagination of which the Indian mind is master. The
crisis culminated on a day, each event of which is surrounded in the
Buddhist accounts with the wildest legends, on which the very thoughts
passing through the mind of Buddha appear in gorgeous descriptions as
angels of darkness or of light. To us, now taught by the experiences of
centuries how weak such exaggerations are compared with the effect of a
plain unvarnished tale, these legends may appear childish or absurd, but
they have a depth of meaning to those who strive to read between the lines
of such rude and inarticulate attempts to describe the indescribable. That
which (the previous and subsequent career of the teacher being borne in
mind) seems to be possible and even probable, appears to be somewhat as
follows.

Disenchanted and dissatisfied, Gotama had given up all that most men value,
to seek peace in secluded study and self-denial. Failing to attain his
object by learning the wisdom of others, and living the simple life of a
student, he had devoted himself to that intense meditation and penance
which all philosophers then said would raise men above the gods. Still
unsatisfied, longing always for a certainty that seemed ever just beyond
his grasp, he had added vigil to vigil, and penance to penance, until at
last, when to the wondering view of others he had become more than a saint,
his bodily strength and his indomitable resolution and faith had together
suddenly and completely broken down. Then, when the sympathy of others
would have been most welcome, he found his friends falling away from him,
and his disciples leaving him for other teachers. Soon after, if not on the
very day when his followers had left him, he wandered out towards the banks
of the Neranjara, receiving his morning meal from the hands of Sujata, the
daughter of a neighbouring villager, and set himself down to eat it under
the shade of a large tree (a _Ficus religiosa_), to be known from that time
as the sacred Bo tree or tree of wisdom. There he remained through the long
hours of that day debating with himself what next to do. All his old
temptations came back upon him with renewed force. For years he had looked
at all earthly good through the medium of a philosophy which taught him
that it, without exception, contained within itself the seeds of
bitterness, and was altogether worthless and impermanent; but now to his
wavering faith the sweet delights of home and love, the charms of wealth
and power, began to show themselves in a different light, and glow again
with attractive colours. He doubted, and agonized in his doubt; but as the
sun set, the religious side of his nature had won the victory, and seems to
have come out even purified from the struggle. He had attained to Nirvana,
had become clear in his mind, a Buddha, an Enlightened One. From that night
he not only did not claim any merit on account of his self-mortification,
but took every opportunity of declaring that from such penances no
advantage at all would be derived. All that night he is said to have
remained in deep meditation under the Bo tree; and the orthodox Buddhists
believe that for seven times seven nights and days he continued fasting
near the spot, when the archangel Brahm[=a] came and ministered to him. As
for himself, his heart was now fixed,--his mind was made up,--but he
realized more than he had ever done before the power of temptation, and the
difficulty, the almost impossibility, of understanding and holding to the
truth. For others subject to the same temptations, but without that
earnestness and insight which he felt himself to possess, faith might be
quite impossible, and it would only be waste of time and trouble to try to
show to them "the only path of peace." To one in his position this thought
would be so very natural, that we need not hesitate to accept the fact of
its occurrence as related in the oldest records. It is quite consistent
with his whole career that it was love and pity for others--otherwise, as
it seemed to him, helplessly doomed and lost---which at last overcame every
other consideration, and made Gotama resolve to announce his doctrine to
the world.

The teacher, now 35 years of age, intended to proclaim his new gospel first
to his old teachers [=A]l[=a]ra and Udraka, but finding that they were
dead, he determined to address himself to his former five disciples, and
accordingly went to the Deer-forest near Benares where they were then
living. An old _g[=a]thh[=a]_, or hymn (translated in _Vinaya Texts_, i.
90) tells us how the Buddha, rapt with the idea of his great mission, meets
an acquaintance, one Upaka, a wandering sophist, on the way. The latter,
struck with his expression, asks him whose religion it is that makes him so
glad, and yet so calm. The reply is striking. "I am now on my way," says
the Buddha, "to the city of Benares, to beat the drum of the Ambrosia (to
set up the light of the doctrine of Nirvana) in the darkness of the world!"
and he proclaims himself the Buddha who alone knows, and knows no teacher.
Upaka says: "You profess yourself, then, friend, to be an Arahat and a
conqueror?" The Buddha says: "Those indeed are conquerors who, as I have
now, have conquered the intoxications (the mental intoxication arising from
ignorance, sensuality or craving after future life). Evil dispositions have
ceased in me; therefore is it that I am conqueror!" His acquaintance
rejoins: "In that case, venerable Gotama, your way lies yonder!" and he
himself, shaking his head, turns in the opposite direction.

Nothing daunted, the new prophet walked on to Benares, and in the cool of
the evening went on to the Deer-forest where the five ascetics were living.
Seeing him coming, they resolved not to recognize as a superior one who had
broken his vows; to address him by his name, and not as "master" or
"teacher"; only, he being a Kshatriya, to offer him a seat. He understands
their change of manner, calmly tells them not to mock him by calling him
"the venerable Gotama"; that he has found the ambrosia of truth and can
lead them to it. They object, naturally enough, from the ascetic point of
view, that he had failed before while he was keeping his body under, and
how can his mind have won the victory now, when he serves and yields to his
body. Buddha replies by explaining to them the principles of his new
gospel, in the form of noble truths, and the Noble Eightfold Path (see
BUDDHISM).

It is nearly certain that Buddha had a commanding presence, and one of
those deep, rich, thrilling voices which so many of the successful leaders
of men have possessed. We know his deep earnestness, and his thorough
conviction of the truth of his new gospel. When we further remember the
relation which the five students mentioned above had long borne to him, and
that they had passed through a similar culture, it is not difficult to
understand that his persuasions were successful, and that his old disciples
were the first to acknowledge him in his new character. The later books say
that they were all converted at once; but, according to the most ancient
P[=a]li record--though their old love and reverence had been so rekindled
when the Buddha came near that their cold resolutions quite broke down, and
they vied with each other in such acts of personal attention as an [v.04
p.0685] Indian disciple loves to pay to his teacher,--yet it was only after
the Buddha had for five days talked to them, sometimes separately,
sometimes together, that they accepted in its entirety his plan of
salvation.[5]

The Buddha then remained at the Deer-forest near Benares until the number
of his personal followers was about threescore, and that of the outside
believers somewhat greater. The principal among the former was a rich young
man named Yasa, who had first come to him at night out of fear of his
relations, and afterwards shaved his head, put on the yellow robe, and
succeeded in bringing many of his former friends and companions to the
teacher, his mother and his wife being the first female disciples, and his
father the first lay devotee. It should be noticed in passing that the idea
of a priesthood with mystical powers is altogether repugnant to Buddhism;
every one's salvation is entirely dependent on the modification or growth
of his own inner nature, resulting from his own exertions. The life of a
recluse is held to be the most conducive to that state of sweet serenity at
which the most ardent disciples aim; but that of a layman, of a believing
householder, is held in high honour; and a believer who does not as yet
feel himself able or willing to cast off the ties of home or of business,
may yet "enter the paths," and by a life of rectitude and kindness ensure
for himself a rebirth under more favourable conditions for his growth in
holiness.

After the rainy season Gotama called together those of his disciples who
had devoted themselves to the higher life, and said to them: "I am free
from the five hindrances which, like an immense net, hold men and angels in
their power; you too (owing to my teaching) are set free. Go ye now,
brethren, and wander for the gain and welfare of the many, out of
compassion for the world, to the benefit of gods and men. Preach the
doctrine, beauteous in inception, beauteous in continuation, beauteous in
its end. Proclaim the pure and perfect life. Let no two go together. I also
go, brethren, to the General's village in the wilds of Uruvel[=a]."[6]
Throughout his career, Gotama yearly adopted the same plan, collecting his
disciples round him in the rainy season, and after it was over travelling
about as an itinerant preacher; but in subsequent years he was always
accompanied by some of his most attached disciples.

In the solitudes of Uruvel[=a] there were at this time three brothers,
fire-worshippers and hermit philosophers, who had gathered round them a
number of scholars, and enjoyed a considerable reputation as teachers.
Gotama settled among them, and after a time they became believers in his
system,--the elder brother, Kassapa, taking henceforth a principal place
among his followers. His first set sermon to his new disciples is called by
Bishop Bigandet the Sermon on the Mount. Its subject was a jungle-fire
which broke out on the opposite hillside. He warned his hearers against the
fires of concupiscence, anger, ignorance, birth, death, decay and anxiety;
and taking each of the senses in order he compared all human sensations to
a burning flame which seems to be something it is not, which produces
pleasure and pain, but passes rapidly away, and ends only in
destruction.[7]

Accompanied by his new disciples, the Buddha walked on to R[=a]jagaha, the
capital of King Bimbis[=a]ra, who, not unmindful of their former interview,
came out to welcome him. Seeing Kassapa, who as the chronicle puts it, was
as well known to them as the banner of the city, the people at first
doubted who was the teacher and who the disciple, but Kassapa put an end to
their hesitation by stating that he had now given up his belief in the
efficacy of sacrifices either great or small; that Nirv[=a]na was a state
of rest to be attained only by a change of heart; and that he had become a
disciple of the Buddha. Gotama then spoke to the king on the miseries of
the world which arise from passion, and on the possibility of release by
following the way of salvation. The r[=a]ja invited him and his disciples
to eat their simple mid-day meal at his house on the following morning; and
then presented the Buddha with a garden called Veluvana or Bamboo-grove,
afterwards celebrated as the place where the Buddha spent many rainy
seasons, and preached many of his most complete discourses. There he taught
for some time, attracting large numbers of hearers, among whom two,
S[=a]riputta and Moggall[=a]na, who afterwards became conspicuous leaders
in the new crusade, then joined the Sangha or Society, as the Buddha's
order of mendicants was called.

Meanwhile the prophet's father, Suddh[=o]dana, who had anxiously watched
his son's career, heard that he had given up his asceticism, and had
appeared as a Wanderer, an itinerant preacher and teacher. He sent
therefore to him, urging him to come home, that he might see him once more
before he died. The Buddha accordingly started for Kapilavastu, and stopped
according to his custom in a grove outside the town. His father and uncles
and others came to see him there, but the latter were angry, and would pay
him no reverence. It was the custom to invite such teachers and their
disciples for the next day's meal, but they all left without doing so. The
next day, therefore, Gotama set out at the usual hour, carrying his bowl to
beg for a meal. As he entered the city, he hesitated whether he should not
go straight to his father's house, but determined to adhere to his custom.
It soon reached his father's ears that his son was walking through the
streets begging. Startled at such news he rose up, seizing the end of his
outer robe, and hastened to the place where Gotama was, exclaiming,
"Illustrious Buddha, why do you expose us all to such shame? Is it
necessary to go from door to door begging your food? Do you imagine that I
am not able to supply the wants of so many mendicants?" "My noble father,"
was the reply, "this is the custom of all our race." "How so?" said his
father. "Are you not descended from an illustrious line? no single person
of our race has ever acted so indecorously." "My noble father," said
Gotama, "you and your family may claim the privileges of Kshatriya descent;
my descent is from the prophets (Buddhas) of old, and they have always
acted so; the customs of the law (Dharma) are good both for this world and
the world that is to come. But, my father, when a man has found a treasure,
it is his duty to offer the most precious of the jewels to his father
first. Do not delay, let me share with you the treasure I have found."
Suddh[=o]dana, abashed, took his son's bowl and led him to his house.

Eighteen months had now elapsed since the turning-point of Gotama's
career--his great struggle under the Bo tree. Thus far all the accounts
follow chronological order. From this time they simply narrate disconnected
stories about the Buddha, or the persons with whom he was brought into
contact,--the same story being usually found in more than one account, but
not often in the same order. It is not as yet possible, except very
partially, to arrange chronologically the snatches of biography to be
gleaned from these stories. They are mostly told to show the occasion on
which some memorable act of the Buddha took place, or some memorable saying
was uttered, and are as exact as to place as they are indistinct as to
time. It would be impossible within the limits of this article to give any
large number of them, but space may be found for one or two.

A merchant from S[=u]naparanta having joined the Society was desirous of
preaching to his relations, and is said to have asked Gotama's permission
to do so. "The people of S[=u]naparanta," said the teacher, "are
exceedingly violent. If they revile you what will you do?" "I will make no
reply," said the mendicant. "And if they strike you?" "I will not strike in
return," was the reply. "And if they try to kill you?" "Death is no evil in
itself; many even desire it, to escape from the vanities of life, but I
shall take no steps either to hasten or to delay the time of my departure."
These answers were held satisfactory, and the monk started on his mission.

At another time a rich farmer held a harvest home, and the Buddha, wishing
to preach to him, is said to have taken his alms-bowl and stood by the side
of the field and begged. The farmer, a wealthy br[=a]hmin, said to him,
"Why do you come and beg? [v.04 p.0686] I plough and sow and earn my food;
you should do the same." "I too, O brahmin," said the beggar, "plough and
sow; and having ploughed and sown I eat." "You profess only to be a farmer;
no one sees your ploughing, what do you mean?" said the brahmin. "For my
cultivation," said the beggar, "faith is the seed, self-combat is the
fertilizing rain, the weeds I destroy are the cleaving to existence, wisdom
is my plough, and its guiding-shaft is modesty; perseverance draws my
plough, and I guide it with the rein of my mind; the field I work is in the
law, and the harvest that I reap is the never-dying nectar of Nirv[=a]na,
Those who reap this harvest destroy all the weeds of sorrow."

On another occasion he is said to have brought back to her right mind a
young mother whom sorrow had for a time deprived of reason. Her name was
Kis[=a]gotam[=i]. She had been married early, as is the custom in the East,
and had a child when she was still a girl. When the beautiful boy could run
alone he died. The young girl in her love for it carried the dead child
clasped to her bosom, and went from house to house of her pitying friends
asking them to give her medicine for it. But a Buddhist convert thinking
"she does not understand," said to her, "My good girl, I myself have no
such medicine as you ask for, but I think I know of one who has." "Oh, tell
me who that is?" said Kis[=a]gotam[=i]. "The Buddha can give you medicine;
go to him," was the answer. She went to Gotama; and doing homage to him
said, "Lord and master, do you know any medicine that will be good for my
child?" "Yes, I know of some," said the teacher. Now it was the custom for
patients or their friends to provide the herbs which the doctors required;
so she asked what herbs he would want. "I want some mustard-seed," he said;
and when the poor girl eagerly promised to bring some of so common a drug,
he added, "you must get it from some house where no son, or husband, or
parent or slave has died." "Very good," she said; and went to ask for it,
still carrying her dead child with her. The people said, "Here is
mustard-seed, take it"; but when she asked, "In my friend's house has any
son died, or a husband, or a parent or slave?" They answered, "Lady! what
is this that you say? the living are few, but the dead are many." Then she
went to other houses, but one said "I have lost a son," another "We have
lost our parents," another "I have lost my slave." At last, not being able
to find a single house where no one had died, her mind began to clear, and
summoning up resolution she left the dead body of her child in a forest,
and returning to the Buddha paid him homage. He said to her, "Have you the
mustard-seed?" "My lord," she replied, "I have not; the people tell me that
the living are few, but the dead are many." Then he talked to her on that
essential part of his system, the impermanency of all things, till her
doubts were cleared away, she accepted her lot, became a disciple, and
entered the "first path."

For forty-five years after entering on his mission Gotama itinerated in the
valley of the Ganges, not going farther than about 250 m. from Benares, and
always spending the rainy months at one spot--usually at one of the
_viharas_,[8] or homes, which had been given to the society. In the
twentieth year his cousin [=A]nanda became a mendicant, and from that time
seems to have attended on the Buddha, being constantly near him, and
delighting to render him all the personal service which love and reverence
could suggest. Another cousin, Devadatta, the son of the r[=a]ja of Koli,
also joined the society, but became envious of the teacher, and stirred up
Ajatasattu (who, having killed his father Bimbisara, had become king of
Rajagaha) to persecute Gotama. The account of the manner in which the
Buddha is said to have overcome the wicked devices of this apostate cousin
and his parricide protector is quite legendary; but the general fact of
Ajatasattu's opposition to the new sect and of his subsequent conversion
may be accepted.

The confused and legendary notices of the journeyings of Gotama are
succeeded by tolerably clear accounts of the last few days of his life.[9]
On a journey towards Kusin[=a]r[=a], a town about 120 m. north-north-east
of Benares, and about 80 m. due east of Kapilavastu, the teacher, being
then eighty years of age, had rested for a short time in a grove at
P[=a]w[=a], presented to the society by a goldsmith of that place named
Chunda. Chunda prepared for the mendicants a mid-day meal, and after the
meal the Buddha started for Kusin[=a]r[=a]. He had not gone far when he was
obliged to rest, and soon afterwards he said, "[=A]nanda, I am thirsty,"
and they gave him water to drink. Half-way between the two towns flows the
river Kukusht[=a]. There Gotama rested again, and bathed for the last time.
Feeling that he was dying, and careful lest Chunda should be reproached by
himself or others, he said to [=A]nanda, "After I am gone tell Chunda that
he will receive in a future birth very great reward; for, having eaten of
the food he gave me, I am about to die; and if he should still doubt, say
that it was from my own mouth that you heard this. There are two gifts
which will be blest above all others, namely, Suj[=a]t[=a]'s gift before I
attained wisdom under the Bo tree, and this gift of Chunda's before I pass
away." After halting again and again the party at length reached the river
Hiranyavati, close by Kusin[=a]r[=a], and there for the last time the
teacher rested. Lying down under some Sal trees, with his face towards the
south, he talked long and earnestly with [=A]nanda about his burial, and
about certain rules which were to be observed by the society after his
death. Towards the end of this conversation, when it was evening, [=A]nanda
broke down and went aside to weep, but the Buddha missed him, and sending
for him comforted him with the promise of Nirv[=a]na, and repeated what he
had so often said before about the impermanence of all things,--"O
[=A]nanda! do not weep; do not let yourself be troubled. You known what I
have said; sooner or later we must part from all we hold most dear. This
body of ours contains within itself the power which renews its strength for
a time, but also the causes which lead to its destruction. Is there
anything put together which shall not dissolve? But you, too, shall be free
from this delusion, this world of sense, this law of change. Beloved,"
added he, speaking to the rest of the disciples, "[=A]nanda for long years
has served me with devoted affection." And he spoke to them at some length
on the kindness of [=A]nanda.

About midnight Subhadra, a brahmin philosopher of Kusin[=a]r[=a], came to
ask some questions of the Buddha, but [=A]nanda, fearing that this might
lead to a longer discussion than the sick teacher could bear, would not
admit him. Gotama heard the sound of their talk, and asking what it was,
told them to let Subhadra come. The latter began by asking whether the six
great teachers knew all laws, or whether there were some that they did not
know, or knew only partially. "This is not the time," was the answer, "for
such discussions. To true wisdom there is only one way, the path that is
laid down in my system. Many have already followed it, and conquering the
lust and pride and anger of their own hearts, have become free from
ignorance and doubt and wrong belief, have entered the calm state of
universal kindliness, and have reached Nirv[=a]na even in this life. O
Subhadra! I do not speak to you of things I have not experienced. Since I
was twenty-nine years old till now I have striven after pure and perfect
wisdom, and following the good path, have found Nirv[=a]na." A rule had
been made that no follower of a rival system should be admitted to the
society without four months' probation. So deeply did the words or the
impressive manner of the dying teacher work upon Subhadra that he asked to
be admitted at once, and Gotama granted his request. Then turning to his
disciples he said, "When I have passed away and am no longer with you, do
not think that the Buddha has left you, and is not still in your midst. You
have my words, my explanations of the deep things of truth, the laws I have
laid down for the society; let them be your guide; the Buddha has not left
you." Soon afterwards he again spoke to them, urging them to reverence one
another, and rebuked one of the disciples who spoke [v.04 p.0687]
indiscriminately all that occurred to him. Towards the morning he asked
whether any one had any doubt about the Buddha, the law or the society; if
so, he would clear them up. No one answered, and [=A]nanda expressed his
surprise that amongst so many none should doubt, and all be firmly attached
to the law. But the Buddha laid stress on the final perseverance of the
saints, saying that even the least among the disciples who had entered the
first path only, still had his heart fixed on the way to perfection, and
constantly strove after the three higher paths. "No doubt," he said, "can
be found in the mind of a true disciple." After another pause he said:
"Behold now, brethren, this is my exhortation to you. Decay is inherent in
all component things. Work out, therefore, your emancipation with
diligence!" These were the last words the Buddha spoke; shortly afterwards
he became unconscious, and in that state passed away.

AUTHORITIES ON THE LIFE OF THE BUDDHA.--Canonical P[=a]li (reached their
present shape before the 4th century B.C.); episodes only, three of them
long: (1) _Birth_; text in _Majjhima Nik[=a]ya_, ed. Trenckner and Chalmers
(London, P[=a]li Text Society, 1888-1899), vol. iii. pp. 118-124; also in
_Anguttara Nik[=a]ya_, ed. Morris and Hardy (P[=a]li Text Society,
1888-1900), vol. ii. pp. 130-132. (2) _Adoration of the babe_; old ballad;
text in _Sutta Nip[=a]ta_, ed. Fausboell (P[=a]li Text Society, 1884), pp.
128-131; translation by the same in _Sacred Books of the East_ (Oxford,
1881), vol. x. pp. 124-131. (3) _Youth at home_; text in _Anguttara
Nik[=a]ya_, i. 145. (4) _The going forth_; old ballad; text in _Sutta
Nipata_, pp. 70-74 (London, 1896), pp. 99-101; prose account in _D[=i]gha
Nik[=a]ya_, ed. Rhys Davids and Carpenter (P[=a]li Text Society,
1890-1893), vol. i. p. 115, translated by Rhys Davids in _Dialogues of the
Buddha_ (Oxford, 1899), pp. 147-149. (5) _First long episode_; the going
forth, years of study and penance, attainment of Nirv[=a]na and Buddhahood,
and conversion of first five converts; text in _Majjhima_, all together at
ii. 93; parts repeated at i. 163-175, 240-249; ii. 212; _Vinaya_, ed.
Oldenberg (London, 1879-1883), vol. i. pp. 1-13. (6) _Second long episode_;
from the conversation of the five down to the end of the first year of the
teaching; text in _Vinaya_, i. 13-44, translated by Oldenberg in _Vinaya
Texts_, i. 73-151. (7) _Visit to Kapilavastu_; text in _Vinaya_, i. 82;
translation by Oldenberg in _Vinaya Texts_ (Oxford, 1881-1885), vol. i. pp.
207-210. (8) _Third long episode_; the last days; text in _D[=i]gha
Nik[=a]ya_ (the _Mah[=a]parinibb[=a]na Suttanta_), vol. ii. pp. 72-168,
translated by Rhys Davids _in Buddhist Suttas_ (Oxford, 1881), pp. 1-136.
Buddhist Sanskrit Texts: (i) _Mah[=a]vastu_ (probably 2nd century B.C.);
edited by Senart (3 vols., Paris, 1882-1897), summary in French prefixed to
each volume; down to the end of first year of the teaching. (2) _Lalita
Vistara_ (probably 1st century B.C.); edited by Mitra (Calcutta, 1877);
translated into French by Foucaux (Paris, 1884); down to the first sermon.
(3) _Buddha Carita_, by A['s]vaghosha, probably 2nd century A.D. edited by
Cowell (Oxford, 1892); translated by Cowell (Oxford, 1894, S.B.E. vol.
xlix.); an elegant poem; stops just before the attainment of Buddhahood.
(These three works reproduce and amplify the above episodes Nos. 1-6; they
retain here and there a very old tradition as to arrangement of clauses or
turns of expression.) Later P[=a]li: The commentary on the _J[=a]taka_,
written probably in the 5th century A.D., gives a consecutive narrative,
from the birth to the end of the second year of the teaching, based on the
canonical texts, but much altered and amplified; edited by Fausboell in
_J[=a]taka_, vol. i. (London, 1877), pp. 1-94; translated by Rhys Davids in
_Buddhist Birth Stories_ (London, 1880), pp. 1-133. Modern Works: (i)
Tibetan; _Life of the Buddha_; episodes collected and translated by W.
Woodville Rockhill (London, 1884), from Tibetan texts of the 9th and 10th
centuries A.D. (2) Sinhalese; episodes collected and translated by Spence
Hardy from Sinhalese texts of the 12th and later centuries, in _Manual of
Buddhism_ (London, 1897, 2nd edition), pp. 138-359. (3) Burmese: _The Life
or Legend of Gaudama_ (3rd edition, London, 1880), by the Right Rev. P.
Bigandet, translated from a Burmese work of A.D. 1773. (The Burmese is, in
its turn, a translation from a P[=a]li work of unknown date; it gives the
whole life, and is the only consecutive biography we have.) (4) Kambojian:
_Pathama Sambodhian_; translated into French by A. Leclere in _Livres
sacres du Cambodge_ (Paris, 1906).

(T. W. R. D.)

[1] _Note on the Date of the Buddha._--The now generally accepted date of
the Buddha is arrived at by adding together two numbers, one being the date
of the accession of Asoka to the throne, the second being the length of the
interval between that date and that of the death of the Buddha. The first
figure, that of the date of Asoka, is arrived at by the mention in one of
his edicts of certain Greek kings, as then living. The dates of these last
are approximately known; and arguing from these dates the date of Asoka's
accession has been fixed by various scholars (at dates varying only by a
difference of five years more or less) at about 270 B.C. The second figure,
the total interval between Asoka's accession and the Buddha's death, is
given in the Ceylon Chronicles as 218 years. Adding these two together, the
date of the Buddha's death would be 488 B.C., and, as he was eighty years
old at the time of his death, the date of his birth would be 568 B.C. The
dates for his death and birth accepted in Burma, Siam and Ceylon are about
half a century earlier, namely, 543 and 623 B.C., the difference being in
the date of Asoka's accession. It will be seen that the dates as adopted in
Europe are approximate only, and liable to correction if better data are
obtainable. The details of this chronological question are discussed at
length in Professor Rhys Davids' _Ancient Coins and Measures of Ceylon_
(London, 1877), where the previous discussions are referred to.

[2] See report of _Rex_. v. _Neuhaus_, Clerkenwell Sessions, September 15,
1906.

[3] The various legends of Mara are the subject of an exhaustive critical
analysis in Windsisch's _Mara and Buddha_ (Leipzig, 1895).

[4] Bigandet, p. 49; and compare _Jataka_, p. 67, line 27.

[5] _Vinaya Texts_, i. 97-99; cf. _Jataka_, vol. i. p. 82, lines 11-19.

[6] _Samyutta_, i. 105.

[7] Cf. Big. p. 99, with Hardy, _M.B._ p. 191. The Pali name is
_aditta-pariyaya_: the sermon on the lessons to be drawn from burning. The
text is _Vinaya_, i. 34 = _Samyutta_, iv. 19. A literal translation will be
found in _Vinaya Texts_, i. 134, 135.

[8] These were at first simple huts, built for the mendicants in some grove
of palm-trees as a retreat during the rainy season; but they gradually
increased in splendour and magnificence till the decay of Buddhism set in.
See the authorities quoted in _Buddhist India_, pp. 141, 142.

[9] The text of the account of this last journey is the
_Mah[=a]parinibb[=a]na Suttanta_, vol. ii. of the _D[=i]gha_ (ed. Rhys
Davids and Carpenter) The translation is in Rhys Davids' _Buddhist Suttas_.

BUDDHAGHOSA, a celebrated Buddhist writer. He was a Brahmin by birth and
was born near the great Bodhi tree at Budh Gay[=a]; in north India about
A.D. 390, his father's name being Kes[=i]. His teacher, Revata, induced him
to go to Ceylon, where the commentaries on the scriptures had been
preserved in the Sinhalese language, with the object of translating them
into P[=a]li. He went accordingly to Anuradhapura, studied there under
Sanghap[=a]la, and asked leave of the fraternity there to translate the
commentaries. With their consent he then did so, having first shown his
ability by writing the work _Visuddhi Magga_ (the Path of Purity, a kind of
summary of Buddhist doctrine). When he had completed his many years'
labours he returned to the neighbourhood of the Bodhi tree in north India.
Before he came to Ceylon he had already written a book entitled
_N[=a]nodaya_ (the Rise of Knowledge), and had commenced a commentary on
the principal psychological manual contained in the _Pitakas_. This latter
work he afterwards rewrote in Ceylon, as the present text (now published by
the P[=a]li Text Society) shows. One volume of the _Sumangala
Vil[=a]sin[=i]_ (a portion of the commentaries mentioned above) has been
edited, and extracts from his comment on the Buddhist canon law. This last
work has been discovered in a nearly contemporaneous Chinese translation
(an edition in P[=a]li is based on a comparison with that translation). The
works here mentioned form, however, only a small portion of what
Buddhaghosa wrote. His industry must have been prodigious. He is known to
have written books that would fill about 20 octavo volumes of about 400
pages each; and there are other writings ascribed to him which may or may
not be really his work. It is too early therefore to attempt a criticism of
it. But it is already clear that, when made acceptable, it will be of the
greatest value for the history of Indian literature and of Indian ideas. So
much is uncertain at present in that history for want of definite dates
that the voluminous writings of an author whose date is approximately
certain will afford a standard by which the age of other writings can be
tested. And as the original commentaries in Sinhalese are now lost his
works are the only evidence we have of the traditions then handed down in
the Buddhist community. The main source of our information about
Buddhaghosa is the _Mah[=a]vamsa_, written in Anur[=a]dhapura about fifty
years after he was working there. But there are numerous references to him
in P[=a]li books on P[=a]li literature; and a Burmese author of unknown
date, but possibly of the 15th century, has compiled a biography of him,
the _Buddhaghos' Uppatti_, of little value and no critical judgment.

See _Mah[=a]vamsa_, ch. xxxvii. (ed. Turnour, Colombo, 1837);
"Gandhavaramsa," p. 59, in _Journal of the P[=a]li Text Society_ (1886);
_Buddhghosuppatti_ (text and translation, ed. by E. Gray, London, 1893);
_Sumangala Vil[=a]sin[=i]_, edited by T. W. Rhys Davids and J. E.
Carpenter, vol. i. (London, P[=a]li Text Society, 1886). (T. W. R. D.)

BUDDHISM, the religion held by the followers of the Buddha (_q.v._), and
covering a large area in India and east and central Asia.

_Essential Doctrines._--We are fortunate in having preserved for us the
official report of the Buddha's discourse, in which he expounded what he
considered the main features of his system to the five men he first tried
to win over to his new-found faith. There is no reason to doubt its
substantial accuracy, not as to words, but as to purport. In any case it is
what the compilers of the oldest extant documents believed their teacher to
have regarded as the most important points in his teaching. Such a summary
must be better than any that could now be made. It is incorporated into two
divisions of their sacred books, first among the _suttas_ containing the
doctrine, and again in the rules of the society or order he founded
(_Samyutta_, v. 421 = _Vinaya_, i. 10). The gist of it, omitting a few
repetitions, is as follows:--

    "There are two aims which he who has given up the world ought not to
    follow after--devotion, on the one hand, to those things whose
    attractions depend upon the passions, a low and pagan ideal, fit only
    for the worldly-minded, ignoble, unprofitable, and the practice on the
    other hand of asceticism, which is painful, ignoble, unprofitable.
    There is a Middle Path discovered by the Tath[=a]gata[1]--a path which
    opens the eyes, and bestows understanding, which leads to peace, to
    insight, to the higher wisdom, to Nirv[=a]na. Verily! it is this Noble
    Eightfold Path; that is to say, Right Views, Right Aspirations, Right
    Speech, Right Conduct, Right Mode of Livelihood, Right Effort, Right
    Mindfulness, and Right Rapture.

    "Now this is the Noble Truth as to suffering. Birth is attended with
    pain, decay is painful, disease is painful, death is painful. Union
    with the unpleasant is painful, painful is separation from the
    pleasant; and any craving unsatisfied, that too is painful. In brief,
    the five aggregates of clinging (that is, the conditions of
    individuality) are painful.

    "Now this is the Noble Truth as to the origin of suffering. Verily! it
    is the craving thirst that causes the renewal of becomings, that is
    accompanied by sensual delights, and seeks satisfaction now here, now
    there--that is to say, the craving for the gratification of the senses,
    or the craving for a future life, or the craving for prosperity.

    [v.04 p.0688] "Now this is the Noble Truth as to the passing away of
    pain. Verily! it is the passing away so that no passion remains, the
    giving up, the getting rid of, the being emancipated from, the
    harbouring no longer of this craving thirst.

    "Now this is the Noble Truth as to the way that leads to the passing
    away of pain. Verily! it is this Noble Eightfold Path, that is to say,
    Right Views, Right Aspirations, Right speech, conduct and mode of
    livelihood, Right Effort, Right Mindfulness and Right Rapture."

A few words follow as to the threefold way in which the speaker claimed to
have grasped each of these Four Truths. That is all. There is not a word
about God or the soul, not a word about the Buddha or Buddhism. It seems
simple, almost jejune; so thin and weak that one wonders how it can have
formed the foundation for a system so mighty in its historical results. But
the simple words are pregnant with meaning. Their implications were clear
enough to the hearers to whom they were addressed. They were not intended,
however, to answer the questionings of a 20th-century European questioner,
and are liable now to be misunderstood. Fortunately each word, each clause,
each idea in the discourse is repeated, commented on, enlarged upon, almost
_ad nauseam_, in the _suttas_, and a short comment in the light of those
explanations may bring out the meaning that was meant.[2]

The passing away of pain or suffering is said to depend on an emancipation.
And the Buddha is elsewhere (_Vinaya_ ii. 239) made to declare: "Just as
the great ocean has one taste only, the taste of salt, just so have this
doctrine and discipline but one flavour only, the flavour of emancipation";
and again, "When a brother has, by himself, known and realized, and
continues to abide, here in this visible world, in that emancipation of
mind, in that emancipation of heart, which is Arahatship; that is a
condition higher still and sweeter still, for the sake of which the
brethren lead the religious life under me."[3] The emancipation is found in
a habit of mind, in the being free from a specified sort of craving that is
said to be the origin of certain specified sorts of pain. In some European
books this is completely spoiled by being represented as the doctrine that
existence is misery, and that desire is to be suppressed. Nothing of the
kind is said in the text. The description of suffering or pain is, in fact,
a string of truisms, quite plain and indisputable until the last clause.
That clause declares that the _Up[=a]d[=a]na Skandhas_, the five groups of
the constituent parts of every individual, involve pain. Put into modern
language this is that the conditions necessary to make an individual are
also the conditions that necessarily give rise to sorrow. No sooner has an
individual become separate, become an individual, than disease and decay
begin to act upon it. Individuality involves limitation, limitation in its
turn involves ignorance, and ignorance is the source of sorrow. Union with
the unpleasant, separation from the pleasant, unsatisfied craving, are each
a result of individuality. This is a deeper generalization than that which
says, "A man is born to trouble as the sparks fly upward." But it is put
forward as a mere statement of fact. And the previous history of religious
belief in India would tend to show that emphasis was laid on the fact, less
as an explanation of the origin of evil, than as a protest against a then
current pessimistic idea that salvation could not be reached on earth, and
must therefore be sought for in a rebirth in heaven, in the _Brahmaloka_.
For if the fact--the fact that the conditions of individuality are the
conditions, also, of pain--were admitted, then the individual there would
still not have escaped from sorrow. If the five ascetics to whom the words
were addressed once admitted this implication, logic would drive them also
to admit all that followed.

The threefold division of craving at the end of the second truth might be
rendered "the lust of the flesh, the lust of life and the love of this
present world." The two last are said elsewhere to be directed against two
sets of thinkers called the Eternalists and the Annihilationists, who held
respectively the everlasting-life-heresy and the
let-us-eat-and-drink-for-tomorrow-we-die-heresy.[4] This may be so, but in
any case the division of craving would have appealed to the five hearers as
correct.

The word translated "noble" in Noble Path, Noble Truth, is _ariya_, which
also means Aryan.[5] The negative, un-Aryan, is used of each of the two low
aims. It is possible that this rendering should have been introduced into
the translation; but the ethical meaning, though still associated with the
tribal meaning, had probably already become predominant in the language of
the time.

The details of the Path include several terms whose meaning and implication
are by no means apparent at first sight. Right Views, for instance, means
mainly right views as to the Four Truths and the Three Signs. Of the
latter, one is identical, or nearly so, with the First Truth. The others
are Impermanence and Non-soul (the absence of a soul)--both declared to be
"signs" of every individual, whether god, animal or man. Of these two again
the Impermanence has become an Indian rather than a Buddhist idea, and we
are to a certain extent familiar with it also in the West. There is no
Being, there is only a Becoming. The state of every individual is unstable,
temporary, sure to pass away. Even in the lowest class of things, we find,
in each individual, form and material qualities. In the higher classes
there is a continually rising series of mental qualities also. It is the
union of these that makes the individual. Every person, or thing, or god,
is therefore a putting together, a compound; and in each individual,
without any exception, the relation of its component parts is ever
changing, is never the same for two consecutive moments. It follows that no
sooner has separateness, individuality, begun, than dissolution,
disintegration, also begins. There can be no individuality without a
putting together: there can be no putting together without a becoming:
there can be no becoming without a becoming different: and there can be no
becoming different without a dissolution, a passing away, which sooner or
later will inevitably be complete.

Heracleitus, who was a generation or two later than the Buddha, had very
similar ideas;[6] and similar ideas are found in post-Buddhistic Indian
works.[7] But in neither case are they worked out in the same
uncompromising way. Both in Europe, and in all Indian thought except the
Buddhist, souls, and the gods who are made in imitation of souls, are
considered as exceptions. To these spirits is attributed a Being without
Becoming, an individuality without change, a beginning without an end. To
hold any such view would, according to the doctrine of the Noble (or Aryan)
Path, be erroneous, and the error would block the way against the very
entrance on the Path.

So important is this position in Buddhism that it is put in the forefront
of Buddhist expositions of Buddhism. The Buddha himself is stated in the
books to have devoted to it the very first discourse he addressed to the
first converts.[8] The first in the collection of the _Dialogues of Gotama_
discusses, and completely, categorically, and systematically rejects, all
the current theories about "souls." Later books follow these precedents.
Thus the _Kath[=a] Vatthu_, the latest book included in the canon,
discusses points of disagreement that had arisen in the community. It
places this question of "soul" at the head of all the points it deals with,
and devotes to it an amount of space quite overshadowing all the rest.[9]
So also in the earliest Buddhist book later than the canon--the very
interesting and suggestive series of conversations between the Greek king
Menander and the Buddhist teacher N[=a]gasena. It is precisely this
question of the "soul" that the unknown author takes up first, describing
how N[=a]gasena convinces the king that there is no such thing as the [v.04
p.0689] "soul" in the ordinary sense, and he returns to the subject again
and again.[10]

After Right Views come Right Aspirations. It is evil desires, low ideals,
useless cravings, idle excitements, that are to be suppressed by the
cultivation of the opposite--of right desires, lofty aspirations. In one of
the Dialogues[11] instances are given--the desire for emancipation from
sensuality, aspirations towards the attainment of love to others, the wish
not to injure any living thing, the desire for the eradication of wrong and
for the promotion of right dispositions in one's own heart, and so on. This
portion of the Path is indeed quite simple, and would require no commentary
were it not for the still constantly repeated blunder that Buddhism teaches
the suppression of all desire.

Of the remaining stages of the Path it is only necessary to mention two.
The one is Right Effort. A constant intellectual alertness is required.
This is not only insisted upon elsewhere in countless passages, but of the
three cardinal sins in Buddhism (_r[=a]ga_, _dosa_, _moha_) the last and
worst is stupidity or dullness, the others being sensuality and ill-will.
Right Effort is closely connected with the seventh stage, Right
Mindfulness. Two of the dialogues are devoted to this subject, and it is
constantly referred to elsewhere.[12] The disciple, whatsoever he
does--whether going forth or coming back, standing or walking, speaking or
silent, eating or drinking--is to keep clearly in mind all that it means,
the temporary character of the act, its ethical significance, and above all
that behind the act there is no actor (goer, seer, eater, speaker) that is
an eternally persistent unity. It is the Buddhist analogue to the Christian
precept: "Whether therefore ye eat or drink, or whatsoever ye do, do all to
the glory of God."

Under the head of Right Conduct the two most important points are Love and
Joy. Love is in P[=a]li _Mett[=a]_, and the _Metta Sutta_[13] says (no
doubt with reference to the Right Mindfulness just described): "As a
mother, even at the risk of her own life, protects her son, her only son,
so let him cultivate love without measure towards all beings. Let him
cultivate towards the whole world--above, below, around--a heart of love
unstinted, unmixed with the sense of differing or opposing interests. Let a
man maintain this mindfulness all the while he is awake, whether he be
standing, walking, sitting or lying down. This state of heart is the best
in the world."

Often elsewhere four such states are described, the Brahma Vih[=a]ras or
Sublime Conditions. They are Love, Sorrow at the sorrows of others, Joy in
the joys of others, and Equanimity as regards one's own joys and
sorrows.[14] Each of these feelings was to be deliberately practised,
beginning with a single object, and gradually increasing till the whole
world was suffused with the feeling. "Our mind shall not waver. No evil
speech will we utter. Tender and compassionate will we abide, loving in
heart, void of malice within. And we will be ever suffusing such a one with
the rays of our loving thought. And with that feeling as a basis we will
ever be suffusing the whole wide world with thought of love far-reaching,
grown great, beyond measure, void of anger or ill-will."[15]

The relative importance of love, as compared with other habits, is thus
described. "All the means that can be used as bases for doing right are not
worth the sixteenth part of the emancipation of the heart through love.
That takes all those up into itself, outshining them in radiance and glory.
Just as whatsoever stars there be, their radiance avails not the sixteenth
part of the radiance of the moon. That takes all those up into itself,
outshining them in radiance and glory--just as in the last month of the
rains, at harvest time, the sun, mounting up on high into the clear and
cloudless sky, overwhelms all darkness in the realms of space, and shines
forth in radiance and glory--just as in the night, when the dawn is
breaking, the morning star shines out in radiance and glory--just so all
the means that can be used as helps towards doing right avail not the
sixteenth part of the emancipation of the heart through love."[16]

The above is the positive side; the qualities (_dhamm[=a]_) that have to be
acquired. The negative side, the qualities that have to be suppressed by
the cultivation of the opposite virtues, are the Ten Bonds (_Samyojanas_),
the Four Intoxications (_[=A]sav[=a]_) and the Five Hindrances
(_N[=i]varanas_).

The Ten Bonds are: (1) Delusion about the soul; (2) Doubt; (3) Dependence
on good works; (4) Sensuality; (5) Hatred, ill-feeling; (6) Love of life on
earth; (7) Desire for life in heaven; (8) Pride; (9) Self-righteousness;
(10) Ignorance. The Four Intoxications are the mental intoxication arising
respectively from (1) Bodily passions, (2) Becoming, (3) Delusion, (4)
Ignorance. The Five Hindrances are (1) Hankering after worldly advantages,
(2) The corruption arising out of the wish to injure, (3) Torpor of mind,
(4) Fretfulness and worry, (5) Wavering of mind.[17] "When these five
hindrances have been cut away from within him, he looks upon himself as
freed from debt, rid of disease, out of jail, a free man and secure. And
gladness springs up within him on his realizing that, and joy arises to him
thus gladdened, and so rejoicing all his frame becomes at ease, and being
thus at ease he is filled with a sense of peace, and in that peace his
heart is stayed."[18]

To have realized the Truths, and traversed the Path; to have broken the
Bonds, put an end to the Intoxications, and got rid of the Hindrances, is
to have attained the ideal, the Fruit, as it is called, of Arahatship. One
might fill columns with the praises, many of them among the most beautiful
passages in P[=a]li poetry and prose, lavished on this condition of mind,
the state of the man made perfect according to the Buddhist faith. Many are
the pet names, the poetic epithets bestowed upon it--the harbour of refuge,
the cool cave, the island amidst the floods, the place of bliss,
emancipation, liberation, safety, the supreme, the transcendent, the
uncreated, the tranquil, the home of peace, the calm, the end of suffering,
the medicine for all evil, the unshaken, the ambrosia, the immaterial, the
imperishable, the abiding, the farther shore, the unending, the bliss of
effort, the supreme joy, the ineffable, the detachment, the holy city, and
many others. Perhaps the most frequent in the Buddhist text is Arahatship,
"the state of him who is worthy"; and the one exclusively used in Europe is
Nirv[=a]na, the "dying out"; that is, the dying out in the heart of the
fell fire of the three cardinal sins--sensuality, ill-will and
stupidity.[19]

The choice of this term by European writers, a choice made long before any
of the Buddhist canonical texts had been published or translated, has had a
most unfortunate result. Those writers did not share, could not be expected
to share, the exuberant optimism of the early Buddhists. Themselves giving
up this world as hopeless, and looking for salvation in the next, they
naturally thought the Buddhists must do the same, and in the absence of any
authentic scriptures, to correct the mistake, they interpreted Nirv[=a]na,
in terms of their own belief, as a state to be reached after death. As such
they supposed the "dying out" must mean the dying out of a "soul"; and
endless were the discussions as to whether this meant eternal trance, or
absolute annihilation, of the "soul." It is now thirty years since the
right interpretation, founded on the canonical texts, has been given, but
outside the ranks of P[=a]li scholars the old blunder is still often
repeated. It should be added that the belief in salvation in this world, in
this life, has appealed so strongly to Indian sympathies that from the time
of the rise of Buddhism down to the present day it has been adopted as a
part of general Indian belief, and _J[=i]vanmukti_, salvation during this
life, has become a commonplace in the religious language of India.

_Adopted Doctrines._--The above are the essential doctrines of [v.04
p.0690] the original Buddhism. They are at the same time its distinctive
doctrines; that is to say, the doctrines that distinguish it from all
previous teaching in India. But the Buddha, while rejecting the sacrifices
and the ritualistic magic of the brahmin schools, the animistic
superstitions of the people, the asceticism and soul-theory of the Jains,
and the pantheistic speculations of the poets of the pre-Buddhistic
_Upanishads_, still retained the belief in transmigration. This belief--the
transmigration of the soul, after the death of the body, into other bodies,
either of men, beasts or gods--is part of the animistic creed so widely
found throughout the world that it was probably universal. In India it had
already, before the rise of Buddhism, been raised into an ethical
conception by the associated doctrine of _Karma_, according to which a
man's social position in life and his physical advantages, or the reverse,
were the result of his actions in a previous birth. The doctrine thus
afforded an explanation, quite complete to those who believed it, of the
apparent anomalies and wrongs in the distribution here of happiness or woe.
A man, for instance, is blind. This is owing to his lust of the eye in a
previous birth. But he has also unusual powers of hearing. This is because
he loved, in a previous birth, to listen to the preaching of the law. The
explanation could always be exact, for it was scarcely more than a
repetition of the point to be explained. It fits the facts because it is
derived from them. And it cannot be disproved, for it lies in a sphere
beyond the reach of human inquiry.

It was because it thus provided a moral cause that it was retained in
Buddhism. But as the Buddha did not acknowledge a soul, the link of
connexion between one life and the next had to be found somewhere else. The
Buddha found it (as Plato also found it)[20] in the influence exercised
upon one life by a desire felt in the previous life. When two thinkers of
such eminence (probably the two greatest ethical thinkers of antiquity)
have arrived independently at this strange conclusion, have agreed in
ascribing to cravings, felt in this life, so great, and to us so
inconceivable, a power over the future life, we may well hesitate before we
condemn the idea as intrinsically absurd, and we may take note of the
important fact that, given similar conditions, similar stages in the
development of religious belief, men's thoughts, even in spite of the most
unquestioned individual originality, tend though they may never produce
exactly the same results, to work in similar ways.

In India, before Buddhism, conflicting and contradictory views prevailed as
to the precise mode of action of _Karma_; and we find this confusion
reflected in Buddhist theory. The prevailing views are tacked on, as it
were, to the essential doctrines of Buddhism, without being thoroughly
assimilated to them, or logically incorporated with them. Thus in the story
of the good layman Citta, it is an aspiration expressed on the
deathbed;[21] in the dialogue on the subject, it is a thought dwelt on
during life,[22] in the numerous stories in the _Peta_ and _Vim[=a]na
Vatthus_ it is usually some isolated act, in the discussions in the _Dhamma
Sangani_ it is some mental disposition, which is the _Karma_ (doing or
action) in the one life determining the position of the individual in the
next. These are really conflicting propositions. They are only alike in the
fact that in each case a moral cause is given for the position in which the
individual finds himself now; and the moral cause is his own act.

In the popular belief, followed also in the brahmin theology, the bridge
between the two lives was a minute and subtle entity called the soul, which
left the one body at death, through a hole at the top of the head, and
entered into the new body. The new body happened to be there, ready, with
no soul in it. The soul did not make the body. In the Buddhist adaptation
of this theory no soul, no consciousness, no memory, goes over from one
body to the other. It is the grasping, the craving, still existing at the
death of the one body that causes the new set of _Skandhas_, that is, the
new body with its mental tendencies and capacities, to arise. How this
takes place is nowhere explained.

The Indian theory of _Karma_ has been worked out with many points of great
beauty and ethical value. And the Buddhist adaptation of it, avoiding some
of the difficulties common to it and to the allied European theories of
fate and predestination, tries to explain the weight of the universe in its
action on the individual, the heavy hand of the immeasurable past we cannot
escape, the close connexion between all forms of life, and the mysteries of
inherited character. Incidentally it held out the hope, to those who
believed in it, of a mode of escape from the miseries of transmigration.
For as the Arahat had conquered the cravings that were supposed to produce
the new body, his actions were no longer _Karma_, but only _Kiriy[=a]_,
that led to no rebirth.[23]

Another point of Buddhist teaching adopted from previous belief was the
practice of ecstatic meditation. In the very earliest times of the most
remote animism we find the belief that a person, rapt from all sense of the
outside world, possessed by a spirit, acquired from that state a degree of
sanctity, was supposed to have a degree of insight, denied to ordinary
mortals. In India from the soma frenzy in the _Vedas_, through the mystic
reveries of the _Upanishads_, and the hypnotic trances of the ancient Yoga,
allied beliefs and practices had never lost their importance and their
charm. It is clear from the _Dialogues_, and other of the most ancient
Buddhist records,[24] that the belief was in full force when Buddhism
arose, and that the practice was followed by the Buddha's teachers. It was
quite impossible for him to ignore the question; and the practice was
admitted as a part of the training of the Buddhist Bhikshu. But it was not
the highest or the most important part, and might be omitted altogether.
The states of Rapture are called Conditions of Bliss, and they are regarded
as useful for the help they give towards the removal of the mental
obstacles to the attainment of Arahatship.[25] Of the thirty-seven
constituent parts of Arahatship they enter into one group of four. To seek
for Arahatship in the practice of the ecstasy alone is considered a deadly
heresy.[26] So these practices are both pleasant in themselves, and useful
as one of the means to the end proposed. But they are not the end, and the
end can be reached without them. The most ancient form these exercises took
is recorded in the often recurring paragraphs translated in Rhys Davids'
_Dialogues of the Buddha_ (i. 84-92). More modern, and much more elaborate,
forms are given in the _Yog[=a]vacaras Manual of Indian Mysticism as
practised by Buddhists_, edited by Rhys Davids from a unique MS. for the
P[=a]li Text Society in 1896. In the Introduction to this last work the
various phases of the question are discussed at length.

_Buddhist Texts. The Canonical Books._--It is necessary to remember that
the Buddha, like other Indian teachers of his period, taught by
conversation only. A highly-educated man (according to the education
current at the time), speaking constantly to men of similar education, he
followed the literary habit of his day by embodying his doctrines in set
phrases (_s[=u]tras_), on which he enlarged, on different occasions, in
different ways. Writing was then widely known. But the lack of suitable
writing materials made any lengthy books impossible. Such s[=u]tras were
therefore the recognized form of preserving and communicating opinion. They
were catchwords, as it were, _memoria technica_, which could easily be
remembered, and would recall the fuller expositions that had been based
upon them. Shortly after the Buddha's time the Brahmins had their s[=u]tras
in Sanskrit, already a dead language. He purposely put his into the
ordinary conversational idiom of the day, that is to say, into P[=a]li.
When the Buddha died these sayings were collected together by his disciples
into what they call the Four Nik[=a]yas, or "collections." These cannot
have reached their final form till about fifty or sixty years afterwards.
Other sayings and verses, most of them ascribed, not to the Buddha, but to
the disciples themselves, were put into a supplementary Nik[=a]ya. We know
[v.04 p.0691] of slight additions made to this Nik[=a]ya as late as the
time of Asoka, 3rd century B.C. And the developed doctrine, found in
certain portions of it, shows that these are later than the four old
Nik[=a]yas. For a generation or two the books so put together were handed
down by memory, though probably written memoranda were also used. And they
were doubtless accompanied from the first, as they were being taught, by a
running commentary. About one hundred years after the Buddha's death there
was a schism in the community. Each of the two schools kept an arrangement
of the canon--still in P[=a]li, or some allied dialect. Sanskrit was not
used for any Buddhist works till long afterwards, and never used at all, so
far as is known, for the canonical books. Each of these two schools broke
up in the following centuries, into others. Several of them had their
different arrangements of the canonical books, differing also in minor
details. These books remained the only authorities for about five
centuries, but they all, except only our extant P[=a]li Nik[=a]yas, have
been lost in India. These then are our authorities for the earliest period
of Buddhism. Now what are these books?

We talk necessarily of P[=a]li _books_. They are not books in the modern
sense. They are memorial sentences or verses intended to be learnt by
heart. And the whole style and method of arrangement is entirely
subordinated to this primary necessity. Each s[=u]tra (P[=a]li, _sutta_) is
very short; usually occupying only a page, or perhaps two, and containing a
single proposition. When several of these, almost always those that contain
propositions of a similar kind, are collected together in the framework of
one dialogue, it is called a _sullanta_. The usual length of such a
suttanta is about a dozen pages; only a few of them are longer, and a
collection of such suttantas might be called a book. But it is as yet
neither narrative nor essay. It is at most a string of passages, drawn up
in similar form to assist the memory, and intended, not to be read, but to
be learnt by heart. The first of the four Nik[=a]yas is a collection of the
longest of these suttantas, and it is called accordingly the _D[=i]gha
Nik[=a]ya_, that is "the Collection of Long Ones" (_sci._ Suttantas). The
next is the _Majjhima Nik[=a]ya_, the "Collection of the suttantas of
Medium Length"--medium, that is, as being shorter than the suttantas in the
D[=i]gha, and longer than the ordinary suttas preserved in the two
following collections. Between them these first two collections contain 186
dialogues, in which the Buddha, or in a few cases one of his leading
disciples, is represented as engaged in conversation on some one of the
religious, or philosophic, or ethical points in that system which we now
call Buddhism. In depth of philosophic insight, in the method of Socratic
questioning often adopted, in the earnest and elevated tone of the whole,
in the evidence they afford of the most cultured thought of the day, these
dialogues constantly remind the reader of the dialogues of Plato. But not
in style. They have indeed a style of their own; always dignified, and
occasionally rising into eloquence. But for the reasons already given, it
is entirely different from the style of Western writings which are always
intended to be read. Historical scholars will, however, revere this
collection of dialogues as one of the most priceless of the treasures of
antiquity still preserved to us. It is to it, above all, that we shall
always have to go for our knowledge of the most ancient Buddhism. Of the
186, 175 had by 1907 been edited for the P[=a]li Text Society, and the
remainder were either in the press or in preparation.

A disadvantage of the arrangement in dialogues, more especially as they
follow one another according to length and not according to subject, is
that it is not easy to find the statement of doctrine on any particular
point which is interesting one at the moment. It is very likely just this
consideration which led to the compilation of the two following Nik[=a]yas.
In the first of these, called the _Anguttara Nik[=a]ya_, all those points
of Buddhist doctrine capable of expression in classes are set out in order.
This practically includes most of the psychology and ethics of Buddhism.
For it is a distinguishing mark of the dialogues themselves that the
results arrived at are arranged in carefully systematized groups. We are
familiar enough in the West with similar classifications, summed up in such
expressions as the Seven Deadly Sins, the Ten Commandments, the Thirty-nine
Articles, the Four Cardinal Virtues, the Seven Sacraments and a host of
others. These numbered lists (it is true) are going out of fashion. The aid
which they afford to memory is no longer required in an age in which books
of reference abound. It was precisely as a help to memory that they were
found so useful in the early Buddhist times, when the books were all learnt
by heart, and had never as yet been written. And in the Anguttara we find
set out in order first of all the units, then all the pairs, then all the
trios, and so on. It is the longest book in the Buddhist Bible, and fills
1840 pages 8vo. The whole of the P[=a]li text has been published by the
P[=a]li Text Society, but only portions have been translated into English.
The next, and last, of these four collections contains again the whole, or
nearly the whole, of the Buddhist doctrine; but arranged this time in order
of subjects. It consists of 55 _Samyuttas_ or groups. In each of these the
suttas on the same subject, or in one or two cases the suttas addressed to
the same sort of people, are grouped together. The whole of it has been
published in five volumes by the P[=a]li Text Society. Only a few fragments
have been translated.

Many hundreds of the short suttas and verses in these two collections are
found, word for word, in the dialogues. And there are numerous instances of
the introductory story stating how, and when, and to whom the sutta was
enunciated--a sort of narrative framework in which the sutta is
set--recurring also. This is very suggestive as to the way in which the
earliest Buddhist records were gradually built up. The suttas came first
embodying, in set phrases, the doctrine that had to be handed down. Those
episodes, found in two or three different places, and always embodying
several suttas, came next. Then several of these were woven together to
form a suttanta. And finally the suttantas were grouped together into the
two Nik[=a]yas, and the suttas and episodes separately into the two others.
Parallel with this evolution, so to say, of the suttas, the short
statements of doctrine, in prose, ran the treatment of the verses. There
was a great love of poetry in the communities in which Buddhism arose.
Verses were helpful to the memory. And they were adopted not only for this
reason. The adherents of the new view of life found pleasure in putting
into appropriate verse the feelings of enthusiasm and of ecstasy which the
reforming doctrines inspired. When particularly happy in literary finish,
or peculiarly rich in religious feeling, such verses were not lost. These
were handed on, from mouth to mouth, in the small companies of the brethren
or sisters. The oldest verses are all lyrics, expressions either of
emotion, or of some deep saying, some pregnant thought. Very few of them
have been preserved alone. And even then they are so difficult to
understand, so much like puzzles, that they were probably accompanied from
the first by a sort of comment in prose, stating when, and why, and by whom
they were supposed to have been uttered. As a general rule such a framework
in prose is actually preserved in the old Buddhist literature. It is only
in the very latest books included in the canon that the narrative part is
also regularly in verse, so that a whole work consists of a collection of
ballads. The last step, that of combining such ballads into one long epic
poem, was not taken till after the canon was closed. The whole process,
from the simple anecdote in mixed prose and verse, the so-called
_[=a]khy[=a]na_, to the complete epic, comes out with striking clearness in
the history of the Buddhist canon. It is typical, one may notice in
passing, of the evolution of the epic elsewhere; in Iceland, for instance,
in Persia and in Greece. And we may safely draw the conclusion that if the
great Indian epics, the Mah[=a]-bh[=a]rata and the R[=a]m[=a]yana, had been
in existence when the formation of the Buddhist canon began, the course of
its development would have been very different from what it was.

As will easily be understood, the same reasons which led to literary
activity of this kind, in the earliest period, continued to hold good
afterwards. A number of such efforts, after the Nik[=a]yas had been closed,
were included in a supplementary Nik[=a]ya called the _Khuddaka Nik[=a]ya_.
It will throw very useful light upon the intellectual level in the Buddhist
community just [v.04 p.0692] after the earliest period, and upon literary
life in the valley of the Ganges in the 4th or 5th century B.C., if we
briefly explain what the tractates in this collection contain. The first,
the _Khuddaka P[=a]tha_, is a little tract of only a few pages. After a
profession of faith in the Buddha, the doctrine and the order, there
follows a paragraph setting out the thirty-four constituents of the human
body--bones, blood, nerves and so on--strangely incongruous with what
follows. For that is simply a few of the most beautiful poems to be found
in the Buddhist scriptures. There is no apparent reason, except their
exquisite versification, why these particular pieces should have been here
brought together. It is most probable that this tiny volume was simply a
sort of first lesson book for young neophytes when they joined the order.
In any case that is one of the uses to which it is put at present. The text
book is the _Dhammapada_. Here are brought together from ten to twenty
stanzas on each of twenty-six selected points of Buddhist self-training or
ethics. There are altogether 423 verses, gathered from various older
sources, and strung together without any other internal connexion than that
they relate more or less to the same subject. And the collector has not
thought it necessary to choose stanzas written in the same metre, or in the
same number of lines. We know that the early Christians were accustomed to
sing hymns, both in their homes and on the occasions of their meeting
together. These hymns are now irretrievably lost. Had some one made a
collection of about twenty isolated stanzas, chosen from these hymns, on
each of about twenty subjects--such as Faith, Hope, Love, the Converted
Man, Times of Trouble, Quiet Days, the Saviour, the Tree of Life, the Sweet
Name, the Dove, the King, the Land of Peace, the Joy Unspeakable--we should
have a Christian Dhammapada, and very precious such a collection would be.
The Buddhist Dhammapada has been edited by Professor Fausboell (2nd ed.,
1900), and has been frequently translated. Where the verses deal with those
ideas that are common to Christians and Buddhists, the versions are easily
intelligible, and some of the stanzas appeal very strongly to the Western
sense of religious beauty. Where the stanzas are full of the technical
terms of the Buddhist system of self-culture and self-control, it is often
impossible, without expansions that spoil the poetry, or learned notes that
distract the attention, to convey the full sense of the original. In all
these distinctively Buddhist verses the existing translations (of which
Professor Max Mueller's is the best known, and Dr Karl Neumann's the best)
are inadequate and sometimes quite erroneous. The connexion in which they
were spoken is often apparent in the more ancient books from which these
verses have been taken, and has been preserved in the commentary on the
work itself.

In the next little work the framework, the whole paraphernalia of the
ancient akhy[=a]na, is included in the work itself, which is called
_Ud[=a]na_, or "ecstatic utterances." The Buddha is represented, on various
occasions during his long career, to have been so much moved by some event,
or speech, or action, that he gave vent, as it were, to his pent-up
feelings in a short, ecstatic utterance, couched, for the most part, in one
or two lines of poetry. These outbursts, very terse and enigmatic, are
charged with religious emotion, and turn often on some subtle point of
Arahatship, that is, of the Buddhist ideal of life. The original text has
been published by the P[=a]li Text Society. The little book, a garland of
fifty of these gems, has been translated by General Strong. The next work
is called the _Iti Vuttaka_. This contains 120 short passages, each of them
leading up to a terse deep saying of the Buddha's, and introduced, in each
case, with the words _Iti vuttam Bhagaval[=a]_--"thus was it spoken by the
Exalted One." These anecdotes may or may not be historically accurate. It
is quite possible that the memory of the early disciples, highly trained as
it was, enabled them to preserve a substantially true record of some of
these speeches, and of the circumstances in which they were uttered. Some
or all of them may also have been invented. In either case they are
excellent evidence of the sort of questions on which discussions among the
earliest Buddhists must have turned. These ecstatic utterances and deep
sayings are attributed to the Buddha himself, and accompanied by the prose
framework. There has also been preserved a collection of stanzas ascribed
to his leading followers. Of these 107 are brethren, and 73 sisters, in the
order. The prose framework is in this case preserved only in the
commentary, which also gives biographies of the authors. This work is
called the _Thera-ther[=i]-g[=a]th[=a]_.

Another interesting collection is the _J[=a]taka_ book, a set of verses
supposed to have been uttered by the Buddha in some of his previous births.
These are really 550 of the folk-tales current in India when the canon was
being formed, the only thing Buddhist about them being that the Buddha, in
a previous birth, is identified in each case with the hero in the little
story. Here again the prose is preserved only in the commentary. And it is
a most fortunate chance that this--the oldest, the most complete, and the
most authentic collection of folklore extant--has thus been preserved
intact to the present day. Many of these stories and fables have wandered
to Europe, and are found in medieval homilies, poems and story-books. A
full account of this curious migration will be found in the introduction to
the present writer's _Buddhist Birth Stories_. A translation of the whole
book is now published, under the editorship of Professor Cowell, at the
Cambridge University Press. The last of these poetical works which it is
necessary to mention is the _Sutta Nip[=a]ta_, containing fifty-five poems,
all except the last merely short lyrics, many of great beauty. A very
ancient commentary on the bulk of these poems has been included in the
canon as a separate work. The poems themselves have been translated by
Professor Fausboell in the _Sacred Books of the East_. The above works are
our authority for the philosophy and ethics of the earliest Buddhists. We
have also a complete statement of the rules of the order in the _Vinaya_,
edited, in five volumes, by Professor Oldenberg. Three volumes of
translations of these rules, by him and by the present writer, have also
appeared in the _Sacred Books of the East_.

There have also been added to the canonical books seven works on
_Abhidhamma_, a more elaborate and more classified exposition of the Dhamma
or doctrine as set out in the _Nik[=a]yas_. All these works are later. Only
one of them has been translated, the so-called Dhamma Sangani. The
introduction to this translation, published under the title of _Buddhist
Psychology_, contains the fullest account that has yet appeared of the
psychological conceptions on which Buddhist ethics are throughout based.
The translator, Mrs Caroline Rhys Davids, estimates the date of this
ancient manual for Buddhist students as the 4th century B.C.

_Later Works._--So far the canon, almost all of which is now accessible to
readers of P[=a]li. But a good deal of work is still required before the
harvest of historical data contained in these texts shall have been made
acceptable to students of philosophy and sociology. These works of the
oldest period, the two centuries and a half, between the Buddha's time and
that of Asoka, were followed by a voluminous literature in the following
Periods--from Asoka to Kanishka, and from Kanishka to Buddhaghosa,--each of
about three centuries. Many of these works are extant in MS.; but only five
or six of the more important Have so far been published. Of these the most
interesting is the Milinda, one of the earliest historical novels preserved
to us. It is mainly religious and philosophical and purports to give the
discussion, extending over several days, in which a Buddhist elder named
N[=a]gasena succeeds in converting Milinda, that is Menander, the famous
Greek king of Bactria, to Buddhism. The P[=a]li text has been edited and
the work translated into English. More important historically, though
greatly inferior in style and ability, is the Mah[=a]vastu or Sublime
Story, in Sanskrit. The story is the one of chief importance to the
Buddhists--the story, namely, of how the Buddha won, under the Bo Tree, the
victory over ignorance, and attained to the Sambodhi, "the higher Wisdom,"
of Nirv[=a]na. The story begins with his previous births, in which also he
was accumulating the Buddha qualities. And as the Mah[=a]vastu was a
standard work of a particular sect, or rather school, called the
Mah[=a]-sanghikas, it has thus preserved for us the theory of the Buddha as
held outside the followers of the cannon, by those whose views developed,
in after centuries, into the Mah[=a]y[=a]na or modern form of Buddhism in
India. But this book, like all the ancient books, was composed, not in the
north, in Nepal, but in the valley of the Ganges, and it is partly [v.04
p.0693] in prose, partly in verse. Two other works, the _Lalita Vistara_
and the _Buddha Carita_, give us--but this, of course, is later--Sanskrit
poems, epics, on the same subject. Of these, the former may be as old as
the Christian era; the latter belongs to the 2nd century after Christ. Both
of them have been edited and translated. The older one contains still a
good deal of prose, the gist of it being often repeated in the verses. The
later one is entirely in verse, and shows off the author's mastery of the
artificial rules of prosody and poetics, according to which a poem, a
mah[=a]-k[=a]vya, ought, according to the later writers on the _Ars
poetica_, to be composed.

These three works deal only quite briefly and incidentally with any point
of Buddhism outside of the Buddha legend. Of greater importance for the
history of Buddhism are two later works, the _Netti Pakarana_ and the
_Saddharma Pundar[=i]ka_. The former, in P[=a]li, discusses a number of
questions then of importance in the Buddhist community; and it relies
throughout, as does the Milinda, on the canonical works, which it quotes
largely. The latter, in Sanskrit, is the earliest exposition we have of the
later Mah[=a]y[=a]na doctrine. Both these books may be dated in the 2nd or
3rd century of our era. The latter has been translated into English. We
have now also the text of the _Prajn[=a] P[=a]ramit[=a]_, a later treatise
on the Mah[=a]y[=a]na system, which in time entirely replaced in India the
original doctrines. To about the same age belongs also the
_Divy[=a]vad[=a]na_, a collection of legends about the leading disciples of
the Buddha, and important members of the order, through the subsequent
three centuries. These legends are, however, of different dates, and in
spite of the comparatively late period at which it was put into its present
form, it contains some very ancient fragments.

The whole of the above works were composed in the north of India; that is
to say, either north or a few miles south of the Ganges. The record is at
present full of gaps. But we can even now obtain a full and accurate idea
of the earliest Buddhism, and are able to trace the main lines of its
development through the first eight or nine centuries of its career. The
P[=a]li Text Society is still publishing two volumes a year; and the
Russian Academy has inaugurated a series to contain the most important of
the Sanskrit works still buried in MS. We have also now accessible in
P[=a]li fourteen volumes of the commentaries of the great 5th-century
scholars in south India and Ceylon, most of them the works either of
Buddhaghosa of Budh Gaya, or of Dhammap[=a]la of K[=a]ncipura (the ancient
name of Conjeeveram). These are full of important historical data on the
social, as well as the religious, life of India during the periods of which
they treat.

_Modern Research._--The striking archaeological discoveries of recent years
have both confirmed and added to our knowledge of the earliest period.
Pre-eminent among these is the discovery, by Mr William Peppe, on the
Birdpur estate, adjoining the boundary between English and Nepalese
territory, of the st[=u]pa, or cairn, erected by the S[=a]kiya clan over
their share of the ashes from the cremation pyre of the Buddha. About 12 m.
to the north-east of this spot has been found an inscribed pillar, put up
by Asoka as a record of his visit to the Lumbini Garden, as the place where
the future Buddha had been born. Although more than two centuries later
than the event to which it refers, this inscription is good evidence of the
site of the garden. There had been no interruption of the tradition; and it
is probable that the place was then still occupied by the descendants of
the possessors in the Buddha's time. North-west of this another Asoka
pillar has been discovered, recording his visit to the cairn erected by the
Sakyas over the remains of Kon[=a]gamana, one of the previous Puddhas or
teachers, whose follower Gotama the Buddha had claimed to be. These
discoveries definitely determine the district occupied by the S[=a]kiya
republic in the 6th and 7th centuries B.C. The boundaries, of course, are
not known; but the clan must have spread 30 m. or more along the lower
slopes of the Himalayas and 30 m. or more southwards over the plains. It
has been abandoned jungle since the 3rd century A.D., or perhaps earlier,
so that the ruined sites, numerous through the whole district, have
remained undisturbed, and further discoveries may be confidently expected.

The principal points on which this large number of older and better
authorities has modified our knowledge are as follows:--

1. We have learnt that the division of Buddhism, originating with Burnouf,
into northern and southern, is misleading. He found that the Buddhism in
his P[=a]li MSS., which came from Ceylon, differed from that in his
Sanskrit MSS., which came from Nepal. Now that the works he used have been
made accessible in printed editions, we find that, wherever the existing
MSS. came from, the original works themselves were all composed in the same
stretch of country, that is, in the valley of the Ganges. The difference of
the opinions expressed in the MSS. is due, not to the place where they are
now found, but _to the difference of time_ at which they were originally
composed. Not one of the books mentioned above is either northern or
southern. They all claim, and rightly claim, to belong, so far as their
place of origin is concerned, to the Majjhima Desa, the middle country. It
is undesirable to base the main division of our subject on an adventitious
circumstance, and especially so when the nomenclature thus introduced (it
is not found in the books themselves) cuts right across the true line of
division. The use of the terms northern and southern as applied, not to the
existing MSS., but to the original books, or to the Buddhism they teach,
not only does not help us, it is the source of serious misunderstanding. It
inevitably leads careless writers to take for granted that we have,
historically, two Buddhisms--one manufactured in Ceylon, the other in
Nepal. Now this is admittedly wrong. What we have to consider is Buddhism
varying through slight degrees, as the centuries pass by, in almost every
book. We may call it one, or we may call it many. What is quite certain is
that it is not two. And the most useful distinction to emphasize is, not
the ambiguous and misleading geographical one--derived from the places
where the modern copies of the MSS. are found; nor even, though that would
be better, the linguistic one--but the chronological one. The use,
therefore, of the inaccurate and misleading terms northern and southern
ought no longer to be followed in scholarly works on Buddhism.

2. Our ideas as to the social conditions that prevailed, during the
Buddha's lifetime, in the eastern valley of the Ganges have been modified.
The people were divided into clans, many of them governed as republics,
more or less aristocratic. In a few cases several of such republics had
formed confederations, and in four cases such confederations had already
become hereditary monarchies. The right historical analogy is not the state
of Germany in the middle ages, but the state of Greece in the time of
Socrates. The S[=a]kiyas were still a republic. They had republics for
their neighbours on the east and south, but on the western boundary was the
kingdom of Kosala, the modern Oudh, which they acknowledged as a suzerain
power. The Buddha's father was not a king. There were r[=a]jas in the clan,
but the word meant at most something like consul or archon. All the four
real kings were called Mah[=a]-r[=a]ja. And Suddhodana, the teacher's
father, was not even r[=a]ja. One of his cousins, named Bhaddiya, is styled
a r[=a]ja; but Suddhodana is spoken of, like other citizens, as Suddhodana
the S[=a]kiyan. As the ancient books are very particular on this question
of titles, this is decisive.

3. There was no caste--no caste, that is, in the modern sense of the term.
We have long known that the connubium was the cause of a long and
determined struggle between the patricians and the plebeians in Rome.
Evidence has been yearly accumulating on the existence of restrictions as
to intermarriage, and as to the right of eating together (commensality)
among other Aryan tribes, Greeks, Germans, Russians and so on. Even without
the fact of the existence now of such restrictions among the modern
successors of the ancient Aryans in India, it would have been probable that
they also were addicted to similar customs. It is certain that the notion
of such usages was familiar enough to some at least of the tribes that
preceded the Aryans in India. Rules of endogamy and exogamy; privileges,
restricted to certain classes, of eating together, are not only Indian or
Aryan, but world-wide phenomena. Both the spirit, and to a large degree the
actual details, of modern Indian caste-usages are identical [v.04 p.0694]
with these ancient, and no doubt universal, customs. It is in them that we
have the key to the origin of caste.

At any moment in the history of a nation such customs seem, to a
superficial observer, to be fixed and immutable. As a matter of fact they
are never quite the same in successive centuries, or even generations. The
numerous and complicated details which we sum up under the convenient, but
often misleading, single name of caste, are solely dependent for their
sanction on public opinion. That opinion seems stable. But it is always
tending to vary as to the degree of importance attached to some particular
one of the details, as to the size and complexity of the particular groups
in which each detail ought to be observed.

Owing to the fact that the particular group that in India worked its way to
the top, based its claims on religious grounds, not on political power, nor
on wealth, the system has, no doubt, lasted longer in India than in Europe.
But public opinion still insists, in considerable circles even in Europe,
on restrictions of a more or less defined kind, both as to marriage and as
to eating together. And in India the problem still remains to trace, in the
literature, the gradual growth of the system--the gradual formation of new
sections among the people, the gradual extension of the institution to the
families of people engaged in certain trades, belonging to the same group,
or sect, or tribe, tracing their ancestry, whether rightly or wrongly, to
the same source. All these factors, and others besides, are real factors.
But they are phases of the extension and growth, not explanations of the
origin of the system.

There is no evidence to show that at the time of the rise of Buddhism there
was any substantial difference, as regards the barriers in question,
between the peoples dwelling in the valley of the Ganges and their
contemporaries, Greek or Roman, dwelling on the shores of the Mediterranean
Sea. The point of greatest weight in the establishment of the subsequent
development, the supremacy in India of the priests, was still being hotly
debated. All the new evidence tends to show that the struggle was being
decided rather against than for the Brahmins. What we find in the Buddha's
time is caste in the making. The great mass of the people were
distinguished quite roughly into four classes, social strata, of which the
boundary lines were vague and uncertain. At one end of the scale were
certain outlying tribes and certain hereditary crafts of a dirty or
despised kind. At the other end the nobles claimed the superiority. But
Brahmins by birth (not necessarily sacrificial priests, for they followed
all sorts of occupations) were trying to oust the nobles from the highest
grade. They only succeeded, long afterwards, when the power of Buddhism had
declined.

4. It had been supposed on the authority of late priestly texts, where
boasts of persecution are put forth, that the cause of the decline of
Buddhism in India had been Brahmin persecution. The now accessible older
authorities, with one doubtful exception,[27] make no mention of
persecution. On the other hand, the comparison we are now able to make
between the canonical books of the older Buddhism and the later texts of
the following centuries, shows a continual decline from the old standpoint,
a continual approximation of the Buddhist views to those of the other
philosophies and religions of India. We can see now that the very event
which seemed, in the eyes of the world, to be the most striking proof of
the success of the new movement, the conversion and strenuous support, in
the 3rd century B.C., of Asoka, the most powerful ruler India had had, only
hastened the decline. The adhesion of large numbers of nominal converts,
more especially from the newly incorporated and less advanced provinces,
produced weakness rather than strength in the movement for reform. The day
of compromise had come. Every relaxation of the old thoroughgoing position
was welcomed and supported by converts only half converted. And so the
margin of difference between the Buddhists and their opponents gradually
faded almost entirely away. The soul theory, step by step, gained again the
upper hand. The popular gods and the popular superstitions are once more
favoured by Buddhists themselves. The philosophical basis of the old ethics
is overshadowed by new speculations. And even the old ideal of life, the
salvation of the Arahat to be won in this world and in this world only, by
self-culture and self-mastery, is forgotten, or mentioned only to be
condemned. The end was inevitable. The need of a separate organization
became less and less apparent. The whole pantheon of the Vedic gods, with
the ceremonies and the sacrifices associated with them, passed indeed away.
But the ancient Buddhism, the party of reform, was overwhelmed also in its
fall; and modern Hinduism arose on the ruins of both.

AUTHORITIES.--The attention of the few scholars at work on the subject
being directed to the necessary first step of publishing the ancient
authorities, the work of exploring them, of analysing and classifying the
data they contain, has as yet been very imperfectly done. The annexed list
contains only the most important works.

TEXTS.--_P[=a]li Text Society_, 57 vols.; _J[=a]taka_, 7 vols., ed.
Fausboell, 1877-1897; _Vinaya_, 5 vols., ed. Oldenberg, 1879-1883;
_Dhammapada_, ed. Fausboell, 2nd ed., 1900; _Divy[=a]vad[=a]na_, ed. Cowell
and Neil, 1882; _Mah[=a]vastu_, ed. Senart, 3 vols., 1882-1897; _Buddha
Carita_, ed. Cowell, 1892; _Milinda-panho_, ed. Trenckner, 1880.

TRANSLATIONS.--_Vinaya Texts_, by Rhys Davids and Oldenberg, 3 vols.,
1881-1885; _Dhammapada_, by Max Mueller, and _Sutta Nipata_, by Fausboell,
1881; _Questions of King Milinda_, by Rhys Davids, 2 vols., 1890-1894;
_Buddhist Suttas,_ by Rhys Davids, 1881; _Saddharma Pundar[=i]ka_, by Kern,
1884; _Buddhist Mah[=a]y[=a]na Texts_, by Cowell and Max Mueller, 1894--all
the above in the "Sacred Books of the East"; _J[=a]taka_, vol. i., by Rhys
Davids, under the title _Buddhist Birth Stories_, 1880; vols. i.-vi., by
Chalmers, Neil, Francis, and Rouse, 1895-1897; _Buddhism in Translations_,
by Warren, 1896; _Buddhistische Anthologie_, by Neumann, 1892. _Lieder der
Moenche und Nonnen_, 1899, by the same; _Dialogues of the Buddha_, by Rhys
Davids, 1899; _Die Reden Gotamo Buddhas_, by Neumann, 3 vols., 1899-1903;
_Buddhist Psychology_, by Mrs Rhys Davids, 1900.

MANUALS, MONOGRAPHS, &C.--_Buddhism_, by Rhys Davids, 12mo, 20th thousand,
1903; _Buddha, sein Leben, seine Lehre und seine Gemeinde_, by Oldenberg,
5th edition, 1906; _Der Buddhismus und seine Geschichte in Indien_, by
Kern, 1882; _Der Buddhismus_, by Edmund Hardy, 1890; _American Lectures,
Buddhism_, by Rhys Davids, 1896; _Inscriptions de Piyadasi_, by Senart, 2
vols., 1881-1886; _Mara und Buddha_, by Windisch, 1895; _Buddhist India_,
by Rhys Davids, 1903.

(T. W. R. D.)

[1] That is by the Arahat, the title the Buddha always uses of himself. He
does not call himself the Buddha, and his followers never address him as
such.

[2] One very ancient commentary on the Path has been preserved in three
places in the canon: _D[=i]gha_, ii. 305-307 and 311-313, _Majjhima_, iii.
251, and _Samyutta_, v. 8.

[3] _Mah[=a]li Suttanta_; translated in Rhys Davids' _Dialogues of the
Buddha_, vol. i. p. 201 (cf. p. 204).

[4] See _Iti-vuttaka_, p. 44; _Samyutta_, iii. 57.

[5] See _D[=i]gha_, ii. 28; _J[=a]t_. v. 48, ii. 80.

[6] Burnett, _Early Greek Philosophy_, p. 149.

[7] _Katha Up_. 2, 10; _Bhag. G[=i]t[=a]_, 2, 14; 9, 33.

[8] The _Anatta-lakkhana Sutta_ (_Vinaya_, i. 13 = _Samyutta_, iii. 66 and
iv. 34), translated in _Vinaya Texts_, i. 100-102.

[9] See article on "Buddhist Schools of Thought," by Rhys Davids, in the
_J.R.A.S._ for 1892.

[10] _Questions of King Milinda_, translated by Rhys Davids (Oxford,
1890-1894), vol. i. pp. 40, 41, 85-87; vol. ii. pp. 21-25, 86-89.

[11] _Majjhima_, iii. 251, cf. _Samyutta_, v. 8.

[12] _D[=i]gha_, ii. 290-315. _Majjhima_, i. 55 et seq. Cf. Rhys Davids'
_Dialogues of the Buddha_, i. 81.

[13] No. 8 in the _Sutta Nipata_ (p. 26 of Fausboell's edition). It is
translated by Fausboell in vol. x. of the _S.B.E._, and by Rhys Davids,
_Buddhism_, p. 109.

[14] _D[=i]gha_, ii. 186-187.

[15] _Majjhima_, i. 129.

[16] _Iti-vuttaka_, pp. 19-21.

[17] On the details of these see _D[=i]gha_, i. 71-73, translated by Rhys
Davids in _Dialogues of the Buddha_, i. 82-84.

[18] _D[=i]gha_, i. 74.

[19] _Samyutta_, iv. 251, 261.

[20] _Phaedo_, 69 et seq. The idea is there also put forward in connexion
with a belief in transmigration.

[21] _Samyutta_, iv. 302.

[22] _Majjhima_, iii. 99 et seq.

[23] The history of the Indian doctrine of Karma has yet to be written. On
the Buddhist side see Rhys Davids' _Hibbert Lectures_, pp. 73-120, and
Dahlke, _Aufsatze zum Verstandnis des Buddhismus_ (Berlin, 1903), i.
92-106, and ii. l-11.

[24] For instance, _Majjhima_, i. 163-166

[25] _Anguttara_, iii. 119.

[26] _D[=i]gha_, i. 38.

[27] See _Journal of the P[=a]li Text Society_, 1896, pp. 87-92.

BUDE [BUDAEUS], GUILLAUME (1467-1540), French scholar, was born at Paris.
He went to the university of Orleans to study law, but for several years,
being possessed of ample means, he led an idle and dissipated life. When
about twenty-four years of age he was seized with a sudden passion for
study, and made rapid progress, particularly in the Latin and Greek
languages. The work which gained him greatest reputation was his _De Asse
et Partibus_ (1514), a treatise on ancient coins and measures. He was held
in high esteem by Francis I., who was persuaded by him, and by Jean du
Bellay, bishop of Narbonne, to found the Collegium Trilingue, afterwards
the College de France, and the library at Fontainebleau, which was removed
to Paris and was the origin of the Bibliotheque Nationale. He also induced
Francis to refrain from prohibiting printing in France, which had been
advised by the Sorbonne in 1533. He was sent by Louis XII. to Rome as
ambassador to Leo X., and in 1522 was appointed _maitre des requetes_ and
was several times _prevot des marchands_. He died in Paris on the 23rd of
August 1540.

Bude was also the author of _Annotationes in XXIV. libros Pandectarum_
(1508), which, by the application of philology and history, had a great
influence on the study of Roman law, and of _Commentarii linguae Graecae_
(1529), an extensive collection of lexicographical notes, which contributed
greatly to the study of Greek literature in France. Bude corresponded with
the most learned men of his time, amongst them Erasmus, who called him the
marvel of France, and Thomas More. He wrote with equal facility in Greek
and Latin, although his Latin is inferior to his Greek, being somewhat
harsh and full of Greek constructions. His request that he should be buried
at night, and his widow's open profession of Protestantism at Geneva (where
she retired after his death), caused him to be suspected of leanings
towards Calvinism. At the time of the massacre of St Bartholomew, the
members of his family were obliged to flee from France. Some took refuge in
Switzerland, where they worthily upheld the traditions of their house,
while others settled in Pomerania under the name Budde or Buddeus.

[v.04 p.0695] See Le Roy, _Vita G. Budaei_ (1540); Rebitte, _G. Bude,
restaurateur des etudes grecques en France_ (1846); E. de Bude, _Vie de G.
Bude_ (1884), who refutes the idea of his ancestor's Protestant views;
D'Hozier, _La Maison de Bude_; L. Delaruelle, _Etudes sur l'humanisme
francais_ (1907).

BUDE, a small seaport and watering-place in the Launceston parliamentary
division of Cornwall, England, on the north coast at the mouth of the river
Bude. With the market town of Stratton, 11/2 m. inland to the east, it forms
the urban district of Stratton and Bude, with a population (1901) of 2308.
Bude is served by a branch of the London & South-Western railway. Its only
notable building is the Early English parish church of St Michael and All
Angels. The climate is healthy and the coast scenery in the neighbourhood
fine, especially towards the south. There the gigantic cliffs, with their
banded strata, have been broken into fantastic forms by the waves. Many
ships have been wrecked on the jagged reefs which fringe their base. The
figure-head of one of these, the "Bencellon," lost in 1862, is preserved in
the churchyard. The harbour, sheltered by a breakwater, will admit vessels
of 300 tons at high water; and the river has been dammed to form a basin
for the canal which runs to Launceston. Some fishing is carried on: but the
staple trade is the export of sand, which, being highly charged with
carbonate of lime, is much used for manure. There are golf links near the
town. The currents in the bay make bathing dangerous.

BUDGELL, EUSTACE (1686-1737), English man of letters, the son of Dr Gilbert
Budgell, was born on the 19th of August 1686 at St Thomas, near Exeter. He
matriculated in 1705 at Trinity College, Oxford, and afterwards joined the
Inner Temple, London; but instead of studying law he devoted his whole
attention to literature. Addison, who was first cousin to his mother,
befriended him, and, on being appointed secretary to Lord Wharton,
lord-lieutenant of Ireland in 1710, took Budgell with him as one of the
clerks of his office. Budgell took part with Steele and Addison in writing
the _Tatler_. He was also a contributor to the _Spectator_ and the
_Guardian_,--his papers being marked with an X in the former, and with an
asterisk in the latter. He was subsequently made under-secretary to
Addison, chief secretary to the lords justices of Ireland, and deputy-clerk
of the council, and became a member of the Irish parliament. In 1717, when
Addison became principal secretary of state in England, he procured for
Budgell the place of accountant and comptroller-general of the revenue in
Ireland. But the next year, the duke of Bolton being appointed
lord-lieutenant, Budgell wrote a lampoon against E. Webster, his secretary.
This led to his being removed from his post of accountant-general, upon
which he returned to England, and, contrary to the advice of Addison,
published his case in a pamphlet. In the year 1720 he lost L20,000 by the
South Sea scheme, and afterwards spent L5000 more in unsuccessful attempts
to get into parliament. He began to write pamphlets against the ministry,
and published many papers in the _Craftsman_. In 1733 he started a weekly
periodical called the _Bee_, which he continued for more than a hundred
numbers. By the will of Matthew Tindal, the deist, who died in 1733, a
legacy of 2000 guineas was left to Budgell; but the bequest (which had, it
was alleged, been inserted in the will by Budgell himself) was successfully
disputed by Tindal's nephew and nearest heir, Nicholas Tindal, who
translated and wrote a _Continuation_ of the _History of England_ of Paul
de Rapin-Thoyras. Hence Pope's lines--

 "Let Budgell charge low Grub Street on his quill,
  And write whate'er he pleased--except his will."[1]

Budgell is said to have sold the second volume of Tindal's _Christianity as
Old as the Creation_ to Bishop Gibson, by whom it was destroyed. The
scandal caused by these transactions ruined him. On the 4th of May 1737,
after filling his pockets with stones, he took a boat at Somerset-stairs,
and while the boat was passing under the bridge threw himself into the
river. On his desk was found a slip of paper with the words--"What Cato
did, and Addison approved, cannot be wrong." Besides the works mentioned
above, he wrote a translation (1714) of the _Characters_ of Theophrastus.
He never married, but left a natural daughter, Anne Eustace, who became an
actress at Drury Lane.

See Cibber's _Lives of the Poets_, vol. v.

[1] _Epistle to Dr Arbuthnot_, lines 378-379.

BUDGET (originally from a Gallic word meaning sack, latinized as _bulga_,
leather wallet or bag, thence in O. Fr. _bougette_, from which the Eng.
form is derived), the name applied to an account of the ways and means by
which the income and expenditure for a definite period are to be balanced,
generally by a finance minister for his state, or by analogy for smaller
bodies.[1] The term first came into use in England about 1760. In the
United Kingdom the chancellor of the exchequer, usually in April, lays
before the House of Commons a statement of the actual results of revenue
and expenditure in the past finance year (now ending March 31), showing how
far his estimates have been realized, and what surplus or deficit there has
been in the income as compared with the expenditure. This is accompanied by
another statement in which the chancellor gives an estimate of what the
produce of the revenue may be in the year just entered upon, supposing the
taxes and duties to remain as they were in the past year, and also an
estimate of what the expenditure will be in the current year. If the
estimated revenue, after allowing for normal increase of the principal
sources of income, be less than the estimated expenditure, this is deemed a
case for the imposition of some new, or the increase of some existing, tax
or taxes. On the other hand, if the estimated revenue shows a large surplus
over the estimated expenditure, there is room for remitting or reducing
some tax or taxes, and the extent of this relief is generally limited to
the amount of surplus realized in the previous year. The chancellor of the
exchequer has to take parliament into confidence on his estimates, both as
regards revenue and expenditure; and these estimates are prepared by the
various departments of the administration. They are divided into two parts,
the consolidated fund services and the supply services, the first
comprising the civil list, debt charge, pensions and courts of justice,
while the "supply" includes the remaining expenditure of the country, as
the army, the navy, the civil service and revenue departments, the
post-office and telegraph services. The consolidated fund services are an
annual charge, fixed by statute, and alterable only by statute, but the
supply services may be gone through in detail, item by item, by the House
of Commons, which forms itself into a committee of supply for the purpose.
These items can be criticized, and reduced (but not increased) by
amendments proposed by private members. The committee of ways and means
(also a committee of the whole House) votes the supplies when granted and
originates all taxes. The resolutions of these committees are reported to
the House, and when the taxation and expenditure obtain the assent of
parliament, the results as thus adjusted become the final budget estimate
for the year, and are passed as the Finance Act. This system of annual
review and adjustment of the public finances obtains not only in the
British colonies, but in British India. The Indian budget, giving the
results of income and expenditure in the year ending 31st of December, and
the prospective estimates, is laid before the imperial parliament in the
course of the ensuing session.

The budget, though modified by different forms, has also long been
practised in France, the United States, and other constitutional countries,
and has in some cases been adopted by autocratic Powers. Russia began the
publication of annual budgets in 1866; Egypt has followed the example; so
also has Turkey, by an imperial decree of 1875. All countries agree in
taking a yearly period, but the actual date of commencement varies
considerably. The German and Danish financial year, like that of the United
Kingdom, begins on the 1st of April; in France, Belgium and Austria, it
begins on the 1st of January; in Italy, Spain, the United States and
Canada, on the 1st of July. [v.04 p.0696] Previously to 1832, however, the
English financial year ran from the 1st of January to the 31st of December.

It may be mentioned that Disraeli introduced a budget (on which he was
defeated) in the autumn of 1852; and in 1860, owing to the ratification of
the commercial treaty with France, the budget was introduced on the 10th of
February. In 1859, through a change of administration, the budget was not
introduced until the 18th of July, while in 1880 there were two budgets,
one introduced in March under Disraeli's administration, and the other in
June, under Gladstone's administration.

National budgets are to be discriminated (1) as budgets passing under
parliamentary scrutiny and debate from year to year, and (2) budgets
emitted on executive authority. In most constitutional countries the
procedure is somewhat of a mean between the extremes of the United Kingdom
and the United States. In the United Kingdom the budget is placed by the
executive before the whole House, without any previous examination except
by the cabinet, and it is scrutinized by the House sitting as a committee;
in the majority of countries, however, the budget undergoes a preliminary
examination by a specially selected committee, which has the power to make
drastic changes in the proposals of the executive. In the United States, on
the other hand, the budget practically emanates from Congress, for there is
no connexion between the executive and the legislative departments. The
estimates prepared by the various executive departments are submitted to
the House of Representatives by the secretary of the treasury. With these
estimates two separate committees deal. The committee on ways and means
deals with taxation, and the committee on appropriations with expenditure.
The latter committee is divided into various sub-committees, each of which
brings in an appropriation bill for the department or subject with which it
is charged.

There are also, in all the greater countries, local and municipal taxations
and expenditures of only less account than the national. In federal
governments such as the United States, the German empire, or the Argentine
republic, the budgets of the several states of the federation have to be
consulted, as well as the federal budgets, for a knowledge of the finances.

AUTHORITIES.--Stourm, _Le Budget, son histoire et son mecanisme_ (1889),
which gives a comparative study of the budgets of different countries, is
the best book upon the subject. See also Siedler, _Budget und
Budgetrecht_(1885); Sendel, _Ueber Budgetrecht_(1890); Besson, _Le Controle
des budgets en France et a l'etranger_ (1899); Bastable, _Public Finance_
(3rd ed., 1903); Eugene E. Agger, _The Budget in American Commonwealths_
(New York, 1907).

[1] It was a name applied also to a leather-covered case or small coffer.
Cotgrave translates _bougette_ "a little coffer or trunk ... covered with
leather." It became a common word for a despatch box in which official
papers were kept. The chancellor of the exchequer thus was said to "open
his budget" when he made his annual statement.

BUDINI, an ancient nation in the N.E. of the Scythia (_q.v._) of Herodotus
(iv, 21, 108, 109), probably on the middle course of the Volga about
Samara. They are described as light-eyed and red-haired, and lived by
hunting in their thick forests. They were probably Finns of the branch now
represented by the Votiaks and Permiaks, forced northwards by later
immigrants. In their country was a wooden city inhabited by a distinct
race, the Geloni, who seem to have spoken an Indo-European tongue. Later
writers add nothing to our knowledge, and are chiefly interested in the
tarandus, an animal which dwelt in the woods of the Budini and seems to
have been the reindeer (Aristotle ap. Aelian, _Hist. Anim._ xv. 33).

(E. H. M.)

BUDWEIS (Czech _Bud[ve]jovice_), a town of Bohemia, Austria, 80 m. S.S.W.
of Prague by rail. Pop. (1900) 39,630. It is situated at the junction of
the Maltsch with the Moldau, which here becomes navigable, and possesses a
beautiful square, lined with fine arcaded buildings, the principal one
being the town-hall, built in 1730 in Renaissance style. Other interesting
buildings are the cathedral with its detached tower, dating from 1500, and
the Marien-Kirche with fine cloisters. Budweis has a large, varied and
growing industry, which comprises the manufacture of chemicals, matches,
paper, machinery, bricks and tiles, corn and saw mills, boat-building,
bell-founding and black-lead pencils. It is the principal commercial centre
of South Bohemia, being an important railway junction, as well as a river
port, and carries on a large trade in corn, timber, lignite, salt,
industrial products and beer, the latter mostly exported to America. It is
the see of a bishop since 1783, and is the centre of a German enclave in
Czech Bohemia. But the Czech element is steadily increasing, and the
population of the town was in 1908 60% Czech. The railway from Budweis to
Linz, laid in 1827 for horse-cars, was the first line constructed in
Austria. A little to the north, in the Moldau valley, stands the beautiful
castle of Frauenberg, belonging to Prince Schwarzenberg. It stands on the
site formerly occupied by a 13th-century castle, and was built in the
middle of the 19th century, after the model of Windsor Castle.

The old town of Budweis was founded in the 13th century by Budivoj
Vitkovec, father of Zavi[vs] of Falkenstein. In 1265 Ottokar II. founded
the new town, which was soon afterwards created a royal city. Charles IV.
and his son Wenceslaus granted the town many privileges. Although mainly
Catholic, Budweis declared for King George Pod[ve]brad, and in 1468 was
taken by the crusaders under Zdenko of Stenberg. From this time the town
remained faithful to the royal cause, and in 1547 was granted by the
emperor Ferdinand the privilege of ranking at the diet next to Prague and
Pilsen. After the outbreak of the Thirty Years' War Budweis was confirmed
in all its privileges.

BUELL, DON CARLOS (1818-1898), American soldier, was born near Marietta,
Ohio, on the 23rd of March 1818. He graduated at West Point in 1841, and as
a company officer of infantry took part in the Seminole War of 1841-42 and
the Mexican War, during which he was present at almost all the battles
fought by Generals Taylor and Scott, winning the brevet of captain at
Monterey, and that of major at Contreras-Churubusco, where he was wounded.
From 1848 to 1861 he performed various staff duties, chiefly as
assistant-adjutant-general. On the outbreak of the Civil War he was
appointed lieutenant-colonel on the 11th of May 1861, brigadier-general of
volunteers a few days later, and major-general of volunteers in March 1862.
He aided efficiently in organizing the Army of the Potomac, and, at the
instance of General McClellan, was sent, in November 1861, to Kentucky to
succeed General William T. Sherman in command. Here he employed himself in
the organization and training of the Army of the Ohio (subsequently of the
Cumberland), which to the end of its career retained a standard of
discipline and efficiency only surpassed by that of the Army of the
Potomac. In the spring of 1862 Buell followed the retiring Confederates
under Sidney Johnston, and appeared on the field of Shiloh (_q.v._) at the
end of the first day's fighting. On the following day, aided by Buell's
fresh and well-trained army, Grant carried all before him. Buell
subsequently served under Halleck in the advance on Corinth, and in the
autumn commanded in the campaign in Kentucky against Bragg. After a period
of manoeuvring in which Buell scarcely held his own, this virtually ended
in the indecisive battle of Perryville. The alleged tardiness of his
pursuit, and his objection to a plan of campaign ordered by the Washington
authorities, brought about Buell's removal from command. With all his gifts
as an organizer and disciplinarian, he was haughty in his dealings with the
civil authorities, and, in high command, he showed, on the whole,
unnecessary tardiness of movement and an utter disregard for the
requirements of the political situation. Moreover, as McClellan's friend,
holding similar views, adverse politically to the administration, he
suffered by McClellan's displacement. The complaints made against him were
investigated in 1862-1863, but the result of the investigation was not
published. Subsequently he was offered military employment, which he
declined. He resigned his volunteer commission in May, and his regular
commission in June 1864. He was president of Green River ironworks
(1865-1870), and subsequently engaged in various mining enterprises; he
served (1885-1889) as pension agent at Louisville. He died near Rockport,
Kentucky, on the 19th of November 1898.

BUENAVENTURA, a Pacific port of Colombia, in the department of Cauca, about
210 m. W.S.W. of Bogota. Pop. about 1200. The town is situated on a small
island, called Cascajal, at the head of a broad estuary or bay projecting
inland from the Bay of Choco and 10 m. from its mouth. Its geographical
position is lat. 3 deg. 48' N., long. 77 deg. 12' W. The estuary is deep enough for
vessels of 24 ft. draught and affords an excellent harbour. Buenaventura is
a port of call for two lines of steamers (English [v.04 p.0697] and
German), and is the Colombian landing-place of the West Coast cable. The
town is mean in appearance, and has a very unhealthy climate, oppressively
hot and humid. It is the port for the upper basin of the Cauca, an elevated
and fertile region, with two large commercial centres, Popayan and Cali. In
1907 a railway was under construction to the latter, and an extension to
Bogota was also projected.

BUENOS AIRES, a maritime province of Argentina, South America, bounded N.
by the province of Santa Fe and Entre Rios, E. by the latter, the La Plata
estuary, and the Atlantic, S. by the Atlantic, and W. by the territories
(_gobernaciones_) of Rio Negro and Las Pampas, and the provinces of Cordoba
and Santa Fe. Its area is 117,812 sq. m., making it the largest province of
the republic. It is also the most populous, even excluding the federal
district, an official estimate of 1903 giving it a population of 1,251,000.
Although it has a frontage of over 900 m. on the La Plata and the Atlantic,
the province has but few good natural ports, the best being Bahia Blanca,
where the Argentine government has constructed a naval port, and Ensenada
(La Plata), where extensive artificial basins have been constructed for the
reception of ocean-going steamers. San Nicolas in the extreme north has a
fairly good river port, while at Buenos Aires a costly artificial port has
been constructed.

In its general aspect the province forms a part of the great treeless plain
extending from the Atlantic and La Plata estuary westward to the Andes. A
fringe of small tangled wood covers the low river banks and delta region of
the Parana between San Nicolas and Buenos Aires; thence southward to Bahia
Blanca the sea-shore is low and sandy, with a zone of lagoons and partially
submerged lands immediately behind. The south-eastern and central parts of
the province are low and marshy, and their effective drainage has long been
an urgent problem. Two ranges of low mountains extend partly across the
southern part of the province--the first from Mar del Plata, on the coast,
in a north-east direction, known at different points as the Sierra del
Volcan (885 ft.), Sierra de Tandil (1476 ft.), and Sierra Baya, and the
second and shorter range nearer Bahia Blanca, having the same general
direction, known at different points as the Sierra Pillahuinco and Sierra
de la Ventana (3543 ft.). The country is well watered with numerous lakes
and small rivers, the largest river being the Rio Salado del Sud, which
rises near the north-western boundary and flows entirely across the
province in a south-easterly direction with a course of about 360 m. The
Rio Colorado crosses the extreme southern extension of the province, a
distance of about 80 m., but its mouth is obstructed, and its lower course
is subject to occasional disastrous inundations.

Cattle-raising naturally became the principal industry of this region soon
after its settlement by the Spaniards, and sheep-raising on a profitable
basis was developed about the middle of the 19th century. Toward the end of
that century the exports of wool, live-stock and dressed meats reached
enormous proportions. There is a large export of jerked beef (_tasajo_) to
Brazil and Cuba, and of live-stock to Europe, South Africa and neighbouring
South American republics. Much attention also has been given to raising
horses, asses, mules, swine and goats, all of which thrive on these grassy
plains. Butter and cheese-making have gained considerable prominence in the
province since 1890, and butter has become an article of export. Little
attention had been given to cereals up to 1875, but subsequently energetic
efforts were made to increase the production of wheat, Indian corn,
linseed, barley, oats and alfalfa, so that by the end of the century the
exports of wheat and flour had reached a considerable value. In 1895 there
were 3,400,000 acres under cultivation in the province, and in 1900 the
area devoted to wheat alone aggregated 1,960,000 acres. Fruit-growing also
has made good progress, especially on the islands of the Parana delta, and
Argentine peaches, pears, strawberries, grapes and figs are highly
appreciated.

The navigation of the Parana is at all times difficult, and is impossible
for the larger ocean-going steamers. The greater part of the trade of the
northern and western provinces, therefore, must pass through the ports of
Buenos Aires and Ensenada, at which an immense volume of business is
concentrated. All the great trunk railways of the republic pass through the
province and converge at these ports, and from them a number of
transatlantic steamship lines carry away the products of its fertile soil.
The province is also liberally supplied with branch railways. In the far
south the new port of Bahia Blanca has become prominent in the export of
wool and wheat.

The principal cities and towns of the province (apart from Buenos Aires and
its suburbs of Belgrano and Flores) are its capital La Plata; Bahia Blanca,
San Nicolas, a river port on the Parana 150 m. by rail north-west of Buenos
Aires, with a population (1901) of 13,000; Campana (pop. 5419 in 1895), the
former river port of Buenos Aires on one of the channels of the Parana, 51
m. by rail north-west of that city, and the site of the first factory in
Argentina (1883) for freezing mutton for export; Chivilcoy, an important
interior town, with a population (1901) of 15,000; Pergamino (9540 in
1895), a northern inland railway centre; Mar del Plata, a popular seaside
resort 250 m. by rail south of Buenos Aires; Azul (9494), Tandil (7088),
Chascomus (5667), Mercedes (9269), and Barracas al Sud (10,185), once the
centre of the jerked beef industries.

The early history of the province of Buenos Aires was a struggle for
supremacy over the other provinces for a period of two generations. Its
large extent of territory was secured through successive additions by
conquest of adjoining Indian territories south and west, the last additions
being as late as 1879. Buenos Aires became a province of the Confederation
in 1820, and adopted a constitution in 1854, which provides for its
administration by a governor and legislature of two chambers, both chosen
by popular vote. An unsuccessful revolt in 1880 against the national
government led to the federalization of the city of Buenos Aires, and the
selection of La Plata as the provincial capital, the republic assuming the
public indebtedness of the provinces at that time as an indemnification.
Before the new capital was finished, however, the province had incurred
further liabilities of ten millions sterling, and has since then been
greatly handicapped in its development in consequence.

(A. J. L.)

BUENOS AIRES, a city and port of Argentina, and capital of the republic, in
34 deg. 36' 21" S. lat. and 58 deg. 21' 33" W. long., on the west shore of the La
Plata estuary, about 155 m. above its mouth, and 127 m. W. by N. from
Montevideo. The estuary at this point is 34 m. wide, and so shallow that
vessels can enter the docks only through artificial channels kept open by
constant dredging. Previously to the construction of the new port,
ocean-going vessels of over 15 ft. draught were compelled to anchor in the
outer roads some 12 m. from the city, and communication with the shore was
effected by means of steam tenders and small boats, connecting with long
landing piers, or with carts driven out from the beach. The city is built
upon an open grassy plain extending inland from the banks of the estuary,
and north from the Riachuelo or Matanzas river where the "Boca" port is
located. Its average elevation is about 65 ft. above sea-level. The federal
district, which includes the city and its suburbs and covers an area of 72
sq. m., was detached from the province of Buenos Aires by an act of
congress in 1880. With the construction of the new port and reclamation of
considerable areas of the shallow water frontage, the area of the city has
been greatly extended below the line of the original estuary banks. The
streets of the old city, which are narrow and laid out to enclose
rectangular blocks of uniform size, run nearly parallel with the cardinal
points of the compass, but this plan is not closely followed in the new
additions and suburbs. This uniformity in plan, combined with the level
ground and the style of buildings first erected, gave to the city an
extremely monotonous and uninteresting appearance, but with its growth in
wealth and population, greater diversity and better taste in architecture
have resulted.

The prevailing style of domestic architecture is that introduced from Spain
and used throughout all the Spanish colonies--the grouping of one-storey
buildings round one or two _patios_, which open on the street through a
wide doorway. These residences have heavily barred windows on the street,
and flat roofs with [v.04 p.0698] parapets admirably adapted for defence.
The domiciliation of wealthy foreigners, and the introduction of foreign
customs and foreign culture, have gradually modified the style of
architecture, both public and domestic, and modern Buenos Aires is adorned
with many costly and attractive public edifices and residences. French
renaissance, lavishly decorated, has become the prevailing style. The
Avenida Alvear is particularly noted for the elegance of its private
residences, and the new Avenida de Mayo for its display of elaborately
ornamented public and business edifices, while the suburban districts of
Belgrano and Flores are distinguished for the attractiveness of their
country-houses and gardens. A part of the population is greatly
overcrowded, one-fifth living in _conventillos_, or tenement-houses.

Among the city's many _plazas_, or squares, twelve are especially worthy of
mention, viz.: 25 de Mayo (formerly Victoria) on which face the
Government-House and Cathedral, San Martin (or Retiro), Lavalle, Libertad,
Lorea, Belgrano, 6 de Junio, Once de Setiembre, Independencia (formerly
Conception), Constitucion, Caridad and 29 de Deciembre. These vary in size
from one to three squares, or 4 to 12 acres each, and are handsomely laid
out with flowers, shrubbery, walks and shade trees. There are also two
elaborately laid out _alamedas_, the Recoleta and the Paseo de Julio, the
latter on the river front and partially absorbed by the new port works, and
the great park at Palermo, officially called 3 de Febrero, which contains
840 acres, beautifully laid out in drives, footpaths, lawns, gardens and
artificial lakes. In all, the _plazas_ and parks of Buenos Aires cover an
area of 960 acres.

The cathedral, which is one of the largest in South America, dating from
1752, resembles the Madeleine of Paris in design, and its classical portico
facing the Plaza 25 de Mayo has twelve stately Corinthian columns
supporting an elaborately sculptured pediment. The archbishop's palace
(Buenos Aires became an archiepiscopal see in 1866) adjoins the cathedral.
There are about twenty-five Roman Catholic churches in the city, one of the
richest and most popular of which is the Merced on Calle Reconquista, and
four Protestant churches--English, Scottish Presbyterian, American
Methodist and German Lutheran. Twenty asylums for orphans and indigent
persons and one for lunatics are maintained at public expense and by
private religious associations, while the demand for organized medical and
surgical treatment is met by fifteen well-appointed hospitals, having an
aggregate of 2600 beds, and treating 17,000 patients annually. Of these,
five belong to foreign nationalities. The city has six cemeteries covering
230 acres.

Among the more noteworthy public buildings are the Casa Rosada
(government-house), facing the Plaza 25 de Mayo and occupying in part the
site of the fort built by Garay in 1580; the new congress hall on Calle
Callao and Avenida de Mayo, finished in 1906 at a cost of about L1,300,000;
the new municipal hall on Avenida de Mayo; the _bolsa_ or exchange,
distributing reservoir, mint, and some of the more modern educational
buildings. Higher education is represented by the university of Buenos
Aires, with its several faculties, including law and medicine, and 3562
students (1901), four national colleges, three normal schools and various
technical schools. There are, also, a national library, a national museum,
a zoological garden and an aquarium. The people are fond of music, the
drama and amusements, and devote much time and expense to diversions of a
widely varied character, from Italian opera to horse-racing and _pelota_.
They have two or three large public baths, and a large number of social,
sporting and athletic clubs. The Portenos, as the residents of Buenos Aires
are called, are accustomed to call their city the "Paris of America," and
not without reason. Buenos Aires has become the principal manufacturing
centre of the republic, and its industrial establishments are numbered by
thousands and their capital by hundreds of millions of dollars.

The growth of Buenos Aires since settled conditions have prevailed, and
especially since its federalization, has been very rapid, and the city has
finally outstripped all rivals and become the largest city of South
America. At the time of its first authentic census in 1869, it had a
population of 177,767. In 1887, when the suburbs of Belgrano and Flores
with an aggregate population of 28,000 were annexed, its population without
this increment was estimated at 404,000. In 1895 the national census gave
the population as 663,854, and in 1904 a municipal census increased it to
950,891. At the close of 1905 the national statistical office estimated it
at 1,025,653. The excess of births over deaths is unusually large (about 14
per thousand in 1905). The city has about one-fifth of the population of
the whole republic. The government is vested in an _intendente municipal_
(mayor) appointed by the national executive with the approval of the
senate, and a _concejo deliberante_ (legislative council) elected by the
people and composed of two councillors from each parish. The police force
is a military organization under the control of the national executive, and
the higher municipal courts are subject to the same authority. Every
ratepayer, whether foreigner or native, has the right to vote in municipal
elections and to serve in the municipal council.

The water-supply is drawn from the estuary at Belgrano and conducted 31/2 m.
to the Recoleta, where three great settling basins, with an aggregate
capacity of 12,000,000 gallons, and six acres of covered filters, are
located. It is then pumped to the great distributing reservoir at Calles
Cordoba and Viamonte, which covers four acres and has a capacity of
13,500,000 gallons. These works were begun in 1873. Up to 1873, when the
water and drainage works were initiated by English engineers and
contractors, there were no public sewers, and the sanitary state of the
city was indescribably bad. The cholera epidemic of 1867-1868, with 15,000
victims, and the yellow fever epidemic of 1871, with 26,000 victims, were
greatly intensified by these insanitary conditions. The construction of the
sewers lasted about 19 years, when in 1892 the water and drainage works
were taken over by the government, and are now administered at public
expense and at a profit. The main sewer is 16 m. long and extends southward
beyond Quilmes. The total cost of the two systems exceeded six millions
sterling. Buenos Aires is now provided with a good water-supply, and its
sanitary condition compares favourably with that of other great cities, the
annual death-rate being about 18 per thousand, against 27 per thousand in
1887. Its mean annual temperature is 64 deg. Fahr., and its annual rainfall 34
in.

The lighting includes both gas and electricity, the former dating from
1856. Previously to that time street lighting had been effected at first
with lamps burning mares' grease, and then with tallow candles. The streets
were at first paved with cobble-stones, then with dressed granite
paving-stones (parallelepipedons), and finally with wood and asphalt. The
tram service is in the hands of nine private companies, operating 313 m. of
track (31st of December 1905), on almost five-sevenths of which electric
traction is employed. The city is the principal terminus and port for
nearly all the trunk railway lines of the republic, which have large
passenger stations at the Retiro, Once de Setiembre, and Constitucion
plazas, and are connected with the central produce market and the new
Madero port. The great central produce market at Barracas al Sud (_Mercado
Central de Frutos_), whose lands, buildings, railway sidings, machinery and
mole cost L750,000, is designed to handle the pastoral and agricultural
products of the country on a large scale, while 20 markets in the city meet
the needs of local consumers.

The most important feature of the port of Buenos Aires is the "Madero
docks," constructed to enlarge and improve its shipping facilities.
Improvements had been, begun in 1872 at the "Boca," as the port on the
Riachuelo is called, and nearly L1,500,000 was spent there in landing
facilities and dredging a channel 12 m. in length, to deep water. These
improvements were found insufficient, and in 1887 work was begun on plans
executed by Sir John Hawkshaw for a series of four docks and two basins in
front of the city, occupying 3 m. of reclaimed shore-line, and connected
with deep water by two dredged channels. The north basin is provided with
two dry docks, and the new quays are equipped with 24 warehouses, hydraulic
cranes, and 28 m. of railway sidings and connexions. The total cost of the
new port works [v.04 p.0699] up to 1908 was about L8,000,000 sterling
($40,000,000 gold). In September of that year it was decided by congress to
borrow L5,000,000 for still further extensions which were found to be
required. The channels to deep water require constant dredging because of
the great quantity of silt deposited by the river, and on this and allied
purposes an expenditure of L560,000 was voted in 1908. In 1907 there were
29,178 shipping entries in the port, with an aggregate of 13,335,737 tons,
the merchandise movement being 4,360,000 tons imports and 2,900,000 tons of
produce exports. The revenues for 1907 were $5,452,000 gold, and working
expenses, $2,213,000 gold, the profit ($3,229,000) being equal to about 8%
on the cost of construction.

_History._--Three attempts were made to establish a colony where the city
of Buenos Aires stands. The first was in 1535 by Don Pedro de Mendoza with
a large and well-equipped expedition from Spain, which, through
mismanagement and the hostility of the Indians, resulted in complete
failure. An expedition sent up the river by Mendoza founded Asuncion, and
thither went the colonists from his "Santa Maria de Buenos Ayres" when that
settlement was abandoned. The second was in 1542 by a part of the
expedition from Spain under Cabeza de Vaca, but with as little success. The
third was in 1580 by Don Juan de Garay, governor of Paraguay, who had
already established a half-way post at Santa Fe in 1573, and from this
attempt dates the foundation of the city. The need of a port near the sea,
where supplies from Spain could be received and ships provisioned, was
keenly felt by the Spanish colonists at Asuncion, and Garay's expedition
down the Parana in 1580 had that special object in view. Garay built a fort
and laid out a town in the prescribed Spanish style above Mendoza's
abandoned settlement, giving it the name of "Ciudad de la Santissima
Trinidad," but retaining Mendoza's descriptive name for the port in
appreciation of the agreeable and invigorating atmosphere of that locality.
Buenos Aires remained a dependency of Asuncion until 1620, when the Spanish
settlements of the La Plata region were divided into three provinces,
Paraguay, Tucuman and Buenos Aires, and Garay's "city" became the capital
of the latter and also the seat of a new bishopric. The increasing
population and trade of the La Plata settlements naturally contributed to
the importance and prosperity of Buenos Aires, but Spain seems to have
taken very little interest in the town at that time. Peru still dazzled the
imagination with her stores of gold and silver, and the king and his
councillors and merchants had no thought for the little trading station on
the La Plata, for which one small shipment of supplies each year was at
first thought sufficient. The proximity of the Portuguese settlements of
Brazil and the unprotected state of the coast, however, made smuggling
easy, and the colonists soon learned to supply their own needs in that way.
The heavy seigniorage tax on gold and silver, and the costs of
transportation by way of Panama, also sent a stream of contraband metal
from Charcas to Buenos Aires, where it found eager buyers among the
Portuguese traders from Brazil, who even founded the town of Colonia on the
opposite bank of the estuary to facilitate their hazardous traffic. In time
the magnitude of these operations attracted attention at Madrid and efforts
were made to suppress them, but without complete success until more liberal
provisions were made to promote trade between Spain and her colonies. In
1776 the Rio de la Plata provinces were erected into a vice-royalty, and
Buenos Aires became its capital. Two years later the old commercial
restrictions were abolished and a new code was promulgated, so liberal in
character compared with the old that it was called the "free trade
regulations." Under the old system all intercourse with foreign countries
had been prohibited, with the exception of Great Britain and Portugal--the
former having a contract (1715 to 1739) to introduce African slaves, and
permission to send one shipload of merchandise each year to certain
colonial ports, and the latter's Brazilian colonies having permission to
import from Buenos Aires each year 2000 fanegas of wheat, 500 quintals of
jerked beef and 500 of tallow. The African slaves introduced into Buenos
Aires in this way were limited to 800 a year, and were the only slaves of
that character ever received except some from Brazil after 1778, when
greater commercial activity in the port created a sudden demand for
labourers. Under the new regulations 9 ports in Spain and 24 in the
colonies were declared _puertos habilitados_, or ports of entry, and trade
between them was permitted, though under many restrictions. The effect of
this change may be seen in the exportation of hides to the mother country,
which had been only 150,000 a year before 1778, but rose to 700,000 and
800,000 a year after that date. (For the later history of the city see
ARGENTINA.)

(A. J. L.)

BUFF (from Fr. _buffle_, a buffalo), a leather originally made from the
skin of the buffalo, now also from the skins of other animals, of a dull
pale yellow colour, used for making the buffcoat or jerkin, a leathern
military coat. The old 3rd Foot regiment of the line in the British army
(now the East Kent Regiment), and the old 78th Foot (now 2nd battalion
Seaforth Highlanders), are called the "Buffs" and the "Ross-shire Buffs"
respectively, from the yellow or buff-colour of their facings. The term is
commonly used now of the colour alone.

BUFFALO, a city and port of entry, and the county-seat of Erie county, New
York, U.S.A., the second city in population in the state, and the eighth in
the United States, at the E. extremity of Lake Erie, and at the upper end
of the Niagara river; distant by rail from New York City 423 m., from
Boston 499 m., and from Chicago 540 m.

The site of the city, which has an area of 42 sq. m., is a broad,
undulating tract, rising gradually from the lake to an elevation of from 50
to 80 ft., its altitude averaging somewhat less than 600 ft. above
sea-level. The high land and temperate climate, and the excellent drainage
and water-supply systems, make Buffalo one of the most healthy cities in
the United States, its death-rate in 1900 being 14.8 per thousand, and in
1907 15.58. As originally platted by Joseph Ellicott, the plan of Buffalo
somewhat resembled that of Washington, but the plan was much altered and
even then not adhered to. Buffalo to-day has broad and spacious streets,
most of which are lined by trees, and many small parks and squares. The
municipal park system is one of unusual beauty, consisting of a chain of
parks with a total area of about 1030 acres, encircling the city and
connected by boulevards and driveways. The largest is Delaware Park, about
365 acres, including a lake of 461/2 acres, in the north part of the city;
the north part of the park was enclosed in the grounds of the Pan-American
Exposition of 1901. Adjoining it is the Forest Lawn cemetery, in which are
monuments to President Millard Fillmore, and to the famous Seneca chief Red
Jacket (1751-1830), a friend of the whites, who was faithful when
approached by Tecumseh and the Prophet, and warned the Americans of their
danger; by many he has been considered the greatest orator of his race.
Among the other parks are Cazenovia Park, Humboldt Park, South Park on the
Lake Shore, and "The Front" on a bluff overlooking the source of the
Niagara river; in the last is Fort Porter (named in honour of Peter B.
Porter), where the United States government maintains a garrison.

_Principal Buildings._--Buffalo is widely known for the beauty of its
residential sections, the houses being for the most part detached, set well
back from the street, and surrounded by attractive lawns. Among the
principal buildings are the Federal building, erected at a cost of
$2,000,000; the city and county hall, costing $1,500,000, with a clock
tower 245 ft. high; the city convention hall, the chamber of commerce, the
builders' exchange, the Masonic temple, two state armouries, the
Prudential, Fidelity Trust, White and Mutual Life buildings, the Teck, Star
and Shea's Park theatres, and the Ellicott Square building, one of the
largest office structures in the world; and, in Delaware Park, the Albright
art gallery, and the Buffalo Historical Society building, which was
originally the New York state building erected for the Pan-American
Exposition held in 1901. Among the social clubs the Buffalo, the
University, the Park, the Saturn and the Country clubs, and among the
hotels the Iroquois, Lafayette, Niagara and Genesee, may be especially
mentioned. There are many handsome churches, including St Joseph's (Roman
Catholic) and St Paul's (Protestant Episcopal) cathedrals, [v.04 p.0700]
and Trinity (Protestant Episcopal), the Westminster Presbyterian, the
Delaware Avenue Baptist, and the First Presbyterian churches.

_Education._--In addition to the usual high and grammar schools, the city
itself supports a city training school for teachers, and a system of night
schools and kindergartens. Here, too, is a state normal school. The
university of Buffalo (organized in 1845) comprises schools of medicine
(1845), law (1887), dentistry (1892), and pharmacy (1886). Canisius College
is a Roman Catholic (Jesuit) institution for men (established in 1870 and
chartered in 1883), having in 1907 a college department and an academic (or
high school) department, and a library of about 26,000 volumes. Martin
Luther Seminary, established in 1854, is a theological seminary of the
Evangelical Lutheran Church. Among the best-known schools are the Academy
of the Sacred Heart, Buffalo Seminary, the Franklin and the Heathcote
schools, Holy Angels and St Mary's academies, St Joseph's Collegiate
Institute, and St Margaret's school for girls. The Buffalo public library,
founded in 1837, is housed in a fine building erected in 1887 (valued at
$1,000,000), and contains about 300,000 books and pamphlets. Other
important libraries, with the approximate number of their books, are the
Grosvenor (founded in 1859), for reference (75,000 volumes and 7000
pamphlets); the John C. Lord, housed in the building of the Historical
Society (10,620); the Law (8th judicial district) (17,000); the Catholic
Institute (12,000); and the library of the Buffalo Historical Society
(founded 1862) (26,600), now in the handsome building in Delaware Park used
as the New York state building during the Pan-American Exposition of 1901.
The Buffalo Society of Natural Sciences has a museum in the public library
building.

_Public Institutions._--The hospitals and the charitable and correctional
institutions are numerous and are well administered. Many private
institutions are richly endowed. Among the hospitals are a state hospital
for the insane, the Erie county, the Buffalo general, the Children's, the
United States marine (maintained by the Federal government), the German,
the Homeopathic, the Women's, the German Deaconess and the Riverside
hospitals, and the Buffalo hospital of the Sisters of Charity. Nurses'
training schools are connected with most of these. Among the charitable
institutions are the Home for the Friendless, the Buffalo, St Vincent's and
St Joseph's orphan asylums, St John's orphan home, St Mary's asylum for
widows and foundlings, and the Ingleside home for erring women. One of the
most noteworthy institutions in the city is the Charity Organisation
Society, with headquarters in Fitch Institute. Founded in 1877, it was the
first in the United States, and its manifold activities have not only
contributed much to the amelioration of social conditions in Buffalo, but
have caused it to be looked to as a model upon which similar institutions
have been founded elsewhere.

The first newspaper, the _Gazette_ (a weekly), was established in 1811 and
became the _Commercial_, a daily, in 1835. The first daily was the
_Courier_, established in 1831. There were in 1908 eleven daily papers
published, three of which were in German and two in Polish. The weekly
papers include several in German, three in Polish, and one in Italian.

_Government and Population._--Buffalo is governed under an amended city
charter of 1896 by which the government is vested in a bicameral city
council, and a mayor elected for a term of four years. The mayor appoints
the heads of the principal executive departments (health, civil service,
parks, police and fire). The city clerk is elected by the city council. The
municipality maintains several well-equipped public baths, and owns its
water-supply system, the water being obtained from Lake Erie. The city is
lighted by electricity generated by the water power of Niagara Falls, and
by manufactured gas. Gas, obtained by pipe lines from the Ohio-Pennsylvania
and the Canadian (Welland) natural gas fields, is also used extensively for
lighting and heating purposes.

From the first census enumeration in 1820 the population has steadily and
rapidly increased from about 2000 till it reached 352,387 inhabitants in
1900, and 423,715 (20% increase) in 1910. In 1900 there were 248,135
native-born and 104,252 foreign-born; 350,586 were white and only 1801
coloured, of whom 1698 were negroes. Of the native-born whites, 155,716 had
either one or both parents foreign-born; and of the total population 93,256
were of unmixed German parentage. Of the foreign-born population 36,720
were German, the other large elements in their order of importance being
Polish, Canadian, Irish, the British (other than Irish). Various sections
of the poorer part of the city are occupied almost exclusively by the
immigrants from Poland, Hungary and Italy.

_Communications and Commerce._--Situated almost equidistant from Chicago,
Boston and New York, Buffalo, by reason of its favourable location in
respect to lake transportation and its position on the principal northern
trade route between the East and West, has become one of the most important
commercial and industrial centres in the Union. Some fourteen trunk lines
have terminals at, or pass through, Buffalo. Tracks of a belt line transfer
company encircle the city, and altogether there are more than 500 m. of
track within the limits of Buffalo. Of great importance also is the lake
commerce. Almost all the great steamship transportation lines of the Great
Lakes have an eastern terminus at Buffalo, which thus has direct passenger
and freight connexion with Cleveland, Detroit, Chicago, Milwaukee and the
"Head of the Lakes" (Duluth-Superior). With the latter port it is connected
by the Great Northern Steamship Company, a subsidiary line of the Great
Northern railway, the passenger service of which is carried on by what are
probably the largest and finest inland passenger steamships in existence.
The tonnage of the port of Buffalo is considerably more than 5,000,000 tons
annually. With a water front of approximately 20 m. and with 8 to 10 m. of
wharfs, the shipping facilities have been greatly increased by the
extensive harbour improvements undertaken by the Federal government. These
improvements comprise a series of inner breakwaters and piers and an outer
breakwater of stone and cement, 4 m. in length, constructed at a cost of
more than $2,000,000. Another artery of trade of great importance is the
Erie Canal, which here has its western terminus, and whose completion
(1825) gave the first impetus to Buffalo's commercial growth. With the
Canadian shore Buffalo is connected by ferry, and by the International
bridge (from Squaw Island), which cost $1,500,000 and was completed in
1873.

It is as a distributing centre for the manufactured products of the East to
the West, and for the raw products of the West to the East, and for the
trans-shipment from lake to rail and vice versa, that Buffalo occupies a
position of greatest importance. It is one of the principal grain and flour
markets in the world. Here in 1843 Joseph Dart erected the first grain
elevator ever constructed. In 1906 the grain elevators had a capacity of
between twenty and thirty millions of bushels, and annual receipts of more
than 200,000,000 bushels. The receipts of flour approximate 10,000,000
barrels yearly. More than 10,000,000 head of live stock are handled in a
year in extensive stock-yards (75 acres) at East Buffalo; and the horse
market is the largest in America. Other important articles of commerce are
lumber, the receipts of which average 200,000,000 ft. per annum; fish
(15,000,000 lb annually); and iron ore and coal, part of which, however, is
handled at Tonawanda, really a part of the port of Buffalo. Buffalo is the
port of entry of Buffalo Creek customs district; in 1908 its imports were
valued at $6,708,919, and its exports at $26,192,563.

_Manufactures._--As a manufacturing centre Buffalo ranks next to New York
among the cities of the state. The manufactures were valued in 1900 at
$122,230,061 (of which $105,627,182 was the value of the factory product),
an increase of 22.2% over 1890; value of factory product in 1905,
$147,377,873. The value of the principal products in 1900 was as follows:
slaughtering and meat packing, $9,631,187 (in 1905 slaughtering and
meat-packing $12,216,433, and slaughtering, not including meat-packing,
$3,919,940); foundry and machine shop products, $6,816,057 (1905,
$11,402,855); linseed oil, $6,271,170; cars and shop construction,
$4,513,333 (1905, $3,609,471); malt liquors, $4,269,973 (1905, $5,187,216);
soap and candles, $3,818,571 (in 1905, soap [v.04 p.0701] $4,792,915);
flour and grist mill products, $3,263,697 (1905, $9,807,906); lumber and
planing mill products, $3,095,760 (1905, $4,186,668); clothing, $3,246,723
(1905, $4,231,126); iron and steel products, $2,624,547. Other industrial
establishments of importance include petroleum refineries, ship-yards,
brick, stone and lime works, saddlery and harness factories, lithographing
establishments, patent medicine works, chemical works, and copper smelters
and refineries. Some of the plants are among the largest in existence,
notably the Union and the Wagner Palace car works, the Union dry docks, the
steel plants of the Lackawanna Iron and Steel Company, and the Larkin soap
factory.

_History._--The first white men to visit the site of Buffalo were
undoubtedly the adventurous French trappers and various Jesuit
missionaries. Near here, on the east bank of the Niagara river at the mouth
of Cayuga Creek, La Salle in 1679 built his ship the "Griffin," and at the
mouth of the river built Fort Conti, which, however, was burned in the same
year. In 1687 marquis de Denonville built at the mouth of the river a fort
which was named in his honour and was the predecessor of the fortifications
on or near the same site successively called Fort Niagara; and the
neighbourhood was the scene of military operations up to the close of the
War of Independence. As early as 1784 the present site of the city of
Buffalo came to be known as "the Buffalo Creek region" either from the
herds of buffalo or bison which, according to Indian tradition, had
frequented the salt licks of the creek, or more probably from an Indian
chief. A little later, possibly in 1788-1789, Cornelius Winney, an Indian
trader, built a cabin near the mouth of the creek and thus became the first
permanent white resident. Slowly other settlers gathered. The land was a
part of the original Phelps-Gorham Purchase, and subsequently (about 1793)
came into the possession of the Holland Land Company, being part of the
tract known as the Holland Purchase. Joseph Ellicott, the agent of the
company, who has been called the "Father of Buffalo," laid out a town in
1801-1802, calling it New Amsterdam, and by this name it was known on the
company's books until about 1810. The name of Buffalo Creek or Buffalo,
however, proved more popular; the village became the county-seat of Niagara
county in 1808, and two years later the town of Buffalo was erected. Upon
the outbreak of the second war with Great Britain, Buffalo and the region
about Niagara Falls became a centre of active military operations; directly
across the Niagara river was the British Fort Erie. It was from Buffalo
that Lieutenant Jesse D. Elliott (1782-1845) made his brilliant capture of
the "Detroit" and "Caledonia" in October 1812; and on the 30th and 31st of
December 1813 the settlement was attacked, captured, sacked, and almost
completely destroyed by a force of British, Canadians and Indians under
General Sir Phineas Riall (c. 1769-1851). After the cessation of
hostilities, however, Buffalo, which had been incorporated as a village in
1813, was rapidly rebuilt. Its advantages as a commercial centre were early
recognized, and its importance was enhanced on the opening up of the middle
West to settlement, when Buffalo became the principal gateway for the lake
routes. Here in 1818 was rebuilt the "Walk-in-the-Water," the first
steamboat upon the Great Lakes, named in honour of a famous Wyandot Indian
chief. In 1825 the completion of the Erie Canal with its western terminus
at Buffalo greatly increased the importance of the place, which now rapidly
outstripped and soon absorbed Black Rock, a village adjoining it on the N.,
which had at one time threatened to be a dangerous rival. In 1832 Buffalo
obtained a city charter, and Dr Ebenezer Johnson (1786-1849) was chosen the
first mayor. In that year, and again in 1834, a cholera epidemic caused
considerable loss of life. At Buffalo in 1848 met the Free-Soil convention
that nominated Martin van Buren for the presidency and Charles Francis
Adams for the vice-presidency. Grover Cleveland lived in Buffalo from 1855
until 1884, when he was elected president, and was mayor of Buffalo in
1882, when he was elected governor of New York state. The Pan-American
Exposition, in celebration of the progress of the Western hemisphere in the
nineteenth century, was held there (May 1-November 2, 1901). It was during
a reception in the Temple of Music on the Exposition grounds that President
McKinley was assassinated (September 6th); he died at the home of John G.
Milburn, the president of the Exposition. In the house of Ansley Wilcox
here Vice-President Theodore Roosevelt took the oath of office as
president. A marble shaft 80 ft. high, in memory of McKinley, has been
erected in Niagara Square.

See William Ketchum, _History of Buffalo_ (2 vols., Buffalo, 1864-1865);
H.P. Smith, _History of Buffalo and Erie County_ (Syracuse, 1884);
_Publications of the Buffalo Historical Society_ (Buffalo, 1879 et seq.);
O. Turner, _History of the Holland Purchase_ (Buffalo, 1850); T.H.
Hotchkin, _History of Western New York_ (New York, 1845); and the sketch in
Lyman P. Powell's _Historic Towns of the Middle States_ (New York, 1901).

BUFFALO, a name properly pertaining to an aberrant species of cattle which
has been kept in a state of domestication in India and Egypt from time
immemorial, and had been introduced from the latter country into southern
Europe. It is now taken, however, to include not only this species, whose
native home is India, but all more or less nearly related animals.[1]
Buffaloes are heavily built oxen, with sparsely haired skin, large ears,
long, tufted tails, broad muzzles and massive angulated horns. In having
only 13 pairs of ribs they resemble the typical oxen. African buffaloes all
have the hair of the back directed backwards.

In the Cape buffalo, _Bos (Bubalus) caffer_, the horns do not attain an
excessive length, but in old bulls are so expanded and thickened at the
base as to form a helmet-like mass protecting the whole forehead. Several
more or less nearly allied local races have been named; and in Eastern
Africa the buffaloes (_B. caffer aequinoctialis_) have smaller horns, which
do not meet in the middle line. From this animal, which is brown instead of
black, there seems to be a transition towards the red dwarf buffalo (_B.
nanus_) of West Africa, an animal scarcely more than two-thirds the size of
its gigantic southern cousin, with relatively small, much flattened,
upwardly curved horns. In South Africa buffaloes frequent reedy swamps,
where they associate in herds of from fifty to a hundred or more
individuals. Old bulls may be met with either alone or in small parties of
from two or three to eight or ten. This buffalo formerly roamed in herds
over the plains of Central and Southern Africa, always in the near vicinity
of water, but the numbers are greatly diminished. In Cape Colony some herds
are protected by the government in the eastern forest-districts. This
species has never been domesticated, nor does there appear to have been any
attempt to reduce it to service. Like its Indian ally it is fond of water,
which it visits at regular intervals during the twenty-four hours; it also
plasters itself with mud, which, when hardened by the sun, protects it from
the bite of the gadflies which in spite of its thick hide seem to cause it
considerable annoyance. It is relieved of a portion of the parasitic ticks,
so common on the hides of thick-skinned animals, by means of the red-beaked
rhinoceros birds, _Buphaga erythrorhynca_, a dozen or more of which may be
seen partly perched on its horns and partly moving about on its back, and
picking up the ticks on which they feed. The hunter is often guided by
these birds in his search for the buffalo, but oftener still they give
timely warning to their host of the dangerous proximity of the hunter, and
have thus earned the title of "the buffalo's guardian birds."

In a wild state the typical Indian buffalo, _Bos (Bubalus) bubalis_, seems
to be restricted to India and Ceylon, although some of the buffaloes found
in the Malay Peninsula and Islands probably represent local races. The
species has been introduced into Asia Minor, Egypt, Italy and elsewhere.
The large size and wide separation of the horns, as well as the less
thickly fringed ears, and the more elongated and narrow head, form marked
points of distinction between the Asiatic and South African species.
Moreover, all Asiatic buffaloes are distinguished from the African forms by
having the hair on the fore-part of the back directed forwards; and these
go far to support the views of those who would make them the types of a
distinct subgenus, [v.04 p.0702] or genus, _Buffelus_. In Assam there
formerly existed a local race, _B. bubalis macrocercus_, characterized by
the horns, which are of immense size, being directed mainly outwards,
instead of curving upwards in a circular form. Another Assam race (_B.
bubalis fulvus_) is characterized by the tawny, in place of black, colour
of its hair and hide. The haunts of the Indian buffalo are the
grass-jungles near swamps, in which the grass exceeds 20 ft. in height.
Here the buffaloes--like the Indian rhinoceros--form covered pathways, in
which they are completely concealed. The herds frequently include fifty or
more individuals. These animals are fond of passing the day in marshes,
where they love to wallow in the mud; they are by no means shy, and do much
harm to the crops. The rutting-season occurs in autumn, when several
females follow a single male, forming for the time a small herd. The period
of gestation lasts for ten months, and the female produces one or two
calves at a birth. The bull is capable, it is said, of overthrowing an
elephant, and generally more than a match even for the tiger, which usually
declines the combat when not impelled by hunger. The Indian driver of a
herd of tame buffaloes does not shrink from entering a tiger-frequented
jungle, his cattle, with their massive horns, making short work of any
tiger that may come in their way. Buffalo fights and fights between
buffaloes and tigers were recognized Indian sports in the old days.
Domesticated buffaloes differ from their wild brethren merely by their
inferior size and smaller horns; some of the latter being of the circular
and others of the straight type. The milk is good and nourishing, but of a
ropy consistency and a peculiar flavour.

The tamarao, or Philippine buffalo, _Bos (Bubalus) mindorensis_, is a
smaller animal, in many respects intermediate between the Indian buffalo
and the dwarf anoa, or Celebes buffalo (_B. depressicornis_).

(R. L.*)

[1] In America, it is worth noting, the term "buffalo" is almost
universally taken, at all events in popular parlance, to designate the
American bison, for which see BISON.

BUFFET, LOUIS JOSEPH (1818-1898), French statesman, was born at Mirecourt.
After the revolution of February 1848 he was elected deputy for the
department of the Vosges, and in the Assembly sat on the right, pronouncing
for the repression of the insurrection of June 1848 and for Louis Napoleon
Bonaparte. He was minister of agriculture from August to December 1849 and
from August to October 1851. Re-elected deputy in 1863, he was one of the
supporters of the "Liberal Empire" of Emile Ollivier, being finance
minister in Ollivier's cabinet from January to the 10th of April 1870. He
was president of the National Assembly from the 4th of April 1872 to the
10th of March 1875, and minister of the interior in 1875. Then, elected
senator for life (1876), he pronounced himself in favour of the _coup
d'etat_ of the 16th of May 1877. Buffet had some oratorical talent, but
shone most in opposition.

BUFFET, a piece of furniture which may be open or closed, or partly open
and partly closed, for the reception of dishes, china, glass and plate. The
word may also signify a long counter at which one stands to eat and drink,
as at a restaurant, or--which would appear to be the original meaning--the
room in which the counter stands. The word, like the thing it represents,
is French. The buffet is the descendant of the credence, and the ancestor
of the sideboard, and consequently has a close affinity to the dresser. Few
articles of furniture, while preserving their original purpose, have varied
more widely in form. In the beginning the buffet was a tiny apartment, or
recess, little larger than a cupboard, separated from the room which it
served either by a breast-high balustrade or by pillars. It developed into
a definite piece of furniture, varying from simplicity to splendour, but
always provided with one or more flat spaces, or broad shelves, for the
reception of such necessaries of the dining-room as were not placed upon
the table. The early buffets were sometimes carved with the utmost
elaboration; the Renaissance did much to vary their form and refine their
ornament. Often the lower part contained receptacles as in the
characteristic English court-cupboard. The rage for collecting china in the
middle of the 18th century was responsible for a new form--the high glazed
back, fitted with shelves, for the display of fine pieces of crockery-ware.
This, however, was hardly a true buffet, and was the very antithesis of the
primary arrangement, in which the huge goblets and beakers and fantastic
pieces of plate, of which so extremely few examples are left, were
displayed upon the open "gradines." The tiers of shelves, with or without a
glass front, which are still often found in Georgian houses, were sometimes
called buffets--in short, any dining-room receptacle for articles that were
not immediately wanted came at last to bear the name. In France the
variations of type were even more numerous than in England, and it is
sometimes difficult to distinguish a commode from a buffet. In the latter
part of the 18th century the buffet occasionally took the form of a console
table.

BUFFIER, CLAUDE (1661-1737), French philosopher, historian and
educationalist, was born in Poland, on the 25th of May 1661, of French
parents, who returned to France, and settled at Rouen, soon after his
birth. He was educated at the Jesuit college there, and was received into
the order at the age of nineteen. A dispute with the archbishop compelled
him to leave Rouen, and after a short stay in Rome he returned to Paris to
the college of the Jesuits, where he spent the rest of his life. He seems
to have been an admirable teacher, with a great power of lucid exposition.
His object in the _Traite des verites premieres_ (1717), his best-known
work, is to discover the ultimate principle of knowledge. This he finds in
the sense we have of our own existence and of what we feel within
ourselves. He thus takes substantially the same ground as Descartes, but he
rejected the _a priori_ method. In order to know what exists distinct from
the self, "common sense" is necessary. Common sense he defined as "that
disposition which nature has placed in all or most men, in order to enable
them, when they have arrived at the age and use of reason, to form a common
and uniform judgment with respect to objects different from the internal
sentiment of their own perception, which judgment is not the consequence of
any anterior judgment." The truths which this "disposition of nature"
obliges us to accept can be neither proved nor disproved; they are
practically followed even by those who reject them speculatively. But
Buffier does not claim for these truths of "common sense" the absolute
certainty which characterizes the knowledge we have of our own existence or
the logical deductions we make from our thoughts; they possess merely the
highest probability, and the man who rejects them is to be considered a
fool, though he is not guilty of a contradiction. Buffier's aversion to
scholastic refinements has given to his writings an appearance of
shallowness and want of metaphysical insight, and unquestionably he failed
entirely even to indicate the nature of that universality and necessity
which he ascribed to his "eternal verities"; he was, however, one of the
earliest to recognize the psychological as distinguished from the
metaphysical side of Descartes's principle, and to use it, with no
inconsiderable skill, as the basis of an analysis of the human mind,
similar to that enjoined by Locke. In this he has anticipated the spirit
and method as well as many of the results of Reid and the Scottish school.
Voltaire described him as "the only Jesuit who has given a reasonable
system of philosophy."

He wrote also _Elements de metaphysique_ (1724), a "French Grammar on a new
plan," and a number of historical essays. Most of his works appeared in a
collected form in 1732, and an English translation of the _Traite_ was
published in 1780.

BUFFON, GEORGE LOUIS LECLERC, COMTE DE (1707-1788), French naturalist, was
born on the 7th of September 1707, at Montbard (Cote d'Or), his father,
Benjamin Francois Leclerc de Buffon (1683-1775), being councillor of the
Burgundian parlement. He studied law at the college of Jesuits at Dijon;
but he soon exhibited a marked predilection for the study of the physical
sciences, and more particularly for mathematics. Whilst at Dijon he made
the acquaintance of a young Englishman, Lord Kingston, and with him
travelled through Italy and then went to England. He published a French
translation of Stephen Hales's _Vegetable Statics_ in 1735, and of Sir I.
Newton's _Fluxions_ in 1740. At twenty-five years of age he succeeded to a
considerable property, inherited from his mother, and from this time onward
his life was devoted to regular scientific labour. At first he directed his
attention more especially to mathematics, physics, [v.04 p.0703] and
agriculture, and his chief original papers are connected with these
subjects. In the spring of 1739 he was elected an associate of the Academy
of Sciences; and at a later period of the same year he was appointed keeper
of the Jardin du Roi and of the Royal Museum. This appears to have finally
determined him to devote himself to the biological sciences in particular,
and he began to collect materials for his _Natural History_. In the
preparation of this voluminous work he associated with himself L.J.M.
Daubenton, to whom the descriptive and anatomical portions of the treaties
were entrusted, and the first three volumes made their appearance in the
year 1749. In 1752 (not in 1743 or 1760, as sometimes stated) he married
Marie Francoise de Saint-Belin. He seems to have been fondly attached to
her, and felt deeply her death at Montbard in 1769. The remainder of
Buffon's life as a private individual presents nothing of special interest.
He belonged to a very long-lived race, his father having attained the age
of ninety-three, and his grandfather eighty-seven. He himself died at Paris
on the 15th of April 1788, at the age of eighty-one, of vesical calculus,
having refused to allow any operation for his relief. He left one son,
George Louis Marie Leclerc Buffon, who was an officer in the French army,
and who died by the guillotine, at the age of thirty, on the 10th of July
1793 (22 Messidor, An II.), having espoused the party of the duke of
Orleans.

Buffon was a member of the French Academy (his inaugural address being the
celebrated _Discours sur le style_, 1753), perpetual treasurer of the
Academy of Sciences, fellow of the Royal Society of London, and member of
the Academies of Berlin, St Petersburg, Dijon, and of most of the learned
societies then existing in Europe. Of handsome person and noble presence,
endowed with many of the external gifts of nature, and rejoicing in the
social advantages of high rank and large possessions, he is mainly known by
his published scientific writings. Without being a profound original
investigator, he possessed the art of expressing his ideas in a clear and
generally attractive form. His chief defects as a scientific writer are
that he was given to excessive and hasty generalization, so that his
hypotheses, however seemingly brilliant, are often destitute of any
sufficient basis in observed facts, whilst his literary style is not
unfrequently theatrical and turgid, and a great want of method and order is
commonly observable in his writings.

His great work is the _Histoire naturelle, generale et particuliere_; and
it can undoubtedly claim the merit of having been the first work to present
the previously isolated and apparently disconnected facts of natural
history in a popular and generally intelligible form. The sensation which
was made by its appearance in successive parts was very great, and it
certainly effected much good in its time by generally diffusing a taste for
the study of nature. For a work so vast, however--aiming, as it did, at
being little less than a general encyclopaedia of the sciences--Buffon's
capacities may, without disparagement, be said to have been insufficient,
as is shown by the great weakness of parts of the work (such as those
relating to mineralogy). The _Histoire naturelle_ passed through several
editions, and was translated into various languages. The edition most
highly prized by collectors, on account of the beauty of its plates, is the
first, which was published in Paris (1749-1804) in forty-four quarto
volumes, the publication extending over more than fifty years. In the
preparation of the first fifteen volumes of this edition (1749-1767) Buffon
was assisted by Daubenton, and subsequently by P. Gueneau de Montbeliard,
the abbe G.L.C.A. Bexon, and C.N.S. Sonnini de Manoncourt. The following
seven volumes form a supplement to the preceding, and appeared in
1774-1789, the famous _Epoques de la nature_ (1779) being the fifth of
them. They were succeeded by nine volumes on the birds (1770-1783), and
these again by five volumes on minerals (1783-1788). The remaining eight
volumes, which complete this edition, appeared after Buffon's death, and
comprise reptiles, fishes and cetaceans. They were executed by B.G.E. de
Lacepede, and were published in successive volumes between 1788 and 1804. A
second edition begun in 1774 and completed in 1804, in thirty-six volumes
quarto, is in most respects similar to the first, except that the
anatomical descriptions are suppressed and the supplement recast.

See Humbert-Bazile, _Buffon, sa famille, &c._ (1863); M.J.P. Flourens,
_Hist. des travaux et des idees de Buffon_ (1844, 3rd ed., 1870); H.
Nadault de Buffon, _Correspondance de Buffon_ (1860); A.S. Packard,
_Lamarck_ (1901).

BUG, the name of two rivers of Europe. (1) A stream of European Russia,
distinguished sometimes as the Southern Bug, which rises in the S. of the
government of Volhynia, and flows generally S.E. through the governments of
Podolia and Kherson, and after picking up the Ingul from the left at
Nikolayev, enters the _liman_ or lagoon into which the Dnieper also
discharges. Its length is 470 m. Its upper part is beset with rapids, and
its lower is of little value for navigation on account of the numerous
sandbanks and blocks of rock which choke its bed. (2) A river distinguished
as the Western Don, which rises in the E. of Austrian Galicia between
Tarnopol and Brody, and flows N.N.W. as far as Brest-Litovsk, separating
the Polish provinces of Lublin and Siedlce from the Russian governments of
Volhynia and Grodno; it then swings away almost due W., between the
provinces of Warsaw and Lomza, and joins the Vistula, 23 m. below the city
of Warsaw. Length, 470 m. It is navigable from Brest-Litovsk downwards.

BUG, the common name for hemipterous insects of the family _Cimicidae_, of
which the best-known example is the house bug or bed bug (_Cimex
lectularius_). This disgusting insect is of an oval shape, of a rusty red
colour, and, in common with the whole tribe to which it belongs, gives off
an offensive odour when touched; unlike the others, however, it is
wingless. The bug is provided with a proboscis, which when at rest lies
along the inferior side of the thorax, and through which it sucks the blood
of man, the sole food of this species. It is nocturnal in its habits,
remaining concealed by day in crevices of bed furniture, among the
hangings, or behind the wall paper, and shows considerable activity in its
nightly raids in search of food. The female deposits her eggs at the
beginning of summer in crevices of wood and other retired situations, and
in three weeks the young emerge as small, white, and almost transparent
larvae. These change their skin very frequently during growth, and attain
full development in about eleven weeks. Two centuries ago the bed bug was a
rare insect in Britain, and probably owes its name, which is derived from a
Celtic word signifying "ghost" or "goblin," to the terror which its attacks
at first inspired. An allied species, the dove-cote bug (_Cimex
columbaria_), attacks domestic fowls and pigeons.

BUGEAUD DE LA PICONNERIE, THOMAS ROBERT, DUKE OF ISLY (1784-1849), marshal
of France, was born at Limoges on the 15th of October 1784. He came of a
noble family of Perigord, and was the youngest of his parents' thirteen
children. Harsh treatment led to his flight from home, and for some years
about 1800 he lived in the country, engaged in agriculture, to which he was
ever afterwards devoted. At the age of twenty he became a private soldier
in the _Velites_ of the Imperial Guard (1804), with which he took part in
the Austerlitz campaign of the following year. Early in 1806 he was given a
commission, and as a sub-lieutenant he served in the Jena and Eylau
campaigns, winning his promotion to the rank of lieutenant at Pultusk
(December 1806). In 1808 he was in the first French corps which entered
Spain, and was stationed in Madrid during the revolt of the _Dos Mayo_. At
the second siege of Saragossa he won further promotion to the rank of
captain, and in 1809-1810 found opportunities for winning distinction under
General (Marshal) Suchet in the eastern theatre of the Peninsular War, in
which he rose to the rank of major and the command of a full regiment. At
the first restoration he was made a colonel, but he rejoined Napoleon
during the Hundred Days, and under his old chief Suchet distinguished
himself greatly in the war in the Alps. For fifteen years after the fall of
Napoleon he was not re-employed, and during this time he displayed great
activity in agriculture and in the general development of his district of
Perigord. The July revolution of 1830 reopened his military career, and
after a short tenure of a regimental command he was in 1831 made a
_marechal de camp_. In the chamber [v.04 p.0704] of deputies, to which he
was elected in the same year, he showed himself to be an inflexible
opponent of democracy, and in his military capacity he was noted for his
severity in police work and the suppression of _emeutes_. His conduct as
gaoler of the duchesse de Berry led to a duel between Bugeaud and the
deputy Dulong, in which the latter was killed (1834); this affair and the
incidents of another _emeute_ exposed Bugeaud to ceaseless attacks in the
Chamber and in the press, but his opinion was sought by all parties in
matters connected with agriculture and industrial development. He was
re-elected in 1834, 1837 and 1839.

About this time Bugeaud became much interested in the question of Algeria.
At first he appears to have disapproved of the conquest, but his
undeviating adherence to Louis Philippe brought him into agreement with the
government, and with his customary decision he proposed to employ at once
whatever forces were necessary for the swift, complete and lasting
subjugation of Algeria. Later events proved the soundness of his views; in
the meantime Bugeaud was sent to Africa in a subordinate capacity, and
proceeded without delay to initiate his war of flying columns. He won his
first victory on the 7th of July 1836, made a brilliant campaign of six
weeks' duration, and returned home with the rank of lieutenant-general. In
the following year he signed the treaty of Tafna (June 1st, 1837), with
Abd-el-Kader, an act which, though justified by the military and political
situation, led to a renewal of the attacks upon him in the chamber, to the
refutation of which Bugeaud devoted himself in 1839. Finally, in 1840, he
was nominated governor-general of Algeria, and early in 1841 he put into
force his system of flying columns. His swiftness and energy drove back the
forces of Abd-el-Kader from place to place, while the devotion of the rank
and file to "Pere Bugeaud" enabled him to carry all before him in action.
In 1842 he secured the French positions by undertaking the construction of
roads. In 1843 Bugeaud was made marshal of France, and in this and the
following year he continued his operations with unvarying success. His
great victory of Isly on the 14th of August 1844 won for him the title of
duke. In 1845, however, he had to take the field again in consequence of
the disaster of Sidi Brahim (22nd of September 1845), and up to his final
retirement from Algeria (July 1846) he was almost constantly employed in
the field. His resignation was due to differences with the home government
on the question of the future government of the province. Amidst his other
activities he had found time to study the agricultural characteristics of
the conquered country, and under his regime the number of French colonists
had grown from 17,000 to 100,000. In 1848 the marshal was in Paris during
the revolution, but his orders prevented him from acting effectually to
suppress it. He was asked, but eventually refused, to be a candidate for
the presidency in opposition to Louis Napoleon. His last public service was
the command of the army of the Alps, formed in 1848-1849 to observe events
in Italy. He died in Paris on the 10th of June 1849.

Bugeaud's writings were numerous, including his _Oeuvres militaires_,
collected by Weil (Paris, 1883), many official reports on Algeria and the
war there, and some works on economics and political science. See Comte
d'Ideville, _Le Marechal Bugeaud_ (Paris, 1881-1882).

BUGENHAGEN, JOHANN (1485-1558), surnamed POMERANUS, German Protestant
reformer, was born at Wollin near Stettin on the 24th of June 1485. At the
university of Greifswald he gained much distinction as a humanist, and in
1504 was appointed by the abbot of the Praemonstratensian monastery at
Belbuck rector of the town school at Treptow. In 1509 he was ordained
priest and became a vicar in the collegiate _Marienkirche_ at Treptow; in
1517 he was appointed lecturer on the Bible and Church Fathers at the abbey
school at Belbuck. In 1520 Luther's _De Captivitate Babylonica_ converted
him into a zealous supporter of the Reformer's views, to which he won over
the abbot among others. In 1521 he went to Wittenberg, where he formed a
close friendship with Luther and Melanchthon, and in 1522 he married. He
preached and lectured in the university, but his zeal and organizing skill
soon spread his reforming influence far beyond its limits. In 1528 he
arranged the church affairs of Brunswick and Hamburg; in 1530 those of
Luebeck and Pomerania. In 1537 he was invited to Denmark by Christian III.,
and remained five years in that country, organizing the church (though only
a presbyter, he consecrated the new Danish bishops) and schools. He passed
the remainder of his life at Wittenberg, braving the perils of war and
persecution rather than desert the place dear to him as the home of the
Reformation. He died on the 20th of April 1558. Among his numerous works is
a history of Pomerania, which remained unpublished till 1728. Perhaps his
best book is the _Interpretatio in Librum Psalmorum_ (1523), and he is also
remembered as having helped Luther in his translation of the Bible.

See Life by H. Hering (Halle, 1888); Emil Goerigk, _Bugenhagen und die
Protestantisierung Pommerns_ (1895). O. Vogt published a collection of
Bugenhagen's correspondence in 1888, and a supplement in 1890.

BUGGE, SOPHUS (1833-1907), Norwegian philologist, was born at Laurvik,
Norway, on the 5th of January 1833. He was educated at Christiania,
Copenhagen and Berlin, and in 1866 he became professor of comparative
philology and Old Norse at Christiania University. In addition to
collecting Norwegian folk-songs and traditions, and writing on Runic
inscriptions, he made considerable contributions to the study of the
Celtic, Romance, Oscan, Umbrian and Etruscan languages. He was the author
of a very large number of books on philology and folklore. His principal
work, a critical edition of the elder Edda (_Norroen Fornkvoedi_), was
published at Christiania in 1867. He maintained that the songs of the
_Edda_ and the earlier sagas were largely founded on Christian and Latin
tradition imported into Scandinavian literature by way of England. His
writings also include _Gamle Norske Folkeviser_ (1858), a collection of Old
Norse folk-songs; _Bidrag til den aeldste skaldedigtnings historie_
(Christiania, 1894); _Helge-digtene i den Aeldre Edda_ (Copenhagen, 1896,
Eng. trans., _The Home of the Eddic Poems_, 1899); _Norsk Sagafortaelling
op Sagaskrivning i Island_ (Christiania, 1901), and various books on Runic
inscriptions. He died on the 8th of July 1907.

For a further list of his works see J.B. Halvorsen, _Norsk
Forfatter-Lexikon_, vol. i. (Christiania, 1885).

BUGGY, a vehicle with either two (in England and India) or four wheels (in
America). English buggies are generally hooded and for one horse. American
buggies are for one horse or two, and either covered with a hood or open;
among the varieties are the "Goddard" (the name of the inventor), the
"box," so called from the shape of the body, the "cut under," i.e. cut out
for the front wheels to cramp beneath and so turn in a narrow space, the
"end-spring" and "side-bar," names referring to the style of hanging. A
skeleton buggy, lightly constructed, is used on the American "speedways,"
built and maintained for fast driving. The word is of unknown origin; it
may be connected with "bogie" (_q.v._) a truck. The supposed Hindustani
_bagg[=i]_, a gig, often given as the source, appears to be an invention or
an adaptation into the vernacular of the English word.

BUGIS, or BUGHIS, a people of Malayan stock, originally occupying only the
kingdom of Boni in the south-western peninsula of the island of Celebes.
From this district they spread over the whole island, and founded
settlements throughout the whole Malay Archipelago. They are of middle size
and robust, of very active, enterprising nature and of a complexion
slightly lighter than the average Malay. In disposition they are brave,
haughty and fierce, and are said to be more predisposed towards "running
amuck" than any other Malayans. They speak a language allied to that of the
Macassars, and write it with similar characters. It has been studied, and
its letters reproduced in type by Dr B.F. Mathes of the Netherlands Bible
Society. The Bugis are industrious and ingenious; they practise agriculture
more than the neighbouring tribes, and manufacture cotton-cloth not only
for their own use but for export. They also carry on a considerable trade
in the mineral and vegetable products of Boni, such as gold-dust,
tortoise-shell, pearls, nut-megs and camphor. Thair love of the sea has
given them almost a monopoly of trade around Celebes. Their towns [v.04
p.0705] are well built and they have schools of their own. The king is
elected generally for life, and always from their own number, by the chiefs
of the eight petty states that compose the confederation of Boni, and he
cannot decide on any public measure without their consent. In some of the
states the office of chief is hereditary; in others any member of the
privileged classes may aspire to the dignity, and it not infrequently
happens that the state is governed by a woman. The Bugis have been
Mahommedans since the 17th century. Their original form of nature-worship
had been much affected by Hindu influences, and even now they retain rites
connected with the worship of Siva. See further BONI; CELEBES.

[Illustration: FIG. 1.--Modern Service Bugle, British Army (Charles
Mahillon).]

BUGLE, BUGLE-HORN, KEYED BUGLE, KENT BUGLE OR REGENT'S BUGLE (Fr. _Bugle_,
_Clairon_, _Cor a clefs_, _Bugle a clefs_; Ger. _Fluegelhorn_, _Signalhorn_,
_Bugelhorn_, _Klappenhorn_, _Kenthorn_; Ital. _Corna cromatica_), a treble
brass wind instrument with cup-shaped mouthpiece and conical bore, used as
a military duty and signal instrument. The bugle was originally, as its
name denotes, a bull's horn,[1] of which it has preserved the
characteristic conical bore of rapidly increasing diameter.

Those members of the brass wind such as the horns, bugle, trumpet and
tubas, which, in their simplest form, consist of tubes without lateral
openings, depend for their scale on the harmonic series obtained by
overblowing, i.e. by greater pressure of breath and by the increased
tension of the lips, acting as reeds, across the mouthpiece. The harmonic
series thus produced, which depends on the acoustic principles of the tube
itself, and is absolutely uninfluenced by the manner in which the tube is
bent, forms a natural subdivision in classifying these instruments:--(1)
Those in which the lower harmonics from the second to the sixth or eighth
are employed, such as the bugle, post-horn, the cornet a pistons, the
trombone. (2) Those in which the higher harmonics from the third or fourth
to the twelfth or sixteenth are mostly used, such as the French horn and
trumpet. (3) Those which give out the fundamental tone and harmonics up to
the eighth, such as the tubas and ophicleide.

[Illustration]

We thus find a fundamental difference between the trumpet and the bugle as
regards the harmonic series. But although, to the casual beholder, these
instruments may present a general similarity, there are other important
structural distinctions. The tube of the trumpet is cylindrical, widening
only at the bell, whereas that of the bugle, as stated above, is conical.
Both instruments have cup-shaped mouthpieces outwardly similar. The
peculiar shape of the basins, however, at the place where they open into
the tube, angular in the trumpet and bevelled in the bugle, taken in
conjunction with the bore of the main tube, gives to the trumpet its
brilliant blaring tone, and to the bugle its more veiled but penetrating
quality, characteristic of the whole family.[2] Only five notes are
required for the various bugle-calls, although the actual compass of the
instrument consists of eight, of which the first or fundamental, however,
being of poor quality, is never used. There are bugles in C and in E flat,
but the bugle in B flat is most generally used; the key of C is used in
notation.

In order to increase the compass and musical possibilities of the bugle,
two methods have been adopted, the use of (1) keys and (2) valves. The
application of keys to the bugle produced the Kent bugle, and later the
ophicleide. The application of valves produced the family of saxhorns. The
use of keys for wood wind instruments was known early in the 15th
century,[3] perhaps before. In 1438, the duke of Burgundy paid Hennequin
Haulx, instrument-maker of Brussels, 4 _ridres_ a piece for three tenor
bombards with keys. In the 16th century we find a key applied to the bass
flute-a-bec[4] and later to the large tenor cornetto.[5] In 1770 a
horn-player named Koelbel, belonging to the imperial Russian band,
experimented with keys on the trumpet, and in 1795 Weidinger of Vienna
produced a trumpet with five keys. In 1810 Joseph Halliday, the bandmaster
of the Cavan militia, patented the keyed bugle, with five keys and a
compass of twenty-five notes, calling it the "Royal Kent Bugle" out of
compliment to the duke of Kent, who was at the time commander-in-chief, and
encouraged the introduction of the instrument into the regimental bands. A
Royal Kent bugle in C, stamped with Halliday's name as inventor, and made
by P. Turton, 5 Wormwood Gate, Dublin, was exhibited by Col. Shaw-Hellier
at the Royal Military Exhibition in 1890.[6] The instrument measures 17
in., and the total length of the tubing, including the mouthpiece, 501/2 in.
The diameter at the mouthpiece is 1/2 in. and at the bell 53/4 in. The
instrument has a chromatic compass of two octaves, [Illustration] the open
notes being [Illustration].

Mahillon (op. cit. p. 117) points out that the tonality of the key-bugle
and kindred instruments is determined by the second harmonic given out by
the open tube, the first key remaining open. To the original instrument
specified in the patent, Halliday added a sixth key, which became the first
and was in the normal position open; this key when closed gave B flat, with
the same series of harmonics as the open tube. The series, however, becomes
shorter with each successive key. Thus, on being opened, the second key
gives [Illustration], the third key [Illustration], the fourth key
[Illustration], the fifth key [Illustration], the sixth key [Illustration].
The bore of the instrument is just wide enough in proportion to its length
to make possible the playing of the fundamental tones in the first two
series, but these notes are never used, and the harmonics above the sixth
are also avoided, being of doubtful intonation. In the ophicleide, the bass
of the key-bugle, the bore is sufficiently wide to produce the fundamentals
of a satisfactory quality.

The keyed bugle was chiefly used in B flat, a crook for B flat being
frequently added to the bugle in C; the soprano bugle in E flat was also
much used in military bands.

The origin of the bugle, in common with that of the hunting horn, is of the
highest antiquity. During the middle ages, the word "bugle" was applied to
the ox and also to its horns, whether used as musical instruments or for
drinking. The _New English Dictionary_ quotes a definition of bugle dating
from c. 1398: "The Bugle ... is lyke to an oxe and is a fyers [v.04 p.0706]
beest."[7] In 1300 a romance[8] contains the word used in both
acceptations, "A thousand bugles of Ynde," and "tweye bugle-hornes and a
bowe." F. Godefroy[9] gives quotations from early French which show that,
as in England, the word bugle was frequently used as an adjective, and as a
verb:--"IIII cors buglieres fist soner de randon" (_Quatre fils Aymon_, ed.
P. Tarbe, p. 32), and "I grant cor buglerenc fit en sa tor soner" (_Aiol_,
7457, _Societe des anciens textes francais_). Tubas, horns, cornets and
bugles have as common archetype the horn of ram, bull or other animal,
whose form was copied and modified in bronze, wood, brass, ivory, silver,
&c. Of all these instruments, the bugle has in the highest degree retained
the acoustic properties and the characteristic scale of the prototype, and
is still put to the original use for giving military signals. The shofar of
the ancient Hebrews, used at the siege of Jericho, was a cow's horn (Josh.
vi. 4, 5, 8, 13, &c.), translated in the Vulgate _buccina_, in the
paraphrase of the Chaldee _buccina ex cornu_. The directions given for
sounding the trumpets of beaten silver described in Numbers x. form the
earliest code of signals yet known; the narrative shows that the Israelites
had metal wind instruments; if, therefore, they retained the more primitive
cow's horn and ram's horn (shofar), it was from choice, because they
attached special significance to them in connexion with their ritual. The
trumpet of silver mentioned above was the _Khatsotsrah_, probably the long
straight trumpet or tuba which also occurs among the instruments in the
musical scenes of the ancient Egyptians and Assyrians. Gideon's use of a
massed band of three hundred shofars to terrify and defeat the Midianites
(Judges vii. 16), and Saul's call to arms (1 Sam. xiii. 3) show that the
value of the shofar as a military instrument was well understood by the
Jews. The cornu was used by the Roman infantry to sound the military calls,
and Vegetius[10] states that the tuba and buccina were also used for the
same purpose. Mahillon possesses a facsimile of an ancient Etruscan cornu,
the length of which is 1.40 m.; he gives its scale,[11] pitched one tone
below that of the bugle in E flat, as that of D flat, of which the
harmonics [Illustration] from the second to the sixth are available. The
same department of the British Museum was enriched in 1904 with a
terra-cotta model (fig. 2) of a late Roman bugle (c. 4th century A.D.),
bent completely round upon itself to form a coil between the mouthpiece and
the bell-end (the latter has been broken off). This precious relic was
found at Ventoux in France and has been acquired from the collection of M.
Morel. This is precisely the form of bugle now used as a badge by the first
battalion of the King's Own Light Infantry.[12] During the middle ages the
use of the bugle-horn by knights and huntsmen, and perhaps also in naval
warfare, was general in Europe, as the following additional quotations will
show: "XXX cors bugleres, fait l'amirax soner" (_Conq. de Jerusalem_, 6811,
Hippeau); "Two squyers blewe ... with ij grete bugles hornes" (Caxton,
_Chron. Engl. ccix. 192_). The oliphant was a glorified bugle-horn made of
rich material, such as ivory, carved and inlaid with designs in gold and
silver.

[Illustration: FIG. 2.--Terra Cotta Model of Roman Bugle, 4th cent.
(British Museum).]

The history of the bugle as a military instrument is in England closely
connected with the creation of the light infantry, in which it gradually
superseded the drum[13] as a duty and signal instrument. It was during the
17th century that the change was inaugurated; improvements in firearms
brought about the gradual abandonment of armour by the infantry, and the
formation of the light infantry and the adoption of the bugle followed by
degrees. One of the oldest light infantry regiments, Prince Albert's 1st
Somerset Light Infantry, formed in 1685 by the earl of Huntingdon, employed
a drummer at that date at a shilling per day.[14] At the end of the 18th
century we find the bugle the recognized signal instrument in the light
infantry, while the trumpet remained that of the cavalry. The general order
introducing the bugle as a minor badge for the light infantry is under date
28th of December 1814. In 1856 the popularity of the keyed or Royal Kent
bugle in the army had reached its height. A bugle-band was formed in the
Royal Artillery as a substitute for the drum and fife band.[15] The
organization and training of this bugle-band were entrusted to
Trumpet-major James Lawson, who raised it to a very high standard of
excellence. Major Lawson was a fine cornet player, and finding the scale of
the service bugle too restricted he obtained permission to add to it a
valve attachment, which made the bugle a chromatic instrument like the
cornet, in fact practically a saxhorn. Before long, horns in E flat, tenor
horns in B flat, euphoniums and bass tubas were added, all made of copper,
and in 1869 the name of "bugle band" was changed to R.A. Brass Band, and in
1877 it was merged in the Mounted Band. The bugle with its double
development by means of keys into Royal Kent bugle and ophicleide, and by
means of valves into saxhorns and tubas, formed the nucleus of brass bands
of all countries during the greater part of the 19th century. The
Fluegelhorn, as its name denotes, became the signal instrument of the
infantry in Germany as in England, and still holds it own with the keyed
bugle in the fine military bands of Austro-Hungary.

There is in the department of prehistoric antiquities at the British Museum
a fine bugle-horn belonging to the Bronze Age in Denmark; the tube, which
has an accentuated conical bore, is bent in a semi-circle, and has on the
inner bend a series of little rings from which were probably suspended
ornaments or cords. An engraved design runs spirally round the whole length
of the tube, which is in an excellent state of preservation.

Meyerbeer introduced the bugle in B flat in his opera _Robert-le-Diable_ in
the scene of the resurrection of the nuns, and a bugle in A in the fifth
act.

See, for further information on the technique of the instrument, Logier's
_Introduction to the Art of Playing on the Royal Kent Bugle_ (London,
Clementi, 1820); and for the use of the bugle in the French army, G.
Kastner, _Le Manuel general de musique militaire_ (with illustrations,
Paris, 1848).

(K. S.)

[1] The word is derived from Lat. _buculus_, a young bull. "Bugle," meaning
a long jet or black glass bead, used in trimming ladies' dresses, is
possibly connected with the Ger. _Bugel_, a bent piece of metal. The
English name "bugle" is also given to a common labiate plant, the _Ajuga
reptans_, not to be confused with the "Bugloss" or _Anchusa officinalis_.

[2] For diagrams of these mouthpieces see V.C. Mahillon, _Elements
d'acoustique_ (Brussels, 1874), p. 96.

[3] See E. van der Straeten, _La Musique aux Pays-bas_, vol. vii. p. 38,
where the instrument is not mentioned as a novelty; also Leon, comte de
Laborde, _Les Ducs de Bourgogne_, pt. ii. (_Preuves_), (Paris, 1849), tom.
i. p. 365, No. 1266.

[4] Martin Agricola, _Musica Instrumentalis deudsch_ (Wittenberg, 1528), f.
viii^b.

[5] Michael Praetorius, _Syntagma Musicum_ (Wolfenbuettel, 1618), pl. viii.
No. 5.

[6] See Captain C.R. Day, _Descript. Catalogue_ (London, 1891), pp.
168-169, and pl. xi. fig. D.

[7] Barthol. Trevisa, _De Propr. Rebus_, xviii., xv., 1495, 774.

[8] _King Alisaunder_, 5112 and 5282.

[9] _Dictionnaire de l'ancienne langue francaise du IXe an XVe siecle._

[10] _De re militari_, bk. iii. ch. v.

[11] See _Catal. descriptif du musee instrumental du conservatoire de
Bruxelles_, vol. i. (Ghent, 1880), p. 331. There are, in the department of
Greek and Roman antiquities at the British Museum, two bronze Etruscan
cornua, No. 2734, resembling the hunting horns of the middle ages and bent
in a semicircular shape. They measure from end to end respectively 2 ft. 1
in. and 2 ft. 2 in.

[12] Maj. J.H.L. Archer, _The British Army Records_ (London, 1888), p. 402.

[13] For the use of the drum in the 16th century, see Sir John Smyth,
_Instructions and Observations for all Chieftaines, Captaines, &c._
(London, 1595), pp. 158-159.

[14] See Richard Cannon, _Historical Records_ of the regiment (London,
1848), p. 3.

[15] See H.G. Farmer, _Memoirs of the Royal Artillery Band_ (London, 1904),
p. 183.

BUGTI, a Baluch tribe of Rind (Arab) origin, numbering about 15,500, who
occupy the hills to the east of the Sind-Peshin railway, between Jacobabad
and Sibi, with the Marris (a cognate tribe) to the north of them. Like the
Marris, the Bugtis are physically a magnificent race of people, fine
horsemen, good swordsmen and hereditary robbers. An expedition against them
was organized by Sir C. Napier in 1845, but they were never brought under
control till Sir Robert Sandeman ruled Baluchistan. Since the construction
of the railway, which completely outflanks their country, they have been
fairly orderly.

BUHLE, JOHANN GOTTLIEB (1763-1821), German scholar and philosopher, was
born at Brunswick, and educated at Goettingen. He became professor of
philosophy at Goettingen, Moscow (1840) and Brunswick. Of his numerous
publications, [v.04 p.0707] the most important are the _Handbuch der
Geschichte der Philosophie_ (8 vols., 1796-1804), and _Geschichte der
neueren Philosophie_ (6 vols., 1800-1805). The latter, elaborate and well
written, is lacking in critical appreciation and proportion; there are
French and Italian translations. He edited Aratus (2 vols., 1793, 1801) and
part of Aristotle (Bipontine edition, vols. i.-v., 1791-1904).

BUHTUR[=I] [al-Wal[=i]d ibn 'Ubaid All[=a]h] (820-897), Arabian poet, was
born at Manbij (Hierapolis) in Syria, between Aleppo and the Euphrates.
Like Ab[=u] Tamm[=a]m, he was of the tribe of T[=a]i. While still young, he
went to visit Ab[=u] Tamm[=a]m at Horns, and by him was commended to the
authorities at Ma'arrat un-Nu'm[=a]n, who gave him a pension of 4000
dirhems (about L90) yearly. Later he went to Bagdad, where he wrote verses
in praise of the caliph Motawakkil and of the members of his court.
Although long resident in Bagdad he devoted much of his poetry to the
praise of Aleppo, and much of his love-poetry is dedicated to Alwa, a
maiden of that city. He died at Manbij Hierapolis in 897. His poetry was
collected and edited twice in the 10th century, arranged in one edition
alphabetically (i.e. according to the last consonant in each line); in the
other according to subjects. It was published in Constantinople (A.D.
1883). Like Ab[=u] Tamm[=a]m he made a collection of early poems, known as
the Ham[=a]sa (index of the poems contained in it, in the _Journal of the
German Oriental Society_, vol. 47, pp. 418 ff., cf. vol. 45, pp. 470 ff.).

Biography in M^cG. de Slane's translation of Ibn Khallik[=a]n's
_Biographical Dictionary_ (Paris and London, 1842), vol. iii. pp. 657 ff.;
and in the _Book of Songs_ (see ABULFARAJ), vol. xviii. pp. 167-175.

(G. W. T.)

BUILDERS' RITES. Many people familiar with the ceremonies attendant on the
laying of foundation stones, whether ecclesiastical, masonic or otherwise,
may be at a loss to account for the actual origin of the custom in placing
within a cavity beneath the stone, a few coins of the realm, newspapers,
&c. The ordinary view that by such means particulars may be found of the
event on the removal of the stone hereafter, may suffice as respects
latter-day motives, but such memorials are deposited in the hope that they
will never be disturbed, and so another reason must be found for such an
ancient survival. Whilst old customs continue, the reasons for them are
ever changing, and certainly this fact applies to laying foundation stones.
Originally, it appears that living victims were selected as "a sacrifice to
the gods," and especially to ensure the stability of the building. Grimm[1]
remarks "It was often thought necessary to immure live animals and even men
in the foundation, on which the structure was to be raised, to secure
immovable stability." There is no lack of evidence as to this gruesome
practice, both in savage and civilized communities. "The old pagan laid the
foundation of his house and fortress in blood."[2] Under the walls of two
round towers in Ireland (the only ones examined) human skeletons have been
discovered. In the 15th century, the wall of Holsworthy church was built
over a living human being, and when this became unlawful, images of living
beings were substituted (_Folk-Lore Journal_, i. 23-24).

The best succinct account of these rites is to be obtained in G. W. Speth's
_Builders' Rites and Ceremonies_ (1893).

(W. J. H.*)

[1] _Teutonic Mythology_ (1883-1884), (trans. Stalleybrass).

[2] Baring-Gould on "Foundations," _Murray's Mag._ (1887).

BUILDING.[1] The art of building comprises the practice of civil
architecture, or the mechanical operations necessary to [Sidenote: Relation
of building to architecture.] carry the designs of the architect into
effect. It is not infrequently called "practical architecture," but the
adoption of this form would lead only to confusion, by rendering it
difficult to make the distinction generally understood between architecture
(_q.v._) as a fine or liberal art, and architecture as a mechanical art.
The execution of works of architecture necessarily includes building, but
building is frequently employed when the result is not architectural; a man
may be a competent builder without being an architect, but no one can be an
accomplished architect unless he be competent to specify and direct all the
operations of building. An architect should have a scientific knowledge of
the various soils he may meet with, such as clay, earth, silt, rock,
gravel, chalk, &c., so that when the trial holes are dug out on the site,
he can see the nature of the soil, and at once know what kind of a
foundation to put to the building, and the depth to which he must go to get
a good bottom. He should also have a good knowledge of chemistry, so that
he may understand the effects of the various acids, gases, &c., that are
contained in the materials he uses, and the objections to their presence.
He must be acquainted with the principles of timbering in trenches, and
excavations, shoring, brickwork, fireproof construction, stonework,
carpentry and joinery, smiths' work, plumbing, heating, ventilation, bells,
electric and gas lighting, water-supply, drainage, plastering, tiling to
internal walls or pavings and roofs, slating of roofs, glazing, painting
and decoration. He should be able to calculate the various strengths and
strains to be placed on any portion of the structure, and have a general
knowledge of the building trade, enabling him to deal with any difficulty
or defects that may arise.

An important feature in the qualification of the architect is that he
should be thoroughly conversant with the by-laws of the different towns or
districts, as to the requirements for the various classes of buildings, and
the special features of portions of the different buildings. The following
are examples of the various buildings which he may have to design, and the
erection of which he may have to superintend:--dwelling-houses, domestic
buildings, shops, dwellings for the working class, public buildings such as
churches, schools, hospitals, libraries and hotels, factories of all kinds
for all general trades, studios, electric power stations, cold storage
buildings, stables and slaughterhouses. With regard to factories, places
for the storage or making of different patent foods, and for slaughter of
beasts intended for human consumption, stringent by-laws are in most
countries laid down and enforced by the public health authorities. In
England, the Public Health Acts and By-laws are carried out by the various
borough or district authorities, who appoint inspectors especially to study
the health of the public with regard to sanitary arrangements. The
inspectors have special powers to deal with all improper or defective food,
or with any defects in buildings that may affect its cleanly preparation.

In addition to meeting the requirements of the clients, the various
buildings have to be constructed and planned on clearly [Sidenote: Reasons
for special type of plans.] defined lines, according to the rules of the
various authorities that control their erection; thus the construction and
planning of public schools are governed in England by the board of
education, and churches are governed by the various societies that assist
in financing the erection of these edifices; of these the Incorporated
Church Building Society exercises the strongest control. Factories both in
England and France must be planned and erected to meet the separate acts
that deal with these buildings. The fire insurance companies lay down
certain requirements according to the size of the building, and the special
trade for which it is erected, and fix their rate of premium accordingly.
Dwelling-houses in London must be erected in accordance with the many
building acts which govern the materials to be used, and the methods by
which they shall be employed, the thickness of walls, rates of inclination
of roofs, means of escape from fire, drainage, space at rear, &c. &c.;
these laws especially forbid the use of timber framed buildings. In sundry
districts in England where the model by-laws are not in force, notably at
Letchworth, Herts, it is possible to erect buildings with sound materials
untrammelled by by-laws. With regard to premises used in a combined way, as
shop and dwelling-house, if in London, and the building exceeds 10 squares,
or 1000 sq. ft. super in area, the stairs and a large portion of the
building must be built of fire-resisting materials. In the erection of
London flats under certain conditions the stairs and corridors [v.04
p.0708] must be of fire-resisting materials, while in parts of New York
timber buildings are allowed; for illustrations of these see the article
CARPENTRY. In public buildings and theatres in London, Paris and New York
not only the construction, but also the exits and seating accommodation and
stage, including the scenery dock and flies, must conform to certain
regulations.

The conditions necessary for planning a successful building may be
summarized as follows:--(1) Ease of access; (2) Good [Sidenote: Conditions
necessary for a successful building.] light (3) Good service; (4) Pleasing
environment and approaches; (5) Minimum cost with true economy; in the case
of office buildings, also ease of rearrangement to suit tenants. An
architect should also be practically acquainted with all the modes of
operation in all the trades or arts employed in building, and be able
minutely to estimate beforehand the absolute cost involved in the execution
of a proposed structure. The power to do this necessarily involves that of
measuring work (usually done by the quantity surveyor at an advanced stage
of the work), and of ascertaining the quantities to be done. In ordinary
practice the architect usually cubes a building at a price per foot cube,
as will be described hereafter, but an architect should know how to measure
and prepare quantities, or he cannot be said to be master of his
profession.

Building includes what is called construction, which is the branch of the
science of architecture relating to the practical [Sidenote: Construction.]
execution of the works required to produce any structure; it will therefore
be necessary to explain the subject in a general manner before entering
upon building in detail.

Although the styles of architecture have varied at different periods,
buildings, wherever similar materials are employed, must be constructed on
much the same principles. Scientific knowledge of the natures and
properties of materials has, however, given to the modern workman immense
advantages over his medieval brother-craftsman, and caused many changes in
the details of the trade, or art of building, although stones, bricks,
mortar, &c., then as now, formed the element of the more solid parts of all
edifices.

The object of constructions is to adapt, combine and fit materials in such
a manner that they shall retain in use the [Sidenote: General principles.]
forms and dispositions assigned to them. If an upright wall be properly
constructed upon a sufficient foundation, the combined mass will retain its
position and bear pressure acting in the direction of gravity to any extent
that the ground on which it stands, and the compound materials of the wall,
can sustain. But pressure acting laterally has a necessary tendency to
overthrow a wall, and therefore it will be the aim of the constructor to
compel, as far as possible, all forces that can act upon an upright wall,
to act in the direction of gravity, or else to give it permanent means of
resistance in the direction opposite to that in which a disturbing force
may act. Thus when an arch is built to bear against an upright wall, a
buttress or other counterfort is applied in a direction opposed to the
pressure of the arch. In like manner the inclined roof of a building
spanning from wall to wall tends to thrust out the walls, and hence a tie
is applied to hold the opposite sides of the roof together at its base,
where alone a tie can be fully efficient, and thus the roof is made to act
upon the walls wholly in the direction of gravity; or where an efficient
tie is inapplicable, as in the case of a hammer beam roof, buttresses or
counterforts are added to the walls, to enable them to resist the pressure
outwards. A beam laid horizontally from wall to wall, as a girder to carry
a floor and its load, may sag or bend downwards, and tend thereby to force
out the walls, or the beam itself may break. Both these contingencies are
obviated by trussing, which renders the beam stiff enough to place its load
on the walls in the direction of gravity, and strong enough to carry it
safely. Or if the beam be rigid in its nature, or uncertain in its
structure, or both (as cast-iron is), and will break without bending, the
constructor by the smiths' art will supply a check and ensure it against
the possible contingency.

Perfect stability, however, is not to be obtained with materials which are
subject to influences beyond the control of man, and all matter is subject
to certain influences of that nature. The [Sidenote: Materials.] influences
mostly to be contended against are heat and humidity, the former of which
produces movement of some kind or to some extent in all bodies, the latter,
in many kinds of matter; whilst the two acting together contribute to the
disintegration or decay of materials available for the purposes of
construction. These pervading influences the constructor seeks to
counteract, by proper selection and disposition of his materials.

Stone and brick, the principal materials in general construction, keep
their places in combination by means of gravity. They may [Sidenote:
Stone.] be merely packed together, but in general they are compacted by
means of mortar or cement, so that although the main constituent materials
are wholly incompressible, masses of either, or of both, combined in
structures are compressible, until the setting medium has indurated to a
like condition of hardness. That kind of stone is best fitted for the
purposes of general construction which is least absorbent of moisture, and
at the same time free to work. Absorbent stone exposed to the weather
rapidly disintegrates, and for the most part non-absorbent stone is so hard
that it cannot always be used with a due regard to economy. When,
therefore, suitable stone of both qualities can be obtained, the harder
stone can be exposed to the weather, or to the action which the softer
stone cannot resist, and made to form the main body of the structure of the
latter so protected. The hard and the soft should be made to bear alike,
and should therefore be coursed and bonded together by the mason's art,
whether the work be of stone wrought into blocks and gauged to thickness,
or of rough dressed or otherwise unshaped rubble compacted with mortar.

Good bricks are less absorbent of moisture than any stone of the same
degree of hardness, and are better non-conductors [Sidenote: Bricks.] of
heat than stone. As the basis of a stable structure, brickwork is more to
be relied upon than stone in the form of rubble, when the constituents bear
the relation to one another last above referred to, the setting material
being the same in both; because the brick by its shaped form seats itself
truly, and produces by bonding a more perfectly combined mass, whilst the
imperfectly shaped and variously sized stone as dressed rubble can neither
bed nor bond truly, the inequalities of the form having to be compensated
for with mortar, and the irregularity of size of the main constituent
accounted for by the introduction of larger and smaller stones. The most
perfect stability is to be obtained, nevertheless, from truly wrought and
accurately seated and bonded blocks of stone, mortar being used to no
greater extent than may be necessary to exclude wind and water and prevent
the disintegrating action of these agents upon even the most durable stone.
When water alone is to be dealt with, and especially when it is liable to
act with force, mortar is necessary for securing to every block in the
structure its own full weight, and the aid of every other collateral and
superimposed stone, in order to resist the loosening effect which water in
powerful action is bound to produce.

In the application of construction to any particular object, the nature of
the object will naturally affect the character of [Sidenote: Particular
objects of construction.] the constructions and the materials of which they
are to be formed. Every piece of construction should be complete in itself,
and independent as such of everything beyond it. A door or a gate serves
its purpose by an application wholly foreign to itself, but it is a good
and effective, or a bad and ineffective, piece of construction,
independently of the posts to which it may be hung, whilst the wheel of a
wheelbarrow, comprising felloes, spokes and axletree, is a piece of
construction complete in itself, and independent as such of everything
beyond it. An arch of masonry, however large it may be, is not necessarily
a piece of construction complete in itself, for it would fall to pieces
without abutments. Thus a bridge consisting of a series of arches, however
extensive, may be but one piece of construction, no arch being complete in
itself without the collateral arches in the series to serve as its
abutments, and the whole series being dependent thereby upon [v.04 p.0709]
the ultimate abutments of the bridge, without which the structure would not
stand. This illustration is not intended to apply to the older bridges with
widely distended masses, which render each pier sufficient to abut the
arches springing from it, but tend, in providing for a way over the river,
to choke up the way by the river itself, or to compel the river either to
throw down the structure or else to destroy its own banks.

Some soils are liable to change in form, expanding and contracting under
meteorological influences; such are clays which [Sidenote: Foundations.]
swell when wetted and shrink when dried. Concrete foundations are commonly
interposed upon such soils to protect the building from derangement from
this cause; or walls of the cheaper material, concrete, instead of the more
expensive brick or stone structure, are brought up from a level
sufficiently below the ordinary surface of the ground. When concrete is
used to obviate the tendency of the soil to yield to pressure, expanse or
extent of base is required, and the concrete being widely spread should
therefore be deep or thick as a layer, only with reference to its own power
of transmitting to the ground the weight of the wall to be built upon it,
without breaking across or being crushed. But when concrete is used as a
substitute for a wall, in carrying a wall down to a low level, it is in
fact a wall in itself, wide only in proportion to its comparative weakness
in the absence of manipulated bond in its construction, and encased by the
soil within which it is placed. When a concrete wall is used in place of
brick the London Building Act requires an extra thickness of one-third; on
the question of reinforced concrete no regulations as to thickness have at
present been made.

The foundation of a building of ordinary weight is for the most part
sufficiently provided for by applying what are technically [Sidenote:
Footings to walls.] termed "footings" to the walls. The reason for a
footing is, that the wall obtains thereby a bearing upon a breadth of
ground so much greater than its own width or thickness above the footing as
to compensate for the difference between the power of resisting pressure of
the wall, and of the ground or ultimate foundation upon which the wall is
to rest. It will be clear from this that if a building is to be erected
upon rock as hard as the main constituent of the walls theoretically no
expanded footings will be necessary; if upon chalk, upon strong or upon
weak gravel, upon sand or upon clay, the footing must be expanded with
reference to the power of resistance of the structure to be used as a
foundation; whilst in or upon made ground or other loose and badly combined
or imperfectly resisting soil, a solid platform bearing evenly over the
ground, and wide enough not to sink into it, becomes necessary under the
constructed footing. For this purpose the easiest, the most familiar, and
for most purposes the most effectual and durable is a layer of concrete.

The English government, when it has legislated upon building matters, has
generally confined itself to making provision that the enclosing walls of
buildings should be formed of incombustible materials. In provisions
regarding the least thicknesses of such walls, these were generally
determined with reference to the height and length of the building.

In the general and usual practice of developing land at the present day,
the owner or freeholder of the land first consults an [Sidenote: Procedure
for an intended building.] architect and states his intentions of building,
the size of what he requires, what it is to be used for, if for trade how
many hands he intends to employ, and the sub-buildings and departments,
&c., that will be wanted. The architect gathers as much information as he
can as to his client's requirements, and from this information prepares his
sketches. This first step is usually done with rough sketches or outlines
only, and when approved by the client as regards the planning and situation
of rooms, &c., the architect prepares the plans, elevations, and sections
on the lines of the approved rough sketches; at the same time he strictly
observes the building acts, and makes every portion of the building comply
with these acts as regards the thickness of walls, open spaces, light and
air, distances from surrounding property, frontage lines, and a host of
other points too numerous to mention, as far as he can interpret the
meaning of the enactments. (The London and New York Building Acts are very
extensive, with numerous amendments made as occasion requires.) An
architect, whilst preparing the working drawings from the rough approved
sketches, and endeavouring to conform with the Building Act requirements,
often finds after consultation with the district surveyor, or the London
County Council, or other local authorities, that the plans have to be
altered; and when so altered the client may disapprove of them, and thus
delay often occurs in settling them.

Another important point is that after the architect has obtained the
consent of the building authorities, and also the approval of the client,
then he may have to fight the adjoining owners with regard to ancient
lights, or air space, or party walls. In the city of London these last
difficulties often mean the suspension of the work for a long time, and a
great loss to the client.

If the site is a large one, or the nature of the soil uncertain, trial
holes should be sunk directly the sketch plans are approved. (See
FOUNDATIONS.)

Where the property is leasehold there are always at this stage negotiations
as to obtaining the approval of the senior lessors and the freeholders;
these having been obtained, the architect is then free to serve the various
notices that may be required _re_ party walls, &c.

The contract plans should be very carefully prepared, and sections, plans
and elevations of all parts of the buildings and the levels from a datum
line be given. In addition to the general set of drawings, larger scale
details of the principal portions of the building should be given.

If there are any existing buildings on the site these should be carefully
surveyed and accurate detail plans be made for reference; this is
especially necessary with regard to easements and rights of adjoining
owners. Also in the preparation of the site plan the various levels of the
ground should be shown.

The plans having been approved by all parties concerned, the next operation
is the preparation of the _specification_. This is a document which
describes the materials to be used in the building, states how they are to
be mixed, and how the various works are to be executed, and specifies every
trade, and every portion of work in the building. The specification is
necessary to enable the builder to erect the structure according to the
architect's requirements, and is written by the architect; usually two
copies of this document are made, one for the builder, the other for the
architect, and the latter is signed as the contract copy in the same manner
as the drawings.

From the specification and drawings usually an approximate estimate of the
cost of the proposed building is prepared by the architect, and the most
general method adopted is to cube the building by a multiplication of the
length, breadth and height of the building, and to multiply the product or
cubic contents by a price ranging from fivepence to three shillings per
cubic foot. In the case of churches, chapels and schools, the cost may be
roughly computed by taking the number of seats at a price per seat. In the
case of churches and chapels, taking a minimum area of 8 ft. each, the cost
varies from L10 upwards, the difference being due to the amount of
architectural embellishment or the addition of a tower. Schools may be
estimated as averaging L9 per scholar; we find that, taking schools of
various sizes erected by the late London School Board, their cost varied
from L7:12:4 to L10:1:10 per scholar. Hospitals vary from L100 per bed
upwards, the lowest cost being taken from a cottage hospital type; while in
the case of St Thomas's hospital, London, the cost per bed, including the
proportion of the administrative block, was L650, and without this portion
the wards alone cost L250. The Herbert hospital at Woolwich cost only L320
per bed.

The bills of quantities are prepared by the quantity surveyor, and are
generally made to form part of the contract, and so mentioned in "the
contract." The work of the quantity surveyor is to measure from the
drawings the whole of the materials required for the structure, and state
the amounts or quantities of the respective materials in the form of a bill
usually made out on foolscap paper specially ruled, so that [v.04 p.0710]
the builders can price each item, together with the labour required to work
and fix it, thus forming the building. The idea is to be able to arrive at
a lump sum for which the builders will undertake to erect the building. It
is of frequent occurrence, in fact it occurs in four-fifths of building
contracts, that when a building is commenced, the client, or other
interested person, will alter some portion, thereby causing deviations from
the bills of quantities. By having the prices of the different materials
before him, it is easy for the quantity surveyor to remeasure the portion
altered, adding or deducting as the case may be, and thus to ascertain what
difference the alteration makes. This method of bills of quantities and
prices is absolutely necessary to any one about to build, and means a
considerable saving to the client in the end. For example:--Suppose that
bills of quantities are not prepared for a certain job by a quantity
surveyor, and, as is often done, the drawings and specification are sent to
several builders asking them for a quotation to build the house or factory
or whatever it may be, according to the drawings and specification. The
prices are duly sent in to the architect, and probably the lowest price is
accepted and the successful builder starts the job. During the progress of
the works certain alterations take place by the owner's instructions, and
when the day of settlement comes, the builder puts in his claim for
"extras," then owing to the alterations and to the architect having no
prices to work upon, litigation often ensues.

Before the work of erecting a structure is entrusted to a builder he has to
sign a contract in the same manner as the drawings and specification. This
contract is an important document wherein the builder agrees to carry out
the work for a stated sum of money, in accordance with the drawings and
specification, and bills of quantities, and instructions of the architect,
and to his entire satisfaction; and it also states the description of the
materials and workmanship, and the manner of carrying out the work,
responsibilities of the builder, particularly clauses indemnifying the
employer against accidents to employees, and against numerous other risks,
the time of completion of works under a penalty for non-completion (the
usual allowance being made for bad weather, fire or strikes), and also how
payments will be made to the builder as he proceeds with the building. This
form of contract is generally prepared by the architect, and varies in part
as may be necessary to meet the requirements of the case.

When the drawings have been approved by the owner or client, also by the
district surveyor or local authorities, and by adjoining owners, one copy
of them, made on linen, is usually deposited (in London) either with the
district surveyor, or with the London County Council, another is prepared
for the freeholder if a lease of the land is granted, and a third is given
to the builder. In addition, in complicated cases such as occur in the city
of London, when a building is erected on land which has four or five
distinct owners, an architect may have to prepare a large number of
complete copies to be deposited with the various parties interested.

The duties of the builder are very similar to those of the architect,
except that he is not expected to be able to plan [Sidenote: The builder's
sphere.] and design, but to carry out the plans and designs of the
architect in the actual work of building. The builder should also know the
various acts, and in particular the acts specially relating to the erection
of scaffoldings, hoardings, gantries, shoring and pulling down of old
buildings. He should have a thorough knowledge of all materials, their
qualifying marks or brands, and the special features of good and bad in
each class, their uses and method of use. He should be able to control and
manage both the men and materials; and briefly, in a builder, as opposed to
an architect, the constructive knowledge should predominate.

On large or important works it is usual to have a clerk of works or
delegate from the architect; his duties are to be on the works while they
are in progress and endeavour by constant attention to secure the use of
the best materials and construction, and to report to the architect for his
instruction any difficulties that may arise. He should be a thoroughly
practical man as opposed to the architectural draughtsman. His salary is
paid by the client, and is not included in the architect's remuneration.

American building acts agree in a general manner with those enforced in
London. But whereas New York allows the erection [Sidenote: American
practice.] of frame or wood structures, while defining a certain portion of
the city inside which no new frame or wood structures shall be erected, in
London and the large cities of Great Britain the erection of wood frame
buildings as dwellings is prohibited. In New York City provision is made
for a space at the rear of domestic buildings at least 10 ft. deep, but
such depth is increased when the building is over 60 ft. high, and is
varied under special circumstances. In London this depth is the same, but
the height of the building in relation to the space required in the rear
thereof shall be constructed to keep within an angle of 631/2 degrees,
inclining from the rear boundary towards the building from the level of
pavement in front of building; the position from which the angle is taken
is varied under special circumstances. In the smaller English towns the
building regulations are framed on the model by-laws, and these increase
the depth of the yard or garden according to the height of the building.

With regard to the strength and proportion of materials, these are not
dealt with in the London Building Act to the same extent as in the New
York; for example, in the New York acts (parts 4 and 5)[2] it is prescribed
that the bricks used shall be good, hard, well-burned bricks. The sand used
for mortar shall be clean, sharp, grit sand, free from loam or dirt, and
shall not be finer than the standard samples kept in the office of the
department of buildings; also the quality of lime and mortar is fully
described, and the strengths of steel and cast-iron, and tests of new
materials. Also it is required that all excavations for buildings shall be
properly guarded and protected so as to prevent them from becoming
dangerous to life or limb, and shall be sheath-piled where necessary by the
person or persons causing the excavations to be made, to prevent the
adjoining earth from caving in. Plans filed in the department of buildings
shall be accompanied by a statement of the character of the soil at the
level of the footings. There are also requirements as to protecting
adjoining property. The bearing capacity of soils, pressure under footings
of foundations, and in part 6 the materials of walls and the methods to be
observed in building them are defined. Part 23 deals with floor loads, and
the strength of floors constructed of various materials, and requires that
the temporary support shall be strong enough to carry the load placed upon
them during the progress of any works to buildings. Part 24 deals with the
calculations and strength of materials, and wind pressure. Parts 4 and 5 of
the New York Building Code are not dealt with by the London Building Act,
but the local by-laws of the various districts deal with these. Part 6 of
the New York code is dealt with partly by the London Building Act, and
partly by the local by-laws. Parts 23 and 24 of the New York code are not
dealt with in the English acts at all. In America the standard quality for
all materials is set out, but in no English acts do we find the definition
of the quality of timber, new materials, steel, &c. Iron and steel
construction is in its infancy in England as compared with America, and
probably this accounts for no special regulations being in force; but part
22 of the New York Building Code, section 110 to 129 inclusive, deals very
fully with iron and steel construction, and this is further supplemented by
sections 137 to 140 inclusive.

Sanitary work is dealt with in London by section 39 of the Public Health
(London) Act, and the drainage by-laws of the London County Council, in
which every detail is very fully gone into with regard to the laying of
drains, and fitting up of soil pipes, w.c.'s, &c., all of which is to be
carried out and tested to the satisfaction of the local borough's sanitary
inspector. The general requirements of New York with regard to sanitary
work are very similar with a few more restrictions, and are carried out
under "the rules and regulations for plumbing, drainage, [v.04 p.0711]
water-supply, and ventilation of buildings." The noticeable feature of the
New York regulations is that all master plumbers have to be registered,
which is not so in England. The New York regulations have 183 sections
relating to sanitary work, and the English regulations have 96 sections.
Also by part 16 of the Amendments to Plumbing Rules 1903, the New York laws
require that, before any construction of, or alterations to, any gas piping
or fittings are commenced, permits must be obtained from the superintendent
of buildings; these are only issued to a registered plumber. The
application must be accompanied by plans of the different floors showing
each outlet, and the number of burners to each outlet; a statement must
also be made of the quality of the pipes and fittings, all of which are to
be tested by the inspector. In London there are no such laws; the gas
companies control a small portion of the work as regards the connexion to
meters, while the insurance companies require gas jets to be covered with a
wire guard where liable to come in contact with inflammable goods. As to
water, the various water companies in England have each their own set of
regulations as to the kind of fittings and thickness and quality of pipe to
be used, whether for service, wastes or main.

The importance of fire-resisting construction is being more fully
recognized now by all countries. In France the regulations [Sidenote:
Fire-resisting construction.] for factories, shops and workshops relating
to "exits" require that all doors should open outwardly when they open on
to courts, vestibules, staircases or interior passages. When they give
access to the open air, outward opening is not obligatory unless it has
been judged necessary in the interests of safety. If the doors open on to a
passage or staircase they must be fixed in such a manner as not to project
into the passage or staircase when open. The exits must be numerous, and
signs indicating the quickest way out are to be placed in conspicuous
positions. The windows are to open outwardly. Staircases in offices or
other buildings serving as places for work shall be constructed in
incombustible materials, or shall be walled in fully in plaster. The number
of staircases shall be in proportion to the number of employees, &c. It is
prohibited to use any liquid emitting vapours inflammable under 35 deg. C. for
the purpose of lighting or heating, unless the apparatus containing the
liquid is solidly closed during work, that part of the apparatus containing
the liquid being so closed as to avoid any oozing out of the liquid, &c.
&c. Instructions are added as to precautions to be taken in case of fire.

In London fire-resisting construction is dealt with in the London Building
Act, and its second schedule, and in London County Council Theatre and
Factory Acts, &c. In New York the building code (parts 19, 20 and 21) deals
with fire appliances, escapes, and fire-proof shutters and doors,
fire-proof buildings and fire-proof floors, and requires that all tenement
houses shall have an iron ladder for escape. A section somewhat similar to
the last came into force in London in 1907 under the London Building Act,
being framed with a view to require all existing projecting one-storey
shops to have a fire-resisting roof, and all existing buildings over 50 ft.
in height to have means of escape to and from the roof in case of fire.

There are several patents now in use with which it would be possible to
erect a fire-proof dwelling at small cost with walls 3 to 5 in. in
thickness. One of these has been used where the building act does not
apply, as in the case of the Newgate prison cells, London, where the
outside walls were from 3 to 4 in. thick only, and were absolutely fire and
burglar proof. This method consists in using steel dovetailed sheets fixed
between small steel stanchions and plastered in cement on both sides. This
form of construction was also used at the British pavilion, Paris
Exhibition 1900, and has been employed in numerous other buildings in
England, and also in South Africa, Venezuela, and India (Delhi durbar). The
use of many of these convenient and sound forms of building construction
for ordinary buildings in London, and in districts of England where the
model by-laws are in force, is prohibited because they do not comply with
some one or other of the various clauses relating to materials, or to the
thickness of a wall.

The various details of construction are described and illustrated under
separate headings. See BRICKWORK, CARPENTRY, FOUNDATIONS, GLAZING, JOINERY,
MASONRY, PAINTER-WORK, PLASTERING, ROOFS, SCAFFOLD, SHORING, STAIRCASE,
STEEL CONSTRUCTION, STONE, TIMBER, WALL-COVERINGS, &c.

The principal publications for reference in connexion with this subject
are: _The Building and Health Laws of the City of New York_, Brooklyn Eagle
Library, No. 85; _Rules and Regulations affecting Building Operations in
the administrative County of London_, compiled by Ellis Marsland;
_Annotated By-Laws as to House Drainage, &c._, by Jensen; _Metropolitan
Sanitation_, by Herbert Daw.

(J. BT.)

[1] The verb "to build" (O.E. _byldan_) is apparently connected with O.E.
_bold_, a dwelling, of Scandinavian origin; cf. Danish _bol_, a farm,
Icelandic _bol_, farm, abode. Skeat traces it eventually to Sanskrit _bhu_,
to be, build meaning "to construct a place in which to be or dwell."

[2] _Building and Health Laws and Regulations affecting the City of New
York, including the Building Code of New York City as amended to 1st May
1903._

BUILDING SOCIETIES, the name given to societies "for the purpose of
raising, by the subscriptions of the members, a stock or fund for making
advances to members out of the funds of the society upon freehold,
copyhold, or leasehold estate by way of mortgage," may be "either
_terminating_ or _permanent_" (Building Societies Act 1874, Sec. 13). A
"terminating" society is one "which by its rules is to terminate at a fixed
date, or when a result specified in its rules is attained"; a "permanent"
society is one "which has not by its rules any such fixed date or specified
result, at which it shall terminate" (Sec. 5). A more popular description of
these societies would be--societies by means of which every man may become
"his own landlord," their main purpose being to collect together the small
periodical subscriptions of a number of members, until each in his turn has
been able to receive a sum sufficient to aid him materially in buying his
dwelling-house. The origin and early history of these societies is not very
clearly traceable. A mention of "building clubs" in Birmingham occurs in
1795; one is known to have been established by deed in the year 1809 at
Greenwich; another is said to have been founded in 1825, under the auspices
of the earl of Selkirk at Kirkcudbright in Scotland, and we learn
(Scratchley, _On Building Societies_, p. 5) that similar societies in that
kingdom adopted the title of "menages."

_United Kingdom._--When the Friendly Societies Act of 1834 gave effect to
the wise and liberal policy of extending its benefits to societies for
frugal investment, and generally to all associations having a similar legal
object, several building societies were certified under it,--so many,
indeed, that in 1836 a short act was passed confirming to them the
privileges granted by the Friendly Societies Act, and according to them the
additional privileges (very valuable at that time) of exemption from the
usury laws, simplicity in forms of conveyance, power to reconvey by a mere
endorsement under the hands of the trustees for the time being, and
exemption from stamp duty. This act remained unaltered until 1874, when an
act was passed at the instance of the building societies conferring upon
them several other privileges, and relieving them of some disabilities and
doubts, which had grown up from the judicial expositions of the act of
1836. It made future building societies incorporated bodies, and extended
the privilege of incorporation to existing societies upon application, so
that members and all who derive title through them were relieved from
having to trace that title through the successive trustees of a society. It
also gave a distinct declaration to the members of entire freedom from
liability to pay anything beyond the arrears due from them at the time of
winding up, or the amount actually secured by their mortgage deeds. Power
to borrow money was also expressly given to the societies by the act, but
upon two conditions: that the limitation of liability must be made known to
the lender, by being printed on the acknowledgment for the loan, and that
the borrowed money must not exceed two-thirds of the amount secured by
mortgage from the members, or, in a terminating society, one year's income
from subscriptions. Previous to the passing of the act (or rather to the
judicial decision in _Laing_ v. _Read_, which the clause of the act made
statutory) there had been, on the one hand, grave doubts on high legal
authority whether a society could borrow money at all; while, on the other
hand, many societies in order to raise funds carried on the business of
deposit banks to an extent far exceeding the amounts used by them for their
legitimate purpose of investment on mortgage. It enacted, that if a society
borrowed more than the statute authorizes, the directors accepting the loan
should be personally [v.04 p.0712] responsible for the excess. By an act
passed in 1894 all the Benefit Building Societies established under the act
of 1836 after the year 1856 were required to become incorporated under the
act of 1874.

There are, therefore, three categories of building societies:--(1) Those
established before 1856, which have not been incorporated under the act of
1874 and remain under the act of 1836. (2) Those established before 1874
under the act of 1836, which have been incorporated under the act of 1874.
(3) Those which have been established since the act of 1874 was passed. The
first class still act by means of trustees. Of these societies there are
only 62 remaining in existence, and their number cannot be increased. The
second and third classes exceed 2000 in number.

The early societies were all "terminating,"--consisting of a limited number
of members, and coming to an end as soon as every member had received the
amount agreed upon as the value of his shares. Take, as a simple typical
example of the working of such a society, one the shares of which are L120
each, realizable by subscriptions of 10s. a month during 14 years. Fourteen
years happens to be nearly the time in which, at 5% compound interest, a
sum of money becomes doubled. Hence the present value, at the commencement
of the society, of the L120 to be realized at its conclusion, or (what is
the same thing) of the subscriptions of 10s. a month by which that L120 is
to be raised, is L60. If such a society had issued 120 shares, the
aggregate subscriptions for the first month of its existence would amount
to exactly the sum required to pay one member the present value of one
share. One member would accordingly receive a sum down of L60, and in order
to protect the other members from loss, would execute a mortgage of his
dwelling-house for ensuring the payment of the future subscription of 10s.
per month until every member had in like manner obtained an advance upon
his shares, or accumulated the L120 per share. As L60 is not of itself
enough to buy a house, even of the most modest kind, every member desirous
of using the society for its original purpose of obtaining a dwelling-house
by its means would require to take more than one share. The act of 1836
limited the amount of each share to L150, and the amount of the monthly
contributions on each share to L1, but did not limit the number of shares a
member might hold.

The earlier formed societies (in London at least) did not usually adopt the
title "Building Society"; or they added to it some further descriptive
title, as "Accumulating Fund," "Savings Fund," or "Investment Association."
Several are described as "Societies for obtaining freehold property," or
simply as "Mutual Associations," or "Societies of Equality." The building
societies in Scotland are mostly called "Property Investment," or
"Economic." Although the term "Benefit Building Society" occurs in the
title to the act of 1836, it was not till 1849 that it became in England
the sole distinctive name of these societies; and it cannot be said to be a
happy description of them, for as ordinarily constituted they undertake no
building operations whatever, and merely advance money to their members to
enable them to build or to buy dwelling-houses or land.

The name "Building Society," too, leaves wholly out of sight the important
functions these societies fulfil as means of investment of small savings.
The act of 1836 defined them as societies to enable every member to receive
the amount or value of a share or shares to erect or purchase a
dwelling-house, &c., but a member who did not desire to erect or purchase a
dwelling-house might still receive out of the funds of the society the
amount or value of his shares, improved by the payments of interest made by
those to whom shares had been advanced.

About 1846 an important modification of the system of these societies was
introduced, by the invention of the "permanent" plan, which was adopted by
a great number of the societies established after that date. It was seen
that these societies really consist of two classes of members; that those
who do not care to have, or have not yet received, an advance upon mortgage
security are mere investors, and that it matters little when they commence
investing, or to what amount; while those to whom advances have been made
are really debtors to the society, and arrangements for enabling them to
pay off their debt in various terms of years, according to their
convenience, would be of advantage both to themselves and the society. By
permitting members to enter at any time without back-payment, and by
granting advances for any term of years agreed upon, a continuous inflow of
funds, and a continuous means of profitable investment of them, would be
secured. The interest of each member in the society would terminate when
his share was realized, or his advance paid off, but the society would
continue with the accruing subscriptions of other members employed in
making other advances.

Under this system building societies largely increased and developed. The
royal commissioners who inquired into the subject in 1872 estimated the
total assets of the societies in 1870 at 17 millions, and their annual
income at 11 millions. The more complete returns, afterwards obtained,
indicate that this was an under-estimate.

A variety of the terminating class of societies met at one time with
considerable favour under the name of "Starr Bowkett" or "mutual"
societies, of which more than a thousand were established. They differed
from the typical society above described, in the contribution of a member
who had not received an advance being much smaller, while the amount of the
advance was much larger, and it was made without any calculation of
interest. Thus a society issued, say, 500 shares, on which the
contributions were to be 1s. 3d. per week, and, as soon as a sum of L300
accumulated allotted it by ballot to one of the shareholders, on condition
that he was to repay it without interest by instalments in 10 or 121/2 years,
and at the same time to keep up his share-contributions. The fortunate
recipient of the appropriation was at liberty to sell it, and frequently
did so at a profit; but (except from fines) no profit whatever was earned
by those who did not succeed in getting an appropriation, and as the number
of members successful in the ballot must necessarily be small in the
earlier years of the society, the others frequently became discontented and
retired. These societies could not borrow money, for as they received no
interest they could not pay any. The plan was afterwards modified by
granting the appropriations alternately by ballot and sale, so that by the
premiums paid on the sales (which are the same in effect as payments of
interest on the amount actually advanced) profits might be earned for the
investing members. The formation of societies of this class ceased on the
passing of the act of 1894, by which balloting for advances was prohibited
in societies thereafter established. A further modification of the "mutual"
plan was to make all the appropriations by sale. The effect of this was to
bring the mutual society back to the ordinary form; for it amounts to
precisely the same thing for a man to pay 10s. a month on a loan of L60 for
14 years, as for him to borrow a nominal sum of L84 for the same period,
repayable in the same manner, but to allow L24 off the loan as a "bidding"
at the sale. The only difference between the two classes of societies is
that the interest which the member pays who bids for his advance depends on
the amount of competition at the bidding, and is not fixed by a rule of the
society.

For several years the progress of building societies in general was steady,
but there were not wanting signs that their prosperity was unsubstantial. A
practice of receiving deposits repayable at call had sprung up, which must
lead to embarrassment where the funds are invested in loans repayable
during a long term of years. It was surmised, if not actually known, that
many societies had large amounts of property on their hands, which had been
reduced into possession in consequence of the default of borrowers in
paying their instalments. A practice had also grown up of establishing
mushroom societies, which did little more than pay fees to the promoters.
The vicious system of trafficking in advances that had been awarded by
ballot, near akin to gambling, prevailed in many societies. These signs of
weakness had been observed by the well-informed, and the disastrous failure
of a large society incorporated under [v.04 p.0713] the act of 1874, the
Liberator, which had in fact long ceased to do any genuine building society
business, hastened the crisis.

This society had drawn funds to the amount of more than a million sterling
from provident people in [Sidenote: The "Liberator."] all classes of the
population and all parts of the country by specious representations, and
had applied those funds not to the legitimate purpose of a building
society, but to the support of other undertakings in which the same persons
were concerned who were the active managers of the society. The consequence
was that the whole group of concerns became insolvent (Oct. 1892), and the
Liberator depositors and shareholders were defrauded of every penny of
their investments. Many of them suffered great distress from the loss of
their savings, and some were absolutely ruined. The result was to weaken
confidence in building societies generally, and this was very marked in the
rapid decline of the amount of the capital of the incorporated building
societies. From its highest point (nearly 54 millions) reached in 1887, it
fell to below 43 millions in 1895. On some societies, which had adopted the
deposit system, a run was made, and several were unable to stand it. The
Birkbeck Society was for two days besieged by an anxious crowd of
depositors clamouring to withdraw their money; but luckily for that
society, and for the building societies generally, a very large portion of
its funds was invested in easily convertible securities, and it was enabled
by that means to get sufficient assistance from the Bank of England to pay
without a moment's hesitation every depositor who asked for his money. Its
credit was so firmly established by this means that many persons sought to
pay money in. Had this very large society succumbed, the results would have
been disastrous to the whole body of building societies. As the case stood,
the energetic means it adopted to save its own credit reacted in favour of
the societies generally.

The Liberator disaster convinced everybody that something must be done
towards avoiding such calamities in the future. The government of the day
brought in a bill for that purpose, and several private members also
prepared measures--most of them more stringent than the government bill.
All the bills were referred to a select committee, of which Mr Herbert
Gladstone was the chairman. As the result of the deliberations of the
committee, the Building Societies Act of 1894 was passed. Meanwhile the Rt.
Hon. W.L. Jackson (afterwards Lord Allerton), a member of the committee,
moved for an address to the crown for a return of the property held in
possession by building societies. This was the first time such a return had
been called for, and the managers of the societies much resented it; there
were no means of enforcing the return, and the consequence was that many
large societies failed to make it, notwithstanding frequent applications by
the registrar. The act provided that henceforth all incorporated societies
should furnish returns in a prescribed form, including schedules showing
respectively the mortgages for amounts exceeding L5000; the properties of
which the societies had taken possession for more than twelve months
through default of the mortgagors; and the mortgages which were more than
twelve months in arrear of repayment subscription. The act did not come
into operation till the 1st of January 1895, and the first complete return
under it was not due till 1896, when it appeared that the properties in
possession at the time of Mr Jackson's return must have been counted for at
least seven and a half millions in the assets of the societies. In a few
years after the passing of the act the societies reduced their properties
in possession from 14% of the whole of the mortgages to 5%, or, in other
words, reduced them to one-third of the original amount, from 71/2 millions
to 21/2 millions. Though this operation must have been attended with some
sacrifice in many societies, upon the whole the balance of profit has
increased rather than diminished. Thus this provision of the act, though it
greatly alarmed the managers of societies, was really a blessing in
disguise. The act also gave power to the registrar, upon the application of
ten members, to order an inspection of the books of a society, but it did
not confer upon individual members the right to inspect the books, which
would have been more effective. It empowered the registrar, upon the
application of one-fifth of the members, to order an inspection upon oath
into the affairs of a society, or to investigate its affairs with a view to
dissolution, and even in certain cases to proceed without an application
from members. It gave him ample powers to deal with a society which upon
such investigation proved to be insolvent, and these were exercised so as
to procure the cheap and speedy dissolution of such societies. It also
prohibited the future establishment of societies making advances by ballot,
or dependent on any chance or lot, and provided an easy method by which
existing societies could discontinue the practice of balloting. This method
has been adopted in a few instances only. The act, or the circumstances
which led to it, has greatly diminished the number of new societies
applying for registry.

The statistics of building societies belonging to all the three classes
mentioned show that there were on the 31st of December 1904, 2118 societies
in existence in the United Kingdom. Of these, 2075, having 609,785 members,
made returns. Their gross receipts for the financial year were L38,729,009,
and the amount advanced on mortgage during the year was L9,589,864. The
capital belonging to their members was L39,408,430, and the undivided
balance of profit L4,004,547. Their liabilities to depositors and other
creditors were L24,838,290. To meet this they had mortgages on which
L53,196,112 was due, but of this L2,443,255 was on properties which had
been in possession more than a year, and L222,444 on mortgages which had
fallen into arrear more than a year. Their other assets were L14,952,485,
and certain societies showed a deficit balance which in the aggregate was
L102,670. As compared with 1895, when first returns were obtained from
unincorporated societies, these figures show an increase in income of 30%,
in assets of 23%, and in profit balances of 46%, and a diminution of the
properties in possession and mortgages in arrear of 14% in the nine years.
The total assets and income are more than three times the amount of the
conjectural estimate made for 1870 by the royal commission. It is not too
much to say that a quarter of a million persons have been enabled by means
of building societies to become the proprietors of their own homes.

In recent years, several rivals to building societies have sprung up.
Friendly societies have largely taken to investing their surplus funds in
loans to members on the building society principle. Industrial and
provident land and building societies have been formed. The legislature has
authorized local authorities to lend money to the working classes to enable
them to buy their dwelling-houses. Bond and investment companies have been
formed under the Companies Acts, and are under no restriction as to
balloting for appropriation. All these have not yet had any perceptible
effect in checking the growth of the building society movement, and it is
not thought that they will permanently do so.

_British Colonies._--In several of the British colonies, legislation
similar to that of the mother country has been adopted. In Victoria,
Australia, a crisis occurred, in which many building societies suffered
severely. In the other Australian colonies the building society movement
has made progress, but not to a very large extent. In the Dominion of
Canada these societies are sometimes called "loan companies" and are not
restricted in their investments to loans on real estates, but about 90% of
their advances are on that security. At the close of the year 1904 their
liabilities to stockholders exceeded L13,000,000, and to the public
L21,000,000. The uncalled capital was L5,000,000. The balance of current
loans was L28,000,000, and the property owned by the societies exceeded
L7,000,000.

_Belgium, &c._--In Belgium, the Government Savings Bank has power to make
advances of money to societies of credit or of construction to enable their
members to become owners of dwelling-houses. The advance is made to the
society at 3 or sometimes at 21/2% interest, and the borrower pays 4%. In the
great majority of cases the borrower effects an insurance with the savings
bank so that his repayments terminate at his death. On the 31st of December
1903 nearly 25,000 advances were in course of repayment. In Germany,
building societies are recognized as a form of societies for self-help, but
are not many in number, being overshadowed by the great organization of
credit societies founded by Schulze-Delitzsch. In other countries there has
been no special legislation for building societies similar to that of the
United Kingdom, and though societies with the same special object probably
exist, separate information with regard to them is not available.

(E. W. B.)

_United States._--"Building and loan association" is a general term applied
in the United States to such institutions as mutual loan associations,
homestead aid associations, savings fund and loan associations,
co-operative banks, co-operative savings and loan associations, &c. They
are private corporations, for the accumulation of savings, and for the
loaning of money to build homes. The first association of this kind in the
United States of which there is any record was organized at Frankford, a
suburb [v.04 p.0714] of Philadelphia, on the 3rd of January 1831, under the
title of the Oxford Provident Building Association. Their permanent
inception took place between 1840 and 1850. The receipts or capital of the
building and loan association consists of periodical payments by the
members, interest and premiums paid by borrowing members or others, fixed
periodical instalments by borrowing members, fines for failures to pay such
fixed instalments, forfeitures, fees for transferring stock, entrance fees,
and any other revenues or payments,--all of which go into the common
treasury. When the instalment payments and profits of all kinds equal the
face value of all the shares issued, the assets, over and above expenses
and losses, are apportioned among members, and this apportionment cancels
the borrower's debt, while the non-borrower is given the amount of his
stock. A man who wishes to borrow, let us say, $1000 for the erection of a
house ordinarily takes five shares in an association, each of which, when
he has paid all the successive instalments on it, will be worth $200, and
he must offer suitable security for his loan, usually the lot on which he
is to build. The money is not lent to him at regular rates of interest, as
in the case of a savings bank or other financial institution, but is put up
at auction usually in open meeting at the time of the payment of dues, and
is awarded to the member bidding the highest premium. To secure the $1000
borrowed, the member gives the association a mortgage on his property and
pledges his five shares of stock. Some associations, when the demand for
money from the shareholders does not exhaust the surplus, lend their funds
to persons not shareholders, upon such terms and conditions as may be
approved by their directors. Herein lies a danger, for such loans are
sometimes made in a speculative way, or on insufficient land value. Some
associations make stock loans, or loans on the shares held by a stockholder
without real estate security; these vary in different associations, some
applying the same rules as to real estate loans. To cancel his debt the
stockholder is constantly paying his monthly or semi-monthly dues, until
such time as these payments, plus the accumulation of profits through
compound interest, mature the shares at $200 each, when he surrenders his
shares, and the debt upon his property is cancelled.

Every member of a building and loan association must be a stockholder, and
the amount of interest which a member has in a [Sidenote: Shares.] building
and loan association is indicated by the number of shares he holds, the age
of the shares, and their maturing value. The difference between a
stockholder in such an association and one in an ordinary corporation for
usual business purposes lies in the fact that in the latter the member or
stockholder buys his stock and pays for it at once, and as a rule is not
called upon for further payment; all profits on such stocks are received
through dividends, the value of shares depending upon the successful
operation of the business. In the former the stockholder or member pays a
stipulated minimum sum, say $1, when he takes his membership and buys a
share of stock. He continues to pay a like sum each month until the
aggregate of sums paid, increased by the profits and all other sources of
income, amounts to the maturing value of the stock, usually $200, when the
stockholder is entitled to the full maturing value of the share and
surrenders the same. Shares are usually issued in series. When a second
series is issued the issue of the stock of the first series ceases. Profits
are distributed and losses apportioned before a new series can be issued.
The term during which a series is open for subscription differs, but it
usually extends over three or six months, and sometimes a year. Some
associations, usually known as perpetual associations, issue a new series
of stock without regard to the time of maturity of previous issues. It is
the practice in such associations to issue a new series of stock every
year. Instead of shares that are paid in instalments, some associations
issue prepaid shares and paid-up shares. _Prepaid shares_, known also as
partly paid-up shares, are issued at a fixed price per share in advance.
They usually participate as fully in the profits as the regular instalment
shares, and when the amount originally paid for such shares, together with
the dividends accrued thereon, reaches the maturing or par value, they are
disposed of in the same manner as regular instalment shares. Some
associations, instead of crediting all the profits made on this class of
shares, allow a fixed rate of interest on the amount paid therefor at each
dividend period, which is paid in cash to the holder thereof. This interest
is then deducted from the profits to which the shares are entitled, and the
remainder is credited to the shares until such unpaid portion of the
profits, added to the amount originally paid, equals the maturing or par
value. _Paid-up shares_ are issued upon the payment of the full maturity or
par value, when a certificate of paid-up stock is issued, the owners being
entitled to receive in cash the amount of all dividends declared thereon,
subject to such conditions or limitations as may be agreed upon. These
shares sometimes participate as fully in the profits as the regular
instalment shares, but in most cases a fixed rate of interest only is
allowed, the holders of the shares usually assigning to the association all
right to profits above that amount. Certificates of matured shares are also
issued to holders of regular instalment shares, who prefer to leave their
money with the association as an investment.

Prior to the maturing of a share it has two values, the holding or book
value and the withdrawal value. The book value is ascertained by adding all
the dues that have been paid to the profits that have accrued; that is to
say, it is the actual value of a share at any particular time. The
withdrawal value is that amount of the book value which the association is
willing to pay to a shareholder who desires to sever his connexion with the
association before his share is matured. Some associations do not permit
their members to withdraw prior to the maturing of their shares. Then the
only way a shareholder can realize upon his shares is by selling them to
some other person at whatever price he can obtain. There are twelve or more
plans for the withdrawal of funds. Every association has full regulations
on all such matters.

The purchase of a share binds the shareholder to the necessity of keeping
up his dues, and thus secures to him not only the benefits [Sidenote:
Variations in methods.] of a savings bank, but the benefit of constantly
accruing compound interest. This accomplishes the first feature of the
motive of a building and loan association. The second is accomplished by
enabling a man to borrow money for building purposes. It is a moot question
whether this method of obtaining money for the building of homes is more or
less economical than that of obtaining it from the ordinary savings banks
or from other sources. Sometimes the premium which must be paid to secure a
loan increases the regular interest to such an amount as to make the
building and loan method more expensive than the ordinary method of
borrowing money, but a building and loan association has a moral influence
upon its members, in that it encourages a regular payment of instalments.
Some associations have a fixed or established premium rate, and under such
circumstances loans are awarded to the members in the order of their
applications or by lot. The premium may consist of the amount which the
borrower pays in excess of the legal interest, or it may consist of a
certain number of payments of dues or of interest to be made in advance.
There are very many plans for the payment of premiums, nearly seventy
relating to real estate loans being in vogue in different associations in
different parts of the United States; but in nearly all cases the borrower
makes his regular payments of dues and interest until the shares pledged
have reached maturing value. There is also a great variety of plans for the
distribution of profits, something like twenty-five such plans being in
existence. The methods of calculating interest and profits are somewhat
complicated, but they are all found in the books to which reference will be
made. The various plans for the payment of premiums, distribution of
profits, and withdrawals, and the calculations under each, are given in
full in the ninth annual report of the U.S. commissioner of labour.

Most building and loan associations confine their operations to a small
community, usually to the county in which they are situated; but some of
them operate on a large scale, extending their business enterprises even
beyond the borders of their own state. These national associations are
ready to make loans on property anywhere, and sell their shares to any
person without reference to his residence. In local associations the total
amount of dues paid in by the shareholders forms the basis for the
distribution of profits, while in most national associations only a portion
of the dues paid in by the shareholders is considered in the distribution.
For instance, in a national association the dues are generally 60 cents a
share per month, out of which either 8 or 10 cents are carried to an
expense fund, the remainder being credited on the loan fund. The expense
fund thus created is lost to the shareholders, except in the case of a few
associations which carry the unexpended balances to the profit and loss
account, and whatever profits are made are apportioned on the amount of
dues credited to the loan fund only. The creation of an expense fund in the
nationals has sometimes been the source of disaster. Safety or security in
both local and national associations depends principally upon the integrity
with which their affairs are conducted, and not so much upon the form of
organization or the method of distribution. Some of the states--New York,
Massachusetts, New Jersey, Ohio, Illinois, California and others--bring
building and loan associations under the same general supervision of law
thrown around savings banks. In some states nothing is officially known of
them beyond the formalities of their incorporation. Though the business of
the associations is conducted by men not trained as bankers, it yet meets
with rare success. Associations disband when not successful, but when they
disband great loss does not occur because the whole business of the
association consists of its loans, and these loans are to its own
shareholders, as a rule, who hold the securities in their associated forms.
The amount of money on hand is always small, because it is sold or lent as
fast as paid in. A disbanded association, therefore, simply returns to its
own members their own property, and but few real losses occur. Investment
in a building and loan association is as nearly absolutely [v.04 p.0715]
safe as it can be, for the monthly dues and the accumulated profits, which
give the actual capital of the association, are lent or sold, as it is
termed, by the association as fast as they accumulate, and upon real estate
or upon the stock of the association itself. The opportunities for
embezzlement, therefore, or for shrinkage of securities, are reduced to the
minimum, and an almost absolute safety of the investment is secured.

The growth of these associations has been very rapid since 1840, and at the
opening of the 20th century they numbered nearly 6000. The Federal
government, through the department of labour, made an investigation of
building and loan associations, and published its report in 1893. The total
dues paid in on instalment shares amounted then to $450,667,594. The
business represented by this great sum, conducted quietly, with little or
no advertising, and without the experienced banker in charge, shows that
the common people, in their own ways, are quite competent to take care of
their savings, especially when it was shown that but thirty-five of the
associations then in existence met with a net loss at the end of their
latest fiscal year, and that this loss amounted to only a little over
$23,000. Bulletin No. 10 (May 1897) of the U.S. department of labour
contained a calculation of the business at that date, based upon such
states' reports as were available. That calculation showed a growth in
almost every item. During the years of depression ending with 1899 the
growth of building and loan associations was naturally slower than in
prosperous periods.

See _Ninth Annual Report of U.S.A. Commissioner of Labour_ (1893);
_Bulletin_, No. 10 (May 1897), of the Department of Labour; Edmund Rigley,
_How to manage Building Associations_ (1873); Seymour Dexter, _A Treatise
on Co-operation Savings and Loan Associations_ (New York, 1891); Charles N.
Thompson, _A Treatise on Building Associations_ (Chicago, 1892).

(C. D. W.)

BUILTH, or BUILTH WELLS, a market town of Brecknockshire, Wales. Pop. of
urban district (1901), 1805. It has a station on the Cambrian line between
Moat Lane and Brecon, and two others (high and low levels) at Builth Road
about 13/4 m. distant where the London & North-Western and the Cambrian cross
one another. It is pleasantly situated in the upper valley of the Wye, in a
bend of the river on its right bank below the confluence of its tributary
the Irfon. During the summer it is a place of considerable resort for the
sake of its waters--saline, chalybeate and sulphur--and it possesses the
usual accessories of pump-rooms, baths and a recreation ground. The scenery
of the Wye valley, including a succession of rapids just above the town,
also attracts many tourists. The town is an important agricultural centre,
its fairs for sheep and ponies in particular being well attended.

The town, called in Welsh Llanfair (yn) Muallt, i.e. St Mary's in Builth,
took its name from the ancient territorial division of Buallt in which it
is situated, which was, according to Nennius, an independent principality
in the beginning of the 9th century, and later a cantrev, corresponding to
the modern hundred of Builth. Towards the end of the 11th century, when the
tide of Norman invasion swept upwards along the Wye valley, the district
became a lordship marcher annexed to that of Brecknock, but was again
severed from it on the death of William de Breos, when his daughter Matilda
brought it to her husband, Roger Mortimer of Wigmore. Its castle, built
probably in Newmarch's time, or shortly after, was the most advanced
outpost of the invaders in a wild part of Wales where the tendency to
revolt was always strong. It was destroyed in 1260 by Llewellyn ab
Gruffydd, prince of Wales, with the supposed connivance of Mortimer, but
its site was reoccupied by the earl of Lincoln in 1277, and a new castle at
once erected. It was with the expectation that he might, with local aid,
seize the castle, that Llewellyn invaded this district in December 1282,
when he was surprised and killed by Stephen de Frankton in a ravine called
Cwm Llewellyn on the left bank of the Irfon, 21/2 m. from the town. According
to local tradition he was buried at Cefn-y-bedd ("the ridge of the grave")
close by, but it is more likely that his headless trunk was taken to Abbey
Cwmhir. No other important event was associated with the castle, of which
not a stone is now standing. The lordship remained in the marches till the
Act of Union 1536, when it was grouped with a number of others so as to
form the shire of Brecknock. The town was governed by a local board from
1866 until the establishment of an urban district council in 1894; the
urban district was then made conterminous with the civil parish, and in
1898 it was re-named Builth Wells.

BUISSON, FERDINAND (1841- ), French educationalist, was born at Paris on
the 20th of December 1841. In 1868, when attached to the teaching staff of
the Academy of Geneva, he obtained a philosophical fellowship. In 1870 he
settled in Paris, and in the following year was nominated an inspector of
primary education. His appointment was, however, strongly opposed by the
bishop of Orleans (who saw danger to clerical influence over the schools),
and the nomination was cancelled. But the bishop's action only served to
draw attention to Buisson's abilities. He was appointed secretary of the
statistical commission on primary education, and sent as a delegate to the
Vienna exhibition of 1873, and the Philadelphia exhibition of 1876. In 1878
he was instructed to report on the educational section of the Paris
exhibition, and in the same year was appointed inspector-general of primary
education. In 1879 he was promoted to the directorship of primary
education, a post which he occupied until 1896, when he became professor of
education at the Sorbonne. At the general election of 1902 he was returned
to the chamber of deputies as a radical socialist by the XIII^{me}
arrondissement of Paris. He supported the policy of M. Combes, and presided
over the commission for the separation of church and state.

BUITENZORG, a hill station in the residency of Batavia, island of Java,
Dutch East Indies. It is beautifully situated among the hills at the foot
of the Salak volcano, about 860 ft. above sea-level, and has a cool and
healthy climate. Buitenzorg is the usual residence of the governor-general
of the Dutch East Indies, and is further remarkable on account of its
splendid botanical garden and for its popularity as a health resort. The
botanic gardens are among the finest in the world; they originally formed a
part of the park attached to the palace of the governor-general, and were
established in 1817. Under J.S. Teysmann, who became _hortulanus_ in 1830,
the collection was extended, and in 1868 was recognized as a government
institution with a director. Between this and 1880 a museum, a school of
agriculture, and a culture garden were added, and since then library,
botanical, chemical, and pharmacological laboratories, and a herbarium have
been established. The palace of the governor-general was founded by
Governor-General van Imhoff in 1744, and rebuilt after being destroyed by
an earthquake in 1834. Buitenzorg is also the seat of the general secretary
of the state railway and of the department of mines. Buitenzorg, which is
called Bogor by the natives, was once the capital of the princess of
Pajajaram. Close by, at _Bata Tulis_ ("inscribed stone"), are some Hindu
remains. The district of Buitenzorg (till 1866 an assistant residency)
forms the southern part of the residency of Batavia, with an area of 1447
sq. m. It occupies the northern slopes of a range of hills separating it
from Preanger, and has a fertile soil. Tea, coffee, cinchona, sugar-cane,
rice, nutmegs, cloves and pepper are cultivated.

BUJN[=U]RD, a town of Persia, in the province of Khorasan, in a fertile
plain encompassed by hills, in 37 deg. 29' N., 57 deg. 21' E., at an elevation of
3600 ft. Pop. about 8000. Its old name was Buzinjird, and thus it still
appears in official registers. It is the chief place of the district of
same name, which extends in the west to the borders of Shahrud and
Astarabad; in the north it is bounded by Russian Transcaspia, in the east
by Kuchan, and in the south by Jovain. The greater part of the population
consists of Shadillu Kurds, the remainder being Zafranlu Kurds, Garaili
Turks, Goklan Turkomans and Persians.

BUKH[=A]R[=I] [Mahommed ibn Ism[=a]'[=i]l al-Bukh[=a]r[=i]] (810-872),
Arabic author of the most generally accepted collection of traditions
(_[h.]ad[=i]th_) from Mahomet, was born at Bokhara (_Bukh[=a]r[=a]_), of an
Iranian family, in A.H. 194 (A.D. 810). He early distinguished himself in
the learning of traditions by heart, and when, in his sixteenth year, his
family made the pilgrimage to Mecca, he gathered additions to his store
from the authorities along the route. Already, in his eighteenth year, he
had devoted himself to the collecting, sifting, testing and arranging of
traditions. For that purpose he travelled over the Moslem world, from Egypt
to Samarkand, and learned (as the story goes) from over a thousand men
three hundred thousand traditions, true and false. He certainly became the
acknowledged authority on the subject, and developed a power and speed of
memory [v.04 p.0716] which seemed miraculous, even to his contemporaries.
His theological position was conservative and anti-rationalistic; he
enjoyed the friendship and respect of A[h.]mad Ibn [H.]anbal. In law, he
appears to have been a Sh[=a]fi'ite. After sixteen years' absence he
returned to Bokhara, and there drew up his _[S.]a[h.][=i][h.]_, a
collection of 7275 tested traditions, arranged in chapters so as to afford
bases for a complete system of jurisprudence without the use of speculative
law, the first book of its kind (see MAHOMMEDAN LAW). He died in A.H. 256,
in banishment at Kartank, a suburb of Samarkand. His book has attained a
quasi-canonicity in Isl[=a]m, being treated almost like the Koran, and to
his grave solemn pilgrimages are made, and prayers are believed to be heard
there.

See F. Wuestenfeld, _Sch[=a]fi'iten_, 78 ff.; M^cG. de Slane's transl. of
Ibn Khallikan, i. 594 ff.; I. Goldziher, _Mohammedanische Studien_, ii. 157
ff.; Nawawi, _Biogr. Dict._ 86 ff.

(D. B. MA.)

BUKOVINA, a duchy and crownland of Austria, bounded E. by Russia and
Rumania, S. by Rumania, W. by Transylvania and Hungary, and N. by Galicia.
Area, 4035 sq. m. The country, especially in its southern parts, is
occupied by the offshoots of the Carpathians, which attain in the Giumaleu
an altitude of 6100 ft. The principal passes are the Radna Pass and the
Borgo Pass. With the exception of the Dniester, which skirts its northern
border, Bukovina belongs to the watershed of the Danube. The principal
rivers are the Pruth, and the Sereth with its affluents the Suczawa, the
Moldava and the Bistritza. The climate of Bukovina is healthy but severe,
especially in winter; but it is generally milder than that of Galicia, the
mean annual temperature at Czernowitz being 46.9 deg. F. No less than 43.17% of
the total area is occupied by woodland, and the very name of the country is
derived from the abundance of beech trees. Of the remainder 27.59% is
occupied by arable land, 12.68% by meadows, 10.09% by pastures and 0.78% by
gardens. The soil of Bukovina is fertile, and agriculture has made great
progress, the principal products being wheat, maize, rye, oats, barley,
potatoes, flax and hemp. Cattle-rearing constitutes another important
source of revenue. The principal mineral is salt, which is extracted at the
mine of Kaczyka, belonging to the government. Brewing, distilling and
milling are the chief industries. Commerce is mostly in the hands of the
Jews and Armenians, and chiefly confined to raw products, such as
agricultural produce, cattle, wool and wood. Bukovina had in 1900 a
population of 729,921, which is equivalent to 181 inhabitants per sq. m.
According to nationality, over 40% were Ruthenians, 35% Rumanians, 13%
Jews, and the remainder was composed of Germans, Poles, Hungarians,
Russians and Armenians. The official language of the administration, of the
law-courts, and of instruction in the university is German. Nearly 70% of
the population belong to the Greek Orthodox Church, and stand under the
ecclesiastical jurisdiction of the archbishop or metropolitan of
Czernowitz. To the Roman Catholic Church belong 11%, to the Greek United
Church 3.25%, while 2.5% are Protestants. Elementary education is
improving, but, after Dalmatia, Bukovina still shows the largest number of
illiterates in Austria. The local diet, of which the archbishop of
Czernowitz and the rector of the university are members _ex officio_, is
composed of 31 members, and Bukovina sends 14 deputies to the Reichsrat at
Vienna. For administrative purposes, the country is divided into 9
districts and an autonomous municipality, Czernowitz (pop. 69,619), the
capital. Other towns are Radautz (14,343), Suczawa (10,946), Kuczurmare
(9417), Kimpolung (8024) and Sereth (7610).

Bukovina was originally a part of the principality of Moldavia, whose
ancient capital Suczawa was situated in this province. It was occupied by
the Russians in 1769, and by the Austrians in 1774. In 1777 the Porte,
under whose suzerainty Moldavia was, ceded this province to Austria. It was
incorporated with Galicia in a single province in 1786, but was separated
from it in 1849, and made a separate crownland.

See Bidermann, _Die Bukowina unter der osterreichischen Verwaltung,
1775-1875_ (Lemberg, 1876).

BULACAN, a town of the province of Bulacan, Luzon, Philippine Islands, on
an arm of the Pampanga delta, 22 m. N.N.W. of Manila. Pop. (1903) 11,589;
after the census enumeration, the town of Guiguinto (pop. 3948) was
annexed. Bulacan is served by the Manila-Dagupan railway. Sugar, rice,
indigo and tropical fruits are the chief products of the fertile district
in which the town lies; it is widely known for its fish-ponds and its
excellent fish, and its principal manufactures are jusi, pina, ilang ilang
perfume and sugar. With the exception of the churches and a few stone
buildings, Bulacan was completely destroyed by fire in 1898.

BULANDSHAHR, a town and district of British India in the Meerut division of
the United Provinces. The town is situated on a height on the right bank of
the Kali-Nadi, whence the substitution of the names Unchanagar and
Bulandshahr (high town) for its earlier name of Baran, by which it is still
sometimes called. The population in 1901 was 18,959. Its present handsome
appearance is due to several successive collectors, notably F.S. Growse,
who was active in erecting public buildings, and in encouraging the local
gentry to beautify their own houses. In particular, it boasts a fine
bathing-ghat, a town-hall, a market-place, a tank to supply water, and a
public garden.

The DISTRICT OF BULANDSHAHR has an area of 1899 sq. m. The district
stretches out in a level plain, with a gentle slope from N.W. to S.E., and
a gradual but very slight elevation about midway between the Ganges and
Jumna. Principal rivers are the Ganges and Jumna--the former navigable all
the year round, the latter only during the rains. The Ganges canal
intersects the district, and serves both for irrigation and navigation. The
Lower Ganges canal has its headworks at Narora. The climate of the district
is liable to extremes, being very cold in the winter and excessively hot in
the summer. In 1901 the population was 1,138,101, showing an increase of
20% in the decade. The district is very highly cultivated and thickly
populated. There are several indigo factories, and mills for pressing and
cleaning cotton, but the former have greatly suffered by the decline in
indigo of recent years. The main line of the East Indian railway and the
Oudh and Rohilkhand railway cross the district. The chief centre of trade
is Khurja.

Nothing certain is known of the history of the district before A.D. 1018,
when Mahmud of Ghazni appeared before Baran and received the submission of
the Hindu raja and his followers to Islam. In 1193 the city was captured by
Kutb-ud-din. In the 14th century the district was subject to invasions of
Rajput and Mongol clans who left permanent settlements in the country. With
the firm establishment of the Mogul empire peace was restored, the most
permanent effect of this period being the large proportion of Mussulmans
among the population, due to the zeal of Aurangzeb. The decline of the
Mogul empire gave free play to the turbulent spirit of the Jats and Gujars,
many of whose chieftains succeeded in carving out petty principalities for
themselves at the expense of their neighbours. During this period, however,
Baran had properly no separate history, being a dependency of Koil, whence
it continued to be administered under the Mahratta domination. After Koil
and the fort of Aligarh had been captured by the British in 1803,
Bulandshahr and the surrounding country were at first incorporated in the
newly created district of Aligarh (1805). Bulandshahr enjoyed an evil
reputation in the Mutiny of 1857, when the Gujar peasantry plundered the
towns. The Jats took the side of the government, while the Gujars and
Mussulman Rajputs were most actively hostile.

See _Imperial Gazetteer of India_ (Oxford, ed. 1908); F.S. Growse,
_Bulandshahr_ (Benares, 1884).

BULAWAYO, the capital of Matabeleland, the western province of southern
Rhodesia, South Africa. White population (1904) 3840. It occupies a central
position on the tableland between the Limpopo and Zambezi rivers, is 4469
ft. above the sea and 1362 m. north-east of Cape Town by rail. Beira, the
nearest port, is 398 m. east in a direct line, but distant 675 m. by
railway. Another railway, part of the Cape to Cairo connexion, runs
north-west from Bulawayo, crossing the Zambezi just below the Victoria
Falls. In the centre of the town is a large market square to which roads
lead in regular lines north, south, east and [v.04 p.0717] west. Those
going east and west are called avenues and are numbered, those running
north and south are called streets and are named. Through the centre of
Market Square runs Rhodes Street. There are many handsome public and
private buildings. In front of the stock exchange is a monument in memory
of the 257 settlers killed in the Matabele rebellion of 1896, and at the
junction of two of the principal streets is a colossal bronze statue of
Cecil Rhodes. East of the town is a large park and botanical gardens,
beyond which is a residential suburb. The railway station and water and
electric supply works are in the south-west quarter. An avenue 130 ft.
broad and nearly 11/2 m. long, planted throughout its length with trees,
leads from the town to Government House, which is built on the site of
Lobengula's royal kraal. The tree under which that chieftain sat when
giving judgment has been preserved. A number of gold reefs intersect the
surrounding district and in some of the reefs gold is mined.
South-south-east of the town are the Matoppo Hills. In a grave in one of
these hills, 33 m. from Bulawayo, Rhodes is buried.

The "Place of Slaughter," as the Zulu word Bulawayo is interpreted, was
founded about 1838 by Lobengula's father, Mosilikatze, some distance south
of the present town, and continued to be the royal residence till its
occupation by the British South Africa Company's forces in November 1893,
when a new town was founded. Four years later the railway connecting it
with Cape Town was completed (see RHODESIA).

BULDANA, a town and district of India, in Berar. The town had a population
in 1901 of 4137. The district has an area of 3662 sq. m. The southern part
forms a portion of Berar Balaghat or Berar--above the Ghats. Here the
general contour of the country may be described as a succession of small
plateaus decreasing in elevation to the extreme south. Towards the eastern
side of the district the country assumes more the character of undulating
high lands, favoured with soil of a good quality. A succession of plateaus
descends from the highest ridges on the north to the south, where a series
of small ghats march with the nizam's territory. The small fertile valleys
between the plateaus are watered by streams during the greater portion of
the year, while wells of particularly good and pure water are numerous.
These valleys are favourite village sites. The north portion of the
district occupies the rich valley of the Purna. The district is rich in
agricultural produce; in a seasonable year a many-coloured sheet of
cultivation, almost without a break, covers the valley of the Purna. In the
Balaghat also the crops are very fine. Situated as the district is in the
neighbourhood of the great cotton market of Khamgaon, and nearer to Bombay
than the other Berar districts, markets for its agricultural produce on
favourable terms are easily found. In 1901 the population was 423,616,
showing a decrease of 12% in the decade due to the effects of famine. The
district was reconstituted, and given an additional area of 853 sq. m. in
1905; the population on the enlarged area in 1901 was 613,756. The only
manufacture is cotton cloth. Cotton, wheat and oil-seeds are largely
exported. The Nagpur line of the Great Indian Peninsula railway runs
through the north of the district. The most important place of trade is
Malkapur--pop. (1901) 13,112--with several factories for ginning and
pressing cotton.

BULDUR, or BURDUR, chief town of a sanjak of the Konia vilayet in Asia
Minor. It is called by the Christians _Polydorion_. Its altitude is 3150
ft. and it is situated in the midst of gardens, about 2 m. from the
brackish lake, Buldur Geul (anc. _Ascania Limne_). Linen-weaving and
leather-tanning are the principal industries. There is a good carriage road
to Dineir, by which much grain is sent from the Buldur plain, and a railway
connects it with Dineir and Egirdir. Pop. 12,000.

BULFINCH, CHARLES (1763-1844), American architect, was born in Boston,
Massachusetts, on the 8th of August 1763, the son of Thomas Bulfinch, a
prominent and wealthy physician. He was educated at the Boston Latin school
and at Harvard, where he graduated in 1781, and after several years of
travel and study in Europe, settled in 1787 in Boston, where he was the
first to practise as a professional architect. Among his early works were
the old Federal Street theatre (1793), the first play-house in New England,
and the "new" State House (1798). For more than twenty-five years he was
the most active architect in Boston, and at the same time took a leading
part in the public life of the city. As chairman of the board of selectmen
for twenty-one years (1797-1818), an important position which made him
practically chief magistrate, he exerted a strong influence in modernizing
Boston, in providing for new systems of drainage and street-lighting, in
reorganizing the police and fire departments, and in straightening and
widening the streets. He was one of the promoters in 1787 of the voyage of
the ship "Columbia," which under command of Captain Robert Gray (1755-1806)
was the first to carry the American flag round the world. In 1818 Bulfinch
succeeded B.H. Latrobe (1764-1820) as architect of the National Capitol at
Washington. He completed the unfinished wings and central portion,
constructing the rotunda from plans of his own after suggestions of his
predecessor, and designed the new western approach and portico. In 1830 he
returned to Boston, where he died on the 15th of April 1844. Bulfinch's
work was marked by sincerity, simplicity, refinement of taste and an entire
freedom from affectation, and it greatly influenced American architecture
in the early formative period. His son, Stephen Greenleaf Bulfinch
(1809-1870), was a well-known Unitarian clergyman and author.

See _The Life and Letters of Charles Bulfinch_ (Boston, 1896), edited by
his grand-daughter, and "The Architects of the American Capitol," by James
Q. Howard, in _The International Review_, vol. i. (New York, 1874).

BULGARIA, a kingdom of south-eastern Europe, situated in the north-east of
the Balkan Peninsula, and on the Black Sea. From 1878 until the 5th of
October 1908, Bulgaria was an autonomous and tributary principality, under
the suzerainty of the sultan of Turkey. The area of the kingdom amounts to
37,240 sq. m., and comprises the territories between the Balkan chain and
the river Danube; the province of Eastern Rumelia, lying south of the
Balkans; and the western highlands of Kiustendil, Samakov, Sofia and Trn.
Bulgaria is bounded on the N. by the Danube, from its confluence with the
Timok to the eastern suburbs of Silistria whence a line, forming the
Rumanian frontier, is drawn to a point on the Black Sea coast 10 m. S. of
Mangalia. On the E. it is washed by the Black Sea; on the S. the Turkish
frontier, starting from a point on the coast about 12 m. S. of Sozopolis,
runs in a south-westerly direction, crossing the river Maritza at Mustafa
Pasha, and reaching the Arda at Adakali. The line laid down by the Berlin
Treaty (1878) ascended the Arda to Ishiklar, thence following the crest of
Rhodope to the westwards, but the cantons of Krjali and Rupchus included in
this boundary were restored to Turkey in 1886. The present frontier,
passing to the north of these districts, reaches the watershed of Rhodope a
little north of the Dospat valley, and then follows the crest of the Rilska
Planina to the summit of Tchrni Vrkh, where the Servian, Turkish and
Bulgarian territories meet. From this point the western or Servian frontier
passes northwards, leaving Trn to the east and Pirot to the west, reaching
the Timok near Kula, and following the course of that river to its junction
with the Danube. The Berlin Treaty boundary was far from corresponding with
the ethnological limits of the Bulgarian race, which were more accurately
defined by the abrogated treaty of San Stefano (see below, under
_History_). A considerable portion of Macedonia, the districts of Pirot and
Vranya belonging to Servia, the northern half of the vilayet of Adrianople,
and large tracts of the Dobrudja, are, according to the best and most
impartial authorities, mainly inhabited by a Bulgarian population.

_Physical Features._--The most striking physical features are two
mountain-chains; the Balkans, which run east and west through the heart of
the country; and Rhodope, which, for a considerable distance, forms its
southern boundary. The Balkans constitute the southern half of the great
semicircular range known as the anti-Dacian system, of which the
Carpathians form the northern portion. This great chain is sundered at the
Iron Gates by the passage of the Danube; its two component parts present
many points of resemblance in their aspect and outline, geological
formation and flora. The Balkans (ancient _Haemus_) run almost parallel to
the Danube, ...

_(continued in part 4)_

       *       *       *       *       *


Corrections made to printed original.

p. 499, History: "It was, however, recovered": 'recoverd' in original

p. 506, 1st para: "the yarrow (Achillea millefolium).": 'Achilloea' in
original

p. 506, 2nd para: "owing partly to licensing legislation": 'lincensing' in
original

p. 507, 2nd para: "The worts of each brewing must be collected": 'much be
collected' in original

p. 541, Lansdowne Bridge: "main members at end of cantilevers":
'centilevers' in original

p. 602, Climate, Flora and Fauna: "constant breeze from the Indian Ocean":
'beeeze' in original

P. 625, Brockville: "situated 119 m. S.W. of Montreal": 'situtated' in
original

p. 635, 5th para: "the embarrassment of breathing": 'embarassment' in
original

p. 671, 1st para: "he conceived an enthusiastic admiration": 'enthusiatic'
in original

P. 703, Marchantiales: "Marchantia polymorpha and Lunularia": 'Marchantia,
polymorpha' in original

p. 707, Fig. 14: "Andreaea petrophila": 'pelrophila' in original

P. 742, Buddhaghosa: "a nearly contemporaneous Chinese translation":
'comtemporaneous' in original






End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Encyclopaedia Britannica, 11th
Edition, Volume 4, Part 3, by Various

*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ENCYCLOPAEDIA BRITANNICA ***

***** This file should be named 19699.txt or 19699.zip *****
This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
        http://www.gutenberg.org/1/9/6/9/19699/

Produced by Don Kretz, Juliet Sutherland, Keith Edkins and
the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at
http://www.pgdp.net


Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
will be renamed.

Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
redistribution.



*** START: FULL LICENSE ***

THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK

To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
http://gutenberg.org/license).


Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic works

1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.

1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works.  See paragraph 1.E below.

1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.

1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
States.

1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:

1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
copied or distributed:

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org

1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
1.E.9.

1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.

1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.

1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
Gutenberg-tm License.

1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.

1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
that

- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."

- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
     License.  You must require such a user to return or
     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
     Project Gutenberg-tm works.

- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
     of receipt of the work.

- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.

1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.

1.F.

1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
your equipment.

1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.

1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
opportunities to fix the problem.

1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.

1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.

1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.


Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm

Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
people in all walks of life.

Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.


Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation

The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.

The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
page at http://pglaf.org

For additional contact information:
     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
     Chief Executive and Director
     gbnewby@pglaf.org


Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation

Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
status with the IRS.

The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
particular state visit http://pglaf.org

While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
approach us with offers to donate.

International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.

Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate


Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works.

Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.


Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.


Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:

     http://www.gutenberg.org

This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
